Volume 7 Ibook
101031-Attachment 101031-Attachment 101031-Attachment 786680 Batch8 unilog cesco-content
101031-Attachment 101031-Attachment 101031-Attachment 782116 Batch8 unilog cesco-content
100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment 782114 Batch10 unilog cesco-content
100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment 782116 Batch10 unilog cesco-content
100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment 786680 Batch10 unilog cesco-content
2014-10-17
: Pdf 100104-Attachment 100104-Attachment Batch10 unilog
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 1004
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 7: Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial Volume 2—Commercial Distribution Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies Volume 4—Circuit Protection Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions Tab 1—Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-1 Tab 2—Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-1 Tab 3—Control Relays and Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-1 Tab 4—PLC, I/O and Communications Products . . . . . . . . V7-T4-1 Tab 5—Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-1 Tab 6—Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-1 Tab 7—Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-1 Tab 8—Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-1 Tab 9—Connectivity Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-1 Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A1-1 Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A2-1 Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A3-1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units. Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions. Technical and Descriptive Publications This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21 Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. WARNING The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty. Copyright ©2014 Eaton, All Rights Reserved. Introduction Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know what’s important to you. Solutions Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all we do: ● Reliability—maintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime ● Efficiency—minimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact ● Safety—identify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most Using the Eaton Catalog Library As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E, for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include: ● ● ● ● ● ● Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial (CA08100002E) Volume 2—Commercial Distribution (CA08100003E) Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies (CA08100004E) Volume 4—Circuit Protection (CA08100005E) Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection (CA08100006E) Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control (CA08100007E) ● ● ● ● ● Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions (CA08100008E) Volume 8—Sensing Solutions (CA08100010E) Volume 9—Original Equipment Manufacturer (CA08100011E) Volume 10—Enclosed Control (CA08100012E) Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls (CA08100013E) ● ● ● ● Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions (CA08100014E) Volume 13—Counters, Timers and Tachometers (CA08100015E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 14—Fuses (CA08100016E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 15—Solar Inverters and Electrical Balance of System (CA08100018E) These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information, consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library. These references include: ● The Consulting Application Guide (CA08104001E) ● The Eaton Power Quality Product Guide (COR01FYA) If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for, not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the Literature Library. By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent version of each volume and tab. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com i Introduction Icons Green Leaf Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers and our communities. Though all of Eaton's products and solutions are designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation further provide “exceptional environmental benefit”. Learn Online When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses, podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more. Drawings Online When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings and illustrations. Contact Us If you need additional help, you can find contact information under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical. ii Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1.1 10250T Pushbuttons Toggle Switches—E10 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 1.7 1.10 V7-T1-32 V7-T1-48 V7-T1-53 V7-T1-139 V7-T1-141 V7-T1-164 V7-T1-166 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-182 1 V7-T1-186 1 V7-T1-254 V7-T1-260 V7-T1-296 V7-T1-298 1 1 1 1 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 V7-T1-31 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 V7-T1-16 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 V7-T1-14 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 V7-T1-9 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 M22 Modular Pushbuttons 1 1 V7-T1-8 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 V7-T1-4 Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 V7-T1-2 V7-T1-321 V7-T1-324 1 1 Learn Online 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-1 1.1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Contents Toggle Switches—E10 Description 1 Page Toggle Switches—E10 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-3 V7-T1-3 V7-T1-4 V7-T1-5 V7-T1-5 V7-T1-5 V7-T1-6 V7-T1-6 V7-T1-7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Features The E10 switches from Eaton’s Electrical Sector are intended for general purpose light industrial use. Designed for retrofit and OEM applications. General Purpose Toggles 1 ● ● ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● ● 1 1 1 1 Various circuit functions include maintained and momentary Poles include from singlepole single-throw to fourpole double-throw Spade, screw, and solder terminations available Numerous ratings Short 11/32 in and tall 15/32 in bat lever available Standard 15/32–32 thd. Hardware furnished assembled Heavy-Duty Hesitation Switches ● ● One-hole panel mount Three position switch offers unique positive center stop feature to assure lever cannot be thrown from one side through the center OFF position without stopping ● Design feature is a major acceptance for motor reversing and speed control applications ● Prevents motor damage resulting from high current generation by counter EMF of the armature at the time of reversing ● Known as anti-plugging, hesitation, positive stop or positive off switch Non-Illuminated AC Rated Pushbuttons ● ● ● ● ● One-hole panel mount Medium-duty Spade and screw terminations available Various bushing lengths and button extensions Numerous ampere ratings with horsepower ratings 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 1.1 Standards and Certifications ● ● 1 UL Recognized CSA—File No. LR40068 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Toggle Switches—E10 Series Not to be used for ordering purposes 1 E10 T 1 06 A S = E10T106AS Series Lever Length T = 0.563 in (14.3 mm) lever E = 0.688 in (17.5 mm) lever Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Ratings—125V 06 = 6 Amperes 15 = 15 Amperes 20 = 20 Amperes A B D E F G H Function = ON—None—OFF = OFF—None—(ON) = ON—OFF—ON = ON—None—ON = ON—OFF—(ON) = (ON)—OFF—(ON) = ON—None—(ON) Termination S = Screw L = Solder lug P = Spade 1 1 Complete Cat. No. 0.563 in (14.3 mm) Single-pole 6 Amperes ON—None—OFF Screw terminal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-3 1.1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Product Selection Toggle Switches 1 E10 Series—AC Rated—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces 1 Nominal AC Ratings Amperes 1 1 125V Single-Pole 50V UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position— Keyway Screw Terminal Catalog Number 0.250 in (6.4 mm) Spade Terminal Catalog Number Solder Lug Catalog Number 1 P.S.T. ON None OFF hp 250V Function—Circuit with Lever In Poles and Throw 1 Single-Pole 6 3 — E10T106AS E10T106AP E10T106AL 15 10 3/4 E10T115AS E10T115AP E10T115AL 1 20 10 3/4 E10E120AS E10E120AP E10E120AL 6 3 — E10T106DS E10T106DP — 1 15 10 3/4 E10T115DS E10T115DP E10T115DL 20 10 3/4 E10E120DS — — — 1 1 1 1 Two-Pole 1 P.D.T. ON ON OFF None ON 6 3 — E10T106ES — 15 10 3/4 E10T115ES E10T115EP E10T115EL 20 10 3/4 E10E120ES — — — 10 1/2 1 1 1 P.D.T. ON 1 P.S.T. OFF None (ON) E10T115BS E10T115BP — 1 P.D.T. ON OFF (ON) E10T115FS E10T115FP — 1 P.D.T. ON None (ON) E10T115HS E10T115HP — 1 P.D.T. (ON) OFF (ON) E10T115GS E10T115GP — 2 P.S.T. ON None OFF Two-Pole 6 3 — E10T206AS E10T206AP — 15 10 3/4 E10T215AS E10T215AP E10T215AL 1 20 10 3/4 E10E220AS E10E220AP E10E220AL 6 3 — E10T206DS E10T206DP — 1 15 10 3/4 E10T215DS E10T215DP E10T215DL 20 10 3/4 6 3 — 1 15 10 3/4 E10T215ES E10T215EP E10T215EL 20 10 3/4 E10E220ES — — 1 15 10 1/2 1 1 1 1 Three-Pole 2. P.D.T. 2 P.D.T. ON ON OFF None ON ON E10E220DS E10E220DP — E10T206ES — — 2 P.S.T. OFF None (ON) E10T215BS — — 2 P.D.T. ON None (ON) E10T215HS E10T215HP — 2 P.D.T. (ON) OFF (ON) E10T215GS E10T215GP — — Three-Pole 15 10 3/4 1 3 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10E315AS E10E315AP 3 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10E315DS E10E315DP E10E315DL 3 P.D.T. ON None ON E10E315ES E10E315EP E10E315EL E10E415AL 1 1 1 Four-Pole Four-Pole 15 1 1 10 3/4 4 P.S.T. ON None OFF E10E415AS — 4 P.D.T. ON OFF ON E10E415DS — E10E415DL 4 P.D.T. ON None ON E10E415ES — E10E415EL 1 1 Note 1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6. 1 V7-T1-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Hesitation Switches Heavy-Duty Hesitation Switch 1 E10 Series—Special Purpose—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces Nominal Ratings 1 Function—Circuit with Lever In… Amperes hp 28 Vdc 125 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 15 15 10 3/4 Operation UP Position CENTER Position DOWN Position— Keyway Poles and Throw 1 Screw Terminal Catalog Number Maintained ON OFF ON 2 P.D.T. E10E215SS 3 P.D.T. E10E315SS 4 P.D.T. E10E415SS 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons One-Hole Mounted Medium-Duty, Mom. Contact 1 E10 Series—Minimum Order Quantity 10 Pieces Nominal Ratings Amperes hp 125 Vac 250 Vac NO NC NO NC 125– 250V 6 — 3 — — 15 15 — 10 10 10 — 5 1/3 1/4 2 Poles and Throw 1 1 P.S.T. 1 P.S.T. 1 P.D.T. Contacts Bushing Length in (mm) Dim. “A” Button Extension in (mm) Dim. “B” Typical Maximum Operating Force Screw Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 0.250 in (6.4 mm) Catalog Number NO 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.9 lbs E10P106RS E10P106RP 0.34 (8.6) 0.25 (6.4) E10P106JS — NO NO, NC 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.34 (8.6) 0.25 (6.4) 0.69 (17.5) 0.53 (13.5) 0.9 lbs 1.0 lbs E10P115RS E10P115RP E10P115JS — E10P115LS — 1 1 1 1 1 1 Accessories 1 Toggle Switches Accessories—Minimum Order Quantity 100 Pieces E10TA104 Description Material/Notes Catalog Number Hexagon locknut Zinc-chromate treated steel E10TA101 Knurled face nut Zinc-chromate treated steel E10TA102 Internal tooth lockwasher Cadmium plated steel E10TA103 Terminal screws #6-32 x 3/16 in binding head E10TA201 Spade terminal adapter—0.250 in (6.4 mm) Assembles to screw terminals E10TA202 ON-OFF indicating plate—vertical orientation Burnished nickel finish steel E10TA301 OFF-ON indicating plate—horizontal orientation Burnished nickel finish steel E10TA302 Flip-up guard for toggle switches 1 1 1 1 1 E10TA104 1 1 1 E10TA105 Fixed shroud for toggle switches E10TA105 1 1 1 Notes Interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through the center position until pressure is momentarily relieved. Designed for control and protection of reversing motors. 1 2 1 1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V7-T1-6. Rated 1/4 hp at 125V, 1/2 hp at 250V. 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-5 1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Toggle Switches Description Specification 1 AC ratings 6–20A, 125 Vac 3–10A, 250 Vac Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac DC ratings 6–20A, 28 Vdc 1 1 1 Electrical life 6,000 cycles make/break at switch ampere rating Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications Maintained and momentary contacts Poles/throws 1 through 4, single and double throw 1 Mounting One hole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway that serves as anti-rotational feature 1 Lever lengths 0.563 in (14.3 mm) or 0.688 in (17.5 mm), bright nickel plated Terminals Screw, 0.250 in (6.4 mm) spade and solder lug 1 1 1 Hesitation Switches Description Specification Operation Slow make/slow break mechanism with butt action for AC and low voltage DC applications; maintained contacts; ideal for reversing motor applications; interlock mechanism prevents operation of lever through center position until manual pressure is momentarily relieved AC ratings 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac Max. 3/4 hp at 250 Vac 1 1 1 DC ratings 15A, 28 Vdc Poles/throws 2, 3 and 4, double throw only 1 Mounting Single-pole with threaded 0.468 in-32 bushing and 0.068 x 0.049 in (1.7 x 1.2 mm) deep keyway Lever length 0.687 in (17.4 mm), stainless steel Terminals Screw 1 1 1 Pushbutton Actuators Description Specification AC ratings 1 6–15A, 125 Vac (NO) 3–10A, 250 Vac (NO) Max. 1/3 hp at 125/250 Vac Operation 1 Slow make/slow break mechanism Normally open contacts Poles/throws Single, single and double throw Mounting One hole with 0.468 in-32 threaded bushing and 0.068 x 0.035 in (1.7 x 0.9 mm) deep keyway Two bushing heights: 11/16 in (17.5 mm) and 11/32 in (8.7 mm) Button extensions 17/32 in (13.5 mm) and 1/4 in (6.4 mm), bright nickel plated Terminals Screw 1 1 1 1 1 Circuit Diagrams 1 SPST 1 SPDT DPST 3PST 3PDT 4PST 4PDT DPDT 1 1 1 V7-T1-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Toggle Switches—E10 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Toggle Switch Dimensions Lever Length B Screw Terminals Operation Bushing Length A C D E C1 D E C D E 1 Momentary and maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.00 (25.4) 1.17 (29.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.13 (28.7) 0.63 (16.0) 2 Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.06 (26.9) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.19 (30.2) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.06 (26.9) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) Momentary 0.47 (11.9) 0.56 (14.2) 1.25 (31.8) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.31 (33.3) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1.25 (31.8) 1.31 (33.3) 0.75 (19.1) 1 3 Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.69 (17.5) 1.27 (32.3) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1.37 (34.8) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1.23 (31.2) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1 4 Maintained 0.47 (11.9) 0.69 (17.5) 1.20 (30.5) 1.30 (33.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.30 (33.0) 1.34 (34.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1.23 (31.2) 1.34 (34.0) 1.44 (36.6) 1 No. of Poles Spade Terminals 1 Solder Lug 1 1 1 Toggle Switch Hesitation Switch 0.47 (11.9) 0.07 (1.8) x 0.05 (1.3) Keyway 0.63 (16) C 1.34 (34) B 1 A 1 1 1.13 (28.7) E 1.47 (37.3) 1 0.47-32 Thread 1.25 (31.8) A D 1 0.04 (1) x 0.07 (1.8) Keyway 0.69 (17.5) 0.47-32 Thread B Pushbutton Actuator 1 1.13 (28.7) 1 Accessories 1 E10TA101 Hexagon Locknut E10TA102 Knurled Face Nut E10TA301 ON-OFF Indicating Plate— Vertical Orientation 0.63 (16) 0.63 (16) 0.07 (1.8) 1.0 (25.4) 0.06 (1.5) 1 1 ON 0.08 (2) E10TA302 ON-OFF Indicating Plate— Horizontal Orientation OFF 0.63 (16) O F F O N 1 1 0.03 (.8) 1 Note 1 Spade terminal adapters are used on 6 ampere and momentary screw terminal switches, adding 0.42 in (10.7 mm) to dimension C. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-7 1.2 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Contents Toggle Switches—E10E Description 1 Page Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Product Selection Molded-In Screw Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . Econoswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 V7-T1-9 V7-T1-9 V7-T1-9 V7-T1-10 V7-T1-11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Features Designed for general purpose and OEM applications, this line of toggle switches provides a high IP68 rating for demanding environments. Molded-In Screw Terminal ● ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 Completely sealed against dust, moisture and other contaminants One-hole mounted bushing for easy installation Multi-circuits offered Two- and three-position with maintained and momentary action Molded-in terminal inserts and terminals numbers Single- and two-pole circuitry Standards and Certifications Switch Guard ● ● ● ● ● ● Econoswitch 1 ● ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 Environmentally sealed Single- and two-pole circuitry One-hole mounting for easy installation Multi-circuits Two- and three-position with maintained and momentary action Three types of termination offered as standard Catalog Number 125 Vac 250 Vac E10E118xx 18 9 E10E218xx 18 9 Amperes E10E118xx 1/4 1/2 Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more information. E10E218xx 1/2 1 E10E118xx — — E10E218xx — — ● 1 1 ● 1 ● ● ● V7-T1-8 UL and CSA Nominal Ratings Options ● 1 ● UL—File number E15346; Guide card number is WOYR2 CSA—LR40068, class number 6241 Single-Phase hp ● 1 For use with two-position switch Cover closure transfers switch toggle lever to OFF position One-hole mounted mounting style Cover is molded out of red thermoset molding material Guard cover is springloaded to either close or lock in open position Prevents accidental operation at switches ● Non-UL Recognized devices ● Alternate toggle levers ● Locking toggle levers ● Rocker buttons Three-Phase hp Special mounting hardware Mounting hardware furnished assembled Terminal screws furnished assembled Special circuits Panel seal, part number 32-341 Spade terminal adapters available Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1.2 Product Selection 1 Molded-In Screw Terminal 1 E10E Series—Molded-In Screw Terminal Circuit with Lever Position Nominal AC Ratings Amperes 125V Single-Pole Up Single-Phase hp Three-Phase hp 250V 125V 250V 125/250V 9 1/4 1/2 — Center 1 Down (Keyway) 1 Catalog Number Single-Pole 18 ON OFF ON E10E118DM ON NONE OFF E10E118AM ON NONE ON E10E118EM 1 1 1 1 Two-Pole 1 Two-Pole 18 9 1/2 1 — ON OFF ON E10E218DM ON NONE OFF E10E218AM ON NONE ON E10E218EM 1 1 1 1 Econoswitch 1 E10E Series—Econoswitch 1 Circuit with Lever Position Current Ratings—Amperes 28 Vdc Type of Operation Single-Pole Two-Pole 115 Vac, 60 or 400 Hz Up Down Center (Keyway) Lamp Resistive Inductive Lamp Resistive Inductive Load Load Load Load Load Load Screw Terminal Catalog Number Solder Lug Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal Catalog Number Single-Pole Maintained 5 20 15 3 15 10 ON OFF ON E10E118DS E10E118DL E10E118DP Maintained 5 20 15 3 15 10 ON NONE OFF E10E118AS E10E118AL E10E118AP Maintained 5 20 15 3 15 10 ON NONE ON E10E118ES E10E118EL E10E118EP Momentary 4 15 10 2 15 7 ON 1 OFF ON 1 E10E118GS E10E118GL E10E118GP Momentary 4 15 10 2 15 7 OFF NONE ON 1 E10E118BS E10E118BL E10E118BP 1 1 1 1 1 1 Two-Pole Maintained 7 20 15 4 15 15 ON OFF ON E10E218DS E10E218DL E10E218DP Maintained 7 20 15 4 15 15 ON NONE OFF E10E218AS E10E218AL E10E218AP Maintained 7 20 15 4 15 15 ON NONE ON E10E218ES E10E218EL E10E218EP Momentary 5 18 10 2 11 8 ON 1 OFF ON 1 E10E218GS E10E218GL E10E218GP Momentary 5 18 10 2 11 8 OFF NONE ON 1 E10E218BS E10E218BL E10E218BP 1 1 1 1 Switch Guard Switch Guard 1 E10E Series—Switch Guard 1 Catalog Number Switch Guard E10TA104 1 1 Note 1 Momentary contact. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-9 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 E10E Series—Molded-In Screw Terminal Description Specification 1 Watertight seal Per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68 Thermoset molding materials Meet flame retardant requirements 1 1 1 1 Temperature range –50° to 150°F (–46° to 66°C) Life 20,000 operations at rated load; 40,000 operations mechanical life; 6,000 operations at hp ratings per UL and CSA requirements Bushings 15/32 in-32 thread E10E Series—Econoswitch 1 Description Specification Watertight seal Per MIL-STD-108E and designed to meet IP68 1 Type of terminal Screws—6-32 UNC-22A Solder lug—0.125 in (3.17 mm) dia. hole Spade—0.250 in (6.35 mm) x 0.032 in (0.81 mm) thick Life 50,000 operations at rated load; 100,000 operations mechanical life Temperature range –50° to 150°F (–46° to 66°C) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Single-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series 0.432 (10.97) 1 Two-Pole Molded-In Screw Terminal E10E Series 1 0.432 (10.97) 0.076 (1.93) 1 0.076 (1.93) 1 Keyway 1 Keyway 1 33° 16.5° 33° 16.5° 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 0.690 (17.53) 1 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1.18 (29.9) Max. 0.250 (6.35) #6-32 Terminal Screw with Internal Tooth Lockwasher (SEMS) 2 3 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1 1 1.100 0.130 (27.94) 1.370 (3.30) Max. (34.80) Max. 0.250 (6.35) #6-32 Terminal Screw with Internal Tooth Lockwasher (SEMS) 0.130 (3.30) 1 1 1 1 1 5 6 0.635 (16.13) Max. 0.380 (9.65) Typ. 1.270 (32.26) Max. 1 0.470 (11.94) 4 1 1 0.690 (17.53) 0.380 0.910 (9.65) (23.11) Max. 1 1 1 2 3 0.380 (9.65) Typ. 1.340 (34.04) Max. 1 1 Toggle Switch Panel Cutout 1 15/32 Dia. Bushing 0.480 (12.19) Dia. Hole 0.375 (9.52) 0.130 (3.30) Locking Ring 0.445 (11.30) 1 0.480 (12.19) Dia. Hole 1 1 0.062 (1.57) Keyway 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-11 1.2 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Single-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series 0.432 (10.97) 1 Keyway 0.076 (1.93) 1 1 33° 16.5° 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 1 0.690 (17.53) 1 1 1 0.470 (11.94) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1 1.51 (38.4) Max. 1.28 (32.5) Max. 1.30 (33.0) Max. 1 1 #6-32 UNC-2A Terminal Screw, SEMS 0.250 x 0.032 (6.35) x (0.81) Thick 0.125 (3.17) Dia. Hole 1.25 (31.75) 1 0.594 (15.09) 1 1 2 3 1 1 1 Two-Pole Econoswitch E10E Series 1 0.432 (10.97) 2 3 1 Solder Lug Screw Terminal 2 3 Spade Terminal Keyway 1 0.076 (1.93) 1 1 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 33° 16.5° 1 0.690 (17.53) 1 1 1 0.468 (11.89) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1.34 (34.1) Max. 1 1.55 (39.4) Max. 1.32 (33.5) Max. 1 1 #6-32 UNC-2A Terminal Screw, SEMS 0.250 x 0.032 (6.35) x (0.81) Thick 0.125 (3.17) Dia. Hole 1.32 (33.5) 1 0.89 (22.6) 1 1 Screw Terminal V7-T1-12 Solder Lug Spade Terminal Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Environmentally Sealed Toggle Switches—E10E 1.2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Switch Guard 1 33° 0.240 (6.10) Dia. 1 0.688 (17.48) 0.840 (21.34) 1 1 0.468 (11.89) 15/32-32 UN-2A Thread to Within 0.060 (1.52) of Shoulder 1 1 Rivet 0.475 (12.07) Dia. 1 0.031 0.062 (0.79) (1.57) 0.750 (19.05) Max. 1 0.688 (17.48) Max. 1 1 1.062 (26.97) 1.635 (41.53) Max. 1.830 (46.48) Max. 1 1 1.547 (39.29) Rad. Open 1 Closed Red-Molded Plastic 1 1 1.093 (27.76) Max. Switch (Ref.) Steel 1 1 0.032 (0.81) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-13 1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Contents Pushbutton Control Stations Description 1 Page Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . Special Purpose Control Stations . . . . . . . . 10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-15 V7-T1-16 V7-T1-17 V7-T1-18 V7-T1-19 V7-T1-20 V7-T1-21 V7-T1-22 V7-T1-23 V7-T1-23 V7-T1-24 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-28 V7-T1-28 1 1 Product Description 1 M22 Assembled Control Stations 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● ● ● 1 1 1 Commercial Control Stations ● ● ● 1 1 1 1 1 M22 series operators Available in horizontal and vertical configurations Impact resistant polycarbonate enclosures Optional yellow covers Base mounting contact blocks and light units for quick wiring and vibration resistance 10250T series operators Full front label Specific function labels on front of enclosure General Purpose Control Stations ● ● ● ● Construction grade General purpose wall mount Popular with contractors UL (NEMA) Type 1 Special Purpose Control Stations ● ● ● Standard grade Polyester enclosure UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations ● ● ● ● ● 10250H Series operators Dark brown polyester enclosure Protective rubber gaskets provide NEMA 3S rating on pushbuttons Top and bottom 3/4 in NPT conduit entrances Includes alternate legend plates and spare mounting screws 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations ● ● ● ● ● 10250T Series operators ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures Surface or flush mounting Single 3/4 in NPT conduit entrance on one and two element stations Single 1 in NPT conduit entrance on three element stations Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations ● ● ● ● Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations ● ● ● ● E34 Series operators Factory sealed contact blocks Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel enclosures Approved for NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2 Group IIB plus Hydrogen type hazardous locations 10250T Series operators Factory sealed contact blocks Die-cast, polyester or stainless steel enclosures Approved for NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D or Class I Zone 2 Group IIB plus Hydrogen type hazardous locations 1 1 1 V7-T1-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Features M22 Assembled Control Stations ● ● ● ● ● IP66, UL (NEMA) Type 4X, 13 Impact resistant polycarbonate enclosures Optional yellow cover 25% smaller depth than most competitor enclosures Base mounting contact blocks and light units for faster wiring and vibration resistance Commercial Control Stations ● ● ● ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures Pre-assembled and labeled for functions such as “Fuel Shut-Off” Great for commercial applications General Purpose Control Stations ● ● ● ● Construction grade General purpose wall mount Popular with contractors UL (NEMA) Type 1 Special Purpose Control Stations ● ● ● Standard grade Polyester enclosure UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Industrial grade Extra heavy-duty Polyester enclosure Booted buttons Outdoor installation UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 30.5 mm operators Industrial grade Zinc die cast enclosure Popular with industrial end users UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 1 1 1 Class I Division 2 Control Stations ● ● 10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations 1 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations ● ● ● ● 1 Available with 10250T or E34 30.5 mm operators Zinc die cast, polyester or stainless steel enclosures Factory-sealed contact blocks Popular with industrial end users UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-15 1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Product Selection M22 Assembled Control Stations 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 One Element Control Stations 1 Orientation Description Color Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head push-pull emergency stop operator Red NC 1 Horizontal 40 mm illuminated mushroom head push-pull emergency stop operator, 85–264 Vac Red NO-NC 1 Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head twist-to-release emergency stop operator Red NC Horizontal 40 mm mushroom head key-release emergency stop operator Red NC 1 Horizontal Flush pushbutton Green NO Horizontal Flush pushbutton Green NO Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC 1 Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Horizontal Key-operated selector switch, two-position maintained — NO 1 Horizontal Knob type selector switch, three-position maintained — 2NO Horizontal Double pushbutton Green NO START Red NC STOP 1 1 1 Two Element Control Stations 1 Orientation Element 1 Description Color 1 Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Vertical Flush pushbutton Green NO 1 Vertical Flush pushbutton Black NO 1 Three Element Control Stations 1 Orientation 1 Element 1 Description Color 1 1 Enclosure Cover Color Catalog Number — Yellow M22-C1-M1H — Yellow M22-C1-M2H — Yellow M22-C1-M3H — Yellow M22-C1-M4H Gray M22-C1-M5H Gray M22-C1-M6H Gray M22-C1-M7H Gray M22-C1-M8H OFF-ON Gray M22-C1-M9H HAND 0 AUTO Gray M22-C1-M10H Gray M22-C1-M11H Inscription START STOP Element 2 Description Color 1 Flush pushbutton Green NO START Extended pushbutton Red NC FORWARD Flush pushbutton Black NO Inscription Element 2 Inscription Description Enclosure Cover Color Catalog Number Gray M22-C2-M1H STOP Gray M22-C2-M2V REVERSE Gray M22-C2-M3V Inscription Element 3 Inscription Description Color 1 85–264 Vac — Flush pushbutton Green NO Green NO START Extended pushbutton Red NC Extended pushbutton Red NC Flush pushbutton Green NO Color 1 Indicating light White Flush pushbutton Horizontal Extended pushbutton Red NC Vertical Indicating light White 85–264 Vac Horizontal Green NO 1 Flush pushbutton Vertical Black NO OPEN Extended pushbutton Red NC STOP Flush pushbutton Black NO 1 Flush pushbutton Vertical Black NO FORWARD Flush pushbutton Red NC STOP Flush pushbutton Black 1 Flush pushbutton Vertical Flush pushbutton Black NO UP Flush pushbutton Red NC STOP Flush pushbutton Black 1 1 1 1 1 — Enclosure Inscription Cover Color Catalog Number Gray M22-C3-M1H Gray M22-C3-M2V Gray M22-C3-M3H CLOSE Gray M22-C3-M4V NO REVERSE Gray M22-C3-M5V NO DOWN Gray M22-C3-M6V STOP Notes For assembled control stations not found in this selection, please contact the Eaton Technical Resource Center at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or TRC@eaton.com. 1 Contact block configuration. V7-T1-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Commercial Control Stations 1 Available Catalog Numbers Key Specifications ● ● ● ● ● ● 30.5 mm (10250T series) operators ASA 61 gray die-cast zinc enclosures Industrial grade UL® Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Single 3/4 in NPT conduit entrance Dimensions—in (mm) ● Enclosure: 3.88 W x 4.00 H x 3.00 D (98.6 x 101.6 x 76.3) ● Operator: 1.63 D (to enclosure) x 1.50 diameter (41.4 x 38.1) What is included? Eaton’s pre-assembled, enclosed emergency stop pushbutton stations include an operator, an enclosure, contact blocks and a variety of unique labels. Each label has white lettering on a red background indicating the function and red lettering on a white background indicating the operator type. 1 Catalog Number 1 Operator Enclosure Color Label 10250T5B62-S101 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY STOP 10250T5B62-S102 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY SHUT-OFF 10250T5B62-S103 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY GENERATOR STOP 10250T5B62-S104 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY HVAC SHUT-DOWN 10250T5B62-S105 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY ELECTRICAL DISCONNECT 10250T5B62-S106 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY BOILER SHUT-DOWN 10250T5B62-S107 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY CHILLER STOP 10250T5B62-S108 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY FUEL SHUT-OFF 10250T5B62-S109 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY REFRIGERATION STOP 10250T5B62-S110 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY POWER OFF 10250T5B62-S111 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY GAS SHUT-OFF 10250T5B62-S112 Push-Pull Gray EMERGENCY VENTILATION SHUT-DOWN 10250T5B62-S113 Push-Pull Gray GENERATOR 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Additional Contact Blocks (Sold Separately) 1 Catalog Number Circuit Configuration 1 10250T51 1NC 10250T53 1NO 1 10250T1 NO-NC 10250T3 2NC 10250T2 2NO 1 1 1 Note 1 Includes 1NO-1NC contact block. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-17 1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled General Purpose Control Stations Type N Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 1 1 Contact Symbol Legends Catalog Number Flush/green START 10250H5100 Flush/red STOP 10250H5101 Extended/red STOP 10250H5104 Palm operated/black None 10250H89 1 Three-position selector switch/black knob RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H289 1 Flush/red START/STOP 10250H5200 1 Flush/green extended/red START/STOP 10250H5207 1 Flush/black (all) 1 1 Single Button Station with Padlock Attachment Accessory Button Type/Color One Element Enclosure Type 1 1 1 1 1 Selector Switch 1 1 1 Two Button Station Two Element Enclosure Type 1 RAISE/LOWER 10250H5201 FOR/REV 10250H5202 OPEN/CLOSE 10250H5203 1 UP/DOWN 10250H5204 HIGH/LOW 10250H5205 1 FAST/SLOW 10250H5208 1 Three Button Station 1 Three Element Enclosure Type FOR/REV/STOP 10250H5300 1 UP/DOWN/STOP 10250H5301 RAISE/LOWER/STOP 10250H5302 1 OPEN/CLOSE/STOP 10250H5303 FAST/SLOW/STOP 10250H5304 1 Flush/black (all) Three Button Station with Indicating Light 110/220V neon indicating light 1 1 START/STOP Clear—flush/green; flush/red 10250H5310 Red—flush/green; flush/red 10250ED853 Amber—flush/green; flush/red 10250ED853-2 1 1 Note 1 Round button. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Type N Control Stations—Open Type Construction (No Cover) Contact Symbol Selector Switch Button Type/Color Legends Catalog Number RUN/OFF/AUTO 10250H2538 1 1 One Element Enclosure Type Three-position selector switch/black knob 1 1 1 Two Button Station Two Element Enclosure Type Flush/green START/STOP 1 10250H2747 1 1 Mechanically Interlocked Pushbuttons Flush/black (all) mech. interlocked None 1 1 10250H2544 1 1 1 1 1 Special Purpose Control Stations 1 Special Purpose Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 13 Contact Symbol 10250H_ Feature Legends Catalog Number 1 START 10250H2738 1 STOP 10250H658 1 STOP 10250H665 One Element Pushbutton Type Flush With lock hasp 1 1 10250H_ Two Element Pushbutton Type Flush START/STOP 10250H364 1 With lock hasp START/STOP 10250H671 1 1 Buttons interlocked FAST/SLOW 10250ED664 FOR/REV 10250H2740 UP/DOWN 10250H2741 OPEN/CLOSE 10250H2742 1 1 Note 1 No legend on buttons. Specify any standard legend. 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-19 1.3 1 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 10250H Series Heavy-Duty Control Stations Type H Control Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Element Type 10250H_ Feature Circuit Assembled Legend Plate Without padlock hasp 1NO-1NC JOG Catalog Number START 10250H1881 One Element Pushbuttons 1 STOP RUN 1 Knob selector switch 1 1 Unassembled Alternate Legend Plate 10250H_ With padlock hasp 1NC STOP — 10250H4239 Two-position 1NO-1NC OFF/ON — 10250H4526 Three-position 1NO-1NC MAN/OFF/AUTO — 10250H4527 Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP — 10250H1884 2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER FORWARD 10250H1885 Two Element Pushbuttons 1 REVERSE 1 OPEN CLOSE 1 1 10250H_ 1 Standard and standard with padlock hasp 1NO-2NC START/STOP — Standard 2NO-3NC FOR/REV/STOP START OPEN 10250H1890 JOG CLOSE 10250H4241 RAISE FAST LOWER SLOW Three Element Pushbuttons Two standard and standard with padlock hasp 1 1 Indicating light and pushbuttons 1 10250H4240 120V Light-red lens and two plain 1NO-2NC MOTOR RUNNING START/STOP — 10250H1913 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations 1 Complete Assembled Stations—UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13 Element Type Break Glass Station 1 Features Contact Block(s) Legend Gray enclosure NC (logic level) EMERG. OFF Surface Mounting Catalog Number Flush Mounting 2 Catalog Number Break Glass Station Break glass station 3 Red enclosure 10250TGS — 10250TGR — 1 1 1 1 1 One Element One Element Pushbutton Standard Mushroom head Selector switch Push-pull three-position Two Element START 10250T3516 10250T3573 NC STOP 10250T3518 10250T3575 NO-NC None 10250T3540 10250T3597 NO-NC START 10250T3517 10250T3574 NC STOP 10250T3519 10250T3576 With lock hasp 4 NC STOP 10250T3520 10250T3577 Two-position black knob NO-NC OFF/ON 10250T3523 10250T3580 Three-position black knob 2NO MAN/OFF/AUTO 10250T3524 10250T3581 Momentary red button 2NC START/STOP 10250T3545 10250T3602 Standard 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3525 10250T3582 2NO-2NC RAISE/LOWER 10250T3672 10250T3673 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Two Element Pushbuttons Three Element NO-NC 2NO-2NC None 10250T3541 10250T3598 With lock hasp 4 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3542 10250T3599 Standard and mushroom head 1NO-2NC START/STOP 10250T3526 10250T3583 Standard with maintained contact 5 NO-NC START/STOP 10250T3528 10250T3585 Standard 2NO-3NC FOR, REV, STOP 10250T3532 10250T3589 2NO-3NC UP, DOWN, STOP 10250T3615 — 2NO-3NC OPEN, CLOSE, STOP 10250T3614 — 2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3543 10250T3600 Two standard and with lock hasp 2NO-3NC None, None, STOP 10250T3544 10250T3601 Red lens — 120V 1NO-2NC MOTOR RUN, START/STOP 10250T3536 10250T3593 1 1 1 1 Plus NC Three Element Pushbuttons Indicating light (transformer type) and pushbuttons Red lens — 240V 1 1 10250T3537 10250T3594 Red lens — 480V 10250T3538 10250T3595 Red lens — 600V 10250T3539 10250T3596 1 1 1 1 Break Glass Operator 6 Break Glass Kit Description Catalog Number Operator with hammer and five glass discs 10250TBG Glass discs only (5) 10250TGL 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Stop buttons are red—all others are black. 2 NEMA 4–13, if properly mounted on a flat surface. Consists of front plate, legend, operator and contact blocks. 3 Break glass stations will not function with Normally Open contact blocks. 4 Lock is 10250TA2. 5 Uses deep cover instead of shallow cover. Switch component is 10250TA67—mechanically interlocked operators. 6 Shown assembled to contact block (contact block supplied separately). Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 V7-T1-21 1.3 1 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty 30.5 mm Control Stations Complete Assembled Stations— UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Contact Symbol 10250T7007 1 1NO 1NC 10250T7023P 1 Die Cast Enclosure Catalog Number Polyester Molded Enclosure Catalog Number Stainless Steel Enclosure Catalog Number Flush/green START 10250T7003 10250T7003P 10250T7003S Extended/red STOP 10250T7005 10250T7005P 10250T7005S Alum. jumbo mushroom/red EMER. STOP (engraved button) 10250T7007 10250T7007P 10250T7007S Flush/black No legend 10250T7009 10250T7009P 10250T7009S 10250T7023 10250T7023P 10250T7023S 10250T7025 10250T7025P 10250T7025S 10250T7033 10250T7033P 10250T7033S Two Pushbuttons 1NO 1NC Each Button 1 Legend Marking Single Pushbutton 1 1 Button Type/Color 1 Flush/green START Extended/red STOP Flush/black No legend Flush/black No legend 1 1 10250T7033S Single Pilot Light—Two Pushbuttons 1NO 1 1NC Each Button 1 120 Vac red No legend Flush/green START Extended/red STOP 120 Vac red No legend 10250T7035 10250T7035P 10250T7035S Maintained knob/black HAND/OFF/AUTO 10250T7011 10250T7011P 10250T7011S Maintained knob/black No legend 10250T7013 10250T7013P 10250T7013S EMER. STOP (engraved button) 10250T7019 10250T7019P 10250T7019S Flush/black 1 Flush/black 1 Three-Position Selector Switch 1 2NO 2NC 1 1 1 Single Pushbutton Maintained Push-pull with jumbo mushroom/red 1 1 Pull Push O X 1NO X O 1NC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant 30.5 mm Control Stations 1 Complete Assembled Stations— UL (NEMA) Type 4, 4X, 12, 13; NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D E34EX_ Contact Symbol 1 Button Type/Color Legend Marking Die Cast Enclosure Catalog Number Polyester Molded Enclosure Catalog Number Stainless Steel Enclosure Catalog Number Flush/green START E34EX7003 E34EX7003P E34EX7003S Extended/red STOP E34EX7005 E34EX7005P E34EX7005S Alum. jumbo mushroom/red EMER. STOP (engraved button) E34EX7007 E34EX7007P E34EX7007S 1 Flush/black No legend E34EX7009 E34EX7009P E34EX7009S 1 Flush/green START E34EX7023 E34EX7023P E34EX7023S Extended/red STOP Flush/black No legend E34EX7025 E34EX7025P E34EX7025S Flush/black No legend 1 Single Pushbutton 1NO 1NC 1 Two Pushbuttons 1NO 1NC Each Button 1 1 1 1 1 1 Three-Position Selector Switch 2NO 2NC Maintained knob/black HAND/OFF/AUTO E34EX7011 E34EX7011P E34EX7011S Maintained knob/black No legend E34EX7013 E34EX7013P E34EX7013S 1 1 1 Single Pushbutton Maintained Push-pull with jumbo mushroom/red EMER. STOP (engraved button) E34EX7019 E34EX7019P 1 E34EX7019S 1 Pull Push O X 1NO X O 1NC 1 1 1 Accessories Padlock Attachment 1 Type N Control Stations Description Catalog Number Padlock attachment—For field assembly on square button type (except extended button types) 10250H5110 1 1 1 Note Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-22. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-23 1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Custom Assembled Stations Specification Form Ordering Instructions 1 1 1 1 1 Step 1 Copy this ordering guide from catalog. Step 2 Specify 10250T or E34 pushbutton lines in the corresponding box on the following page. Step 7 Fax Sheet 2 of this form to Eaton’s TRC, Technical Resource Center, at 828-6510549 to the attention of— Custom Stations Order or email to TRC@eaton.com. Position 1 Position 1 Position 2 Within a few days you will receive a confirmation fax with the custom station part number and price. Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 1 10250T Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253 1 E34 Pages V7-T1-254 to V7-T1-295 1 10250T and Pages E34 V7-T1-321 to V7-T1-361 Class I Div. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Step 3 Check back of panel dimensions—specify single or double depth enclosure in the corresponding box on the following page. Step 4 Specify enclosure catalog number and price in the corresponding box on the following page. Enclosures can be found on Pages V7-T1-116, V7-T1-233 and V7-T1-283. For pricing, reference the most recent PAD or VISTA-line. Step 5 Specify catalog numbers for desired operator, legend plate, light unit, accessory and contact block(s) for each location in the enclosure in the corresponding box on the following page. (See position locations on this page.) Step 8 Place your order over the VISTA System. Position 1 Position 2 For Selector and Roto-Push Operators Position 3 Position 4 Position Locations Step 6 For non-standard legends, specify legend desired, letter size and location on the layout sketches on the following page. For limitations see Page V7-T1-232. For pricing, use the blank legend catalog number and “STAMP” Suffix (Ex.: 10250TS36STAMP) and reference the most recent PAD or VISTA-line. 10250T or E34 For single contact blocks or 1NO-1NC contact blocks, the mounting position of contacts must be specified. For example: If a 1NO-1NC contact block is required, specify if NO is to be mounted in Top A position or Bottom B position. Example: 10250TS36 Special Legend for Position #_______ LETTER SIZE 3/32 in 1/8 in ✔ 3/16 in 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled To — Eaton’s TRC, Custom Station Order (828) 651-0549 FAX, or email to TRC@eaton.com 1 FACTORY USE ONLY Part Number 1 Product Code From — Customer Name ___________________________________________ Customer Contact __________________________________________ Suffix Phone Number_____________________________________________ Date 1 1 Engineer Fax Number _______________________________________________ 1 Email Address _____________________________________________ ✔ Step 3) Step 2) 10250T ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2 E34 ❏ STD ❏ Class I Division 2 1 Step 4) Enclosure Catalog Number Single Depth Enclosure Price Double Depth Enclosure 1 1 Step 5) Position Operator Price U.S. $ Light Unit Price U.S. $ Contact Block Price U.S. $ A/L B/R Contact Block Price U.S. $ A/L B/R Total Price 1 1 1 2 1 3 4 Position 1 1 Price U.S. $ Legend Plate Lens or Caps Price U.S. $ Accessory Price U.S. $ Total Price 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Total: 1 10% Adder for Assembled Stations Step 6) Non-standard Legends Special Legend for Position #_______ 1 1 Special Legend for Position #_______ Special Legend for Position #_______ 1 1 1 1 1 1 LETTER SIZE 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) ✔ LETTER SIZE ✔ LETTER SIZE 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) 3/16 inch (4.8 mm) ✔ 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-25 1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Renewal Parts Type N Renewal Parts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Assembled Stations—Type N 1 1 1 Item No. No. Req. Part Number Type N—Square Buttons 1 1 1 Description Cover Item No. Description No. Req. Part Number Type N—Square Buttons, continued 1 9 Pushbutton element 1 Two element 49-3524 1NO-1NC 86-2588 One element—top button 49-3524-2 2NO 86-2588-2 One element—bottom button 49-3524-3 1NO 86-2588-3 1NC 2 Cover screw 2 11-2168 3 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6649 10 Cover 1 49-3464 4 Pushbutton support bracket screw 1 11-2090 11 Pushbutton support bracket 1 79-6650 1 5 Pushbutton spring 2 69-2571 12 Pushbutton—top position 1 6 Disc (when used—two element assembly) 2 16-1960 1 7 Pushbutton—top position 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 53-1170-7 UP/black 53-1170-4 53-1169-3 RAISE/black 53-1170-5 RAISE/black 53-1169-66 OPEN/black 53-1170-9 FORWARD/black 53-1169-7 FAST/black OPEN/black 53-1169-9 UP/blank 53-1169-11 REVERSE/black 53-1169-15 Blank/green 53-1169 DOWN/black 53-1169-18 LOWER/black 53-1169-16 CLOSE/black 53-1169-17 Pushbutton—bottom position 13 1 53-1202-2 Extended STOP/red 53-1202-5 REVERSE/black 53-1169-8 CLOSE/black 53-1169-10 1 DOWN/black 53-1169-12 LOWER/black 53-1169-6 1 Blank/red 53-1202 1 FORWARD/black START/green STOP/red 1 86-2588-4 Pushbutton middle position 53-1170-6 1 SLOW/black 14 Pushbutton—bottom position 15 Pushbutton element 16 Cover 53-1169-13 1 STOP/red 53-1201-2 1 2NO-3NC 86-2593 1 1 1 V7-T1-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 49-3524-4 1.3 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Assembled Stations—Type N, continued Item No. No. Req. Description Part Number Type N—Square Buttons, continued 17 Item No. Description 1 No. Req. Part Number 1 10250H2538 Type N—Round Buttons Lens 1 Similar Pushbutton assembly and element for: to 27 10250H289 Clear 28-494 Red 28-887-2 10250H364 1 86-353 Amber 28-887-3 10250H685 1 86-353-8 18 Shield 1 73-1337 10250H665 1 86-353-8 19 Shield screws 4 11-2012 10250H671 1 86-353 20 Lamp (neon NE48) 1 28-494 10250H2738 1 86-353-3 21 Lamp receptacle 1 28-902 10250H2740 1 86-356 22 Lamp receptacle screw 1 911-330F1 10250H2741 1 86-356 23 Pilot light terminal base 1 86-2586 10250H2742 1 86-356 24 Lens 1 28-887 Red 28-887-2 Amber 28-887-3 Pushbutton support bracket 1 26 Pushbutton element 1 1NO-1NC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Clear 25 1 1 79-6650-2 1 86-2594 1 1 Type H Renewal Parts 7 1 7 7 8 1 6 9 10 12 10 1 5 5 4 1 4 1 5 4 1 3 3 1 11 1 1 Pushbutton 2 1 2 Indicating Light 2 1 Selector Switch 1 1 Assembled Stations—Type H Item No. Description No. Req. Part Number Type H—Assembled Stations Item No. Description 1 No. Req. Part Number Type H—Assembled Stations 1 Screw 2 11-4654 7 Screw 4 11-953 2 Screw 2 11-5719 8 Diaphragm 1 32-253-2 17-16560 9 3 Base 1 Mounting plate 1 17-19522 4 Contact blocks See Page V7-T1-235 10 Gasket 1 32-254 5 10250T operator See Pages V7-T1-188 to V7-T1-225 11 Base 1 17-16561 12 Mounting plate 1 17-19523 6 Mounting plate 1 17-19524 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-27 1.3 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled Technical Data and Specifications Ratings 1 1 Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type N Control Stations Volts AC 110 Volts DC 1 Description 220 440 550 120 240 600 Make and emergency interrupt capacity 30 15 7.5 6 1.0 0.5 0.1 1 Normal load break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 1.0 0.5 0.1 Continuous current 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 1 1 Maximum Ampere Ratings for Type H Control Stations Volts AC 50/60 Hz Volts DC Description 120 240 480 600 125 250 1 Make and emergency interrupt capacity 60 30 15 12 1.1 0.55 Normal load break 6 3 1.5 1.2 1.1 0.55 1 Continuous amperes 10 10 10 10 10 10 Make and emergency interrupt capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 1 1 1 Voltamperes — Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Type N Control Stations 4.00 (101.6) 1 1 4.00 (101.6) 3.25 (82.6) 6.00 (152.4) 3.25 (82.6) 5.00 (127.0) 1 1 1 1 1 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 a (57.2) 2.25 a (57.2) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) Single Button Station Two Button Station 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 a (57.2) Three Button Station Special Purpose Control Stations 1 1 5.50 (139.7) 6.25 (158.8) 1 1 1 1 1 2.25 (57.2) 3.13 (79.5) 3.38 (85.9) 0.75 (19.1) Pipe Tap Ship Wt. 2.5 Lb (1.1 kg) Note 1 2.38 (60.5) for neon indicating light. 1 V7-T1-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled 1.3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Type H Control Stations 1 NEMA Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 13 1 No. of Elements Dimensions Wide High Deep 1 and 2 4.50 (114.3) 8.25 (209.6) 4.50 (114.3) 3 4.50 (114.3) 10.75 (273.1) 4.25 (108.0) 1 1 1 10250T and E34 1 Approximate Enclosure Dimensions Surface Mounting Number of Elements Dimensions in In (mm) 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 1 Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3) 3/4 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 1 4 33.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6) 1 1 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1 1 2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1 1 3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1) 1 Conduit Entrance 1 1 Cast E B 1 1 D A 1 C Surface 1 Polyester 4 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1 1 1 Stainless Steel 1 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 1 1 2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5) 1 1 3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6) 1 1 4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8) 1 1 1 Note 1 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-29 1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Contents 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Description 1 Page 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-31 V7-T1-32 V7-T1-34 V7-T1-35 V7-T1-36 V7-T1-40 V7-T1-43 V7-T1-45 1 1 1 1 Product Overview 1 Product Description Features The RMQ-16 pushbutton line offers a wide array of functional and attractively designed illuminated and non-illuminated pushbuttons, selector switches, emergency stops and indicating lights. The illuminated line is offered with either incandescent or LED. RMQ-16 devices are designed with two front-ofpanel operator sizes. The 18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm square operators can help the user achieve over three times the information density compared with 22 mm ranges. ● 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● 1 1 1 Wide product breadth: RMQ-16 offers illuminated and non-illuminated pushbuttons, keyed, non-keyed, and illuminated selector switches, emergency stops, and a large variety of accessories Custom laser etching: Hundreds of standard markings available in addition to infinite possible custom images with laser etching High durability: Pushbuttons and selector switches rated for 3 million mechanical operations High information density: Square operators (18 mm or 25 mm) allow for sideby-side mounting and achieve over three times the information density of typical 22 mm installations Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● Laser etched operators Heavy-duty construction with IP65 on front of panel operators LED or incandescent illumination available Front-of-panel operators available in either 18 x 18 mm or 25 x 25 mm sizes Safety rated emergency stops (IEC 60947-5, positively driven contacts) Mounting diameter 16.2 mm to EN 50007 ● ● ● ● UL Listed CSA Certified IEC/EN 60947-5 VDE-0660 IP65 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Product Selection Guide 1 Pushbuttons 1 1 1 1 Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated Product Selection Page V7-T1-32 Page V7-T1-33 1 1 Indicating Lights 1 1 1 Description Flush Extended Product Selection Page V7-T1-34 Page V7-T1-34 1 1 1 Emergency Stops 1 1 1 Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated Product Selection Page V7-T1-35 Page V7-T1-35 1 1 Selector Switches 1 1 1 Description Non-Illuminated Illuminated Keyed Product Selection Page V7-T1-36 Page V7-T1-37 Page V7-T1-38 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-31 1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Q 18 – DR – BL / WB 1 1 1 Face Plate 18 = 18 x 18 mm 25 = 25 x 25 mm D= DR = LT = LTR = 1 Operator Type Non-illuminated momentary Non-illuminated maintained Illuminated momentary Illuminated maintained GN = RT = SW = WS = Button Plate Green BL = Blue Red GE = Yellow Black X = Without White Bulb WB = With incandescent bulb 24V 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons ● Momentary or maintained ● Customizable laser etched pushbutton operators ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator ● 3 million mechanical operations ● IEC/EN 60947-5 ● IP65 Q18-D-GN Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons Type 1 Momentary 1 1 1 1 Maintained 1 1 1 1 Button Color Catalog Number 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm Green Q18D-GN Q25D-GN Red Q18D-RT Q25D-RT Black Q18D-SW Q25D-SW White Q18D-WS Q25D-WS Blue Q18D-BL Q25D-BL Yellow Q18D-GE Q25D-GE Without Q18D-X 1 Q25D-X 1 Green Q18DR-GN Q25DR-GN Red Q18DR-RT Q25DR-RT Black Q18DR-SW Q25DR-SW White Q18DR-WS Q25DR-WS Blue Q18DR-BL Q25DR-BL Yellow Q18DR-GE Q25DR-GE Without Q18DR-X 1 Q25DR-X 1 Note 1 To order separate button plates, see Page V7-T1-42. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Illuminated Pushbuttons ● Momentary or maintained ● LED or incandescent ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator ● 3 million mechanical operations ● IEC/EN 60947-5 ● IP65 Q18-LT-GE 1 1 1 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons Without Bulb 1 1 Catalog Number 2 Type Button Color 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm Momentary Green Q18LT-GN Q25LT-GN Red Q18LT-RT Q25LT-RT Black Q18LT-SW Q25LT-SW White Q18LT-WS Q25LT-WS Blue Q18LT-BL Q25LT-BL Yellow Q18LT-GE Q25LT-GE Maintained Green Q18LTR-GN Q25LTR-GN Red Q18LTR-RT Q25LTR-RT Black Q18LTR-SW Q25LTR-SW White Q18LTR-WS Q25LTR-WS Blue Q18LTR-BL Q25LTR-BL Yellow Q18LTR-GE Q25LTR-GE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LT-GN/WB. 2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-40. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-33 1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Indicating Lights Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Indicating Lights—Flush and Extended Q 18 – LF – WS / WB 1 1 Face Plate 18 = 18 x 18 mm 25 = 25 x 25 mm 1 Bezel LF = Flush indicator light LH = Extended indicator light Button Plate GN = Green BL = Blue RT = Red GE = Yellow WS = White 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection Indicating Lights ● LED or incandescent ● Flush and extended lenses ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator ● 3 million mechanical operations ● IEC/EN 60947-5 ● IP65 1 Indicating Lights Without Bulb 1 1 Type Button Color 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm Flush Green Q18LF-GN Q25LF-GN Red Q18LF-RT Q25LF-RT 1 White Q18LF-WS Q25LF-WS Blue Q18LF-BL Q25LF-BL 1 Yellow Q18LF-GE Q25LF-GE Green Q18LH-GN Q25LH-GN Red Q18LH-RT Q25LH-RT 1 White Q18LH-WS Q25LH-WS Blue Q18LH-BL Q25LH-BL 1 Yellow Q18LH-GE Q25LH-GE 1 1 Bulb WB = With incandescent bulb 24V Q18-LF-GE Q18-LH-BL Extended. Catalog Number 2 Notes 1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18-LF-GN/WB. 2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-40. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Emergency Stops 1 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 1 Q 25 – LPV – S Face Plate 25 = 25 x 25 mm Operator Type PV = Emergency stop LPV = Emergency stop (illuminated) 1 1 Color Blank = Red S = Black 1 1 Product Selection 1 Emergency Stops ● Push/pull operation ● Illuminated or non-illuminated ● Emergency stop (red) or Machine stop (black) available ● Suitable for use in safety applications ● IEC/EN 60947-5 ● IP65 1 Q25PV Emergency Stops—Non-Illuminated 1 1 1 Q25LPV 1 Emergency Stops—Illuminated 1 Button Color Catalog Number 25 x 25 mm Button Color Catalog Number Red Q25PV Red Q25LPV Black Q25PV-S Black Q25LPV-S 1 25 x 25 mm 1 1 1 Note 1 Includes built-in multiple LED 24 Vdc. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-35 1.4 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated, Illuminated and Keyed Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated Q 18 – WK1R 1 1 Face Plate 18 = 18 x 18 mm 25 = 25 x 25 mm 1 WK1 = WK3 = WK1R = WK3R = WK3R1 = WK3R2 = 1 Selector Positions Two positions momentary Three positions momentary Two positions maintained Three positions maintained Three positions maintained/momentary Three positions momentary/maintained 1 1 Product Selection 1 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches ● Momentary or maintained ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator ● VS Anti-rotation feature ● 3 million mechanical operations ● IP65 1 Q18WK1 1 1 1 1 1 Selector Switches—Non-Illuminated Function Position Momentary 2 Switch Position Catalog Number 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm Q18WK1 Q25WK1 Q18WK1R Q25WK1R Q18WK3 Q25WK3 Maintained Q18WK3R Q25WK3R Maintained/momentary Q18WK3R1 Q25WK3R1 Momentary/maintained Q18WK3R2 Q25WK3R2 Maintained 1 Momentary 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Selector Switches—Illuminated 1 Q 18 – LWK1 – WS / WB Face Plate 18 = 18 x 18 mm 25 = 25 x 25 mm LWK1 = LWK3 = LWK1R = LWK3R = LWK3R1 = LWK3R2 = Switch Positions Two positions momentary Three positions momentary Two positions maintained Three positions maintained Three positions maintained/momentary Three positions momentary/maintained Button Plate GN = Green WS = White RT = Red 1 Bulb WB = With incandescent bulb 24V 1 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 Illuminated Selector Switches ● LED or incandescent ● Momentary or maintained ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator ● VS Anti-rotation feature ● 3 million mechanical operations ● IP65 Q18LWK1-GN 1 1 1 1 1 Selector Switches—Illuminated without Bulb 1 Function Position Button Color Momentary 2 Maintained Momentary Maintained Maintained/ momentary Momentary/ maintained 3 Switch Position Catalog Number 2 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm Green Q18LWK1-GN Q25LWK1-GN Red Q18LWK1-RT Q25LWK1-RT White Q18LWK1-WS Q25LWK1-WS Green Q18LWK1R-GN Q25LWK1R-GN Red Q18LWK1R-RT Q25LWK1R-RT White Q18LWK1R-WS Q25LWK1R-WS Green Q18LWK3-GN Q25LWK3-GN Red Q18LWK3-RT Q25LWK3-RT White Q18LWK3-WS Q25LWK3-WS Green Q18LWK3R-GN Q25LWK3R-GN Red Q18LWK3R-RT Q25LWK3R-RT White Q18LWK3R-WS Q25LWK3R-WS Green Q18LWK3R1-GN Q25LWK3R1-GN Red Q18LWK3R1-RT Q25LWK3R1-RT White Q18LWK3R1-WS Q25LWK3R1-WS Green Q18LWK3R2-GN Q25LWK3R2-GN Red Q18LWK3R2-RT Q25LWK3R2-RT White Q18LWK3R2-WS Q25LWK3R2-WS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 To order with incandescent 24V bulb, insert a /WB at the end of the catalog number. Example, Q18LWK1-GN/WB. 2 For a complete selection of incandescent 24V bulbs and LEDs, see Page V7-T1-40. 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-37 1.4 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Keyed Selector Switches—Two- and Three-Position Q 18 – S1 – A1 – WS 1 1 Face Plate 18 = 18 x 18 mm 25 = 25 x 25 mm 1 S1 = S1R = S3 = S3R = 1 Switch Positions Two positions momentary Two positions maintained Three positions momentary Three positions maintained Key Code A1–A7 = Switch and key removal positions (detailed below) GN = Green RT = Red SW = Black Color WS = White BL = Blue 1 1 Product Selection 1 Keyed Selector Switches ● 5 color options ● Momentary or maintained ● 18 mm or 25 mm square operator ● VS Anti-rotation feature ● 3 million mechanical operations ● IP65 1 1 1 1 Q18S1 Keyed Selector Switches—Two-Position Key Removal Position 1 Catalog Number 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm Black O Q18S1 Q25S1 Maintained Black O Q18S1R Q25S1R Maintained Black O Q18S1R-A1 Q25S1R-A1 Key Removal Position 1 Catalog Number 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm O Q18S3 Q25S3 Function Button Color 1 Momentary 1 1 1 Switch Position 1 1 Keyed Selector Switches—Three-Position 1 Function Button Color Momentary Black 1 Switch Position 1 Maintained O, II Q18S3R Q25S3R 1 Maintained O Q18S3R-A1 Q25S3R-A1 I, O Q18S3R-A2 Q25S3R-A2 O, II Q18S3R-A3 Q25S3R-A3 Maintained/ momentary I, O Q18S3R-A4 Q25S3R-A4 O Q18S3R-A5 Q25S3R-A5 Momentary/ maintained O, II Q18S3R-A6 Q25S3R-A6 O Q18S3R-A7 Q25S3R-A7 1 1 1 1 Note 1 I = Key is removed at the left. O = Key is removed at the center. II = Key is removed at the right. 1 1 1 V7-T1-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Q18S1-BL 1.4 Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Two-Position Catalog Number 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm 0 Q18S1-GN Q25S1-GN Red Q18S1-RT Q25S1-RT White Q18S1-WS Q25S1-WS Function Momentary Green Switch Position Blue Maintained 1 Key Removal Position 1 Button Color Q18S1-BL Q25S1-BL Q18S1R-GN Q25S1R-GN Red Q18S1R-RT Q25S1R-RT White Q18S1R-WS Q25S1R-WS Blue Q18S1R-BL Q25S1R-BL Green 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 Q18S3-RT Keyed Selector Switches, Multicolor—Three-Position Catalog Number 18 x 18 mm 25 x 25 mm 0 Q18S3-GN Q25S3-GN Red Q18S3-RT Q25S3-RT White Q18S3-WS Q25S3-WS Button Color Momentary Green Switch Position Blue Maintained 1 Key Removal Position 1 Function Q18S3-BL Q25S3-BL Q18S3R-GN Q25S3R-GN Red Q18S3R-RT Q25S3R-RT White Q18S3R-WS Q25S3R-WS Blue Q18S3R-BL Q25S3R-BL Green 0, II 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 I = Key is removed at the left. O = Key is removed at the center. II = Key is removed at the right. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-39 1.4 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Accessories E10 1 Contact Elements ISH2,8 Insulated Ferrule Feature Catalog Number Description Catalog Number Normally open (N/O) E10 Insulated ferrule ISH2,8 Normally closed (N/C) E01 1 1 R16-MS E01 1 1 VS 1 1 SRA10 1 1 Screw Adapter Feature Catalog Number Normally open (N/O) SRA10 Normally closed (N/C) SRA01 Lamp sockets SRAL E8-SW 1 WBGL6 1 1 WBLED-GN6 Voltage Current Color Catalog Number 6V 1W White WBGL6 Mounting ring tool 16-MS Anti-Rotation Tab Description Catalog Number Guard ring VS Housing Color Catalog Number Surface mount enclosure White I8 Flush mount panel White E8 Black E8-SW Q18BS Blanking Plug 12V WBGL12 Size Catalog Number 24–28V WBGL24 18 x 18 mm Q18BS 25 x 25 mm Q25BS LEDs (AC/DC) Voltage 1 Catalog Number Incandescent 24V Bulbs 1 1 Description Description 1 1 Combination Box Spanner Current Color Catalog Number Q25AGR Cover Plate Multiple Chip LED 1 6V 45 mA 12V 24 mA 1 6V 12V 24 mA 1 6V 45 mA 12V 24 mA 1 45 mA Green WBLED-GN6 WBLED-GN12 Red WBLED-RT6 1 1 1 7–12.5 mA Color Catalog Number 25 x 38 mm Black Q25AS Gray Q25AGR WBLED-RT12 Yellow WBGLED-GE6 WBGLED-GE12 Single Chip LED 1 18–30V Size Green LEDWB-G Red LEDWB-R White LEDWB-W Blue LEDWB-B Yellow LEDWB-Y Note 1 Positive pole to X1. Integral suppressor circuit up to 1000V. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 02SQ25 Insert Plate SQT11 Size 10 x 22 mm Q25TS-X BLANK 1.4 Emergency Stop Labels 1 Catalog Number Type Feature Catalog Number 02SQ25 Square 4 Languages SQT11 Blank SQT-GE 1 4 Languages SRT11 1 Blank SRT-GE Legend Plate SRT11 Size Color Catalog Number 25 x 38 mm Black Q25TS-X Gray Q25TGR-X Circle 1 1 1 1 Extra Keys Q25TS_ ES16 Legend Plate—Complete 1 Codes for Extra Keys Color Catalog Number Size Etching Catalog Number Green ES16-GN 25 x 38 START Q25TS-111 Red ES16-RT STOP Q25TS-110 Black ES16 FAULT Q25TS-250 White ES16-WS Blue ES16-BL HAND 0 AUTO Q25TS-197 MAN 0 AUTO Q25TS-397 0 1 1 1 1 Q25TS-10 I I 1 Q25TS-11 0 I Q25TS-90 0 II Q25TS-93 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-41 1.4 1 Button Plates 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Button Plates Type Color 18 x 18 mm Black 1 Etching Catalog Number Type Color — 01TQ18 25 x 25 mm Black CUSTOM 01TQ18-ETCH Etching Catalog Number — 01TQ25 CUSTOM 21TQ18 1 19TQ18 White 1 Green 1 02TQ18 “STOP” CUSTOM 02TQ18-ETCH “ON” 221TQ25 — 02TQ25 CUSTOM 02TQ25-ETCH — 03TQ25 03TQ25-ETCH — 03TQ18 CUSTOM 03TQ18-ETCH 11TQ18 1 Red 1 19TQ25 — 20TQ18 1 White Yellow 1 Blue — 04TQ18 CUSTOM CUSTOM 04TQ18-ETCH “START” 111TQ25 11TQ25 — 05TQ18 — 04TQ25 CUSTOM 05TQ18-ETCH Red CUSTOM 04TQ25-ETCH — 06TQ18 “STOP” 110TQ25 CUSTOM 06TQ18-ETCH 10TQ25 1 1 Yellow 1 Blue 1 112TQ25 20TQ25 Green 10TQ18 1 01TQ25-ETCH 21TQ25 “OFF” 217TQ25 — 05TQ25 CUSTOM 05TQ25-ETCH — 06TQ25 CUSTOM 06TQ25-ETCH Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions 1 1. Identify part number to be inscribed. 1 2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol. 3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix. 1 4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the web, reference order item number and indicate appropriate symbol code or desired text. 1 Example To order a 25 mm green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND: 1 1 Order Catalog Number 03TQ25-ETCH. AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-133 in the M22 Symbols Library, suffix code is X91. In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91. 1 Note: For a complete list of available symbols, see Pages V7-T1-130 to V7-T1-136, M22 Symbols Library. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.4 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Technical Data and Specifications 1 RMQ-16 Specification Description Unit Illuminated Pushbutton Operators (Maintained) Contact Elements Illuminated Selector Switches 1 Indicating Lights 1 General Technical Data Standards UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 105 100 30 (3) 3 — Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 (1800) 1800 — Operating force N 3 4 — Operating torque Nm Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529 — IP20 with ISH2,8 0.2 IP65 Climatic proofing IP65 1 1 — — 1 IP65 Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3/Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30 Ambient temperature Open °C Enclosed °C Mounting position –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 1 –25 to 60 1 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 As required As required As required As required 40 40 1 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 1 Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60 068-2-27 (half-sinusoidal shock, duration 11 ms) g 40 40 Terminal capacity (min./max.) mm2 0.5/1.0 0.5/1.0 Blade terminal 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 244 Ferrule 1 2.8 mm x 0.8 mm to DIN 46 247 and IEC 60 760 Dimensions See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 4000 800 800 800 250 250 250 250 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 1 Contacts Rated impulse withstand voltage U imp V Rated insulation voltage U i V Overvoltage category/pollution degree Rated operational voltage U e (max.) V 250 24 24 24 Rated operational current I e (max.) A 4 — — — Control circuit reliability at 24 Vdc/5 mA (Fault probability Hr) <10–7, <1 fault in 107 operations 5 Vdc/1 mA (Fault probability Hr) <5 x 10–6, < fault in 5 x 106 operations Use of insulated ferrule ISH 2.8 From U e >24 Vac/dc recommended From U e >24 Vac/dc recommended >24 Vac/dc recommended 1 1 1 1 >24 Vac/dc recommended >50 Vac or 120 Vdc is mandatory, even on unused blade terminals Maximum short-circuit protective device Fuseless Fuse 1 1 Type FAZ-B6 — — — A gG/gL 10 — — — 1 Switching Capacity Rated operational current I e AC-15 24V 1 A 4 — — — 48V A 4 — — — 110V A 4 — — — 230V A 4 — — — DC-13 24V A 3 — — — 42V A 1.0 — — — 60V A 0.8 — — — 110V A 0.5 — — — 220V A 0.2 — — — UL/CSA Data 1 1 1 1 1 1 UL listed File No. E 29 184, Guide No. NKCR/CSA certified File No. 46 552 Class No. 321103 Blade terminal 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in 300 24 Fast-on connector 0.110 x 0.032 in 0.110 x 0.032 in 1 0.110 x 0.032 in AMP #60 197-1, 62 050-1 or equivalent Rated voltage maximum AC Vac 24 24 Contact rating code AC E10/E01 C300/Q300 — — — Thermal continuous test current A 2.5 — — — Rated voltage maximum DC Vdc 300 — — — Contact rating code DC E10/E01 C300/R300 — — — Thermal continuous test current A 2.5 — — — Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 V7-T1-43 1.4 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 RMQ-16, continued Specification Description Unit Pushbutton Operators (Maintained) Selector Switches Key-Released Operators Emergency Stop Operators Emergency Stop Operators (Illuminated) 1 1 General Technical Data 1 Lifespan, mechanical (operations) x 105 30 (3) 3 3 0.5 0.5 Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 (1800) 1800 1800 600 600 1 Operating force N 4 — — 25 25 Operating torque Nm — — — IP65 IP65 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standards UL, CSA, IEC/EN 60 947, VDE 0660, CE Degree of protection to IEC/EN 60 529 0.2 IP65 IP65 Climatic proofing 0.4 IP65 Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60 068-2-3 Damp heat, cyclical, to IEC 60 068-2-30 Ambient temperature Open Enclosed °C –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 –25 to 60 °C –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 –25 to 40 As required As required As required As required As required 40 40 40 40 40 Mounting position Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60 068-2-27 (half-sinusoidal shock, duration 11 ms) g Terminal capacity (min./max.) mm2 –25 to 60 — — — — 0.5/1.0 Blade terminal — — — — 2.8 x 0.8 mm Ferrule — — — — 2.8 x 0.8 mm 1 Dimensions See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 See Page V7-T1-45 1 Lifespan, Electrical AC-15 to IEC/EN 60 947-5-1 at 230V 1 1 l e = Rated operational current Operations 5.0 x 10 6 4.0 1 E01 2.0 1 1 1 E10 3.0 0.9 1.0 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5 1 0.4 0.3 1 0.2 1 1 0.1 0.1 1 1 1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.9 2.0 0.6 0.8 1.0 3.0 4.0 l e [A] Note 1 See illuminated selector switches on Page V7-T1-37 for contact values. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 1.4 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 1 Actuating and Indicator Elements Square Style Q…BS M16 x 1 1 18.0 [0.71] 1 1 1 39.0 [1.54] Ø25.0 [0.98] Ø18.0 [0.71] 4.0 [0.16] Q…D-_, Q…DR-_ 1 24.0 [0.94] Q…S_ 1 Q…WK_ 1 1 1 39.0 [1.54] 39.0 [1.54] 11.0 [0.43] 39.0 [1.54] 17.0 [0.67] 1 26.0 [1.02] 1 13.0 [0.51] 1 Q…LT-_, Q…LTR-_, Q…LF-_ Q…LH-_ Q…LWK_ 1 1 1 49.0 [1.93] 49.0 [1.93] 11.0 [0.43] 16.0 [0.63] 1 49.0 [1.93] 1 26.0 [1.02] 1 Q25PV_, Q25LPV_ 1 1 Ø 28.0 [1.10] Ø 25.0 [0.98] 1 37.0 [1.46] 1 39.0 [1.54] 1 49.0 [1.93] 28.0 [1.10] 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-45 1.4 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 16.2 mm Pushbuttons—RMQ-16 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] Front Fixing Q18, Q25, E89, SRA, VS, M16 18.0 [0.71] E01, E10 ISH 2.8 [0.11] 1 1 1 49.0 [1.93] 6.0 [0.24] 58.0 [2.28] 1 1 1 Drilling Dimensions Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947 Minimum Grid Spacing Dimension Mounting Distance Drilling Q25 Q18 Mounting 18.0 [0.71] 1 25.0 [0.98] 1 1 16.2 [0.64] + 0.2 0 1 1 18.0 [0.71] 25.0 [0.98] RMQ Screw Adapter Anti-Rotation Feature RMQ-16 Label Mount SRA_ VS Q25TS-_ 1 14.9 [0.59] 1 12.0 [0.47] 22.0 [0.87] 1 17.8 [0.70] 38.0 [1.50] 1 1 17.8 [0.70] 18.5 [0.73] 13.0 [0.51] 1 5.6 [0.22] 1 1 1 25.0 [0.98] Blanking Plates Q25AS 1 4.0 [0.16] 1 1 38.0 [1.50] 1 13.0 [0.51] 1 12.0 [0.47] 1 25.0 [0.98] 1 V7-T1-46 Note 1 Exposed conductive part (metal). Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Contents 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Description Page 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coding Adapter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Library. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 V7-T1-48 V7-T1-111 V7-T1-118 V7-T1-119 V7-T1-123 V7-T1-129 1 1 1 1 Drawings Online 1 1 1 1 Product Description Eaton’s M22 industrial heavyduty pushbutton line offers a wide array of functional, attractive and ergonomically designed illuminated and nonilluminated pushbuttons, selector switches, push-pulls, alternate action and twist-torelease operators. The complete illuminated line is only offered in LED light units to ensure high-quality brightness and up to 100,000 hours of LED illumination. M22 operators are available with either a silver or black nylon colored or chrome metal bezel. The spacesaving modular construction of the M22 line makes onthe-job assembly fast and simplifies the stocking of both components and complete devices. Highly Modular and Versatile Line ● ● Field convertible functions (pushbuttons and selector switches), maintained to momentary Customizable laser engraving capabilities LED Indicators ● ● All operators and components are IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660. All operators carry an IP66 rating with some rated for washdown environment with IP67 and IP69K. All pushbuttons, emergencystops, indicating lights, potentiometers and selector switches carry NEMA 4X, 13. 1 Marine classification societies: Bureau Veritas (BV), Germanischer Lloyd (GL), and Lloyd’s Register of Shipping (LR) approved. 1 100,000 hours of life in high-vibration environments Lenses specifically designed for LED illumination ● ● ● 1 1 1 1 1 Most pushbutton operators and contact blocks exceed 5 million mechanical operations All components have IP66 rating, and some carry IP67 and IP69K for washdown environment; see Page V7-T1-119 for further technical data 1 1 1 1 Innovative Technologies ● 1 1 Rugged Design NEW Eaton has expanded M22 pilot devices with a metal bezel option. The new M22M pushbutton is an elegant chrome metal bezel that is attractive, durable and rugged for heavy-duty environments. M22M devices are configurable and complement components within the M22 line. 1 Standards and Certifications 1 ASi communicating devices Palm switches 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-47 1.5 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Features 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Benefits Field convertible pushbuttons and mushroom operators from maintained to momentary status Field convertible selector switches from momentary to maintained operation and vice versa LED offering only for all illuminated operators Laser engraved pushbuttons, lenses and enclosures Heavy-duty construction with a minimum of IP66 and UL NEMA® type 4X / 13 on front of panel operators. Many operators even carry IP67 and IP69K, for the toughest applications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Silver, black or chrome metal bezel now available Snap-lock contact blocks and light units for front or base mounting Notched hole mounting with anti-rotation tab and central nut mounting on each operator Over 5 million mechanical operations and 1.6 million electrical (reference specification sheet) Direct opening action normally closed contacts Unique and innovative offerings, such as four-way pushbuttons and USB/ RJ45 bulkhead interfaces Screw or spring-cage terminals 1 ● ● ● ● Modular construction makes assembly fast and simplifies stocking of components and complete devices Field convertibility of operator status for pushbuttons and selector switches helps distributors and customers reduce inventory and increase functionality LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation Plastic construction is corrosion resistant. Operators are designed for rugged environments, ideal for washdown applications (reference each operator’s IP ratings and IEC/EN 60529 for ingress protection definition) ● ● ● ● ● ● Anti-rotation tab saves installation time and prevents operator rotation High mechanical and electrical life allows for use in tough and challenging applications Laser inscription capabilities allow for highquality, wear-resistant markings All normally closed (NC) contacts are direct opening action, i.e., NC contacts are physically forced open by direct linkage with the pushbutton operator in the unlikely event of contact weld Some M22 operators are capable of communication via ASi protocol M22 offers USB and RJ45 connections 1 1 Product Selection Guide 1 Pushbuttons 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Non-illuminated, flush Operator Momentary Product Selection Pages V7-T1-53 to Pages V7-T1-56, V7-T1-55 V7-T1-57 Maintained Non-illuminated, extended Illuminated, flush Illuminated, extended Momentary Maintained Momentary Pages V7-T1-58, V7-T1-59 Pages V7-T1-60, V7-T1-61 Pages V7-T1-63 to Pages V7-T1-66, V7-T1-65 V7-T1-67 Maintained Momentary Maintained Pages V7-T1-68, V7-T1-69 Pages V7-T1-70, V7-T1-71 Indicating Lights 1 1 1 1 1 Description Flat Conical Product Selection Pages V7-T1-72, V7-T1-73 Pages V7-T1-72, V7-T1-73 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Emergency Stops 1 1 1 Description Non-illuminated Illuminated Key release Mechanical indication Product Selection Page V7-T1-75 Page V7-T1-75 Page V7-T1-76 Page V7-T1-76 1 1 1 Selector Switches 1 1 1 Non-illuminated knob type Non-illuminated rotary type Illuminated Key-operated Description 1 Product Selection Pages V7-T1-80, V7-T1-81 Pages V7-T1-82, V7-T1-83 Pages V7-T1-85 to V7-T1-87 Pages V7-T1-88 to V7-T1-91 1 1 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1 1 1 Description Non-illuminated Non-illuminated Operator Momentary Maintained Product Selection Pages V7-T1-94, V7-T1-95 Pages V7-T1-96, V7-T1-97 1 1 1 1 Double Pushbuttons 1 1 1 Description Extended pushbuttons and center light Flush top and center light, extended bottom Flush pushbuttons and center light Operator Momentary Momentary — Product Selection Page V7-T1-99 Page V7-T1-100 Page V7-T1-100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-49 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Four-Way Pushbuttons Bulkhead Interfaces 1 1 1 1 1 Description Non-interlocked Interlocked Description Bulkhead interfaces Operator Momentary Maintained Product Selection Page V7-T1-107 Product Selection Page V7-T1-103 Page V7-T1-103 1 1 ASi Adapter Modules Joysticks 1 1 1 1 1 Description Joysticks Description ASi adapter modules Product Selection Page V7-T1-104 Product Selection Page V7-T1-108 Palm Switches Potentiometers 1 1 1 1 Description Potentiometers Description Palm switches 1 Product Selection Page V7-T1-106 Product Selection Page V7-T1-109 1 Acoustic Devices Assembled Control Stations 1 1 1 Description Acoustic devices Description Assembled control stations 1 Product Selection Page V7-T1-106 Product Selection Page V7-T1-16 1 Through-the-Door Operators 1 1 1 1 Description Through-the-door operators Product Selection Page V7-T1-107 1 1 V7-T1-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-_ 1.5 Point-of-Purchase Units 1 Color Type Contact Configuration 1 Catalog Number Black Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-S-K11-P Red Extended momentary NO/NC M22-DH-R-K11-P Green Flush momentary NO/NC M22-D-G-K11-P Red Ext. illuminated (12–30V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-R-P Red Ext. illuminated (85–264V) momentary NO/NC M22-DLH-R-K11-230R-P White Flush illuminated (12–30V) maintained NO/NC M22-DRL-W-K11-W-P White Flush illuminated (85–264V) maintained NO/NC M22-DRL-W-K11-230W-P Red Indicating light (12–30V) — M22-L-R-R-P Green Indicating light (12–30V) — M22-L-G-G-P Red Indicting light (85–264V) — M22-L-R-230R-P Green Indicating light (85–264 Vac) — M22-L-G-230G-P Red Twist-to-release E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVT-K12-P Red Illuminated (12–30V) push-pull E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVL-K12-R-P Red Illuminated (85–264V) push-pull E-stop 1NO/2NC M22-PVL-K12-230R-P — Two-position maintained V selector switch NO/NC M22-WKV-K11-P — Three-position momentary selector switch NO/NC M22-WK3-K22-P 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-51 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contents Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Description 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 1 Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 pushbutton line is a complete, modular and versatile offering. From field-convertible maintained operators to customizable laser engraved buttons, the M22 pushbutton line provides endless opportunity for flexibility and reduced inventory. Each operator type provides options for ordering as complete or component parts allowing for a perfect fit for each application. All of this flexibility comes in a very rugged design. ● 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● Field convertible from maintained to momentary (available on maintained pushbuttons only) Customizable laser engraving on all buttons LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation More than five million mechanical operations on momentary and 1 million on maintained pushbuttons ● ● Modular construction makes assembly fast and simplifies stocking of components and complete devices Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP67, IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T1-53 V7-T1-56 V7-T1-58 V7-T1-60 V7-T1-63 V7-T1-66 V7-T1-68 V7-T1-70 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 M22 – D – S – X0 – K10 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black M22M = Metal D= DH = DG = DR = DGH = DRH = 1 Operator Type Flush momentary Extended momentary Flush with guard 1 Flush maintained Extended momentary with guard 1 Extended maintained Button Plate Color G = Green S = Black Y = Yellow R = Red B = Blue W = White GB0 = GB1 = GB2 = GB3 = GB4 = GB5 = GB6 = GB14 = GB15 = GB16 = Inscription STOP START CLOSE UP DOWN OFF ON RESET FORWARD REVERSE X0 = X1 = X4 = X5 = X6 = X7 = X8 = K10 = K01 = K20 = K02 = K11 = Contact Blocks 1NO K30 = 3NO 1NC K03 = 3NC 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC 1NO-1NC 1 1 1 1 1 Silver bezel only. 1 Product Selection 1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary M22-D-G-K10 1 Complete Devices Button Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Black NO M22-D-S-K10 M22S-D-S-K10 M22M-D-S-K10 NC M22-D-S-K01 M22S-D-S-K01 M22M-D-S-K01 2NO M22-D-S-K20 M22S-D-S-K20 M22M-D-S-K20 2NC M22-D-S-K02 M22S-D-S-K02 M22M-D-S-K02 1NO-1NC M22-D-S-K11 M22S-D-S-K11 M22M-D-S-K11 NO M22-D-R-K10 M22S-D-R-K10 M22M-D-R-K10 NC M22-D-R-K01 M22S-D-R-K01 M22M-D-R-K01 M22S-D-G-K10 Red M22M-D-G-K10 Green 2NO M22-D-R-K20 M22S-D-R-K20 M22M-D-R-K20 2NC M22-D-R-K02 M22S-D-R-K02 M22M-D-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22-D-R-K11 M22S-D-R-K11 M22M-D-R-K11 NO M22-D-G-K10 M22S-D-G-K10 M22M-D-G-K10 NC M22-D-G-K01 M22S-D-G-K01 M22M-D-G-K01 2NO M22-D-G-K20 M22S-D-G-K20 M22M-D-G-K20 2NC M22-D-G-K02 M22S-D-G-K02 M22M-D-G-K02 1NO-1NC M22-D-G-K11 M22S-D-G-K11 M22M-D-G-K11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-53 1.5 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary M22-D-G 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22S-D-G Operators Only 1 Button Color Inscription Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Black — M22-D-S M22S-D-S M22M-D-S Red — M22-D-R M22S-D-R M22M-D-R STOP M22-D-R-GB0 M22S-D-R-GB0 — M22M-D-R-X0 Green 1 1 1 1 M22M-D-G M22-D-R-X0 M22S-D-R-X0 — M22-D-G M22S-D-G M22M-D-G START M22-D-G-GB1 M22S-D-G-GB1 M22M-D-G-GB1 M22-D-G-X1 M22S-D-G-X1 M22M-D-G-X1 White — M22-D-W M22S-D-W M22M-D-W Blue — M22-D-B M22S-D-B M22M-D-B Yellow — M22-D-Y M22S-D-Y M22M-D-Y — — M22-D-X-SRG 2 M22S-D-X-SRG 2 M22M-D-X-SRG 2 — M22-D-X-SWRGYB 3 M22S-D-X-SWRGYB 3 M22M-D-X-SWRGYB 3 1 1 1 1 M22-DG-G Silver Guarded Button Color Inscription Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black — M22-DG-S 1 Red — M22-DG-R Green — M22-DG-G 1 White — M22-DG-W Blue — M22-DG-B Yellow — M22-DG-Y 1 — — M22-DG-X-SRG 2 — M22-DG-X-SWRGYB 3 1 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green). 3 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XD-G Button Plates 1 M22-D-X Color Inscription Catalog Number Black — Custom STOP START CLOSE UP DOWN OFF ON TEST FORWARD REVERSE RAISE LOWER M22-XD-S 2 M22-XD-S-ETCH 3 M22-XD-S-GB0 M22-XD-S-GB1 M22-XD-S-GB2 M22-XD-S-GB3 M22-XD-S-GB4 M22-XD-S-GB5 M22-XD-S-GB6 M22-XD-S-GB9 M22-XD-S-GB15 M22-XD-S-GB16 M22-XD-S-GB17 M22-XD-S-GB18 Red Green Blue — Custom STOP OFF — Custom START ON — Custom RESET White Yellow — Custom START — Custom Black, red, green — Black, white, — red, green, yellow, blue M22-XD-S-X0 M22-XD-S-X1 M22-XD-S-X2 M22-XD-S-X4 M22-XD-S-X5 M22-XD-S-X7 M22-XD-R 2 M22-XD-R-ETCH 3 M22-XD-R-GB0 M22-XD-R-GB5 M22-XD-R-X0 M22-XD-G 2 M22-XD-G-ETCH 3 M22-XD-G-GB1 M22-XD-G-GB6 M22-XD-G-X1 M22-XD-B 2 M22-XD-B-ETCH 3 M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XD-B-X6 M22-XD-W 2 M22-XD-W-ETCH 3 M22-XD-W-GB1 M22-XD-W-X1 M22-XD-Y 2 M22-XD-Y-ETCH 3 M22-XD-SRG M22-XD-SWRGYB 1 Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 Black Bezel Catalog Number 4 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 4 1 M22-D-X M22S-D-X M22M-D-X 1 M22S-D-X 1 1 1 M22M-D-X 1 1 M22-DG-X Silver Guarded 1 Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 1 M22-DG-X 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 5 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-55 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1 M22-DR-S Operators Only 2 1 Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black M22-DR-S M22S-DR-S M22M-DR-S 1 Red M22-DR-R M22S-DR-R M22M-DR-R Green M22-DR-G M22S-DR-G M22M-DR-G White M22-DR-W M22S-DR-W M22M-DR-W Blue M22-DR-B M22S-DR-B M22M-DR-B Yellow M22-DR-Y M22S-DR-Y M22M-DR-Y 3 M22-DR-X-SRG M22S-DR-X-SRG M22M-DR-X-SRG 4 M22-DR-X-SWRGYB M22S-DR-X-SWRGYB M22M-DR-X-SWRGYB 1 M22S-DR-S 1 1 Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 1 M22M-DR-S 1 1 1 Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green). 4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device to be set to either maintained or momentary operation. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XD-S Button Plates 2 M22-DR-X Color Inscription Catalog Number Black — Custom M22-XD-S 3 M22-XD-S-ETCH 4 STOP START CLOSE UP DOWN OFF ON TEST FORWARD REVERSE RAISE LOWER M22-XD-S-GB0 M22-XD-S-GB1 M22-XD-S-GB2 M22-XD-S-GB3 M22-XD-S-GB4 M22-XD-S-GB5 M22-XD-S-GB6 M22-XD-S-GB9 M22-XD-S-GB15 M22-XD-S-GB16 M22-XD-S-GB17 M22-XD-S-GB18 — Custom M22-XD-S-X0 M22-XD-S-X1 M22-XD-S-X2 M22-XD-S-X4 M22-XD-S-X5 M22-XD-S-X7 M22-XD-R 3 M22-XD-R-ETCH 4 Red STOP OFF Green Blue — Custom START ON — Custom RESET White — Custom START Yellow — Custom — — Black, red, green Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue M22-XD-R-GB0 M22-XD-R-GB5 M22-XD-R-X0 M22-XD-G 3 M22-XD-G-ETCH 4 M22-XD-G-GB1 M22-XD-G-GB6 M22-XD-G-X1 M22-XD-B 3 M22-XD-B-ETCH 4 M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XD-B-X6 M22-XD-W 3 M22-XD-W-ETCH 4 M22-XD-W-GB1 M22-XD-W-X1 M22-XD-Y 3 M22-XD-Y-ETCH 4 M22-XD-SRG M22-XD-SWRGYB 1 Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 5 Black Bezel Catalog Number 5 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 5 1 M22-DR-X M22S-DR-X M22M-DR-X 1 1 M22S-DR-X 1 1 M22M-DR-X 1 1 1 M22-K10 1 Contact Blocks 2 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 6 Catalog Number Screw NO M22-K10 NO, early-make M22-K10P NC M22-K01 NC, late-break M22-K01D NO M22-CK10 NC M22-CK01 NC, late-break M22-CK01D 2NO M22-CK20 2NC M22-CK02 NO-NC M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 5 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-57 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary M22-DH-R-K10 Complete Devices 1 Button Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Red NO M22-DH-R-K10 M22S-DH-R-K10 M22M-DH-R-K10 NC M22-DH-R-K01 M22S-DH-R-K01 M22M-DH-R-K01 2NO M22-DH-R-K20 M22S-DH-R-K20 M22M-DH-R-K20 2NC M22-DH-R-K02 M22S-DH-R-K02 M22M-DH-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22-DH-R-K11 M22S-DH-R-K11 M22M-DH-R-K11 1 M22S-DH-R-K10 1 1 1 M22M-DH-R-K10 1 1 1 M22-DGH-R-K10 Silver Guarded Button Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Silver Bezel Catalog Number Red NO M22-DGH-R-K10 1 NC M22-DGH-R-K01 2NO M22-DGH-R-K20 1 2NC M22-DGH-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22-DGH-R-K11 1 1 M22-DH-R Operators Only 2 1 Button Color Inscription Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Black — M22-DH-S M22S-DH-S M22M-DH-S Red — M22-DH-R M22S-DH-R M22M-DH-R STOP M22-DH-R-GB0 M22S-DH-R-GB0 M22M-DH-R-GB0 M22-DH-R-X0 M22S-DH-R-X0 M22M-DH-R-X0 1 M22S-DH-R 1 1 1 M22M-DH-R 1 Green — M22-DH-G M22S-DH-G M22M-DH-G White — M22-DH-W M22S-DH-W M22M-DH-W Blue — M22-DH-B M22S-DH-B M22M-DH-B Yellow — M22-DH-Y M22S-DH-Y M22M-DH-Y 3 — M22-DH-X-SRG M22S-DH-X-SRG M22M-DH-X-SRG 4 — M22-DH-X-SWRGYB M22S-DH-X-SWRGYB M22M-DH-X-SWRGYB 1 1 M22-DGH-R-K10 1 1 Silver Guarded Button Color Inscription Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black — M22-DGH-S Red — M22-DGH-R STOP M22-DGH-R-GB0 M22-DGH-R-X0 1 Green — M22-DGH-G 1 White — M22-DGH-W Blue — M22-DGH-B 1 Yellow — M22-DGH-Y Notes 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green). 4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue). 1 1 V7-T1-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDH-R Button Plates 1 M22-D-X Color Inscription Catalog Number Black — Custom STOP START CLOSE UP DOWN OFF ON TEST FORWARD REVERSE RAISE LOWER M22-XDH-S 2 M22-XDH-S-ETCH 3 M22-XDH-S-GB0 M22-XDH-S-GB1 M22-XDH-S-GB2 M22-XDH-S-GB3 M22-XDH-S-GB4 M22-XDH-S-GB5 M22-XDH-S-GB6 M22-XDH-S-GB9 M22-XDH-S-GB15 M22-XDH-S-GB16 M22-XDH-S-GB17 M22-XDH-S-GB18 Red Green — Custom STOP OFF — Custom START ON Blue — Custom RESET White Yellow Black, red, green Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue — Custom START — Custom — — M22-XDH-S-X0 M22-XDH-S-X1 M22-XDH-S-X2 M22-XDH-S-X4 M22-XDH-S-X5 M22-XDH-S-X7 M22-XDH-R 2 M22-XDH-R-ETCH 3 M22-XDH-R-GB0 M22-XDH-R-GB5 M22-XDH-R-X0 M22-XDH-G 2 M22-XDH-G-ETCH M22-XDH-G-GB1 M22-XDH-G-GB6 M22-XDH-G-X1 M22-XDH-B 2 Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 Black Bezel Catalog Number 4 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 4 1 M22-D-X M22S-D-X M22M-D-X 1 M22S-D-X 1 1 1 M22M-D-X 1 1 M22-DG-X 1 Silver Guarded Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 1 M22-DG-X 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 5 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 3 M22-XDH-B-ETCH 3 M22-XDH-B-GB14 M22-XDH-B-X6 M22-XDH-W 2 M22-XDH-W-ETCH 3 M22-XDH-W-GB1 M22-XDH-W-X1 M22-XDH-Y 2 M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 3 M22-XDH-SRG M22-XDH-SWRGYB 1 Buttonless Operator Spring-cage Notes 1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-59 1.5 1 1 M22-DRH-W 1 M22S-DRH-W 1 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Operators Only 2 Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Black M22-DRH-S M22S-DRH-S M22M-DRH-S Red M22-DRH-R M22S-DRH-R M22M-DRH-R Green M22-DRH-G M22S-DRH-G M22M-DRH-G White M22-DRH-W M22S-DRH-W M22M-DRH-W Blue M22-DRH-B M22S-DRH-B M22M-DRH-B Yellow M22-DRH-Y M22S-DRH-Y M22M-DRH-Y 3 M22-DRH-X-SRG M22S-DRH-X-SRG M22M-DRH-X-SRG 4 M22-DRH-X-SWRGYB M22S-DRH-X-SWRGYB M22M-DRH-X-SWRGYB M22M-DRH-W 1 1 1 Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 3 Buttonless operator comes with three color buttons (black, red, green). 4 Buttonless operator comes with all six color buttons (black, white, red, green, yellow, blue). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device to be set to either maintained or momentary operation. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDH-W Button Plates 2 M22-DR-X Color Inscription Catalog Number Black — Custom M22-XDH-S 3 M22-XDH-S-ETCH 4 STOP START CLOSE UP DOWN OFF ON TEST FORWARD REVERSE RAISE LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB0 M22-XDH-S-GB1 M22-XDH-S-GB2 M22-XDH-S-GB3 M22-XDH-S-GB4 M22-XDH-S-GB5 M22-XDH-S-GB6 M22-XDH-S-GB9 M22-XDH-S-GB15 M22-XDH-S-GB16 M22-XDH-S-GB17 M22-XDH-S-GB18 — Custom M22-XDH-S-X0 M22-XDH-S-X1 M22-XDH-S-X2 M22-XDH-S-X4 M22-XDH-S-X5 M22-XDH-S-X7 M22-XDH-R 3 M22-XDH-R-ETCH 4 Red STOP OFF Green Blue — Custom START ON — Custom RESET White — Custom START Yellow — Custom — — Black, red, green Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue M22-XDH-R-GB0 M22-XDH-R-GB5 M22-XDH-R-X0 M22-XDH-G 3 M22-XDH-G-ETCH 4 M22-XDH-G-GB1 M22-XDH-G-GB6 M22-XDH-G-X1 M22-XDH-B 3 M22-XDH-B-ETCH 4 M22-XDH-B-GB14 M22-XDH-B-X6 M22-XDH-W 3 M22-XDH-W-ETCH 4 M22-XDH-W-GB1 M22-XDH-W-X1 M22-XDH-Y 3 M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 4 M22-XDH-SRG M22-XDH-SWRGYB 1 Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 5 Black Bezel Catalog Number 5 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 5 1 M22-DR-X M22S-DR-X M22M-DR-X 1 1 M22S-DR-X 1 1 M22M-DR-X 1 1 1 M22-K10 1 Contact Blocks 2 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 6 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 5 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-61 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 M22 – DRL – R – GB0 – K10 – 230R 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black M22M = Metal 1 1 1 DL = DLH = DGL = DRL = DGLH = DRLH = 1 1 1 1 Operator Type Illuminated flush momentary Illuminated extended momentary Illuminated flush momentary with guard 1 Illuminated flush maintained Illuminated extended momentary with guard 1 Illuminated extended maintained W= R= G= Y= B= A= Lens Color White Red Green Yellow Blue Amber K10 = K01 = K20 = K02 = K11 = Contact Blocks 1NO K30 = 3NO 1NC K03 = 3NC 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC 1NO-1NC Light Units 12–30 Vac/Vdc W = White R = Red G = Green B = Blue 85–264 Vac 230W = White 230R = Red 230G = Green 230B = Blue Silver bezel only. Inscription GB0 = STOP GB1 = START GB2 = CLOSE GB3 = UP GB4 = DOWN GB5 = OFF GB6 = ON GB14 = RESET GB15 = FORWARD GB16 = REVERSE X0 = X1 = X4 = X5 = X6 = 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary M22-DL-G-K01-G 1 Complete Devices Button Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Red NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K01-R M22S-DL-R-K01-R M22M-DL-R-K01-R NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K01-230R M22S-DL-R-K01-230R M22M-DL-R-K01-230R 1 2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K02-R M22S-DL-R-K02-R M22M-DL-R-K02-R 2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K02-230R M22S-DL-R-K02-230R M22M-DL-R-K02-230R 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K11-R M22S-DL-R-K11-R M22M-DL-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-R-K11-230R M22S-DL-R-K11-230R M22M-DL-R-K11-230R NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K10-G M22S-DL-G-K10-G M22M-DL-G-K10-G NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K10-230G M22S-DL-G-K10-230G M22M-DL-G-K10-230G 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K20-G M22S-DL-G-K20-G M22M-DL-G-K20-G 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K20-230G M22S-DL-G-K20-230G M22M-DL-G-K20-230G 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K11-G M22S-DL-G-K11-G M22M-DL-G-K11-G 1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-G-K11-230G M22S-DL-G-K11-230G M22M-DL-G-K11-230G NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K10-W M22S-DL-W-K10-W — NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K10-230W M22S-DL-W-K10-230W M22M-DL-W-K10-230W 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K20-W M22S-DL-W-K20-W — 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K20-230W M22S-DL-W-K20-230W M22M-DL-W-K20-230W 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K11-W M22S-DL-W-K11-W — 1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DL-W-K11-230W M22S-DL-W-K11-230W M22M-DL-W-K11-230W M22S-DL-G-K01-G Green M22M-DL-G-K01-G White 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-63 1.5 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary M22-DL-G 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22S-DL-G 1 Operators Only 1 Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Red M22-DL-R M22S-DL-R M22M-DL-R Green M22-DL-G M22S-DL-G M22M-DL-G White M22-DL-W M22S-DL-W M22M-DL-W Blue M22-DL-B M22S-DL-B M22M-DL-B Yellow M22-DL-Y M22S-DL-Y M22M-DL-Y Amber M22-DL-A M22S-DL-A M22M-DL-A 1 1 M22M-DL-G 1 1 1 M22-DGL-G 1 1 1 1 Silver Guarded Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Red M22-DGL-R Green M22-DGL-G White M22-DGL-W Blue M22-DGL-B Yellow M22-DGL-Y Note 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-64 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDL-G Button Lenses 1 Color Inscription Catalog Number Red — Custom STOP OFF M22-XDL-R 2 M22-XDL-R-ETCH 3 M22-XDL-R-GB0 M22-XDL-R-GB5 M22-XDL-R-X0 M22-XDL-G 2 M22-XDL-G-ETCH 3 M22-XDL-G-GB1 M22-XDL-G-GB6 M22-XDL-G-X1 M22-XDL-B 2 Green Blue — Custom START ON — Custom RESET White Yellow Amber M22-DL-X M22-LED-W — Custom — Custom — Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 3 M22-XDL-B-GB14 M22-XDL-B-X6 M22-XDL-W 2 M22-XDL-W-ETCH 3 M22-XDL-Y 2 M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 3 M22-XDL-A M22-XDL-A-ETCH Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 Black Bezel Catalog Number 4 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DL-X M22S-DL-X M22M-DL-X M22S-DL-X Terminal Type LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue 12–30 Vac/Vdc Screw M22-K10 1 Light Units 1 85–264 Vac Catalog Number M22-LED-W M22-LED-R M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B 1 1 1 1 1 Contact Blocks 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 5 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22M-DL-X 1 1 M22-DGL-X Silver Guarded 1 Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 1 M22-DGL-X 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-65 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 2 M22-DRL-W-K10-W Complete Devices Button Color 1 White 1 1 M22S-DRL-W-K10-W 1 1 1 M22M-DRL-W-K10-W Contact Block Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K10-W M22S-DRL-W-K10-W M22M-DRL-W-K10-W NO 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K10-230W M22S-DRL-W-K10-230W M22M-DRL-W-K10-230W NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K01-W M22S-DRL-W-K01-W M22M-DRL-W-K01-W NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K01-230W M22S-DRL-W-K01-230W M22M-DRL-W-K01-230W 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K20-W M22S-DRL-W-K20-W M22M-DRL-W-K20-W 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K20-230W M22S-DRL-W-K20-230W M22M-DRL-W-K20-230W 2NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K02-W M22S-DRL-W-K02-W M22M-DRL-W-K02-W 2NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K02-230W M22S-DRL-W-K02-230W M22M-DRL-W-K02-230W 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DRL-W-K11-W M22S-DRL-W-K11-W M22M-DRL-W-K11-W 1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DRL-W-K11-230W M22S-DRL-W-K11-230W M22M-DRL-W-K11-230W 1 1 1 1 M22-DRL-W Operators Only 3 1 Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Red M22-DRL-R M22S-DRL-R M22M-DRL-R 1 Green M22-DRL-G M22S-DRL-G M22M-DRL-G White M22-DRL-W M22S-DRL-W M22M-DRL-W Blue M22-DRL-B M22S-DRL-B M22M-DRL-B Yellow M22-DRL-Y M22S-DRL-Y M22M-DRL-Y Amber M22-DRL-A M22S-DRL-A M22M-DRL-A 1 M22S-DRL-W 1 1 1 1 M22M-DRL-W 1 1 1 Notes 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 3 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device to be set to either maintained or momentary operation. 1 V7-T1-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained 1 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 1 Components M22-XDL-W Button Lenses 2 Color Inscription Catalog Number Red — M22-XDL-R 3 Custom STOP OFF White — Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 4 M22-XDL-R-GB0 M22-XDL-R-GB5 M22-XDL-R-X0 M22-XDL-G 3 M22-XDL-G-ETCH 4 M22-XDL-G-GB1 M22-XDL-G-GB6 M22-XDL-G-X1 M22-XDL-B 3 M22-XDL-B-ETCH 4 M22-XDL-B-GB14 M22-XDL-B-X6 M22-XDL-W 3 M22-XDL-W-ETCH 4 Yellow — Custom — Custom M22-XDL-Y 3 M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 4 M22-XDL-A M22-XDL-A-ETCH Green Blue Amber M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X M22-LED-W — Custom START ON — Custom RESET Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 5 Black Bezel Catalog Number 5 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 5 M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X M22M-DRL-X Light Units 2 Terminal Type LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue 12–30 Vac/Vdc Screw 85–264 Vac Catalog Number M22-LED-W M22-LED-R M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 2 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 6 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 5 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22M-DRL-X 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-67 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary M22-DLH-R-K11-R Complete Devices Button Color 1 Red 1 M22S-DLH-R-K11-R 1 Green White 1 Contact Block Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number M22M-DLH-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-R-K11-R M22S-DLH-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-R-K11-230R M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R M22M-DLH-R-K11-230R 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-G-K20-G M22S-DLH-G-K20-G M22M-DLH-G-K20-G 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-G-K20-230G M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G M22M-DLH-G-K20-230G 2NO 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-W-K20-W M22S-DLH-W-K20-W M22M-DLH-W-K20-W 2NO 85–264 Vac M22-DLH-W-K20-230W M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W M22M-DLH-W-K20-230W 1 1 Complete Press-to-Test Units 1 Button Color Light Unit Voltage Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-T-R-R M22S-T-R-R 1 1 Blue M22-T-B-B M22S-T-B-B Yellow M22-T-Y-W M22S-T-Y-W Green M22-T-G-G M22S-T-G-G 1 White M22-T-W-W M22S-T-W-W M22-T-R-230R M22S-T-R-230R 1 Blue M22-T-R-230B M22S-T-B-230B Yellow M22-T-Y-230W M22S-T-Y-230W Green M22-T-G-230G M22S-T-G-230G White M22-T-W-230W M22S-T-W-230W Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Red 1 1 1 M22-DLH-R Operators Only 2 Button Color 1 1 M22S-DLH-R 1 1 1 85–264 Vac Silver Bezel Catalog Number Red M22-DLH-R M22S-DLH-R M22M-DLH-R Green M22-DLH-G M22S-DLH-G M22M-DLH-G White M22-DLH-W M22S-DLH-W M22M-DLH-W Blue M22-DLH-B M22S-DLH-B M22M-DLH-B Yellow M22-DLH-Y M22S-DLH-Y M22M-DLH-Y Amber M22-DLH-A M22S-DLH-A M22M-DLH-A M22M-DLH-R 1 1 1 1 M22-DGLH-R 1 1 1 1 Silver Guarded Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Red M22-DGLH-R Green M22-DGLH-G White M22-DGLH-W Blue M22-DGLH-B Yellow M22-DGLH-Y Notes 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 V7-T1-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDH-R Button Lenses 1 Color Inscription Catalog Number Red — Custom STOP OFF M22-XDLH-R 2 M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 3 M22-XDLH-R-GB0 M22-XDLH-R-GB5 M22-XDLH-R-X0 M22-XDLH-G 2 M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 3 M22-XDLH-G-GB1 M22-XDLH-G-GB6 M22-XDLH-G-X1 M22-XDLH-B 2 M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 3 M22-XDLH-B-GB14 M22-XDLH-B-X6 M22-XDLH-W 2 M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 3 M22-XDLH-Y 2 M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 3 M22-XDLH-A M22-XDLH-A-ETCH Green Blue White Yellow Amber M22-DL-X M22-LED-W — Custom START ON — Custom RESET — Custom — Custom — Custom Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 Black Bezel Catalog Number 4 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DL-X M22S-DL-X M22M-DL-X M22S-DL-X 1 Light Units 1 Terminal Type LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Red Green Blue White Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc Screw 85–264 Vac Green Blue Catalog Number 1 M22-LED-W M22-LED-R M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R 1 M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B 1 1 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 5 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. M22M-DL-X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22-DGL-X Silver Guarded 1 Silver Bezel Catalog Number 4 1 M22-DGL-X 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-69 1.5 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1 M22-DRLH-W 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22S-DRLH-W 1 Operators Only 2 Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Red M22-DRLH-R M22S-DRLH-R M22M-DRLH-R Green M22-DRLH-G M22S-DRLH-G M22M-DRLH-G White M22-DRLH-W M22S-DRLH-W M22M-DRLH-W Blue M22-DRLH-B M22S-DRLH-B M22M-DRLH-B Yellow M22-DRLH-Y M22S-DRLH-Y M22M-DRLH-Y Amber M22-DRLH-A M22S-DRLH-A M22M-DRLH-A 1 1 M22M-DRLH-W 1 1 1 Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device to be set to either maintained or momentary operation. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained 1 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDLH-W Button Lenses 2 Color Inscription Catalog Number Red — Custom STOP OFF M22-XDLH-R 3 M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 4 M22-XDLH-R-GB0 M22-XDLH-R-GB5 M22-XDLH-R-X0 M22-XDLH-G 3 M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 4 M22-XDLH-G-GB1 M22-XDLH-G-GB6 M22-XDLH-G-X1 M22-XDLH-B 3 M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 4 M22-XDLH-B-GB14 M22-XDLH-B-X6 M22-XDLH-W 3 M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 4 M22-XDLH-Y 3 M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 4 M22-XDLH-A M22-XDLH-A-ETCH Green Blue White Yellow Amber M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X M22-LED-W — Custom START ON — Custom RESET — Custom — Custom — Custom Buttonless Operator Silver Bezel Catalog Number 5 Black Bezel Catalog Number 5 Metal Bezel Catalog Number 5 M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X M22M-DRL-X 1 Light Units 2 Terminal Type LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Red Green Blue White Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc Screw 85–264 Vac Green Blue Catalog Number 1 M22-LED-W M22-LED-R M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R 1 M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B 1 1 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 2 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 6 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 2 For complete listing of available button lenses, light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDLH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 5 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. M22M-DRL-X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-71 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Indicating Lights Product Description 1 1 1 1 Features Eaton’s M22 indicating lights use the combination of a durable, bright LED unit and modern lenses designed specifically for this type of LED to create a bright and visible indicating light. As with the pushbuttons, the indicating light lenses can be laser engraved. Indicating lights can be ordered as complete devices, including lens and LED unit, or as modular components. ● ● ● 1 Customizable laser engraving on all lenses LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation Lenses designed specifically for LED illumination 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Indicating Lights M22 - L – B – GB8 – B 1 Operator Type M22-L = Flush indicating light 1 W= R= G= Y= B= 1 1 Lens Color White Red Green Yellow Blue Plate Inscription ETCH = GB5 = GB6 = GB8 = GB15 = GB16 = 1 1 1 Modular construction makes assembly fast and simplifies stocking of components and complete devices ● Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP67, IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 ● Note: Light unit should match color of lens. Use white light unit with yellow lens. Custom 1 OFF ON FAULT FORWARD REVERSE 12–30 Vac/Vdc W = White R = Red G = Green B = Blue Light Units 85–264 Vac 230W = White 230R = Red 230G = Green 230B = Blue When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-L-B-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. Product Selection 1 Indicating Lights, Flush 1 M22-L-R-R 1 1 1 1 1 1 Complete Devices Lens Color Light Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number White Red Green Yellow Blue Amber White Red Green Yellow Blue Amber White Red Green White Blue White White Red Green White Blue White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-L-W-W M22-L-R-R M22-L-G-G M22-L-Y-W M22-L-B-B M22-L-A-W M22-L-W-230W M22-L-R-230R M22-L-G-230G M22-L-Y-230W M22-L-B-230B M22-L-A-230W 85–264 Vac 1 Operators Only 1 1 1 Lens Color M22-L-R 1 1 1 Flat White Red Green Yellow Blue Amber Catalog Number Lens Color Catalog Number M22-L-W M22-L-R M22-L-G M22-L-Y M22-L-B M22-L-A Conical White Red Green Yellow Blue Amber M22-LH-W M22-LH-R M22-LH-G M22-LH-Y M22-LH-B M22-LH-A M22-LH-R Note 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 V7-T1-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Indicating Lights, Flush 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XL-R Lenses 1 Color M22-LED-W Inscription Catalog Number Flat Red Green Blue White Yellow Amber Conical Red Green Blue White Yellow Amber M22-L-X — Custom OFF — Custom ON REVERSE — Custom M22-XL-R 2 M22-XL-R-ETCH 3 M22-XL-R-GB5 M22-XL-G 2 M22-XL-G-ETCH 3 M22-XL-G-GB6 M22-XL-G-GB16 M22-XL-B 2 M22-XL-B-ETCH 3 FAULT — Custom M22-XL-B-GB8 M22-XL-W 2 M22-XL-W-ETCH 3 OFF ON FAULT FORWARD — Custom — Custom M22-XL-W-GB5 M22-XL-W-GB6 M22-XL-W-GB8 M22-XL-W-GB15 M22-XL-Y 2 M22-XL-Y-ETCH 3 M22-XL-A 2 M22-XL-A-ETCH 3 — — — — — — M22-XLH-R M22-XLH-G M22-XLH-B M22-XLH-W M22-XLH-Y M22-XLH-A Light Units 14 Terminal Type LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue 12–30 Vac/Vdc Screw 85–264 Vac 1 Catalog Number M22-LED-W M22-LED-R M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow and amber lenses, choose a white LED. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Lensless Indicating Light Catalog Number 1 M22-L-X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-73 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Emergency Stops Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 emergency stops are a durable and reliable solution to a variety of e-stop applications. With standard push-pull, as well as twist-to-release and keyrelease, illuminated options and red or black operators, the M22 e-stop is a robust solution. As with all operators, they can be ordered as a ready to install complete device or as modular components for the perfect fit. ● ● ● ● Push-pull and twist to release options available as well as illuminated and keyed release LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation More than 100,000 mechanical operations Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules ● Suitable for use in safety applications up to Category-4 or Sil-3 Protection Type ● IP67, IP69K (IP66 key-release) ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Emergency Stops M22 – PVT – MS2 – K10 – 230R 1 1 Operator Color M22 = Silver M22S = Black 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PV = PV45P = PV60P = PV45P-MPI = PV60P-MPI = PVT = PVT45P = PVT60P = PVT45P-MPI = PVT60P-MPI = PVS = PVS45P = PVS60P = PVL = PVLT = PVLT45P = PVLT60P = Operator Type Non-illuminated push-pull emergency stop Non-illuminated 45 mm emergency stop Non-illuminated 60 mm emergency stop Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 45 mm Non-illuminated mechanical indication, 60 mm Non-illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop Non-illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop Non-illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical indication, 45 mm Non-illuminated twist-to-release with mechanical indication, 60 mm Non-illuminated keyed release (red operator only) Non-illuminated keyed release 45 mm (red only) Non-illuminated keyed release 60 mm (red only) Illuminated push-pull emergency stop Illuminated twist-to-release emergency stop Illuminated twist-to-release 45 mm emergency stop Illuminated twist-to-release 60 mm emergency stop Key Release Code Blank = MS1 MS2 = MS2 MS3 = MS3 MS4 = MS4 MS5 = MS5 MS6 = MS6 MS7 = MS7 MS8 = MS8 RS = Ronis (45 and 60 mm only) Contact Blocks K10 = NO K10P = NO, early-make K01 = NC K01D = NC, late-break CK10 = NO CK01 = NC CK01D = NC, late-break Ck20 = 2NO CK02 = 2NC CK11 = NO-NC Light Units 12–30 Vac/Vdc W = White R = Red G = Green B = Blue 85–264 Vac 230W = White 230R = Red 230G = Green 230B = Blue 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Product Selection 1 Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops 1 Complete Devices Type M22-PV-K01 LED Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number — NC — M22-PV-K01 1 1 Non-Illuminated Push-pull Twist-to-release Key release M22-PVL-K01-R Button Color Red Red Red — — 2NC M22-PV-K02 1NO-2NC M22-PV-K12 NC — M22-PVT-K02 1NO-2NC M22-PVT-K12 — 1 M22-PVT-K01 2NC NC 1 1 1 M22-PVS-K01 2NC M22-PVS-K02 1NO-2NC M22-PVS-K12 1 Illuminated Push-pull Red Red NC M22-PVL-K02-R 1NO-2NC M22-PVL-K12-R Red Red 85–264 Vac M22-PVL-K02-230R 1NO-2NC M22-PVL-K12-230R 12–30 Vac/Vdc 2NC 1 1 M22-PVLT-K01-R 1 M22-PVLT-K02-R 1NO-2NC NC 1 M22-PVL-K01-230R 2NC NC 1 M22-PVL-K01-R 2NC NC Twist-to-release 12–30 Vac/Vdc 1 M22-PVLT-K12-R 85–264 Vac M22-PVLT-K01-230R 2NC M22-PVLT-K02-230R 1NO-2NC M22-PVLT-K12-230R 1 1 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-75 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Emergency Stops 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 1 1 Components M22-PVL 1 Push-Pull Emergency Stops Actuator Size Catalog Number Actuator Size Key Code Catalog Number None 35 mm M22-PV 35 mm MS1 M22-PVS 3 45 mm M22-PV45P MS2 M22-PVS-MS2 60 mm M22-PV60P MS3 M22-PVS-MS3 35 mm M22-PVL MS4 M22-PVS-MS4 45 mm M22-PVL45P MS5 M22-PVS-MS5 60 mm M22-PVL60P MS6 M22-PVS-MS6 45 mm M22-PV45P-MPI MS7 M22-PVS-MS7 60 mm M22-PV60P-MPI MS8 M22-PVS-MS8 MS1 M22-PVS45P MS2 M22-PVS45P-MS2 MS3 M22-PVS45P-MS3 MS4 M22-PVS45P-MS4 MS5 M22-PVS45P-MS5 MS6 M22-PVS45P-MS6 MS7 M22-PVS45P-MS7 MS8 M22-PVS45P-MS8 Ronis M22-PVS45P-RS MS1 M22-PVS60P MS2 M22-PVS60P-MS2 MS3 M22-PVS60P-MS3 MS4 M22-PVS60P-MS4 MS5 M22-PVS60P-MS5 MS6 M22-PVS60P-MS6 MS7 M22-PVS60P-MS7 MS8 M22-PVS60P-MS8 Ronis M22-PVS60P-RS LED illumination 1 Mechanical indication 1 1 1 45 mm M22-PVT45P-MPI Twist-to-Release Emergency Stops Illumination/Indication 1 None 1 Actuator Size 35 mm 45 mm 60 mm 1 LED illumination 35 mm 1 1 Mechanical indication M22S-PVLT 1 1 1 M22-PVT M22-PVT45P M22-PVT60P M22-PVLT M22-PVLT45P 60 mm M22-PVLT60P 45 mm M22-PVT45P-MPI M22-PVT60P-MPI Machine Stop Operators (Black) 1 Illumination Type Actuator Size Catalog Number Non-illuminated Push-pull 35 mm M22S-PV Twist-torelease 35 mm M22S-PVT Push-pull 35 mm M22S-PVL Twist-torelease 35 mm M22S-PVLT LED illumination 1 Catalog Number 45 mm 60 mm 1 1 Key Release Emergency Stops 2 Illumination/Indication 1 1 M22-PVS60P-MS1 60 mm Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with actuator; additional keys are available as accessories. 3 Includes Key Code MS1. 1 1 V7-T1-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 Accessories Terminal Type Mounting Contact Location 2 Configuration 3 Catalog Number Screw Front Base Springcage Front NO M22-K10 NO, early-make M22-K10P NC M22-K01 NC, late-break M22-K01D SMCB, NC M22-K01SMC10 SMCB, 2NC M22-K02SMC10 SMCB, NC M22-KC01SMC10 SMCB, 2NC M22-KC02SMC10 NO M22-CK10 NC M22-CK01 NC, late-break M22-CK01D 2NO M22-CK20 2NC M22-CK02 NO-NC M22-CK11 M22-XGPV Voltage Catalog Number Yellow guard ring — M22-XGPV M22G-XGPV Gray guard ring — M22G-XGPV Screw Screw Screw LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number White 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-R Rectangular guard — M22-MGTA 1 1 Sealing shroud — M22-PL-PV M22-XPV60-Y-120 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-R 230 Vac White 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-W Red 207–264 Vac M22-LED230H-R MS1 M22-ES-MS1 MS2 M22-ES-MS2 MS3 M22-ES-MS3 MS4 M22-ES-MS4 MS5 M22-ES-MS5 MS6 M22-ES-MS6 MS7 M22-ES-MS7 MS8 M22-ES-MS8 1 1 White Catalog Number 1 1 Red For Key Code 1 1 M22-MGTA 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac Extra Keys 4 1 1 Light Units 1 Terminal Type M22-ES-MS1 Description 1 M22-PL-PV M22-LED-W 1.5 Illuminated ring M22-XPV60-Y-24 M22-XPV60-Y-120 M22-XPV60-Y-230 1 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Self-monitoring contact blocks (SMCB type) cannot be used with illuminated emergency stops. 3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 For use with key release operators only. One key included with operator. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-77 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contents Selector Switches Description 1 Selector Switches Non-Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Selector Switches 1 Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 selector switch line offers an almost endless variety of options in maintained/momentary, keyremoval and illuminated devices. The coding adapters used for maintained/ momentary and key removal positions make the M22 stand out from competitive devices. By simply adding or removing a coding adapter from inside the operator, the end-user can change the function of the button. Operator options include standard knob, rotary head, illuminated and keyed versions. As with all operators, they can be ordered as a ready to install complete device or as modular components to meet application specific requirements. ● 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● Adding or removing coding adapters allows for field convertibility of maintained/momentary and key removal positions LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation More than 100,000 mechanical operations ● ● Coding adapter options make assembly fast and simplify stocking of different configurations of selector switches Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP66 ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T1-79 V7-T1-84 V7-T1-88 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches 1 M22 – WRK – – X91 – K10 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black M22M = Metal Inscription 2 X91 = AUTO-HAND X92 = II-I 2 W= WK = WKV = WR = WRK = 1 Handle Type 1 Momentary rotary Momentary knob Maintained V-position knob Maintained rotary Maintained knob Number of Positions Blank = Two-position 3 = Three-position 4 = Four-position Contact Blocks K10 = NO K10P = NO, early-make Rotary type only. K11 = K22 = K20 = K02 = 1 1 Options NO-NC 2NO-2NC 2NO 2NC 1 1 1 All momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a colorcoded adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-79 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection Non-Illuminated Selector Switches 1 M22-WKV-K10 1 1 Complete Devices, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Two-position Maintained 40° 1 1 Contact Block Configuration 2 Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number NO M22-WRK-K10 M22S-WRK-K10 M22M-WRK-K10 1NO-1NC M22-WRK-K11 M22S-WRK-K11 M22M-WRK-K11 2NO-2NC M22-WRK-K22 M22S-WRK-K22 M22M-WRK-K22 M22M-WKV-K10 Maintained V 60° 1 1 Three-position 1 Maintained 60° 1 NO M22-WKV-K10 M22S-WKV-K10 M22M-WKV-K10 1NO-1NC M22-WKV-K11 M22S-WKV-K11 M22M-WKV-K11 2NO-2NC M22-WKV-K22 M22S-WKV-K22 M22M-WKV-K22 2NO M22-WRK3-K20 M22S-WRK3-K20 M22M-WRK3-K20 2NO-2NC M22-WRK3-K22 M22S-WRK3-K22 M22M-WRK3-K22 60° Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches 1 Components M22-WK 1 Operators Only, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Two-position Momentary 2 M22-WK M22S-WK M22M-WK 1 M22-WRK M22S-WRK M22M-WRK M22-WKV M22S-WKV M22M-WKV 40° 1 Maintained 1 40° M22M-WK 1 Maintained V 1 60° Three-position Momentary 40° 2 M22M-WK3 M22-WRK3 M22S-WRK3 M22M-WRK3 M22-WRK3-2 M22S-WRK3-2 M22M-WRK3-2 M22-WRK3-1 M22S-WRK3-1 M22M-WRK3-1 1 1 1 60° 1 Maintained, return from left 40° M22S-WK3 40° Maintained 60° M22-WK3 40° 60° 1 60° 1 Maintained, return from right 40° Four-position Maintained 40° 60° 1 60° M22-WRK4 M22S-WRK4 1 M22M-WRK4 1 1 1 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-118. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-81 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches Components 1 1 M22S-WR3-X94 1 Operators Only, Rotary Type 1 Type Switching Position Inscription Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Two-position Momentary 2 I-O M22-W M22S-W M22M-W I-O M22-WR M22S-WR M22M-WR Custom M22-WR-ETCH 3 M22S-WR-ETCH 3 M22M-WR-ETCH 3 AUTO-HAND M22-WR-X91 M22S-WR-X91 M22M-WR-X91 II-I M22-WR-X92 M22S-WR-X92 M22M-WR-X92 I-O-II M22-W3 M22S-W3 M22M-W3 I-O-II M22-WR3 M22S-WR3 M22M-WR3 Custom M22-WR3-ETCH 3 M22S-WR3-ETCH 3 M22M-WR3-ETCH 3 AUTO-O-MAN M22-WR3-X94 M22S-WR3-X94 M22M-WR3-X94 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-WR4 M22S-WR4 M22M-WR4 40° 1 1 Maintained 40° 1 1 Three-position 1 Momentary 2 40° 1 40° Maintained 1 60° 1 Four-position Maintained 60° 1 1 1 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-118. 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 Accessories Terminal Type Contact Configuration 2 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage M22-XW Description Catalog Number Plunger bridge 3 M22-XW 1 1 1 M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS 1 1 M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 4 M22-XC-R 1 1 M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y 1 1 1 M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 3 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated three-position selector switches only. 4 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-83 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Illuminated Selector Switches 1 M22 – WLK – R – K10 – R 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black M22M = Metal 1 1 1 Handle Type WLK = Illuminated knob type momentary, two-position WLKV = Illuminated Knob type momentary, V-position WLK3 = Illuminated knob type momentary, three-position 1 1 Handle Color W = White R = Red G = Green Y = Yellow B = Blue K10 = K01 = K20 = K02 = K11 = Contact Blocks 1NO K30 = 3NO 1NC K03 = 3NC 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC 1NO-1NC Light Units 12–30 Vac/Vdc W = White R = Red G = Green B = Blue 85–264 Vac 230W = White 230R = Red 230G = Green 230B = Blue 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection 1 Illuminated Selector Switches 1 Components M22-WLK-W 1 Operators Only, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Two-position Momentary 2 White M22-WLK-W M22S-WLK-W M22M-WLK-W 1 Red M22-WLK-R M22S-WLK-R M22M-WLK-R Green M22-WLK-G M22S-WLK-G M22M-WLK-G Yellow M22-WLK-Y M22S-WLK-Y M22M-WLK-Y Blue M22-WLK-B M22S-WLK-B M22M-WLK-B 40° Maintained 40° Maintained V 60° 1 1 White M22-WRLK-W M22S-WRLK-W M22M-WRLK-W Red M22-WRLK-R M22S-WRLK-R M22M-WRLK-R Green M22-WRLK-G M22S-WRLK-G M22M-WRLK-G Yellow M22-WRLK-Y M22S-WRLK-Y M22M-WRLK-Y Blue M22-WRLK-B M22S-WRLK-B M22M-WRLK-B White M22-WLKV-W M22S-WLKV-W M22M-WLKV-W Red M22-WLKV-R M22S-WLKV-R M22M-WLKV-R Green M22-WLKV-G M22S-WLKV-G M22M-WLKV-G Yellow M22-WLKV-Y M22S-WLKV-Y M22M-WLKV-Y Blue M22-WLKV-B M22S-WLKV-B M22M-WLKV-B Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-118. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-85 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Illuminated Selector Switches Components 1 1 M22-WLK3-W 1 1 Operators Only, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Three-position Momentary 2 White M22-WLK3-W M22S-WLK3-W M22M-WLK3-W Red M22-WLK3-R M22S-WLK3-R M22M-WLK3-R Green M22-WLK3-G M22S-WLK3-G M22M-WLK3-G Yellow M22-WLK3-Y M22S-WLK3-Y M22M-WLK3-Y Blue M22-WLK3-B M22S-WLK3-B M22M-WLK3-B White M22-WRLK3-W M22S-WRLK3-W M22M-WRLK3-W Red M22-WRLK3-R M22S-WRLK3-R M22M-WRLK3-R Green M22-WRLK3-G M22S-WRLK3-G M22M-WRLK3-G Yellow M22-WRLK3-Y M22S-WRLK3-Y M22M-WRLK3-Y Blue M22-WRLK3-B M22S-WRLK3-B M22M-WRLK3-B M22M-WRLK3-1-W 40° 40° 1 1 Maintained 1 60° 60° 1 1 Maintained, return from right 40° 1 40° 60° 60° 1 1 Maintained, return from left 1 40° 1 40° 60° 60° White M22-WRLK3-1-W M22S-WRLK3-1-W Red M22-WRLK3-1-R M22S-WRLK3-1-R M22M-WRLK3-1-R Green M22-WRLK3-1-G M22S-WRLK3-1-G M22M-WRLK3-1-G Yellow M22-WRLK3-1-Y M22S-WRLK3-1-Y M22M-WRLK3-1-Y Blue M22-WRLK3-1-B M22S-WRLK3-1-B M22M-WRLK3-1-B White M22-WRLK3-2-W M22S-WRLK3-2-W M22M-WRLK3-2-W Red M22-WRLK3-2-R M22S-WRLK3-2-R M22M-WRLK3-2-R Green M22-WRLK3-2-G M22S-WRLK3-2-G M22M-WRLK3-2-G Yellow M22-WRLK3-2-Y M22S-WRLK3-2-Y M22M-WRLK3-2-Y Blue M22-WRLK3-2-B M22S-WRLK3-2-B M22M-WRLK3-2-B Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-118. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Illuminated Selector Switches 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. M22-LED-W Light Units 1 5 LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue 12–30 Vac/Vdc 85–264 Vac Catalog Number M22-LED-W M22-LED-R M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B M22-XW Description Catalog Number Plunger bridge 2 M22-XW 1 M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS Contact Configuration Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC Spring-cage 1 1 Key withdraw adapter 4 M22-XC-R Contact Blocks 1 Terminal Type 1 1 M22-XC-R M22-K10 1 Accessories Terminal Type Screw 1 1 1 3 Catalog Number M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y 1 1 M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK 1 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated three-position selector switches only. 3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position. 5 Select the same color LED element as lens color; for yellow lens, choose a white LED. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-87 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Key-Operated Selector Switches 1 M22 – WS – MS2 – A1 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black M22M = Metal 1 1 WS = WS3 = WRS = WRS3 = Handle Type Two-position, momentary Three-position, momentary Two-position, maintained Three-position, maintained 1 1 1 1 Key Code Blank = MS1 MS2 = MS2 MS3 = MS3 MS4 = MS4 MS5 = MS5 MS6 = MS6 MS7 = MS7 MS8 = MS8 Key Removal Position Refer to coding adapter assembly and functional test guide on Page V7-T1-118. Product Selection Key-Operated Selector Switches 12 Components 1 M22-WS 1 Operators Only 3 Type Switching Position Key Removal Position Key Code Silver Bezel Catalog Number Two-position Momentary 4 Return from right, key removable left MS1 M22-WS M22S-WS M22M-WS MS2 M22-WS-MS2 M22S-WS-MS2 M22M-WS-MS2 MS3 M22-WS-MS3 M22S-WS-MS3 M22M-WS-MS3 MS4 M22-WS-MS4 M22S-WS-MS4 M22M-WS-MS4 MS5 M22-WS-MS5 M22S-WS-MS5 M22M-WS-MS5 1 MS6 M22-WS-MS6 M22S-WS-MS6 M22M-WS-MS6 MS7 M22-WS-MS7 M22S-WS-MS7 M22M-WS-MS7 1 MS8 M22-WS-MS8 M22S-WS-MS8 M22M-WS-MS8 MS1 M22-WRS-A1 M22S-WRS-A1 M22M-WRS-A1 MS2 M22-WRS-MS2-A1 M22S-WRS-MS2-A1 M22M-WRS-MS2-A1 1 MS3 M22-WRS-MS3-A1 M22S-WRS-MS3-A1 M22M-WRS-MS3-A1 MS4 M22-WRS-MS4-A1 M22S-WRS-MS4-A1 M22M-WRS-MS4-A1 1 MS5 M22-WRS-MS5-A1 M22S-WRS-MS5-A1 M22M-WRS-MS5-A1 MS6 M22-WRS-MS6-A1 M22S-WRS-MS6-A1 M22M-WRS-MS6-A1 MS7 M22-WRS-MS7-A1 M22S-WRS-MS7-A1 M22M-WRS-MS7-A1 MS8 M22-WRS-MS8-A1 M22S-WRS-MS8-A1 M22M-WRS-MS8-A1 MS1 M22-WRS M22S-WRS M22M-WRS 1 MS2 M22-WRS-MS2 M22S-WRS-MS2 M22M-WRS-MS2 MS3 M22-WRS-MS3 M22S-WRS-MS3 M22M-WRS-MS3 1 MS4 M22-WRS-MS4 M22S-WRS-MS4 M22M-WRS-MS4 MS5 M22-WRS-MS5 M22S-WRS-MS5 M22M-WRS-MS5 MS6 M22-WRS-MS6 M22S-WRS-MS6 M22M-WRS-MS6 MS7 M22-WRS-MS7 M22S-WRS-MS7 M22M-WRS-MS7 MS8 M22-WRS-MS8 M22S-WRS-MS8 M22M-WRS-MS8 1 40° 1 1 M22S-WRS Two-position 1 Maintained Key removable left 40° 1 1 Key removable left/right 1 1 1 Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Notes 1 Includes one key. 2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-118. 3 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-118. 1 1 1 V7-T1-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Key-Operated Selector Switches 12 Components M22-WS3-X93 1 Operators Only, continued 3 1 Type Switching Position Key Removal Position Key Code Silver Bezel Catalog Number Three-position Momentary 4 Return from left/right, key removable center MS1 M22-WS3 M22S-WS3 M22M-WS3 MS2 M22-WS3-MS2 M22S-WS3-MS2 M22M-WS3-MS2 MS3 M22-WS3-MS3 M22S-WS3-MS3 M22M-WS3-MS3 MS4 M22-WS3-MS4 M22S-WS3-MS4 M22M-WS3-MS4 MS5 M22-WS3-MS5 M22S-WS3-MS5 M22M-WS3-MS5 MS6 M22-WS3-MS6 M22S-WS3-MS6 M22M-WS3-MS6 MS7 M22-WS3-MS7 M22S-WS3-MS7 M22M-WS3-MS7 MS8 M22-WS3-MS8 M22S-WS3-MS8 M22M-WS3-MS8 MS1 M22-WRS3-A1 M22S-WRS3-A1 M22M-WRS3-A1 MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A1 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A1 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A1 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A1 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A1 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A1 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A1 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A1 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A1 MS1 M22-WRS3-A2 M22S-WRS3-A2 MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A2 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A2 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A2 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A2 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A2 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A2 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A2 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A2 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A2 MS1 M22-WRS3-A3 M22S-WRS3-A3 MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A3 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A3 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A3 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A3 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A3 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A3 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A3 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A3 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A3 MS1 M22-WRS3 M22S-WRS3 M22M-WRS3 MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2 M22S-WRS3-MS2 M22M-WRS3-MS2 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3 M22S-WRS3-MS3 M22M-WRS3-MS3 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4 M22S-WRS3-MS4 M22M-WRS3-MS4 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5 M22S-WRS3-MS5 M22M-WRS3-MS5 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6 M22S-WRS3-MS6 M22M-WRS3-MS6 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7 M22S-WRS3-MS7 M22M-WRS3-MS7 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8 M22S-WRS3-MS8 M22M-WRS3-MS8 40° 40° M22M-WS3-X93 Three-position Maintained 60° Key removable left/center/right 60° Key removable center/left Key removable center/right Key removable left/right Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number M22M-WRS3-A2 M22M-WRS3-A3 Notes 1 Includes one key. 2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-118. 3 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Page V7-T1-118. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-89 1.5 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Key-Operated Selector Switches 12 Components M22-WS3-X93 1 Operators Only, continued 3 Type Switching Position Three-position Maintained Key Removal Position Key Code Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number M22-WRS3-A7 M22S-WRS3-A7 M22M-WRS3-A7 M22-WRS3-MS2-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A7 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A7 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A7 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A7 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A7 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A7 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A7 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A7 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A7 MS1 M22-WRS3-A6 M22S-WRS3-A6 M22M-WRS3-A6 MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A6 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A6 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A6 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A6 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A6 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A6 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A6 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A6 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A6 MS1 M22-WRS3-A4 M22S-WRS3-A4 M22M-WRS3-A4 MS2 M22-WRS3-MS2-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A4 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A4 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A4 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A4 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A4 1 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A4 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A4 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A4 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A4 1 Return from right, MS1 key removable center MS2 M22-WRS3-A5 M22S-WRS3-A5 M22M-WRS3-A5 M22-WRS3-MS2-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS2-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS2-A5 MS3 M22-WRS3-MS3-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS3-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS3-A5 1 MS4 M22-WRS3-MS4-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS4-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS4-A5 MS5 M22-WRS3-MS5-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS5-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS5-A5 1 MS6 M22-WRS3-MS6-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS6-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS6-A5 MS7 M22-WRS3-MS7-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS7-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS7-A5 MS8 M22-WRS3-MS8-A5 M22S-WRS3-MS8-A5 M22M-WRS3-MS8-A5 1 1 60° Return from left, MS1 key removable center MS2 Silver Bezel Catalog Number 60° M22M-WS3-X93 1 1 Return from left, key removable center/right 1 1 1 1 1 Three-position 1 Maintained 60° 1 1 1 1 60° Return from right, key removable left/ center Notes 1 Includes one key. 2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see chart on Page V7-T1-118. 3 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Key-Operated Selector Switches 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-K10 1 Contact Blocks 1 Accessories Terminal Type Contact Configuration 2 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Description M22-XW Plunger bridge Catalog Number 3 M22-XW 1 1 1 M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS 1 1 M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 4 M22-XC-R 1 1 M22-ES-MS1 1 Extra Keys Key Code Catalog Number MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6 MS7 MS8 M22-ES-MS1 M22-ES-MS2 M22-ES-MS3 M22-ES-MS4 M22-ES-MS5 M22-ES-MS6 M22-ES-MS7 M22-ES-MS8 M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y 1 1 M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 3 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated three-position selector switches only. 4 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-91 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 mushroom head operators are a durable and unique way to include standard pushbutton functionality. Like the standard pushbutton line, the maintained pushbuttons are field convertible to momentary. They also offer laser engraving and a robust five million mechanical operations on the standard momentary operator. As with all operators, they can be ordered as a ready to install complete device or as modular components. ● ● ● Field convertible from maintained to momentary (available on maintained pushbuttons only) Customizable laser engraving on all buttons More than five million mechanical operations on momentary and one million on maintained pushbuttons ● ● Modular construction makes assembly fast and simplifies stocking of components and complete devices Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP67, IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1 M22 – DP – R – GB4 – K01 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black M22M = Metal Operator Type DP = Non-illuminated momentary mushroom head pushbutton DRP = Non-illuminated maintained mushroom head pushbutton Plate Inscription Operator Color R = Red S = Black G = Green Y = Yellow ETCH = GB0 = GB1 = GB3 = GB4 = GB5 = GB6 = GB15 = GB16 = 1 Custom 1 STOP START UP DOWN OFF ON FORWARD REVERSE X0 = X1 = X4 = X5 = X6 = X7 = K01 = K10 = K11 = K12 = 1 Contact Blocks NC NO NO-NC 1NO-2NC 1 1 1 1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-DP-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-93 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1 1 M22-DP-R-K01 Complete Devices 1 Button Color Contact Block Configuration 2 Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Red NC M22-DP-R-K01 M22S-DP-R-K01 M22M-DP-R-K01 2NC M22-DP-R-K02 M22S-DP-R-K02 M22M-DP-R-K02 1NO-2NC M22-DP-R-K12 M22S-DP-R-K12 M22M-DP-R-K12 1NO-1NC M22-DP-R-K11 M22S-DP-R-K11 M22M-DP-R-K11 1 M22S-DP-R-K01 1 1 1 M22M-DP-R-K01 1 1 1 1 M22-DP-G 1 1 1 1 M22S-DP-G Operators Only 2 Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Black M22-DP-S M22S-DP-S M22M-DP-S Red M22-DP-R M22S-DP-R M22M-DP-R Green M22-DP-G M22S-DP-G M22M-DP-G Yellow M22-DP-Y M22S-DP-Y M22M-DP-Y 1 1 1 M22M-DP-G 1 1 1 Notes 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Momentary 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDP-G Mushroom Head Plates Color Black Red Inscription 2 -— M22-XDP-S Custom STOP START FORWARD REVERSE UP DOWN OFF ON M22-XDP-S-ETCH 3 M22-XDP-S-GB0 M22-XDP-S-GB1 M22-XDP-S-GB15 M22-XDP-S-GB16 M22-XDP-S-GB3 M22-XDP-S-GB4 M22-XDP-S-GB5 M22-XDP-S-GB6 M22-XDP-S-X0 M22-XDP-S-X1 M22-XDP-S-X4 — Custom STOP OFF Green M22-DP-G-X Catalog Number — M22-XDP-S-X5 M22-XDP-S-X7 M22-XDP-R 2 M22-XDP-R-ETCH 3 M22-XDP-R-GB0 M22-XDP-R-GB5 M22-XDP-R-X0 M22-XDP-G 2 White — M22-XDP-G-ETCH 3 M22-XDP-G-GB1 M22-XDP-G-GB6 M22-XDP-G-X0 M22-XDP-G-X1 M22-XDP-W 2 Yellow Custom — Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 3 M22-XDP-Y 2 M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 3 Custom START ON Insertless Mushroom Head Operators Bezel Color Catalog Number Silver Black Red Green Yellow Black Red Green Yellow Black Red Green Yellow M22-DP-S-X M22-DP-R-X M22-DP-G-X M22-DP-Y-X M22S-DP-S-X M22S-DP-R-X M22S-DP-G-X M22S-DP-Y-X M22M-DP-S-X M22M-DP-R-X M22M-DP-G-X M22M-DP-Y-X Black Metal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 4 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 5 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 5 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-95 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Product Selection Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 1 2 1 M22-DRP-R-K01 Complete Devices 1 Button Color Contact Block Configuration 2 Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Red NC M22-DRP-R-K01 M22S-DRP-R-K01 M22M-DRP-R-K01 2NC M22-DRP-R-K02 M22S-DRP-R-K02 M22M-DRP-R-K02 1NO-2NC M22-DRP-R-K12 M22S-DRP-R-K12 M22M-DRP-R-K12 1NO-1NC M22-DRP-R-K11 M22S-DRP-R-K11 M22M-DRP-R-K11 1 M22S-DRP-R-K01 1 1 1 1 M22M-DRP-R-K01 1 1 1 1 M22-DRP-G 1 1 1 M22S-DRP-G Operators Only Button Color Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number Black M22-DRP-S M22S-DRP-S M22M-DRP-S Red M22-DRP-R M22S-DRP-R M22M-DRP-R Green M22-DRP-G M22S-DRP-G M22M-DRP-G Yellow M22-DRP-Y M22S-DRP-Y M22M-DRP-Y 1 1 1 M22M-DRP-G 1 1 1 Notes 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button. 2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: This pilot device features a selectable function switch that enables the device to be set to either maintained or momentary operation. 1 V7-T1-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 Components M22-XDP-G Mushroom Head Plates 5 Color Black Red Green White Yellow Inscription — Custom STOP START FORWARD REVERSE UP DOWN OFF ON — Custom STOP OFF — Custom START ON — Custom — Custom M22-DRP-G-X Catalog Number 3 M22-XDP-S M22-XDP-S-ETCH 4 M22-XDP-S-GB0 M22-XDP-S-GB1 M22-XDP-S-GB15 M22-XDP-S-GB16 M22-XDP-S-GB3 M22-XDP-S-GB4 M22-XDP-S-GB5 M22-XDP-S-GB6 M22-XDP-S-X0 M22-XDP-S-X1 M22-XDP-S-X4 M22-XDP-S-X5 M22-XDP-S-X7 M22-XDP-R 3 M22-XDP-R-ETCH 4 M22-XDP-R-GB0 M22-XDP-R-GB5 M22-XDP-R-X0 M22-XDP-G 3 M22-XDP-G-ETCH 4 M22-XDP-G-GB1 M22-XDP-G-GB6 M22-XDP-G-X0 M22-XDP-G-X1 M22-XDP-W 3 M22-XDP-W-ETCH 4 M22-XDP-Y 3 M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 4 Insertless Mushroom Head Operators Bezel Color Catalog Number Silver Black Red Green Yellow Black Red Green Yellow Black Red Green M22-DRP-S-X M22-DRP-R-X M22-DRP-G-X M22-DRP-Y-X M22S-DRP-S-X M22S-DRP-R-X M22S-DRP-G-X M22S-DRP-Y-X M22M-DRP-S-X M22M-DRP-R-X M22M-DRP-G-X Yellow M22M-DRP-Y-X Black Metal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 5 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 6 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button. 2 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 5 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 6 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-97 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Double Pushbuttons Product Description Features ● 1 Eaton’s M22 double pushbutton line is perfect for applications such as motor and pump starting, as well as anytime space is limited. In addition to the two buttons that fit in one 22 mm hole is the integrated white indicating light between them. These three operators allow for multiple functions to occur in a single space. Green/red, black/white and black/black color options along with laser engraving allow for further custom applications. 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● Flush and extended, as well as color options allow for the perfect combination button Integrated indicating light adds even more functionality in one standard 22 mm hole Customizable laser engraving on all buttons LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation ● ● More than 200,000 mechanical operations Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP66 ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Double Pushbuttons M22 – DDL – GR – GB5 – K10 – G 1 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black 1 1 1 1 Operator Type DDL = Extended buttons and light DDLF = Flush buttons and light DDLM = Extended bottom button 1 1 Button Plate Color Top Bottom GR = Green Red WS = White Black S = Black Black Inscription GB0 = STOP GB1 = START GB3 = UP GB4 = DOWN GB5 = OFF GB6 = ON GB14 = RESET GB15 = FORWARD GB16 = REVERSE X0 = X1 = X5 = X5 = X6 = X7 = X5 = K10 = K01 = K20 = K02 = K11 = Contact Blocks 1NO K30 = 3NO 1NC K03 = 3NC 2NO K21 = 2NO-1NC 2NC K12 = 1NO-2NC 1NO-1NC Light Units 12–30 Vac/Vdc W = White R = Red G = Green B = Blue 85–264 Vac 230W = White 230R = Red 230G = Green 230B = Blue 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-98 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Product Selection 1 Components 1 Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary 1 Operators Only 1 M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 Bezel Color Top Bottom Silver Green Red White Black M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0 Black Green White Black Black Black Red Inscription Top Bottom Catalog Number — Custom — Custom M22-DDL-GR M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 2 START — Custom STOP — Custom START STOP — Custom — — Custom — — Custom — Custom Black START — Custom STOP — Custom Black START — Custom STOP — Custom — 1 1 M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0 M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 M22-DDL-WS M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 2 M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0 M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0 1 1 1 M22-DDL-S M22-DDL-S-ETCH 2 M22-DDL-S-X4-X5 M22-DDL-S-X7-X7 M22S-DDL-GR M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 2 1 1 M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0 M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 M22S-DDL-WS M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 2 M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0 M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0 M22S-DDL-S M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 2 M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5 M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-99 1.5 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary Operators Only 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22-DDLF-GR Bezel Color Top Bottom Inscription Top Bottom Catalog Number Silver Green Red — — M22-DDLF-GR Custom Custom M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2 — — M22-DDLF-WS Custom Custom 1 White Black 1 Green Red M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0 Green Red 1 1 M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 Black M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2 — — Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-GR M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2 — — M22S-DDLF-WS Custom Custom 1 White Black 1 Green Red M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0 1 1 M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2 Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Center Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary 1 Operators Only 1 1 Bezel Color Top Bottom Silver Green Red M22-DDLM-GR 1 Black Inscription Top Bottom Catalog Number — — M22-DDLM-GR Custom Custom M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2 — — M22-DDLM-WS Custom Custom M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2 1 White 1 Green Red M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0 Green Red 1 M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 Black 1 White 1 1 1 Black — — M22S-DDLM-GR Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2 — — M22S-DDLM-WS Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2 Green Red M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Double Pushbuttons 1 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 M22-LED-W Light Units 1 M22-K10 Terminal Type LED Color Light Unit Voltage Screw White Contact Blocks 1 1 Catalog Number Terminal Type Contact Configuration 2 Catalog Number 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W Screw NO NO, early-make M22-K10 M22-K10P NC M22-K01 85–264 Vac M22-LED230-W Spring-cage NC, late-break M22-K01D NO M22-CK10 NC M22-CK01 NC, late-break M22-CK01D 2NO M22-CK20 2NC M22-CK02 NO-NC M22-CK11 Notes 1 For complete listing of available light units and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-101 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Four-Way Pushbuttons Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 four-way pushbutton is a truly unique offering. A four-way pushbutton offers four different buttons mounted in a single 22 mm hole. This is ideal not only for an application with limited space, but also directional applications (when ordered with the four arrow engraving option). Another unique option is the interlocked version, which prevents two opposite buttons from being actuated at the same time. ● ● Four buttons in one operator allows for increased functionality in limited space Optional interlocking option, which prevents two buttons from being actuated at the same time ● ● Customizable laser engraving on all buttons for directional or other applications Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP66 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Four-Way Pushbuttons 1 M22 – D4 – S – X7 – K01 1 1 Bezel M22 = Silver M22S = Black 1 Button Color S = Black Inscription ETCH = Custom 1 X7 = 1 1 1 1 Operator Type D4 = Four-way pushbutton, momentary, non-interlocked DI4 = Four-way pushbutton, momentary, interlocked When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. K10 = K01 = K20 = K02 = K11 = Contact Blocks 1NO K30 =3NO 1NC K03 =3NC 2NO K21 =2NO-1NC 2NC K12 =1NO-2NC 1NO-1NC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Product Selection 1 Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 1 Components M22-D4-S-X7 Operators Only 1 Type Bezel Color Inscription Catalog Number Non-interlocked Silver Black — M22-D4-S Custom M22-D4-S-ETCH 3 Directional arrows — M22-D4-S-X7 M22S-D4-S Custom M22S-D4-S-ETCH 3 1 Directional arrows — M22S-D4-S-X7 M22-DI4-S 1 Custom M22-DI4-S-ETCH 3 Directional arrows — M22-DI4-S-X7 M22S-DI4-S Custom M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 3 Directional arrows M22S-DI4-S-X7 Black Interlocked Silver Black M22-K10 Black Black Black 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contact Blocks 2 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 4 Catalog Number 1 Screw NO NO, early-make M22-K10 M22-K10P 1 NC M22-K01 NC, late-break M22-K01D 1 Spring-cage NO M22-CK10 NC M22-CK01 NC, late-break M22-CK01D 2NO M22-CK20 2NC M22-CK02 NO-NC M22-CK11 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-D4-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-103 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Joysticks Product Description Features Eaton’s M22 joystick line comes in a wide variety of options. From vertical and horizontal two-position switches to the maintained four-position, these operators fit a variety of applications. An additional option, two switch points, allows for eight isolated circuits to be actuated individually on a single operator. ● 1 Product Selection 1 Joysticks 1 ● Available in four-position and two-position Two switch point option allows for two contacts in each direction (up to eight total contacts in one operator) ● Capable of communicating via ASi protocol with ASi adapter modules Protection Type ● IP66 Components M22-WJ2H Operators 1 Number of Directions Switching Position Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Metal Bezel Catalog Number 1 Two-position horizontal Momentary M22-WJ2H M22S-WJ2H M22M-WJ2H M22-WJ2H-2P M22S-WJ2H-2P M22M-WJ2H-2P 1 Two-position horizontal Maintained M22-WRJ2H M22S-WRJ2H M22M-WRJ2H Two-position vertical Momentary M22-WJ2V M22S-WJ2V M22M-WJ2V M22-WJ2V-2P M22S-WJ2V-2P M22M-WJ2V-2P 1 Two switch points M22M-WJ2H 1 Two switch points 1 Two-position vertical Maintained M22-WRJ2V M22S-WRJ2V M22M-WRJ2V Four-position Momentary M22-WJ4 M22S-WJ4 M22M-WJ4 1 Two switch points M22-WJ4-2P M22S-WJ4-2P M22M-WJ4-2P M22-WRJ4 M22S-WRJ4 M22M-WRJ4 Four-position 1 Maintained Note Includes contact block mounting adapter. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Joysticks 1 1 1 ma x thic . 5mm kne ss 1 1 1 Note: Included with operator. 1 1 M22-K10 Joystick with Double Contact Contact Blocks 12 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 3 Catalog Number Screw NO NO, early-make NC NC, late-break NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2NC NO-NC M22-K10 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01D M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 Spring-cage Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 3 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. The joystick allows the control of up to four directions of movement on machines. Different variants of the joystick have two/fourpositions and other variants have two settings for each position. This allows, for example, two-speed settings for each direction. For this application, a standard normally open contact and an early-make contact are fitted in series. Momentary contact and latching contact versions are available. 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-105 1.5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Potentiometers Acoustic Devices Product Description Product Description Eaton’s M22 potentiometers allow for a ready to use operator in a conveniently sized package. M22 potentiometers include the resistive element, instead of just a knob, and a built in legend surrounding the knob. The slim design, with integrated contacts and the range of resistances available, allows for a quick install. Eaton’s M22 acoustic devices are a simple and aesthetic way to add a buzzer or indicator to any application. Fitting in the same 22 mm hole, these devices can be ordered in continuous or pulsed tone and with or without the IP40 enclosure. Features Features ● ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Scale markings on the knob allows the operator to be used without an additional legend plate Oversized knob option available Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and installation ● ● ● Continuous or pulsed tone available 83 dB / 10 cm decibel rating Slim design allows for space saving and simple wiring and installation Protection Type ● IP66 ● NEMA 4X, 13 Protection Type ● IP40 ● NEMA 12 Product Selection Product Selection Potentiometers Acoustic Devices M22-R10K 1 Complete Devices Description 1 4.7 10 47 100 470 1 4.7 10 47 100 M22-R1K M22-R4K7 M22-R10K M22-R47K M22-R100K M22-R470K M22S-R1K M22S-R4K7 M22S-R10K M22S-R47K M22S-R100K Indicator with buzzer, black continuous tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc Indicator with buzzer, black pulsed tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc 470 Metal 1 4.7 10 47 100 470 Oversized Knob Silver 1 4.7 10 47 100 470 Black 1 4.7 10 47 100 470 Metal 1 4.7 10 47 100 470 M22S-R470K M22M-R1K M22M-R4K7 M22M-R10K M22M-R47K M22M-R100K M22M-R470K Silver 1 M22M-R10K 1 Black 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-106 Complete Devices Catalog Number Bezel 1 M22-AMC-XAM Resistance Rk M22-XAM Decibel Rating Catalog Number 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-AMC-XAM 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-AMC-XAMP Buzzers Description Indicator without buzzer, black Buzzer only, continuous tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc Buzzer only, pulsed tone, 18–30 Vac/Vdc Decibel Rating Catalog Number 83 dB/ 10 cm 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-AMC 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-XAMP M22-R1K-RH M22-R4K7-RH M22-R10K-RH M22-R47K-RH M22-R100K-RH M22-R470K-RH M22S-R1K-RH M22S-R4K7-RH M22S-R10K-RH M22S-R47K-RH M22S-R100K-RH M22S-R470K-RH M22M-R1K-RH M22M-R4K7-RH M22M-R10K-RH M22M-R47K-RH M22M-R100K-RH M22M-R470K-RH Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com M22-XAM Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Through-the-Door Operators Bulkhead Interfaces Product Description Product Description Eaton’s M22 through-the-door operators use the same familiar flush pushbutton look with the addition of a cut-to-length rod that allows for a simple reset operator. Eaton’s M22 bulkhead interfaces are another unique offering in the M22 line. This device allows for a secure connection to any USB or RJ45 connected device within an enclosure or panel. With an IP65 rating when closed, these devices are not only convenient, but robust and reliable. Features Features ● ● ● Customizable laser engraving on all buttons More than five million mechanical operations Pushrod can be cut to length ● 1 Convenient and safe way to make a data connection to inside of the panel without opening the panel door 1 1 1 1 1 1 Protection Type ● IP67, IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 Protection Type ● IP65 when closed, IP20 when connected Product Selection Product Selection 1 Through-the-Door Operators 1 Bulkhead Interfaces 1 M22-DZ-B-X6 Complete Devices M22-USB-SA Color Inscription Catalog Number Blue — RESET M22-DZ-B M22-DZ-B-GB14 M22-DZ-B-X6 M22-DZ-R M22-DZ-R-X0 M22-DZ-R-GB0 Red — STOP 1 USB Socket 45 Used for USB connection plug IP65 when closed, IP20 when connected. Bezel Catalog Number Silver M22-USB-SA 1 1 1 1 1 M22-DZ-X Buttonless Operator Bezel Catalog Number Silver Metal M22-DZ-X M22M-DZ-X M22-RJ45-SA RJ45 Socket 6 Used for RJ45 Ethernet connection IP65 when closed, IP20 when connected. Bezel Catalog Number Silver M22-RJ45-SA 1 1 1 1 M22-XD-B Button Plates 2 Color Inscription Catalog Number Blue — RESET Red — M22-XD-B 3 M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XD-B-X6 M22-XD-R 3 M22-XD-R-X0 M22-XD-R-GB0 STOP 1 Notes 1 The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length. 2 Any combination of plate color and inscription is available. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable. 5 USB interface is UL Listed, CSA approved and USB 3.0. 6 RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-107 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 ASi Adapter Modules Product Description 1 1 1 1 Eaton’s M22 ASi adapter modules add functionality to every operator in the M22 line. These devices can be connected to any operator that uses contact blocks or LED units. The simple snapon design allows for a quick integration of an entire application of operators to a communicating network. Features ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 1 Allows compatible operators to communicate on an ASi network Not only can the status of a contact block be read, but LEDs can be illuminated by an ASi adapter ASi adapters simply clip on to the back of the contact blocks and LEDs Insulation displacement connectors allow for installation of adapters without any tools Two integrated LEDs indicate status of communications Protection Type ● IP20 Product Selection ASi Adapter Modules M22-ASI 1 1 1 1 Complete Devices Description Catalog Number ASi adapter module ASi adapter module for base mounting ASi adapter module for E-stop ASi adapter module for E-stop base mounting M22-ASI M22-ASI-C M22-ASI-S M22-ASI-CS 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-108 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Palm Switches Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Palm Switches, Type 4X/13 Enclosure Product Description Eaton’s M22 palm switches are an oversized button that mount directly to an enclosure base. This allows for a standalone button that can be mounted anywhere. The enclosure uses basemounted contact blocks, which allows for quick wiring and mounting. The palm switches come in momentary or maintained versions. As with other M22 operators, the palm switches are available as complete devices, including the enclosure and contact blocks or as modular components. Operator Color S = Black R = Red Y = Yellow ● ● ● Oversized operator in black, red and yellow color options Button integrated directly into an enclosure Base mounting contact blocks allow for simple wiring and installation More than one million mechanical operations on momentary and 100,000 on maintained operators Enclosure Top Color I = Gray IY = Yellow 1 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 Complete Devices FAK-S-KC11-I Operator, Base and Contact Blocks 1 1 Button Color 1 Contact Block Configuration 2 Momentary Black 1NO-1NC Red 1NO-1NC Yellow 1NO-1NC Catalog Number FAK-S-KC11-I FAK-R-KC11-I FAK-Y-KC11-I 1 1 1 FAK-R-V-KC01-IY Protection Type ● IP67, IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 Features ● Contact Blocks KC10 = NO KC01 = NC CKC10 = NO CKC01 = NC 1 1 FAK – S – KC10 – I Operator Type FAK = Palm switch 1 Maintained Red NC 2NC 1NO-2NC 1NO-1NC FAK-R-V-KC01-IY FAK-R-V-KC02-IY FAK-R-V-KC12-IY FAK-R-V-KC11-IY 1 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-109 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Components FAK-S 1 1 Operators Only Type Button Color Catalog Number Momentary Black Red Yellow Red FAK-S FAK-R FAK-Y FAK-R-V-Y Maintained 1 1 FAK-IU Palm Switch Enclosure Base Catalog Number 1 FAK-IU 1 1 M22-KC10 Contact Blocks 1 1 Terminal Type Contact Configuration 2 Catalog Number 1 Screw 1 Spring-cage NO NC NO NC M22-KC10 M22-KC01 M22-CKC10 M22-CKC01 1 1 Notes 1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-116. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-110 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Accessories M22-XD-S M22-XDH-R M22-XDP-G 1 Button Plates Color Inscription Catalog Number Flush Pushbutton Catalog Number Extended Pushbutton Catalog Number Mushroom Head Button 1 Black — M22-XD-S M22-XDH-S M22-XDP-S White Red Green — — — M22-XD-W M22-XD-R M22-XD-G M22-XDH-W M22-XDH-R M22-XDH-G M22-XDP-W M22-XDP-R M22-XDP-G 1 Yellow Blue Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue Black, red, green Black White Red Green Yellow — — — — Custom Custom Custom Custom Custom M22-XD-Y M22-XD-B M22-XD-SWRGYB M22-XD-SRG M22-XD-S-ETCH M22-XD-W-ETCH M22-XD-R-ETCH M22-XD-G-ETCH M22-XD-Y-ETCH M22-XDH-Y M22-XDH-B M22-XDH-SWRGYB M22-XDH-SRG M22-XDH-S-ETCH M22-XDH-W-ETCH M22-XDH-R-ETCH M22-XDH-G-ETCH M22-XDH-Y-ETCH M22-XDP-Y — — — M22-XDP-S-ETCH M22-XDP-W-ETCH M22-XDP-R-ETCH M22-XDP-G-ETCH M22-XDP-Y-ETCH Blue Black Red Black White Green Black Black Black Black Red Black Green Black Blue Black Black Black Black Black Red Green Black White Green Black Green Black Black Blue Black Black Black Custom STOP STOP START START START CLOSE UP DOWN OFF OFF ON ON TEST RESET FORWARD REVERSE RAISE LOWER M22-XD-B-ETCH M22-XD-S-GB0 M22-XD-R-GB0 M22-XD-S-GB1 M22-XD-W-GB1 M22-XD-G-GB1 M22-XD-S-GB2 M22-XD-S-GB3 M22-XD-S-GB4 M22-XD-S-GB5 M22-XD-R-GB5 M22-XD-S-GB6 M22-XD-G-GB6 M22-XD-S-GB9 M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XD-S-GB15 M22-XD-S-GB16 M22-XD-S-GB17 M22-XD-S-GB18 M22-XD-S-X0 M22-XD-R-X0 — M22-XD-S-X1 M22-XD-W-X1 M22-XD-G-X1 M22-XD-S-X2 M22-XD-G-X2 M22-XD-S-X4 M22-XD-S-X5 M22-XD-B-X6 M22-XD-S-X7 M22-XD-S-X8 M22-XDH-B-ETCH M22-XDH-S-GB0 M22-XDH-R-GB0 M22-XDH-S-GB1 M22-XDH-W-GB1 M22-XDH-G-GB1 M22-XDH-S-GB2 M22-XDH-S-GB3 M22-XDH-S-GB4 M22-XDH-S-GB5 M22-XDH-R-GB5 M22-XDH-S-GB6 M22-XDH-G-GB6 M22-XDH-S-GB9 M22-XDH-B-GB14 M22-XDH-S-GB15 M22-XDH-S-GB16 M22-XDH-S-GB17 M22-XDH-S-GB18 M22-XDH-S-X0 M22-XDH-R-X0 — M22-XDH-S-X1 M22-XDH-W-X1 M22-XDH-G-X1 M22-XDH-S-X2 M22-XDH-G-X2 M22-XDH-S-X4 M22-XDH-S-X5 M22-XDH-B-X6 M22-XDH-S-X7 M22-XDH-S-X8 — M22-XDP-S-GB0 M22-XDP-R-GB0 M22-XDP-S-GB1 — M22-XDP-G-GB1 — M22-XDP-S-GB3 M22-XDP-S-GB4 M22-XDP-S-GB5 M22-XDP-R-GB5 M22-XDP-S-GB6 M22-XDP-G-GB6 — — M22-XDP-S-GB15 M22-XDP-S-GB16 — — M22-XDP-S-X0 M22-XDP-R-X0 M22-XDP-G-X0 M22-XDP-S-X1 — M22-XDP-G-X1 — — M22-XDP-S-X4 M22-XDP-S-X5 — M22-XDP-S-X7 — Black Black See 1 below See 1 below Black Black Black See 1 below See 1 below See 1 below See 1 below See 1 below See 1 below M22-XD-S-X9 M22-XD-S-X10 M22-XD-S-X11 M22-XD-S-X12 M22-XD-S-X13 M22-XD-S-X14 M22-XD-S-X15 M22-XD-S-X16 M22-XD-S-X17 M22-XDH-S-X9 M22-XDH-S-X10 M22-XDH-S-X11 M22-XDH-S-X12 M22-XDH-S-X13 M22-XDH-S-X14 M22-XDH-S-X15 M22-XDH-S-X16 M22-XDH-S-X17 — — — — — — — — — Black Black Black See 1 below 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Refer to the Symbols Library, (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136), for symbol image. 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-111 1.5 1 M22-XDLH-W 1 1 M22-XDL-G 1 1 1 1 Button Lenses Color Inscription Catalog Number Flush Catalog Number Extended Color Inscription Catalog Number Flush Catalog Number Extended White Red — — M22-XDL-W M22-XDL-R M22-XDLH-W M22-XDLH-R Blue Red Custom STOP M22-XDL-B-ETCH M22-XDL-R-GB0 M22-XDLH-B-ETCH M22-XDLH-R-GB0 Green Yellow Blue White Red Green Yellow — — — Custom Custom Custom Custom M22-XDL-G M22-XDL-Y M22-XDL-B M22-XDL-W-ETCH M22-XDL-R-ETCH M22-XDL-G-ETCH M22-XDL-Y-ETCH M22-XDLH-G M22-XDLH-Y M22-XDLH-B M22-XDLH-W-ETCH M22-XDLH-R-ETCH M22-XDLH-G-ETCH M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH Green Red Green Blue Red Green Blue START OFF ON RESET M22-XDL-G-GB1 M22-XDL-R-GB5 M22-XDL-G-GB6 M22-XDL-B-GB14 M22-XDL-R-X0 M22-XDL-G-X1 M22-XDL-B-X6 M22-XDLH-G-GB1 M22-XDLH-R-GB5 M22-XDLH-G-GB6 M22-XDLH-B-GB14 M22-XDLH-R-X0 M22-XDLH-G-X1 M22-XDLH-B-X6 Description Catalog Number M22-A Contact block mounting adapter M22-A M22-A4 Contact block mounting adapter, four-position (for use with four-way pushbuttons, joysticks and four-position selector switches only). M22-A4 M22-LS Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons to LS-Titan limit switch bodies (for the full LS-Titan catalog section, see PG08301004E). M22-LS 1 1 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Mounting Adapters 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1 1 1 M22-K10 Contact Blocks 1 Mounting Location Terminal Type 1 Front Screw 1 1 1 1 Base 1 1 1 1 Front 1 1 1 Base 1 Spring-cage Contact Configuration 1 Package Qty. Catalog Number NO NO NO NO, early-make NC NC NC NC, late-break SMCB, NC SMCB, 2NC NO NO NO NC NC NC SMCB, NC SMCB, 2NC NO NC NC, late-break 2NO 2 2NC 2 NO-NC 2 1 25 100 1 1 25 100 1 1 1 1 25 100 1 25 100 1 1 1 1 1 M22-K10 M22-K10-B25 M22-K10-B100 M22-K10P M22-K01 M22-K01-B25 M22-K01-B100 M22-K01D M22-K01SMC10 M22-K02SMC10 M22-KC10 M22-KC10-B25 M22-KC10-B100 M22-KC01 M22-KC01-B25 M22-KC01-B100 M22-KC01SMC10 M22-KC02SMC10 M22-CK10 M22-CK01 M22-CK01D 1 1 1 1 1 M22-CK20 M22-CK02 M22-CK11 M22-CKC10 M22-CKC01 NO NC Notes 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 2 Not stackable. 1 V7-T1-112 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-LED-W Light Units Terminal Type Mounting Location Screw Front 1 LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number White Red 12–30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W M22-LED-R Green Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Base Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue Spring-cage Front Base M22-XLED60 1.5 White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue White Red Green Blue 85–264 Vac 207–264 Vac 12–30 Vac/Vdc 85–264 Vac 207–264 Vac 12–30 Vac/Vdc 85–264 Vac 12–30 Vac/Vdc 85–264 Vac 1 1 M22-LED-G M22-LED-B M22-LED230-W M22-LED230-R M22-LED230-G M22-LED230-B 1 1 1 M22-LED230H-W M22-LED230H-R M22-LED230H-G 1 M22-LED230H-B M22-LEDC-W M22-LEDC-R 1 M22-LEDC-G M22-LEDC-B M22-LEDC230-W M22-LEDC230-R M22-LEDC230-G M22-LEDC230-B 1 M22-LEDC230H-W M22-LEDC230H-R M22-LEDC230H-G M22-LEDC230H-B M22-CLED-W M22-CLED-R M22-CLED-G M22-CLED-B M22-CLED230-W M22-CLED230-R M22-CLED230-G M22-CLED230-B M22-CLEDC-W M22-CLEDC-R M22-CLEDC-G M22-CLEDC-B M22-CLEDC230-W M22-CLEDC230-R M22-CLEDC230-G M22-CLEDC230-B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LED Resistor and Test Elements Terminal Type Mounting Location Element Type Screw Front Resistor 12 Test Voltage Catalog Number 42–60 Vac/Vdc 220 Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc 85–264 Vac M22-XLED60 M22-XLED220 M22-XLED-T M22-XLED230-T 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Resistor units to be used with 12–30V light units. 2 Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage. 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-113 1.5 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons 2 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22S-ST-X 1 Description Inscription Catalog Number Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, for pushbuttons Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, for double pushbuttons — M22S-ST-X — M22S-STDD-X Legend plate insert — Custom STOP START M22-XST M22-XST-ETCH 1 M22-XST-GB0 M22-XST-GB1 OFF ON RUN FAULT OFF ON MAN. AUTO MAN. O AUTO HAND AUTO HAND O AUTO M22-XST-GB5 M22-XST-GB6 M22-XST-GB7 M22-XST-GB8 M22-XST-GB10 M22-XST-GB11 M22-XST-GB12 M22-XST-D11 M22-XST-D12 1 2 OI O-I I O II M22-XST-X52 M22-XST-X53 M22-XST-X88 M22-XST-X89 M22-XST-X93 1 1 M22-XST-GB0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 2 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13. 1 1 1 1 Example To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD): 1. Select legend plate holder—M22S-ST-X. 1 2. Select legend plate insert—M22-XST-ETCH. 1 3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136, identified by GB15 suffix. 1 4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes—suffix GB15, line item # ___ . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-114 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Legend Plates, Complete 2 M22S-ST-GB0 For use with pushbuttons and indicating lights Selector switches M22-XZK Emergency-stop operators 1 Description Inscription Catalog Number Legend plate holder with insert STOP START OFF ON RUN FAULT M22S-ST-GB0 M22S-ST-GB1 M22S-ST-GB5 M22S-ST-GB6 M22S-ST-GB7 M22S-ST-GB8 1 1 2 OFF ON M22S-ST-X52 M22S-ST-X53 M22S-ST-GB10 1 MAN. AUTO MAN. O AUTO HAND AUTO HAND O AUTO OI O-I I O II — Custom M22S-ST-GB11 M22S-ST-GB12 M22S-ST-D11 M22S-ST-D12 M22S-ST-X88 M22S-ST-X89 M22S-ST-X93 M22-XZK M22-XZK-ETCH 1 EMERGENCY-STOP M22-XZK-GB99 — Rectangular yellow legend plate 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Square yellow legend plate M22-XYK Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm M22-XBK1 Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm — — EMERGENCY-STOP four-language EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) — Custom M22-XYK M22-XYK-ETCH 1 M22-XYK1 M22-XYK5 M22-XAK M22-XAK-ETCH 1 EMERGENCY-STOP four-language EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XAK1 M22-XAK5 — Custom M22-XBK M22-XBK-ETCH 1 EMERGENCY-STOP four-language EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XBK1 M22-XBK5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22-XCK1 Four-way pushbutton, joystick and four-position selector switches Silver square legend plate — Custom Four directional arrows 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 Two directional arrows 1 M22-XCK M22-XCK-ETCH 1 M22-XCK1 M22-XCK2 M22-XCK3 1 1 1 Notes 1 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Pages V7-T1-129 to V7-T1-136) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 2 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-115 1.5 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Surface Mounting Enclosures 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M22-IY1-PG Description Catalog Number Yellow top, black base for emergency-stop operators M22-IY1-PG Selector Switch Accessories Description Catalog Number M22-XW Plunger bridge 2 M22-XW M22-XWS Key cover M22-XWS M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 3 M22-XC-R M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK 1 1 1 M22-IY-PG 1 1 1 1 M22-EY1 One-element enclosure Two-element enclosure Three-element enclosure M22-I1-PG M22-I2-PG M22-I3-PG Four-element enclosure Six-element enclosure M20 connecting screw M22-I4-PG M22-I6-PG M22-XI M20 cord grip V-M20 Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum Finish 1 Rating Catalog Number — M22-EY1 IP65 M22-E1 IP65 M22-E2 IP65 M22-E3 IP65 M22-E4 IP65 M22-E5 IP40 M22-E6 Description Rating Catalog Number One-element Two-element Three-element Four-element Five-element Six-element Mounting plate Plaster keys for flush mounting IP55 IP55 IP55 IP40 IP40 IP40 — — M22-H1 M22-H2 M22-H3 M22-H4 M22-H5 M22-H6 M22-XE5 M22-UPE One Hole Yellow paint for emergency-stop operators Gray anodized Two Holes Gray anodized Three Holes Gray anodized Four Holes Gray anodized Five Holes Gray anodized Six Holes Anodized 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M22-H1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Requires use of base mounted contact blocks. 2 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated three-position selector switches only. 3 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position. Shrouds, Plastic 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-116 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 M22-XGPV M22G-XGPV 1.5 Emergency Stop Operator Accessories Mounting Accessories Description Voltage Catalog Number Description Catalog Number Yellow guard ring — M22-XGPV Telescopic clip with top-hat rail Telescopic clip Telescopic clip extension M22-TC M22-TA M22-TCV DIN rail mounting adapter M22-IVS Gray guard ring — M22G-XGPV M22-TC and M22-TA 1 1 1 1 M22-IVS 1 1 M22-MGTA Rectangular guard — M22-MGTA M22-GR Mounting ring 1 M22-GR 1 1 M22-PL-PV Sealing shroud — M22-PL-PV M22-MS Mounting ring tool M22-MS 1 1 1 M22-XPV60-Y-120 Illuminated ring 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 230 Vac M22-XPV60-Y-24 M22-XPV60-Y-120 M22-XPV60-Y-230 1 M22S-R30 Adapter ring set for 30 mm holes M22S-R30 1 1 M22-B 1 Blanking Plugs Color Catalog Number Gray Black M22-B M22S-B M22-T-D and M22-T-DD M22-ADC4 1 Protective Diaphragm For Use with … Catalog Number Flush pushbuttons and indicating lights Double pushbuttons M22-T-D 1 M22-T-DD 1 1 Dust Covers Description Catalog Number Contact block dust cover Operator dust cover, max three contact blocks Operator dust cover, max four contact blocks M22-XKDP M22-ADC M22-ADC4 1 1 1 1 Kits Description Catalog Number Includes one each: M22-XW, M22-XC-R, M22-XC-Y, M22S-B, M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB M22-KT1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-117 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Coding Adapter Guide Selector Switches 1 1 Two-Position Selector Switch Top (B) Top (B) Bottom (A) 1 1 Bottom (A) 1 Catalog Number Function M22(S)-W(L)(K) Momentary M22(S)-WR(L)(K) Maintained Three-Position Selector Switch Catalog Number Function Left Right M22(S)-W(L)(K)3 Momentary Momentary 1 M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3 Maintained Maintained 1 M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-1 Maintained Momentary 1 M22(S)-WR(L)(K)3-2 Momentary Maintained Top (B) 1 Bottom (A) 1 Two-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch 1 Top (B) Bottom (A) 1 1 Catalog Number Center Key Withdraw Right Function Key Withdraw M22(S)-WS Yes Momentary No M22(S)-WRS Yes Maintained Yes M22(S)-WRS-A1 Yes Maintained No 1 1 Three-Position Key-Operated Selector Switch 1 Top (B) Catalog Number Left Function Key Withdraw Center Key Withdraw Right Function Key Withdraw M22(S)-WS3 Momentary No Yes Momentary No 1 M22(S)-WRS3 Maintained Yes Yes Maintained Yes 1 M22(S)-WRS3-A1 Maintained No Yes Maintained No 1 M22(S)-WRS3-A2 Maintained Yes Yes Maintained No 1 M22(S)-WRS3-A3 Maintained No Yes Maintained Yes M22(S)-WRS3-A4 Maintained Yes Yes Momentary No M22(S)-WRS3-A5 Maintained No Yes Momentary No 1 M22(S)-WRS3-A6 Momentary No Yes Maintained Yes 1 M22(S)-WRS3-A7 Momentary No Yes Maintained No 1 Bottom (A) 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-118 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Pushbuttons, Indicating Lights, Selector Switches and Emergency-Stop Operators Description Momentary Pushbuttons Maintained Pushbuttons Indicating Lights, Buzzers and Potentiometers Emergency-Stop Selector Operators Switches Key-Operated Operators Double Pushbuttons IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #340491 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 >1 >1800 — — >0.1 >600 >0.1 >2000 >0.1 >100 >0.2 >3600 >5 — >50 — — – >0.3 — >0.5 >5 — General Standards x 10 6 Actuating force n >5 >3600 >5 Operating torque (screw terminals) Nm — Lifespan, mechanical Operations Operating frequency Operations/h 1 1 1 1 1 — 1 Protection Type IP IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K Indicating lights: IP67, 69K IP67, IP69K Buzzers: IP40 Potentiometers: IP66 IP66 IP66 IP66 1 UL type 4X, 13 4X, 13 Indicating lights: 4X/13 Buzzers: 12 Potentiometers: 4X/13 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13 1 Climatic proofing 4X, 13 1 Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30 Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) Mounting position Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal g –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) As required As required As required As required As required As required As required >30 >30 >30 >50 >30 >30 >30 1 1 1 Terminal Capacities Solid AWG — mm2 Stranded AWG — mm2 — 20-16 — — 0.5–1.5 — — 20-16 — — 0.5–1.5 — — — — 1 — 1 — — — — 1 Contacts Rated impulse withstand Uimp voltage Vac — — 4000 — — — — Rated insulation voltage Ui V — — 2500 — — — — — — III/3 — — — — Overvoltage category/ pollution degree 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-119 1.5 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Contact Blocks and Light Units Contact Blocks LED Light Units IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 UL #E29184 x 10 6 >5 >3600 — Description General Standards 1 Lifespan, mechanical Operations Operating frequency Operations/h 1 Actuating force n >5 — Operating torque (screw terminals) Nm <0.8 — 1 Protection Type 1 1 1 1 — IP IP20 IP20 UL type — — Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, according to IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat, cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30 Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) –13 to 158 (–25 to 70) As required As required g >30 >30 AWG 18–14 18–14 mm2 0.75–2.5 0.75–2.5 AWG 20–14 20–14 mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 Mounting position Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal Terminal Capacities 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Solid Stranded Contacts Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac 6000 6000 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 500 500 Overvoltage category/ pollution degree III/3 III/3 NEMA contact ratings A600, Q300 — Current draw — 5–15 mA Control Circuit Reliability at 24 Vdc/5 mA HF Fault probability <10-7, <1 fault in 107 operations — at 5 Vdc/1 mA HF Fault probability <5 x 10 -6, <1 fault in 5 x 10 6 operations — gG/gL A 10 — 1 Max. Short-Circuit Protective Device 1 Switching Capacity Fuse Rated Operational Current 1 AC-15 115V Ie A 6 — 1 230V Ie A 6 — 400V Ie A 4 — 1 500V Ie A 2 — DC-13 1 24V Ie A 3 — 42V Ie A 1.7 — 1 60V Ie A 1.2 — 110V Ie A 0.6 — 1 220V Ie A 0.3 — — 1 1 1 1 Lifespan, Electrical AC-15 230V/0.5A Operations x 10 6 1.6 230V/1.0A Operations x 10 6 1 — 230V/3.0A Operations x 10 6 0.7 — Operations x 10 6 1.2 — DV-13 12V/2.8A Contact Element Note: >200 Vac/60 Hz: –25/55°C 1 V7-T1-120 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Palm Switches Description Momentary Maintained FAK-R-V-KC11-I IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 x 10 6 >1 >3600 >0.1 >600 >0.1 >600 Actuating force n 20–40 40–60 15–25 Operating torque Nm — — — Degree of protection, IEC/EN 60529 IP IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP65 4X, 13 4X, 13 4X, 13 1 General Standards Lifespan, mechanical Operations Operating frequency Operations/h UL Type Climatic proofing 1 1 1 1 1 Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30 Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) g >15 Mounting position –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) –73 to 104 (–25 to 40) 1 >15 >15 1 As required Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60068-2-27 shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal 1 ASi Adapter Modules Description M22-ASI M22-ASI-C Standards IEC/EN 60947, DIN EN 50295 IEC/EN 60947, DIN EN 50295 Radio interference suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 EN 55011, EN 55022 Limit value class — — Protection type IP20 IP00 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30 1 1 General 1 1 1 Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) Shock resistance shock duration 11 ms g >30 >30 Vibration to IEC 60068-2-27 (amplitude 1 mm) Hz — — 1 1 Dimensions mm — — Weight kg — — 1 Mounting Front mounting Front mounting Mounting position As required As required 26.5–31.6 26.5–31.6 Connection technique Yellow plug-in terminal as insulation piercing terminal Two cables onboard Power supply Completely from the AS-interface cable Addressing Via connection to AS-interface cable >40 >40 1 1 1 Power Supply Rated voltage to AS-interface specification Total power consumption of the AS-interface Vdc mA AS-interface 1 1 1 — — Rated operational current at full load mA — — Rated operational current when idle (no I, O set) mA — — 1 POWER AS-interface cable: green LED on the rear side of the element POWER AS-interface cable: green LED on the board 1 Status LEDs 1 ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master ERROR AS-interface, AS-interface master failure: red LED on the rear side of the element failure: red LED on the board 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-121 1.5 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 ASi-S Adapter Modules M22-ASI-S M22-ASI-CS Number Two (normally 22V/5 mA) Two (normally 22V/5 mA) Voltage range Vdc — — 1 Rated current per input mA — — High signal level V — — 1 Low signal mA — — Length of connecting cables cm — — 1 Outputs Outputs, protected against short-circuit Number One (normally 19V/8 mA) One (normally 19V/8 mA) Voltage range Vdc — — All outputs — — S three external outputs — — 1 1 1 1 1 Description Inputs Inputs, protected against short-circuit Max. Current Carrying Capacity Length of connecting cables 1 Profile 1 Addresses 1 1 1 cm Specification — — S-3.A.E S-3.A.E 2.1 2.1 62 62 Connection of the AS-interface line Yellow plug terminal with insulation piercing Two cables on the circuit board Power supply Complete from AS-interface, cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc Complete from AS-interface, cable 26.5–31.6 Vdc Fixing Front mounted Base mounted Addressing Via AS-interface cable Via AS-interface cable 45 mA Number Emergency-Stop Circuits 1 Max. total current A 45 mA Ambient temperature, operating °F (°C) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) –13 to 131 (–25 to 55) 1 Shock resistance 30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27 30g/11 ms as per IEC 60068-2-27 Protection type IP20 IP00 Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30 Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78, cyclical, to IEC 60068-2-30 1 1 Mounting position As required As required Standards 1 EN 50178 EN 50 295 EN 50178 EN 50 295 Inputs Two-channel input (22V/5 mA) (moduled by code sequence) (two break contact sets M22-K01) Two-channel input (22V/5 mA) (moduled by code sequence) (two break contact sets M22-K01) Outputs One output, typically 19V/8 mA, short-circuit proof One output, typically 19V/8 mA, short-circuit proof Power, AS-interface cable Green LED on the back Green LED on the back AS-interface error, AS-interface master failure Red LED on the back Red LED on the back Profile S-7.B.E S-7.B.E 1 1 1 1 Status Displays 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Operators and Indicating Lights 1 Ø 1.16 (29.5) Ø 1.17 (29.7) M22 x 0.06 (1.5) 1 1 1.17 (29.7) 1 0.04 (1)–0.24 (6) 1 0.39 (10) 0.75 (19) 1 Pushbuttons Selector Switches Operators M22…-D-_ M22…-DH-_ M22…-W-_ 1 M22…-WL-_ 1 1 1 1 0.39 (10) 0.65 (16.4) M22-DG(L)-_ 0.93 (23.7) 1.06 (26.9) 1 M22…-DD-_ 1 M22…-W(R)S-_ 1 1 Ø1.17 (29.7) 2.15 (54.7) Ø1.17 (29.7) Key-Operated Selector Switches 1 1 0.65 (16.5) 0.52 (13.2) 0.81 (20.6) 1 1.88 (47.75) M22-D, Base Mounted 1.47 (37.2) 1 >0.01 (0.3) Indicating Light 1 M22-L_ 1 1 0.04 (1) 1 1.78 (45.3) 1 1 0.45 (11.5) 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-123 1.5 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Illuminated Pushbuttons Contact Block Mounting Adapter M22…-DL-_ M22-A_ M22…-DLH_ M22S-A… 0.85 (21.5) 1.77 (45) 1 1 0.76 (19.3) 1 1.73 (44) 1 1 1 1 Mushroom Head Pushbutton Front Mounted Centering Adapter M22…-DP-_ M22-ZA 0.84 (21.4) 1 0.65 (16.4) Ø1.44 (36.5) 1 1.18 (30) 0.39 (10) 1 1 1 1 0.93 (23.6) 0.7 (17.8) Front Mounted Indicating Light Emergency-Stop Operators M22-PV_ M22S-PV_ M22-PVL_ M22-PVS_ 1.46 (37) 1 1.18 (30) 1.38 (35) 1 1 1 1.5 (38) 1 1.77 (45) 1.18 (30) Pushbutton, Complete Devices 1.89 (47.9) 1 A 2.96 (75.1) 1 1 1 1.77 (45) 2.8 (71) 1.18 (30) 1 1 0.39 (10) M22(S)-R_ 0.39 (10) Potentiometer 0.39 (10) 1 A 1.15 (29.2) 1 x M22-K_ 2 x M22-K_ 1 x M22-CK_ 2 x M22-CK_ 1.46 (37.2) 1.46 (37.2) 1.54 (39.0) 1.54 (39.0) 1.3 (32.9) 1 1 1 V7-T1-124 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.5 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Front Mounted Mounting Plate DIN-Rail Mounting Adapter 1 M22-E_ M22-D... M22-L... M22-W... M22-P... 0.12 (3.1) M22-D_ M22-L_ M22-W_ M22-P_ M22-TCV 1 2.2 (56) 0.12 (3) 1 a1 0.18 (4.5 (M4)) M22-TC 1 0.1 (2.5) 1.3 (33) e Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights with M22-TC Telescopic Clip and M22-TVC Extension 1 1 1 1.39 (35.2) 2.23 (56.7) 1 4 x M4 x 16 2.83 (72) 2.15 (54.5) 0.88 (22.4) 2.54 (64.5) 1.42 (36) 0.88 (22.4) 1 Catalog Number a1 e Catalog Number a1 e M22-E(Y) 1 M22-E2 M22-E3 2.83 (72) 4.13 (105) 5.43 (138) 2.21 (56) 3.50 (89) 4.80 (122) M22-E4 M22-E5 M22-E6 6.73 (171) 8.03 (204) 9.33 (237) 6.10 (155) 7.40 (188) 8.70 (221) 1 M22-I_ A B G H F A B C D E F G H 1.77 (45) 2.36–3.94 (60–100) 0.79 (20) 0.79 (20) 0.18 (4.5) 0.39 (10) 154 (39) 0.39 (10) e 1.3 (33) b a M4 M20/M25 Palm Switches FAK_ M20 L-... 1.57 (40) 1.36 (34.5) M5 x 20 2.56 (65) 1.42 (36) M22-I(Y)1 1 M22-I2 2 M22-I3 3 M22-I4 4 M22-I6 6 0.26 (6.5) – 0.3 (7.5) 3.35 (85) 1 1 1 a b e Cable Entries 2.83 (72.0) 4.72 (120.0) 6.02 (153.0) 7.32 (186.0) 9.92 (252.0) 1.68 (42.6) 3.37 (85.6) 4.67 (118.6) 5.97 (151.6) 8.57 (217.6) 2.30 (58.5) 4.19 (106.5) 5.49 (139.5) 6.79 (172.5) 9.39 (238.5) 2 x M16 3 x M20 2 x M25 2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20 1 2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20 1 2 x M20 2 x M25 4 x M20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 x M20 3 x M20 2 x M25 0.71 (18) 3.98 (101) Ø94 1 1 1.89 (48) Mounting Locations 1 1 M20 Catalog Number 1 1 Top-hat rail to IEC/EN 60715. 0.7 (17.8) 2.2 (56) 1 M20 2.62 (66.5) M20 1.73 (44) 3.15 (80) D E 1 1 Base Mounted Surface Mounting Enclosure C 1 3 x M20 lateral, 1 x M16 in bottom. 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-125 1.5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Covers Legend Plates M22-H_ M22S-ST-_ 1 M20 2.32 (59) 1 1 M22S-STDD-X 3.74 (95) a2 M20 1.85 (47) 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.38 (35) 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights M20 0.59 (15) 1.18 (30) Catalog Number a2 Cable Entry Style 1.65 (42) 2.95 (75) 4.25 (108) 5.55 (141) 6.85 (174) 8.15 (207) 3 x M20 4 x M20 4 x M20 4 x M20 5 x M20 6 x M20 One-piece 1 M22-H1 M22-H2 M22-H3 M22-H4 M22-H5 M22-HE6 1 Connecting Screw 1 1 1 M22-XI 1.18 (30) Split Mounting Hole with Lug Slot 0.13 (3.2) 0.95 (24.1) 1 1.08 (27.5) 1 1 1 1 0.88 (22.3) 1 1 1 0.04 (1)–0.24 (6) 0.04 (1) 1 Gasket. USB Socket Shroud with Plaster Keys M22-UPE 1 a2 +1.65 (42) a2 +1.26 (32) 1 a2 M22-H... 1 e 1 e + 0.51 (13) 0.35 (9) 1 1 M22-H... 0.35 (9) 1.02 (26) 1 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 1 1 2 1 2 3 1 2.76 (70) 1 0.16 (4) 2.2 (56) 1 4 M22-UPE 3 Box for closing off when plastering. Plaster thickness less than 8 mm. Plaster thickness more than 8 mm. 1 V7-T1-126 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Grid Dimension to IEC/EN 60947 1 Grid Dimension for M22-DD_ 1 1 1 1.97 (50) 1 1 2.95 (75) 2.48 (63) 1 1 1 1.18 (30) 1 1 Grid Dimension for Various Combinations 1 1 B 1.18 (30) Grid Dimension for M22-DDL_ 1 a 1.18 (30) 1 1 Pushbutton Diaphragm M22-T-DD 1 B> M22(S)-_(IEC/EN 60947) RMQ-Titan min. M22-D_ + M22-T-D M22-D(R)P_ M22-PV_ M22-PV(L) + M22-PL-PV M22-PV(L)(S_) + M22-D_ M22-DDL_ M22-DDL_ + M22-T-DD M22-ST_ M22-STDD_ M22-CK_ M22-CLED_ M22-XAK_ M22-XZK_ M22-XBK_ M22-XYK_ M22-D4 M22-WR…4 M22-W…J4 1.18 (30.0) 1.18 (30.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.50 (38.0) 1.50 (38.0) 1.89 (48.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.18 (30.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.18 (30.0) 1.18 (30.0) 1.18 (30.0) 1.18 (30.0) 3.54 (90.0) 1.30 (33.0) 2.36 (60.0) 1.97 (50.0) 2.17 (55.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1.58 (40.0) 1.58 (40.0) 1.58 (40.0) 1.58 (40.0) 2.20 (56.0) 1.58 (40.0) 2.17 (55.0) 2.28 (58.0) 1.97 (50.0) 2.95 (75.0) 1.77 (45.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3.54 (90.0) 2.04 (52.0) 2.36 (60.0) 1.97 (50.0) 2.17 (55.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1.97 (50.0) 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount. Emergency Stop Sealing Cover 1 M22-PL-PV 1 2.03 (51.6) Catalog Number A> 1 1 1 1 0.41 (10.4) 1.89 (48) Pushbutton diaphragm cannot be combined with label mount. b 1.73 (44) Pushbutton Diaphragm 1 b 2.28 (58) A 1 1 1 1.26 (32) Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-127 1.5 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Blanking Plugs Emergency Stop Legend Plate M22…B-_ M22-XAK_ M22-X(Y)ZK_ 1.16 (29.5) 1 d= 0.03 (0.8) 0.65 (16.5) 1 1 1.97 (50) 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1.3 (33) M22-T-D 3.54 (90) M22-XBK-_ 5) 2. Ø 0. 1 M22-XYK-_ 0.13 (3.2) (2 1 89 1 1.97 (50) M22-T-D 2.28 (58) 1 Pushbutton Diaphragm 0.67 (17) 1 1 0.49 (12.5) 1 1 1 Ø 2.36 (60) M22-XGWK 0.98 (25) M22…W…J_ 1.97 (50) 3.07 (78) 2.95 (75) 1.18 (30) Key Cover Four-Way Pushbutton M22-XWS 0.2 (5) M22…-D…4-_ 0.79 (20) 1 1 Joystick R35 R41 2.68 (68) 1 1 M22-XGPV Ø 1.42 (36) 1 1 1.97 (50) Guard Ring 1 1 0.67 (17) 0.91 (23) 1 1 1.3 (33) 1.3 (33) 1 1 0.47 (12) Ø 0.98 (25) 2.17 (55) 0.45 (11.5) 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-128 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Symbols Library 1 Instructions for Ordering Laser Inscriptions 1. Identify part number to be inscribed. 1 2. Pick symbol from library and identify suffix code associated with the symbol. 1 3. Order part number already listed in the catalog with -ETCH suffix. 1 4. When placing an order by fax or Vistaline on the Web, reference order item number and indicate appropriate suffix code. 1 Example To order a green flush button plate with the inscription AUTO HAND: 1 Order Catalog Number: M22-XD-G-ETCH (see Page V7-T1-55). 1 AUTO HAND inscription is found on Page V7-T1-133 in the Symbols Library, suffix code is X91. 1 In the order notes, reference item number and suffix X91. 1 Letter height 3 mm: max. three lines, max. 12 characters per line. 1 Letter height 5 mm: max. two lines, max. eight characters per line. 1 Note: For symbols or text not found in the Symbols Library, please contact the Eaton Technical Resource Center at 1-877-ETN CARE (386-2273) or TRC@eaton.com. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-129 1.5 1 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm). Text—English 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Inscription Text—German Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix GB0 GB18 D0 D25 1 GB1 GB19 D1 D28 1 GB2 GB20 D2 D29 1 GB3 GB21 D3 D30 1 GB4 GB22 D4 D31 1 GB5 GB23 D5 D32 1 GB6 GB24 D6 D33 1 GB7 GB25 D7 D34 1 GB8 GB26 D8 D35 1 GB9 GB27 D9 D36 1 GB10 GB32 D10 D37 1 GB11 GB62 D11 D38 1 GB12 GB63 D12 D39 1 GB14 GB64 D13 D40 1 GB15 GB65 D14 D41 1 GB16 GB66 D15 D42 1 GB17 GB99 D16 D43 1 D17 D44 1 D18 D72 1 D19 D73 1 D20 D74 1 D21 D75 1 D22 D99 1 D23 D100 1 D24 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. V7-T1-130 Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 1.5 Letter Height Specifications: < five characters; letter height = 0.197 in (5 mm). > five characters; letter height = 0.118 in (3 mm). Text—French Inscription Text—Swedish Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Symbols Catalog Number Suffix F0 S0 F1 S1 F2 S2 F3 S3 F4 S4 F5 S5 F6 S6 F7 S7 F8 S8 F9 S9 F10 S10 F11 S11 F12 S12 F14 S14 F15 S15 F16 S16 F17 S17 F18 S18 F19 S19 F20 S20 F67 S21 F68 S22 F99 S23 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X0 Catalog Number Suffix 1 X13 1 1 X1 1 X14 1 X2 1 X15 1 X3 X16 1 1 X4 X17 1 1 X5 X18 1 1 X6 X19 X7 X20 X8 X21 X9 X22 X10 X23 X11 X24 X12 X25 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 S32 S45 1 1 1 S46 1 S99 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-131 1.5 1 Inscription 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix X26 X40 X54 X68 X27 X41 X55 X69 X28 X42 X56 X70 X29 X43 X57 X71 X30 X44 X58 X72 X31 X45 X59 X73 X32 X46 X60 X74 X33 X47 X61 X75 X34 X48 X62 X76 X35 X49 X63 X77 X36 X50 X64 X78 X37 X51 X65 X79 X38 X52 X66 X80 X39 X53 X67 X81 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. V7-T1-132 Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X82 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X104 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X118 1.5 Catalog Number Suffix 1 X132 1 1 X83 X105 X119 X133 1 1 X88 X106 X120 X134 1 1 X89 X107 X121 X135 1 1 X90 X108 X122 X136 1 1 X91 X109 X123 X137 X92 X110 X124 X138 X93 X111 X125 X139 1 1 1 1 1 1 X94 X112 X126 X140 X95 X113 X127 X141 X100 X114 X128 X142 X101 X115 X129 X143 X102 X116 X130 X144 X103 X117 X131 X145 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-133 1.5 1 Inscription 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix X146 X160 X174 X188 X147 X161 X175 X189 X148 X162 X176 X190 X149 X163 X177 X191 X150 X164 X178 X192 X151 X165 X179 X193 X152 X166 X180 X194 X153 X167 X181 X195 X154 X168 X182 X196 X155 X169 X183 X197 X156 X170 X184 X198 X157 X171 X185 X199 X158 X172 X186 X200 X159 X173 X187 X201 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. V7-T1-134 Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X202 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X216 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription X230 1.5 Catalog Number Suffix 1 X244 1 1 X203 X217 X231 X245 1 1 X204 X218 X232 X246 1 1 X205 X219 X233 X247 1 1 X206 X220 X234 X248 1 1 X207 X221 X235 X249 X208 X222 X236 X250 X209 X223 X237 X251 1 1 1 1 1 1 X210 X224 X238 X252 X211 X225 X239 X253 X212 X226 X240 X254 X213 X227 X241 X255 X214 X228 X242 X256 X215 X229 X243 X257 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-135 1.5 1 Inscription 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix Inscription Catalog Number Suffix X258 X265 X272 X279 X259 X266 X273 X280 X260 X267 X274 X281 X261 X268 X275 X282 X262 X269 X276 X283 X263 X270 X277 X284 X264 X271 X278 X285 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Text Size: 3 mm—Max. eight characters in first line; 10 characters in second line; eight characters in third line. V7-T1-136 Text Size: 5 mm—Max. five characters per line. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Contents 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Description Page 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 V7-T1-139 V7-T1-140 V7-T1-149 V7-T1-151 V7-T1-154 V7-T1-159 V7-T1-161 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Overview Product Description Eaton’s C22 compact pushbutton line offers an industry leading array of functional, attractive, and ergonomically designed “all-in-one” illuminated and non-illuminated pushbuttons, selector switches, emergency stops and indicating lights. The complete illuminated line is only offered in LED light units to ensure high-quality brightness and up to 100,000 hours of LED illumination. C22 operators are available with either a silver or black bezel and share the exact same front of the panel look and feel as Eaton’s M22 line. The C22’s compact, “all-in-one” design with the contact block(s) and operators integral provides the user with a simple solution. Wide Product Breadth ● In addition to the standard compact offering of indicating lights and pushbuttons, Eaton’s C22 offers keyed and non-keyed operators and emergency stops ● Hundreds of styles with standard laser etch markings with the ability to use custom M22 laser etched buttons in conjunction with C22 buttonless operators LED Indicators ● 100,000 hours of life in high-vibration environments ● Lenses specifically designed for LED illumination Standards and Certifications 1 All operators are IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660, UL Listed, and CSA Certified. 1 All operators carry an IP65, IP66, IP67 or IP69K rating. All products carry ratings of NEMA 1, 3R, 4X, 12 and 13 Rugged Design ● Pushbuttons (momentary) rated for 5 million mechanical operations and selector switches (non-keyed) rated for 1 million mechanical operations ● All components have IP65 rating, and some carry IP67 and IP69K for washdown environment 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-137 1.6 1 ● ● 1 1 ● 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Features 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Benefits Field convertible maintained pushbuttons from maintained to momentary Field convertible selector switches from momentary to maintained operation and vice versa LED offering only for all illuminated operators Laser engraved pushbuttons and lenses Heavy-duty construction with a minimum of IP65 and UL NEMA® Type 4X/13 on front of panel operators. Many operators even carry IP67 and IP69K, for the toughest applications 1 ● ● ● ● Silver or black colored nylon bezels Notched hole mounting with anti-rotation tab and central nut mounting on each operator Pushbuttons (momentary) rated for 5 million mechanical operations and selector switches (non-keyed) rated for 1 million mechanical operations Unique compact offerings, including keyed and nonkeyed operators and emergency stops ● ● ● ● Compact, “all-in-one” operator and contact block design simplifies product selection, inventory, and installation Field convertibility of pushbuttons and selector switches helps distributors and customers reduce inventory and increase functionality LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation Plastic construction is corrosion resistant ● ● ● ● ● Operators are designed for rugged environments, ideal for wash-down applications (reference each operator’s IP ratings for ingress protection definition) Anti-rotation tab saves installation time and prevents operator rotation High mechanical and electrical life allows for use in tough and challenging applications Laser inscription capabilities allow for high quality, wear-resistant markings By having a compact design emergency stop, the C22 design eliminates the need for self-monitoring contact blocks 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-138 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Product Selection Guide 1 Pushbuttons 1 1 1 1 Description Non-illuminated, flush Non-illuminated, extended Illuminated, flush Illuminated, extended Operator Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary Maintained Product Selection Page V7-T1-141 Page V7-T1-142 Page V7-T1-143 Page V7-T1-144 Page V7-T1-145 Page V7-T1-146 Page V7-T1-147 Page V7-T1-148 1 1 1 Indicating Lights 1 1 1 1 Description Indicating lights Product Selection Page V7-T1-150 1 1 1 Emergency Stops 1 1 1 Description Twist release Keyed-release Product Selection Page V7-T1-152 Page V7-T1-152 1 1 1 Selector Switches 1 1 1 Description Non-illuminated, knob type Key-operated Product Selection Page V7-T1-155 Page V7-T1-156 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-139 1.6 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Contents Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Description 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . Illuminated, Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated 1 Product Description Features Eaton’s C22 Compact Pushbuttons are a complete line of monoblock type pushbuttons with the contact blocks, mounting adapter, and operator all-in-one. The C22 pushbuttons offer the same look and feel as their modular counterpart, the M22. They also carry many of the same rugged ratings and options, such as laser etching, field convertibility, and LED technology. ● 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● ● ● Field convertible maintained pushbuttons from maintained to momentary LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation Laser engraved pushbuttons and lenses Pushbuttons (momentary) rated for 5 million mechanical operations Protection Type IP67/IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 ● Note: For additional accessories, please see Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-117, 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-140 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T1-141 V7-T1-142 V7-T1-143 V7-T1-144 V7-T1-145 V7-T1-146 V7-T1-147 V7-T1-148 V7-T1-149 V7-T1-151 V7-T1-154 V7-T1-159 V7-T1-161 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 - D - G - X1 - K10 Bezel C22 = Silver C22S = Black D= DR = DH = DRH = Operator Type Flush, momentary Flush, maintained Extended, momentary Extended, maintained Button Plate Color G = Green R = Red S = Black W = White X = Buttonless 1 Button Etching X0 = X1 = 1 Contact Blocks K10 = 1NO K20 = 2NO K01 = 1NC K02 = 2NC K11 = 1NO/1NC 1 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 Non-Illuminated, Flush, Momentary C22(S)-D-_ 1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary Button Color Button Etching Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Green — 1NO C22-D-G-K10 C22S-D-G-K10 — 2NO C22-D-G-K20 C22S-D-G-K20 — 1NO/1NC C22-D-G-K11 C22S-D-G-K11 X1 1NO C22-D-G-X1-K10 C22S-D-G-X1-K10 X1 2NO C22-D-G-X1-K20 C22S-D-G-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-D-G-X1-K11 C22S-D-G-X1-K11 Red Black White Buttonless — 1NC C22-D-R-K01 C22S-D-R-K01 — 2NC C22-D-R-K02 C22S-D-R-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-D-R-K11 C22S-D-R-K11 X0 1NC C22-D-R-X0-K01 C22S-D-R-X0-K01 X0 2NC C22-D-R-X0-K02 C22S-D-R-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-D-R-X0-K11 C22S-D-R-X0-K11 — 1NC C22-D-S-K01 C22S-D-S-K01 — 2NC C22-D-S-K02 C22S-D-S-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-D-S-K11 C22S-D-S-K11 X0 1NC C22-D-S-X0-K01 C22S-D-S-X0-K01 X0 2NC C22-D-S-X0-K02 C22S-D-S-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-D-S-X0-K11 C22S-D-S-X0-K11 — 1NO C22-D-W-K10 C22S-D-W-K10 — 2NO C22-D-W-K20 C22S-D-W-K20 — 1NO/1NC C22-D-W-K11 C22S-D-W-K11 X1 1NO C22-D-W-X1-K10 C22S-D-W-X1-K10 X1 2NO C22-D-W-X1-K20 C22S-D-W-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-D-W-X1-K11 C22S-D-W-X1-K11 — 1NO C22-D-X-K10 C22S-D-X-K10 — 2NO C22-D-X-K20 C22S-D-X-K20 — 1NC C22-D-X-K01 C22S-D-X-K01 — 2NC C22-D-X-K02 C22S-D-X-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-D-X-K11 C22S-D-X-K11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-141 1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Non-Illuminated, Flush, Maintained C22(S)-DR-_ Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained Button Color Button Etching Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Green — 1NO C22-DR-G-K10 C22S-DR-G-K10 1 — 2NO C22-DR-G-K20 C22S-DR-G-K20 — 1NO/1NC C22-DR-G-K11 C22S-DR-G-K11 1 X1 1NO C22-DR-G-X1-K10 C22S-DR-G-X1-K10 X1 2NO C22-DR-G-X1-K20 C22S-DR-G-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-DR-G-X1-K11 C22S-DR-G-X1-K11 1 1 Red — 1NC C22-DR-R-K01 C22S-DR-R-K01 — 2NC C22-DR-R-K02 C22S-DR-R-K02 1 — 1NO/1NC C22-DR-R-K11 C22S-DR-R-K11 X0 1NC C22-DR-R-X0-K01 C22S-DR-R-X0-K01 1 X0 2NC C22-DR-R-X0-K02 C22S-DR-R-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DR-R-X0-K11 C22S-DR-R-X0-K11 1 1 Black — 1NC C22-DR-S-K01 C22S-DR-S-K01 1 — 2NC C22-DR-S-K02 C22S-DR-S-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-DR-S-K11 C22S-DR-S-K11 1 X0 1NC C22-DR-S-X0-K01 C22S-DR-S-X0-K01 X0 2NC C22-DR-S-X0-K02 C22S-DR-S-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DR-S-X0-K11 C22S-DR-S-X0-K11 — 1NO C22-DR-W-K10 C22S-DR-W-K10 — 2NO C22-DR-W-K20 C22S-DR-W-K20 1 — 1NO/1NC C22-DR-W-K11 C22S-DR-W-K11 X1 1NO C22-DR-W-X1-K10 C22S-DR-W-X1-K10 1 X1 2NO C22-DR-W-X1-K20 C22S-DR-W-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-DR-W-X1-K11 C22S-DR-W-X1-K11 — 1NO C22-DR-X-K10 C22S-DR-X-K10 — 2NO C22-DR-X-K20 C22S-DR-X-K20 — 1NC C22-DR-X-K01 C22S-DR-X-K01 — 2NC C22-DR-X-K02 C22S-DR-X-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-DR-X-K11 C22S-DR-X-K11 1 White 1 1 Buttonless 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-142 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Non-Illuminated, Extended, Momentary C22(S)-DH-_ 1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary Button Color Button Etching Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Green — 1NO C22-DH-G-K10 C22S-DH-G-K10 — 2NO C22-DH-G-K20 C22S-DH-G-K20 — 1NO/1NC C22-DH-G-K11 C22S-DH-G-K11 X1 1NO C22-DH-G-X1-K10 C22S-DH-G-X1-K10 X1 2NO C22-DH-G-X1-K20 C22S-DH-G-X1-K20 Red Black White X1 1NO/1NC C22-DH-G-X1-K11 C22S-DH-G-X1-K11 — 1NC C22-DH-R-K01 C22S-DH-R-K01 — 2NC C22-DH-R-K02 C22S-DH-R-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-DH-R-K11 C22S-DH-R-K11 X0 1NC C22-DH-R-X0-K01 C22S-DH-R-X0-K01 X0 2NC C22-DH-R-X0-K02 C22S-DH-R-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DH-R-X0-K11 C22S-DH-R-X0-K11 — 1NC C22-DH-S-K01 C22S-DH-S-K01 — 2NC C22-DH-S-K02 C22S-DH-S-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-DH-S-K11 C22S-DH-S-K11 X0 1NC C22-DH-S-X0-K01 C22S-DH-S-X0-K01 X0 2NC C22-DH-S-X0-K02 C22S-DH-S-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DH-S-X0-K11 C22S-DH-S-X0-K11 — 1NO C22-DH-W-K10 C22S-DH-W-K10 — 2NO C22-DH-W-K20 C22S-DH-W-K20 — 1NO/1NC C22-DH-W-K11 C22S-DH-W-K11 X1 1NO C22-DH-W-X1-K10 C22S-DH-W-X1-K10 X1 2NO C22-DH-W-X1-K20 C22S-DH-W-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-DH-W-X1-K11 C22S-DH-W-X1-K11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-143 1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Non-Illuminated, Extended, Maintained C22(S)-DRH-_ Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Maintained Button Color Button Etching Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Green — 1NO C22-DRH-G-K10 C22S-DRH-G-K10 1 — 2NO C22-DRH-G-K20 C22S-DRH-G-K20 — 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-G-K11 C22S-DRH-G-K11 1 X1 1NO C22-DRH-G-X1-K10 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K10 X1 2NO C22-DRH-G-X1-K20 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-G-X1-K11 C22S-DRH-G-X1-K11 1 1 Red — 1NC C22-DRH-R-K01 C22S-DRH-R-K01 — 2NC C22-DRH-R-K02 C22S-DRH-R-K02 1 — 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-R-K11 C22S-DRH-R-K11 X0 1NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K01 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K01 1 X0 2NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K02 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-R-X0-K11 C22S-DRH-R-X0-K11 1 1 Black — 1NC C22-DRH-S-K01 C22S-DRH-S-K01 1 — 2NC C22-DRH-S-K02 C22S-DRH-S-K02 — 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-S-K11 C22S-DRH-S-K11 1 X0 1NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K01 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K01 X0 2NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K02 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K02 X0 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-S-X0-K11 C22S-DRH-S-X0-K11 — 1NO C22-DRH-W-K10 C22S-DRH-W-K10 — 2NO C22-DRH-W-K20 C22S-DRH-W-K20 1 — 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-W-K11 C22S-DRH-W-K11 X1 1NO C22-DRH-W-X1-K10 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K10 1 X1 2NO C22-DRH-W-X1-K20 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K20 X1 1NO/1NC C22-DRH-W-X1-K11 C22S-DRH-W-X1-K11 1 White 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-144 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 - DL - G - X1 - K10 - 24 Bezel C22 = Silver C22S = Black DL = DRL = DLH = DRLH = Operator Type Illuminated, flush, momentary Illuminated, flush, maintained Illuminated, extended, momentary Illuminated, extended, maintained LED/Lens Color G = Green R = Red W = White B = Blue XG = Green without lens XR = Red without lens XW = White without lens XB = Blue without lens Lens Etching X0 = X1 = 1 Contact Blocks K10 = 1NO K01 = 1NC LED Voltage 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 120 = 120 Vac 230 = 230 Vac 1 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary LED Color Button Color Green Green Buttonless Red Buttonless White White Buttonless Blue 1 1 Illuminated, Flush, Momentary Red 1 1 Product Selection C22(S)-DL-_ 1 Blue Buttonless Voltage Button Etching Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-24 C22S-DL-G-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-120 C22S-DL-G-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-G-K10-230 C22S-DL-G-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-24 120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-120 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DL-G-X1-K10-230 1 1 — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-24 C22S-DL-XG-K10-24 — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-120 C22S-DL-XG-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XG-K10-230 C22S-DL-XG-K10-230 — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-24 C22S-DL-R-K01-24 — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-120 C22S-DL-R-K01-120 230 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-R-K01-230 C22S-DL-R-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-24 120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-120 230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DL-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DL-R-X0-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-24 C22S-DL-XR-K01-24 120 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-120 C22S-DL-XR-K01-120 230 Vac — 1NC C22-DL-XR-K01-230 C22S-DL-XR-K01-230 — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-24 C22S-DL-W-K10-24 — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-120 C22S-DL-W-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-W-K10-230 C22S-DL-W-K10-230 1 1 1 1 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-24 120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-120 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DL-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DL-W-X1-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-24 C22S-DL-XW-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-120 C22S-DL-XW-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XW-K10-230 C22S-DL-XW-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-24 C22S-DL-B-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-120 C22S-DL-B-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-B-K10-230 C22S-DL-B-K10-230 1 1 1 1 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-24 C22S-DL-XB-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-120 C22S-DL-XB-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DL-XB-K10-230 C22S-DL-XB-K10-230 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 120 Vac 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 24 Vac/Vdc 1 V7-T1-145 1 1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Illuminated, Flush, Maintained C22(S)-DRL-_ 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Maintained LED Color Button Color Voltage Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-24 C22S-DRL-G-K10-24 1 1 Buttonless 1 Red 1 1 Red Buttonless 1 1 White White 1 1 Buttonless 1 Blue 1 1 Blue Buttonless 1 120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-120 C22S-DRL-G-K10-120 230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-G-K10-230 C22S-DRL-G-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-24 120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-120 230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XG-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XG-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-24 C22S-DRL-R-K01-24 120 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-120 C22S-DRL-R-K01-120 230 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-R-K01-230 C22S-DRL-R-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-24 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-24 120 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-120 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-120 230 Vac 1NC C22-DRL-XR-K01-230 C22S-DRL-XR-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-24 C22S-DRL-W-K10-24 120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-120 C22S-DRL-W-K10-120 230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-W-K10-230 C22S-DRL-W-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-24 120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-120 230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XW-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XW-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-24 C22S-DRL-B-K10-24 120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-120 C22S-DRL-B-K10-120 230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-B-K10-230 C22S-DRL-B-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-24 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-24 120 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-120 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-120 230 Vac 1NO C22-DRL-XB-K10-230 C22S-DRL-XB-K10-230 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-146 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Illuminated, Extended, Momentary C22(S)-DLH-_ 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary LED Color Button Color Voltage Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 230 Vac — Red White Blue Red White Blue Button Etching 1 Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-24 C22S-DLH-G-K10-24 — 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-120 C22S-DLH-G-K10-120 1NO C22-DLH-G-K10-230 C22S-DLH-G-K10-230 1 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-24 120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-12 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DLH-G-X1-K10-23 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-24 C22S-DLH-R-K01-24 120 Vac — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-120 C22S-DLH-R-K01-120 230 Vac — 1NC C22-DLH-R-K01-230 C22S-DLH-R-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-24 120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-12 230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DLH-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DLH-R-X0-K01-23 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-24 C22S-DLH-W-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-120 C22S-DLH-W-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-W-K10-230 C22S-DLH-W-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-24 120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-12 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DLH-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DLH-W-X1-K10-23 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-24 C22S-DLH-B-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-120 C22S-DLH-B-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DLH-B-K10-230 C22S-DLH-B-K10-230 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-147 1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Illuminated, Extended, Maintained C22(S)-DRLH-_ 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush Extended, Maintained LED Color Button Color Voltage Button Etching Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-24 1 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-G-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-G-K10-230 1 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-24 120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-120 1 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-G-X1-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-24 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-24 120 Vac — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-120 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-120 1 230 Vac — 1NC C22-DRLH-R-K01-230 C22S-DRLH-R-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-24 1 120 Vac X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-120 Red 1 Red 230 Vac X0 1NC C22-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230 C22S-DRLH-R-X0-K01-230 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-24 1 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-W-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-W-K10-230 1 24 Vac/Vdc X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-24 120 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-120 230 Vac X1 1NO C22-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-W-X1-K10-230 24 Vac/Vdc — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-24 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-24 120 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-120 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-120 230 Vac — 1NO C22-DRLH-B-K10-230 C22S-DRLH-B-K10-230 1 White White 1 Blue 1 1 Blue 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-148 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Contents Indicating Lights Description Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T1-140 1 1 1 V7-T1-150 V7-T1-150 V7-T1-151 V7-T1-154 V7-T1-159 V7-T1-161 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Indicating Lights Product Description Features C22 indicating lights use a combination of a durable, bright LED unit and modern lenses designed specifically for this type of LED to create a bright and visible indicating light. As with the pushbuttons, the indicating light lenses can be laser etched, simply order without lens and order M22/C22 custom etched lenses to attach. ● ● ● LED offering only for improved brightness quality and up to 100,000 hours of operation Lenses specifically designed for LED illumination Lenses capable of being laser etched for custom solutions that last 1 Protection Type ● IP67/IP69K ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: For additional accessories, please see Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-117, 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-149 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Indicating Lights Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. C22 - L - G - 24 1 1 Bezel C22-L = Flush indicating light 1 G= R= W= Y= B= XG = XR = XW = XB = 1 1 1 LED/Lens Color Green Red White Yellow Blue Green without lens Red without lens White without lens 1 Blue without lens LED Voltage 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 120 = 120 Vac 230 = 230 Vac 1 1 1 Product Selection Indicating Lights C22-L-_ 1 Indicating Lights Lens Color LED Color Voltage Catalog Number Green Green 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-G-24 120 Vac C22-L-G-120 230 Vac C22-L-G-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-R-24 120 Vac C22-L-R-120 230 Vac C22-L-R-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-W-24 120 Vac C22-L-W-120 230 Vac C22-L-W-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-Y-24 120 Vac C22-L-Y-120 1 1 Red Red 1 1 White White 1 Yellow 1 1 Blue White Blue 1 1 Without Lens Green 1 Red 1 1 White 1 1 Blue 1 1 230 Vac C22-L-Y-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-B-24 120 Vac C22-L-B-120 230 Vac C22-L-B-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XG-24 120 Vac C22-L-XG-120 230 Vac C22-L-XG-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XR-24 120 Vac C22-L-XR-120 230 Vac C22-L-XR-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XW-24 120 Vac C22-L-XW-120 230 Vac C22-L-XW-230 24 Vac/Vdc C22-L-XB-24 120 Vac C22-L-XB-120 230 Vac C22-L-XB-230 Note 1 Use white LED for both white and yellow lenses. 1 1 V7-T1-150 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Contents Emergency Stops Description Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T1-140 V7-T1-149 V7-T1-152 V7-T1-152 V7-T1-154 V7-T1-159 V7-T1-161 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Emergency Stops Product Description Features C22 emergency stops are a durable and reliable solution to a variety of e-stop applications. This compact e-stop, available as twist-torelease and keyed-release, is a simple product that eliminates the need for selfmonitoring contact blocks, all while still meeting almost all of the industry safety standards. ● Available in both twistrelease and keyed-release with either 45 mm or 60 mm operators 1 Protection Type ● Twist-Release ● IP67/IP69K ● Keyed-Release ● IP66 ● NEMA 4X, 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: For additional accessories, please see Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-117, 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-151 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Emergency Stops Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. C22 - PVS45P - MS1 - K01 1 1 Operator Type PVT45P = Twist-release, 45 mm PVT60P = Twist-release, 60 mm PVS45P = Key-release, 45 mm PVS60P = Key-release, 60 mm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contact Blocks K02 = 2NC K11 = 1NO/1NC Non-Illuminated, Twist-Release C22-PVT_ Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Twist-Release Release Method Operator Size Contact Block Configuration Catalog Number Twist-release 45 mm 2NC C22-PVT45P-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVT45P-K11 2NC C22-PVT60P-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVT60P-K11 1 60 mm 1 1 Key Code MS1 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6 MS7 MS8 Ronis-445 Product Selection 1 1 MS1 = MS2 = MS3 = MS4 = MS5 = MS6 = MS7 = MS8 = RS = Non-Illuminated, Keyed-Release C22-PVS_ 1 1 1 Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release Release Method Operator Size Key Code Contact Block Configuration Catalog Number Keyed-release 45 mm MS1 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS1-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS2-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS2-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS3-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS3-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS4-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS4-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS5-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS5-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS6-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS6-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS7-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS7-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-MS8-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-MS8-K11 2NC C22-PVS45P-RS-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS45P-RS-K11 MS2 1 MS3 1 MS4 1 MS5 1 MS6 1 1 MS7 1 MS8 1 Ronis 1 1 1 V7-T1-152 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 C22-PVS_ 1.6 Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops, Keyed-Release, continued Release Method Operator Size Key Code Contact Block Configuration Catalog Number Keyed-release 60 mm MS1 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS1-K11 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS2-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS2-K11 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS3-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS3-K11 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS4-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS4-K11 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS5-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS5-K11 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS6-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS6-K11 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS7-K02 MS2 MS3 MS4 MS5 MS6 MS7 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS7-K11 MS8 2NC C22-PVS60P-MS8-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-MS8-K11 Ronis 2NC C22-PVS60P-RS-K02 1NO/1NC C22-PVS60P-RS-K11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-153 1.6 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Contents Selector Switches Description 1 Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switches Non-Illuminated, Knob Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated, Key Operated . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Selector Switches 1 Product Description Features With over 20 variations of operation and 8 varieties of key codes, the C22 line offers a very complete line of selector switches. ● 1 1 1 1 Note: For additional accessories, please see Pages V7-T1-111 to V7-T1-117, 22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons—M22 Accessories. ● Selector switch (nonkeyed) rated for 1 million mechanical operations Momentary selector switches are field convertible from momentary to maintained Protection Type IP65 ● NEMA 4X, 13 ● 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-154 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T1-140 V7-T1-149 V7-T1-151 V7-T1-155 V7-T1-156 V7-T1-159 V7-T1-161 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1.6 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Selector Switches—Non-Keyed C22 - WK - K10 Bezel C22 = Silver C22S = Black WK = WKV = WRK = WRKV = WK3 = WRK3 = 1 Operator Type 2-position, momentary 2-position, momentary, “V” position 2-position, maintained 2-position, maintained, “V” position 3-position, momentary 3-position, maintained 1 Contact Blocks K10 = 1NO K20 = 2NO K01 = 1NC K02 = 2NC K11 = 1NO/1NC 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 Non-Illuminated, Knob Type C22(S)-WK-_/ C22(S)-WRK_ 1 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Knob Type Type Switching Position Two-position Momentary 40° Momentary 60° Maintained 40° Maintained 60° Three-position Momentary 40° 40° Maintained 60° 60° Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number 1 Black Bezel Catalog Number 1NO C22-WK-K10 C22S-WK-K10 2NO C22-WK-K20 C22S-WK-K20 1NC C22-WK-K01 C22S-WK-K01 2NC C22-WK-K02 C22S-WK-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WK-K11 C22S-WK-K11 1NO C22-WKV-K10 C22S-WKV-K10 2NO C22-WKV-K20 C22S-WKV-K20 1NC C22-WKV-K01 C22S-WKV-K01 2NC C22-WKV-K02 C22S-WKV-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WKV-K11 C22S-WKV-K11 1NO C22-WRK-K10 C22S-WRK-K10 2NO C22-WRK-K20 C22S-WRK-K20 1NC C22-WRK-K01 C22S-WRK-K01 2NC C22-WRK-K02 C22S-WRK-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRK-K11 C22S-WRK-K11 1NO C22-WRKV-K10 C22S-WRKV-K10 2NO C22-WRKV-K20 C22S-WRKV-K20 1NC C22-WRKV-K01 C22S-WRKV-K01 2NC C22-WRKV-K02 C22S-WRKV-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRKV-K11 C22S-WRKV-K11 2NO C22-WK3-K20 C22S-WK3-K20 2NC C22-WK3-K02 C22S-WK3-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WK3-K11 C22S-WK3-K11 2NO C22-WRK3-K20 C22S-WRK3-K20 2NC C22-WRK3-K02 C22S-WRK3-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRK3-K11 C22S-WRK3-K11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained. 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-155 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Selector Switches—Keyed Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. C22 - WS - MS1 - A1 - K10 1 1 1 Bezel C22 = Silver C22S = Black 1 Operator Type WS = 2-position, momentary WRS = 2-position, maintained WRS-…-A1 = 2-position, maintained, 1 key removal left WS3 = 3-position, momentary WRS3 = 3-position, maintained 1 1 Key Code MS1 = MS1 MS2 = MS2 MS3 = MS3 MS4 = MS4 MS5 = MS5 MS6 = MS6 MS7 = MS7 MS8 = MS8 Contact Blocks K10 = 1NO K20 = 2NO K01 = 1NC K02 = 2NC K11 = 1NO/1NC 1 1 1 Non-Illuminated, Key Operated C22(S)-WS-MS_ Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated Position Type Key Code Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Two-position Momentary key removal left MS1 1NO C22-WS-MS1-K10 C22S-WS-MS1-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS1-K20 C22S-WS-MS1-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS1-K01 C22S-WS-MS1-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS1-K02 C22S-WS-MS1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS1-K11 C22S-WS-MS1-K11 1NO C22-WS-MS2-K10 C22S-WS-MS2-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS2-K20 C22S-WS-MS2-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS2-K01 C22S-WS-MS2-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS2-K02 C22S-WS-MS2-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS2-K11 C22S-WS-MS2-K11 1NO C22-WS-MS3-K10 C22S-WS-MS3-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS3-K20 C22S-WS-MS3-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS3-K01 C22S-WS-MS3-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS3-K02 C22S-WS-MS3-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS3-K11 C22S-WS-MS3-K11 1NO C22-WS-MS4-K10 C22S-WS-MS4-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS4-K20 C22S-WS-MS4-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS4-K01 C22S-WS-MS4-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS4-K02 C22S-WS-MS4-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS4-K11 C22S-WS-MS4-K11 1NO C22-WS-MS5-K10 C22S-WS-MS5-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS5-K20 C22S-WS-MS5-K20 1 1NC C22-WS-MS5-K01 C22S-WS-MS5-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS5-K02 C22S-WS-MS5-K02 1 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS5-K11 C22S-WS-MS5-K11 1 1 40° 1 1 MS2 1 1 MS3 1 1 1 MS4 1 1 1 MS5 1 Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-156 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 C22(S)-WRS-MS_ 1.6 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued Position Type Key Code Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Two-position, continued Momentary key removal left MS6 1NO C22-WS-MS6-K10 C22S-WS-MS6-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS6-K20 C22S-WS-MS6-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS6-K01 C22S-WS-MS6-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS6-K02 C22S-WS-MS6-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS6-K11 C22S-WS-MS6-K11 40° MS7 MS8 Two-position Maintained key removal left/right MS1 40° MS2 MS3 1 1 1 1 1 1NO C22-WS-MS7-K10 C22S-WS-MS7-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS7-K20 C22S-WS-MS7-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS7-K01 C22S-WS-MS7-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS7-K02 C22S-WS-MS7-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS7-K11 C22S-WS-MS7-K11 1NO C22-WS-MS8-K10 C22S-WS-MS8-K10 2NO C22-WS-MS8-K20 C22S-WS-MS8-K20 1NC C22-WS-MS8-K01 C22S-WS-MS8-K01 2NC C22-WS-MS8-K02 C22S-WS-MS8-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS-MS8-K11 C22S-WS-MS8-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS1-K10 C22S-WRS-MS1-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS1-K20 C22S-WRS-MS1-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS1-K01 C22S-WRS-MS1-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS1-K02 C22S-WRS-MS1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS1-K11 C22S-WRS-MS1-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS2-K10 C22S-WRS-MS2-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS2-K20 C22S-WRS-MS2-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS2-K01 C22S-WRS-MS2-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS2-K02 C22S-WRS-MS2-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS2-K11 C22S-WRS-MS2-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS3-K10 C22S-WRS-MS3-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS3-K20 C22S-WRS-MS3-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS3-K01 C22S-WRS-MS3-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS3-K02 C22S-WRS-MS3-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS3-K11 C22S-WRS-MS3-K11 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-157 1.6 1 C22(S)-WRS…-MS1_ Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, Key Operated, continued Position Type Key Code Contact Block Configuration Silver Bezel Catalog Number Black Bezel Catalog Number Two-position, continued Maintained key removal left/right MS4 1NO C22-WRS-MS4-K10 C22S-WRS-MS4-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS4-K20 C22S-WRS-MS4-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS4-K01 C22S-WRS-MS4-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS4-K02 C22S-WRS-MS4-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS4-K11 C22S-WRS-MS4-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS5-K10 C22S-WRS-MS5-K10 1 2NO C22-WRS-MS5-K20 C22S-WRS-MS5-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS5-K01 C22S-WRS-MS5-K01 1 2NC C22-WRS-MS5-K02 C22S-WRS-MS5-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS5-K11 C22S-WRS-MS5-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS6-K10 C22S-WRS-MS6-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS6-K20 C22S-WRS-MS6-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS6-K01 C22S-WRS-MS6-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS6-K02 C22S-WRS-MS6-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS6-K11 C22S-WRS-MS6-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS7-K10 C22S-WRS-MS7-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS7-K20 C22S-WRS-MS7-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K01 C22S-WRS-MS7-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS7-K02 C22S-WRS-MS7-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K11 C22S-WRS-MS7-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS7-K10 C22S-WRS-MS7-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS7-K20 C22S-WRS-MS7-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K01 C22S-WRS-MS7-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS7-K02 C22S-WRS-MS7-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS7-K11 C22S-WRS-MS7-K11 1NO C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K10 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K10 2NO C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K20 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K20 1NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K01 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K01 2NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K02 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS-MS1-A1-K11 C22S-WRS-MS1-A1-K11 2NO C22-WS3-MS1-K20 C22S-WS3-MS1-K20 2NC C22-WS3-MS1-K02 C22S-WS3-MS1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WS3-MS1-K11 C22S-WS3-MS1-K11 2NO C22-WRS3-MS1-K20 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K20 2NC C22-WRS3-MS1-K02 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K02 1NO/1NC C22-WRS3-MS1-K11 C22S-WRS3-MS1-K11 1 1 40° 1 1 MS5 1 MS6 1 1 1 MS7 1 1 1 MS8 1 1 Two-position 1 Maintained key removal left MS1 40° 1 1 Three Position 1 Momentary Key Removal Center 40° MS1 40° 1 Maintained MS1 Key Removal Left/Right 1 60° 1 1 60° Note: Momentary selector switches can be field converted to maintained. 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-158 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Technical Data and Specifications 1 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Pushbutton Actuators Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Description Unit Momentary Maintained 1 Indicator Lights C22 Selector Switch Actuators C22 Key-Operated Buttons C22 Emergency Stop/ Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons C22 General Standards 1 IEC/EN 60947 VDE 0660 Lifespan, mechanical Operations Operating frequency Operations/h x 106 5 1 — 1 0.1 0.05 >3600 >3600 — >2000 >100 >300 Actuating force N >5 >5 — — — >50 Operating torque Nm — — — >0.3 >0.5 — Terminal screw tightening torque Nm 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 Threaded ring tightening torque Nm 2 2 2 2 2 2 IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP67, IP69K IP65 IP66 IP67, IP69K Protection type Climatic proofing 1 1 1 1 1 1 Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60068-2-30 1 Ambient temperature Open °C Storage °C Mounting position Mechanical shock resistance to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock duration 11 ms, half-sinusoidal g –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –25° to 70° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° –30° to 80° As required As required As required As required As required As required 30 30 30 30 30 30 1 1 1 Terminal capacities 1 Solid mm2 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 Flexible with ferrule mm2 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 2 x 0.5–1.5 1 1 Contacts Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 250 250 250 250 250 250 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 III/3 Values follow — Values follow Values follow Values follow Overvoltage category/pollution degree 1 1 Control circuit reliability at 5 Vdc/1 mA HF Fault probability Values follow at 17 Vdc/7 mA HF Fault probability N/O contact: statistically determined — 1 failure per 17 x 106 operations N/C contact: statistically determined 1 failure per 0.9 x 106 operations at 24 Vdc/5 mA HF Fault probability Values follow A 10 Values follow — N/O contact: statistically determined 1 failure per 17 x 106 operations N/C contact: statistically determined 1 failure per 0.9 x 106 operations Values follow Values follow Values follow gG/gL 1 1 1 Max. short-circuit protective device Fuse 1 10 — 10 10 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-159 1.6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22, continued Push-button Actuators Illuminated Pushbuttons C22 Description Unit Momentary Maintained Indicator Lights C22 Selector Switch Actuators C22 Key-Operated Buttons C22 Emergency Stop/ Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons C22 Switching Capacity Rated operational current AC-15 24V Ie A 4 4 — 4 4 4 110V Ie A 2 2 — 2 2 2 230V Ie A 1.5 1.5 — 1.5 1.5 1.5 DC-13 24V Ie A 3 3 — 3 3 3 60V Ie A 1 1 — 1 1 1 110V Ie A 0.6 0.6 — 0.6 0.6 0.6 220V Ie A 0.3 0.3 — 0.3 0.3 0.3 Operations x 106 0.4 0.4 — 0.4 0.4 0.4 x 106 0.6 0.6 — 0.6 0.6 0.6 Lifespan, electrical AC-15 230V/0.5A 230V/1.0A Contact Travel Contact Travel Diagram 1 3 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 0 0 3.15 2.2 5.5 5.5 Contact closed Contact open 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-160 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 Flat Extended C22(S)-DRL_/C22(S)-DL_ C22(S)-DRLH_/C22(S)-DLH_ 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 10.4 [0.41] 9.6 [0.38] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 16.7 [0.66] 54.6 [2.15] 1 9.6 [0.38] 1 1 M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 1 60.9 [2.40] 1 Pushbutton Actuators 1 Flat Extended C22(S)-DR_/C22(S)-D_ C22(S)-DRH_/C22(S)-DH_ 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 9.6 [0.38] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 1 9.6 [0.38] 1 M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 1 10.4 [0.41] 16.7 [0.66] 54.6 [2.15] 1 60.9 [2.40] 1 Indicating Lights 1 Flat 1 C22-L_ 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 9.6 [0.38] 1 1 M22 x 1.5 1 Ø29.7 [1.17] Ø20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 1 11.7 [0.46] 1 55.9 [2.20] 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-161 1.6 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] Emergency Stop/Emergency Switching OFF Pushbuttons C22-PVT45P_ C22-PVT60P_ 1 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1 6.0 [0.24] 9.3 [0.37] Ø45.0 [1.77] 1 1 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] M22 x 1.5 92.0 [3.62] C22-PVT45P-RS_ 1 9.3 [0.37] 6.0 [0.24] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø45.0 [1.17] 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] 48.0 [1.89] C22-PVT45P-MS_ 1 4.0 [0.16] M22 x 1.5 93.0 [3.66] 1 9.3 [0.37] Ø60.0 [2.36] Ø29.5 [1.16] 48.0 [1.89] 1 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 1 1 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 48.0 [1.89] 1 75.0 [2.95] 120.0 [4.72] 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø45.0 [1.77] Ø29.5 [1.16] 48.0 [1.89] M22 x 1.5 Ø20.4 [0.80] 45.0 [1.77] 71.0 [2.80] 116.0 [4.57] 1 C22-PVT60P-MS_ 1 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1 6.0 [0.24] 9.3 [0.37] 4.0 [0.16] 1 1 48.0 [1.89] 1 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] Ø60.0 [2.36] 1 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] M22 x 1.5 75.0 [2.95] 120.0 [4.72] C22-PVT60P-MS_ 1 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 1 6.0 [0.24] Ø60.0 [2.36] 1 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] 48.0 [1.89] 1 9.3 [0.37] 4.0 [0.16] 1 45.0 [1.77] Ø20.4 [0.80] M22 x 1.5 71.0 [2.80] 116.0 [4.57] 1 V7-T1-162 9.3 [0.37] Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com M22 x 1.5 1.6 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 22.5 mm Compact Pushbuttons—C22 Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] 1 Selector Switch Actuators 1 Selector Switch Actuators/V Position C22(S)-W(R)K_ 1 C22(S)-W(R)KV_ 9.6 [0.38] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 30° 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] M22 x 1.5 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 9.6 [0.38] 1 M22 x 1.5 1 1 Ø29.7 [1.17] 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 20.2 [0.80] Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 1 27.8 [1.09] 27.8 [1.09] 72.0 [2.83] 1 72.0 [2.83] 1 Key Operated Actuators 1 C22(S)-WS(3)-MS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-MS_ 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] Ø29.7 [1.17] 1 9.6 [0.38] 1 M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] 1 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 20.8 [0.82] 44.2 [1.74] 1 47.9 [1.89] 1 92.1 [3.63] 1 C22(S)-WS(3)-RS_/C22(S)-WRS(3)-RS_ 1.0–6.0 [0.04–0.24] 6.0 [0.24] 4.0 [0.16] Ø29.7 [1.17] 1 M22 x 1.5 20.2 [0.80] 24.9 [0.98] 1 9.6 [0.38] 1 1 Ø29.5 [1.16] 1 44.2 [1.74] 1 47.9 [1.89] 1 92.1 [3.63] 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-163 1.7 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Contents Description 1 Page 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operator Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-165 V7-T1-166 V7-T1-169 V7-T1-175 V7-T1-176 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-180 V7-T1-181 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Features The E30 industrial pushbutton and indicating light line from Eaton’s Electrical Sector features a wide selection of square, multifunction operators which conveniently mount in a standard 30.5 mm (1-13/64 in) diameter panel hole. Up to six input and indicating functions can be grouped into a single operating head, saving valuable panel space. Attractive square operator styling, coupled with custom legending of colored buttons and lenses and many special function accessories, makes E30 components ideally suited for use on control consoles and for a variety of industrial OEM applications. Type E30 control units consist of a basic operator with one or more buttons and lenses and contact block selection dependent on the specific operator configuration. 1 1 ● ● ● Pushbutton operators will accommodate up to four single depth stackable contact blocks behind each operating button, up to eight circuits maximum. Indicating lights are supplied complete with either a transformer light unit up to 600 Vac supply line voltage or full voltage light unit up to 120 Vac/Vdc supply line voltage. Combination pushbutton with indicating light operators are supplied complete with a transformer or full voltage unit. Contact blocks must be ordered separately, up to four circuits maximum. Standards and Certifications Die Cast Construction Each operator has high pressure type seals to prevent the passage of oil and other contaminants through the operator into the contact structure or panel interior. Each operator uses a Buna N cork gasket between the mounting flange on the operator and the panel to maintain oiltightness. ● ● UL Listed—File No. E131568 CSA Certified—File No. LR68551 Ingress Protection ● Single and dual indicating lights ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● All other operators ● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-164 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Product Identification 1 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight Multifunction Operator (see Pages V7-T1-166 to V7-T1-168) Upper Contact Block Operating Plunger 1 1 Quarter Turn Screw— Mounts Locking Ring to Operator Gasket 1 Single Circuit Contact Block 1 1 Buttons and Lenses Supplied Blank or with Custom Legend(s) (see Pages V7-T1-169 to V7-T1-173) 1 Retaining Nut Secures Operator to Panel Lower Contact Block Operating Plunger Locking Ring—Supplied with Operator—Serves as Mount for Light Element and Contact Blocks 1 Transformer or Full Voltage Light Element—Supplied with Operator 1 Two Circuit Contact Block 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-165 1.7 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Product Selection Operators 1 1 When Ordering a Complete E30 Control Unit Specify Catalog Number of … Ordering Example (E30AB) 1 Operator E30KB130 Button(s) E30KB231 “STOP” 1 Contact block(s) E30KLA1 1NO Accessories (if required) E30KLA2 1NC “START” 1 1 Square Multifunction Operators UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 1 Single Button Operator Single Button Operator/without Button (Order Button Separately) Button Type Required 1 1 Operation Special Features Catalog Number Momentary — E30AA 1 1 Shown with Extended Button 1 Two Button Operator 1 Two Button Operator/without Buttons (Order Buttons Separately) Button Types Required 1 1 1 1 Shown with Extended Buttons 1 1 Two Button Operator 1 1 1 Shown with Long Release Bar 1 1 Top Button Bottom Button Special Features Momentary Momentary — Catalog Number E30AB Momentary Momentary With mechanical interlock E30AC Maintained (all contacts) Release (all contacts) — E30AD 2 Maintained (all contacts) Release (all contacts) With mechanical interlock E30AP 23 Two Button Operator with Long (OFF) Release Bar—Includes OFF Bar/Button (Order Other Buttons Separately) Button Types Required 45 1 Operation Operation Top Button Bottom Button Special Features Catalog Number Maintained Maintained — E30AF Maintained Maintained With mechanical interlock E30AG Maintained Momentary With mechanical interlock E30AH Maintained (all contacts) Maintained (bottom contacts only) Top button operates both top and bottom contacts E30AK 6 Notes 1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-169. 2 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button. 3 Buttons are interlocked so that one of the two is maintained at all times. Depressing the other button releases the maintained button and maintains the depressed button. 4 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR100. 5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-170. 6 Limited to two single circuit, one double circuit 600V or two 120V (E30KLA9) contact blocks behind each button. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-166 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Square Multifunction Operators and Indicating Lights UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 1 Two Button Operator with (OFF) Release—Includes OFF Bar/Button(s) (Order Other Buttons Separately) Button Types Required 12 Two Button Operator 1 Operation Top Button Bottom Button Special Features Catalog Number Maintained Momentary Release bar for top button E30AL 1 1 1 1 Shown with Release Bar for Top Button Two Button Operator Maintained Maintained Individual release bars for each button E30AN 1 Maintained with interlock Maintained with interlock Individual release bars for each button E30AM 1 1 1 Shown with Release Bars for Each Button 1 Single Indicating Light Unit 1 Single Indicating Light Unit/without Lens (Order Lens Separately) Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Lens Type Required 3 1 Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Lamp Number 4 Catalog Number 24 24PSB E30BJ 120 120PSB E30BM Voltage Lamp Number 4 Catalog Number Voltage 120 6PSB E30BA Shown with Lens 1 1 1 1 Dual Indicating Light Unit Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Lens Types Required 5 Shown with Lens 1 Dual Indicating Light Unit/without Lenses (Order Lenses Separately) 1 Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) 1 Voltage Lamp Number 4 Catalog Number Voltage Lamp Number 4 Catalog Number 120 6PSB E30CA 24 24PSB E30CJ 120 120PSB E30CM 1 1 1 Notes 1 Order from table on Page V7-T1-170. 2 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR101. 3 Order from table on Page V7-T1-171. 4 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-179. 5 Order from table on Page V7-T1-172. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-167 1.7 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Single Button Operator and Indicating Light Single Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Button or Lens (Order Button and Lens Separately) Type of Light Element 1 Button and Lens Types Required 1 1 1 Operation (Bottom Button) Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Voltage Momentary 120 Shown with Button and Lens Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number Voltage Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number 6PSB 24 24PSB E30DX3 120 120PSB E30DF E30DA 1 1 1 1 Single Button Operator with Release Bar and Indicating Light 1 Type of Light Element Button and Lens Types Required 1 1 1 Single Button Operator with (OFF) Release Bar and Indicating Light— Includes OFF Bar/Button (Order Other Button and Lens Separately) Operation (Bottom Button) Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Voltage Maintained 120 Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Lamp Number 3 Catalog Number Voltage Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number 6PSB 24 24PSB E30DX13 120 120PSB E30DM E30DG Shown with Button and Lens 1 1 1 Two Button Operator with Indicating Light Type of Light Element 1 Button and Lens Types Required 4 1 1 Two Button Operator with Indicating Light/without Buttons or Lens (Order Buttons and Lens Separately) Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights 1 1 Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number Voltage Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number 6PSB 24 24PSB 120 120PSB E30EF 24 24PSB E30EX13 120 120PSB E30EM 6PSB E30EA E30EG E30EX3 Type of Light Element Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Button Operation Voltage Momentary 120 Shown with Button and Lens Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Two Button Operator with Dual Indicating Lights/without Buttons and Lens Button and Lens Types Required 1 1 1 Voltage Momentary 120 with interlock 1 1 Button Operation Momentary 120 Shown with Button and Lens 1 1 Transformer (60/50 Hertz AC) Full Voltage (60/50 Hertz AC or DC) Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number Voltage Lamp Number 2 Catalog Number 6PSB 24 24PSB E30JX3 120 120PSB E30JF E30JA Notes 1 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-169 to V7-T1-173. 2 Light units will also accept LED lamps. For LED part numbers, see table on Page V7-T1-179. 3 Operators are supplied as standard with red extended release bar(s) marked “OFF” as shown in sketch. For other colors or markings, contact your nearest Eaton Distributor or call our Customer Service Center 1-800-356-1243. For replacement of standard red release bar, order E30KR101. 4 Order from tables on Pages V7-T1-171 and V7-T1-172. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-168 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Operator Components 1 Operating Buttons Only Type A Extended Button 1 Type A Buttons with Standard Markings 1 Button Application Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Short Button Catalog Number Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Short Button Catalog Number Black Blank E30KA100 E30KA150 Green START E30KA330 E30KA380 START — E30KA180 Yellow Blank E30KA400 E30KA450 Red Blank E30KA200 E30KA250 White Blank E30KA500 E30KA550 EMERG. STOP E30KA204 — Gray Blank E30KA600 E30KA650 OFF E30KA218 E30KA268 Brown Blank E30KA700 E30KA750 STOP E30KA231 E30KA281 Orange Blank E30KA800 E30KA950 Blank E30KA300 E30KA350 Blue Blank E30KA900 E30KA950 Short Button Catalog Number Green Type B Extended Button 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type B Buttons with Standard Markings 2 Button Application 1 Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Short Button Catalog Number Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Black Blank E30KB100 E30KB150 Black REVERSE E30KB125 E30KB175 AUTO E30KB101 E30KB151 RUN E30KB126 E30KB176 CLOSE E30KB102 E30KB152 SLOW E30KB128 E30KB178 DOWN E30KB103 E30KB153 START E30KB130 E30KB180 FAST E30KB105 E30KB155 TEST E30KB132 E30KB182 FORWARD E30KB107 E30KB157 UP E30KB134 E30KB184 HIGH E30KB109 E30KB159 Blank E30KB200 E30KB250 Red IN E30KB110 E30KB160 EMERG. STOP E30KB204 — INCH E30KB111 E30KB161 OFF E30KB218 E30KB268 JOG E30KB112 E30KB162 JOG FOR. E30KB113 E30KB163 Green STOP E30KB231 E30KB281 Blank E30KB300 E30KB350 START JOG REV. E30KB114 E30KB164 E30KB330 E30KB380 LOW E30KB115 E30KB165 Yellow Blank E30KB400 E30KB450 LOWER E30KB116 E30KB166 White Blank E30KB500 E30KB550 MAN E30KB117 E30KB167 AUTO E30KB501 — ON E30KB119 E30KB169 HAND E30KB508 — OPEN E30KB120 E30KB170 Gray Blank E30KB600 E30KB650 OUT E30KB121 E30KB171 Brown Blank E30KB700 E30KB750 RAISE E30KB122 E30KB172 Orange Blank E30KB800 E30KB850 RESET E30KB124 E30KB174 Blue E30KB900 E30KB950 Blank 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Use with operator E30AA, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high. 2 Use with operators E30AB thru AE, AL and DA thru DF, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-169 1.7 1 Type C Extended Button Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Type C Buttons with Standard Markings 1 Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Short Button Catalog Number Color Black Blank E30KC100 E30KC150 Black 1 AUTO E30KC101 E30KC151 CLOSE E30KC102 1 DOWN E30KC103 FAST E30KC105 E30KC155 1 1 1 1 Button Application Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Short Button Catalog Number RESET E30KC124 E30KC174 REVERSE E30KC125 E30KC175 E30KC152 RUN E30KC126 E30KC176 E30KC153 SLOW E30KC128 E30KC178 START E30KC130 E30KC180 FORWARD E30KC107 E30KC157 TEST E30KC132 E30KC182 HAND E30KC108 E30KC158 UP E30KC134 E30KC184 HIGH E30KC109 E30KC159 Blank E30KC200 E30KC250 Red IN E30KC110 E30KC160 OFF E30KC218 — INCH E30KC111 E30KC161 STOP E30KC231 E30KC281 JOG E30KC112 E30KC162 JOG FOR. E30KC113 E30KC163 JOG REV. E30KC114 E30KC164 1 LOW E30KC115 E30KC165 LOWER E30KC116 1 MAN 1 1 1 1 1 Green Blank E30KC300 E30KC350 START E30KC330 E30KC380 Yellow Blank E30KC400 E30KC450 White Blank E30KC500 E30KC550 E30KC166 Gray Blank E30KC600 E30KC650 E30KC117 E30KC167 Brown Blank E30KC700 E30KC750 ON E30KC119 E30KC169 Orange Blank E30KC800 E30KC850 OPEN E30KC120 E30KC170 Blue E30KC900 E30KC950 OUT E30KC121 E30KC171 RAISE E30KC122 E30KC172 Blank Note 1 Use with operators E30AF thru AK, AL thru AM and DG thru DM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-170 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Operating Buttons and Lens Only Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1 1 Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear. White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray. 1 Type E Button Button Application Type F Lens 1 Type E Buttons with Standard Markings 2 Marking Extended Button Catalog Number 1 RESET E30KE124 1 REVERSE E30KE125 Color Marking Extended Button Catalog Number Color Black Blank E30KE100 Black CLOSE E30KE102 DOWN E30KE103 RUN E30KE126 FAST E30KE105 SLOW E30KE128 FORWARD E30KE107 START E30KE130 HIGH E30KE109 TEST E30KE132 IN E30KE110 UP E30KE134 INCH E30KE111 JOG E30KE112 JOG FOR. E30KE113 JOG REV. E30KE114 LOW E30KE115 LOWER E30KE116 Yellow Blank E30KE400 ON E30KE119 White Blank E30KE500 OPEN E30KE120 Gray Blank E30KE600 OUT E30KE121 Brown Blank E30KE700 PHASE E30KE122 Orange Blank E30KE800 Blue E30KE900 Red Green Blank E30KE200 OFF E30KE218 STOP E30KE231 Blank E30KE300 START E30KE330 Blank 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type F Lenses with Standard Markings 3 Button Application Color Marking Catalog Number Color Red Blank E30KF10 MOTOR RUN E30KF11 ON POWER ON Green Marking Catalog Number Green OFF E30KF22 Amber Blank E30KF30 E30KF12 Blue Blank E30KF40 E30KF13 Clear Blank E30KF50 Blank E30KF20 White Blank E30KF60 MOTOR STOP E30KF21 MOTOR RUN E30KF23 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages V7-T1-176 to V7-T1-178. 2 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and JA thru JM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high. 3 Use with operators E30BA thru BY, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-171 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1 Operating Lens Only Standard Color Buttons and Lens Marking 1 1 Black lettering on — White, Amber, Yellow and Clear. White lettering on — Green, Red, Blue, Brown, Black, Orange and Gray. 1 Type G Lens 1 Type G Lenses with Standard Markings 2 Lens Application 1 Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number Red Blank E30KG10 Green OFF E30KG22 MOTOR RUN E30KG11 READY E30KG23 ON E30KG12 Amber Blank E30KG30 POWER ON E30KG13 Blue Blank E30KG40 Blank E30KG20 Clear Blank E30KG50 MOTOR RUN E30KG24 White Blank E30KG60 MOTOR STOP E30KG21 1 1 Green 1 1 1 Type J Lens Type J Lenses with Standard Markings 3 Lens Application 1 Color Marking Catalog Number Color Marking Catalog Number Red Blank E30KJ10 Green OFF E30KJ22 MOTOR RUN E30KJ11 ON E30KJ24 ON E30KJ12 Amber Blank E30KJ30 POWER ON E30KJ13 Blue Blank E30KJ40 MOTOR STOP E30KJ14 Clear Blank E30KJ50 Blank E30KJ20 White Blank E30KJ60 MOTOR STOP E30KJ21 MOTOR RUN E30KJ23 1 1 1 Green 1 1 1 Type K Lenses Type K Lenses with Standard Markings (Sold in Pairs Only) 4 Color 1 Lens Application Marking Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens 1 Catalog Number Red Red ON ON E30KK12 1 Green ON OFF E30KK13 Green OFF OFF E30KK22 OFF ON E30KK23 1 Red Notes 1 For lenses with special markings or with standard markings but in a different color, refer to instructions on Pages V7-T1-176 to V7-T1-178. 2 Use with operators E30CA thru CM and DA thru DM, legend characters 3/16 in (4.8 mm) high except MOTOR RUN, POWER ON and MOTOR STOP are 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high. 3 Use with operators E30EA thru EM, FA thru FM and GA thru GM, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high. 4 Use with operators E30JA thru JW, legend characters 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-172 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Type K Lenses 1.7 Type K Lenses—Blank (Sold in Pairs Only) Color 1 Color Left Hand Lens Right Hand Lens Catalog Number Left Hand Lens Red Red E30KK10 Blue Green E30KK11 Amber E30KK17 Amber E30KK43 Blue E30KK14 Blue E30KK40 Clear E30KK15 Clear E30KK45 White E30KK16 White E30KK46 Red E30KK21 Red E30KK51 Green E30KK20 Green E30KK52 Amber E30KK27 Amber E30KK53 Blue E30KK24 Blue E30KK54 Clear E30KK25 Clear E30KK50 White E30KK26 White E30KK56 Red E30KK31 Red E30KK61 Green E30KK32 Green E30KK62 Amber E30KK30 Amber E30KK63 Blue E30KK34 Blue E30KK64 Clear E30KK35 Clear E30KK65 White E30KK36 White E30KK60 Green Amber Clear White Right Hand Lens Catalog Number Red E30KK41 Green E30KK42 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-173 1.7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Contact Blocks Standard Contact Blocks—Molded, phenolic construction. Enclosed silver contacts with reliability “nibs” that improve the reliability of switching performance under dry circuit, corrosive atmosphere and fine dust conditions. For more extreme conditions, the logic level contact blocks described below are recommended. Logic Level Contact Blocks—Feature palladium contacts. Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for voltages and currents approaching zero. When mounted in an enclosure rated for highly corrosive environments, logic level contact blocks can be used where exposure to chemicals may cause failure to other types of materials. Mounting Limitations See the contact block mounting limitations for Type E30 pushbutton and combination pushbutton and light operators on this page. Mounting positions 1 thru 8 indicate single depth contact blocks. Each of these positions can represent either a single circuit 600 volt block or a two-circuit 120 volt block. The two-circuit 600 volt block requires two of the numbered positions shown. Mounting Positions Upper Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger 1 5 2 6 Upper Contact Block Stack 3 4 7 8 Contact Block Mounting Positions Lower Contact Block Stack Lower Contact Block Stack Operating Plunger Contact Blocks Can Be Mounted in Positions Listed Below Catalog Number of Operator Upper Stack E30AA thru E30AM 1 E30BA thru E30CM Lower Stack 1-2-3-4 5-6-7-8 None None E30DA thru E30DM None 5-6-7-8 E30EA thru E30GM 2-3-4 6-7-8 E30JA thru E30JM 3-4 7-8 1 1 Contact Block Type 2 1 Single Circuit, Screw Terminals Contact Block Selection Quick Connect Terminals 3 Pressure Terminals 1 Circuit 1NO Standard Logic Level Standard Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Single Circuit E30KLA1 E30KLAE1 E30KLB1 1NC E30KLA2 E30KLAE2 E30KLB2 1 1NO-1NC 600 Vac, 250 Vdc—Two Circuit 1 E30KLA3 E30KLAE3 E30KLB3 2NO E30KLA4 E30KLAE4 E30KLB4 2NC E30KLA5 E30KLAE5 E30KLB5 1NO-1NC Overlapping E30KLA6 4 — E30KLB6 4 2NO (One early closing) E30KLA7 4 — E30KLB7 4 2NC (One late opening) E30KLA8 — E30KLB8 1NO-1NC 120 Vac Only—Two Circuit — E30KLB9 5 1 1 Two Circuit, Screw Terminals Two Circuit, Quick Connect Terminals 1 Special Contact Operation 1 120 Vac Only— Two Circuit 1 1 1 1 E30KLA9 5 1 Notes 1 Except operator E30AD, AJ or AK which will accommodate contact blocks 1, 2, 5 and 6 only. (See Mounting Positions above.) 2 Individually boxed contact blocks master packed 10 per carton. 3 Supplied with non-stacking screws. Limited to 2 contact blocks mounted in positions 1 and 5. 4 Do not use with maintained operators. 5 Contacts must be same polarity. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-174 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Accessories 1 Accessories E30KR_ E30KT_ Description Color/Type Catalog Number Collar—Snap on mounting for assembly in the field. Permits color coding of operator heads. Size: 1-19/32 x 1-19/32 x 9/16 in. Black E30KR1 Red E30KR2 Green E30KR3 Yellow E30KR4 White E30KR5 Gray E30KR6 Orange E30KR8 Blue E30KR9 Brown E30KR10 Shroud—Similar to collar above except for extension above Full shroud the face of button to prevent accidental actuation of button. (gray) Half shroud with an extension on only half the collar may be positioned Full Half shroud to protect top or bottom button. Shroud (gray) 1 1 1 1 1 1 E30KT6 1 E30KT7 1 1 Half Shroud E30KR3_ 1 Guard—Two collars deep, removable slide prevents accidental operation. White slide can be marked with grease pencil. Red with white slide E30KR31 Red with clear slide E30KR32 1 1 1 E30KR30 Terminal Block—2 terminals, each will accommodate 2-wire terminations. E30KR30 1 1 E30KT_ E30KT3 Padlock Attachment for locking single button and bottom button of multi-function operators in the depressed position. Locks NC contacts open or early closing NO contacts closed. Cannot be used in conjunction with collar, shroud or boot. Transparent Boot—Guards against ingress of foreign material and freezing rain. Note: If this boot is used in conjunction with operator types AD or AE, an extended type button must be used in the top position and a short button in the lower position. Short button E30KT1 Extended button E30KT2 1 1 1 E30KT3 1 1 1 E30KT_ Square Hole Plug— Gray enameled Stainless steel 1 E30KT4 E30KT5 1 E30KV1 Lamp and Lens Removal Tool—Will not fit Cat. No. E30B light units listed on Page V7-T1-167. E30KV1 E22CW Octagonal Wrench for mounting operators to panel. E22CW 1 1 1 E30KV2 Button and Lens Removal Tool 1 E30KV2 1 1 Note 1 Color coordinating collars, padlock attachments or legend plates cannot be used with operators equipped with a transparent boot. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-175 1.7 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Options Markings and Legend Plates 1 1 1 1 Buttons or Lenses with NonStandard Horizontal Markings Markings not listed as Standard Markings below are considered non-standard. If more than one marking is required on a button or lens, order non-standard markings. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ordering Example Green Type B button to be marked with non-standard legend “ALL ELEVATORS DOWN.” Ordering Instructions Specify catalog number of blank button or lens of desired color, plus suffix “STAMP” for non-standard or “STD” for standard markings in order notes. See Pages V7-T1-169 to V7-T1-173. ● Specify size, legend desired and location in order notes by alphas as shown in example. ● Do not exceed maximum number of legend characters per line. ● How to Use the Legend Location Figure No. of Characters per Line Lenses Buttons Line Position Catalog No.: E30KB300STAMP Letter Size: 1/8 in Pos. A—ALL Pos. C—ELEVATORS Pos. F—DOWN 7 A 8 9 7 C E 8 8 Legend Locations Type A buttons and Type F lenses 1/8 in (3 mm) High Char. G 9 9 E 8 9 J 8 8 9 D 8 9 G 8 K 9 1 9 B 8 9 E 8 9 J 8 9 M 8 8 9 A 8 9 D 8 9 G 8 9 K 8 9 N 8 Type F lens only 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/16 in (5 mm) High Char. F 9 9 D 8 9 H 8 8 9 B 8 9 F 8 9 K 8 9 B 8 9 E 8 9 J 8 9 K 8 1 1 1 1 8 C 8 F 8 J 8 L 8 Type B buttons and Type G lenses 1/8 in (3 mm) High Char. C 9 8 9 B 8 9 D 8 7 9 7 3/16 in (5 mm) High Char. 8 8 8 A C F C 9 8 B 8 8 D 8 8 Type C buttons 1/8 in (3 mm) High Char. C 6 5 B 5 D 4 6 4 3/16 in (5 mm) High Char. A C E Type D buttons 1/8 in (3 mm) High Char. 5 B 5 D 6 C Type K buttons 5 5 B 6 3/16 in (5 mm) High Char. A C 6 B 1/8 in (3 mm) High Char. 1 1 A B 4 E 4 A 4 C 4 D 4 F 4 3/16 in (5 mm) High Char. B 4 Type E buttons and Type J lenses 1/8 in (3 mm) High Char. B 9 8 7 7 A C 8 8 3/16 in (5 mm) High Char. 9 B 8 Standard Markings AUTO CLOSE DOWN V7-T1-176 EMERG. STOP FAST FORWARD HAND HIGH IN INCH JOG JOG FOR. JOG REV. LOW LOWER MAN. OFF ON OPEN OUT RAISE RESET REVERSE RUN SLOW START STOP TEST UP MOTOR RUN MOTOR STOP POWER ON READY Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com E 4 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Legend Arrangements and Legend Locations Legend plates E30KM1 or KM11 1 Legend plates E30KM5 or KM15 Legend plates E30KM6 or KM16 B 1 H G Legend plates E30KM4 or KM14 1 H B A 1 K B D M A J B K 1 Legend plates E30KM3 or KM13 B F 1 M C C L D M 1 D A E B F Legend plates E30KM2 or KM12 B F M 1 A E L 1 B F M D C B B 1 G F F 1 1 Legend Plates E30KN76 or KN76B 1 LINE B L I N E L I N E A C 1 Legend plates E30KN76 or KN76B 1/8 in character size only with a maximum of six characters. 1 1 1 1 Maximum Number and Size of Permissible Legend Characters of Custom Stamped Legend Plates 1 Size and Maximum Number of Characters Per Line One Span Two Span Three Span Type No.of Lines 3/32 in (2.5 mm) 1/8 in (3 mm) 3/16 in (5 mm) 3/32 in (2.5 mm) 1/8 in (3 mm) 3/16 in (5 mm) 3/32 in (2.5 mm) 1/8 in (3 mm) 3/16 in (5 mm) Standard 1 13 10 10 30 22 22 47 34 34 Large 1 13 10 10 30 23 23 47 36 36 2 13 10 10 30 23 23 47 36 36 1 1 1 Characters available for non-standard markings 3/32 in (2.5 mm)—1/8 in (3 mm)—3/16 in (5 mm) ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 1 ./—, 1 1234567890 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-177 1.7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 Buttons or Lenses with Non-Standard Vertical Markings Ordering Instructions ● Specify catalog number of blank button or lens of desired color, selected from listings on Pages V7-T1-169 to V7-T1-173. ● Specify size, legend desired, location and state “vertically marked” in order notes. Note: Specify either 1/8 or 3/16 in (3.2 or 4.8 mm) character height. Do not exceed maximum number of characters as outlined in table below. Ordering Example: Green Type K button to be marked with “RUN” “ON.” Legend Plates Legend plates for Type E30 compact pushbutton and indicating light operators hook directly onto the operator and are clamped in place when the operator locking nut behind the panel is secured. Two and three span plates are designed for use where two or more operators are mounted adjacent to each other on minimum horizontal mounting centers. These legend plates mount in the same manner as single span units. When Ordering Legend Plates with Markings ● Catalog number of blank legend plate ● Insert the following in order notes: ● Legends required ● Size of characters— 3/32, 1/8, 3/16 in (2.4, 3.2, 4.8 mm) ● Positions of legends on one line standard and two line large legend plates by alphas as shown in sketches on following page. Ordering Example: Three span legend plate to be marked “MASTER CONTROL”, “STATION A” and “STATION B.” Catalog No.: E30KM3STAMP Letter Size: 1/8 in (3.2 mm) Pos. C—MASTER CONTROL Pos. B—STATION A Pos. F—STATION B Blank Legend Plates and Legend Plates with Markings Catalog No.: E30KK20STAMP Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm) Vertically Marked Pos. B—RUN Pos. E—ON Type One Span Catalog Number Black Standard— One Span Standard E30KM1 Large—One Span Large E30KM4 Maximum Number of Characters Maximum Number of Characters Description Type 1/8 in (3.2 mm) 3/16 in (4.8 mm) Buttons A 7 5 B 7 5 C 4 3 D 5 3 E 7 5 F 7 5 G 7 5 J 7 5 K 3 2 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Lenses 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-178 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Replacement Parts 1 Replacement Light Units for E30 Components 1 Part Numbers—Receptacles without Lamps Voltage AC and DC Single Indicating Light Dual Indicating Light Single Light Single Pushbutton Single Light Dual Pushbutton Dual Light Dual Pushbutton 6V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567 12V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567 18/24V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567 28V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567 32V 57-2579-3A 57-2568-2A 57-2568-2A — 57-2567 48V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567 120V 57-2579-3A 57-2568A 57-2568A 57-2579-3A 57-2567 1 120V 42-2672A 42-2663A 42-2663A 42-2671A 42-2664A 1 208V 42-2672-2A 42-2663-2A 42-2663-2A 42-2671-2A 42-2664-2A 240V 42-2672-3A 42-2663-3A 42-2663-3A 42-2671-3A 42-2664-3A 380V 42-2672-4A 42-2663-4A 42-2663-4A 42-2671-4A 42-2664-4A 480V 42-2672-5A 42-2663-5A 42-2663-5A 42-2671-5A 42-2664-5A 600V 42-2672-6A 42-2663-6A 42-2663-6A 42-2671-6A 42-2664-6A 1 1 1 Full Voltage Type 1 1 1 1 Transformer Type 1 1 Description and Part Numbers—Related Parts Inner lens 28-1008 28-1010 28-1010 28-1010 28-1010 Retaining nut 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 15-1885 Gasket 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 16-2092 Locking ring 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 52-1116 1 1 1 Replacement Lamps for E30 Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 6PSB 6V T2 slide E30 transformer and full voltage 28-1022 12PSB 12V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1025 24PSB 24V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1026 28PSB 28V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1027 48PSB 48V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1028 60PSB 60V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1598 120PSB 120V T2 slide E30 full voltage 28-1029 #259 6.3V T3-1/4 wedge E30 single transformer 28-949 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Replacement Lamps—Incandescent and LED Incandescent Lamps LED Lamps 1 Lamp Voltage Manufacturer’s Part Number Base Style Eaton’s Part Number Eaton’s Part Number Red Green Yellow Blue 1 6 6PSB T2 slide 28-1022 35-1523 35-1523-2 35-1523-3 35-1523-17 12 12PSB T2 slide 28-1025 35-1523-11 35-1523-12 35-1523-13 35-1523-18 24 24PSB T2 slide 28-1026 35-1523-4 35-1523-5 35-1523-6 35-1523-19 28 28PSB T2 slide 28-1027 35-1523-4 35-1523-5 35-1523-6 35-1523-19 48 48PSB T2 slide 28-1028 35-1523-14 35-1523-15 35-1523-16 35-1523-20 120 120PSB T2 slide 28-1029 35-1523-7 35-1523-8 35-1523-9 35-1523-21 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 E30 blue LED bulbs may not provide sufficient intensity for some applications. 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-179 1.7 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Operator Specifications 1 Climate Conditions 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Specification Operating –20° to 150°F (–29° to 65°C) Terminals Light units Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2) Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Contact block Terminals are saddle clamp type for 2 stranded or solid wires up to 12 AWG (4.0 mm2) Torque—7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Materials Operator Zinc base die casting with a copper-nickel-chrome plated finish Withstands the 200 hr. salt spray test in accordance with MIL Spec. QQ-M-151A and NEMA 4X testing. Internal parts Including shafts, washers and springs, are made of stainless steel Buttons and lenses Colorfast, wear resistant, molded acetal resin Contact blocks Made of molded, heat resistant, mineral filled phenolic Contact block plungers are molded of nylon filled phenolic Contacts are silver Reliability nibs These nibs combine a scrubbing action with high pressure density when the contacts are closed They push through particles and films found on contact surfaces in industrial environments Reliability nibs self-adjust to the application—dry circuit, normal or heavy-duty 1 1 1 1 Reliability Nibs 1 Heavy-Duty Medium Duty Dry Circuit 1 1 Electrical Ratings 1 Contact Blocks 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designation A600 and P300 Vac A600 Vdc P300 Description 120V 240V 480V 600V 24/28V 125V 250V Make and emergency interrupting capacity (Amps) 60 30 15 12 5.73 1.1 0.55 Normal load break (Amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.73 1.1 0.55 Continuous current (Amps) 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 ● ● ● ● UL A600/P300 nominal connect 10A 1NO, 1NC, 2NO, 2NC, 1NO-1NC, early make, late break and overlapping configurations Mechanical positive drive operation on NC contacts Palladium alloy contact for logic level or highly corrosive environments Maximum Ratings for Logic Level and Hostile Atmosphere Application Light Unit Description Specification Description Maximum amperes 0.5A 1 Bulbs—Average Life Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc Transformer type 1 1 1 Specification 20,000 hrs. Resistor/direct voltage type 2,500 hrs. min. at rated voltage LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. Note 1 Logic level contact blocks are UL A600/P500 rated per table above. V7-T1-180 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight—E30 1.7 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators Pushbutton Operators 0.53 (13.5) 1.75 (44.5) 0.81 (20.6) 1.72 (43.7) 1.72 (43.7) Plunger 2 Circ. Extends to Cont. Blocks 0.25 (6.4) 1.13 (28.7) 1.47 (37.3) 0.63 (16) Std. Square Button 0.78 (19.8) Ext. Button 0.81 (20.6) 1.13 (28.7) 1.47 (37.3) Square Panel 0.88 0.88 0.06 (1.5) Min. 0.25 (6.4) Max. (22.4) (22.4) 1 Circ. Cont. Blocks Combination Pushbutton and Indicating Light Operators 0.53 (13.5) 1.13 (28.7) 0.81 (20.6) 1.72 (43.7) Transformer Types DA – DL 1.75 (44.5) 0.88 (22.4) 0.84 (21.3) 0.53 (13.5) 1.13 (28.7) Operator Types E30EA– E30GM Operator Types E30JA– E30JW Transformer or Full Voltage Light Element Panel Plungers 0.06 (1.5) Min. Extended 0.25 (6.4) Max. to 0.25 (6.4) 0.81 (20.6) 0.11 (2.8) Max. 1 Operator Types E30CA– E30CM 1 0.84 (21.3) Panel 0.06 (1.5) Min. 0.25 (6.4) Max. 1 1 1 2.25 a (57) 1 Drill .14 (3.5) 0.6 (15) 1.59 (40.4) 0.56 (14.2) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Hole 1 1 ø 1.20 (30.5) Notes 1 Dimensions shown allow adequate space for the addition of one or two high legend plates and color coordinating collars. 2 Locating nib hole or notch is 0.136 in (3.5 mm) drill. Alternate to drilling mounting holes use Greenlee Tool Co. punch (No. 730-S) to punch the hole and (No. 730-K) to punch the notch. Legend Plates 1 1 1 4.69 (119.1) Three Span 1 3.06 (77.7) Two Span 1.44 (36.6) One Span 1 0.78 (19.8) 0.39 (9.9) Large 1 1 0.75 (19.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 0.5 (12.7) 1.44 (36.6) 1 Operator Types E30BA– E30BM 1.63 a (41.3) 0.69 (17.5) 1 1 1.72 (43.7) Drilling Dimensions—Minimum Spacing 12 Padlocking Attachment and Half Shroud E30KT7 1 1 1.47 (37.3) Square Plunger Extends Panel to 0.25 (6.4) on 0.06 (1.5) Min. 0.25 (6.4) Max. Contact Blocks 1 1 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) 0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4) 0.84 (21.3) 1.72 (43.7) Indicating Light Operators Full Voltage Types DF, DM and DX 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) 1.47 (37.3) Square 0.53 (13.5) 1.88 (47.8) 1.88 (47.8) 1.75 (44.5) 1.75 (44.5) 1 1 Standard 0.08 (1.9) 0.05 (1.3) 1 0.02 (0.5) 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-181 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contents 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-183 V7-T1-183 V7-T1-184 V7-T1-186 V7-T1-187 V7-T1-188 V7-T1-192 V7-T1-193 V7-T1-194 V7-T1-196 V7-T1-199 V7-T1-202 V7-T1-203 V7-T1-207 V7-T1-208 V7-T1-211 V7-T1-214 V7-T1-215 V7-T1-216 V7-T1-219 V7-T1-220 V7-T1-225 V7-T1-230 V7-T1-239 V7-T1-241 V7-T1-244 Drawings Online 1 1 Page 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pull Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roto-Push Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roto-Push Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Description Features The 30.5 mm pushbutton line features a zinc die cast construction with chromeplated housing and mounting nut. The same durable construction is also available with the corrosive resistant E34 line of pushbuttons. See E34 section on Pages V7-T1-254 to V7-T1-288. ● ● ● ● Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction Enclosed silver contacts with reliability nibs Diaphragm seals with drainage holes Grounding nibs on the operator casing Benefits 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 ● 1 V7-T1-182 Reliability nibs improve contact reliability even under dry circuit and fine dust conditions Drainage holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator which can prevent operation in freezing environments Grounding nibs bit through paint and other coatings to provide secure ground Application Description Contact Operation Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation, i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring breakage. Standards and Certifications ● ● ● CE EN 60947-5-1 and 60947-5-5 UL 508—File No. 131568 CSA C22.2 No. 14—File No. LR68551 Ingress Protection When mounted in similarly rated enclosure— ● Standard indicating lights ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● IEC IP65 ● Most other operators ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● IEC IP65 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Product Overview 1 Reliability Nibs Grounding Nibs Eaton’s contact blocks feature enclosed silver contacts with pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable performance from logic level up to 600V. To ensure reliable switching, nibs bite through oxide which can form on silver contacts, eliminating the need for expensive logic level blocks for most applications. 10250T line operators have “grounding nibs”—four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through most paints and other coatings on metal panels to enhance the ground connection when the operator is securely tightened. Grounding Nibs Grounding Nibs Reliability Nibs Dry Circuit Medium Duty Diaphragm Seal with Drainage Holes 1 Liquid Drainage Eaton’s pushbutton operators offer front of panel drainage via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut, these holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator, which can prevent operation in freezing environments. The holes also provide a route for escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure from the internal diaphragm seal, ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Diaphragm Seal 1 Foam Neoprene Panel Sealing Gasket Drainage Hole Heavy-Duty 1 Flexible Diaphragm Reliability nibs improve performance in dry circuit, corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum operational current is 1 mA, AC/DC. For operation under a wider range of environmental conditions, logic level contact blocks with inert palladium tipped contacts are recommended. 1 Stainless Steel Operating Spring 1 Colorfast Molded Button 1 1 Drainage Hole Mounting Nut 1 1 1 1 Product Identification 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Series 1 Terminal Clamps Shipped Ready to Wire 1 1 1 1 1 Mounting Nut Legend Plate Operator Color Coded Plungers Red = NC Green = NO 1 Stackable Contact Blocks up to 12 Circuits per Operator Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-183 1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 10250T 10 1 – 1 1 1 1 Operator 10 = Flush 11 = Extended 12 = 40 mm mushroom 17 = 65 mm mushroom 50 = 1/2 shroud vertical mount 51 = 1/2 shroud horizontal mount 1 1 Button Color 1 = Black 5 = Gray 2 = Red 6 = White 3 = Green 8 = Blue 4 = Yellow 9 = Orange 1 1 10250T 5 63 C47 1 1 1 Operator 5 = Two-position maintained 4 = Three-position mom push-mom pull 9 = Three-position mt push-mom pull 10 = Three-position mom push-mom pull Incandescent Light Unit Blank = Non-illuminated 89 = 24V/XFR 63 = 120V/XFR 64 = 208V/XFR 65 = 240V/XFR 82 = 277V/XFR 66 = 380V/XFR 67 = 480V/XFR 68 = 600V/XFR 69 = 6V/FV 70 = 12V/FV 79 = 24V/FV 83 = 32V/FV 80 = 120V/RES 81 = 240V/RES 1 1 1 1 1 1 LED Light Unit Blank = Non-illuminated 89L = 24V/XFR 63L = 120V/XFR 64L = 208V/XFR 65L = 240V/XFR 82L = 277V/XFR 66L = 380V/XFR 67L = 480V/XFR 68L = 600V/XFR 97L = Full voltage 1 1 1 1 1 Circuit = Operator only = 1NO-1NC = 2NO = 2NC = 1NC = 1NO Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls 1 1 Blank 1 2 3 51 53 – 1 1 LED Voltage Blank = Non-illuminated Blank = Incandescent 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac 2D = 120 Vdc B60 B62 B63 B61 B64 J60 J62 J63 J61 J64 Non-Illuminated Button = Black 40 mm = Red 40 mm = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP = Green 40 mm = Blue 40 mm = Black 65 mm = Red 65 mm = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP = Green 65 mm = Yellow 65 mm Incandescent C47 = C53 = C48 = C49 = C50 = C51 = C52 = C57 = C63 = C58 = C59 = C64 = C60 = C61 = C62 = C65 = C66 = C67 = Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = Circuit Operator only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO Illuminated LED Lens Type RD = Red 40 mm ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP GD = Green 40 mm LD = Blue 40 mm AD = Amber 40 mm WD = White 40 mm — = Clear 40 mm RS = Red side light ES = Red side light—“E” STOP GS = Green side light LS = Blue side light AS = Amber side light YS = Yellow side light WS = White side light — = Clear side light RH = Red heavy-duty GH = Green heavy-duty AH = Amber heavy-duty Note 1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-184 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 10250T 416 C21 Incandescent Light Unit 416 = 24V/XFR 411 = 120V/XFR 412 = 240V/XFR 419 = 277V/XFR 413 = 380V/XFR 414 = 480V/XFR 415 = 600V/XFR 473 = 6V/FV 474 = 12V/FV 476 = 24V/FV 477 = 32V/FV 478 = 48V/FV 471 = 120V/RES 472 = 240V/RES LED Light Unit 397L = Full voltage 416L = 24V/XFR 411L = 120V/XFR 412L = 240V/XFR 419L = 277V/XFR 413L = 380V/XFR 414L = 480V/XFR 415L = 600V/XFR Incandescent Lens Color C21 = Red C22 = Green C23 = Yellow C26 = White C24 = Blue C43 = Amber C25 = Clear LED Lens Color RD = Red GD = Green YD = Yellow WD = White LD = Blue AD = Amber – 1 1 LED Voltage Blank = Incandescent 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac 2D = 120 Vdc 1 Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = Circuit Operator only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test 10250T 203N C1N 1 1 1 Light Unit Type Standard—Incandescent 181N = 120V/XFR 182N = 240V/XFR 198N = 277V/XFR 183N = 380V/XFR 184N = 480V/XFR 185N = 600V/XFR 203N = 6V/FV 204N = 12V/FV 206N = 24V/FV 207N = 32V/FV 208N = 48V/FV 201N = 120V/RES 202N = 240V/RES 226N = 120V/neon 227N = 240V/neon PresTest—Incandescent 221N = 120V/XFR 222N = 240V/XFR 223N = 380V/XFR 224N = 480V/XFR 225N = 600V/XFR 232N = 6V/FV 233N = 12V/FV 235N = 24V/FV 238N = 32V/FV 239N = 48V/FV 231N = 120V/RES 240N = 240V/RES Master Test—Incandescent 187N = 120V/XFR 189N = 240 Vac—SS Standard—LED 181L = 120V/XFR 182L = 240V/XFR 198L = 277V/XFR 183L = 380V/XFR 184L = 480V/XFR 185L = 600V/XFR 197L = Full voltage PresTest—LED 221L = 120V/XFR 222L = 240V/XFR 223L = 380V/XFR 224L = 480V/XFR 225L = 600V/XFR 297L = Full voltage LED Voltage Blank = Incandescent 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac 2D = 120 Vdc Plastic Glass Lens Color Standard/Master—Incandescent C1N = C7N = Red C2N = C8N = Green C3N = — = Yellow C6N = C12N = White C4N = C10N = Blue C19N = C9N = Amber C5N = C11N = Clear PresTest—Incandescent C21 = C13N = Red C22 = C14N = Green C23 = — = Yellow C26 = C18N = White C24 = C16N = Blue C43 = C15N = Amber C25 = C17N = Clear 1 1 1 1 Plastic Glass Lens Color Standard/Master/PresTest—LED RP = RG = Red GP = GG = Green YP = — = Yellow WP = WG = White LP = LG = Blue AP = AG = Amber 1 1 1 1 LED Voltage Blank = Incandescent 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory. 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-185 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Product Selection Point-of-Purchase Packaging 1 1 Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Device 10250T Point-of-Purchase Packaged Pilot Devices Product Description Catalog Number Emergency Stop Operators 1 1 1 1 Red non-illuminated push-pull 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP. 10250T5B62-1-POP Red mushroom pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: EMERG. STOP and STOP. 10250T32R-POP Red jumbo mushroom pushbutton Engraved EMERG. STOP with 1NO-1NC contact block. 10250T33-POP Momentary Pushbuttons 1 Black flush pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: START and JOG. 10250T30B-POP 1 Red extended pushbutton 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: STOP. 10250T31R-POP Red indicating light 10250T206NC1N-POP 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes two square engraved legend plates: RUN and JOG. Red indicating light Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with two extra lenses: Green and Amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: RUN and JOG. 10250T34R-POP 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons 1 Red illuminating pushbutton Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON. 10250T476C21-1-POP Red illuminating pushbutton Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc with 1NO-1NC contact block and two extra lenses: Green and amber. Also includes one square engraved legend plate: POWER ON. 10250T411C21-1-POP Indicating Lights 1 1 1 Selector Switches 1 Black knob two-position selector switch 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes three square engraved legend plates: OFF/ON, HAND/AUTO and RUN/JOG. 10250T20KB-POP 1 Black knob three-position selector switch 2NO-2NC contact blocks. Also includes 1 square engraved legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO. 10250T22KB-POP 1 Black knob three-position selector switch 1NO-1NC contact block. Also includes legend plate: HAND/OFF/AUTO 10250T21KB-POP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-186 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Flush Button 1 Pushbutton Units—Flush, Extended, Mushroom Head or Jumbo Mushroom Head Operators Contact Type Button Color Flush Button Catalog Number Extended Button Catalog Number Mushroom Button Catalog Number Jumbo Mushroom Catalog Number 1NO Black 10250T23B 10250T25B 10250T26B 10250T27B Red 10250T23R 10250T112-53 10250T122-53 10250T172-53 Extended Button 1NC Mushroom Button 1NO-1NC Jumbo Mushroom 2NO 2NC 1 Green 10250T23G 10250T25G 10250T26G 10250T27G 10250T23Y 10250T25Y 10250T26Y 10250T27Y Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-53 Black 10250T101-51 10250T111-51 10250T121-51 10250T171-51 Red 10250T102-51 10250T25R 10250T26R 10250T27R Green 10250T103-51 10250T113-51 10250T123-51 10250T173-51 Yellow 10250T104-51 10250T120-51 10250T124-51 10250T174-51 Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T29 Black 10250T30B 10250T31B 10250T32B 10250T33B Red 10250T30R 10250T31R 10250T32R 10250T33R 10250T30G 10250T31G 10250T32G 10250T33G Yellow 10250T30Y 10250T31Y 10250T32Y 10250T33Y Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T33 Black 10250T101-2 10250T111-2 10250T121-2 10250T171-2 Red 10250T102-2 10250T112-2 10250T122-2 10250T172-2 Green 10250T103-2 10250T113-2 10250T123-2 10250T173-2 Yellow 10250T104-2 10250T120-2 10250T124-2 10250T174-2 1 1 Yellow Green 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-2 Black 10250T101-3 10250T111-3 10250T121-3 10250T171-3 Red 10250T102-3 10250T112-3 10250T122-3 10250T172-3 Green 10250T103-3 10250T113-3 10250T123-3 10250T173-3 Yellow 10250T104-3 10250T120-3 10250T124-3 10250T174-3 Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T17213-3 1 1 1 Note 1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-187 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Pushbuttons UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-illuminated 1 Button Color Catalog Number Flush button 1 Black 10250T101 Red 10250T102 Green 10250T103 Yellow 10250T104 1 Gray 10250T105 White 10250T106 1 Blue 10250T108 Orange 10250T109 Black 10250T111 1 Red 10250T112 Green 10250T113 1 Yellow 10250T120 White 10250T116 1 Blue 10250T118 Orange 10250T119 10250T10_ 1 1 1 1 10250T11_ 10250T5_ Extended button Half shrouded button Note: To order complete assembled unit using one composite catalog number, add contact block and legend plate suffix to the end of operator catalog number. Example: 10250T101-1TS33 Operator 10250T101 Vertical Horizontal 1 Black 10250T501 10250T511 Red 10250T502 10250T512 1 Green 10250T503 10250T513 Yellow 10250T504 10250T514 Gray 10250T505 10250T515 1 White 10250T506 10250T516 Blue 10250T508 10250T518 1 Orange 10250T509 10250T519 Black 10250T121 Red 10250T122 Green 10250T123 Yellow 10250T124 Blue 10250T129 Black 10250T171 Red 10250T172 1 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250T17213 Green 10250T173 1 Yellow 10250T174 Black 10250ED1164-2 Red 10250ED1164-3 1 Green 10250ED1164-4 Yellow 10250ED1164-5 1 Clear 10250ED1164 1 10250T12_ Mushroom button 1 1 1 10250T17_ 1 Jumbo mushroom button 2 Contact Block 10250T1 Legend Plate 10250TS33 1 10250ED1164_ 1 1 Low operating force— jumbo mushroom 23 Notes 1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add suffix letter E to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T101E. 2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 3 Operating force—Standard = 2.4 lb; low force = 1.6 lb. 1 1 V7-T1-188 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 10250TA_ 1 Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators Description Catalog Number Black flush and green flush 10250TA66 Black flush and long red 10250TA67 Black flush and red mushroom head 10250TA68 Black flush and lock-down red mushroom head 10250TA69 1 Black flush and red jumbo mushroom head 10250TA76 Green flush and long red 10250TA72 Black long and long red 10250TA73 Green flush and red mushroom head 10250TA77 Green flush and black flush 10250TA75 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 NC contacts must be mounted behind lock-down mushroom head operator to ensure lockout. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-189 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1 Lockout Pushbutton Operators with Padlock Attachments UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 The following pushbutton and mushroom operators include an integral padlock attachment for applications requiring lockout/tagout of specific machine functions. They are available in styles which allow locking of a button in the down position 1 1 1 (stopped position) or locking a button in the up position (to prevent starting). Select the “Hand” latch type which functions as a momentary pushbutton until the operator presses the button and moves the padlock attachment into position for locking, or choose the “Spring Loaded” latch type where the padlock attachment springs into place when the button is pressed. Units accept a customer supplied 1/4 in padlock. 1 1 10250TA16 Padlockable in the Down Position 1 Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number Flush head Red Hand 10250TA16 1 Mushroom head Red Hand 10250TA42 Red Spring loaded 10250TA45 1 Jumbo head 2 Red Hand 10250TA52 Red Spring loaded 10250TA55 Red (EMERG. STOP) Spring loaded 10250ED952 1 1 1 Padlockable in the Up Position 1 1 1 10250TA4_ Operator Type Color Latch Type Catalog Number Mushroom head Black Hand 10250TA41 Green Hand 10250TA43 Black Hand 10250TA51 Green Hand 10250TA53 Yellow Hand 10250TA54 1 1 1 10250TA5_ Jumbo mushroom head 2 1 1 1 Notes Hand attachment must be manually moved into place for locking. Spring loaded: when operator is pressed— attachment springs into place. Must be moved manually to release button. 1 1 2 1 Operators can be latched down without a padlock. Padlock not included. Jumbo mushroom heads are not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-190 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Key Pushbutton Operator UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 These devices incorporate an integral locking mechanism which enables locking units in various positions (Locked Down), locking units to 1 prevent operation (Locked Up) or setting unit to lock when the button is pressed (Push to Lock), requiring the key to be inserted to return to 1 normal operation. With the key in the center position, these operators function as a normal momentary pushbutton (Free). 1 1 Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Below Listed operators have Replacement Keys identical locks and keys Description Catalog Number (Key Code H661) Catalog Replacement keys 10250ED824 Number 10250ED824. For (code H661) dissimilar lock and key combinations, see listing on Page V7-T1-212. 10250T43_ 1 1 1 1 Key Pushbutton Operator Key Position and Pushbutton Operations 1 C L R Key Removal Positions Vertical Mounting 1 Catalog Number 1 1 Three-Position 1 Lock up Free Lock down All 10250T430 Lock up Free Lock down L and R 10250T431 Lock up Free Lock down C and R 10250T432 1 Lock up Free — L and C 10250T433 1 Two-Position Lock up Free — L 10250T434 — Free Lock down C and R 10250T435 — Free Lock down R 10250T436 — Free Push to lock C and R 10250T437 — Free Push to lock R 10250T438 1 1 1 1 Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 10250ED1043-4 1 1 Operator Only with Button Description Catalog Number Latch-in, twist-to-release operator with red mushroom head button 10250ED1043-4 1 1 1 Note 1 Horizontal mounting available on request. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-191 1.8 1 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● LED or incandescent Full voltage, resistor or transformer type Plastic lenses 1 1 24V Full Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton 1 Illuminated Pushbutton Units Type Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton 1NO Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Catalog Number 1NC Catalog Number 10250T397LRD24-53 10250T397LRD24-1 10250T397LRD24-51 10250T397LGD24-53 10250T397LGD24-1 10250T397LGD24-51 Amber 10250T397LAD24-53 10250T397LAD24-1 10250T397LAD24-51 Yellow 10250T397LYD24-53 10250T397LYD24-1 10250T397LYD24-51 Blue 10250T397LLD24-53 10250T397LLD24-1 10250T397LLD24-51 10250T397LWD24-51 Color LED/Lamp Number LED Lamp 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red Green 1 1 Bayonet base White 10250T397LWD24-53 10250T397LWD24-1 Red 10250T397LRD2A-53 10250T397LRD2A-1 10250T397LRD2A-51 Green 10250T397LGD2A-53 10250T397LGD2A-1 10250T397LGD2A-51 Amber 10250T397LAD2A-53 10250T397LAD2A-1 10250T397LAD2A-51 1 Yellow 10250T397LYD2A-53 10250T397LYD2A-2 10250T397LYD2A-51 Blue 10250T397LLD2A-53 10250T397LLD2A-1 10250T397LLD2A-51 1 White 10250T397LWD2A-53 10250T397LWD2A-1 10250T397LWD2A-51 Red 10250T411LRD06-53 10250T411LRD06-1 10250T411LRD06-51 1 Green 10250T411LGD06-53 10250T411LGD06-1 10250T411LGD06-51 Amber 10250T411LAD06-53 10250T411LAD06-1 10250T411LAD06-51 1 Yellow 10250T411LYD06-53 10250T411LYD06-1 10250T411LYD06-51 Blue 10250T411LLD06-53 10250T411LLD06-1 10250T411LLD06-51 White 10250T411LWD06-53 10250T411LWD06-1 10250T411LWD06-51 1 120 Vac/Vdc 1 Transformer 1 120 Vac Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1 1 1 Resistor 1 120 Vac/Vdc 1 1 1 Transformer 120 Vac 10250T476C21-53 10250T476C21-1 10250T476C21-51 Green Red 10250T476C22-53 10250T476C22-1 10250T476C22-51 Amber 10250T476C43-53 10250T476C43-1 10250T476C43-51 Yellow 10250T476C23-53 10250T476C23-1 10250T476C23-51 Blue 10250T476C24-53 10250T476C24-1 10250T476C24-51 Clear 10250T476C25-53 10250T476C25-1 10250T476C25-51 White 10250T476C26-53 10250T476C26-1 10250T476C26-51 10250T471C21-53 10250T471C21-1 10250T471C21-51 Green 10250T471C22-53 10250T471C22-1 10250T471C22-51 Amber 10250T471C43-53 10250T471C43-1 10250T471C43-51 Yellow 10250T471C23-53 10250T471C23-1 10250T471C23-51 Blue 10250T471C24-53 10250T471C24-1 10250T471C24-51 Clear 10250T471C25-53 10250T471C25-1 10250T471C25-51 White 10250T471C26-53 10250T471C26-1 10250T471C26-51 10250T75R 1 10250T76R 1 10250T77R 1 10250T75G 1 10250T76G 1 10250T77G 1 1 1 10250T77A 1 Red Red #757 120MB #755 1 Green Amber 10250T75A 1 Yellow 10250T75Y 1 10250T76Y 1 10250T77Y 1 Blue 10250T75B 1 10250T76B 1 10250T77B 1 1 Clear 10250T75C 1 10250T76C 1 10250T77C 1 White 1 10250T75W 1 10250T76A 10250T76W 1 10250T77W 1 Note 1 For flashing module catalog number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T75RFM. 1 1 V7-T1-192 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Indicating Light Units 1 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● LED or incandescent Full voltage, resistor or transformer type ● ● Standard and PresTest types Plastic lenses PresTest—This device incorporates a press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from the source being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate detection of faulty lamps. Type Voltage Color 24 Vac/Vdc Red Green 120 Vac Transformer PresTest 120 Vac Transformer 120 Vac Indicating Light Catalog Number PresTest Catalog Number 1 Bayonet base 10250T197LRP24 10250T297LRP24 1 10250T197LGP24 10250T297LGP24 Amber 10250T197LAP24 10250T297LAP24 Yellow 10250T197LYP24 10250T297LYP24 Blue 10250T197LLP24 10250T297LLP24 1 1 White 10250T197LWP24 10250T297LWP24 Red 10250T197LRP2A 10250T297LRP2A Green 10250T197LGP2A 10250T297LGP2A Amber 10250T197LAP2A 10250T297LAP2A Yellow 10250T197LYP2A 10250T297LYP2A Blue 10250T197LLP2A 10250T297LLP2A Resistor Transformer 2 24 Vac/Vdc 1 White 10250T197LWP2A 10250T297LWP2A Red 10250T181LRP06 10250T221LRP06 Green 10250T181LGP06 10250T221LGP06 Amber 10250T181LAP06 10250T221LAP06 Yellow 10250T181LYP06 10250T221LYP06 Blue 10250T181LLP06 10250T221LLP06 White 10250T181LWP06 10250T221LWP06 10250T206NC1N 10250T235NC21 120 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac Red #757 Green 10250T206NC2N 10250T235NC22 Amber 10250T206NC19N 10250T235NC43 Yellow 10250T206NC3N 10250T235NC23 Blue 10250T206NC4N 10250T235NC24 Clear 10250T206NC5N 10250T235NC25 White 10250T206NC6N 10250T235NC26 10250T201NC1N 10250T231NC21 Green Red 10250T201NC2N 10250T231NC22 Amber 10250T201NC19N 10250T231NC43 Yellow 10250T201NC3N 10250T231NC23 Blue 10250T201NC4N 10250T231NC24 Clear 10250T201NC5N 10250T231NC25 White 10250T201NC6N 10250T231NC26 Red 120MB 10250T34R 10250T74NR Green #755 10250T34G 10250T74NG Amber 10250T34A 10250T74NA Yellow 10250T34Y 10250T74NY Blue 10250T34B 10250T74NB Clear 10250T34C 10250T74NC White 10250T34W 10250T74NW 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well. 2 For flashing lamp add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T34RF. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 Incandescent Lamp Full voltage 1 LED/Lamp Number LED Lamp Full voltage 1 1 Indicating Light Units 24V Full Voltage Illuminated Light 1 1 1 V7-T1-193 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● ● LED or incandescent Full voltage, resistor or transformer type Illuminated Pushbutton Operators without Lens 1 Type 1 Full voltage AC/DC Indicating Light 1 1 Resistor AC/DC 2 1 PresTest Transformer AC only 3 1 1 1 Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog Number Indicating Light Catalog Number PresTest Catalog Number Master Test Catalog Number Incandescent Unit 1 1 Voltage LED/Lamp Number Master Test 1 Neon AC/DC 4 1 Solid-state 50/60 Hz only 6 #755 10250T473 10250T203N 10250T232N — 12 #756 10250T474 10250T204N 10250T233N — 24 #757 10250T476 10250T206N 10250T235N — 32 #1828 10250T477 10250T207N 10250T238N — 48 #1835 10250T478 10250T208N 10250T239N — 120 120MB 10250T471 10250T201N 10250T231N — 240 120MB 10250T472 10250T202N 10250T240N — 24 #755 10250T416 — — — — 120 10250T411 10250T181N 10250T221N 240 10250T422 10250T182N 10250T222N — 277 10250T419 10250T198N — — 380 10250T413 10250T183N 10250T223N — 480 10250T414 10250T184N 10250T224N — 600 10250T415 10250T185N 10250T225N — 120 NE51H-R22 — 10250T226N — — 240 NE51H-R68 — 10250T227N — — 120 120MB — — — 10250T189N Bayonet base 10250T397L 10250T197L 10250T297L — 10250T416L — — — 120 10250T411L 10250T181L 10250T221L — 240 10250T412L 10250T182L 10250T222L — 277 10250T419L 10250T198L — — 380 10250T413L 10250T183L 10250T223L — 480 10250T414L 10250T184L 10250T224L — 600 10250T415L 10250T185L 10250T225L — LED (LEDs not included) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Full voltage — Transformer AC only 24 Notes 1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color. See Page V7-T1-239 for LED Selection and Page V7-T1-185 for Catalog Numbering System. 2 Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. 3 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T181NF. 4 Resistant to shock and vibration. For best illumination use amber, yellow or clear lens. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-194 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Plastic Glass 10250TC2_ Plastic Glass 1.8 Indicating and Master Test Lenses Color Plastic Catalog Number Glass Catalog Number Red 10250TC1N 10250TC7N Green 10250TC2N 10250TC8N Amber 10250TC19N 10250TC9N Yellow 10250TC3N — Blue 10250TC4N 10250TC10N Clear 10250TC5N 10250TC11N White 10250TC6N 10250TC12N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses Color Catalog Number Red 10250TC21 Green 10250TC22 Yellow 10250TC23 Amber 10250TC43 Blue 10250TC24 Clear 10250TC25 White 10250TC26 1 1 1 1 1 1 PresTest Lenses Color Plastic Catalog Number Glass Catalog Number 1 Red 10250TC21 10250TC13N 1 Green 10250TC22 10250TC14N Amber 10250TC43 10250TC15N Yellow 10250TC23 — Blue 10250TC24 10250TC16N Clear 10250TC25 10250TC17N White 10250TC26 10250TC18N 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-195 1.8 1 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Push-Pull Emergency Stops (Compliant with IEC 60947-5-5) UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Two- and three-position Non-illuminated LONC contact block 1 1 10250T579C47-71X Two-Position Push-Pull Units Operator Position 1 Pull Push Button Type/Color Lamp Type Voltage Catalog Number X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563C47-71X 1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563C53-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Transformer 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T563LED06-71X 1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T579C47-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T579C53-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T580C47-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T580C53-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated Incandescent Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589C47-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP Incandescent Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589C53-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LED06-71X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Transformer 24 Vac 10250T589LRD06-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T597LED24-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated EMERG. STOP LED Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LED2A-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Full voltage 24 Vdc 10250T597LRD24-71X X O 40 mm red—illuminated LED Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T597LRD2A-71X 1 X O 40 mm red — — — 10250T5B62-71X X O 40 mm red—EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T5B63-71X 1 X O 65 mm red — — — 10250T5J62-71X X O 65 mm red—EMERG. STOP — — — 10250T5J63-71X 1 Note 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-196 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Two-Position Push-Pull Units 1 Operator Position 1 Pull Push Button Type/Color 2 Contact Type Mounting Location A B Catalog Number 2 1 Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 10250T5B62-1X O X X O 40 mm/red 1 1NO 10250T5B62-1X 1 1NC 1 10250T5B63-1X O X X O 40 mm engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1NO 10250T5B63-1X 1 1 1NC 1 10250T5J63-1X O X X O 65 mm aluminum engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1NO 10250T5J63-1X 1NC 1 1 1 10250ED1080-2 O X X O 65 mm aluminum engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1NO Special security jumbo mushroom head 1NC 10250ED1080-2 1 1 1 1 Button and Color Selection Color Standard Jumbo Mushroom Head Suffix Code Catalog Number Red B62 10250TB62 Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63 Green B61 10250TB61 Black B60 10250TB60 Blue B64 10250TB64 Red J62 10250TJ62 Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63 Green J61 10250TJ61 1 Standard—40 mm 1 1 1 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head 3 (Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm Black J60 10250TJ60 Yellow J64 10250TJ64 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table. Example: 10250T5B64-1X. 3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-197 1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 10250T_ Three-Position Push-Pull Units Operator Position 1 1 Pull Intermediate 1 Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Push Button Type/Color 2 X X 1 O X O O Contact Type Mounting Location A Catalog Number 2 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T9B60-3X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T9B62-3X 40 mm engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1 B 10250T9B63-3X Momentary Push, Momentary Pull 1 1 1 X X O X O O O X O O X O 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T4B60-3X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T4B62-3X 40 mm/black 1NO 10250T10B60-1X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T10B62-1X 1 1 1 Button and Color Selection Color Standard 1 1 1 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 1 1 Suffix Code Catalog Number Red B62 10250TB62 Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63 Green B61 10250TB61 Black B60 10250TB60 Blue B64 10250TB64 Red J62 10250TJ62 Standard—40 mm 3 Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63 Green J61 10250TJ61 Black J60 10250TJ60 Yellow J64 10250TJ64 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table. Example: 10250T5B64-1X. 3 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-198 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Illuminated Push-Pull Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● ● 1 LED or incandescent Full voltage, resistor or transformer type Two-position maintained 1 1 Two-Position PushPull Operator Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 1 Operator Position 1 Maintained— Pull O X Maintained— Push X O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Mounting Location Type A B LED Full Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC Transformer LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base 24 Vac X O Incandescent Full voltage 10250T597LRD2A-1X 10250T563LRD06-1X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC Transformer 24 Vac #757 1 1 1 1 10250T579C47-1X 120MB 10250T580C47-1X #755 10250T589C47-1X 120 Vac 10250ED137_ 10250T597LRD24-1X 10250T589LRD06-1X 120 Vac O X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 2 10250T563C47-1X 1 1 1 Jumbo Lens Illuminated E-Stops Contact Type 1 Lamp Button Type/Color Type Voltage LED Two-position illuminated maintained push/pull— 50 mm jumbo lens/red Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 1NC Catalog Number 10250ED1375 LED Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull— 50 mm jumbo lens/red Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 1NC 10250ED1376 LED Three-position illuminated momentary push/pull— 50 mm jumbo lens/red Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 1NC 10250ED1377 LED Three-position illuminated maintained push/momentary pull— 50 mm lens/red Full voltage 1NO 1NC 10250ED1378 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on next page. Example: 10250T579C63-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-205. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-199 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Lens and Color Selection 1 Color 1 Standard 1 1 1 1 1 Side-Lighted Aluminum Incandescent Suffix Code LED Suffix Code Catalog Number Red C47 RD 10250TC47 Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53 Green C48 GD 10250TC48 Blue C49 LD 10250TC49 Amber C50 AD 10250TC50 White C51 WD 10250TC51 Clear C52 CD 10250TC52 Standard—40 mm Side-Lighted Aluminum—40 mm 1 Red C57 RS 10250TC57 Red (EMERG. STOP) C63 ES 10250TC63 Green C58 GS 10250TC58 1 Blue C59 LS 10250TC59 Amber C64 AS 10250TC64 1 Yellow C60 YS 10250TC60 White C61 WS 10250TC61 1 Clear C62 CS 10250TC62 1 1 Aluminum Transparent Center 1 Aluminum Transparent Center—40 mm 1 Red C65 RH 10250TC65 Green C66 GH 10250TC66 Amber C67 AH 10250TC67 — — 10250TC77 1 Jumbo Lens 1 Jumbo Lens—50 mm Red 1 Note 1 Clear anodized aluminum and colored lens. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-200 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Three-Position PushPull Operator 1 Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull 1 Operator Position 1 Momentary— Pull O X Maintained— Intermediate O O Momentary— Push X O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Type LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac 1NC Transformer X X O X O O Full voltage Transformer O X O O X O Incan- Full voltage descent Resistor Transformer Mounting Location LED/ Lamp Number A B Bayonet base O X O O Full voltage 10250T1097LRD2A-1X 10250T1089LRD06-1X 120 Vac 10250T1063LRD06-1X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120 Vac 1NC Bayonet base 10250T497LRD24-3X 10250T497LRD2A-3X 24 Vac 10250T489LRD06-3X 120 Vac 10250T463LRD06-3X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac 1NC 24 Vac #757 10250T1079C47-1X 120MB 10250T1080C47-1X #755 10250T1089C47-1X 10250T1063C47-1X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC Resistor 120 Vac 1NC Transformer 24 Vac #757 10250T479C47-3X 120MB 10250T480C47-3X #755 10250T489C47-3X 120 Vac 1 1 10250T1097LRD24-1X 24 Vac 120 Vac X X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 3 10250T463C47-3X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Three-Position PushPull Operator Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull 1 Operator Position 1 Momentary— Pull X X Maintained— Intermediate O X Momentary— Push O O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Type LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120 Vac 1NC Transformer X X O X O O Incandescent Mounting Location LED/ Lamp Number A B Bayonet base Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 2 10250T997LRD2A-3X 10250T989LRD06-3X 120 Vac 10250T963LRD06-3X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T979C47-3X Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB 10250T980C47-3X Transformer 24 Vac #755 1 10250T997LRD24-3X 24 Vac 120 Vac 1 10250T989C47-3X 1 1 1 1 10250T963C47-3X 1 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-200. Example: 10250T1079C53-1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-205. 3 To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on Page V7-T1-200. Example: 10250T979C53X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-205. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-201 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Potentiometers UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13 Vertical or Horizontal 1 Potentiometer One-Hole Mounting Potentiometer Ohms with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10% Catalog Number 1 2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 23 1000 10250T331 1 2500 10250T332 5000 10250T338 10000 10250T333 1 25000 10250T334 50000 10250T335 1 Operator only 4 10250T330 Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99 1 1 Notes 1 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate. 2 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number. Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote 3 below. 3 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping. 4 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page V7-T1-249. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-202 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Push-Pull Operators An illuminated push-pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: ● ● Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. ● Momentary Pull, Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to intermediate position when pulled. Maintains in pushed position until manually returned to intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators from starting the system. The operators, buttons, contact blocks, etc., are offered as building block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly inventory. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Typical Two-Position Maintained Push-Pull 1 Control Applications Three-wire three-position momentary Line—Diagram L1 M B Circuit Two-wire two-position maintained Push-Pull Operator A Circuit L2 OL L1 Circuits Operator Mode Momentary push and pull 10250T4 2NC contact block 10250T3 START (mom.) 1 Normal pos. (maint.) STOP (mom.) 1 1 M Push-Pull Operator M Operator L2 OL Momentary push and pull 10250T10 1NO-1NC contact block 10250T1 Maintained push and pull 10250T5 1NC contact block 10250T51 1 1 START (maint.) No intermediate position STOP (maint.) 1 1 1 A or B Circuit Three-wire momentary pull L1 maintained push A Circuit Push-Pull Operator M B Circuit OL L2 Maintained push and momentary pull 10250T9 2NC contact block 10250T3 START (mom.) Normal pos. (maint.) STOP (maint.) 1 1 1 M 1 Notes A and B circuits shown in the application illustrations are defined in the “Application Guide” on the following page. 1 Shown without button on lens. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-203 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Application Guide To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch to the right shows pictorially by symbols A and B locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The table below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open). Contact Circuit Locations Locating Nib A 1 B 1 1 10250T579C47-71X Push-Pull Operator Components Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement 1 Out—Pull 1 Intermediate In—Push Contact Block Mounting Location 1 Type of Operator 1 Maintained push-pull A B A B A O X No intermediate position X O B Contact Block 1 Catalog Number X O 1NO 1NC 10250T5 X O 2NO 2NC X O 1NO 1NC X O 2NO 2NC O O 1NO 1NC O O 2NO 2NC O O 1NO 1NC O O 2NO 2NC X O 1NO 1NC X O 2NO 2ND Two-Position Operator without Lens 1 O X or O X 1 Maintained push-pull with anti-theft jumbo mushroom O X 1 O X 1 Three-Position Operator without Lens Momentary push-pull 1 O X O X or Maintained push-momentary pull 1 O X or or O X 1 Momentary push-pull 1 O X O X 1 X O No intermediate position O X O X 1 O X or or X O or X O O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O or or or O X X O O X X O O X X O O X X O O O X O O O X O or or or 10250ED1080 10250T4 1 10250T9 1 10250T10 1 Note 1 Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-235 CANNOT be used with three-position push-pull operators 10250T4, 10250T9 or 10250T10. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-204 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons Ordering Example with One Composite Number 1 Non-illuminated: 10250T5 + 10250TB62 + 10250T1 = 10250T5B62-1X 1 1 Incandescent: 10250T5 + 10250T79 + 10250TC47 + 10250T1 = 10250T579C47-1X 1 LED: 10250T5 + 10250T97L + 10250TC47 + Voltage code + 10250T1 = 10250T597LRD24-1X 06—6 Vac/Vdc 12—12 Vac/Vdc 24—24 Vac/Vdc 48—48 Vac/Vdc 1 60—60 Vac/Vdc 2A—120 Vac 2D—120 Vdc 1 1 Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Light Unit Type LED 1 (LEDs not included) Incandescent Type Voltage Full voltage — Transformer AC only 50/60 Hz 24 120 208 240 277 380 480 600 Full voltage AC or DC LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base 6 12 24/28 32 1 Catalog Number 1 10250T97L 1 10250T89L 10250T63L 10250T64L 10250T65L 10250T82L 10250T66L 10250T67L 10250T68L 1 1 1 10250T69 10250T70 10250T79 10250T83 Resistor AC or DC 120 240 120MB 10250T80 10250T81 Transformer AC only 50/60 Hz 24 120 208 240 277 380 480 600 #755 10250T89 10250T63 10250T64 10250T65 10250T82 10250T66 10250T67 10250T68 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-239. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-205 1.8 Incandescent Suffix Code LED Suffix Code 1 Catalog Number Red C47 RD 10250TC47 Red (EMERG. STOP) C53 ED 10250TC53 Green C48 GD 10250TC48 Blue C49 LD 10250TC49 Amber C50 AD 10250TC50 White C51 WD 10250TC51 Clear C52 CD 10250TC52 Lens Color Standard 1 1 1 1 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring Standard Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring Red C57 RS 10250TC57 Red (EMERG. STOP) C63 ES 10250TC63 Green C58 GS 10250TC58 Blue C59 LS 10250TC59 1 Amber C64 AS 10250TC64 Yellow C60 YS 10250TC60 1 White C61 WS 10250TC61 Clear C62 CS 10250TC62 1 1 1 Heavy-Duty Aluminum Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center 1 Red C65 RH 10250TC65 Green C66 GH 10250TC66 1 Amber C67 AH 10250TC67 White C68 — 10250TC68 — — 10250TC77 1 Jumbo Lens Jumbo Lens—50 mm Red 1 1 1 1 Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Color Standard 1 1 1 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 1 1 Suffix Code Catalog Number Red B62 10250TB62 Red (EMERG. STOP) B63 10250TB63 Green B61 10250TB61 Black B60 10250TB60 Blue B64 10250TB64 Standard Legend Plates For a complete listing of available legend plates see Pages V7-T1-230 to V7-T1-232. Jumbo Standard P S Jumbo Mushroom Head 2 (Anodized) Aluminum Red J62 10250TJ62 Red (EMERG. STOP) J63 10250TJ63 Green J61 10250TJ61 Black J60 10250TJ60 Yellow J64 10250TJ64 R T Notes 1 Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens above, order by catalog number. 2 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-206 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Selector Switch Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● 1 Two-, three- and four-position maintained Non-illuminated and illuminated 1 Two-Position Maintained Switch 1 Two-Position Selector Switch Operator Position 1 Non-Illuminated Operator Action 2 X Contact Type O O Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 1NC M Illuminated—120V Transformer 10250T20KB 10250T20LB 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR 1 1 M X 1 1NO 1 Three-Position Maintained Switch Three-Position Selector Switch Non-Illuminated Operator Action 2 X O O Contact Type Illuminated—120V Transformer Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 A B 1NO M M Three-Position Maintained Switch 1 Operator Position 1 10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR 1 1 M O O X 1NO X O O 1NO O X O 2NC (Series) O O X 1NO 1 10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR 1 1 1 Three-Position Maintained Switch 1 Four-Position Selector Switch Operator Position 1 Operator Action 2 Contact Type Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 10250ED1117-4KR 1 10250ED1117-4LR O O O O X O O O O X O 1NO 1 O O O X 1NC 1 M M 10250T46KB 10250T46LB X M 1NC 1 1 M 1NO 1 Color Selection 1 Illuminated Non-Illuminated Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Red Green R G White Blue W B Amber Clear A C Black Red B R Green White G W Blue Orange L O Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 M = Maintained. 3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-207 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Selector Switch Selection 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (two-position, three-position and fourposition) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of “pushbuttons” can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The following systematic approach should simplify that task. Cam and contact block selection is better understood if you: ● ● Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately. Recognize the terms NO and NC only identify the type of contact by its mode before mounting to the operator. The “X-O” table (Page V7-T1-210) shows how that contact will act after assembly to the operator with the selected cam shape. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. ● ● Up to six NO or NC contacts may be mounted behind each plunger location for a total of twelve contacts. Single circuit contact blocks have only one plunger with the other side of the block “open.” Therefore, single circuit contact blocks transmit motion to blocks behind them only for the position containing the circuit. Each cam has two separate lobes, each of which operates one of the two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are identified as position A (locating nib side) and position B (opposite of locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and mounting of the contact blocks. Contact Circuit Locations Step 1: Elementary Diagram. Construct on paper, or in your mind, a simple elementary diagram of the switching scheme as follows: HAND Incoming Line Outgoing Circuit OFF AUTO Outgoing Circuit Step 2: “X-O” Pattern. From the elementary diagram, you can construct an “X-O” diagram which describes when the contacts are to be closed (X) or open (O) in the various positions of the switch. The “X-O” for the HAND circuit looks like this: For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram would look like this: HAND OFF AUTO O O X Putting them together, the complete “X-O” diagram is: XOO OOX Once the “X-O” diagram has been generated the next step is to select the cam and contact block, or blocks, needed to perform the desired “X-O” functions. The selection tables on the following pages list the various types (shapes) of cams by number to choose from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in your “X-O” diagram. Locating Nib HAND OFF AUTO A B 1 Systematic Approach Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this circuit, one incoming line is distributed to two other outgoing circuits by the switch. The two circuits can be looked at individually. X O O In this circuit, you want a contact closed on the left (HAND) but open in the center and right. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-208 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram. The selection tables show all the “X-O” combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown on this page. Now to make the cam selection, make a simple worksheet such as: Step 5: Selector Switch Operator. Lastly, you have to choose from the many types of operators—knob and lever in various colors or keyed. Also what combinations of maintained and spring return functions are required. Selection of these operators can be found on Page V7-T1-212. For the example in step 4 you may want a three-position maintained black knob, cam 3—Catalog Number 10250T1323. Example Selection Table No. “X-O” Pattern 1 X O XOO OOX Cam 3 (A)NO-(B)NC (B)NO (A)NO (B)NO It becomes immediately obvious that cam 3 is the better choice for two reasons, (1) the series combination can be avoided making it simpler to wire, (2) only two contacts are required, which is less expensive than the three contacts required by cam 2. Step 4: Contact Block Selection. Having selected the cam, contact block selection is simply a matter of gathering the A position and B position circuits into pairs which make up the most convenient contact block arrangement. If there is an imbalance in the number of circuits under A or B, then single circuit blocks must be selected for these leftover circuits. Back to the worksheet, having selected cam 3 do this: X O X O O X ANO BNO 10250T2 The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 with one 10250T2 or, for one composite catalog number, 10250T21KB found on Page V7-T1-207. Diagrams Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector switch circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring of jumper connections required as shown. Cam Code #3 Top A Top A O Bottom B 4 O O X 1 Bottom B — a NO NC — 1 1 NO 1 — NO NO 1 Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection Desired Circuit and Operator Position 1 Top Plunger A X O NC 2 O or Bottom Plunger B 1 NC 1 NO 1 X or NO 1 1 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function No. Cam 2 Cam Code #2 1 Note 1 Wired in series. 1 1 1 1 X = Closed circuit O = Open circuit 1 Wiring of Jumper Connections 1 1 Series Connection 1 1 Parallel Connection 1 Four-position selector switches are limited to four contact blocks. 1 1 Contact Blocks For selection and number of available contact blocks per operator, see Pages V7-T1-235 to V7-T1-238. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-209 1.8 1 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function (Jumpers must be installed where indicated) 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights No. 1 X O 1 2 X X Mounting Location Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B Top Plunger A NO NC NO NC 3 X O NC X NO NO 4 O O 5 O X NO X NC 1 1 NO X NO 1 Bottom Plunger B O 1 1 Operator with Cam Code #3 Mounting Location O 1 1 Operator with Cam Code #2 NC 6 O X NO O NC NC NC 1 1 Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function 1 1 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position Mounting Location Top Plunger A No. 1 1 1 2 O X O O 3 O O X O 4 O O O X 1 1 1 X O O 1 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position Mounting Location Top Plunger A No. 10 X O X Bottom Plunger B O NC NC NO NO 11 X X X O NO NC NO NC 5 X O O X 6 O X X O 7 O O X X 8 X X O O 12 NC 1 X O V7-T1-210 NO X NC NO NO X O X X NC NC NO X 14 NO NC 1 X NO NC NC O X NC 13 NO 9 O NO NO 1 1 Bottom Plunger B O 1 1 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function X X O X NC NO NC Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Selector Switch Operators 1 Key Operators 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Two-Position Maintained 1 1 Key Operators with Cam Positions Operator Action 2 Two-position—60° throw M M M M 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_ 1 2 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_ 1 2 1–7 10250T1522_ 10250T1622_ 10250T1523_ 10250T1623_ 1 10250T1532_ 10250T1632_ 10250T1533_ 10250T1633_ 10250T1542_ 10250T1642_ 10250T1543_ 10250T1643_ 10250T1652_ 10250T1662_ 10250T1653_ 10250T1663_ 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_ 3 S S 2, 4, 6 3 7 M 4 3 2 M M 1, 4, 5 3 2 M S M 1 2 M S M Horizontal Mounting Catalog Number 7 1 1 S M Four-position—40° throw Vertical Mounting Catalog Number M M Three-position—60° throw Cam Code 3 Optional Key Removal Positions 4 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 Notes 1 Horizontal mount, key removal #1 keyed selector switch, cam 1 shown. 2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R). 3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on Pages V7-T1-208, V7-T1-209 and V7-T1-210. 4 Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-212. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T15112. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-211 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Key Removal Positions C L R Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 Right only 1 2 Left only 3 Right and left 1 4 Center only 5 Right and center 6 Left and center 7 All positions 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Key Operators Operators listed on Page V7-T1-212 have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see listing on this page. 1 1 1 Replacement Key Description Catalog Number Replacement keys (code H661) 10250ED824 “H” Series Locks without Master Key—with Key Slot Cover Lock and Key Code Numbers Selector Switch Operators with Dissimilar Locks and Keys (UL [NEMA] 4, 4X and 13) The locks in all key operators listed on Pages V7-T1-191, V7-T1-212 and V7-T1-349 are identical and use key code number H661. Two keys are supplied with every lock. For additional code number H661 keys, order Catalog Number 10250ED824. For others, order 10250ED1130 and designate lock number. When dissimilar locks for each operator or each group of operators are required, select from the lock and key combination listed below. When Ordering Operator Only or a complete control unit with a substitute lock, order from table below and add “except Lock and Key Code No. …” Master Keys for Above Locks Application Catalog Number For code: H501 H635 H663 MD1–MD20 10250ED825-3 H620 H639 H675 ME2–ME18 10250ED825-4 H621 H643 H683 MJ1–MJ16 10250ED825-5 H634 H654 H688 “M” Series Locks with Master Key—with Key Slot Cover Lock and Key Code Numbers MD1 MD14 ME8 MJ6 MD2 MD15 ME11 MJ10 MD3 MD16 ME16 MJ11 MD4 MD19 ME17 MJ13 MD5 MD20 ME18 MJ15 MD7 ME2 ME19 MJ16 MD9 ME3 MJ1 MD17 MD10 ME5 MJ3 MD11 ME6 MJ4 MD13 ME7 MJ5 Selector Switch Operators with Caps UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Selector Switch Operators with Caps 1 1 1 Positions Two-Position Maintained 1 Operator Action 2 Two-position—60° throw 1 M M M S Black Knob Selector Switch— Vertical Mounting 3 Black Lever Selector Switch— Vertical Mounting 3 Cam Code 4 Catalog Number Cam Code 4 Catalog Number 1 10250T1311 1 10250T3011 1 10250T1371 1 10250T3071 1 1 Three-Position Maintained 5 Three-position—60° throw M M 1 S 1 S M 1 M M 1 10250T3022 3 10250T3023 10250T1332 2 10250T3032 3 10250T1333 3 10250T3033 2 10250T1342 2 10250T304 S 3 10250T1343 3 10250T3043 2 10250T1352 2 10250T3052 3 10250T1353 3 10250T3053 7 10250T1367 7 10250T3067 M M 2 10250T1323 2 M Four-position—40° throw 10250T1322 M M 1 2 3 S M M Notes 1 Black knob selector switch, cam 1 shown. 2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R). 3 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap. 4 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on Pages V7-T1-208, V7-T1-209 and V7-T1-210. 5 Black lever selector switch, cam 3 shown. 1 1 1 V7-T1-212 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Selector Switch Operators without Caps Operators can be ordered with caps assembled to them by adding the code number from the table on this page to the end of catalog number below. Example: 10250T4011KB Two-Position Selector Switch Maintained 1 1 1 1 Selector Switch Operators without Caps Operator Action 1 Positions Two-position—60° throw M M M S Three-position—60° throw M M M M S M M S S M M Four-position—40° throw M M S M 1 Cam Code 2 Catalog Number 1 10250T4011 1 1 10250T4081 1 2 10250T4022 1 3 10250T4023 2 10250T4032 3 10250T4033 2 10250T4042 3 10250T4043 2 10250T4052 3 10250T4053 7 10250T4067 1 1 1 1 1 M 1 1 Operating Caps Knob Coin Slot Catalog and Code Number 1 Color Lever 3 Catalog and Code Number 10250TLB Black 10250TSB 10250TCB 1 10250TKR 10250TLR Red 10250TSR 10250TCR 1 Green 10250TKG 10250TLG Green 10250TSG 10250TCG 1 Yellow 10250TKY 10250TLY Yellow 10250TSY 10250TCY 1 White 10250TKW 10250TLW White 10250TSW 10250TCW 1 Gray 10250TKA 10250TLA Gray 10250TSA 10250TCA 1 Blue 10250TKL 10250TLL Blue 10250TSL 10250TCL 1 Orange 10250TKD 10250TLO Orange 10250TSO 10250TCO 1 Color Knob Catalog and Code Number Lever Catalog and Code Number Black 10250TKB Red Lever Lever for Use with Maintained Operators Coin Slot Notes 1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R). 2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on Pages V7-T1-208, V7-T1-209 and V7-T1-210. 3 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-213 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operators Illuminated Selector Switches without Caps Two-Position Selector Switch Maintained Operator without Knob or Lever 6 Volt #755 Lamp Cam Voltage Code 2 Code Number and Catalog Number 3 Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4 Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757, 48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB Code Number and Cam Voltage Catalog Number 3 Code 2 1 24 10250T5961 1 120 10250T5971 Transformer Type—50/60 Hz 1 Positions 1 Operator Action 1 Two-position—60° throw M 1 M 6 10250T6201 12 10250T6211 208 10250T6511 24 10250T6221 1 240 10250T5981 48 10250T6231 380 10250T5991 120 10250T6361 1 480 10250T6001 240 5 10250T6371 600 10250T6011 24 10250T602_ 120 10250T603_ 1 Three-position—60° throw + 2 or 3 M M 1 M 1 1 + 2 or 3 M 1 M S 1 1 1 + 2 or 3 M 1 S M + 2 or 3 6 10250T624_ 12 10250T625_ 208 10250T652_ 24 10250T626_ 240 10250T604_ 48 10250T627_ 380 10250T605_ 120 10250T638_ 480 10250T606_ 240 5 10250T639_ 600 10250T607_ 24 10250T654_ 120 10250T620_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T612_ 12 10250T632_ 208 10250T655_ 24 10250T642_ 240 10250T656_ 48 10250T672_ 380 10250T657_ 120 10250T622_ 480 10250T658_ 240 10250T682_ 600 10250T659_ 24 10250T660_ 120 10250T621_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T613_ 12 10250T633_ 1 208 10250T661_ 24 10250T643_ 240 10250T662_ 48 10250T673_ 1 380 10250T663_ 120 10250T623_ 480 10250T664_ 240 10250T683_ 1 + 2 or 3 M S 1 S 1 1 1 Four-position—40° throw 1 M M 1 1 7 M M 600 10250T665_ 24 10250T614_ 120 10250T615_ + 2 or 3 6 10250T628_ 12 10250T629_ 208 10250T653_ 24 10250T630_ 240 10250T616_ 48 10250T631_ 380 10250T617_ 120 10250T640_ 480 10250T618_ 240 5 10250T641_ 600 10250T619_ 24 10250T6087 120 10250T6097 7 6 10250T6327 12 10250T6337 208 10250T6547 24 10250T6347 240 10250T6107 48 10250T6357 380 10250T6117 120 10250T6427 480 10250T6127 240 5 10250T6437 600 10250T6137 Notes 1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R). 2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-208, V7-T1-209 and V7-T1-210. 3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. 4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-239. 5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. 1 1 1 V7-T1-214 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Illuminated Knobs and Levers Knob Lever Color 1 Knob Code Number and Catalog Number Lever Code Number and Catalog Number Red 10250TER 10250TFR Green 10250TEG 10250TFG Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC White 10250TEW 10250TFW Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Joystick Units 1 Two-Position Joystick Joystick Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Operator Position 2 Up Down Center Operator Action 3 X O O O O X Contact Type S 1NC S 1NC Mounting Location A B Two-Position Assembled Unit Catalog Number 4 10250T452-3X M 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). 2 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 3 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R). 4 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-215 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Joysticks Two-Position Joystick Operators The device mounts in the standard 30.5 mm mounting hole. Allow sufficient panel space for lever movement. The maximum travel of the knob operator (full up to full down) is 2.2 in (24°) momentary, 2.5 in (30°) maintained, but ample space for lever operation must be allowed. These operators are field convertible from momentary to maintained operation or vice versa. 1 1 1 1 1 Two-Position Joystick Operator Two-Position Operator Only—AC Applications Only Catalog Number Description 1 Momentary Mode 4NC contact blocks max. 3NO contact blocks max. 1 Maintained Mode 2 contact blocks max. 1 1 Application Caution Joystick operators are not recommended on certain DC applications above 24 Vdc which may involve lightly engaging the contacts (teasing) to achieve speed control, positioning, jogging, etc. Excessive arcing and deterioration of the contacts will occur. Two-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact Block Limitations 1 The use of NC contacts is preferred because they provide positive drive contact opening and a direct relationship between lever movement and affected terminal, i.e., up movement affects the top terminals. Momentary up and down 10250T452 Maintained up—momentary down 10250T4521 Maintained down—momentary up 10250T4522 Maintained up and down 10250T4525 Contact Block Operation and Selection Handle Position 2 Up Center 1 1 1 Down Contact Block Type 4 Mounting Location 23 Top A Bottom B Catalog Number X O O 1NC 10250T51 O O X 1NC 10250T51 1 O X O 2LONC (Series) 10250T45 1 X O O 1NC 10250T3 O O X 1NC X X O 1LONC 1 O X X 1LONC X O O 1NC 1 O O X 1NO 1 O O X 1NC X O O 1NO 1 10250T45 10250T44 5 1 1 A and B Mounting Location Locating Nib 1 Top Contacts Up Bottom Contacts Down Center 1 1 Up NC Contact at Top Is Closed, NO at Bottom Is Closed 1 Center All NC and NO Contacts Are Open (1/2 Way), Late Opening NC Is Closed Down NC Contact at Bottom Is Closed, NO at Top Is Closed Notes 1 Field convertible momentary to maintained or vice versa. To expedite shipment of maintained types, order momentary operator 10250T452 which is a stocked device. 2 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 3 See above for “A” and “B” mounting location. 4 NO = normally open, NC = normally closed, LONC = late opening normally closed. 5 Four circuits in single block depth—rated 300V max. 1 1 1 V7-T1-216 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Four-Position Joystick Operators The joystick operated control unit is intended for AC application only. For other use, see Application Caution on preceding page. Four-Position Joystick Operator The panel area required for the four-position operator is equivalent to two standard pushbutton operators. 1 The latch holds the lever in the center position. The trigger latch must be released before lever can moved into any position. 1 1 1 Four-Position Joystick Operators—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Contact Block Limitations Description 1 Catalog Number 1 Four-position—without latch 10250T451_ 1 Four-position—with latch 10250T461_ 1 To plug unused hole 10250TA7 1 Operator Only—AC Application Only Four contact blocks max.—two in each position Hole Plug Four contact blocks max.—two in each position Four-Position Joystick Operator with Latch 1 1 1 1 Field Conversion—Gate The factory assembled fourposition operator is assembled with a gate arranged for four handle positions. Handle Positions Two-, Three- or EightPosition Operation Adjacent Functions Left Up Up Right Up or Two-Position Gate or or Left Right or Three-Position Gate Four-Position Gate Left Down Down Right Down Maintained Position Three additional gates, supplied with every operator, allow on the job conversion to three- or eight-position operation as illustrated. Eight-Position Gate The eight-position gate controls the four functions shown as “Up,” “Down,” “Left” and “Right.” The remaining four diagonal positions each actuate two adjacent functions; for example, “Left Down” actuates both “Left” and “Down.” The operator may be arranged for spring return of handle to center position, or maintained in up to eight positions (see description of maintained position operator). For maintained position (nonspring return), locate required maintained position or positions of operating lever and add appropriate suffix number to the catalog number selected from the table above. Maintained Positions Maintained Positions Up Down Left Right Suffix Number X — — — 1 — — — — 2 — X — — 3 — — X — 4 — — — — 5 X — X — 6 X — — X 7 — X X — 8 — X — X 9 — — X X 10 X X X — 11 X X — X 12 X — X X 13 — X X X 14 X X X X 15 On an eight-position gate, when an adjacent vertical and horizontal position are both maintained, the included diagonal position is also maintained. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Momentary operators—spring return to center. For maintained operators add suffix code from table on this page. Example: 10250T45110. Operator without latch, maintained in left and right positions. 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-217 1.8 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contact Block Operation Blank Legend Plates for Joystick Operators Contact blocks mount directly to the back of the operator. For reliable operation, the maximum number of contact blocks that should be installed behind each operator lever is two (four total). When ordering engraved legend plates, order by catalog number and insert the following into order notes: The figure below identifies the circuits activated by each of the eight possible lever positions. Contact block plungers 1, 2, 3, 4 are depressed (change state) when handle is in the position indicated by arrows below. Legend required Size of characters: 3/16, 1/8, 3/32 in (4.8, 3.2, 2.4 mm) Location by letter (A–N) ● ● ● Locations K and M can accommodate up to two lines horizontally; L and N up to two lines vertically. Circuit Activation 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 Maximum number of characters: Horizontal 3/16 in—13, 1/8 in—14, 3/32 in—19 Vertical 3/16 in—10, 1/8 in—13, 3/32 in—14 ● ● Ordering Example: Two-position legend plate to be marked “UP” “DOWN.” 1 1 1 1 1 Note: Joystick in its resting state, center position, does not activate contact block plungers. Ordering Example: Suppose you are looking for a four-position momentary joystick without a latch and the following circuit arrangements. X = Closed Circuit, O = Open Circuit. Two-Position Example Circuit Arrangements 2.19 (55.6) Sq. 1 Circuit Up Down Left Right 1st X X X X 1 2nd X O O X 1 The contact blocks and their mounting locations would be as follows: 1 Example Contact Blocks and Locations 2nd 1st Circuit Circuit 1 1 1 NO NO NC NO 10250T1 10250T2 NC 1 NO L N M M Catalog Number Catalog Number Blank Plate 10250TJS3 10250TJS4 Engraved Plate 10250TJS3STAMP 10250TJS4STAMP Four-Position C A B C D F E G J H Catalog Number 1 A complete bill of material for this example would include: 1 Example Order 1 K K A B D F E G J H NO NO 10250T1 10250T2 1 1 Catalog No. 10250TJ2S4STAMP Letter Size: 3/16 in (4.8 mm) Pos. K—UP Pos. M—DOWN 10250TJS1 Qty. Catalog Number 1 10250T451 2 10250T2 2 10250T1 Catalog Number Blank Plate 10250TJS2 Engraved Plate 10250TJS1STAMP 10250TJS2STAMP 1 1 1 V7-T1-218 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Roto-Push Units 1 Two-Position Momentary Complete assembled twoposition Roto-Push® Units are listed below. These operators have black flush buttons and are arranged for vertical mounting. Order legend plates separately. Mounting Location 1 Locating Nib 1 A 1 B 1 1 Roto-Push—Black Flush Button Roto-Push Units—UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Operator Position 1 Collar Left Typical Applications (Most Common Examples) 1 Collar Right Normal Depressed Normal Depressed FORWARD/REVERSE; HIGH/LOW; OPEN/CLOSE; UP/DOWN; etc. O O O X O O X O JOG/RUN; MAN./AUTO; etc. O O Contact Type Mounting Location A B Catalog Number 2 Two-Position 1NO 10250T2411-2 O X X X 1NO 10250T24111-2 O X X X O O X O 1NO 10250T24111-1 1NC SAFE/RUN; etc. O O O O O X X X 1NO 1 1 10250T2415-2 1NO Two-Position Latched The two-position Roto-Push Latch Unit is fully assembled and only requires a legend plate for a great variety of applications. When the selector collar is in the extreme left position, the button is in the free or normal position and can be operated as a standard pushbutton. Rotating the collar to the 1 1 1NO RUN/JOG; START/JOG; etc. 1 1 1NO X O 1 1 1 1 1 extreme right position automatically depresses and latches the button in the depressed position. The white filled groove in the button indicates the selector collar position. The selector collar has spring return to the left position except when in the extreme right latched position. 1 1 1 1 1 Red Long Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode Color and Type of Button Contact Block Vertical Mounting Catalog Number Red long 1NC 2NC 10250T72 1 1 1 10250T73 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 Roto-Push assembled with contact blocks. 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-219 1.8 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Roto-Push Operators Roto-Push Components A Roto-Push control unit combines the function of a pushbutton and a selector switch. The contacts are operated by the combined action of rotating the outer collar and pushing a button contained in the collar. 1 1 In selecting the cam and contact blocks for the listed function, the analysis involves considering the function with the collar rotated to the given position with the button free (designated as “N”) and then in that same position with the button depressed (designated “D”). This is done for each rotational position of the collar. 1 1 Operator and Cam When Ordering Specify ● Catalog number of operator with cam code suffix from tables below and on following pages, Example: 10250T2411. ● Catalog number(s) for contact blocks and legend plates if required. ● To select the cam and contact blocks needed for two-position and threeposition switches, use the tables on following pages. Operator and Cam 1 Color and Type of Button Cam Code No. Select from Tables Vertical Mounting Catalog and Code Number 1 Black flush + 1 to 18 10250T241_ 10250T251_ 10250T242_ 10250T252_ Red flush 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Horizontal Mounting Catalog and Code Number Green flush 10250T243_ 10250T253_ Black long 10250T261_ 10250T271_ Red long 1 10250T262_ 10250T272_ Green long 10250T263_ 10250T273_ Two-Position Roto-Push Operator—Rotates to a Latch-Out Mode Special Rotor Latch This differs from the other Roto-Push operators in that as the collar is rotated to the right it depresses the button and releases the button when rotated left. But the button in the released position can be momentarily pushed independent of the collar or its position. As the button is depressed by rotating the collar, the button also rotates and indicates its mode by a white line on the button face. This button can be used as an emergency stop or latched stop. 1 1 Special Roto Latch— Red Long Button 1 1 1 Special Rotor Latch— UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Color and Type of Button Vertical Mounting Catalog Number Red long 10250T3213 Black long 10250T3214 Note 1 Not to be used for emergency stop application. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-220 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push 1 Collar Position 1 1 Combination Number Circuit Sequence N D N D 1 O O O X Cam Code 1 A 2 O 3 O O O X X O X Cam Code 2 NO — A Cam Code 4 — — Cam Code 5 A — — — O X O O B 5 O X O X A B NO NO NO A NC B NO — NC A NC B NO B NO NO O X X O — — — 7 O X X X — — A or B NO 8 X O O O — 9 X O O X — 10 X O X O A NC B NC 11 X O X X B 12 X X O O — 13 X X O O — 14 X X X O A — — NC — A 6 B NC 1 A NO A NC B NO — — — — — NO A or B NC B NC — — — A NC 1 1 1 — B 1 1 NO B NO — B NC — — — — 1 1 1 1 — — — — — B — — NO NC NO — — A B 1 — — — B 1 NO A B 4 1 Cam Code 6 — NO — — Cam Code 3 A B NC A NO NC NC 1 1 1 NC A NC — A B — NO NC A B A NO NC NC — 1 1 — 1 Series and Parallel Connections A B NO NC Circuit Location 1 Locating Nib 1 1 A Series Connection B A B 1 NO NC Parallel Connection The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. 1 Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. 1 1 1 Note 1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-221 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Cam and Contact Block Selection for Two-Position Roto-Push, continued Collar Position 1 1 Combination Number Circuit Sequence 1 N D N D Cam Code 10 15 O X — O O Cam Code 11 1 1 1 1 A B 16 O 17 O O 18 O O X X X O O X O 19 1 20 O X X O 1 21 O X X X X 22 X O O 23 X O 24 X 25 1 NO B A NO A B Cam Code 14 — A or B NC A — — — — — A NC — NC NO NO NC B — A NO — B NO NO A B NO NO O A NC A NC B NC B NC O X — — O X O — A X O X X A NC A B 26 X X O O B NC B 27 X X O O — A B NC NO A B NO NC — NC — — — A B — — — — — A B — — — — B — — — B NO NO — A B 1 1 NC B NO O 1 1 A B Cam Code 13 — NO NO X 1 O — Cam Code 12 — NC NC NO NO NC 1 1 1 1 1 28 X X X O — 1 1 1 1 Series and Parallel Connections A B 1 1 NO NC A A B NC NC — NO A — — A B A B NO NC Parallel Connection Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. 1 1 Note 1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. V7-T1-222 NC A or B NO A B Locating Nib NO NC The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. 1 NC Circuit Location Series Connection 1 NO NO Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com NO 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push 1 Collar Position 1 Combination Number Circuit Sequence 1 N D N D N D 1 O X O O O O Cam Code 7 A B 2 O 3 O O O O O O X X O X O Cam Code 8 A NO NO B — NC — — B NO O O X O X — — 5 O O O X X X — — NO A B NO NC — 7 O O 8 O O 9 O O 10 O O 11 X O X X X X X O O X X X X O O O O X X O O O X O — O X O O X B NO O 14 X O X O O X X O O O — X — — — — — — — — O O — 16 O X X X O X — 1 1 1 — — — — — — B A B 1 A NO A NO — — — — X X X X — — X NO A NO B Series Connection — 1 — NO NO 1 — A NO A B NO NO — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 1 1 Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. NO NC 1 1 Parallel Connection 1 Notes 1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. 2 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-236. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 1 B A B 1 1 Circuit Location A 1 1 NO NO Locating Nib 1 1 NO NO NO NO The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. NO NC — — — — NO NC NO Series and Parallel Connections A B — — — A B NO — A B — 1 2 NO NC NO A B O 1 — A 17 1 — — X NO — — X B — — NO A NC B X NO NO — A B O A B — NO 15 1 — — B — NO 1 NO — 1 — A B 13 1 — B — NO — O X NC B — NC X A — A X 1 — — A 12 NO NO NO Cam Code 18 NO — A B B A — 2 Cam Code 17 — — — A O NO — B — O Cam Code 16 2 — 4 6 Cam Code 15 2 Cam Code 9 1 V7-T1-223 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Cam and Contact Block Selection for Three-Position Roto-Push, continued Collar Position 1 Circuit Sequence 1 1 Combination Number N D N D N D Cam Code 7 1 18 X O O O O O A NC B NC Cam Code 8 2 Cam Code 9 Cam Code 15 Cam Code 16 Cam Code 17 Cam Code 18 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — A NC B NC 1 19 X O O O X X — A 1 20 X O O O X O — A NC B NC 1 1 1 1 21 X O X X O O — NC — 22 X O X X X X A B NC A NO B 23 X O X X X O A NC — NC — NO — A — — A NC B NC 1 1 24 X O X O X O — — 1 25 X O X O X X — 1 26 X X O O O O B 1 27 X X O O O X 28 X X O O X O — B 29 X X O O X X — A B 1 30 X X X X O O — — 1 31 X X X X X O A B 32 X X X O X O — 1 A B NC NO NC — — — — A — NC A NC B NC A 2 NC NC — B NC — A B — — — A NC B NC — — A — — — — — — — — — — — — — — NC — NO — — — — — A — B NC2 NC NO NC 1 1 1 1 33 X X X O X X — NC A NC B NC A NO B B NO NC — — NC — — 2 — 1 1 Series and Parallel Connections 1 A B 1 Series Connection 1 1 1 NO NC The connections are not made at the factory. They are illustrated in the selection table as requirements, but must be made on the job. B NC A B NO NC NC NC — — B — — A B NO NC NC NC NC Circuit Location Locating Nib A Letters “A” and “B” represent the locations which the two circuits of a contact block will occupy in relation to the locating nib of the operator. NO NC Parallel Connection Notes 1 N = Button in free or normal position. D = Button depressed. 2 Limited to 4 contact blocks. See Note on Page V7-T1-236. 1 V7-T1-224 A B — B A B — Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Accessories 1 Padlocks not included with padlocking attachments. For operators with built-in padlock attachment, see Page V7-T1-190. 1 1 1 Accessories Description Catalog Number 1 Padlock Attachments 10250TA2 10250TA26 Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. Will not lock NO contact. 10250TA2 Padlocking Attachment for Use with Extended Pushbutton Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. 10250TA26 1 1 1 1 10250TA36 10250TA38 Padlocking Cover Guard Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size padlock. 10250TA36 Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard. Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly. 10250TA38 1 1 1 1 1 10250TA63 Padlocking Attachment for Use with Flexible Weather Resistant Boot Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open. 10250TA63 1 1 10250TA64 10250TA11 Padlock Attachment For use with illuminated pushbuttons and maintained push-pull operators having standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in padlock. Locks in down position only. 10250TA64 Padlocking Attachment for Non-Illuminated Knob Selector Switches Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks. 10250TA11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-225 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Accessories, continued 1 Description 1 Catalog Number Shrouds and Guards 10250TA6 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.) 10250TA6 10250TA12 Extended Retaining Nut Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators. 10250TA12 10250TA15 Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 10250TA15 10250TA56_ Shroud For jumbo mushroom head operator. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Gray 10250TA56 Yellow 10250TA56Y 10250ED1241 Half Shroud—Yellow For jumbo mushroom head operator. 10250ED1241 10250TA101 Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package Fits new style contact blocks and light units. 10250TA101 1 1 1 1 1 1 Boots 10250TA_ 1 1 1 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred). Temperature to –25°F (–32°C). (See Page V7-T1-229 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.) Black 10250TA3 Red 10250TA4 1 Green 10250TA25 Transparent Boot For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest— Temperature to –38°F (–39°C). 2 10250TA4_ Boot for Flush Pushbutton 1 10250TA10 10250TA25 1 1 Clear 10250TA46 1 Black 10250TA47 Red 10250TA48 1 Green 10250TA49 Notes 1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function. 2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-226 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Accessories, continued Description 1 Catalog Number 1 Hardware and Kits 10250TK3 10250TK5 56-9337 Thrust Washers— To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications. 10250TK3 Contact Block Tape Seal— Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces. 10250TK5 Selector Switch Operator Gasket— Seals out dust from getting in-between the cam and contact block plungers. Supplied as standard with all selector switches. 56-9337 1 1 1 1 1 1 10250TA3_ 10250TA62 Special Retaining Nut— To accommodate thick panel: 1 Indicating lights 10250TA30 PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches 10250TA31 Terminal Block— Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations. 1 1 10250TA62 1 1 10250TA8 Spacer Ring— Used when legend plate is not required. 10250TA8 10250TA79 Stacking Screw— Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block 10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor. This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10. 10250TA79 10250TA2_ Base Mounting Spacers 1— 1 1 10250TKG_ 10250TA7_ 1 1 Equivalent to contact block in depth (one block deep). 10250TA22 1 Complete with screws, washers, etc. (two block deep). 10250TA23 1 1 Grounding Kits— Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear of contact block mounting screw. 1 All components except standard indicating lights and PresTest indicating lights. 10250TKG1 Standard indicating lights 10250TKG2 2 PresTest indicating lights 10250TKG3 2 1 1 Contact Block Terminal Jumpers— Available in multiples of 100 only. 1 Terminal to terminal—within block (short) 100 per pkg. 10250TA70 1000 per pkg. 10250TA70-2 1 1 Terminal to terminal—block to block (long) 100 per pkg. 10250TA71 1000 per pkg. 10250TA71-2 1 Notes 1 Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations. 2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-227 1.8 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Accessories, continued 1 Description 1 Catalog Number Special Operators and Attachments 10250TA5 Wobble Stick Complete with retaining nut—fits standard button. 10250TA5 10250TA14 Lever Operator For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons. 10250TA14 10250TA_ Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 1 Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included). Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum 2.313 in (58.8 mm). 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1 1 1 1 1 Black 10250TA17 Red 10250TA18 1 Green 10250TA19 Yellow 10250TA20 1 1 Same with Long Button—Black 10250TA39 1 10250TA1 Maintained Contact Attachment Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one. Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks. 10250TA1 10250TA13 Roto-Push Lever Operator— Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators. 10250TA13 1 1 1 1 1 1 Special Light Modules 10250TA79 1 48 Vdc 1 1 10250TFL_ 1 1 1 Master Test (Dual Input) Module— Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices. 10250ED986-4 1 10250TMT8 Flasher Module— Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light. Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices. 24V 10250TFL2 120V 10250TFL1 Flashing Incandescent Lamp— For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type indicating lights including PresTest and most E29 devices. 10250ED986-4 1 1 Note 1 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. 1 1 1 V7-T1-228 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Accessories, continued Description 1 Catalog Number 1 Hole Plugs 10250TA7 Plug— For unused holes—steel, painted gray (stainless steel, use E30KT5, see Page V7-T1-175) 10250TA7 1 1 Tools 10250TA95 Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30 1 10250TA95 1 1 E22CW E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers) E22CW 10250TA96 Tool for Tightening Boots— Used to install boot Catalog Numbers 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25. 10250TA96 10250T, E34 Allen Wrench— Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head. 10250TA102 10250TA74 Lamp Removal Tools— For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches. Fits #12 lamp. 10250TA74 E30KV1 For full voltage and resistor type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches and E30. E30KV1 E29KLT Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6. E29KLT 10250TA102 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-229 1.8 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Options Legend Plates 1 1 1 1 1 Legend Plates with Standard Markings The legend plates listed spacing less than 1.75 in, below are sized for all replace the S in the catalog standard commercial number with MS, or the M enclosures and Eaton’s cast with P (except push-pull). No enclosures. For vertical change in price. The smaller size legend plates, “MS” or “P” size, have limited space for legend. For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights—Standard Square Legend Plate 1 Legend Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Legend Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-232. 1 1/2 Round Legend Plate Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High 1 CLAMP 10250TS90 10250TM90 OFF Red 10250TS24 10250TM24 CLOSE 10250TS73 10250TM11 ON Black 10250TS25 10250TM25 1 DOWN 10250TS74 10250TM12 OPEN 10250TS26 10250TM26 1 Black EMERG. STOP Red 10250TS13 10250TM13 OUT 10250TS27 10250TM27 FAST Black 10250TS75 10250TM14 POWER ON 10250TS80 10250TM80 1 FASTER 10250TS87 10250TM87 RAISE 10250TS28 10250TM28 FEEDER ON 10250TS94 10250TM94 READY 10250TS86 10250TM86 1 FEEDER OFF 10250TS95 10250TM95 RESET 10250TS29 10250TM29 FORWARD 10250TS15 10250TM15 REVERSE 10250TS30 10250TM30 HIGH 10250TS16 10250TM16 RUN 10250TS31 10250TM31 IN 10250TS17 10250TM17 SAFE 10250TS85 10250TM85 INCH 10250TS18 10250TM18 SLOW 10250TS32 10250TM32 1 JOG 10250TS19 10250TM19 SLOWER 10250TS88 10250TM88 JOG FOR. 10250TS20 10250TM20 START 10250TS33 10250TM33 1 JOG REV. 10250TS21 10250TM21 STOP Red 10250TS34 10250TM34 LOW 10250TS22 10250TM22 TEST Black 10250TS83 10250TM83 LOWER 10250TS23 10250TM23 TRANSFER 10250TS93 10250TM93 1 LUBE-FAIL 10250TS92 10250TM92 TRIP 10250TS84 10250TM84 MOTOR RUN 10250TS81 10250TM81 UNCLAMP 10250TS91 10250TM91 1 MOTOR STOP 10250TS82 10250TM82 UP 10250TS35 10250TM35 1 1 1 1 Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square 1 Color 1 1 Lettering Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo 2 Catalog Number Extra Large Catalog Number Black White or silver 3 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76 White Red or black 3 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77 Notes 1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. 2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures. 3 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-230 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Square Legend Plate 1.8 For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators—Standard Size Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Legend 10250TS38 10250TM38 AUTO OFF HAND HAND AUTO 10250TS39 10250TM39 HIGH LOW 10250TS40 10250TM40 JOG RUN 10250TS41 MAN. AUTO 10250TS67 OFF ON Legend Color of Field Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Blank—see table on Page V7-T1-232. 1/2 Round Legend Plate 2-Position—5/32 in High Lettering FOR. REV. 70 mm Round—Plastic Legend Plate Black 3-Position—1/8 in High Lettering Black 10250TS49 10250TM49 FOR. OFF REV. 10250TS50 10250TM50 FOR. SAFE REV. 10250TS69 10250TM69 10250TM41 HAND OFF AUTO 10250TS51 10250TM51 10250TM67 MAN. OFF AUTO 10250TS68 10250TM68 10250TS42 10250TM42 OPEN OFF CLOSE 10250TS53 10250TM53 OPEN CLOSE 10250TS43 10250TM43 RUN SAFE JOG 10250TS70 10250TM70 RUN JOG 10250TS44 10250TM44 UP OFF DOWN 10250TS54 10250TM54 SAFE RUN 10250TS45 10250TM45 ON STOP SAFE 10250TS71 10250TM71 START JOG 10250TS46 10250TM46 START STOP 10250TS47 10250TM47 UP DOWN 10250TS48 10250TM48 Red 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Color Field Catalog Number Yellow or red 2 10250TRP78 2 10250TRP76 1 45 mm Blank 1 1 45 mm and 70 mm Plastic—Round Lettering 1 1 70 mm Blank Yellow or red Red EMERG. STOP Yellow 1 10250TRP79 1 For Push-Pull Units Legend 3 Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1 1/2 Round Catalog Number 1 Standard Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High 1 PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP2 10250TR2 PUSH ON/PULL OFF Black 10250TPP5 10250TR5 PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP8 10250TR8 PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP11 10250TR11 1 1 1 Jumbo Size—Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP3 10250TR3 PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black 10250TPP6 10250TR6 PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP9 10250TR9 PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP12 10250TR12 1 1 Notes 1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. 2 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. 3 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols in the center of the plate. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-231 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1 Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings When Ordering Specify Ordering Example: 1 ● 1 1 1 1 1 ● Catalog number of blank plate phase plus Suffix “STAMP.” Insert the following into Order Notes: legend, letter size and locations (letters A–W)—combine letters for definitive locations as shown. Catalog No.: 10250TS36STAMP Letter Size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm) Pos. A—POWER HOUSE Pos. B—START PUMP 1 Legend Characters Available Blackening Kit Solution blackens aluminum exposed by engraving process. Must be applied immediately after engraving. 0.3 oz. bottle—sufficient for approximately 1100 legend plates. ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,1 234567890 Legend characters on black and red plates are white— on satin aluminum plates, characters are black. Catalog Number: 10250TBK Legend Positions 1 Extra Large Size Cat. No. 10250TNP99 Small Size 10250TMS or TP Series A A 1 Standard Size 10250TS or TM Series A B Jumbo Size 10250TL or TJ Series C 1 D A B C D K K 1 L 1 B G F AB AE AF B4 C4 A4 D4 G A H I 1 1 1 1 Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates Jumbo 2 Catalog Number Extra Large 3 Catalog Number Four-Position Selector Switch Standard Custom 4 Catalog Number Catalog Number Push-Pull with Symbols 1 Standard Jumbo 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Style Color Square 5 Black 10250TMS36 10250TS36 10250TL36 — 10250TS76 10250TS72 10250TPP17 Red 10250TMS37 10250TS37 10250TL37 — — — — — Green/red — — — — — — 10250TPP20 10250TPP21 Satin alum. — — — 10250TNP99 — — — — Black 10250TP36 10250TM36 10250TJ36 — — 10250TM72 10250TR17 10250TR18 Red 10250TP37 10250TM37 10250TJ37 — — — — — Green/red — — — — — — 10250TR20 10250TR21 Satin alum. — 10250TM89 10250TJ89 — — — — — 1 1 Standard Catalog Number Small Catalog Number 1/2 Round 1 10250TPP18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions Character Size 3/32 in High Number Number of of Lines Characters 1/8 in High Number of Lines Square 1 17 1/2 Round 1 15 Top (Aluminum and Plastic) Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Width Height Style Small 6 1.59 (40.4) Standard and custom 1.75 (44.5) Jumbo 7 2.19 (55.6) Extra large 3 2.44 (62.0) 1.59 (40.4) 1.75 (44.5) 2.19 (55.6) 2.44 (62.0) Number of Characters 3/16 in High Number of Lines — — — — 1 12 1 9 Square 2 18 2 13 1 9 1/2 Round 2 15 2 12 1 9 Square 5 23 3 18 2 12 1/2 Round 5 19 4 15 2 11 Square 6 25 3 18 3 12 Notes 1 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols in the center of the plate. 2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures. 3 When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures. 4 Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space—fits cast enclosures. 5 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. 6 Recommended only when mounting on minimum centers (less than 1-3/4 in [44.5 mm] vertical centers). 7 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure. V7-T1-232 Number of Characters Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Enclosures 1 Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 1 Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1 Number of Elements 1 Two Contact Block Depth Catalog Number 1 Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 234 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 Die Cast Enclosure Polyester Enclosure Stainless Steel Enclosure One Contact Block Depth Catalog Number 1 10250TN1 10250TN11 2 10250TN2 10250TN12 3 10250TN3 10250TN13 4 — 10250TN14 1 1 1 Polyester4—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1 — E34N51 2 — E34N52 3 — E34N53 4 — E34N54 1 1 1 Stainless Steel 45—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12 1 — 10250TN33 2 — 10250TN34 3 — 10250TN35 4 — 10250TN36 1 1 1 1 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-246. 1 1 Mounting Instructions One and Two Contact Block Depth Enclosures 1 Enclosure Layouts 1 Top – For Vertical Mounting 1 One Contact Block Depth Enclosure 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 Two Contact Block Depth Enclosure 4 Top – For Horizontal Mounting Two-position joystick must be used with two contact block deep enclosures (maximum number of contact blocks = 1). Four-position joysticks cannot be used within these enclosures. 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-234. 2 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks, with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page V7-T1-227. 3 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used. 4 When used with resistor light units, only the 2 contact block depth enclosure can be used. 5 14 gauge, type 304. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-233 1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only Flush Mounting Covers Covers Only—Flush Mounting Number of Elements 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 In-Line Flat Cover 1 10250TF11 10250TF1 2 10250TF12 10250TF2 3 10250TF13 10250TF3 4 10250TF14 10250TF4 With Pullbox Without Pullbox 1 10250TS10 10250TS1 2 10250TS11 10250TS2 3 10250TS12 10250TS3 4 10250TS14 10250TS4 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-247. 1 1 In-Line Deep Cover In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 1 1 1 Catalog Number Flush Die Cast Covers 1 1 Catalog Number Spacing Increments Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Type F G H Die cast 2.44 (62.0) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8) Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2) Stainless steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2) 1 1 Spacing Increments for Enclosures Top – For Vertical Mounting G 1 H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 F Top – For Horizontal Mounting 1 1 Enclosure Layouts Note 1 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-234 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Contact Blocks Standard Contact Blocks ● UL A600/P600 rated ● Color-coded plungers—red/ green for NC/NO circuits ● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” ● Gray (opaque) or amber (translucent) housings ● Pressure plate or spade terminals ● Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure terminals only) Logic Level Contact Blocks ● UL A600/P600 rated ● Color-coded plungers ● Inert palladium knife-blade contacts ● Gray (opaque) housings ● Pressure plate or spade terminals Special Function Contact Blocks ● UL A600/P600 rated ● Color-coded plungers ● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” ● Gray (opaque) housings ● Pressure plate terminals only 1 Special Purpose Contact Block ● Maximum 300V rated ● Black plungers ● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” ● Black (opaque) housings ● Pressure plate terminals only ● Fingerproof shrouds not available Reliability Nibs Reliability nibs are the hallmark of Eaton’s contact blocks. A pointed silver nib on the contact tip ensures reliable switching from logic level (5V) up to 600V applications. Therefore standard contact blocks can be used for most logic level applications where the contacts are not exposed to any harsh environmental conditions. Palladium Contacts Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for voltages and currents approaching zero and is recommended for applications where environmental conditions are a factor. 1 1 1 1 Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type 1 Max. Stack 1 Pushbuttons 6 Push-pull operators 2 1 Operator Roto-push operators 4 Two- or three-position selector switches 6 Four-position selector switches 4 Joysticks 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-235 1.8 1 10250T1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Contact Blocks Standard 1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Logic Level Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number 1 Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E 1 Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E 2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E 2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E 1 1 1 Special Function Blocks 3 1 LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71 3 — 10250T71E 3 — ECNONC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47 34 — 10250T47E 3 — 1 ECNONO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57 34 — 10250T57E 3 — 1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45 3 — 10250T45E 3 — LONCECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 10250T55 34 four blocks unless otherwise noted. — 10250T55E 3 — Blank No Plunger 1 1 1 1 Special Purpose Blocks 5 1 2NO2NC 1 Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V max. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T44 5 — Notes 1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. 2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm). Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds. 3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches. 4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. Fingerproof shrouds not available. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-236 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 10250T1CP Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds Circuit Description 1 Standard Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP 2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP 2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP Symbol Logic Level Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Special Function Blocks 3 LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71P 4 10250T71EP 4 1 ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47P 34 10250T47EP 4 1 ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57P 34 10250T57EP 4 1 10250T45EP 4 1 10250T55EP 4 1 Notes 1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. 2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP. 3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches. 1 Blank No Plunger 2LONC LONC-ECNO Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45P 4 10250T55P 34 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-237 1.8 1 10250T1C Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Amber Contact Blocks Standard 1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Logic Level Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Spade Terminal 3 Catalog Number Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Spade Terminal 3 Catalog Number 1 Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51C 10250T59C 10250T51EC 10250T59EC 1 Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53C 10250T60C 10250T53EC 10250T60EC NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1C 10250T40C 10250T1EC 10250T40EC 2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3C 10250T42C 10250T3EC 10250T42EC 2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2C 10250T41C 10250T2EC 10250T41EC — 10250T71EC 4 — 1 1 1 Special Function Blocks 3 1 LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six 10250T71C 4 blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. ECNONC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47C 45 — 10250T47EC 4 — 1 ECNONO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57C 45 — 10250T57EC 4 — 1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45C 4 — 10250T45EC 4 — LONCECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 10250T55C 45 four blocks unless otherwise noted. — 10250T55EC 4 — Blank No Plunger 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. 2 To order amber contact blocks with fingerproof shrouds, change suffix to CP in the catalog number e.g. 10250T51CP. Not available with spade terminals. 3 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm). Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds. 4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches. 5 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-238 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Replacement Parts 1 1 Replacement Lamps—For 10250T Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044 #267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4 #755 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage 28-2202 #756 12V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5184 #757 24V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5185 #1828 32V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5186 #1835 55V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor 28-5187 NE48 120V T 4-1/2 bayonet 10250T neon 28-494 NE51H-R22 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3754 NE51H-R68 240V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3755 Standard LED Lamp 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Replacement LED Lamps—For 10250T, E34 and E22 Units Voltage 6–12V 24V 48V 60V 120V Continuous Flashing Color AC/DC Catalog Number AC Catalog Number DC Catalog Number Red E22LED612RN E22LED006RAF E22LED006RDF Orange E22LED612ON E22LED006OAF E22LED006ODF Yellow E22LED612YN E22LED006YAF E22LED006YDF Green E22LED612GN E22LED006GAF E22LED006GDF Blue E22LED612BN E22LED006BAF E22LED006BDF White E22LED612WN E22LED006WAF E22LED006WDF Red E22LED024RN E22LED024RAF E22LED024RDF Orange E22LED024ON E22LED024OAF E22LED024ODF Yellow E22LED024YN E22LED024YAF E22LED024YDF Green E22LED024GN E22LED024GAF E22LED024GDF Blue E22LED024BN E22LED024BAF E22LED024BDF White E22LED024WN E22LED024WAF E22LED024WDF Red E22LED048RN E22LED048RAF E22LED048RDF Orange E22LED048ON E22LED048OAF E22LED048ODF Yellow E22LED048YN E22LED048YAF E22LED048YDF Green E22LED048GN E22LED048GAF E22LED048GDF Blue E22LED048BN E22LED048BAF E22LED048BDF White E22LED048WN E22LED048WAF E22LED048WDF Red E22LED060RN E22LED060RAF E22LED060RDF Orange E22LED060ON E22LED060OAF E22LED060ODF Yellow E22LED060YN E22LED060YAF E22LED060YDF Green E22LED060GN E22LED060GAF E22LED060GDF Blue E22LED060BN E22LED060BAF E22LED060BDF White E22LED060WN E22LED060WAF E22LED060WDF Red E22LED120RN E22LED120RAF E22LED120RDF Orange E22LED120ON E22LED120OAF E22LED120ODF Yellow E22LED120YN E22LED120YAF E22LED120YDF Green E22LED120GN E22LED120GAF E22LED120GDF Blue E22LED120BN E22LED120BAF E22LED120BDF White E22LED120WN E22LED120WAF E22LED120WDF 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-239 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1 1 1 1 Flush Head Pushbutton Operator Two-Position Joystick Operator Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator Jumbo Mushroom Head Operator Mushroom Head Operator with Padlock Attachment Knob-Operated Selector Switch Operator 1 1 1 1 1 1 Four-Position Joystick Operator (without Latch) Illuminated Pushbutton Operator 1 10250T Style Operator Replacement Parts 1 Item No. 1 1 1 1 1 Description No. Req. Part Number Item No. 1 Gasket 1 16-1548 14 2 Mounting nut 1 15-1530 15 3 Handle 1 24-5045 4 Knob 1 53-3157 16 17 Knob (not shown) for joystick operator with latch Gasket (supplied with basic unit) 1 32-803 Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long) (supplied with basic unit) 2 11-4553 Mounting screw 2 11-1632 Simple potentiometer (does not include items 18, 28 or 29) 1 As Req. Below 2 16-3400 1,000 ohms — 41-782-2 2 11-2014 2,500 ohms — 41-782-3 7 Mushroom head button (includes [2] Item 6) 1 As Req. Below 5,000 ohms — 41-782-10 Black — 53-1317 10,000 ohms — 41-782-4 Red — 53-1317-2 25,000 ohms — 41-782-5 Yellow — 53-1317-3 50,000 ohms — 41-782-6 Green — 53-1317-4 18 Connector (includes screw and lug) 2 25-1851 Blue — 53-1317-22 19 Indicating plate 1 As Req. Above Standard size (without legend) — 30-4460 Large size (specify legend) — 10250TR30 8 Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-544 9 Jumbo mushroom head button (aluminum—includes [2] Item 8) 1 As Req. Below Red — 10 11 1 1 12 1 13 53-1317-9 Black — 53-1317-10 Yellow — 53-1317-11 Green 1 1 Part Number Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 1 1 No. Req. Description Common gate (supplied with operator) 1 1 53-3159 Potentiometers 6 1 1 1 Transformer Type Indicating Light 5 1 1 Full Voltage, Resistor and Transformer Type Illuminated Selector Switch — Jumbo mushroom head button (aluminum—red EMERG. STOP) does not include Item 8 1 53-1317-12 53-1349-18 Position gate: Two-position 1 54-7278 Three-position 1 54-7173 Four-position 1 54-12278 Eight-position 1 54-12279 2 10250TA79 Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long) Washer 2 16-2038 Terminal screw and lug (captive) Req. 80-5502KIT V7-T1-240 20 Retaining nut 1 15-1547 21 Knob 1 53-1314 Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long) 2 11-2014 22 Coupling 1 29-3749-2 23 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long) 1 11-1199 24 Spacer 2 56-1066-18 25 Connector (includes screw and lug) 1 25-1851-2 26 Mounting nut 1 15-1938 27 Four-position joystick operating mechanism (complete) 1 24-6565 28 Four-position joystick operating mechanism (not shown) (with latch) complete 1 24-6565-2 29 Spring loaded latch 1 52-1214-2 30 Hand operated latch 1 52-913-3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Mechanical Ratings Description 1 Specification 1 Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selection switches 3000 operations/hr. Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr. 1 1 1 Life Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations PresTest units 10 x 106 operations Lever and key selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations Twist to release pushbuttons 0.3 x 106 operations 1 1 Shock Resistance 1 20 ms >5g Duration 1 General Specifications Description 1 Specification 1 Climate Conditions Operating temperature 1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C) Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m) Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C 1 1 1 Terminals Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2 for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005). Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1 Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60997-5-1 1 Transformer type 20,000 hrs. 1 Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. 1 1 Light Units Transformers Bulbs—average life: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-241 1.8 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Electrical Ratings Description Specification Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc Thermal Ith = 10A Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 UL rating A600, P600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour 10A 110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations 5A 250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations 2A 600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations Switching capacity AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue) 6A 120V pf 0.3 4A 240V pf 0.3 2A 660V pf 0.3 DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue) 1.0A 125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms 0.55A 250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms 0.1A 660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms 10A 110V pure resistive Maximum ratings for logic level and hostile atmosphere application Maximum amperes 0.5A Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc 1 Electrical Ratings—Contact Block 1 Description 1 1 1 1 50 Vac or 60 Hz 120 240 Vdc 480 600 24/28 125 250 Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 5.7 1.1 0.55 Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.7 1.1 0.55 Thermal current (amp) 10 10 10 10 5.0 5.0 5.0 Voltamperes: Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138 Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-242 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Mounting Options 1 Panel Thickness ● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) ● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate ● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut ● Indicating light: 10250TA30 ● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 1 1 1 1 Mounting Matrix 1 Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3) Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5) Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1 1 1 1 Mounting Options in Inches (mm) Terminals on Top 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 1 0.6 (15.2) D Min. 1 B Min. A Min. C Min. 1 1.22 (31) 1 Terminals at Side Horizontal Mounting 1 Vertical Mounting 1 Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block. Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block. This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals. 1 Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill. 1 1 Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 1 0.6 (15.2) 1 1 1.20 (30.5) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-243 1.8 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mechanically Interlocked Pushbutton Operators 1 Adjustable 1 1.62 (41.1) Min. 1 1 1 1 0.88 (22.4) for Each Additional Contact Block 1.07 (27.2) 0.89 (22.6) Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable in the Down Position 2.03 (51.6) 1.09 (27.7) 2.0 (50.8) Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable in the Up Position—Mushroom Head 2.5 (63.5) 1 1 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.75 (19.1) Potentiometer A B C 2 watt single 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 25 watt—up to 25 mohms 2.38 (60.5) 1.19 (30.2) 0.81 (20.6) 50 mohms 2.56 (65.0) 1.69 (42.9) 1.25 (31.8) 1.63 (41.4) 3.88 (98.6) 2.2 (55.9) mom. 2.5 (63.5) main. 2.06 (52.3) 2.13 (54.1) 0.88 (22.4) per Block 0.06 (1.5) to 0.26 (6.6) Panel Thickness 1.25 (31.8) 2.0 (50.8) Four-Position Joystick Operator 1 1 Std. Dial Plate Contact 0.89 Block (22.6) 1 1 1.31 (33.3) 1.09 1.0 (27.7) (25.4) Two-Position Joystick Operator 1.78 (45.2) 1 1 1.88 (47.8) 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 Large Dial Plate 2.5 (63.5) Max. 1 1 Potentiometer 1.75 (44.5) 1.5 (38.1) 4.0 (101.6) Lockout Pushbutton Operator Padlockable in the Up Position—Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 2.31 (58.7) 2.38 (60.5) 1.88 1.19 (47.8) 0.88 (22.4) (30.2) Per Unit 1.25 (31.8) 3.75 (95.3) 1 1.75 (44.5) 1 1 2.5 (63.5) 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-244 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Key Operated Pushbutton Operator 1 Operator and Cam 1.53 (38.9) 1.5 (38.1) Latch-In, Twist-to-Release Operator Only with Button 0.24 (6) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.38 (35.1) 0.86 (21.8) 1 1.13 (28.7) 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only 1 1 Special Rotor Latch 1 1.13 (28.7) 1.55 (39.3) Spring Return 2.37 (60.3) Auto-Latch 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.5 (38.1) 1.53 (38.9) 1 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-245 1.8 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Surface Mounting Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 1 1 E B 1 1 D A 1 1 C Surface Element Arrangement Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E Conduit Entrance In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3) 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 1 4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6) 1 1 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1) 4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3) 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 1 1 1 1 1 Number of Elements Die Cast 1 Polyester In-line 1 2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5) 1 3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6) 4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8) 1 2 Stainless Steel 1 1 1 In-line 2 Notes 1 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm). 2 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-246 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Flush Mounting 1 Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only 1 4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20 Screw Size for 12 Element and Larger 1 1 E 1 B 1 1 D C A Surface or Pendant 1 1 Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 2 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 1 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 2 3.50 (88.9) 5.50 (139.7) 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 0.25 (6.4) 2 3.50 (88.9) 6.00 (152.4) 4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 0.25 (6.4) 2 3.50 (88.9) 9.25 (235.0) 1 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8) 2 3.25 (82.6) 3.63 (92.2) 1 Number of Elements Die Cast 1 Stainless Steel 1 2 5.00 (127.0) 6.88 (174.8) 2.50 (63.5) 3 5.00 (127.0) 8.63 (219.2) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 5.50 (139.7) 4 5.00 (127.0) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 7.25 (184.2) 1 1 Notes 1 Depth given includes pull box. 2 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-247 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Flush and Long Pushbutton Half Shroud 1.81 (46) 1.09 (27.7) 1.06 (26.9) 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only Push-Pull Switch 0.88 0.88 (22.4) (22.4) 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 1 1 1 1 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) Half Shroud Is Same as Long Pushbutton with Lower Half of Guard Ring Cut Back Mushroom and Jumbo Head Pushbutton 1 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 1 1 1 1.78 (45.2) Flush Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment 1.13 (28.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1.13 0.88 (22.4) (28.7) for Each Additional Contact Block 1.63 (41.4) 1.75 (44.5) 1 1 0.25 (6.4) 2.63 (66.8) 1.65 (41.9) 2.5 1.5 (63.5) (38.1) 1 1 1.13 (28.7) Pushbutton with Cylinder Lock 1.13 (28.7) 1 2.03 (51.6) 1.09 (27.7) 2.0 (50.8) Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment 2.5 (63.5) 2.0 (50.8) 1.63 (41.4) 1 1 1 1.91 (48.5) 1.75 (44.5) 1.38 (35.1) 1.5 (38.1) 1 1 1 Illuminated Pushbutton 1.09 (27.7) 1.09 (27.7) 0.69 (17.5) 1 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 1.38 (35.1) Indicating Light—Transformer Type 1.8 (45.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1.38 (35.1) 1.1 (27.9) A 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-248 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 PresTest Indicating Light—Transformer Type PresTest Indicating Light—Resistor Type 1 1.88 (47.8) 1.78 (45.2) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.78 (45.2) 2.19 (55.6) 1.94 (49.3) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1 1.88 (47.8) 1 1.56 (39.6) 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator with Padlock Attachment 2.31 (58.7) 2.38 (60.5) Plastic 1.38 (35.1) Glass 1.59 (40.4) 1.63 (41.4) 1.75 (44.5) 1.78 (45.2) 2.5 (63.5) 1 Master Test Indicating Light B Spade Terminal 1 A Screw Terminal 1 1 1.38 (35.1) 1 Description B C Relay type 4.38 (111.2) 4.28 (108.7) Solid-state type 2.94 (74.7) 2.88 (73.2) 1 1 1 Indicating Light—Resistor and Neon Type 1 Threaded Bushing A 1.78 (45.2) 1 Potentiometer Shaft 1.38 (35.1) 1 B Shaft 1.1 (27.9) 1.81 (46) Lens A Plastic 1.38 (35.1) Glass 1.56 (39.6) A 1 Shaft Dimensions of Potentiometer That C-H Operator Will Accept Operator Catalog Number 10250T330 1 A B 0.38 (9.7) dia. x 0.38 (9.7) long 0.25 (6.4) dia. x 0.63 (16) long 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-249 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Coin Operated Selector Switch Wobble Stick Catalog No. 10250TA5 1.44 (36.6) Coin Slot Knob 2.44 (62) 21° 1.38 (35.1) 1 21° 1 1 1 1 Lever A 1.22 (31) Operator Dim. A Knob 1.38 (35.1) Lever 1.50 (38.1) Coin slot 1.38 (35.1) Lever Operator—For Use with Two Vertically Mounted Flush Pushbuttons Catalog No. 10250TA14 2.19 (55.6) 1 1 Key Operated Selector Switch 1.38 (35.1) 1 1 1 Cam 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 Illuminated Selector Switch Flexible Boot—For Protecting Flush or Long Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA3 Typical 1.13 (28.7) 1.47 (37.3) 1.38 (35.1) 1 1 1 1.09 (27.7) 1.59 (40.4) 1.96 (49.8) Roto-Push 1 1.13 (28.7) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1 1 1.88 (47.8) 3.75 (95.3) 1.75 (44.5) 1 1 3.59 (91.2) 1.53 (38.9) 1 0.38 (9.7) Long Button Only Transparent Flexible Boot— For Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA25 1.59 (40.4) 1.33 (33.8) 1.88 (47.8) 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-250 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T 1.8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Padlock Attachment—For Knob Selector Switch Catalog No. 10250TA11 1 Maintained Contact Attachment Catalog No. 10250TA17 Typical 1 0.97 (24.6) 1 1.63 (41.4) 1 1.63 (41.4) Min. 0.44 (11.2) 1 2.31 (58.7) Max. 1 Padlock Attachment—For Flush Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA2 0.75 (19.1) 0.84 (21.3) 0.94 (23.9) 1 1.63 (41.4) 0.38 (9.7) Padlock Attachment—For Extended Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA26 1.16 (29.5) 0.75 (19.1) 1 1 1.0 (25.4) 1 1 2.19 (55.6) 1.06 (26.9) 1 1.91 (48.5) 1 0.91 (23.1) 2.06 (52.3) 0.84 (21.3) 1 Padlock Cover Guard for Flush Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA36 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.7) 0.91 (23.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1 Padlock Attachment for Maintained Push-Pull Operator Catalog No. 10250TA64 1.5 (38.1) 1 0.38 (9.7) 1 Maintained Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA66 Typical 2.19 (55.6) 1 1 Adjustable 0.94 (23.9) 1.62 (41.1) Min. 2.5 (63.5) Max. 0.88 (22.4) for Each Additional Contact Block 1 1.47 (37.3) 1.25 (31.8) 1 Protecting Shroud for Jumbo Mushroom Head Button Catalog No. 10250TA56 1 1 1.07 (27.2) 1 0.89 (22.6) 3.25 (82.6) 1 1 1.65 (41.9) 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-251 1.8 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Protecting Shroud for Mushroom Head Button Catalog No. 10250TA6 1.53 (38.9) 1.38 (35.1) A Min. A Min. 1.22 (31) Terminals at Side Horizontal Rows Protecting Shroud for Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog No. 10250TA15 1.75 (44.5) 1 Lever for Roto-Push Operator Catalog No. 10250TA13 Legend Plate Vertical Rows A Min. B Min. 1 or 2 Circuit Contact Blocks 0.44 (11.2) 1.50 (38.1) 1 0.6 (15.2) B Min. 1.25 (31.8) 1 1 B Min. 1.69 (42.9) 1 1 Panel Drilling and Minimum Spacing Terminals on Top 1.31 (33.3) 1 1 Extended Retaining Nut Catalog No. 10250TA12 1.81 (46) Small or none 1.63 (41.4) 2.25 (57.2) Standard 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) Jumbo 1 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) Extra large 2.50 (63.5) 2.60 (66.0) 4 Circuit Contact Block 10250T44 1 Small or none 1.88 (47.8) Standard 1.88 (47.8) 2.25 (57.2) 1 Jumbo 1 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) Extra large 2.50 (63.5) 2.60 (66.0) 1 1 1 Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard Catalog No. 10250TA38 Notes Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill. 1 0.84 (21.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.25 (57.2) If jumbo plates are to be placed one above the other vertically, add 0.13 (3.3) to minimum dimensions listed. 1.75 (44.5) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-252 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.8 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight—10250T Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Multiple Button Guard Chain Hook Bracket 2.16 (54.9) 1.88 (47.8) 4.0 (101.6) 5.88 (149.4) 4 7.88 (200.2) 7 13.38 (339.9) 1 C 1 Enclosure Size (No. of Elements) Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 2, 3 and 4 3.75 (95.3) 1.94 (49.3) 0.13 (3.3) 2.69 (68.3) 1.38 (35.1) 1 6 and 7 4.0 (101.6) 2.19 (55.6) 0.13 (3.3) 2.88 (73.2) 1.63 (41.4) 1 A 3 1 D A 0.75 (19.1) 2 1 B E A Number of Elements 1 0.38 (9.7) Dia. Hole 1.31 (33.3) 1 1 1 Master Test Module, Flasher Module and Legend Plate 1.63 (41.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1 A 1 B 1.31 (33.3) 1 6 Mounting Holes 1.14 (29) Master Test Module, Flasher Module Legend Plate 1 Legend Plate A B 1.56 (39.6) 0.91 (23.1) 1 1 1 1/2 Round Legend Plates Small Standard 1.59 (40.4) 1.07 (27.2) Jumbo 2.06 (52.3) 1.53 (38.9) 1 1 Square Legend Plates Small 1.59 (40.4) sq. 0.90 (22.9) Standard 1.75 (44.5) sq. 1.06 (26.9) 1 Jumbo 2.19 (55.6) sq. 1.50 (38.1) Extra large 2.44 (62.0) sq. 1.63 (41.4) 1 1 1 Notes Locating nib hole or notch is 1.36–1.4 in (34.5–35.6 mm) #29 drill. 1 1 For plastic legend plate, Dimension B is 1.12 (28.4). 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-253 1.9 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Description 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Page 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-255 Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-256 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-257 Ordering Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-259 Product Selection Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-260 Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . V7-T1-260 Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-261 Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-262 Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-264 Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-265 Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-267 Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-268 Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-272 Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-273 Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-276 Key Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-276 Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . V7-T1-278 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-279 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-281 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-287 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-289 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-292 1 1 Contents Product Description Features Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm pushbutton line features the same rugged die cast construction of our 10250T line with an additional two-layer 100% solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy coating. This coating provides a flat black smooth, consistent, corrosion resistant surface that has passed a demanding 600 hour salt spray test. (The industry standard for this 4X test requires only 200 hours.) ● 1 ● ● ● Epoxy-coated metal operators Corrosion resistant Integral ground screw terminal on operators FDA approved for sanitary chemical resistance requirements Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● Ingress Protection When mounted in similarly rated enclosure— ● Standard indicating lights ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● IEC IP65 ● All other operators ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● IEC IP65 1 1 1 1 CE EN60947-5-1 and 60947-5-5 UL 508—File No. E131568 CSA C22.2 No. 14—File No. LR68551 FDA 3-A Sanitary Standards 1 1 1 V7-T1-254 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Product Overview Ultraviolet Light Reliability Nibs E34 cathodic coating is not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists—use NEMA 4X 10250T operators. Eaton’s contact blocks feature enclosed silver contacts with pointed “reliability nibs” for reliable performance from logic level up to 600V. To ensure reliable switching, nibs bite through oxide which can form on silver contacts, eliminating the need for expensive logic level blocks for most applications. Reliability Nibs Dry Circuit Medium Duty 1 Diaphragm Seal with Drainage Holes 1 Liquid Drainage Eaton’s pushbutton operators offer front of panel drainage via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut, these holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator, which can prevent operation in freezing environments. The holes also provide a route for escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure from the internal diaphragm seal, ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Diaphragm Seal Heavy-Duty 1 Foam Neoprene Panel Sealing Gasket Drainage Hole 1 Flexible Diaphragm 1 Stainless Steel Operating Spring 1 Colorfast Molded Button 1 1 Drainage Hole Mounting Nut 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-255 1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Identification 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Series Octagonal Mounting Nut Self-Adjusts to Panel Thickness—Eliminates Spacer Washers and Set Screws Internal Sealing Diaphragm for Excellent Sealing 1 Terminal Clamps Shipped Open Ready to Wire 1 1 1 1 1 Die Cast Construction with Thick, Tough Corrosion Resistant Coating Three Styles of Legend Plates in Four Sizes Wide Variety of Operator Types and Colors Stackable Contact Blocks up to 12 Circuits per Operator 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-256 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons E34 PB 1 – 1 1 1 1 PB = EB = LB = JB = EVB = EHB = Operator Flush Extended 40 mm mushroom 65 mm mushroom 1/2 shroud vertical mount 1/2 shroud horizontal mount Button Color 1 = Black 7 = Gray 2 = Red 5 = White 3 = Green 6 = Blue 4 = Yellow 8 = Orange Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = 1 Circuit Operator only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO 1 1 1 1 Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Push-Pulls 1 E34 GDB 63 M2 GDB = GEB = GFB = GHB = Operator Two-position maintained Three-position mom push-mom pull Three-position mt push-mom pull Three-position mom push-mom pull Incandescent Light Unit Blank = Non-illuminated 89 = 24V/XFR 63 = 120V/XFR 64 = 208V/XFR 65 = 240V/XFR 82 = 277V/XFR 66 = 380V/XFR 67 = 480V/XFR 68 = 600V/XFR 69 = 6V/FV 70 = 12V/FV 79 = 24V/FV 83 = 32V/FV 80 = 120V/RES 81 = 240V/RES LED Light Unit Blank = Non-illuminated 89L = 24V/XFR 63L = 120V/XFR 64L = 208V/XFR 65L = 240V/XFR 82L = 277V/XFR 66L = 380V/XFR 67L = 480V/XFR 68L = 600V/XFR 97L = Full voltage – 1 1 1 LED Voltage Blank = Non-illuminated Blank = Incandescent 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac 2D = 120 Vdc Non-Illuminated Button C1 = Black 40 mm C2 = Red 40 mm C2N8 = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP C3 = Green 40 mm C6 = Blue 40 mm — = Black 65 mm J2 = Red 65 mm J2N8 = Red 65 mm—“E” STOP — = Green 65 mm — = Yellow 65 mm Incandescent M2 = M2N8 = M3 = M6 = M9 = M5 = M0 = Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = Circuit Operator only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 Illuminated LED Lens Type RD = Red 40 mm ED = Red 40 mm—“E” STOP GD = Green 40 mm LD = Blue 40 mm AD = Amber 40 mm WD = White 40 mm — = Clear 40 mm 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-257 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons E34 XB 24 V2 1 1 1 1 1 Light Unit Type XB = Transformer CB = Full voltage SB = Resistor Incandescent Light Unit 024 = 24V/XFR 120 = 120V/XFR 240 = 240V/XFR 277 = 277V/XFR 380 = 380V/XFR 480 = 480V/XFR 600 = 600V/XFR 06 = 6V/FV 12 = 12V/FV 24 = 24V/FV 32 = 32V/FV 48 = 48V/FV 120 = 120V/RES 240 = 240V/RES 1 1 1 1 1 1 Blank = 1= 2= 3= 51 = 53 = LED Light Unit 024L = 24V/XFR 120L = 120V/XFR 240L = 240V/XFR 277L = 277V/XFR 380L = 380V/XFR 480L = 480V/XFR 600L = 600V/XFR 397L = Full voltage Blank = 06 = 12 = 24 = Incandescent Lens Color V2 = Red V3 = Green V4 = Yellow V5 = White V6 = Blue V9 = Amber V0 = Clear 1 1 – 1 LED Voltage Incandescent 48 = 6 Vac/Vdc 60 = 12 Vac/Vdc 2A = 24 Vac/Vdc 2D = Circuit Operator only 1NO-1NC 2NO 2NC 1NC 1NO 48 Vac/Vdc 60 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 120 Vdc LED Lens Color RD = Red GD = Green YD = Yellow WD = White LD = Blue AD = Amber Standard Indicating Lights, PresTest and Master Test 1 E34 FB06 H2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Light Unit Type Standard—Incandescent Standard—LED TB120 = 120V/XFR TB120L = 120V/XFR TB240 = 240V/XFR TB240L = 240V/XFR TB277 = 277V/XFR TB277L = 277V/XFR TB380 = 380V/XFR TB380L = 380V/XFR TB480 = 480V/XFR TB480L = 480V/XFR TB600 = 600V/XFR TB600L = 600V/XFR FB06 = 6V/FV FB197L = Full voltage FB12 = 12V/FV PresTest—LED FB24 = 24V/FV TPB120L = 120V/XFR FB32 = 32V/FV TPB240L = 240V/XFR FB48 = 48V/FV TPB380L = 380V/XFR RB120 = 120V/RES TPB480L = 480V/XFR RB240 = 240V/RES TPB600L = 600V/XFR NB120 = 120V/neon FPB297L = Full voltage NB240 = 240V/neon PresTest—Incandescent TPB120 = 120V/XFR TPB240 = 240V/XFR TPB380 = 380V/XFR TPB480 = 480V/XFR TPB600 = 600V/XFR FPB06 = 6V/FV FPB12 = 12V/FV FPB24 = 24V/FV FPB32 = 32V/FV FPB48 = 48V/FV RPB120 = 120V/RES RPB240 = 240V/RES LED Voltage Blank = Incandescent 06 = 6 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 48 = 48 Vac/Vdc 60 = 60 Vac/Vdc 2A = 120 Vac 2D = 120 Vdc Plastic Glass Lens Color Standard/Master—Incandescent H2 = G2 = Red H3 = G3 = Green H4 = G4 = Yellow H5 = G5 = White H6 = G6 = Blue H9 = G9 = Amber H0 = G0 = Clear PresTest—Incandescent V2 = P2 = Red V3 = P3 = Green V4 = P4 = Yellow V5 = P5 = White V6 = P6 = Blue V9 = P9 = Amber V0 = P0 = Clear Plastic Glass Lens Color Standard/Master/PresTest—LED RP = RG = Red GP = GG = Green YP = YG = Yellow WP = WG = White LP = LG = Blue AP = AG = Amber Note 1 Add X at end of catalog number to receive parts assembled from factory. 1 V7-T1-258 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Ordering Complete Devices Complete E34 pushbuttons, indicating lights and/or selector switch operators including contact block(s) and legend plate can be ordered using a single composite catalog number. The individually packaged components will be shipped unassembled in a single overpack carton marked with the composite catalog number. 1 Ordering Example Illuminated Pushbutton Device—Catalog Number E34XB120V2-153SP90 1 1 For a complete Catalog Number breakdown, see Pages V7-T1-257 to V7-T1-258. 1 1 1 For Complete E34 Device Ordering 1 E34XB120 V2 – 153 SP90 Operator 1 1 Legend Plate E34;SP90 Lens E34V2 1 Contact Blocks 10250T1 and 10250T53 1 Insert Hyphen Before Contact Block(s) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-259 1.9 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Product Selection Non-Illuminated Momentary Pushbutton Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Flush Button 1 Pushbutton Units Contact Type Button Color 1NO Black Red Green Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP 1 1 Extended Button 1NC 1 1 1 Mushroom Button 1NO-1NC 1 1 1 Extended Button Catalog Number Mushroom Button Catalog Number Jumbo Mushroom 1 Catalog Number E34PB1-53X E34EB1-53X E34LB1-53X E34JB1-53X E34PB2-53X E34EB2-53X E34LB2-53X E34JB2-53X E34PB3-53X E34EB3-53X E34LB3-53X E34JB3-53X — — — E34JB2N8-53X E34JB1-51X Flush Button Catalog Number Black E34PB1-51X E34EB1-51X E34LB1-51X Red E34PB2-51X E34EB2-51X E34LB2-51X E34JB2-51X Green E34PB3-51X E34EB3-51X E34LB3-51X E34JB3-51X Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — E34JB2N8-51X Black E34PB1-1X E34EB1-1X E34LB1-1X E34JB1-1X Red E34PB2-1X E34EB2-1X E34LB2-1X E34JB2-1X Green E34PB3-1X E34EB3-1X E34LB3-1X E34JB3-1X Red—Engraved EMERG. STOP — — — E34JB2N8-1X Jumbo Mushroom 1 1 1 1 1 1 Plastic Lens Indicating Light Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 24V Full Voltage Indicating Light Indicating Light Units Type Voltage Color LED/Lamp Number Indicating Light 1 Catalog Number Red Bayonet base E34FB197LRP24 LED Lamp 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1 1 120 Vac 1 Green E34FB197LGP24 Amber E34FB197LAP24 Red E34FB197LRP2A Green E34FB197LGP2A Amber E34FB197LAP2A Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1 Red #757 Green E34FB24H3X Amber 1 Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1 Transformer 1 1 120 Vac 50/60 Hz Red E34FB24H2X E34FB24H9X 120MB E34RB120H2X Green E34RB120H3X Amber E34RB120H9X Red #755 E34TB120H2X Green E34TB120H3X Amber E34TB120H9X Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. 1 V7-T1-260 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Pushbuttons 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Momentary Pushbutton Operators, Non-Illuminated E34PB_ E34EB_ E34EHB_ E34LB_ E34JB_ Button Color Catalog Number Flush button Black E34PB1 Red E34PB2 Green E34PB3 Yellow E34PB4 White E34PB5 Blue E34PB6 Gray E34PB7 Orange E34PB8 Black E34EB1 Red E34EB2 Green E34EB3 Yellow E34EB4 White E34EB5 Blue E34EB6 Gray E34EB7 Orange E34EB8 Extended button Half shrouded button Mushroom button Anodized aluminum jumbo mushroom button 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Vertical Horizontal Black E34EVB1 E34EHB1 Red E34EVB2 E34EHB2 Green E34EVB3 E34EHB3 Yellow E34EVB4 E34EHB4 White E34EVB5 E34EHB5 Blue E34EVB6 E34EHB6 Gray E34EVB7 E34EHB7 Orange E34EVB8 E34EHB8 1 1 1 1 1 1 Black E34LB1 Red E34LB2 Green E34LB3 Yellow E34LB4 Blue E34LB6 1 Black E34JB1 1 Red E34JB2 Red (Engraved EMERG. STOP) E34JB2N8 Green E34JB3 Yellow E34JB4 1 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 1 Anodized aluminum head—may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-261 1.9 1 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Illuminated Pushbutton 1 Operators without Lens Type Voltage Lamp Number Illuminated Pushbutton Catalog Number Indicating Light Catalog Number E34CB497L E34FB197L E34FPB297L E34XB024L — — PresTest Catalog Number LED Lamp (LEDs not included) 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Indicating Light Full voltage — Transformer AC only 24 Bayonet base 120 E34XB120L E34TB120L E34TPB120L 1 240 E34XB240L E34TB240L E34TPB240L 277 E34XB277L E34TB277L — 1 380 E34XB380L E34TB380L E34TPB380L 480 E34XB480L E34TB480L E34TPB480L 600 E34XB600L E34TB600L E34TPB600L 1 PresTest Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage AC/DC 1 1 1 Resistor AC/DC 2 6 #755 E34CB06 E34FB06 E34FPB06 12 #756 E34CB12 E34FB12 E34FPB12 24 #757 E34CB24 E34FB24 E34FPB24 32 #1828 E34CB32 E34FB32 E34FPB32 48 #1835 E34CB48 E34FB48 E34FPB48 120 120MB E34SB120 E34RB120 E34RPB120 E34SB240 E34RB240 E34RPB240 240 1 Transformer AC only E34XB024 — — 120 E34XB120 E34TB120 E34TPB120 240 E34XB240 E34TB240 E34TPB240 277 E34XB277 E34TB277 — 1 380 E34XB380 E34TB380 E34TPB380 480 E34XB480 E34TB480 E34TPB480 1 600 E34XB600 E34TB600 E34TPB600 1 1 Neon AC/DC 1 24 #755 120 NE51H-R-22 — E34NB120 — 240 NE51H-4-68 — E34NB240 — Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 1 2 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color, see Page V7-T1-239 for LED Selection and Pages V7-T1-257 to V7-T1-258 for Catalog Numbering Selection. Resistor units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-262 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Plastic Glass E34V_ Plastic Glass 1.9 Indicating Light Lens Color Plastic Catalog Number Glass 1 Catalog Number Red E34H2 E34G2 Green E34H3 E34G3 Yellow E34H4 E34G4 White E34H5 E34G5 Blue E34H6 E34G6 Ambler E34H9 E34G9 Clear E34H0 E34G0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Illuminated Pushbutton Lens Color Catalog Number Red E34V2 Green E34V3 Yellow E34V4 White E34V5 Blue E34V6 Ambler E34V9 Clear E34V0 1 1 1 1 1 1 PresTest Lens Color Plastic Catalog Number Glass 1 Catalog Number 1 Red E34V2 E34P2 1 Green E34V3 E34P3 Yellow E34V4 E34P4 White E34V5 E34P5 Blue E34V6 E34P6 Ambler E34V9 E34P9 Clear E34V0 E34P0 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Glass lens has black anodized aluminum bezel. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-263 1.9 1 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Push-Pull Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● Two- and three-position Non-illuminated 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Two-Position Push-Pull Unit Two-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Pull Push 1 Mounting Location Button Type/Color 2 Contact Type 40 mm/red 1NO E34GDBC2-1X 40 mm engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1NC E34GDBC2N8-1X A B Catalog Number Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 1 O X 1 X O 65 mm aluminum engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1 E34GDBJ2N8-1X 1 1 Three-Position Push-Pull Unit Three-Position Push-Pull Units, Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Pull 1 Intermediate Push Button Type/Color 2 1 Contact Type Mounting Location A B Catalog Number Maintained Push, Momentary Pull X X 1 O X O O 40 mm/black 1NC E34GFBC1-3X 40 mm/red 1NC E34GFBC2-3X 40 mm engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1 E34GFBC2N8-3X Momentary Push, Momentary Pull 1 1 1 1 O X O O O X O O X O 40 mm/black 1NC E34GEBC1-3X 40 mm/red 1NC E34GEBC2-3X 40 mm/black 1NO E34GHBC1-1X 40 mm/red 1NC E34GHBC2-1X Button and Color Selection 1 1 X X Color Standard Suffix Code Catalog Number Standard—40 mm Black C1 E34C1 1 Red C2 E34C2 Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8 1 Green C3 E34C3 Blue C6 E34C6 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head 3 (Anodized) Aluminum—65 mm Red J2 E34J2 Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 2 1 3 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color buttons, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table. Example: E34GDBC6-1X. Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications. 1 1 V7-T1-264 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Illuminated Push-Pull Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● 1 Two-position maintained Illuminated Illuminated Push-Pull Unit 1 Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 1 Operator Position 1 Maintained— Pull O X Maintained— Intermediate X O Lamp Type Voltage LED Full voltage Contact Type 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC Mounting Location A B LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base X O Incandescent 1 E34GDB97LRD24-1X 1 E34GDB97LRD2A-1X Transformer 24 Vac E34GDB89LRD06-1X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 E34GDB79M2-1X Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120MB E34GDB80M2-1X Transformer 24 Vac #755 E34GDB89M2-1X 120 Vac O X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 2 E34GDB63LRD06-1X 120 Vac E34GDB63M2-1X 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Lens and Color Selection 1 Incandescent Suffix Code LED Suffix Code Catalog Number Red M2 RD E34M2 Red (EMER. STOP) M2N8 ED E34M2N8 Green M3 GD E34M3 Blue M6 LD E34M6 Amber M9 AD E34M9 White M5 WD E34M5 Clear M0 CD E34M0 Color 1 Standard 1 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 1 2 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table above. Example: E34GDB79M3 -1X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-271. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-265 1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● Three-position maintained Illuminated Illuminated Push-Pull Unit 1 Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull Operator Position 1 Momentary— Pull Maintained— Intermediate Momentary— Push 1 O X 1 O O X O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Type LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac 1NC 1 Transformer 1 1 X X O X O O Full voltage 1 1 Transformer 1 O X 1 O O X O 1 1 Incandescent Mounting Location A B LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base X X 1 1 1 O X O O 24 Vac E34GHB89LRD06-1X 120 Vac E34GHB63LRD06-1X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120 Vac 1NC Bayonet base E34GEB97LRD24-3X E34GEB97LRD2A-3X 24 Vac E34GEB89LRD06-3X 120 Vac E34GEB63LRD06-3X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 E34GHB79M2-1X Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GHB80M2-1X Transformer 24 Vac #755 E34GHB89M2-1X E34GHB63M2-1X Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 E34GEB79M2-3X Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GEB80M2-3X Transformer 24 Vac #755 E34GEB89M2-3X 120 Vac 1 E34GHB97LRD24-1X E34GHB97LRD2A-1X 120 Vac 1 Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 2 E34GEB63M2-3X Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 2 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from Lens and Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-265. Example: E34GEB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-271. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-266 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● 1 Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull Illuminated Illuminated Push-Pull Unit 1 Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull 1 Operator Position 1 Momentary— Pull X X Maintained— Intermediate O X Maintained— Push O O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Type LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120 Vac 1NC Transformer X X O X O O Incandescent Mounting Location A B LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number 2 E34GFB97LRD24-3X 1 1 1 E34GFB97LRD2A-3X 1 24 Vac E34GFB89LRD06-3X 120 Vac E34GFB63LRD06-3X 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 E34GFB79M2-3X 1 Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB E34GFB80M2-3X 1 Transformer 24 Vac #755 E34GFB89M2-3X 1 E34GFB63M2-3X 1 120 Vac 1 Vertical or Horizontal One-Hole Mounting 3 Potentiometers UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate—Linear Type ±10% 1 Potentiometer Ohms 1 Catalog Number 2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 45 1000 E34PDB1F1 2500 E34PDB1F2 5000 E34PDB1F5 10000 E34PDB1F10 25000 E34PDB1F25 50000 E34PDB1F50 Operator only 6 E34PDB1A0 Alternative—black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99 1 1 1 1 1 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-292. 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. To order different type or color lens, substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-265. Example: E34GFB79M3-3X. For LEDs with different voltages see ordering example on Page V7-T1-271. Shown with standard aluminum dial plate. Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number. Example: E34PDB1F136. To order separately, see footnote 5 below. Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping. For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing on Page V7-T1-244. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-267 1.9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ● Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. 1 1 ● An illuminated push-pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: ● 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Push-Pull Operators 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Two-Position Maint. Push-Pull 1 Momentary Pull, Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to intermediate position when pulled. Maintains in pushed position until manually returned to intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators from starting the system. Application Guide To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch below shows pictorially by symbols A and B locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The table below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open). The operators, buttons, contact blocks, etc., are offered as building block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly inventory. Contact Circuit Locations Locating Nib A B Push-Pull Operator Components Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement Out—Pull Intermediate 1 In—Push Contact Block Mounting Location 1 Type of Operator 1 A B A B A O X No intermediate position X O B Contact Block 2 Catalog Number X O 1NO 1NC E34GDB X O 2NO 2NC O O 1NO 1NC O O 2NO 2NC O O 1NO 1NC O O 2NO 2NC X O 1NO 1NC X O 2NO 2NC Two-Position Operator without Lens Maintained push-pull 1 O X or O X 1 O X or X O Three-Position Operator without Lens 1 Momentary push-pull 1 O X or O X 1 Maintained push-momentary pull O X or O X 1 Momentary push-pull 1 O X O X 1 or O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O or or or O X X O O X X O O X X O O X X O O O X O O O X O or or or E34GEB 2 E34GFB 2 E34GHB 2 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 See Typical Applications on Page V7-T1-203. 1 1 2 1 Shown without button on lens. Maximum of two blocks, four circuits. Special function contact blocks shown on Page V7-T1-286 CANNOT be used with three-position push-pull operators E34GEB, E34GFB or E34GHB. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-268 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons Ordering Example with One Composite Number 1 Non-illuminated: E34GDB + E34C2 + 10250T1 = E34GDBC2-1X 1 1 Incandescent: E34GDB + 10250T79 + E34M2 + 10250T1 = E34GDB79M2-1X 1 LED: E34GDB + 10250T97L + E34M2 + Voltage Code + 10250T1 = E34GDB97LRD24-1X 06—6 Vac/Vdc 12—12 Vac/Vdc 24—24 Vac/Vdc 48—48 Vac/Vdc 1 60—60 Vac/Vdc 2A—120 Vac 2D—120 Vdc 1 1 1 Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Light Unit Type LED (LEDs not included) 1 Incandescent Type Voltage Full voltage — Transformer AC only 50/60 Hz 24 Full voltage AC or DC LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base 10250T97L 10250T63L 208 10250T64L 240 10250T65L 277 10250T82L 380 10250T66L 480 10250T67L 600 10250T68L 12 24/28 #755 #756 #757 #1828 10250T70 120MB 10250T80 #755 10250T89 32 Resistor AC or DC 120 Transformer AC only 50/60 Hz 24 1 10250T89L 120 6 1 Catalog Number 1 1 1 1 1 10250T69 1 10250T79 10250T83 240 1 1 10250T81 120 10250T63 208 10250T64 240 10250T65 277 10250T82 380 10250T66 480 10250T67 600 10250T68 1 1 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from chart on Page V7-T1-271. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-269 1.9 Incandescent Suffix Code Catalog Number Black C1 E34C1 Red C2 E34C2 Red (EMERG. STOP) C2N8 E34C2N8 Green C3 E34C3 Blue C6 E34C6 Red 1 J2 E34J2 Red (EMERG. STOP) J2N8 E34J2N8 Color Standard 1 1 1 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 Standard Button Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 1 1 E34M_ Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Color Incandescent Suffix Code LED Suffix Code 2 Catalog Number 1 Red M2 RD E34M2 1 Red (EMERG. STOP) M2N8 ED E34M2N8 Green M3 GD E34M3 1 Blue M6 LD E34M6 Amber M9 AD E34M9 1 White M5 WD E34M5 Clear M0 — E34M0 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 2 1 Anodized aluminum may not be suitable for use on some corrosive applications. Suffix codes should only be used for assembling composite catalog numbers. To order lens, order by catalog number. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-270 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Standard LED Lamp LED Selection Voltage Color Catalog Number Voltage Color Catalog Number 6 Vac/Vdc suitable for use with transformers Red E22LED006RN 60 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED060RN Orange E22LED006ON Orange E22LED060ON Yellow E22LED006YN Yellow E22LED060YN Green E22LED006GN Green E22LED060GN Blue E22LED006BN Blue E22LED060BN 12 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc White E22LED006WN Red E22LED012RN White E22LED060WN Red E22LED120RA Orange Yellow E22LED012ON Orange E22LED120OA E22LED012YN Yellow E22LED120YA Green E22LED012GN Green E22LED120GA Blue E22LED012BN Blue E22LED120BA White E22LED012WN White E22LED120WA Red E22LED024RN Red E22LED120RD Orange E22LED024ON Orange E22LED120OD Yellow E22LED024YN Yellow E22LED120YD Green E22LED024GN Green E22LED120GD Blue E22LED024BN Blue E22LED120BD White E22LED120WD White E22LED024WN Red E22LED048RN Orange E22LED048ON Yellow E22LED048YN Green E22LED048GN Blue E22LED048BN White E22LED048WN 120 Vac 120 Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-271 1.9 1 1 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Selector Switch Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● ● Two-, three- and four-position—maintained Non-illuminated and illuminated 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Two-Position Maint. Switch Knob Two-Position Selector Switch Operator Position 1 Operator Action 2 1 X O 1 O X Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer Mounting Location Cam Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Code Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 A B Contact Type 1NC M 1 E34VFBL1-1X E34VFBK1-1X E34VFB120ER-1X E34VFB120FR-1X M 1NO 1 1 Three-Position Maint. Switch Knob Three-Position Selector Switch Operator Position 1 1 Operator Action 2 1 X O O O O X Contact Type 1NO M M 1 Mounting Location Cam Code A B Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 3 E34VHBK1-2X E34VHBL1-2X E34VHB120TER-2X E34VHB120TFR-2X 3 E34VHBK1-23X E34VHBL1-23X E34VHB120TER-23X E34VHB120TFR-23X M 1NO 1 X O O 1 O X O O O X 1NO 2NC (Series) 1NO 1 1 1 Four-Position Maint. Switch Lever Four-Position Selector Switch Operator Position 1 Operator Action 2 1 X O O O 1 1 O X O O O O X O O O O X M M Contact Type Mounting Location Cam A B Code 1NC M 7 Non-Illuminated Illuminated—120V Transformer Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Black Knob Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 E34VTBK1-23X E34VTBL1-23X E34VRB120TER-23X E34VRB120TFR-23X M 1NO 1NO 1 1NC 1 1 Color Selection, Non-Illuminated Color Code Letter Color Code Letter Black 1 White 5 Red 2 Blue 6 Green 3 Gray 7 1 Yellow 4 Orange 8 1 Notes For Light Unit Voltage Suffix and Knobs, Levers tables, see Page V7-T1-278. 1 Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 1 2 1 3 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. M = Maintained. To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: E34VFBK2-X1. 1 1 V7-T1-272 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Selector Switch Selection 1 1 1 1 Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (two-position, three-position and fourposition) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of “pushbuttons” can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The following systematic approach should simplify that task. Cam and contact block selection is better understood if you: ● ● Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately. Recognize the terms NO and NC only identify the type of contact by its mode before mounting to the operator. The “X-O” chart (Page V7-T1-275) shows how that contact will act after assembly to the operator with the selected cam shape. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. ● ● Up to six NO or NC contacts may be mounted behind each plunger location for a total of twelve contacts. Single circuit contact blocks have only one plunger with the other side of the block “open.” Therefore, single circuit contact blocks transmit motion to blocks behind them only for the position containing the circuit. Each cam has two separate lobes, each of which operates one of the two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are identified as position A (locating nib side) and position B (opposite of locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and mounting of the contact blocks. Contact Circuit Locations Systematic Approach Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this circuit, one incoming line is distributed to two other outgoing circuits by the switch. The two circuits can be looked at individually. Step 1: Elementary Diagram. Construct on paper, or in your mind, a simple elementary diagram of the switching scheme as follows: HAND Incoming Line Outgoing Circuit OFF AUTO Outgoing Circuit Step 2: “X-O” Pattern. From the elementary diagram, you can construct an “X-O” diagram which describes when the contacts are to be closed (X) or open (O) in the various positions of the switch. The “X-O” for the HAND circuit looks like this: 1 For the AUTO circuit, the “X-O” diagram would look like this: 1 HAND OFF AUTO 1 O O X 1 Putting them together, the complete “X-O” diagram is: 1 1 1 XOO OOX 1 Once the “X-O” diagram has been generated, the next step is to select the cam and contact block, or blocks, needed to perform the desired “X-O” functions. The selection tables on the following pages list the various types (shapes) of cams by number to choose from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in your “X-O” diagram. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Locating Nib HAND OFF AUTO 1 A B X O O 1 In this circuit, you want a contact closed on the left (HAND) but open in the center and right. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-273 1.9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram. The selection tables show all the “X-O” combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown on this page. Now to make the cam selection, make a simple worksheet such as: XOO OOX Cam 2 Cam 3 (A)NO-(B)NC (B)NO (A)NO (B)NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 It becomes immediately obvious that cam 3 is the better choice for two reasons, (1) the series combination can be avoided making it simpler to wire, (2) only two contacts are required, which is less expensive than the three contacts required by cam 2. Step 4: Contact Block Selection. Having selected the cam, contact block selection is simply a matter of gathering the A position and B position circuits into pairs which make up the most convenient contact block arrangement. If there is an imbalance in the number of circuits under A or B, then single circuit blocks must be selected for these leftover circuits. Back to the worksheet, having selected cam 3 do this: X O X O O X ANO 1 BNO 10250T2 Step 5: Selector Switch Operator. Lastly, you have to choose from the many types of operators—knob and lever in various colors or keyed. Also what combinations of maintained and spring return functions are required. Selection of these operators can be found on Page V7-T1-276. For the example in step 4, you may want a three-position maintained black knob, cam 3—Catalog Number E34VHBK1. The Complete Switch: E34VHBK1 with one 10250T2 or, for one composite catalog number, E34VHBK1-Y1 found on Page V7-T1-273. Diagrams Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector switch circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate line diagrams. Field wiring of jumper connections required as shown. Example Selection Table No. “X-O” Pattern 1 X O O 4 O O X Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3 Top A Top A Bottom B NO NC — NO — NO NO Two-Position Selector Switch Contact Block Selection Desired Circuit and Operator Position Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function No. 1 Top Plunger A X O NC 2 O Bottom Plunger B or NC X or NO NO Note 1 Wired in series. X = Closed circuit O = Open circuit Wiring of Jumper Connections Series Connection Parallel Connection Four-position selector switches are limited to four contact blocks. Contact Blocks For selection and number of available contact blocks per operator, see Page V7-T1-285. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-274 Bottom B — a Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Three-Position Switch—Cam and Contact Block Selection 1 Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function (Jumpers must be installed where indicated) Desired Circuit and Operator Position No. 1 X 2 O X Operator with Cam Code #2 Operator with Cam Code #3 Mounting Location Mounting Location Top Plunger A Bottom Plunger B Top Plunger A NO NC NO X X 1 Bottom Plunger B 1 O 1 1 O NC 3 1 O NC 1 X 1 NO NO 4 O O X 1 NO 5 O NO X NO 1 X NC NC 6 O X 1 NO O NC NC 1 NC 1 1 Four-Position Switch—Contact Block Selection Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Contact Blocks Required to Accomplish Circuit Function Desired Circuit and Operator Position Mounting Location Top Plunger A No. 1 X O O Bottom Plunger B O Desired Circuit and Operator Position No. 10 X O X 1 Mounting Location 1 Top Plunger A 1 Bottom Plunger B 1 O NC 2 O X O 1 NC NO O NO 3 O O X O 4 O O O X 5 X O O X 6 O X X O 11 X X X 1 O NO NC NO NC 12 NC O O X X 8 X X O O X O NO 1 X 1 1 NC NO NO X O X 1 X 1 NC NO NC NC O X NC 13 NO 9 X NO NO 7 O 1 1 NC NO X 14 NO NC X X O 1 X NC 1 NO NC Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-275 1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Selector Switch Operators UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Two-Position Knob Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled Positions 1 Black Knob Selector Switch— Vertical Mounting 2 Operator Action 1 Two-position—60° throw M M M S 1 1 Three-position—60° throw M 1 M 1 S M M 1 M M S S 1 M M 1 Four-position—40° throw M 1 1 M Catalog Number 4 1 E34VFBK1 1 E34VEBK1 2 E34VGBK1 3 E34VHBK1 2 E34VJBK1 3 E34VKBK1 2 E34VLBK1 3 E34VMBK1 2 E34VNBK1 3 E34VPBK1 7 E34VTBK1 M M Key Operators 1 1 S Cam Code 3 Three-Position Keyed Selector Switch Key Operators with Cam and Cap Positions 1 Operator Action 1 Two-position—60° throw 1 1 M M M S Three-position—60° throw 1 M M M S 1 M S S M Four-position—40° throw 1 M M Horiz. Mounting Catalog Number 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_ 1 2 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_ 2 1–7 E34KGB_ E34KGHB_ 3 S 4 3 2, 4, 6 3 7 M 1, 4, 5 3 2 M 1 Vertical Mounting Catalog Number 2 M 1 Key Removal Positions 5 2 M 1 Cam Code 3 7 E34KHB_ E34KHHB_ E34KJB_ E34KJHB_ E34KKB_ E34KKHB_ E34KLB_ E34KLHB_ E34KMB_ E34KMHB_ E34KNB_ E34KNHB_ E34KPB_ E34KPHB_ E34KTB_ E34KTHB_ M 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 2 3 1 4 1 5 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow (R). Field convertible to horizontal mounting. For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and tables on Pages V7-T1-273 to V7-T1-275. For other colors of either the knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knob and Lever table on Page V7-T1-277. Example: E34VFBL2. Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-277. Add key removal code number to listed catalog number. Example: E34KFB2. 1 1 V7-T1-276 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Key Removal Positions 1 Dissimilar Locks and Keys Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661), Catalog Number 10250ED824. For dissimilar lock and key combinations, see Page V7-T1-212. C L R Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 Right only 2 Left only 3 Right and left 4 Center only 6 Left and center 7 All positions 1.9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E34K_ Knob E34L_ E34A_ 1 Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 2 Lever Lever Designed for Added Ingress Protection 3 1 1 Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number Black K1 E34K1 L1 E34L1 A1 E34A1 Red K2 E34K2 L2 E34L2 A2 E34A2 Green K3 E34K3 L3 E34L3 A3 E34A3 Yellow K4 E34K4 L4 E34L4 A4 E34A4 White K5 E34K5 L5 E34L5 A5 E34A5 Blue K6 E34K6 L6 E34L6 A6 E34A6 Gray K7 E34K7 L7 E34L7 A7 E34A7 Orange K8 E34K8 L8 E34L8 A8 E34A8 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. 2 See operators on Page V7-T1-276. 3 For use on maintained operators only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-277 1.9 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Illuminated Selector Switch Operators 120 Vac Transformer Selector Switch, Cam 1 1 Operator without Knob or Lever Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Positions Operator Action Two-position—60° throw 1 M 1 Three-position—60° throw M M M 1 M M 1 M 1 S M S Four-position—40° throw Catalog Number 4 Cam Code 1 5 Cam Code 1 5 E34VFB_ E34SFB_ Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 E34VGB_ E34VHB_ E34SGB_ E34SHB_ E34VNB_ 6 E34VPB_ 6 E34SNB_ 7 E34SPB_ 7 E34VJB_ 6 E34VKB_ 6 E34SJB_ 7 E34SKB_ 7 E34VLB_ E34VMB_ E34SLB_ E34SMB_ E34VRB_ — E34SRB_ — M 1 1 Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB 2 Catalog Number 34 S M 1 Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 1 6V #755 Lamp S M M M M 1 1 Knob 1 1 Lever 1 1 Knobs and Levers Color 9 Lever Catalog Number and Code Number Red 10250TER 10250TFR Transformer Type 50/60 Hz Green 10250TEG 10250TFG Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA 24 024 6 06 Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL 120 120 12 12 10250TFC 208 208 24 24 240 48 48 Clear 1 Light Unit Voltage Suffix Add to operator Catalog Number listed in table above. Knob Catalog Number and Code Number 10250TEC Type of Light Unit Full Voltage Type AC or DC 1 White 10250TEW 10250TFW 240 Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 380 380 120 120 480 480 240 8 240 600 600 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Pages V7-T1-182 to V7-T1-253. 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 5 1 6 7 1 8 9 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-239. 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators. Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. Add suffix code for light unit voltage to listed catalog number from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above. Example: For 24V transformer type light unit, order E34VFB024. For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection tables on Pages V7-T1-273 to V7-T1-275. 120 and 240V transformer only. 120 full voltage only. Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (R). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (R). 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-278 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Accessories 1 Accessories E34TA2 Description Catalog Number Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators. Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. Will not lock NO contact. E34TA2 1 1 1 1 10250TA_ Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with flush pushbutton operators. Clear 10250TA46 Black 10250TA47 Red 10250TA48 Green 10250TA49 1 1 1 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot for use with button operators (extended buttons preferred). Black Red 10250TA4 1 Green 10250TA10 Clear 10250TA85 Transparent Boot for regular, illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest. E34TA3_ E34TA6 1 10250TA3 1 1 10250TA25 2 1 Special Retaining Nut—to accommodate thick panel. Indicating light E34TA30 PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches E34TA31 1 1 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator—prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.) E34TA6 1 1 E34TA12 Extended Retaining Nut—replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush type pushbutton operators. 1 E34TA12 1 1 E34TA15 Guard for illuminated pushbutton 1 E34TA15 1 1 E34TA11 Padlocking Attachment for non-illuminated knob selector switches— accommodates up to five, 1/4 in padlocks. E34TA11 1 1 1 Notes 1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function. 2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-279 1.9 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Accessories, continued 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Description Catalog Number E34TK3 Thrust Washer—To meet Ford Motor Company mounting specifications. E34TK3 10250TA7_ Contact Block Terminal Jumps—Available in multiples of 100 only. 1 1 1 Terminal to terminal—within block (short): 1 10250TA70 1000 per package 10250TA70-2 Terminal to terminal—block to block (long): 1 1 100 per package 10250TMT8 1 100 per package 10250TA71 1000 per package 10250TA71-2 Master Test (Dual Input) Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices. 48 Vdc 10250TMT8 1 1 1 10250TFL_ 1 Flasher Module—Internal Form C relay suitable for AC applications. One unit required for each operator in master test circuit. 24 Vac 10250TFL2 120 Vac 10250TFL1 1 1 E22CW Panel Mounting Nut Wrench—E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T. E22CW 10250TA101 Fingerproof Shroud—10 per package Fits new style contact blocks and light units. 10250TA101 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-280 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Options 1 Legend Plates 1 1 Field Color Legend plates can be supplied printed on black, red, silver or white field. To order legend printed on a color other than indicated—add Standard suffix code to the end of the catalog number as follows: 1 Example: E34SP26R— Standard plate with red field marked OPEN. “R” for Red field; “W” for White field; or “S” for Silver field. 1 1 1 For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights Color of Field Legend Standard 2 Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Legend Color of Field Standard 2 Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number 1 Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High CLAMP Black CLOSE Jumbo DOWN 1 E34SP90 E34LP90 OFF Red E34SP24 E34LP24 E34SP73 E34LP73 ON Black E34SP25 E34LP25 E34SP74 E34LP74 OPEN E34SP26 E34LP26 EMERG. STOP Red E34SP13 E34LP13 OUT E34SP27 E34LP27 FAST Black E34SP75 E34LP75 POWER ON E34SP80 E34LP80 FASTER E34SP87 E34LP87 RAISE E34SP28 E34LP28 FEEDER ON E34SP94 E34LP94 READY E34SP86 E34LP86 FEEDER OFF E34SP95 E34LP95 RESET E34SP29 E34LP29 FORWARD E34SP15 E34LP15 REVERSE E34SP30 E34LP30 HIGH E34SP16 E34LP16 RUN E34SP31 E34LP31 IN E34SP17 E34LP17 SAFE E34SP85 E34LP85 INCH E34SP18 E34LP18 SLOW E34SP32 E34LP32 JOG E34SP19 E34LP19 SLOWER E34SP88 E34LP88 JOG FOR. E34SP20 E34LP20 START E34SP33 E34LP33 JOG REV. E34SP21 E34LP21 STOP Red E34SP34 E34LP34 LOW E34SP22 E34LP22 TEST Black E34SP83 E34LP83 LOWER E34SP23 E34LP23 TRANSFER E34SP93 E34LP93 LUBE-FAIL E34SP92 E34LP92 TRIP E34SP84 E34LP84 MOTOR RUN E34SP81 E34LP81 UNCLAMP E34SP91 E34LP91 MOTOR STOP E34SP82 E34LP82 UP E34SP35 E34LP35 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square 3 Color Field Lettering Side 1 Side 2 Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Extra Large Catalog Number 1 1 Black White Silver 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76 White Red Black 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77 1 Notes 1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-258. 2 3/32 in high lettering. 3 Legend plates with non-standard markings or aluminum legend plates see 10250T listing on Page V7-T1-232. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-281 1.9 1 Standard Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 For Selector Switch Operators Legend 1 Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering 1 Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering E34LP38 AUTO OFF HAND E34SP49 E34LP49 HAND AUTO E34SP39 E34LP39 FOR. OFF REV. E34SP50 E34LP50 HIGH LOW E34SP40 E34LP40 FOR. SAFE REV. E34SP69 E34LP69 JOG RUN E34SP41 E34LP41 HAND OFF AUTO E34SP51 E34LP51 MAN. AUTO E34SP67 E34LP67 MAN. OFF AUTO E34SP68 E34LP68 1 OFF ON E34SP42 E34LP42 OPEN OFF CLOSE E34SP53 E34LP53 OPEN CLOSE E34SP43 E34LP43 RUN SAFE JOG E34SP70 E34LP70 1 RUN JOG E34SP44 E34LP44 UP OFF DOWN E34SP54 E34LP54 SAFE RUN E34SP45 E34LP45 ON STOP SAFE E34SP71 E34LP71 START JOG E34SP46 E34LP46 START STOP E34SP47 E34LP47 UP DOWN E34SP48 E34LP48 Jumbo 1 1 1 Black Color of Field E34SP38 1 FOR. REV. Legend Black 1 For Push-Pull Units 1 Color of Field Standard 1 Catalog Number Jumbo 2 Catalog Number PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black E34PP5 E34R5 PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black E34PP8 E34R8 PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black E34PP11 E34R11 Legend 1 1 1 Notes 1 3/32 in (2.4 mm) high lettering. 2 1/8 in (3.2 mm) high lettering. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-282 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Enclosures 1 Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 1 Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1 Number of Elements 1 Two Contact Block Depth Catalog Number 1 Die Cast Enclosure—In-Line 23 NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 Die Cast Enclosure 1 Polyester Enclosure Stainless Steel Enclosure One Contact Block Depth Catalog Number E34N1 E34N11 2 E34N2 E34N12 3 E34N3 E34N13 4 — E34N14 1 1 1 Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1 — E34N51 2 — E34N52 3 — E34N53 4 — E34N54 1 1 1 Stainless Steel 4—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12 1 — 10250TN33 2 — 10250TN34 3 — 10250TN35 4 — 10250TN36 1 1 1 1 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-292. 1 1 Mounting Instructions One and Two Contact Block Depth Enclosures Enclosure Layouts 1 Top – For Vertical Mounting 1 1 One Contact Block Depth Enclosure 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 Two Contact Block Depth Enclosure 4 Top – For Horizontal Mounting These E34 Die Cast Enclosures feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to finish on the E34 operators except gray in color. Not for use in ultraviolet light applications. 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-284. 2 All die cast enclosures can be converted to base mounting of contact blocks with spacers 10250TA22 or 10250TA23. See listing on Page V7-T1-227. 3 When used with E30 pushbuttons, only the one element enclosure can be used. 4 14 gauge, type 304. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-283 1.9 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Die Cast and Stainless Steel—Flush Mount, Covers Only 1 Flush Mounting Covers Covers Only—Flush Mounting Number of Elements 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 In-Line Flat Cover 1 E34F11 E34F1 2 E34F12 E34F2 3 E34F13 E34F3 4 E34F14 E34F4 With Pullbox Without Pullbox 1 10250TS10 10250TS1 2 10250TS11 10250TS2 3 10250TS12 10250TS3 4 10250TS14 10250TS4 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-293. 1 1 In-Line Deep Cover In-Line Stainless Steel Flush Plates 2 1 1 Catalog Number Flush Die Cast Covers 1 1 Catalog Number Spacing Increments Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Type F G H Die cast 2.44 (62.0) 2.5 (63.5) 1.88 (47.8) Polyester 1.88 (47.8) Min. 2.13 (54.1) 2.25 (57.2) Stainless steel 1.69 (42.9) Min. 1.73 (43.9) 2.25 (57.2) 1 1 Spacing Increments for Enclosures Top – For Vertical Mounting G 1 H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 F Top – For Horizontal Mounting 1 1 Enclosure Layouts Notes 1 These E34 die cast covers feature a corrosion resistant coating identical to the finish on the E34 operators except gray in color. 2 Not oiltight. NEMA 1 applications only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-284 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Contact Blocks Standard Contact Blocks ● UL A600/P600 rated ● Color-coded plungers—red/ green for NC/NO circuits ● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” ● Black (opaque) or amber (translucent) housings ● Pressure plate or spade terminals ● Fingerproof shrouds (for pressure terminals only) Logic Level Contact Blocks ● UL A600/P600 rated ● Black plungers ● Inert palladium knife-blade contacts ● Black (opaque) housings ● Pressure plate or spade terminals ● Fingerproof shrouds not available 1 Special Purpose Contact Block ● Maximum 300V rated ● Black plungers ● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” ● Black (opaque) housings ● Pressure plate terminals only ● Fingerproof shrouds not available Reliability Nibs Reliability nibs are the hallmark of Eaton’s contact blocks. A pointed silver nib on the contact tip ensures reliable switching from logic level (5V) up to 600V applications. Therefore standard contact blocks can be used for most logic level applications where the contacts are not exposed to any harsh environmental conditions. Palladium Contacts Palladium, which is more inert than gold, is well suited for voltages and currents approaching zero and is recommended for applications where environmental conditions are a factor. 1 1 1 1 1 Maximum Contact Block Mounting per Operator Type 1 Operator Max. Stack Pushbuttons 6 Push-pull operators 2 Roto-push operators 4 Two- or three-position selector switches 6 1 Four-position selector switches 4 1 Joysticks 4 1 1 1 1 Special Function Contact Blocks ● UL A600/P600 rated ● Black plungers ● Silver contact tips with “reliability nibs” ● Black (opaque) housings ● Pressure plate terminals only ● Fingerproof shrouds not available 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-285 1.9 1 10250T1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Contact Blocks Standard 1 Symbol Circuit Description 1 Logic Level Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number Pressure Terminal Catalog Number Spade Terminal 2 Catalog Number 1 Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51 10250T59 10250T51E 10250T59E 1 Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53 10250T60 10250T53E 10250T60E NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1 10250T40 10250T1E 10250T40E 2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3 10250T42 10250T3E 10250T42E 2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2 10250T41 10250T2E 10250T41E 1 1 1 Special Function Blocks 3 1 LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71 3 — 10250T71E 3 — ECNONC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47 34 — 10250T47E 3 — 1 ECNONO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57 34 — 10250T57E 3 — 1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45 3 — 10250T45E 3 — LONCECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to 10250T55 34 four blocks unless otherwise noted. — 10250T55E 3 — Blank No Plunger 1 1 1 1 Special Purpose Blocks 5 1 2NO2NC 1 Four circuits in single block depth. Rated 300V max. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T44 5 — Notes 1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. 2 Contact blocks with spade terminals are limited to a maximum of one contact block per operator and minimum spacing between devices is 2.5 in (63.5 mm). Not suitable for use in 10250T or E34 enclosures. Also available in amber housing. Not available with fingerproof shrouds. 3 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches. 4 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 5 Special purpose 10250T44 contact blocks are not suitable on selector switches or roto-push operators. Okay to use with three-position push-pull operators only on low voltage (30V or less) circuits. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-286 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 10250T1CP Contact Blocks with Fingerproof Shrouds Circuit Description 1 Standard Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number Blank No Plunger 1NC Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T51P 10250T51EP Blank No Plunger 1NO Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T53P 10250T53EP NO-NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T1P 10250T1EP 2NC Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T3P 10250T3EP 2NO Stack up to six blocks (12 circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T2P 10250T2EP Symbol Logic Level Pressure Terminal 2 Catalog Number 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Special Function Blocks 3 Blank No Plunger LONC Late opening NC. Stack up to six blocks (six circuits) unless otherwise noted. 10250T71P 4 10250T71EP 4 1 ECNO-NC Early closing NO and standard NC. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T47P 34 10250T47EP 4 1 ECNO-NO Early closing NO and standard NO. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T57P 34 10250T57EP 4 1 10250T45EP 4 1 10250T55EP 4 1 2LONC Two late opening NC contacts. Stack up to six blocks unless otherwise noted. LONC-ECNO Overlapping contacts. Stack up to four blocks unless otherwise noted. 10250T45P 4 10250T55P 34 1 Replacement Parts 1 Replacement Lamps—For E34 Illuminated Operators Mfg. Lamp Type Voltage Base Style Application Part Number 120MB 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor indicating light 28-3044 #267 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T flasher 10250ED986-4 #755 6.3V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T transformer, PresTest and full voltage 28-2202 #756 12V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5184 #757 24V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5185 #1828 32V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T full voltage 28-5186 #1835 55V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T resistor 28-5187 NE48 120V T 4-1/2 bayonet 10250T neon 28-494 NE51H-R22 120V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3754 NE51H-R68 240V T 3-1/4 bayonet 10250T neon 28-3755 Notes 1 All 10250T contact blocks shown are suitable for use on standard 10250T and E34 operators. These contact blocks are not suitable for Class I Division 2 type 10250T or E34 devices. 2 To order contact blocks with translucent amber housing, change suffix P to CP in catalog number, e.g., 10250T51CP. 3 ECNO contact blocks are not suitable for use with two-position joysticks or when operators are used with padlock attachments. 4 Special function contact blocks are not suitable for use with roto-push operators, three-position push-pull operators, or four-position selector switches. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-287 1.9 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1 1 1 1 1 1 Flush Head Pushbutton Operator Mushroom Head Pushbutton Operator Jumbo Mushroom Head Operator Potentiometers Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Transformer Type Indicating Light Knob-Operated Selector Switch Operator Full Voltage, Resistor and Transformer Type Illuminated Selector Switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E34 Style Operator Replacement Parts Item No. Description No. Req. Part Number Item No. 1 Gasket 1 16-1548 2 Mounting nut 1 15-1530-4 3 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) 2 11-2014 4 Mushroom head button (includes [2] item 5) 1 As Req. Below Black 1 Red 1 1 6 1 1 1 53-1317-3 Green — 53-1317-4 Set screw (#10-32 x 0.250 in long hollow hex) Jumbo mushroom head button (aluminum—includes [2] item 5) 8 2 1 Part Number 12 Mounting screw 2 11-1632 13 Simple potentiometer (does not include items 18, 28 or 29) 1 As Req. Below 1,000 ohms — 41-782-2 2,500 ohms — 41-782-3 5,000 ohms — 41-782-10 10,000 ohms — 41-782-4 25,000 ohms — 41-782-5 50,000 ohms — 41-782-6 53-1317-2 — — No. Req. 53-1317 Yellow 53-1317-22 11-544 As Req. Below 14 Connector (includes screw and lug) 2 25-1851 15 Indicating plate 1 As Req. Above Standard size (without legend) — 30-4460 Large size (specify legend) — 10250TR30 Red — 53-1317-9 Black — 53-1317-10 16 Retaining nut 1 15-1547-3 Yellow — 53-1317-11 17 Knob 1 53-1314 Green 7 1 1 — Blue 5 1 — Description Jumbo mushroom head button (aluminum—red EMERG. STOP) does not include item 5 Mounting screw (#6-32 x 0.710 in long) Washer — 53-1317-12 Socket set screw (#6-32 x 0.250 in long) 1 11-2014 1 53-1349-18 18 Coupling 1 11-2014 10250TA79 19 Set screw (#6-32 x 0.188 in long) 1 11-1199 20 Spacer 2 56-1066-18 80-5502 21 Connector (includes screw and lug) 1 25-1851-2 22 Mounting nut 1 15-1938-2 29-3749-2 2 2 Terminal screw and lug (captive) Req. 16-2038 1 9 10 Gasket (supplied with basic unit) 1 32-803 1 11 Round head screw (#4-40 x 0.344 in long) (supplied with basic unit) 2 11-4553 1 1 V7-T1-288 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Mechanical Ratings Description 1 Specification 1 Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr. Auto-latch devices 1200 operations/hr. 1 1 1 Life Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations Contact blocks 10 x 106 operations PresTest units 10 x 106 operations Lever and key selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations Twist to release pushbuttons 0.3 x 106 operations 1 1 Shock Resistance 1 210 ms >5g Duration 1 General Specifications Description 1 Specification 1 Climate Conditions Operating temperature 1° to 150°F (–17° to 66°C) Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m) Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C 1 1 1 Terminals Marking NC-NO on the contact block to meet the NEMA requirements. Dual marking system 1–2 for normally closed, 3–4 for normally open to meet BS5472 (Cenelec EN50 005). Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (2.5 mm2) conductors Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1 Will withstand short-circuit for 1 hour per IEC 60947-5-1 1 Transformer type 20,000 hrs. 1 Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated V LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. 1 1 Light Units Transformers Bulbs—average life: 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-289 1.9 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Electrical Ratings Description Specification Insulation Ui = 660 Vac or Vdc Thermal Ith = 10A Short Circuit Coordination to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Rated conditional short circuit current 1 kA Fuse type GE power controls TIA 10, red spot type gG, 10A, 660 Vac, 460 Vdc, BS88-2, IEC 60269-2-1 UL rating A600, P600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 AC load life duty cycle 1200 operations/hour 10A 110V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations 5A 250V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations 2A 600V pf 0.4—1 x 106 operations Switching capacity AC 15 rated make/break (11 x le at 1.1 x Ue) 6A 120V pf 0.3 4A 240V pf 0.3 2A 660V pf 0.3 DC13 rated make/break (1.1 x le at 1.1 x Ue) 1 1.0A 125V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms 0.55A 250V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms 1 0.1A 660V L/R >0.95 at 300 ms 10A 110V pure resistive 1 1 1 Maximum ratings for logic level and hostile atmosphere application Maximum amperes 0.5A Maximum volts 120 Vac/Vdc Low voltage switching Conical shaped points or “reliability nibs” improve performance in dry circuit, corrosive, fine dust and other contaminated atmospheres. Under normal environmental conditions, the minimum operational voltage is 5V and the minimum operational current is 1 mA, Vac/Vdc. Contact operation Slow make and break. All normally closed contacts have positive opening operation, i.e., normally closed contacts are forced open in the event of contact weld or spring breakage. 1 1 1 1 Electrical Ratings—Contact Block 1 Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC 1 Description 1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 5.7 1.1 0.55 Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 5.7 1.1 0.55 Thermal current (amp) 10 10 10 10 5.0 5.0 5.0 1 1 1 50 Vac or 60 H 120 240 Vdc 480 600 24/28 125 250 Meet or Exceed NEMA Rating Designations A600, A300 and B300 for AC and P600 for DC Voltamperes: Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 138 138 Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-290 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Mounting Options 1 Panel Thickness ● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) ● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate ● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut ● Indicating light: 10250TA30 ● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31 1 1 1 1 Mounting Matrix 1 Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 1.63 (41.3) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.63 (41.3) Medium 1.75 (44.5) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1.75 (44.5) Large 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 1 1 1 1 Mounting Options in Inches (mm) Terminals on Top 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 1 0.6 (15.2) D Min. 1 B Min. A Min. C Min. 1 1.22 (31) 1 Terminals at Side Horizontal Mounting 1 Vertical Mounting 1 Horizontal mounting means terminals are located top and bottom of contact block. Vertical mounting means terminals are left and right of contact block. This allows close spacing of adjacent operators with easy access to terminals. 1 Locating nib hole or notch is 0.14 in (3.6 mm) #29 drill. 1 1 Drilling Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.14 (3.6) Dia. 1 0.6 (15.2) 1 1 1.20 (30.5) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-291 1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Potentiometer Legend Plates Large Dial Plate 1.88 (47.8) 1 1.09 1.0 (27.7) (25.4) Std. Dial Plate 1 1.31 (33.3) 0.94 (23.9) 0.94 (23.9) 0.75 (19.1) 1 1 1 1 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) 0.94 (23.9) 1 1 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) Jumbo Standard Surface Mounting Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 1 1 E B 1 1 D A 1 1 1 C Surface Number of Elements Element Arrangement Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E Conduit Entrance In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 3/4 Die Cast 1 1 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3) 1 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 1 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6) 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1 Polyester 1 1 2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 1 3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1) 4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3) 1 1 1 1 1 1 In-line 2 Stainless Steel 1 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 2 In-line 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5) 3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6) 4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8) 2 Notes 1 Depth given is for two contact block deep stations. One contact block deep stations subtract 3/4 in (19.1 mm). 2 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. 1 1 V7-T1-292 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Flush Mounting 1 Die Case and Stainless Steel Covers Only 1 4 Mtg. Holes - 10-32 Screw Size for 1-11 Element Encl, 1/4-20 Screw Size for 12 Element and Larger 1 1 E 1 B 1 1 D C A Surface or Pendant 1 1 Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E 1 1 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 3.63 (92.2) 1 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 5.50 (139.7) 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 6.00 (152.4) 4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 0.25 (6.4) 1 3.50 (88.9) 9.25 (235.0) 1 5.00 (127.0) 5.00 (127.0) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 1.88 (47.8) 2 3.25 (82.6) 3.63 (92.2) 1 Number of Elements Die Cast 1 Stainless Steel 1 2 5.00 (127.0) 6.88 (174.8) 2.50 (63.5) 3 5.00 (127.0) 8.63 (219.2) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 5.50 (139.7) 4 5.00 (127.0) 10.50 (266.7) 2.50 (63.5) 2 3.25 (82.6) 7.25 (184.2) 1 1 Notes 1 Depth given is for flat cover. Deep cover is 3/4 in (19.1 mm) deeper. 2 Depth given includes pull box. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-293 1.9 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Padlocking Attachment for Flush Pushbutton Operators 0.84 (21.3) 0.75 (19.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1.63 (41.4) 1 1 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot 1 1.47 (37.3) 1.59 (40.4) 1 Transparent Boot 1 1.92 (48.8) 1.31 (33.3) 1.14 (29) 1.06 (26.9) 1.53 (38.9) 0.88 (22.4) Contact Blk. Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) Extended Pushbutton 1.44 (36.6) Extended Retaining Nut 0.88 (22.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.38 (35.1) 1.31 (33.3) Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.50 (38.1) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.09 (27.7) Half Shroud Pushbutton 1.44 (36.6) 1 1.63 (41.4) 1 1.50 (38.1) 1 1.78 (45.2) 0.88 (22.4) Contact Blk. Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1 1.78 (45.2) 1.59 (40.4) 1 1 Master Test Module and Flasher Module Flush Pushbutton 1 1 0.86 (21.8) 6 Mounting Holes 1 1 0.45 (11.4) 1.63 (41.4) 1 1 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 1 1 Contact Block Terminal Jumps 1.38 (35.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-294 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight—E34 1.9 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1.63 (41.4) 1.09 (27.7) 0.88 (22.4) 1.50 (38.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.78 (45.2) Contact Blk. 1 1.58 (40.1) Knob 1 1 Contact Block 1.75 (44.5) 1 Selector Switch Each Additional Contact Block Each Addl. Contact Blk. 2.50 (63.5) 1.09 (27.7) 1 1.13 (28.7) Jumbo Mushroom Pushbutton 0.88 (22.4) 1 1.38 (35.1) 1.09 (27.7) 1.78 (45.2) 1 0.69 (17.5) Light Unit Contact Blk. Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) 1 Illuminated Pushbutton Mushroom Pushbutton 1 1 Push-Pull Switch 0.88 (22.4) 0.88 (22.4) 0.06 (1.5) to 0.25 (6.4) Panel Thickness 0.25 (6.4) 1.78 (45.2) 1.09 (27.7) 1 1 Key Selector Switch 1 1 1 0.88 1.09 (22.4) (27.7) Indicating Light 1.78 (45.2) 1 1.58 (40.1) Lever Contact Block 2.63 (66.8) 1.65 (41.9) 1.13 (28.7) Each Addl. Contact Blk. Contact Light Block Unit 0.88 (22.4) 1.5 (38.1) 1 1.58 (40.1) to Remove Key 1.38 (35.1) 1 1 1.1 (27.9) 1.38 (35.1) Illuminated Selector Switch PresTest Indicating Light 0.69 (17.5) 1.38 (35.1) 1.13 (28.7) 1 1 Light Unit Contact Blk. Each Addl. Contact Blk. 1.78 (45.2) 1.09 (27.7) Each Additional Contact Block 1.9 (48.3) 1 1.58 (40.1) Knob 1 1 0.88 (22.4) 1.09 (27.7) 1.58 (40.1) Lever 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-295 1.10 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Contents 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Description 1 Page 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Contact Block Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-297 V7-T1-298 V7-T1-300 V7-T1-302 V7-T1-304 V7-T1-306 V7-T1-307 V7-T1-308 V7-T1-310 V7-T1-311 V7-T1-312 V7-T1-315 V7-T1-316 V7-T1-317 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description Features The HT800 Series from Eaton’s Electrical Sector is a family of 30.5 mm pushbutton devices which includes momentary, illuminated and mushroom head pushbuttons, selector switches, indicating lights and push-pull switches. The HT800 devices have a familiar appearance found in most industrial applications and are suitable for replacement of several other manufacturers’ 30.5 mm pushbutton devices. ● 1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 1 ● 1 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 ● 1 Anodized aluminum mounting rings Watertight double V-gasket seals Extended height bulbs Transparent housing contact blocks Color-coded contact blocks Gold-plated contacts (on low voltage contact block) Reliability ridge on movable contact Stackable screw-mounted contact blocks Contact blocks can be mounted in left/right or top/ bottom positions Standard NC contact opens before NO contact closes (break before make operation) Bright and long lasting LED indicating lights in six colors Field convertible maintained selector switches—from two- to three-position and vice versa Field selectable knob/lever mounting positions—at any 22.5° increment Benefits ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Corrosion resistant NEMA 4X finish Watertight and oiltight NEMA 4, 13 ingress protection Increased side illumination of indicating lights and illuminated pushbuttons Easy visual inspection of contact conditions Easily identifiable NO (white) or NC (black) contact blocks Gold-plated contacts suitable for logic level circuits Reliability ridge penetrates contamination buildup on stationary contacts Left/right or top/bottom mounted contact blocks allow correct positioning in retrofit applications All-purpose selector switches are convertible and can rotate in 22.5° increments to suit panel layouts Standards and Certifications ● ● UL508 per File No. E131568 CSA C22.2 No. 14 per File No. LR68551 Ingress Protection ● UL (NEMA) Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 when mounted in similarly rated enclosures 1 V7-T1-296 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Catalog Number Selection 1 Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 HT800 Pushbuttons, Push-Pulls and Indicating Lights 1 HT8 GB R AB T1 1 Style Pushbuttons AA = Flush AB = Extended AE = Mushroom head Illuminated Pushbuttons GB = Illuminated PB Push-Pull Operators CB = Two-position, maintained Indicating Lights HF = Full voltage/resistor type HB = Transformer type Push-to-Test Operators GT = All types G H R A B C G R W Y Button Color = Green = Black = Red Lens Color = Amber/Orange = Blue = Clear = Green = Red = White = Yellow A A2 B1 B2 C C2 D1 D2 E1 F1 F4 Contact Block Location (viewed from rear) 1 Left Side Right Side = NO A5 = NO = 2NO A6 = 2NO = NC B = NC = 2NC B6 = 2NC = NOEM C5 = NOEM = 2 NOEM C6 = 2 NOEM = NCLB D = NCLB = 2NCLB D6 = 2NCLB = NOEM-NCLB E5 = NOEM-NCLB = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC = 1NO-1NC F3 F7 L1 T1 V3 V7 1 Light Unit Type/Voltage = 24V FV, LED = 120V FV, LED = 120V transformer, LED = 120V transformer, incandescent = 24V FV, incandescent = 120V res., incandescent 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HT800 Selector Switch 1 HT8 JA H 3A F1Q1 JA JB JC JD JE JF JK JL JN JP JR JS JU JV JX JY LN LP LR LS Operator = Two-pos., knob, maint. = Three-pos., knob, maint. = Four-pos., knob, maint. = Two-pos., lever, maint. = Three-pos., lever, maint. = Four-pos., lever, maint. = Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left = Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left = Two-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right = Two-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., left = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., left = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., right = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., right = Three-pos., knob, spr. rtn., both = Three-pos., lever, spr. rtn., both = Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2 = Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 1 to 2 = Four-pos., knob, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3 = Four-pos., lever, spr. rtn., pos 4 to 3 Switch Color H = Black Cam Location/Type 1D = For all three-pos. 3A = For all two-pos. 8E = For all four-pos. 1 A A2 B1 B2 C C2 D1 D2 E1 F1 F4 1 Contact Block Location (viewed from rear) 2 Left Side Right Side = NO A5 = NO = 2NO A6 = 2NO = NC B = NC = 2NC B6 = 2NC = NOEM C5 = NOEM = 2 NOEM C6 = 2 NOEM = NCLB D = NCLB = 2NCLB D6 = 2NCLB = NOEM-NCLB E5 = NOEM-NCLB = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC = 1NO-1NC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended. 2 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contacts blocks recommended. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-297 1.10 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Flush, extended or 40 mm mushroom head operators 1 ● 1 HT800 Pushbuttons HT800 Pushbuttons—Point-of-Purchase Units Description Catalog Number 1 Two-position maintained selector switch 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: OFF ON, MAN. AUTO, UP DOWN HT8JAH3AAB-POP 1 Three-position maintained selector switch, black knob, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: HAND OFF AUTO, FOR. OFF REV., OPEN OFF CLOSE HT8JBH1DAB-POP 1 Three-position selector switch, spring return from left and right, black knob, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: UP OFF DOWN, FOR OFF REV., OPEN OFF CLOSE HT8JXH1DAB-POP Red push-pull emergency stop, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF HT8CBRAB-POP Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 120V full voltage low profile LED, three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF HT8FBRABFL7-POP Illuminated push-pull maintained red pushbutton, 24V full voltage low profile LED, three square legend plates: STOP, EMERG. STOP, OFF HT8FBRABFL3-POP Green flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN HT8AAGAB-POP 1 Black flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: RESET, JOG, OPEN HT8AAHAB-POP 1 Red flush pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: STOP, CLOSE, OFF HT8AARAB-POP 1 Red extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: STOP, CLOSE, OFF HT8ABRAB-POP 1 Black extended pushbutton, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: RESET, JOG, OPEN HT8ABHAB-POP 1 Illuminated green pushbutton, 120V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN HT8GBGABV7-POP 1 Illuminated green pushbutton, 24V full voltage incandescent, 1NO/1NC contact block, three square legend plates: START, ON, RUN HT8GBGABV3-POP 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-298 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Flush Head Operator Extended Head Operator Momentary Contact Pushbutton Units, Non-Illuminated Contact Type Button Color Flush Head Catalog Number Extended Head Catalog Number Mushroom Head (40 mm) Catalog Number No contact Black HT8AAH HT8ABH HT8AEH Red HT8AAR HT8ABR HT8AER Green HT8AAG HT8ABG HT8AEG Black HT8AAHA HT8ABHA HT8AEHA Red HT8AARA HT8ABRA HT8AERA 1NO 1NC 40 mm Mushroom Head Operator 1.10 1NO-1NC 2NO-2NC Green HT8AAGA HT8ABGA HT8AEGA Black HT8AAHB HT8ABHB HT8AEHB Red HT8AARB HT8ABRB HT8AERB Green HT8AAGB HT8ABGB HT8AEGB Black HT8AAHAB HT8ABHAB HT8AEHAB Red HT8AARAB HT8ABRAB HT8AERAB Green HT8AAGAB HT8ABGAB HT8AEGAB Black HT8AAHF1Q1 HT8ABHF1Q1 HT8AEHF1Q1 Red HT8AARF1Q1 HT8ABRF1Q1 HT8AERF1Q1 Green HT8AAGF1Q1 HT8ABGF1Q1 HT8AEGF1Q1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-299 1.10 1 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Illuminated Pushbutton Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Incandescent or LED Full voltage or transformer type 24V and 120V Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Illuminated Pushbuttons Lens Color Operator Only Catalog Number 1NO Catalog Number 1NC Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Catalog Number 2NO-2NC Catalog Number No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — — Red HT8GBRV7 HT8GBRAV7 HT8GBRBV7 HT8GBRABV7 HT8GBRF1Q1V7 Green HT8GBGV7 HT8GBGAV7 HT8GBGBV7 HT8GBGABV7 HT8GBGF1Q1V7 1 Amber HT8GBAV7 HT8GBAAV7 HT8GBABV7 HT8GBAABV7 HT8GBAF1Q1V7 Clear HT8GBCV7 HT8GBCAV7 HT8GBCBV7 HT8GBCABV7 HT8GBCF1Q1V7 1 White HT8GBWV7 HT8GBWAV7 HT8GBWBV7 HT8GBWABV7 HT8GBWF1Q1V7 Yellow HT8GBYV7 HT8GBYAV7 HT8GBYBV7 HT8GBYABV7 HT8GBYF1Q1V7 Blue HT8GBBV7 HT8GBBAV7 HT8GBBBV7 HT8GBBABV7 HT8GBBF1Q1V7 No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — — Red HT8GBRV3 HT8GBRAV3 HT8GBRBV3 HT8GBRABV3 HT8GBRF1Q1V3 Green HT8GBGV3 HT8GBGAV3 HT8GBGBV3 HT8GBGABV3 HT8GBGF1Q1V3 Amber HT8GBAV3 HT8GBAAV3 HT8GBABV3 HT8GBAABV3 HT8GBAF1Q1V3 Clear HT8GBCV3 HT8GBCAV3 HT8GBCBV3 HT8GBCABV3 HT8GBCF1Q1V3 White HT8GBWV3 HT8GBWAV3 HT8GBWBV3 HT8GBWABV3 HT8GBWF1Q1V3 Yellow HT8GBYV3 HT8GBYAV3 HT8GBYBV3 HT8GBYABV3 HT8GBYF1Q1V3 Blue HT8GBBV3 HT8GBBAV3 HT8GBBBV3 HT8GBBABV3 HT8GBBF1Q1V3 No lens 1 HT8GBT1 — — — — Red HT8GBRT1 HT8GBRAT1 HT8GBRBT1 HT8GBRABT1 HT8GBRF1Q1T1 Green HT8GBGT1 HT8GBGAT1 HT8GBGBT1 HT8GBGABT1 HT8GBGF1Q1T1 Amber HT8GBAT1 HT8GBAAT1 HT8GBABT1 HT8GBAABT1 HT8GBAF1Q1T1 Clear HT8GBCT1 HT8GBCAT1 HT8GBCBT1 HT8GBCABT1 HT8GBCF1Q1T1 White HT8GBWT1 HT8GBWAT1 HT8GBWBT1 HT8GBWABT1 HT8GBWF1Q1T1 Yellow HT8GBYT1 HT8GBYAT1 HT8GBYBT1 HT8GBYABT1 HT8GBYF1Q1T1 Blue HT8GBBT1 HT8GBBAT1 HT8GBBBT1 HT8GBBABT1 HT8GBBF1Q1T1 1 Type Volts Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 Transformer 1 1 1 1 1 120 Vac Note 1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-300 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Illuminated Pushbutton Operator 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued Type Volts Lens Color Operator Only Catalog Number 1NO Catalog Number 1NC Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Catalog Number 2NO-2NC Catalog Number 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — — Red HT8GBRF7 HT8GBRAF7 HT8GBRBF7 HT8GBRABF7 HT8GBRF1Q1F7 Green HT8GBGF7 HT8GBGAF7 HT8GBGBF7 HT8GBGABF7 HT8GBGF1Q1F7 Amber HT8GBAF7 HT8GBAAF7 HT8GBABF7 HT8GBAABF7 HT8GBAF1Q1F7 Clear HT8GBCF7 HT8GBCAF7 HT8GBCBF7 HT8GBCABF7 HT8GBCF1Q1F7 White HT8GBWF7 HT8GBWAF7 HT8GBWBF7 HT8GBWABF7 HT8GBWF1Q1F7 Yellow HT8GBYF7 HT8GBYAF7 HT8GBYBF7 HT8GBYABF7 HT8GBYF1Q1F7 Blue HT8GBBF7 HT8GBBAF7 HT8GBBBF7 HT8GBBABF7 HT8GBBF1Q1F7 No lens 1 HT8GBFV — — — — Red HT8GBRF3 HT8GBRAF3 HT8GBRBF3 HT8GBRABF3 HT8GBRF1Q1F3 Green HT8GBGF3 HT8GBGAF3 HT8GBGBF3 HT8GBGABF3 HT8GBGF1Q1F3 Amber HT8GBAF3 HT8GBAAF3 HT8GBABF3 HT8GBAABF3 HT8GBAF1Q1F3 Clear HT8GBCF3 HT8GBCAF3 HT8GBCBF3 HT8GBCABF3 HT8GBCF1Q1F3 White HT8GBWF3 HT8GBWAF3 HT8GBWBF3 HT8GBWABF3 HT8GBWF1Q1F3 Yellow HT8GBYF3 HT8GBYAF3 HT8GBYBF3 HT8GBYABF3 HT8GBYF1Q1F3 Blue HT8GBBF3 HT8GBBAF3 HT8GBBBF3 HT8GBBABF3 HT8GBBF1Q1F3 No lens 1 HT8GBT1 — — — — Red HT8GBRL1 HT8GBRAL1 HT8GBRBL1 HT8GBRABL1 HT8GBRF1Q1L1 Green HT8GBGL1 HT8GBGAL1 HT8GBGBL1 HT8GBGABL1 HT8GBGF1Q1L1 Amber HT8GBAL1 HT8GBAAL1 HT8GBABL1 HT8GBAABL1 HT8GBAF1Q1L1 Clear HT8GBCL1 HT8GBCAL1 HT8GBCBL1 HT8GBCABL1 HT8GBCF1Q1L1 White HT8GBWL1 HT8GBWAL1 HT8GBWBL1 HT8GBWABL1 HT8GBWF1Q1L1 Yellow HT8GBYL1 HT8GBYAL1 HT8GBYBL1 HT8GBYABL1 HT8GBYF1Q1L1 Blue HT8GBBL1 HT8GBBAL1 HT8GBBBL1 HT8GBBABL1 HT8GBBF1Q1L1 1 LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Transformer 1 120 Vac 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-301 1.10 1 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Incandescent or LED Full voltage or transformer type 24V and 120V Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Operator Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons Lens Color Operator Only Catalog Number 1NO Catalog Number 1NC Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Catalog Number 2NO-2NC Catalog Number No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — — Red HT8GDRV7 HT8GDRAV7 HT8GDRBV7 HT8GDRABV7 HT8GDRF1Q1V7 Green HT8GDGV7 HT8GDGAV7 HT8GDGBV7 HT8GDGABV7 HT8GDGF1Q1V7 1 Amber HT8GDAV7 HT8GDAAV7 HT8GDABV7 HT8GDAABV7 HT8GDAF1Q1V7 Clear HT8GDCV7 HT8GDVAV7 HT8GDCBV7 HT8GDCABV7 HT8GDCF1Q1V7 1 White HT8GDWV7 HT8GDWAV7 HT8GDWBV7 HT8GDWABV7 HT8GDWF1Q1V7 Yellow HT8GDYV7 HT8GDYAV7 HT8GDYBV7 HT8GDYABV7 HT8GDYF1Q1V7 Blue HT8GDBV7 HT8GDBAV7 HT8GDBBV7 HT8GDBABV7 HT8GDBF1Q1V7 No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — — Red HT8GDRV3 HT8GDRAV3 HT8GDRBV3 HT8GDRABV3 HT8GDRF1Q1V3 Green HT8GDGV3 HT8GDGAV3 HT8GDGBV3 HT8GDGABV3 HT8GDGF1Q1V3 Amber HT8GDAV3 HT8GDAAV3 HT8GDABV3 HT8GDAABV3 HT8GDAF1Q1V3 Clear HT8GDCV3 HT8GDVAV3 HT8GDCBV3 HT8GDCABV3 HT8GDCF1Q1V3 White HT8GDWV3 HT8GDWAV3 HT8GDWBV3 HT8GDWABV3 HT8GDWF1Q1V3 Yellow HT8GDYV3 HT8GDYAV3 HT8GDYBV3 HT8GDYABV3 HT8GDYF1Q1V3 Blue HT8GDBV3 HT8GDBAV3 HT8GDBBV3 HT8GDBABV3 HT8GDBF1Q1V3 No lens 1 HT8GDT1 — — — — Red HT8GDRT1 HT8GDRAT1 HT8GDRBT1 HT8GDRABT1 HT8GDRF1Q1T1 Green HT8GDGT1 HT8GDGAT1 HT8GDGBT1 HT8GDGABT1 HT8GDGF1Q1T1 Amber HT8GDAT1 HT8GDAAT1 HT8GDABT1 HT8GDAABT1 HT8GDAF1Q1T1 Clear HT8GDCT1 HT8GDCAT1 HT8GDCBT1 HT8GDCABT1 HT8GDCF1Q1T1 White HT8GDWT1 HT8GDWAT1 HT8GDWBT1 HT8GDWABT1 HT8GDWF1Q1T1 Yellow HT8GDYT1 HT8GDYAT1 HT8GDYBT1 HT8GDYABT1 HT8GDYF1Q1T1 Blue HT8GDBT1 HT8GDBAT1 HT8GDBBT1 HT8GDBABT1 HT8GDBF1Q1T1 1 Type Volts Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 Transformer 1 1 1 1 1 120 Vac Note 1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-302 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Operator 1 Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons, continued Type Volts Lens Color Operator Only Catalog Number 1NO Catalog Number 1NC Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Catalog Number 2NO-2NC Catalog Number 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — — Red HT8GDRF7 HT8GDRAF7 HT8GDRBF7 HT8GDRABF7 HT8GDRF1Q1F7 Green HT8GDGF7 HT8GDGAF7 HT8GDGBF7 HT8GDGABF7 HT8GDGF1Q1F7 Amber HT8GDAF7 HT8GDAAF7 HT8GDABF7 HT8GDAABF7 HT8GDAF1Q1F7 Clear HT8GDCF7 HT8GDCAF7 HT8GDCBF7 HT8GDCABF7 HT8GDCF1Q1F7 White HT8GDWF7 HT8GDWAF7 HT8GDWBF7 HT8GDWABF7 HT8GDWF1Q1F7 Yellow HT8GDYF7 HT8GDYAF7 HT8GDYBF7 HT8GDYABF7 HT8GDYF1Q1F7 Blue HT8GDBF7 HT8GDBAF7 HT8GDBBF7 HT8GDBABF7 HT8GDBF1Q1F7 No lens 1 HT8GDFV — — — — Red HT8GDRF3 HT8GDRAF3 HT8GDRBF3 HT8GDRABF3 HT8GDRF1Q1F3 Green HT8GDGF3 HT8GDGAF3 HT8GDGBF3 HT8GDGABF3 HT8GDGF1Q1F3 Amber HT8GDAF3 HT8GDAAF3 HT8GDABF3 HT8GDAABF3 HT8GDAF1Q1F3 Clear HT8GDCF3 HT8GDCAF3 HT8GDCBF3 HT8GDCABF3 HT8GDCF1Q1F3 White HT8GDWF3 HT8GDWAF3 HT8GDWBF3 HT8GDWABF3 HT8GDWF1Q1F3 Yellow HT8GDYF3 HT8GDYAF3 HT8GDYBF3 HT8GDYABF3 HT8GDYF1Q1F3 Blue HT8GDBF3 HT8GDBAF3 HT8GDBBF3 HT8GDBABF3 HT8GDBF1Q1F3 No lens 1 HT8GDT1 — — — — Red HT8GDRL1 HT8GDRAL1 HT8GDRBL1 HT8GDRABL1 HT8GDRF1Q1L1 Green HT8GDGL1 HT8GDGAL1 HT8GDGBL1 HT8GDGABL1 HT8GDGF1Q1L1 Amber HT8GDAL1 HT8GDAAL1 HT8GDABL1 HT8GDAABL1 HT8GDAF1Q1L1 Clear HT8GDCL1 HT8GDCAL1 HT8GDCBL1 HT8GDCABL1 HT8GDCF1Q1L1 White HT8GDWL1 HT8GDWAL1 HT8GDWBL1 HT8GDWABL1 HT8GDWF1Q1L1 Yellow HT8GDYL1 HT8GDYAL1 HT8GDYBL1 HT8GDYABL1 HT8GDYF1Q1L1 Blue HT8GDBL1 HT8GDBAL1 HT8GDBBL1 HT8GDBABL1 HT8GDBF1Q1L1 1 LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Transformer 1 120 Vac 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-303 1.10 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Indicating Light Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Incandescent or LED Full voltage or transformer type ● ● Standard and PresTest types 24V and 120V 1 1 Indicating Light Unit PresTest—This device incorporates a press-to-test feature whereby depressing the lens disconnects the light from the source Indicating Light Units Volts Lens Color Indicating Light Catalog Number PresTest Catalog Number 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV Red HT8HFRV7 HT8GTRV7 Green HT8HFGV7 HT8GTGV7 Amber HT8HFAV7 HT8GTAV7 1 Clear HT8HFCV7 HT8GTCV7 White HT8HFWV7 HT8GTWV7 1 Yellow HT8HFYV7 HT8GTYV7 Blue HT8HFBV7 HT8GTBV7 No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV Red HT8HFRV3 HT8GTRV3 Green HT8HFGV3 HT8GTGV3 1 Amber HT8HFAV3 HT8GTAV3 Clear HT8HFCV3 HT8GTCV3 1 White HT8HFWV3 HT8GTWV3 Yellow HT8HFYV3 HT8GTYV3 Blue HT8HFBV3 HT8GTBV3 No lens 1 HT8HBT1 HT8GTT1 Red HT8HBRT1 HT8GTRT1 1 Green HT8HBGT1 HT8GTGT1 Amber HT8HBAT1 HT8GTAT1 1 Clear HT8HBCT1 HT8GTCT1 White HT8HBWT1 HT8GTWT1 Yellow HT8HBYT1 HT8GTYT1 Blue HT8HBBT1 HT8GTBT1 1 Type Incandescent 1 1 being monitored and connects the lamp to a continuously energized circuit for immediate detection of faulty lamps. Full voltage PresTest Light Unit 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc 1 1 Transformer 1 1 1 120 Vac 50/60 Hz Note 1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-304 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Indicating Light Unit 1 Indicating Light Units, continued Type Volts Lens Color Indicating Light Catalog Number PresTest Catalog Number 120 Vac/Vdc No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV Red HT8HFRF7 HT8GTRF7 Green HT8HFGF7 HT8GTGF7 Amber HT8HFAF7 HT8GTAF7 Clear HT8HFCF7 HT8GTCF7 White HT8HFWF7 HT8GTWF7 Yellow HT8HFYF7 HT8GTYF7 Blue HT8HFBF7 HT8GTBF7 No lens 1 HT8HFFV HT8GTFV Red HT8HFRF3 HT8GTRF3 Green HT8HFGF3 HT8GTGF3 Amber HT8HFAF3 HT8GTAF3 Clear HT8HFCF3 HT8GTCF3 White HT8HFWF3 HT8GTWF3 Yellow HT8HFYF3 HT8GTYF3 Blue HT8HFBF3 HT8GTBF3 1 1 LED Full voltage PresTest Light Unit 24 Vac/Vdc Transformer 120 Vac 50/60 Hz No lens 1 HT8HBT1 HT8GTT1 Red HT8HBRL1 HT8GTRL1 Green HT8HBGL1 HT8GTGL1 Amber HT8HBAL1 HT8GTAL1 Clear HT8HBCL1 HT8GTCL1 White HT8HBWL1 HT8GTWL1 Yellow HT8HBYL1 HT8GTYL1 Blue HT8HBBL1 HT8GTBL1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 Light unit base operator without lens or bulb. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-305 1.10 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Push-Pull Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ● ● 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● 40 mm mushroom head Two-position maintained Non-illuminated 1 1 Round Head TwoPosition Push-Pull Unit Two-Position Push-Pull, Maintained, Non-Illuminated Operator Position—Maintained 1 1 1 Out In Button Color Catalog Number Catalog Number No contact — — Black HT8CBH HT8DBH Red HT8CBR HT8DBR Green HT8CBG HT8DBG Black HT8CBHA HT8DBHA Red HT8CBRA HT8DBRA Green HT8CBGA HT8DBGA Black HT8CBHB HT8DBHB Red HT8CBRB HT8DBRB Green HT8CBGB HT8DBGB NO O X 1 1 NC X O 1 NO-NC 1 1 NCLB 1 NC 1 1 NCLB 1 NCLB 1 O X X X X X 1 1 Flat Head Mushroom Head Button Contact Type Flat Head Two-Position Push-Pull Unit 1 Round Head Mushroom Head Button X O O O O O Black HT8CBHAB HT8DBHAB Red HT8CBRAB HT8DBRAB Green HT8CBGAB HT8DBGAB Black HT8CBHD1B HT8DBHD1B Red HT8CBRD1B HT8DBRD1B Green HT8CBGD1B HT8DBGD1B Black HT8CBHD1D HT8DBHD1D Red HT8CBRD1D HT8DBRD1D Green HT8CBGD1D HT8DBGD1D Note 1 NCLB = normally closed late break. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-306 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Illuminated Push-Pull Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ● ● ● 1 Incandescent or LED Full voltage or transformer type 24V and 120V Illuminated Push-Pull Unit 1 1 Illuminated Push-Pull Units Type Volts Lens Color Operator Only Catalog Number 1NO Catalog Number 1NC Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Catalog Number 2NCLB Catalog Number 1 Incandescent Lamp Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc Transformer 1 Red HT8FBRV7 HT8FBRAV7 HT8FBRBV7 HT8FBRABV7 HT8FBRD1DV7 Green HT8FBGV7 HT8FBGAV7 HT8FBGBV7 HT8FBGABV7 HT8FBGD1DV7 24 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRV3 HT8FBRAV3 HT8FBRBV3 HT8FBRABV3 HT8FBRD1DV3 Green HT8FBGV3 HT8FBGAV3 HT8FBGBV3 HT8FBGABV3 HT8FBGD1DV3 120 Vac Red HT8FBRT1 HT8FBRAT1 HT8FBRBT1 HT8FBRABT1 HT8FBRD1DT1 Green HT8FBGT1 HT8FBGAT1 HT8FBGBT1 HT8FBGABT1 HT8FBGD1DT1 1 1 1 1 LED Lamp Full voltage 120 Vac/Vdc Transformer Red HT8FBRF7 HT8FBRAF7 HT8FBRBF7 HT8FBRABF7 HT8FBRD1DF7 Green HT8FBGF7 HT8FBGAF7 HT8FBGBF7 HT8FBGABF7 HT8FBGD1DF7 24 Vac/Vdc Red HT8FBRF3 HT8FBRAF3 HT8FBRBF3 HT8FBRABF3 HT8FBRD1DF3 Green HT8FBGF3 HT8FBGAF3 HT8FBGBF3 HT8FBGABF3 HT8FBGD1DF3 120 Vac Red HT8FBRL1 HT8FBRAL1 HT8FBRBL1 HT8FBRABL1 HT8FBRD1DL1 Green HT8FBGL1 HT8FBGAL1 HT8FBGBL1 HT8FBGABL1 HT8FBGD1DL1 Note: Complete illuminated push-pull switches will not fit in a standard 3 in deep enclosure. Color Fingersafe 120 Vac/Vdc Red Yes HT8FBRFL7P Red No HT8FBRFL7 HT8FBRAFL7 HT8FBRBFL7 HT8FBRABFL7 HT8FBRD1DFL7 24 Vac/Vdc Red Yes HT8FBRFL3P HT8FBRAFL3P HT8FBRBFL3P HT8FBRABFL3P HT8FBRD1DFL3P HT8FBRD1BFL3P Red No HT8FBRFL3 HT8FBRAFL3 HT8FBRBFL3 HT8FBRABFL3 HT8FBRD1DFL3 120 Vac/Vdc Red Yes HT8FBRVL7P HT8FBRAVL7P HT8FBRBVL7P HT8FBRABVL7P HT8FBRD1DVL7P HT8FBRD1BVL7P Red No HT8FBRVL7 HT8FBRAVL7 HT8FBRBVL7 HT8FBRABVL7 HT8FBRD1DVL7 24 Vac/Vdc Red Yes HT8FBRVL3P HT8FBRAVL3P HT8FBRBVL3P HT8FBRABVL3P HT8FBRD1DVL3P HT8FBRD1BVL3P Red No HT8FBRVL3 HT8FBRAVL3 HT8FBRBVL3 HT8FBRABVL3 HT8FBRD1DVL3 LED Lamp Full voltage HT8FBRAFL7P HT8FBRBFL7P HT8FBRABFL7P HT8FBRD1DFL7P HT8FBRD1BFL7P HT8FBRD1BFL7 HT8FBRD1BFL3 Incandescent Full voltage 1 1 Operator Only 1NO 1NC 1NO-1NC 2NCLB 1NO-1NCLB Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Voltage 1 1 Illuminated Push-Pull Units with Low Profile Light Units Type 1 HT8FBRD1BVL7 HT8FBRD1BVL3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-307 1.10 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Selector Switch Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 ● ● Two-, three- and four-position Non-illuminated 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Standard Knob Operator Two-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Operating Mode 2 Contact Type 1 No contacts — — 1 1 Standard Lever Operator 1NO O X 1 1 2NO X O O X 1 2NO-2NC 1 X O O X 1 1 1 Standard Knob Operator O X X O M M HT8JAH3A HT8JDH3A M HT8JKH3A HT8JLH3A M S HT8JNH3A HT8JPH3A M M HT8JAH3AA5 HT8JDH3AA5 S M HT8JKH3AA5 HT8JLH3AA5 M S HT8JNH3AA5 HT8JPH3AA5 M M HT8JAH3AAA5 HT8JDH3AAA5 S M HT8JKH3AAA5 HT8JLH3AAA5 M S HT8JNH3AAA5 HT8JPH3AAA5 M M HT8JAH3AF1Q1 HT8JDH3AF1Q1 S M HT8JKH3AF1Q1 HT8JLH3AF1Q1 M S HT8JNH3AF1Q1 HT8JPH3AF1Q1 Standard Black Knob Catalog Number Standard Black Lever Catalog Number Three-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Operating Mode 2 No contacts — — — 1 1 Standard Lever Operator 1 2NO X O O O O X 1 1 2NO-2NC 1 1 2NO-2NC 1 1 Standard Black Lever Catalog Number S Contact Type 1 Standard Black Knob Catalog Number 3 X O O X O O X O X O O X O X O O X O X X O M M M HT8JBH1D HT8JEH1D S M M HT8JRH1D HT8JSH1D M M S HT8JUH1D HT8JVH1D S M S HT8JXH1D HT8JYH1D M M M HT8JBH1DAA5 HT8JEH1DAA5 S M M HT8JRH1DAA5 HT8JSH1DAA5 M M S HT8JUH1DAA5 HT8JVH1DAA5 S M S HT8JXH1DAA5 HT8JYH1DAA5 M M M HT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1 S M M HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1 M M S HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1 S M S HT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1 M M M HT8JBH1DF1Q1 HT8JEH1DF1Q1 S M M HT8JRH1DF1Q1 HT8JSH1DF1Q1 M M S HT8JUH1DF1Q1 HT8JVH1DF1Q1 S M S HT8JXH1DF1Q1 HT8JYH1DF1Q1 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary. 3 For OXO, NC contacts must be wired in series—see Three-Position Selector Switch table on Page V7-T1-310. 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-308 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.10 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13 Standard Knob Operator 1 1 Four-Position Selector Switch Units, Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Operating Mode 2 M M M S M M M M Standard Black Knob Catalog Number Standard Black Lever Catalog Number M HT8JCH8E HT8JFH8E M M HT8LNH8E HT8LPH8E M S HT8LRH8E HT8LSH8E M M M HT8JCH8EF1Q1 HT8JFH8EF1Q1 S M M M HT8LNH8EF1Q1 HT8LPH8EF1Q1 M M M S HT8LRH8EF1Q1 HT8LSH8EF1Q1 Contact Type No contacts Standard Lever Operator 2NO-2NC — X O O O — O X O O — O O X O — O O O X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 M = Maintained, S = Momentary. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-309 1.10 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Selector Switch Contact Block Selection For Two-, Three- and Four-Position Selector Switches Two-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 3A) Operator Position 1 Left X O 1 1 Right or NO O NC X or NC NO 1 1 1 Three-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 1D) Operator Position Left 1 X O O O X O 1 O O X 1 O X X 1 X X O 1 Right — NO 1 NC NC — NO — NC — 1 NC 1 Four-Position Selector Switch (Cam Code 8E) 1 Operator Position 1 1 1 1 Left X O O O O X O O O O X O — O O O X — Right — NO — NC 1 NO 1 NC 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-310 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Accessories 1 HT800 Accessories HT8A15 Description Catalog Number Illuminated Pushbutton Guard HT8A15 1 1 1 HT8WRENCH Wrench Tool 1 HT8WRENCH 1 1 HT8LAMPTOOL Lamp/Bulb Removal Tool 1 HT8LAMPTOOL 1 HT8X1 Thrust Washer (Anti-rotation) (Included with every operator) 1 HT8X1 1 1 HT8X2 Trim Ring (Included with every operator) 1 HT8X2 1 1 1 HT8X3 Sealing/Spacer Washer (Five included with every operator) HT8X3 1 1 1 HT8GR1 Grounding Kit for Pushbuttons and Selector Switches (Included with every operator) HT8GR1 1 1 1 HT8GR2 Grounding Kit for Indicating Lights (Included with indicating lights) 1 HT8GR2 1 1 1 Light Unit 1 Light Units Type Voltage Catalog Number Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc HT8F3V3 120 Vac/Vdc HT8F7V8 Transformer 120 Vac HT8L1T1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-311 1.10 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Options Legend Plates 1 1 Standard 1 For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights Legend 1 Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Legend Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High CLAMP HT8SP90 HT8LP90 OFF Red HT8SP24 HT8LP24 CLOSE HT8SP73 HT8LP73 ON Black HT8SP25 HT8LP25 DOWN HT8SP74 HT8LP74 OPEN HT8SP26 HT8LP26 EMERG. STOP HT8SP13 HT8LP13 OUT HT8SP27 HT8LP27 FAST HT8SP75 HT8LP75 POWER ON HT8SP80 HT8LP80 FASTER HT8SP87 HT8LP87 RAISE HT8SP28 HT8LP28 1 FEEDER ON HT8SP94 HT8LP94 READY HT8SP86 HT8LP86 FEEDER OFF HT8SP95 HT8LP95 RESET HT8SP29 HT8LP29 1 FORWARD HT8SP15 HT8LP15 REVERSE HT8SP30 HT8LP30 HIGH HT8SP16 HT8LP16 RUN HT8SP31 HT8LP31 1 IN HT8SP17 HT8LP17 SAFE HT8SP85 HT8LP85 INCH HT8SP18 HT8LP18 SLOW HT8SP32 HT8LP32 JOG HT8SP19 HT8LP19 SLOWER HT8SP88 HT8LP88 JOG FOR. HT8SP20 HT8LP20 START HT8SP33 HT8LP33 JOG REV. HT8SP21 HT8LP21 STOP Red HT8SP34 HT8LP34 LOW HT8SP22 HT8LP22 TEST Black HT8SP83 HT8LP83 LOWER HT8SP23 HT8LP23 TRANSFER HT8SP93 HT8LP93 1 LUBE-FAIL HT8SP92 HT8LP92 TRIP HT8SP84 HT8LP84 MOTOR RUN HT8SP81 HT8LP81 UNCLAMP HT8SP91 HT8LP91 1 MOTOR STOP HT8SP82 HT8LP82 UP HT8SP35 HT8LP35 Jumbo Catalog Number Legend Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number 1 Jumbo 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Black For Selector Switch Operators 1 Legend 1 FOR. REV. Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Two-Position—3/16 in High Lettering Three-Position—3/16 in High Lettering HT8SP38 HT8LP38 AUTO OFF HAND HT8SP49 HT8LP49 HAND AUTO HT8SP39 HT8LP39 FOR. OFF REV. HT8SP50 HT8LP50 HIGH LOW HT8SP40 HT8LP40 FOR. SAFE REV. HT8SP69 HT8LP69 1 JOG RUN HT8SP41 HT8LP41 HAND OFF AUTO HT8SP51 HT8LP51 MAN. AUTO HT8SP67 HT8LP67 MAN. OFF AUTO HT8SP68 HT8LP68 1 OFF ON HT8SP42 HT8LP42 OPEN OFF CLOSE HT8SP53 HT8LP53 OPEN CLOSE HT8SP43 HT8LP43 RUN SAFE JOG HT8SP70 HT8LP70 RUN JOG HT8SP44 HT8LP44 UP OFF DOWN HT8SP54 HT8LP54 SAFE RUN HT8SP45 HT8LP45 ON STOP SAFE HT8SP71 HT8LP71 START JOG HT8SP46 HT8LP46 START STOP HT8SP47 HT8LP47 UP DOWN HT8SP48 HT8LP48 1 Jumbo 1 1 1 Black Color of Field Black 1 1 1 For Push-Pull Units Blank Plastic Legend Plates—Square Legend Color of Field Standard 2 Catalog Number Jumbo 3 Catalog Number Legend Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number ON/OFF Black HT8PP5 HT8R5 Black White/Silver HT8SP76 HT8LP76 1 OPEN/CLOSE HT8PP8 HT8R8 White Red/ Black HT8SP77 HT8LP77 UP/DOWN HT8PP11 HT8R11 1 Notes 1 For dimensions, see Page V7-T1-320. 2 3/32 in high lettering. 3 1/8 in high lettering. 1 V7-T1-312 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Legend Plates with Non-Standard Markings When Ordering Specify ● ● 1 Ordering Example: Catalog number of blank plate. Insert the following into Order Notes: legend, letter size and locations. See information below. Legend Characters Available Catalog no.: HT85P76STAMP Letter size: 3/32 in (2.4 mm) Pos. A—POWER HOUSE Pos. B—START PUMP 1 1 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO PQRSTUVWXYZ/-.,1 234567890 1 1 1 Legend Positions 1 Standard Size HT8SP Series Jumbo Size HT8LP Series 1 A A B C D K B G F AB AE AF B4 A4 1 1 C4 D4 G 1 A H I 1 1 Blank Plastic Legend Plates for Non-Standard Markings—Plastic Color of Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo Catalog Number 1 Black White/Silver HT8SP76STAMP HT8LP76STAMP White Red/Black HT8SP77STAMP HT8LP77STAMP 1 Legend 1 1 Maximum Characters per Legend Plate and Approximate Dimensions Character Size Top (Aluminum and Plastic) 3/32 in High 1/8 in High 1 3/16 in High Style Number of Lines Number of Characters Number of Lines Number of Characters Number of Lines Number of Characters Standard Square 2 18 2 13 1 9 Jumbo 1 Square 5 23 3 18 2 12 1 1 Note 1 Can be used on top row only of any enclosure. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-313 1.10 1 1 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Contact Blocks NO Contact Block 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights NC Contact Block 1 1 Contact Blocks 12 Description/Function Contact Type Without Guard Catalog Number Fingerproof Catalog Number Standard normally open contact NO HT8A HT8AP Standard normally closed contact NC HT8B HT8BP Normally open early make contact will make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply. NOEM HT8C HT8CP Normally closed late break contact will open after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply. NCLB HT8D HT8DP Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. NO HT8E HT8EP 1 1 Contact Block Location (Viewed from Rear) Suffix Codes 34 1 Left Side Right Side A = NO A5 = NO A2 = 2NO A6 = 2NO B1 = NC B = NC B2 = 2NC B6 = 2NC 1 C = NOEM C5 = NOEM C2 = 2 NOEM C6 = 2 NOEM 1 D1 = NCLB D = NCLB D2 = 2 NCLB D6 = 2 NCLB E1 = NOEM-NCLB E5 = NOEM-NCLB 1 F1 = NO and NC Q1 = NO and NC 1 Notes 1 See Page V7-T1-316 for contact block electrical ratings. 2 Maximum of four contact blocks per side or a total of eight contact blocks recommended. 3 Maximum of two contact blocks per side or a total of four contact blocks recommended. 4 Standard contact blocks without fingerproof protection. 1 1 1 F4 = 1NO-1NC 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-314 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Replacement Parts 1 Replacement Bulbs and LEDs Voltage Incandescent Bulb Color Catalog Number 6V — HT8BULBV1 24V — HT8BULBV3 120V — HT8BULBV7 1 Incandescent 1 1 1 1 LED Bulb 1 LED 6–12V (For use with transformers with 6V secondary winding) 24V 120V Red HT8LEDRF1 Green HT8LEDGF1 Amber/orange HT8LEDAF1 White/clear HT8LEDWF1 Yellow HT8LEDYF1 Blue HT8LEDBF1 Red HT8LEDRF3 Green HT8LEDGF3 Amber/orange HT8LEDAF3 White/clear HT8LEDWF3 Yellow HT8LEDYF3 Blue HT8LEDBF3 Red HT8LEDRF7 Green HT8LEDGF7 Amber/orange HT8LEDAF7 White/clear HT8LEDWF7 Yellow HT8LEDYF7 Blue HT8LEDBF7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Replacement Lenses PresTest Lights Illuminated Pushbuttons Catalog Number 1 Color Indicating Lights Catalog Number Amber HT8LA HT8BA 1 Blue HT8LB HT8BB Clear HT8LC HT8BC Green HT8LG HT8BG Red HT8LR HT8BR White HT8LW HT8BW Yellow HT8LY HT8BY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-315 1.10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Technical Data and Specifications HT800—Specifications Description Specification Mechanical Ratings Frequency of operation Pushbuttons 6,000 operations per hour Selector switches 3,000 operations per hour Push-pull operators 3,000 operations per hour Mechanical endurance/life Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations 6K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right Selector switches 250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 2 NO on left and 2 NC on right Push-pull operators 250 x 103 operations 3K ops/hr with 6 NO on left and 6 NC on right Climatic Conditions Operating temperature 10° to 140°F (–12° to 60°C) Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m) Humidity 95% RH at 60°C 1 Terminals Contact blocks #6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 16 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 12 in-lbs max. 1 Light units #6-32 posidrive saddle clamp type, 1 x 22 AWG to 2 x 14 AWG, 7 in-lbs max. Electrical Ratings 1 1 Standard contact blocks UL (NEMA) rating See table below. Logic level contact block power rating 5V 1 mA (minimum) 28V 500 mA (maximum) 1 Electrical Ratings—HT800 Standard Contact Blocks, UL Rating 1 Contact Type Description/Function 1 1 1 1 AC DC 1 P600 Catalog Number 2 HT8A Standard normally open contact NO A600 Standard normally closed contact NC A600 1 P600 2 HT8B Normally open early make contact will make circuit before standard NO contact. DC ratings do not apply. NOEM A600 1 — HT8C Normally closed late break contact will open after standard NC contact. DC ratings do not apply. NCLB A600 1 — HT8D Logic level, low voltage NO contact. Gold plated contacts. NO 5V 1 mA (minimum) 28V 500 mA (maximum) HT8E 1 1 UL A600 and P600 Ratings 1 Description 120 240 480 600 125 250 1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amp) 60 30 15 12 1.1 0.55 0.2 Normal load break (amp) 6 3 1.5 1.2 1.1 0.55 0.2 1 Thermal current (amp) 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 Vdc 3 50 Vac or 60 Hz 600 Voltamperes: 1 1 1 1 Make and emerg. interrupting capacity 7200 7200 7200 7200 138 4 138 4 138 4 Normal load break 720 720 720 720 138 138 138 Notes 1 Heavy-duty. 2 Standard-duty. 3 DC ratings do not apply to NOEM (Normally Open Early Make) and NCLB (Normal Closed Late Break) contact blocks HT8C and HT8D. 4 Maximum make or break volt-amperes at 300V or less. 1 V7-T1-316 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Momentary Pushbuttons—Non-Illuminated Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks. Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1 4.60 (116.8) Panel 3.70 (94.0) 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1 0.90 (22.9) Extended 1 1 1.40 (35.6) #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1 0.75 (19.1) Flush 1.00 (25.4) 1 Side View 2.00 (50.8) 1 1 Back View 1 1 1 Optional 2 Stacks 1 Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View 1 1 Illuminated Pushbuttons Back, side and bottom views of pushbutton operator with attached contact blocks. Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 4.35 (110.5) 3.55 (90.2) 2.75 (69.9) Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1 5.15 (130.8) Panel 1 1.50 (38.1) 1 1 1.40 (35.6) 1 Contact Block #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1.00 (25.4) 1 Side View 2.00 (50.8) Back View 1 1 1 1 1 Optional 2 Stacks Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) 1 Bottom View 1 Note 1 Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1 V7-T1-317 1.10 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mushroom Head Pushbuttons and Round Head MRH Push-Pull Operators Back, side and bottom views of mushroom head operator with attached contact blocks. Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 4.60 (116.8) Panel 3.70 (94.0) 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1 1.50 (38.1) 1 1.40 (35.6) 1 1 1 1 1 #6-32 Posi-drive 1.00 Saddle Clamp Type (25.4) 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 2.00 (50.8) 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only Back View Side View 1 1 1 Optional 2 Stacks 1 Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View 1 1 Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Flat Head MRH Push-Pull Operators Back, side and bottom views of push-pull operator with attached contact blocks. 1 Light Unit #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1 1 1 1 1.30 (33.0) 1.40 (35.6) 1 1 5.15 (130.8) 4.35 (110.5) 3.55 (90.2) 2.75 (69.9) Panel Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Contact Block 1.00 #6-32 Posi-drive (25.4) Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG 2.00 (50.8) Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only Back View Side View 12 1 1 1 1 Optional 2 Stacks 1 1 1 Recommended 4 Stacks (8 Contact Blocks Total) Bottom View Notes 1 Recommended maximum of four tandem stacks of contact blocks behind operator. At users’ discretion, two additional tandem stacks may be added. 2 Contact blocks mount directly to operator adaptor in non-illuminated version. V7-T1-318 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 1.10 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 1 Indicating Lights Back, side and bottom views of indicating light operator with attached contact blocks. 1 Panel #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x22 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 7 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1 1 1.30 (33.0) 1 1 Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. 1 1.68 (42.7) Back View Light Unit Assembly Side View 1.67 (42.4) 1 1 1.26 (32.0) 1 1 1 1 Bottom View 1 Selector Switches Back, side and bottom views of selector switch operator with attached contact blocks. Stacking Screw Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Panel 2.90 (73.7) 2.00 (50.8) 1 1 1.20 (38.1) 1 1 1.40 (35.6) #6-32 Posi-drive Saddle Clamp Type 1x16 AWG to 2 x14 AWG Terminal Torque: 12 in-lbs Max. Copper Wire Only 1 1 1.00 (25.4) 1 Side View 1 2.00 (50.8) 1 Back View 1 1 1 Recommended 2 Stacks (4 Contact Blocks Total) 1 1 Bottom View 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-319 1.10 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight—HT800 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting Matrix and Minimum Panel Spacing Requirements 2.19 (55.6) 2.50 (63.5) 0.18 (4.6) 1.77 (45) 0.68 (17.3) 1 1 2.50 (63.5) 1 1 Legend Plates 2.19 (55.6) 1.77 (45) Optional Notch Locations Standard Jumbo 1 1 1.20 (30.5) Diameter 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-320 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Contents Description Page 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations— 10250T/E34 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units . . . . Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Push-Pull Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selector Switch Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Selector Switch Operators . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 V7-T1-322 V7-T1-323 V7-T1-323 V7-T1-324 V7-T1-328 V7-T1-330 V7-T1-331 V7-T1-332 V7-T1-333 V7-T1-335 V7-T1-337 V7-T1-340 V7-T1-344 V7-T1-346 V7-T1-349 V7-T1-352 V7-T1-354 V7-T1-357 V7-T1-359 V7-T1-360 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Description All the Industry-Proven Quality of Eaton’s 10250T and E34 Series of Logic Devices, plus Class I Division 2 Certification The 10250T1H consists of a normally open-normally closed factory sealed contact block that is UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D (NEC 500–503)— Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505) hazardous locations and is rated for both NEMA A600 and NEMA Q300. 10250T and E34 illuminated components have also been UL Listed for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D (NEC 500– 503)—Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 (NEC 505). This, combined with the industry-proven Eaton 10250T 30.5 mm pushbutton line, offers a complete solution to Division 2 hazardous location requirements. Benefits Single composite catalog numbers for complete assembled stations and operators for use in Division 2 hazardous locations are featured throughout this section. ● ● ● Features ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Factory sealed contact blocks Heavy-duty zinc die cast construction NEMA rated 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Front-of-panel drainage holes Grounding nibs on the operator casing Solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy coating on E34 Corrosion resistance in E34 ● ● Pushbutton for hazardous locations Drainage holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator which can prevent operation in freezing environments Grounding nibs bite through paint and other coatings to provide secure ground Suitable for corrosive environments (E34 only) Earth terminal provides additional grounding point and allows for daisy chain grounding (E34 line) Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● 1 UL 508—File No. E131568 UL 1604—File No. E10323 CSA Certified C22.2 No.14—File No. LR 68551 CSA Certified C22.2 No. 213-M1987—File No. LR 20713 1 1 1 1 1 Ingress Protection ● ● Standard indicating lights ● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● IEC IP65 All other operators ● UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 ● IEC IP65 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-321 1.11 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Product Overview Operator 10250T Grounding Nibs The 30.5 mm 10250T pushbutton line features a zinc die cast construction with chrome-plated housing and mounting nut. 10250T line operators have “grounding nibs”—four metal points on the operator casting designed to bite through most paints and other coatings on metal panels to enhance the grounding connection when the operator is securely tightened. 1 Eaton’s E34 Series 30.5 mm pushbutton line features the same rugged die cast construction of our 10250T line with an additional twolayer 100% solid thermosetting cathodic epoxy coating. This coating provides a flat black smooth, consistent, corrosion resistant surface that has passed a demanding 600 hour salt spray test. (The industry standard for this 4X test requires only 200 hours.) 1 Ultraviolet Light 1 1 1 1 1 1 E34 epoxy coating is not recommended for use in applications where exposure to ultraviolet light exists—use NEMA 4X 10250T operators. 1 Ratings 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Our Class I Division 2 line of pushbuttons are UL Listed (NEMA type) 1, 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 and 13. Our Class I Division 2 E34 line meets IEC 947-1 IP66 standards and the cathodic coating meets FDA 3A sanitary chemical resistance requirements. For a complete listing of all applicable ratings see Pages V7-T1-357 to V7-T1-358. Diaphragm Seal with Drainage Holes 10250T Grounding Nibs Liquid Drainage Eaton’s pushbutton operators offer front of panel drainage via holes in the operator bushing. Hidden from view by the mounting nut, these holes prevent buildup of liquid inside the operator, which can prevent operation in freezing environments. The holes also provide a route for escaping liquid in high pressure washdowns, effectively relieving pressure from the internal diaphragm seal, ensuring reliable sealing in applications even beyond NEMA 4. E34 Grounding Nibs Diaphragm Seal E34 line of operators is equipped with a ground screw terminal as part of its die cast construction. This earthing terminal provides an easily accessible point for grounding operators when used in a painted or nonmetallic enclosure and eliminates the need for extra kits when daisy chain grounding is required. E34 Grounding Nibs Foam Neoprene Panel Sealing Gasket Drainage Hole Flexible Diaphragm Stainless Steel Operating Spring Colorfast Molded Button Drainage Hole Mounting Nut Nib Earth Terminal 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-322 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Product Identification 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection Catalog Number Selection is for illustrative purposes only and not to be used to create new catalog numbers. 1 Non-Illuminated Assembled Operators 1 1 10250T 718 E J 1 Operator Type 10250T = Heavy-duty oiltight E34EX = Corrosion resistant oiltight 706 = 707 = 708 = 709 = 710 = 711 = 712 = 713 = 714 = 715 = 716 = 717 = 718 = 721 = Operator and Contact Block Flush 1NO-1NC 722 = 2P SS MT XO,OX-CAM1 Flush 2NO-2NC 723 = 2P SS MT XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1 Extended 1NO-1NC 724 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX-CAM1 Extended 2NO-2NC 725 = 2P SS SPR-R XO,OX,XO,OX-CAM1 Mushroom 1NO-1NC 726 = 3P SS MT XOO,OOX-CAM3 Mushroom 2NO-2NC 727 = 3P SS MT XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 JMB mushroom 1NO-1NC 728 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OOX-CAM3 JMB mushroom 2NO-2NC 729 = 3P SS SPR-L XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 2P MT push-pull 1NO-1NC 730 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OOX-CAM3 2P MT push-pull 2NO-2NC 731 = 3P SS SPR-L&R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 3P MT push-mom pull 1NO-1NC 732 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OOX-CAM3 3P MT push-mom pull 2NO-2NC 733 = 3P SS SPR-R XOO,OXO,OOX-CAM3 3P mom push-pull 1NO-1NC 743 = 4P SS MT XOOO,OXOO,OOXO,OOOX-CAM7 3P mom push-pull 2NO-2NC B R G Y W L N E T Button Color = Black = Red = Green = Yellow = White = Blue = Orange = Red EMERG. STOP = Keyed-SS ACC/SS Type Blank = None J = JMB push-pull B = Booted-FL/EXT G = Guarded-FL K = Knob-SS L = Lever-SS A = Lever W/IP-SS C = Coin-SS Keyed-SS — — Cam 1 2 3 7 1 1 1 1 1 Key Removal 1 = RT only 2 = LT only 3 = RT and LT 4 = CT only 5 = RT and CT 6 = LT and CT 7 = All 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-323 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Product Selection Momentary Pushbutton Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1 10250T Flush Button Non-Illuminated Flush and Extended Pushbuttons Flush Button 1 1 1 Extended Button Contact Type Button Color 1 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Black 10250T706B E34EX706B 10250T708B E34EX708B Red 10250T706R E34EX706R 10250T708R E34EX708R Green 10250T706G E34EX706G 10250T708G E34EX708G Black 10250T707B E34EX707B 10250T709B E34EX709B Red 10250T707R E34EX707R 10250T709R E34EX709R Green 10250T707G E34EX707G 10250T709G E34EX709G E34 Flush Button 1 1 1 10250T Extended Button 1 2NO-2NC 1 1 1 E34 Extended Button 1 1 1 1 Color Selection Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code Black B White W Red R Blue L2 Green G Orange 3 N 1 Yellow Y Red (EMERG. STOP) 4 E 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 1 1 2 1 3 4 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y. Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton. Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons. Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-324 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1 Non-Illuminated Mushroom and Jumbo Mushroom Pushbuttons 10250T Mushroom Button Mushroom Button 1 Jumbo Mushroom Button Contact Type Button Color 1 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T 2 Catalog Number E34 2 Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Black 10250T710B E34EX710B 10250T712B E34EX712B 1 1 1 E34 Mushroom Button Red 10250T710R E34EX710R 10250T712R 1 E34EX712R 1 Green 10250T710G E34EX710G 10250T712G 1 E34EX712G 1 10250T Jumbo Mushroom Button 1 2NO-2NC Black 10250T711B E34EX711B 10250T713B E34EX713B 1 1 Red 10250T711R E34EX711R 10250T713R E34EX713R 1 E34 Jumbo Mushroom Button 1 Green 10250T711G E34EX711G 10250T713G 1 E34EX713G 1 1 1 Color Selection Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code Black B White W Red R Blue L3 Green G Orange 4 N Yellow Y Red (EMERG. STOP) 5 E 1 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 2 3 4 5 1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T710Y. Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet applications. Blue not available on jumbo mushroom pushbutton. Orange is only available on flush or extended pushbuttons. Red with EMERG. STOP engraved on button head for jumbo mushroom pushbutton only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-325 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● ● Momentary contact Non-illuminated Booted or guarded 1 1 Booted Flush Button 1 10250T Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded Contact Type Button Color Booted Flush Button Catalog Number Booted Extended Button Catalog Number Guarded Extended Button 1 Catalog Number 1NO-1NC Black 10250T706BB 10250T708BB 10250T706BG Red 10250T706RB 2 10250T708RB 10250T706RG Green 10250T706GB 10250T708GB 10250T706GG Black 10250T707BB 10250T709BB 10250T707BG Red 10250T707RB 2 10250T709RB 10250T707RG Green 10250T707GB 10250T709GB 10250T707GG 1 1 1 Booted Extended Button 1 1 2NO-2NC 1 1 Guarded Extended Button 1 1 1 1 Color Selection 1 1 1 Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code Black B White W Red R Blue L Green G Orange N Yellow Y 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 2 1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG. Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-326 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● ● 1 Momentary contact Non-illuminated Booted or guarded Booted Flush Button 1 1 E34 Pushbuttons Booted and Guarded Contact Type Button Color Booted Flush Button Catalog Number Booted Extended Button Catalog Number Guarded Extended Button 1 Catalog Number 1 1NO-1NC Black E34EX706BB E34EX708BB E34EX706BG 1 Red E34EX706RB 2 E34EX708RB E34EX706RG 1 1 Booted Extended Button Green E34EX706GB E34EX708GB 1 E34EX706GG 1 2NO-2NC Black E34EX707BB E34EX709BB E34EX707BG Red E34EX707RB 2 E34EX709RB E34EX707RG 1 1 Guarded Extended Button 1 Green E34EX707GB E34EX709GB 1 E34EX707GG 1 1 Color Selection Color Suffix Code Color Suffix Code Black B White W Red R Blue L Green G Orange N Yellow Y 1 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 2 1 To order different color guarded button, simply substitute the underlined character in catalog number with appropriate suffix code from Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T706YG. Red booted flush pushbutton is not recommended for STOP function. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-327 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13 10250T Flush Button Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact Half Shrouded Button 1 Flush Button 1 1 Extended Button 10250T E34 Color 10250T 1 Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Vertical Catalog Number Horizontal Catalog Number Vertical Catalog Number Horizontal Catalog Number Black 10250T101 E34PB1 10250T111 E34EB1 10250T501 10250T511 E34EVB1 E34EHB1 Red 10250T102 E34PB2 10250T112 E34EB2 10250T502 10250T512 E34EVB2 E34EHB2 Green 10250T103 E34PB3 10250T113 E34EB3 10250T503 10250T513 E34EVB3 E34EHB3 Yellow 10250T104 E34PB4 10250T120 E34EB4 10250T504 10250T514 E34EVB4 E34EHB4 Gray 10250T105 E34PB5 — E34EB5 10250T505 10250T515 E34EVB5 E34EHB5 White 10250T106 E34PB6 10250T116 E34EB6 10250T506 10250T516 E34EVB6 E34EHB6 Blue 10250T108 E34PB7 10250T118 E34EB7 10250T508 10250T518 E34EVB7 E34EHB7 Orange 10250T109 E34PB8 10250T119 E34EB8 10250T509 10250T519 E34EVB8 E34EHB8 E34 Flush Button 1 1 1 1 10250T Extended Button 1 1 1 1 E34 Extended Button 1 1 1 10250T Half Shrouded Button 1 1 1 1 E34 Half Shrouded Button 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 1 To order operator with factory assembled extended retaining nut, 10250TA12, for thick panel applications, add suffix letter E to listed catalog number. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-328 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, and 13 1 Mushroom Head Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Momentary Contact 10250T Mushroom Button Anodized Aluminum Jumbo Mushroom Button 1 Color 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T 1 Catalog Number E34 2 Catalog Number 1 Black 10250T121 E34LB1 10250T171 E34JB1 Red 10250T122 E34LB2 10250T172 E34JB2 Mushroom Button 1 1 E34 Mushroom Button 1 1 Red (EMERG. STOP) — — 10250T17213 E34JB2N8 1 10250T Jumbo Mushroom Button 1 Green 10250T123 E34LB3 10250T173 E34JB3 1 1 Yellow 10250T124 E34LB4 10250T174 E34JB4 1 E34 Jumbo Mushroom Button 1 Blue 10250T129 E34LB6 — 1 — 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 2 1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. Anodized aluminum head may not be suitable for some corrosive environments. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-329 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Illuminated Pushbutton Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● Momentary contact Illuminated Plastic lenses 1 ● 1 10250T8_ Illuminated Pushbuttons 10250T 1 Type 1 Color Contact Red 1NO-1NC E34 Catalog Number 1 LED/Lamp Number Catalog Number 1 LED Lamp Full voltage 1 1 Voltage LED/Lamp Number 24 Vac/Vdc Green Bayonet base 120 Vac 1 Transformer 120 Vac E34EX828GD24 E34EX828AD24 E34EX828RD2A Green 10250T828GD2A E34EX828GD2A Amber 10250T828AD2A E34EX828AD2A Red 1 E34EX828RD24 10250T828RD2A Red 1 Bayonet base 10250T828AD24 Amber E34EX8_ 10250T828RD24 10250T828GD24 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC 10250T802RD06 Green 10250T802GD06 Amber 10250T802AD06 Bayonet base 6 Vac E34EX802RD06 E34EX802GD06 E34EX802AD06 Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1 1 Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1 1 Transformer 120 Vac 1 Red 1NO-1NC #757 10250T818RD Green 10250T818GD Amber 10250T818AD Red 1NO-1NC 120MB 10250T824RD Green 10250T824GD Amber 10250T824AD Red 1NO-1NC #755 10250T802RD Green 10250T802GD Amber 10250T802AD #757 E34EX818RD E34EX818GD E34EX818AD 120MB E34EX824RD E34EX824GD E34EX824AD #755 6 Vac E34EX802RD E34EX802GD E34EX802AD 1 1 10250TC_ Lens Selection Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number Red R 10250TC21 Green G 10250TC22 Red R E34V2 Green G 1 Yellow Y E34V3 10250TC23 Yellow Y Amber E34V4 A 10250TC43 Amber A E34V9 Blue L 10250TC24 Blue L 1 E34V6 Clear C 10250TC25 Clear C E34V0 White W 10250TC26 White W E34V5 Color 1 1 10250T E34V _ 1 1 Color E34 Note 1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-330 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Guarded Illuminated Pushbutton Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● ● 1 Momentary contact Guarded illuminated Plastic lenses 10250T8_ 1 1 Guarded Illuminated Pushbuttons 10250T Type Voltage Color Contact 24 Vac/Vdc Red 1NO-1NC LED/Lamp Number E34 Catalog Number 1 LED/Lamp Number Catalog Number 1 1 1 LED Lamp Full voltage Green Bayonet base 120 Vac Transformer E34EX828RG24 E34EX828GG24 10250T828AG24 E34EX828AG24 E34EX828RG2A Green 10250T828GG2A E34EX828GG2A Amber 10250T828AG2A E34EX828AG2A 10250T802RG06 E34EX802RG06 Green 10250T802GG06 E34EX802GG06 Amber 10250T802AG06 E34EX802AG06 Red 120 Vac 10250T828GG24 Bayonet base 10250T828RG2A Amber E34EX8_ 10250T828RG24 Red 1NO-1NC 1NO-1NC Incandescent Lamp Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Transformer 120 Vac Red 1NO-1NC #757 10250T818RG #757 E34EX818RG Green 10250T818GG E34EX818GG Amber 10250T818AG E34EX818AG Red 1NO-1NC 120MB 10250T824RG 120MB E34EX824RG Green 10250T824GG E34EX824GG Amber 10250T824AG E34EX824AG Red 1NO-1NC #755 10250T802RG Green 10250T802GG Amber 10250T802AG #755 6 Vac E34EX802RG E34EX802GG E34EX802AG 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10250TC2_ Lens Selection Suffix Code Catalog Number Red R 10250TC21 Catalog Number Red R E34V2 Green G 10250TC22 Green G E34V3 Yellow Amber Y 10250TC23 Yellow Y E34V4 A 10250TC43 Amber A E34V9 Blue L 10250TC24 Blue L E34V6 Clear C 10250TC25 Clear C E34V0 White W 10250TC26 White W E34V5 10250T E34V_ 1 Suffix Code Color Color 1 E34 1 1 1 1 Note 1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined character in the catalog number with appropriate suffix code from Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T828YD24. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-331 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Indicating Light Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● Standard Plastic lenses 1 1 10250T_ 1 Indicating Lights Type Voltage Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac E34_ 1 Transformer 1 1 Catalog Number 1 10250T197HLRP24 E34FB197HLRP24 E34FB197HLGP24 Amber 10250T197HLAP24 E34FB197HLAP24 Red 10250T197HLRP2A E34FB197HLRP2A Green 10250T197HLGP2A E34FB197HLGP2A Amber 10250T197HLAP2A E34FB197HLAP2A Red 10250T181HLRP06 E34TB120HLRP06 Green 10250T181HLGP06 E34TB120HLGP06 Amber 10250T181HLAP06 E34TB120HLAP06 Bayonet base 120 Vac Incandescent Lamp 1 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Resistor 1 120 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 1 10250T206HAP E34FB24HAP 10250T201HRP E34RB120HRP Green 10250T201HGP E34RB120HGP Amber 10250T201HAP E34RB120HAP 10250T181HRP E34TB120HRP Green 10250T181HGP E34TB120HGP Amber 10250T181HAP E34TB120HAP 120MB #755 Lens Selection 1 Color 1 E34FB24HGP Amber Red 1 Plastic E34FB24HRP 10250T206HGP #757 Red 1 Transformer 10250T206HRP Green Red 1 1 E34 Catalog Number 1 10250T197HLGP24 Red Green 1 1 10250T LED Lamp 1 1 LED/Lamp Number Color Plastic Glass Plastic Glass Suffix Code Suffix Code Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number Red RP E34H2 RG E34G2 Catalog Number Catalog Number 10250T Glass 1 1 1 1 Red Color E34 RP 10250TC1N RG 10250TC7N Green GP 10250TC2N GG 10250TC8N Green GP E34H3 GG E34G3 Amber AP 10250TC19N AG 10250TC9N Amber AP E34H9 AG E34G9 Yellow YP 10250TC3N — — Yellow YP E34H4 YG E34G4 Blue LP 10250TC4N LG 10250TC10N Blue LP E34H6 LG E34G6 Clear CP 10250TC5N CG 10250TC11N Clear CP E34H0 CG E34G0 White WP 10250TC6N WG 10250TC12N White WP E34H5 WG E34G5 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 To order different color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters in the catalog number with appropriate suffix code from the Lens Selection table above. Example: 10250T201HYP. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-332 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Illuminated Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 1 NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1 Operators without Lenses 10250T Illuminated Pushbutton Illuminated Pushbutton Type Voltage LED/Lamp Number 10250T Catalog Number Indicating Light E34 Catalog Number 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number LED Light Unit Type (LEDs not included) 1 E34 Illuminated Pushbutton 10250T Indicating Light Full voltage — Transformer AC only 24 Bayonet base E34 Indicating Light Resistor 2 AC/DC Transformer AC only Neon AC/DC 10250T397HL E34CB497HL 10250T197HL E34FB197HL E34XB024HL — — 120 10250T411HL E34XB120HL 10250T181HL E34TB120HL 240 10250T412HL E34XB240HL 10250T182HL E34TB240HL 277 10250T419HL E34XB277HL 10250T198HL E34TB277HL 380 10250T413HL E34XB380HL 10250T183HL E34TB380HL 480 10250T414HL E34XB480HL 10250T184HL E34TB480HL 600 10250T415HL E34XB600HL 10250T185HL E34TB600HL 1 1 6 #755 10250T473H E34CB06H 10250T203H E34FB06H 12 #756 10250T474H E34CB12H 10250T204H E34FB12H 24 #757 10250T476H E34CB24H 10250T206H E34FB24H 32 #1828 10250T477H E34CB32H 10250T207H E34FB32H 48 #1835 10250T478H E34CB48H 10250T208H E34FB48H 120 120MB 10250T471H E34SB120H 10250T201H E34RB120H 240 120MB 10250T472H E34SB240H 10250T202H E34RB240H 24 #755 10250T416H E34XB024H — — 120 10250T411H E34XB120H 10250T181H E34TB120H 240 10250T412H E34XB240H 10250T182H E34TB240H 277 10250T419H E34XB277H 10250T198H E34TB277H 380 10250T413H E34XB380H 10250T183H E34TB380H 480 10250T414H E34XB480H 10250T184H E34TB480H 600 10250T415H E34XB600H 10250T185H E34TB600H 120 NE51H-R-22 — — 10250T226H E34NB120H 240 NE51H-4-68 — — 10250T227H E34NB240H 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 10250T416HL Incandescent Light Unit Type Full voltage AC/DC 1 1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from the LED Selection table on Page V7-T1-343. Resister units are not available for use with LEDs, choose either transformer or full voltage LED style. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-333 1.11 Color Plastic 1 1 1 10250TC1N E34H2 E34H3 Amber 10250TC19N E34H9 Yellow 10250TC3N E34H4 Blue 10250TC4N E34H6 Clear 10250TC5N E34H0 E34H_ White 10250TC6N E34H5 Glass Glass Red 10250TC7N E34G2 Green 10250TC8N E34G3 Amber 10250TC9N E34G9 Yellow — E34G4 Blue 10250TC10N E34G6 10250TC_ 10250TC_ Clear 10250TC11N E34G0 E34G_ White 10250TC12N E34G5 10250TC_ Illuminated Pushbutton Lenses 1 1 Plastic 10250TC2N 1 1 E34 Catalog Number Red 1 1 10250T Catalog Number Green 1 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Indicating Light Lenses 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Color 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Red 10250TC21 E34V2 Green 10250TC22 E34V3 Yellow 10250TC23 E34V4 1 Amber 10250TC43 E34V9 Blue 10250TC24 E34V6 1 Clear 10250TC25 E34V0 White 10250TC26 E34V5 1 1 E34V_ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-334 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Push-Pull Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● 1 Two- and three-position Non-illuminated 10250T71_ 1 Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 1 Operator Function (Position) 1 Maintained— Pull Maintained— Push O X Red Standard Push-Pull 2 Mounting Location 1 Contact Type X O 1 2 1NO 1NC 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T714R E34EX714R 1 1 1 E34EX71_ O X O X X O X O 2NO 2NC 10250T715R 1 E34EX715R 1 1 1 10250T71_ 1 Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Operator Function (Position) 1 Momentary— Pull O X Maintained— Intermediate O O Maintained— Push X O Contact Type 1NO 1NC Mounting Location 1 1 2 Red Standard Push-Pull 3 1 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 1 10250T716R E34EX716R 1 E34EX71_ 1 X X O X O O 1NC 1NC 10250T717R E34EX717R 1 1 1 Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection table on Page V7-T1-336. Example: 10250T714G. 3 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection table on Page V7-T1-336. Example: 10250T716G. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-335 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● Two- and three-position Non-illuminated 1 ● 1 10250T7_ Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull Operator Function (Position) 1 1 Momentary— Pull Maintained— Intermediate Momentary— Push 1 1 Red Standard Push-Pull 2 Contact Type Mounting Location 1 1 2 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number O X O O X O 1NO 1NC 10250T718R E34EX718R X X O X O O 1NC 1NC 10250T721R E34EX721R E34EX7_ 1 1 1 1 Button and Color Selection 1 1 Standard 1 1 1 1 Suffix Code 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Red R 10250TB62 E34C2 Red (EMERG. STOP) E 10250TB63 E34C2N8 Green G 10250TB61 E34C3 Black B 10250TB60 E34C1 Blue L 10250TB64 E34C6 Color Jumbo Mushroom Head Standard Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum Red RJ 10250TJ62 E34J2 Red (EMERG. STOP) EJ 10250TJ63 E34J2N8 1 Green GJ 10250TJ61 — Black BJ 10250TJ60 — 1 Yellow YJ 10250TJ64 — 1 Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color buttons, simply substitute underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Button and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T718G. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-336 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Illuminated Push-Pull Units 1 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● 1 Two-position maintained Illuminated 1 Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull 10250T8_ 1 Operator Function (Position) 1 Maintained— Pull Maintained— Push Red Standard Push-Pull 2 Mounting Location 1 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T853RD24 E34EX853RD24 10250T853RD2A E34EX853RD2A 24 Vac 10250T843RD06 E34EX843RD06 120 Vac 10250T844RD06 E34EX844RD06 10250T849RD E34EX849RD Type Voltage Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Contact Type 1 2 1 LED Lamp O X X O 1NO 1NC 120 Vac E34EX8_ Transformer 1 1 1 Incandescent Lamp O X 1 X O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 1NC Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 10250T851RD E34EX851RD Transformer 24 Vac 10250T843RD E34EX843RD 120 Vac 10250T844RD E34EX844RD 1 1 1 Lens and Color Selection 10250T Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number 1 Red RD 10250TC47 RD E34M2 1 Red (EMERG. STOP) ED 10250TC53 ED E34M2N8 Green GD 10250TC48 GD E34M3 Blue LD 10250TC49 LD E34M6 Amber AD 10250TC50 AD E34M9 White WD 10250TC51 WD E34M5 Clear CD 10250TC52 CD E34M0 Color Standard Standard Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum HD Aluminum with Transparent Center 1 E34 1 1 1 1 Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum Red RS 10250TC57 — — Red (EMERG. STOP) ES 10250TC63 — — Green GS 10250TC58 — — Blue LS 10250TC59 — — Amber AS 10250TC64 — — 1 Yellow YS 10250TC60 1 1 1 White WS 10250TC61 — — Clear CS 10250TC62 — — 1 1 Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center Red RH 10250TC65 — — Green GH 10250TC66 — — Amber AH 10250TC67 — — 1 1 Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T851GS. 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-337 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● Three-position—maintained push, momentary pull Illuminated 1 ● 1 10250T8_ Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Operator Function (Position) 1 1 Momentary— Pull Maintained— Intermediate Maintained— Push 1 Red Standard Push-Pull 2 Type Voltage 1 Contact Mounting Location Type 1 2 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T864RD24 E34EX864RD24 LED Lamp 1 1 O X O O X O Full voltage E34EX8_ Transformer 1 X X 1 O X O O Full voltage 1NO 1NC 10250T864RD2A E34EX864RD2A 24 Vac 10250T854RD06 E34EX854RD06 120 Vac 10250T855RD06 E34EX855RD06 10250T875RD24 E34EX875RD24 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac Transformer 1 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 1NC 1NC 10250T875RD2A E34EX875RD2A 24 Vac 10250T865RD06 E34EX865RD06 120 Vac 10250T866RD06 E34EX866RD06 Incandescent Lamp 1 O X 1 O O X O Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Resistor 120 Vac Transformer 24 Vac 1 1NO 1NC 120 Vac X X 1 1 1 O X O O 1NC 1NC 10250T860RD E34EX860RD 10250T862RD E34EX862RD 10250T854RD E34EX854RD 10250T855RD E34EX855RD 10250T871RD E34EX871RD 10250T873RD E34EX873RD Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Resistor 120 Vac Transformer 24 Vac 10250T865RD E34EX865RD 120 Vac 10250T866RD E34EX866RD Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-337. Example: 10250T862AS. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-338 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● 1 Three-position—momentary Illuminated 10250T8_ 1 Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull 1 Operator Function (Position) 1 Momentary— Pull Maintained— Intermediate Maintained— Push 1 Red Standard Push-Pull 2 Type Voltage Contact Type Mounting Location 1 1 2 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 1 LED Lamp O X O O X O Full voltage E34EX8_ Transformer X X O X O O 10250T886RD24 E34EX886RD24 10250T886RD2A E34EX886RD2A 24 Vac 10250T876RD06 E34EX876RD06 120 Vac 10250T877RD06 E34EX877RD06 10250T897RD24 E34EX897RD24 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac Transformer 1NO 1NC 1NC 1NC O O X O O X O O 1 E34EX897RD2A 10250T887RD06 E34EX887RD06 120 Vac 10250T888RD06 E34EX888RD06 1 10250T882RD E34EX882RD 1 10250T884RD E34EX884RD 10250T876RD E34EX876RD 10250T877RD E34EX877RD 10250T893RD E34EX893RD 10250T895RD E34EX895RD 24 Vac 10250T887RD E34EX887RD 120 Vac 10250T888RD E34EX888RD Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Resistor 120 Vac Transformer 24 Vac Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Resistor 120 Vac Transformer 1 10250T897RD2A 1NO 1NC 120 Vac X X 1 24 Vac Incandescent Lamp O X 1 1NC 1NC 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 To order different type or color lens, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Lens and Color Selection table on the bottom of Page V7-T1-337. Example: 10250T862AS. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-339 1.11 1 1 1 1 1 An illuminated push-pull pushbutton unit, arranged for one-hole mounting, can replace two pushbuttons and a pilot light or the nonilluminated form can replace two pushbuttons. These units are available in three basic types: ● 1 1 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Push-Pull Operators 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights ● Maintained—(Twoposition). Maintains in the pulled or pushed position until manually actuated to the opposite mode. Momentary—(Threeposition). Spring returns to an intermediate position when pulled or pushed and released. ● Momentary Pull, Maintained Push—(Threeposition). Spring returns to intermediate position when pulled. Maintains in pushed position until manually returned to intermediate (ready to reset) position. Maintained stop holds circuit open and will prevent other series connected operators from starting the system. Application Guide To assist in the selection of contact blocks, the sketch below shows pictorially by symbols 1 and 2 locations of contact circuits after assembly of contact blocks and adapter to the operator. The table below shows the effect of the push and pull operations on either NO or NC contacts. (X = contact closed, O = contact open). The operators, buttons, contact blocks, etc., are offered as building block components that can be intermixed to satisfy many requirements. This minimizes the need for a varied and costly inventory. Locating Nibs Locating Nib 1 2 1 1 10250T_ Push-Pull Operator Components Operator Position and Circuit Arrangement 1 Out—Pull 1 Type of Operator 1 1 Intermediate Contact Block Contact Block Mounting Location 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X 1NO 1NC O X 2NO 2NC O X 1 2 In—Push 2 1 1 O X No intermediate X position O O X X O 2 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 10250T5 E34GDB 10250T4 E34GEB 10250T9 E34GFB 10250T10 E34GHB Two-Position Operator without Lens E34G_ Maintained push-pull 1 or or X O X O Three-Position Operator without Lens 1 Momentary push-pull 1 Maintained push-momentary pull 1 Momentary push-pull 1 1 or or O X O O O X O O O X O O O X O O or or O X X O O X X O O O X O O O X O or O O O O or X O X O Note Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-340 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Push-Pull Light Units, Lenses and Buttons NEC Class I Division 2 Groups B, C and D 1 1 Light Units for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices Light Unit Type LED (LEDs not included) 1 Incandescent Type Voltage Full voltage — Transformer AC only 50/60 Hz 24 Full voltage AC or DC LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base 10250T63HL 10250T64HL 240 10250T65HL 277 10250T82HL 380 10250T66HL 480 10250T67HL 600 10250T68HL 12 #755 #756 #757 #1828 32 Transformer AC only 50/60 Hz 120 1 1 1 1 1 10250T69H 10250T70H 1 10250T79H 10250T83H 120MB 240 24 1 10250T89HL 208 24/28 Resistor AC or DC 10250T97HL 120 6 1 Catalog Number 1 10250T80H 10250T81H #755 1 10250T89H 120 10250T63H 208 10250T64H 240 10250T65H 277 10250T82H 380 10250T66H 480 10250T67H 600 10250T68H 1 1 1 1 1 Note 1 These units do not include lamps. Order LED separately to match lens color from table on Page V7-T1-343. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-341 1.11 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Red 10250TC47 E34M2 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC53 E34M2N8 Green 10250TC48 E34M3 Blue 10250TC49 E34M6 Amber 10250TC50 E34M9 White 10250TC51 E34M5 Clear 10250TC52 E34M0 Color Standard 1 1 1 1 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Alternate Lenses for Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Side-Lighted (Anodized) Aluminum Standard Side-Lighted Anodized Aluminum Ring Red 10250TC57 — Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TC63 — Green 10250TC58 — Blue 10250TC59 — 1 Amber 10250TC64 — Yellow 10250TC60 — 1 White 10250TC61 — Clear 10250TC62 — 1 1 1 HD Aluminum with Transparent Center Heavy-Duty Aluminum with Transparent Center 1 Red 10250TC65 — Green 10250TC66 — 1 Amber 10250TC67 — 1 1 Buttons for Non-Illuminated Push-Pull Devices 1 Color 1 Standard 1 1 1 1 Jumbo Mushroom Head 1 1 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Standard Red 10250TB62 E34C2 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TB63 E34C2N8 Green 10250TB61 E34C3 Black 10250TB60 E34C1 Blue 10250TB64 E34C6 Jumbo Mushroom Head (Anodized) Aluminum 1 Red 10250TJ62 E34J2 Red (EMERG. STOP) 10250TJ63 E34J2N8 Green 10250TJ61 — Black 10250TJ60 — Yellow 10250TJ64 — 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light. 1 1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use with ultraviolet light applications. 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-342 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Standard LED Lamp LED Selection Voltage Color Catalog Number Voltage Color Catalog Number 6 Vac/Vdc suitable for use with transformers Red E22LED006RN 60 Vac/Vdc Red E22LED060RN Orange E22LED006ON Orange E22LED060ON Yellow E22LED006YN Yellow E22LED060YN Green E22LED006GN Green E22LED060GN Blue E22LED006BN Blue E22LED060BN 12 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc White E22LED006WN Red E22LED012RN 120 Vac White E22LED060WN Red E22LED120RA Orange E22LED012ON Orange E22LED120OA Yellow E22LED012YN Yellow E22LED120YA Green E22LED012GN Green E22LED120GA Blue E22LED012BN Blue E22LED120BA White E22LED012WN White E22LED120WA Red E22LED024RN Red E22LED120RD Orange E22LED024ON Orange E22LED120OD Yellow E22LED024YN Yellow E22LED120YD Green E22LED024GN Green E22LED120GD Blue E22LED024BN Blue E22LED120BD White E22LED120WD White E22LED024WN Red E22LED048RN Orange E22LED048ON Yellow E22LED048YN Green E22LED048GN Blue E22LED048BN White E22LED048WN 120 Vdc 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Note For a complete listing of all LEDs available, see Page V7-T1-239. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-343 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Selector Switch Units UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● Two- and three-position Non-illuminated 1 10250T72_ 1 Two-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 1 X O 1 1 O X E34EX72_ 1 X O X O 1 O X O X 1 1 10250T_ 1 Black Knob—Selector Switch 3 Operator Action 2 Contact Type M M 1NC 1NO M S M M M S Mounting Location 1 1 2 1NC 1NO 1NC 1NO Cam Code 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 1 10250T722BK E34EX722BK 10250T724BK E34EX724BK 10250T723BK E34EX723BK 10250T725BK E34EX725BK 1 Three-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated Operator Position 1 Black Knob—Selector Switch 4 Operator Action 2 1 X O 1 O O O X Contact Type M M M 1NO 1NO Mounting Location 1 1 2 Cam Code 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 3 10250T726BK E34EX726BK 10250T728BK E34EX728BK 10250T730BK E34EX730BK 10250T732BK E34EX732BK 10250T727BK E34EX727BK 10250T729BK E34EX729BK 10250T731BK E34EX731BK 10250T733BK E34EX733BK M 1 S 1 S 1 M M M S M 1 X O O 1 O X O O O X S M M M M S 1 1NO 1NC-1NC (Series) 1NO 3 M M S 1 S M M 1 S Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ). W 3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the table on Page V7-T1-345. Example: 10250T722LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T722T13. 4 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Switch and Color Selection table on Page V7-T1-345. Example: 10250T726LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam)+_ (key removal position). Example: 10250T726T13. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-344 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13, NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D ● ● 1 Four-position maintained Non-illuminated 1 Four-Position Selector Switch—Non-Illuminated 10250T743_ 1 Operator Position 1 Black Knob—Selector Switch 3 Operator Action 2 X O O O E34EX743_ O X O O O O X O O O O X M M Contact Type M M Mounting Location 1 1 2 1NC 1NO 1NO 1NC Cam Code 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number 1 7 10250T743BK E34EX743BK 1 1 1 1 1 Lever Coin Slot 5 Color Knob Suffix Code Lever Suffix Code Lever 4 Suffix Code Coin Slot 5 Suffix Code 1 Black BK BL BA BC 1 Red RK RL RA RC Green GK GL GA GC Yellow YK YL YA YC White WK WL WA WC Gray AK AL AA AC Blue LK LL LA LC Orange NK NL NA NC Key Operated Selection Number of Operator Position Action 6 Suffix and Removal Position 2 T1 + 1, 2, 3 M M 3 M QS T1 + 2 1 1 1 1 1 Key Removal Positions 7 C L 1 R 1 T3 + 1–7 Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 S T3 + 1, 4, 5 1 Right only S T3 + 4 2 Left only 1 T3 + 2, 4, 6 3 Right and left MMMM T7 + 7 4 Center only 6 Left and center 7 All positions M M M WM M WMQS M M S Q 4 1 Switch and Color Selection Knob 1 1 1 Notes 1 Bolded circuit corresponds to “X-O” circuit selection. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 M = Maintained. 3 To order different type or color selector switch, simply substitute the underlined characters with appropriate suffix code from the Switch and Color Selection table above. Example: 10250T743LL. For keyed selector switch, substitute the underlined characters with T_ (cam) + _ (key removal position). Example: 10250T743T77. 4 Designed for added ingress protection. For use in maintained operators only. 5 10250T only. 6 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ). W 7 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-345 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Selector Switch Selection 1 1 1 1 10250T E34 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Cam and Contact Block Selection Selector switches in their varied forms (two-position, three-position, and fourposition) are a big factor contributing to the great flexibility of control that a well rounded line of “pushbuttons” can achieve. Because of their flexibility, they tend to cause difficulty with product selection and application. The following systematic approach should simplify that task. 1 Cam and contact block selection is better understood if you: 1 ● 1 ● 1 1 1 1 1 Work with each incoming and outgoing wire/circuit separately. Recognize the terms NO and NC only identify the type of contact by its mode before mounting to the operator. The “X-O” table (Page V7-T1-348) shows how that contact will act after assembly to the operator with the selected cam shape. X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. ● ● One NO-NC contact block may be mounted behind each plunger of the mounting adapter for a total of four circuits. Each cam has two separate lobes, each of which operates one of the two contact block plungers independently of each other. Those are identified as position 1 (locating nib side) and position 2 (opposite of locating nib). The position designations give direction in selecting and mounting of the contact blocks. Step 1: Elementary Diagram. Construct on paper, or in your mind, a simple elementary diagram of the switching scheme as follows: HAND Incoming Line Locating Nib 2 Outgoing Circuit Step 2: “X-O” Pattern. From the elementary diagram, you can construct an “X-O” diagram which describes when the contacts are to be closed (X) or open (O) in the various positions of the switch. The “X-O” for the HAND circuit looks like this: HAND OFF AUTO X O O 1 In this circuit, you want a contact closed on the left (HAND) but open in the center and right. For the AUTO circuit, the “XO” diagram would look like this: HAND OFF AUTO O O X Putting them together, the complete “X-O” diagram is: Outgoing Circuit OFF AUTO Contact Circuit Locations 1 Systematic Approach Application: HAND-OFFAUTO selector switch. In this circuit, one incoming line is distributed to two other outgoing circuits by the switch. The two circuits can be looked at individually. XOO OOX Once the “X-O” diagram has been generated, the next step is to select the cam and contact block, or blocks, needed to perform the desired “X-O” functions. The selection tables on the following pages list the various types (shapes) of cams by number to choose from and the type of contact and position to achieve the function outlined in your “X-O” diagram. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-346 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Step 3: Cam Selection. The cam you select determines the operation of all contact blocks mounted to the operator. It is selected on the basis that it provides the simplest circuitry for the desired “X-O” diagram. The selection tables show all the “X-O” combinations. For the purpose of this example, the applicable portion of those tables is shown on this page. Now to make the cam selection, make a simple worksheet such as below. (1) or (2) = mounting location from chart above: Cam 2 XOO OOX (1)NO-(2)NC 1 (2)NO Cam 3 (1)NO (2)NO It becomes obvious that cam 3 is the better choice because the series connection can be avoided, making it simpler to wire. Step 4: Contact Block Selection. Having selected the cam, contact block selection is simply a matter of determining if you require one NO-NC contact block (Cat. No 10250T1H) or two. Given the limitations of the factory sealed contact block and the desired “X-O” application, you may have circuits that will not be needed—as seen here with the two additional NC circuits. (1) or (2) = mounting location from chart above. Qty 2 Step 5: Selector Switch Operator. Lastly, you have to choose from the many types of operators—knob and lever in various colors or keyed. Also what combinations of maintained and spring return functions are required. Selection of these operators can be found on Page V7-T1-349. For the example in step 4, you may want a three-position maintained black knob, cam 3—Catalog Number 10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1). The Complete Switch: 10250T1323 (or 34VHBK1) with two 10250T1H or for one composite catalog number—10250T726BK (or E34EX726BK) found on Page V7-T1-344. Example Selection Table Desired Circuit and Operator Position No. 1 X O Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3 1 Contact Blocks and Mounting Location Contact Blocks and Mounting Location 1 1 1 2 2 — O 1 1 NO 4 O O X NC 1 — 1 NO — NO 1 NO 1 1 Note 1 Wired in series. 1 1 1 1 Diagrams Circuits shown illustrate connections to obtain a selector circuit combination and are shown with their appropriate line diagrams in BOLD. Field wiring of jumper connections required as shown. 1 1 1 1 X = Closed circuit O = Open circuit 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog No. Cam 3 10250TIH (1)NO (2)NC (1)NC (2)NO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-347 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Two-Position Selector Switch 1 1 Four-Position Selector Switch Desired Circuit and Operator Position Number Cam Code #1 1 1 X O 2 O X Desired Circuit and Operator Position Contact Blocks and Mounting Location 2 Cam Code #7 Contact Blocks and Mounting Location Number 1 1 X O O O 2 O X O O 3 O O X O 4 O O O X 5 X O O X 6 O X X O 7 O O X X 8 X X O O 2 — 1 1 NC NC NC — 1 1 1 NO 1 Desired Circuit and Operator Position No. 1 X O Cam Code #2 Cam Code #3 Contact Blocks and Mounting Location Contact Blocks and Mounting Location 1 1 2 NO NO (Series) 2 X X O NC — NO — NC 3 X O X 4 O O X O X NC NO (Parallel) NO NO (Parallel) NC NC (Parallel) NO NC NO NO (Parallel) — — NO 5 NC (Parallel) — NO 1 1 — NC 1 1 — — 1 1 2 O 1 1 NO Three-Position Selector Switch 1 1 NO NO X — 1 1 1 NC (Parallel) NO 6 O 1 X NC 9 NC NC (Series) 1 X O X — NO/NC (Parallel) NC 10 1 O — O X O X O — NO/NC (Parallel) 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-348 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Selector Switch Operators 1 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Black Knob Selector Switch 1 Operator Action 1 Positions Two-position—60° throw Black Lever Selector Switch M M M S Three-position—60° throw M M M M S M M S S M M Four-position—40° throw S M M Operator Action M Catalog Number Cam Code 3 Catalog Number 1 10250T1311 1 10250T3011 1 1 10250T1371 1 10250T3071 1 2 10250T1322 2 10250T3022 1 3 10250T1323 3 10250T3023 2 10250T1332 2 10250T3032 3 10250T1333 3 10250T3033 2 10250T1342 2 10250T3042 3 10250T1343 3 10250T3043 2 10250T1352 2 10250T3052 3 10250T1353 3 10250T3053 7 10250T1367 7 10250T3067 Three-position—60° throw 1 1 1 1 1 Vertical Mounting Catalog Number 4 Horizontal Mounting Catalog Number 4 1 1, 2, 3 10250T1511_ 10250T1611_ 1 2 10250T1571_ 10250T1581_ 2 1–7 10250T1522_ 10250T1622_ 10250T1523_ 10250T1623_ 10250T1532_ 10250T1632_ 10250T1533_ 10250T1633_ 10250T1542_ 10250T1642_ 10250T1543_ 10250T1643_ 10250T1652_ 10250T1662_ 10250T1653_ 10250T1663_ 10250T1677_ 10250T1687_ Cam Code M M S M S 2, 4, 6 3 7 M 4 3 2 M M 1, 4, 5 3 2 M S M 3 2 M S 1 1 1 1 M Four-position—40° throw Optional Key Removal Positions 4 3 S M 1 1 M M C Cam Code 3 10250T Key Operators with Cam Positions L Black Lever Selector Switch— Vertical Mounting 2 1 Two-position—60° throw Key Removal Positions Black Knob Selector Switch— Vertical Mounting 2 M M Horizontal Mounting 1 10250T Selector Switch Operators with Caps 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 M Key Removal Positions 5 Replacement Keys or Dissimilar Locks for Above Key Operators Listed operators have identical locks and keys (Key Code H661) Catalog Number 10250ED824. Code Suffix Key Removal Position Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 Right only 5 Right and center 2 Left only 6 Left and center Replacement Keys 3 Right and left 7 All positions Description Catalog Number 4 Center only Replacement keys (code H661) 10250ED824 R 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ). W 2 Field convertible to horizontal mounting or order operator only and separate operator cap. 3 For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-346 to V7-T1-348. 4 Choose key removal position required for application from table above. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T15112. 5 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-349 1 1 1 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Black Knob Selector Switch 1 E34 Selector Switch Operators with Knob Assembled Black Knob Selector Switch— Vertical Mounting 2 Operator Action 1 Positions Two-position—60° throw 1 1 M M M S Three-position—60° throw 1 M M M 1 M S M 1 M S 1 S M M 1 Four-position—40° throw S M M 1 Cam Code 3 Catalog Number 4 1 E34VFBK1 1 E34VEBK1 2 E34VGBK1 3 E34VHBK1 2 E34VJBK1 3 E34VKBK1 2 E34VLBK1 3 E34VMBK1 2 E34VNBK1 3 E34VPBK1 7 E34VTBK1 M M 1 1 E34KFB_ E34 Key Operators with Cam and Cap Positions 1 Operator Action 1 Two-position—60° throw M M M S 1 1 Three-position—60° throw 1 M M M S 1 S M S Four-position—40° throw M M 1 Horizontal Mounting Catalog Number 1 1, 2, 3 E34KFB_ E34KFHB_ 1 2 E34KEB_ E34KEHB_ 2 1–7 E34KGB_ E34KGHB_ E34KHB_ E34KHHB_ 3 S 4 3 2, 4, 6 3 7 M 1, 4, 5 3 2 M M 1 Vertical Mounting Catalog Number 2 M 1 Key Removal Positions 5 2 M 1 Cam Code 3 7 E34KJB_ E34KJHB_ E34KKB_ E34KKHB_ E34KLB_ E34KLHB_ E34KMB_ E34KMHB_ E34KNB_ E34KNHB_ E34KPB_ E34KPHB_ E34KTB_ E34KTHB_ M Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-349. 1 1 1 2 3 4 1 5 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ). W Field convertible to horizontal mounting. For selection of the proper cam and contact block to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection instructions and table on Pages V7-T1-346 to V7-T1-348. For other colors of either knob or lever, replace the underlined characters of the catalog number with the appropriate suffix code from Alternate Knobs and Levers table on Page V7-T1-351. Example: E34VFBL2. Choose key removal position required for application from table on Page V7-T1-351. Add key removal code no. to listed catalog number. Example: E34KFB2. 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-350 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Key Removal Positions C L 1.11 Key Removal Positions Code Suffix Key Removal Position Code Suffix Key Removal Position 1 Right only 5 Right and center 2 Left only 6 Left and center 3 Right and left 7 All positions 4 Center only 1 1 R 1 1 1 Knob Alternate Knobs and Levers for Operators 1 Knob Lever Lever for Added Ingress Protection 1 Lever Designed for Added Ingress Protection 2 Lever Color Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number Suffix Code Catalog Number Black K1 E34K1 L1 E34L1 A1 E34A1 Red K2 E34K2 L2 E34L2 A2 E34A2 Green K3 E34K3 L3 E34L3 A3 E34A3 Yellow K4 E34K4 L4 E34L4 A4 E34A4 White K5 E34K5 L5 E34L5 A5 E34A5 Blue K6 E34K6 L6 E34L6 A6 E34A6 Gray K7 E34K7 L7 E34L7 A7 E34A7 Orange K8 E34K8 L8 E34L8 A8 E34A8 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Key removal in “spring return from” positions not recommended. 2 For use on maintained operators only. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-351 1.11 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Illuminated Selector Switch Operators Two-Position Maint. Selector Switch 10250T Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 4 Transformer Type—50/60 Hz 1 1 Operator Action 1 Position Two-position—60° throw 1 M 6V #755 Lamp Cam Voltage Code 3 Catalog and Code Number 2 Lamps: 6V—#755, 12V—#756, 24V—#757, 48V—#1835, 120/240V—120MB Cam Catalog and Code 3 Voltage Code Number 2 1 24 10250T5961H 1 120 10250T5971H M 6 10250T6201H 12 10250T6211H 1 208 10250T6511H 24 10250T6221H 240 10250T5981H 48 10250T6231H 1 380 10250T5991H 120 10250T6361H 480 10250T6001H 240 5 10250T6371H 600 10250T6011H 24 10250T602_H 120 10250T603_H 1 Three-position—60° throw + 2 or 3 M M 1 M 1 1 1 + 2 or 3 M M 1 S + 2 or 3 M 1 S 1 S M + 2 or 3 M S + 2 or 3 6 10250T624_H 12 10250T625_H 208 10250T652_H 24 10250T626_H 240 10250T604_H 48 10250T627_H 380 10250T605_H 120 10250T638_H 480 10250T607_H 240 5 10250T639_H 600 10250T607_H 120 10250T620_H + 2 or 3 120 10250T622_H 240 10250T656_H 120 10250T621_H + 2 or 3 120 10250T623_H 240 10250T662_H 24 10250T614_H 120 10250T615_H + 2 or 3 6 10250T628_H 12 10250T629_H 208 10250T653_H 24 10250T630_H 1 240 10250T616_H 48 10250T631_H 380 10250T617_H 120 10250T640_H 1 480 10250T618_H 240 5 10250T641_H 600 10250T619_H 24 10250T6087H 120 10250T6097H 1 Four-position—40° throw 1 M M 7 M M 1 1 7 6 10250T6327H 12 10250T6337H 208 10250T6547H 24 10250T6347H 240 10250T6107H 48 10250T6357H 380 10250T6117H 120 10250T6427H 480 10250T6127H 240 5 10250T6437H 600 10250T6137H 1 1 Knob Knob Catalog and Code Number Lever Catalog and Code Number Color Red 10250TER 10250TFR Green 10250TEG Yellow Blue Color 1 1 Knobs and Levers 6 Knob Catalog and Code Number Lever Catalog and Code Number Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC 10250TFG White 10250TEW 10250TFW 10250TEA 10250TFA Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 10250TEL 10250TFL 6 Lever 1 1 Notes 1 M = Maintained. S = Spring return in direction of arrow ( ). W 2 For selection of the proper cam and contact block, to obtain the proper circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-348. 3 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. 4 Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-239. 5 Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. 6 Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer), red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). 1 1 1 V7-T1-352 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 120 Vac Transformer Selector Switch, Cam 1 Illuminated Selector Switch Operator Only without Knob or Lever Transformer Type—50/60 Hz Positions Operator Action Two-position—60° throw M Three-position—60° throw M M M M M M S S Lamps—#755, #757, #1835, 120MB Catalog Number 12 Catalog Number 2 Cam Code 1 5 Cam Code 1 5 E34VFB_H E34SFB_H 1 1 Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 Cam Code 2 5 Cam Code 3 5 E34VGB_H E34VHB_H E34SGB_H E34SHB_H E34VNB_H 6 E34VPB_H 6 E34SNB_H 7 E34SPB_H 7 E34VJB_H 6 E34VKB_H 6 E34SJB_H 7 E34SKB_H 7 E34VLB_H E34VMB_H E34SLB_H E34SMB_H 1 1 1 1 M E34VRB_H M — E34SRB_H — 1 M Knobs and Levers 1 1 S M Lever 6V #755 Lamp 4 M M Four-position—40° throw 1 Full Voltage Type—AC or DC 3 S M Knob 1.11 1 Light Unit Voltage Suffix Add to operator catalog number listed in table above. 1 Type of Light Unit 1 Color 9 Knob Catalog Number and Code Number Lever Catalog Number and Code Number Red 10250TER 10250TFR Transformer Type 50/60 Hz Green 10250TEG 10250TFG Voltage Suffix Code Voltage Suffix Code Yellow 10250TEA 10250TFA 24 024 6 06 120 12 12 Full Voltage Type AC or DC 3 Blue 10250TEL 10250TFL 120 Clear 10250TEC 10250TFC 208 208 24 24 240 48 48 380 120 White 10250TEW 10250TFW 240 Amber 10250TEM 10250TFM 380 480 480 600 600 240 1 1 1 120 8 1 240 1 Notes Use NEMA 4X 10250T operators where exposed to ultraviolet light, see Page V7-T1-352. 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Operator includes lens gasket and lens attachment screws. Replace underscore with proper voltage suffix code from Light Unit Voltage Suffix table above. Example: three-position maintained with 120V transformer type light unit: E34VGB120H. Full voltage light units can be used at other than listed voltages by changing lamp. Replacement lamps are listed on Page V7-T1-239. 120MB lamps are used on both 120V and 240V operators. For selection of the proper cam and contact block required to obtain a specific circuit sequence, see selection table on Page V7-T1-348. 120 and 240V transformer only. 120 full voltage only. Resistor type. May generate excess heat if used in high density. Amber, clear and white lenses have a black arrow (pointer). Red, green and blue lenses have a white arrow (pointer). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-353 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Options Contact Blocks and Mounting Adapters 1 NEC Class I Division 2, Groups B, C and D 1 Contact Block 1 Contact Block Description Catalog Number Class I Division 2 factory sealed contact block with 1NO-1NC 10250T1H 1 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-359. 1 1 1 Mounting Adapter 1 1 Mounting Adapter Description Catalog Number Mounting adapter for pushbuttons 10250TD2 Mounting adapter for selector switches 10250TD3 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-359. 1 1 Mounting Adapters with Contact Block(s)—Overpacked Description Catalog Number Pushbutton adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD21H 1 Pushbutton adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD21H1H Selector switch adapter with 1NO-1NC 10250TD31H 1 Selector switch adapter with 2 (1NO-1NC) 10250TD31H1H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-354 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Mounting and Assembly 1 Mounting Matrix Panel Thickness ● Minimum: 0.06 in (1.6 mm) ● Maximum: 0.25 in (8 mm) including legend plate ● Maximum can be increased to 0.375 in (15.9 mm) using optional retaining nut ● Indicating light: 10250TA30/E34TA30 ● Pushbutton/selector switch: 10250TA31/E34TA31 1 Legend Plate Dimensions in Inches (mm) A B C D Small 2.87 (72.6) 2.25 (57.2) 2.25 (57.2) 2.87 (72.6) Jumbo 2.87 (72.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.32 (58.6) 2.87 (72.6) Extra large 2.87 (72.6) 2.56 (65.2) 2.52 (64.1) 2.87 (72.6) 1 1 Panel Spacing and Drilling Notch for Locating Nib 1 1 Terminals for Light Unit “B” Min. ø.14 (ø3.4) 1 Terminals for Light Unit “D” Min. 1 .19 (5.0) 1 .60 (15.2) 1 “C” Min. “A” Min. .67 (17.0) Notch for Locating Nib ø1.2 (ø30.5) 1 ø1.2 (ø30.5) 1 NOTE: Suitable for Use in This Alternate Mounting Hole. 1 Drilling for One Hole Mounting and Dimensions for Minimum Spacing in Horizontal Rows. Drilling for One Hole Mounting and Dimensions for Minimum Spacing in Vertical Rows. 1 1 1 1 Operator Assembly Illuminated Pushbutton Lens Washer Nameplate Thrust Washer (Optional) Operator Operator Gasket E34 Earth Terminal Contact Block Mounting Adapter RATINGS ARE STAMPED ON LIGHT UNIT AND CONTACT BLOCK 1 1 1 Lamp 1 Indicator Light 1 1 1 Push/Pull Retaining Nut 5 lb-ft (6.8 Nm) Panel 0.06" – 0.25" (1.6 – 8 mm) with Optional Retaining Nut Up to 0.375" (15.9 mm) Light Unit Terminal Clamp: One or Two Copper Conductors 22 – 12 AWG (0.34 – 4.0 mm2) 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) 1 Contact Block Terminal Clamp: Single Copper Conductor 18 – 14 AWG (0.75 – 2.5 mm2) 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-355 1.11 1 1 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Enclosures Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures Enclosures (Case and Cover)—Surface Mounting 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights Number of Elements Die Cast Enclosure 10250T Catalog Number E34 Catalog Number Die Cast Enclosure—Deep Cover—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 1 10250TN11 E34N11 2 10250TN12 E34N12 1 3 10250TN13 E34N13 4 10250TN14 E34N14 1 Polyester Enclosure 1 1 1 1 Stainless Steel Enclosure 1 1 Polyester—In-Line NEMA 3, 4X, 12 1 — E34N51 2 — E34N52 3 — E34N53 4 — E34N54 Stainless Steel 2—In-Line NEMA 4, 4X, 12 1 — 10250TN33 2 — 10250TN34 3 — 10250TN35 4 — 10250TN36 1 Dimensions, see Page V7-T1-359. 1 Notes 1 For spacing increments, see Page V7-T1-234. 2 14 gauge, type 304. 1 1 1 1 1 2. Polyester enclosures must be used when mounting illuminated operators. Enclosure Layouts Top – For Vertical Mounting 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 4 1 Top – For Horizontal Mounting 1 Application Notes: 1. Operators need to be mounted in their horizontal orientation for all enclosures. For die cast enclosures remove locating nib on operators and use thrust washer (Catalog Number 10250TK3). 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-356 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Technical Data and Specifications 1 Mechanical Ratings Description 1 Specification 1 Frequency of Operation All pushbuttons 6000 operations/hr. Key and lever selector switches 3000 operations/hr. 1 Pushbuttons 10 x 106 operations 1 Contact block 10 x 106 operations Key and lever selector switches 0.25 x 106 operations Life 1 1 Shock Resistance 20 ms >5g Duration/force 1 1 Climatic Conditions Description Specification Operating temperature 32° to 140°F (0° to 66°C) Storage temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) Altitude 6,562 ft (2,000m) Humidity Max. 95% RH at 60°C 1 1 1 1 Terminals Description 1 Specification Light Units 1 Clamps Terminals are saddle clamp type for 1 x 22 AWG (0.34 mm2) to 2 x 14 AWG (4.0 mm2) conductors Torque 7 lb-in (0.8 Nm) Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1 Clamps Terminals are stainless steel saddle clamp type for 1 x 18–14 AWG (0.75–2.5 mm2) solid or stranded copper conductor 1 Torque 9 lb-in (1.0 Nm) with size 2 Phillips screwdriver 1 Degree of protection against direct electrical contact IP2X with fingerproof shroud 1 Contact Blocks 1 1 Electrical Ratings Description Specification 1 Light Units Bulbs—average life: Transformer type 20,000 hrs. Resistor/direct voltage type 2500 hrs. minimum at rated voltage LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-357 1.11 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Electrical Ratings—Contact Block Meet or Exceed NEMA Contact Rating Designations A600 and Q300 A600 (AC) Q300 (DC) Description 120V 240V 480V 600V Make and emerg. interrupting capacity (amps) 60 30 15 12 0.55 0.27 Normal load break (amps) 6 3 1.5 1.2 0.55 0.27 Thermal current (amps) 10 10 10 10 2.5 2.5 Maximum make 7200 7200 7200 7200 69 69 Maximum break 720 720 720 720 69 69 Temperature Codes All illuminated devices have operating temperatures below 100°C except for the following catalog numbers with temperature codes per NEC table 500.5(d) and UL 1604: E34 Temp. Code 10250T201H E34RB120H T3C 10250T202H E34RB240H T3A 10250T471H E34SB120H TC3 1 10250T472H E34SB240H T3B 10250T80H — T3C 1 10250T81H — T3B 1 250V Voltamperes: 10250T 1 125V All selector switches w/120 MB lamp T3C 1 All illuminated devices with lamp 1835 T4A 1 Note: For additional technical information, see Publication Number TD.7.4.T.E.04. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V7-T1-358 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 1.11 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Dimensions 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Surface Mounting 1 Die Cast, Polyester and Stainless Steel Enclosures 1 4 Mtg. Holes — 10-32 Screw Size for 1 – 4 Element Die Cast/ Stainless Steel Enclosure 7/32 Screw Size for Polyester 1 1 1 E 1 B 1 D A 1 C Surface 1 Element Arrangement Wide A High B Deep C Mounting D E Conduit Entrance In-line 3.88 (98.6) 4.00 (101.6) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 3.25 (82.6) 3/4 2 3.88 (98.6) 5.88 (149.4) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 5.13 (130.3) 3 3.88 (98.6) 7.75 (196.9) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 7.00 (177.8) 4 3.88 (98.6) 9.63 (244.6) 3.00 (76.3) 2.69 (68.3) 8.88 (225.6) 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 2 3.81 (96.8) 6.63 (168.4) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 4.88 (124.0) 3 3.81 (96.8) 8.88 (225.6) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 7.13 (181.1) 4 3.81 (96.8) 11.13 (282.7) 3.38 (85.9) 2.94 (74.7) 9.38 (238.3) 3.00 (76.2) 3.50 (88.9) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 4.25 (108.0) 2 3.50 (88.9) 6.75 (171.5) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 7.50 (190.5) 3 3.50 (88.9) 9.00 (228.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 9.00 (228.6) 4 3.50 (88.9) 11.25 (285.8) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 12.00 (304.8) Number of Elements 1 1 Die Cast 1 1 1 1 Polyester 1 In-line 1 1 1 1 Stainless Steel 1 In-line Contact Block 1 1 1 1 1 Mounting Adapter 1.70 (43.2) 1.43 (36.3) 1.88 (47.8) 1.85 (47.0) 0.25 (6.4) 1 1 1 1.02 (25.9) 1.72 (43.7) 1.86 (47.2) 2.57 (65.3) 1 0.84 (21.3) 1 1 0.44 (11.2) 1.23 (31.2) 1 Note 1 No conduit entrance holes provided. Drill as required. 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-359 1.11 1 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 Ratings Summary of Classifications Summary of NEC Article 500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The NEC Article 500 explains in great detail the requirements for the installation of wiring and electrical equipment in hazardous locations. The purpose of this summary is for general reference only, the National Electrical Code along with other applicable authorities having jurisdiction over the site should be the installer’s guidelines when wiring or installing electrical equipment in any hazardous or potentially hazardous location. Class I, Division 2 Definition Class I, Division 2 covers hazardous locations where flammable gases, vapors or volatile liquids are handled either in a closed system, or confined within suitable enclosures, or where hazardous concentrations are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation. Areas adjacent to Division 1 locations, into which gases might occasionally flow, would also belong to Division 2 (NEC (500.5[b])). Hazardous Location Any area where there is the possibility of explosion and fire resulting from the presence of flammable vapors, liquids or gas, or combustible dust or fibers. NEC 500–503 Class I. Gas Division 1. Hazard may exist—May exist in atmosphere under normal operating conditions A. Acetylene B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide) C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane) D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride) 2. Potential hazard—May be present in atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances OR location adjacent to Class I, Division 1 location A. Acetylene B. Hydrogen and manufactured gases containing 30% hydrogen by volume (e.g. butadiene, ethylene oxide, propylene oxide) C. Petrochemicals (e.g. carbon monoxide, ether, ethylene, hydrogen sulfide, morpholine, cyclopropane) D. Petrochemicals (e.g. gasoline, benzene, butane, propane, acetone, ammonia, vinyl chloride) II. Dust 1. Hazard may exist—May exist in atmosphere under normal operating conditions E. Conductive and combustible dust (resistivity <105 ohm/cm) (metal dusts) F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust, coal) G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics) III. Fibers 2. Potential hazard—May be present in atmosphere only under abnormal circumstances F. Carbonaceous dusts (resistivity >102 ohms/cm but <108 ohms/cm) (e.g. carbon black, coke dust, coal) 1. Production areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings 2. Handling and storage areas Easily ignitable fibers or flyings G. Non-conductive combustible dust (resistivity >105 ohms/cm) (e.g. grain dust, flour, starch, sugar, plastics) NEC 505 Class I. Gas Zone 0. Continuously present or present for long periods of time Group IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or equivalent hazard 1. Likely to exist under normal operating or maintenance conditions or adjacent to Zone 0 IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or equivalent hazard Summary of NEC Article 505 The NEC also classifies hazardous locations for flammable gases and vapors into zones under NEC 505. This system is more in line with the European Standards, CENELEC and IEC, with the major difference being that NEC 505 only classifies gases and vapors while CENELEC and IEC also include dusts. Group 2. Not likely to occur in normal operation and if they do occur will only exist for short period or adjacent to Zone 1 IIC. Acetylene, hydrogen or equivalent hazard IIB. Acetaldehyde, ethylene or equivalent hazard IIA. Acetone, ammonia, ethyl alcohol, gasoline, methane, propane or equivalent hazard Note For additional information on grouping of compounds, see NFPA 497M-1991 and NFPA 325-1994. 1 1 1 V7-T1-360 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations—10250T/E34 1.11 Summary of Basic Methods Available for Class I, Division 2 Locations 1 1 Features Method Configuration Advantages Disadvantages Factory sealed contact block Closed-ended labyrinth contact block with an incendive circuit incapable of external ignition Higher continuous carrying amperages—up to 10A May not be suitable for logic level circuits Direct drive contacts—contacts can be forced open 1 Suitable for use in all enclosures Best suited for motor control applications Hermetically sealed block Reed switch sealed against an external atmosphere Suitable for low energy level circuits Lower continuous carrying amperages are not suitable for motor control applications (typically 3A to 5A rated) Suitable for use in all enclosures Contacts cannot be forced open Permanent magnet attracts metallic dust and filings that can reduce the electrical creepage distance between live terminals Explosion proof enclosures (Class I, Division 1 and 2) Enclosures capable of withstanding an internal explosion while preventing external ignition. Enclosures designed for Class I, Division 1 can safely be used in Class I, Division 2 Factory Sealed Contact Blocks Internal Ignition Higher level of protection than required for Class I Division 2 1 1 1 1 Higher material and installation costs 1 Conduit sealing is still required Time consuming maintenance 1 Hermetically Sealed Reed Contact Block Cooled Escaping Gas 1 1 1 Hermetically sealed reed does not allow external atmosphere to enter switching chamber. 1 1 1 1 1 Depression of plunger rotates magnet and either opens/closes contacts. Contacts can not be forced apart if subject to arch/fault current, because no mechanical connection exists. Direct Drive Contacts • Contacts can be mechanically forced apart if subject to an arch/fault current. 1 1 1 1 1 Explosion Proof Enclosure 1 1 Threaded Joint Cooled Escaping Gas 1 Flat Joint Internal Ignition Internal Ignition 1 Cooled Escaping Gas 1 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T1-361 Stacklights SL Series Stacklights 2.1 SL Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 E26 Series Stacklights V7-T2-2 V7-T2-2 V7-T2-2 V7-T2-2 V7-T2-3 V7-T2-4 V7-T2-6 V7-T2-12 V7-T2-14 V7-T2-19 V7-T2-20 V7-T2-25 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 E26 Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 V7-T2-32 V7-T2-32 V7-T2-32 V7-T2-32 V7-T2-33 V7-T2-34 V7-T2-35 V7-T2-40 V7-T2-41 V7-T2-42 V7-T2-43 V7-T2-44 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-1 2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series Contents Stacklights—SL Series Description 2 Page SL Series Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Identification—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection—SL7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Component Identification—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection—SL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-3 V7-T2-4 V7-T2-6 V7-T2-12 V7-T2-14 V7-T2-19 V7-T2-20 V7-T2-25 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description The new Eaton SL7 and SL4 stacklights provide reliable control over all key processes and machine availability. Now available in two sizes, 70 mm (SL7) and 40 mm (SL4), the new stacklights are engineered to keep you informed about potential material requirements, downtime and hazards. Modules are available in a wide selection of audible, illuminating and mounting options that are well suited to adapt to any industrial application. 2 2 2 2 Features Optimal Performance in Rugged Applications ● ● ● ● ● All elements have IP66 and UL Type 4/4X/13 ratings for protection against strong jets of water Bright and efficient LEDs with a lifespan of up to 100,000 hours High-performance LEDs for maximum illumination in direct sunlight Acoustic modules with up to 100 dB sound levels Operating temperatures: –22° to +140°F (–30º to +60ºC) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 2 ● 2 ● Easily configurable components Simple bayonet mounting mechanism for quick assembly Flexible mounting and lighting options Volume-adjustable alarms 2 ● ● ● ● ● 2 ● 2 ● ● ● ● ● UL 508—File No. E29184 IEC/EN 60947-5-1 CSA C22.2 No. 14-10 CSA C22.2 No. 94-91 CSA Class No. NKCR7 Benefits Highly Modular and Versatile Line ● Six lens colors: red, amber, yellow, green, blue, white Continuous, flashing, strobe and multi-strobe lighting functions Mono-tone, dual-tone and multi-tone audible alarms LED or incandescent lighting options Control up to five modules on a single stack, 10 with dual-arm base 24V, 120 Vac and 230 Vac operating voltages Standards and Certifications Simplified twist-and-lock assembly, no tools required Compact components reduce inventory requirements and increase flexibility Versatile hardware for quick installation and minimized downtime New slim 40 mm size is ideal for applications with constrained space Lean automation with SmartWire-DT connectivity Ideal for indoor and outdoor usage 2 2 V7-T2-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Product Overview Diameter 2 SL7 SL4 70 mm 40 mm 2 2 2 2 Acoustic Modules Page V7-T2-9 2 Page V7-T2-16 2 2 2 2 2 2 Light Modules Continuous light, LED: Page V7-T2-6 Continuous light, LED: Page V7-T2-16 Flashing light, LED: Page V7-T2-7 Flashing light, LED: Page V7-T2-15 Strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-7 Strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-15 Continuous light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8 Multi-strobe light, LED: Page V7-T2-17 Strobe light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8 Continuous light, Incandescent: Page V7-T2-17 2 2 2 Multi-strobe light, high-performance LED: Page V7-T2-8 2 Continuous light, Incandescent: Page V7-T2-8 2 2 2 2 2 2 Base Modules Page V7-T2-10, V7-T2-11 Page V7-T2-17 2 Accessories Page V7-T2-19 Page V7-T2-19 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-3 2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Component Identification—SL7 Component Identification 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Light Modes 2 Continuous Incandescent Flashing Strobe Multi-Strobe — — — 2 LED 2 V7-T2-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL7—Component Identification Descriptions Item Number Item Description Page Reference Acoustic Modules Easy mounting with bayonet mount, place at highest position Sound pressure up to 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor) Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Operational voltages: 24 Vac/Vdc, 110/120 Vac, 230/240 Vac 2 2 1 Continuous tone or pulsed tone, adjustable with internal DIP switches Frequency: 2800 Hz V7-T2-9 2 2 Continuous tone or pulsed tone; can be actuated externally; takes up to two inputs (two modules) Frequency: 2800 Hz V7-T2-9 2 3 Multi-tone (eight tones) adjustable with internal DIP switch Frequency 500–2700 Hz V7-T2-9 2 2 Incandescent Bulb 4 Accessory V7-T2-19 Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb 5 Accessory V7-T2-19 Light Modules Easy mounting with bayonet mount, modules can be arranged in any order Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor) Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Max. 5 modules per stack or up to 10 via dual-arm base option 2 2 2 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb Continuous light 6 BA15d socket, without incandescent bulb V7-T2-7 2 V7-T2-6 2 Light Modules with LED Continuous light 7 Flashing light 8 Flashing frequency: 2 Hz V7-T2-7 Strobe light 9 Flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz V7-T2-7 2 2 Light Modules with High-Output LED Continuous light 10 V7-T2-8 Strobe light 11 High-performance LED, flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz V7-T2-8 Strobe light, multi-strobe light 12 High-performance LED, with various strobe sequences Flashing frequency: 1–2.6 Hz V7-T2-8 2 2 Base Modules 2 Easy mounting with bayonet mount, includes cover plate, with spring-cage terminals Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Base for mounting on both sides 13 Max. 2 x 5 modules that can be actuated individually V7-T2-11 Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot 14 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-10 Base with aluminum tube and threaded 1/2 in NPT 15 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-10 Base with external fixing holes 16 — V7-T2-10 Vertical base with bracket 17 — V7-T2-11 Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes 18 — V7-T2-10 Base with built-in fixing screws (pre-assembled) 19 — V7-T2-10 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) 20 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-10 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) and SmartWire-DT ™ connection 21 Aluminum tube 100 mm V7-T2-10 Bracket 22 Accessory V7-T2-19 Bracket 23 Accessory, includes M20 cable gland V7-T2-19 Mounting Bracket 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-5 2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series Product Selection—SL7 Complete Devices 2 SL7-100-L-R_ Continuous Light, LED, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 2 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Base Module with Foot and 100 mm Tube 24 Vac/Vdc 2 Number of Modules Color 2 Red/Green 3 Red/Amber/ Green Function Standard Pack 1 Catalog Number SL7-100-L-RG-24LED SL7-100-L-RAG-24LED 2 2 2 2 2 2 Light Module with LED 2 SL7-L_ 2 Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 2 2 2 Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL7-L24-B Green SL7-L24-G Red SL7-L24-R White SL7-L24-W Yellow SL7-L24-Y Amber 110/120 Vac 2 2 2 Blue SL7-L24-A 1 SL7-L120-G Red SL7-L120-R White SL7-L120-W Yellow SL7-L120-Y Amber 2 230/240 Vac SL7-L120-B Green Blue SL7-L120-A 1 SL7-L230-B 2 Green SL7-L230-G Red SL7-L230-R 2 White SL7-L230-W Yellow SL7-L230-Y Amber SL7-L230-A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Light Module with LED, continued SL7-BL_ 2 Flashing Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 2 Hz Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Blue Function Catalog Number 1 SL7-BL24-B Green SL7-BL24-G Red SL7-BL24-R White SL7-BL24-W Yellow SL7-BL24-Y Amber 110/120 Vac 230/240 Vac 2 Standard Pack 2 2 2 2 SL7-BL24-A Blue 1 SL7-BL120-B Green SL7-BL120-G Red SL7-BL120-R White SL7-BL120-W Yellow SL7-BL120-Y Amber SL7-BL120-A Blue 1 2 2 2 2 SL7-BL230-B Green SL7-BL230-G Red SL7-BL230-R White SL7-BL230-W Yellow SL7-BL230-Y Amber SL7-BL230-A 2 2 2 2 SL7-FL_ Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 1.4 Hz Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Blue Function Catalog Number 1 SL7-FL24-B Green SL7-FL24-G Red SL7-FL24-R White SL7-FL24-W Yellow SL7-FL24-Y Amber 110/120 Vac 230/240 Vac 2 Standard Pack Blue 2 2 2 SL7-FL24-A 1 SL7-FL120-B Green SL7-FL120-G Red SL7-FL120-R White SL7-FL120-W Yellow SL7-FL120-Y Amber SL7-FL120-A Blue 2 1 2 2 2 2 SL7-FL230-B Green SL7-FL230-G Red SL7-FL230-R White SL7-FL230-W Yellow SL7-FL230-Y Amber SL7-FL230-A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-7 2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series SL7 Light Module with High-Output LED SL7-L24-_ Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL7-L24-B-HP High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect 24 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 2 2 Color SL7-FL24-_-HP Blue Green SL7-L24-G-HP Red SL7-L24-R-HP White SL7-L24-W-HP Yellow SL7-L24-Y-HP Amber SL7-L24-A-HP Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Standard Pack 2 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect, 1.4 Hz 24 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 Color Function Blue 1 Catalog Number SL7-FL24-B-HP Green SL7-FL24-G-HP Red SL7-FL24-R-HP White SL7-FL24-W-HP Yellow SL7-FL24-Y-HP Amber SL7-FL24-A-HP 2 2 SL7-FL24-_-HPM Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Color Function Standard Pack Catalog Number High-Performance LED for Maximum Signaling Effect, 1–2.6 Hz 2 24 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 Blue 1 SL7-FL24-B-HPM Green SL7-FL24-G-HPM Red SL7-FL24-R-HPM White SL7-FL24-W-HPM Yellow SL7-FL24-Y-HPM Amber SL7-FL24-A-HPM 2 2 2 2 SL7 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb SL7-L-_ Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 For incandescent bulb selection, see Page V7-T2-19. Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Color Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL7-L-B Without Light Elements, Incandescent Bulb, Maximum 7W 2 <250 Vac/Vdc Blue 2 Green SL7-L-G Red SL7-L-R 2 White SL7-L-W Yellow SL7-L-Y Amber SL7-L-A 2 2 V7-T2-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 2.1 Stacklights SL Series SL7 Acoustic Modules SL7-AP_ 2 Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1 Adjustable with internal DIP switches. Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer. f = 2800 Hz. Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Rated Operational Current (Ie mA) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 92 Black Function 2 2 Sound Type Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL7-AP24 110/120 Vac Maximum 41 Black SL7-AP120 230/240 Vac Maximum 43 Black SL7-AP230 2 2 2 2 SL7-AP_-E 2 Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, External Actuation, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1 Assigned two inputs (two modules). Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer. f = 2800 Hz. Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Rated Operational Current (Ie mA) Color Function Sound Type 2 2 Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL7-AP24-E 24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 92 Black 110/120 Vac Maximum 41 Black SL7-AP120-E 230/240 Vac Maximum 43 Black SL7-AP230-E 2 2 2 2 SL7-AP_-M Multi-Tone; Eight Tones, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1 Adjustable with internal DIP switch. Sound pressure 100 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer. f = 500–2700 Hz. 2 2 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Rated Operational Current (Ie mA) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 115 Black 110/120 Vac Maximum 45 Black SL7-AP120-M 230/240 Vac Maximum 43 Black SL7-AP230-M Function Sound Type Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL7-AP24-M 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Place only at the highest position on a pole. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-9 2.1 2 SL Series SL7 Base Modules For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules 2 2 Stacklights Description SL7-CB-_ 2 Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot Spring-loaded terminals Tube Length 100 mm 250 mm Color Black aluminum color tube Standard Pack 1 400 mm For use with … Catalog Number SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-100 SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-T-100 SL7-CB-250 SL7-CB-400 2 2 2 2 2 SL7-CB-T-_ Base with aluminum tube and 3/4 in NPT threaded base Spring-loaded terminals 2 100 mm 250 mm Black aluminum color tube 1 400 mm SL7-CB-T-250 SL7-CB-T-400 2 2 2 2 2 SL7-CB-IMH Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes Spring-loaded terminals — Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-IMH SL7-CB-IMS Base with built-in (pre-assembled) fixing screws Spring-loaded terminals — Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-IMS SL7-CB-EMH Base with external fixing holes Spring-loaded terminals — Black 1 SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-EMH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL7 Base Modules, continued 2 For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules, continued Tube Length Description SL7-FMS_ Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) Screw terminals 100 mm 250 mm Color Black aluminum color tube Standard Pack 1 400 mm 2 For use with … Catalog Number SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-FMS-100 SL7-FMS-250 SL7-FMS-400 2 2 2 2 2 SL7-SWD Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2 Maximum 0.3A per module External power supply connectable (24 Vdc) Configurable with SWD‐Assist (planning and ordering help) 100 mm — 1 SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… 2 SL7-SWD 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SL7-CB-FW 2 For Vertical Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules Description Color Standard Pack Vertical base with bracket Spring-loaded terminals Black 1 For use with … Catalog Number SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-FW 2 2 2 2 SL7-CB-D 2 For Mounting on Both Sides—Includes Cover, Maximum 2 x 5 Modules Description Color Standard Pack Base with external fixing holes Spring-loaded terminals Black 1 For use with … Catalog Number SL7-L-… SL7-BL-… SL7-FL-… SL7-AP-… SL7-CB-D 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-11 2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Component Identification—SL4 Component Identification 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Light Modes 2 Continuous Incandescent Flashing Strobe Multi-Strobe — — — 2 LED 2 V7-T2-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL4—Component Identification Descriptions Item Number Item Description Page Reference Acoustic Modules Sound pressure 80 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer, frequency 4000 Hz Easy mounting with bayonet mount, set up as highest module Permanently integrated cover plate Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor) Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 1 Continuous tone or pulsed tone, adjustable with internal DIP switches Frequency: 2800 Hz V7-T2-16 2 2 2 2 Incandescent Bulb 2 Accessory V7-T2-19 Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb 3 Accessory V7-T2-19 2 2 Light Modules Easy mounting with bayonet mount, modules can be arranged in any order Without light element (incandescent bulb with BA15d socket), easy mounting with bayonet mount. Operating mode: 100% DF (duty factor) Flashing frequency 2 Hz Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 2 2 2 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb Continuous light 4 BA15d socket, without incandescent bulb V7-T2-16 Light Modules with LED Continuous light 5 Flashing light 6 V7-T2-14 Strobe light 7 Flashing frequency: 1.4 Hz V7-T2-15 Strobe light, multi-strobe light 8 High-performance LED, with various strobe sequences Flashing frequency: 1–2.6 Hz V7-T2-16 Flashing frequency: 2 Hz V7-T2-15 2 2 2 2 Base Modules 2 Easy mounting with bayonet mount, includes cover plate, with spring-cage terminals Degree of protection: UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Base for mounting on both sides 9 Max. 2 x 5 modules that can be actuated individually V7-T2-17 Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot 10 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-17 Base with aluminum tube and threaded 1/2 in NPT 11 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-17 Base with external fixing holes 12 — V7-T2-17 Vertical base with bracket 13 — V7-T2-17 Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes 14 — V7-T2-17 Base with built-in fixing screws (pre-assembled) 15 — V7-T2-17 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) 16 Aluminum tube 100 mm, 250 mm or 400 mm V7-T2-17 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) and SmartWire-DT ™ connection 17 Aluminum tube 100 mm V7-T2-17 Bracket 18 Accessory V7-T2-19 Bracket 19 Accessory, includes M20 cable gland V7-T2-19 Mounting Bracket 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-13 2.1 Stacklights SL Series 2 Product Selection—SL4 2 Complete Devices 2 SL4-100-L-R_ Continuous Light, LED, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Number of Modules Color Function Standard Pack Catalog Number Base Module with Foot and 100 mm Tube 24 Vac/Vdc 2 2 Red/Green 3 Red/Amber/ Green 2 1 SL4-100-L-RG-24LED SL4-100-L-RAG-24LED 2 2 2 2 Light Module with LED 2 SL4-L_ Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 2 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Color 2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 2 2 Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL4-L24-B Green SL4-L24-G Red SL4-L24-R White SL4-L24-W Yellow SL4-L24-Y Amber 2 110/120 Vac 2 2 2 Blue SL4-L24-A 1 SL4-L120-G Red SL4-L120-R White SL4-L120-W Yellow SL4-L120-Y Amber 2 230/240 Vac 2 2 2 SL4-L120-B Green Blue SL4-L120-A 1 SL4-L230-B Green SL4-L230-G Red SL4-L230-R White SL4-L230-W Yellow SL4-L230-Y Amber SL4-L230-A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Light Module with LED, continued SL4-BL_ 2 Flashing Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 2 Hz Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Blue Function Catalog Number 1 SL4-BL24-B Green SL4-BL24-G Red SL4-BL24-R White SL4-BL24-W Yellow SL4-BL24-Y Amber 110/120 Vac 230/240 Vac 2 Standard Pack 2 2 2 2 SL4-BL24-A Blue 1 SL4-BL120-B Green SL4-BL120-G Red SL4-BL120-R White SL4-BL120-W Yellow SL4-BL120-Y Amber SL4-BL120-A Blue 1 2 2 2 2 SL4-BL230-B Green SL4-BL230-G Red SL4-BL230-R White SL4-BL230-W Yellow SL4-BL230-Y Amber SL4-BL230-A 2 2 2 2 SL4-FL_ 2 Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66, 1.4 Hz Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Color 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 110/120 Vac Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL4-FL24-B Green SL4-FL24-G Red SL4-FL24-R White SL4-FL24-W Yellow SL4-FL24-Y Amber SL4-FL24-A Blue 1 SL4-FL120-G Red SL4-FL120-R White SL4-FL120-W Yellow SL4-FL120-Y Blue 2 2 2 2 SL4-FL120-B Green Amber 230/240 Vac 2 2 2 2 SL4-FL120-A 1 SL4-FL230-B Green SL4-FL230-G Red SL4-FL230-R White SL4-FL230-W Yellow SL4-FL230-Y Amber SL4-FL230-A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-15 2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Light Module with LED, continued SL4-FL24-_-M Multi-Strobe Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Color Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL4-FL24-B-M LED for Effective Signaling Effect With Various Strobe Sequences, 1–2.6 Hz 2 24 Vac/Vdc Blue 2 Green SL4-FL24-G-M Red SL4-FL24-R-M 2 White SL4-FL24-W-M Yellow SL4-FL24-Y-M Amber SL4-FL24-A-M 2 2 2 2 SL4 Light Module for Incandescent Bulb SL4-L-_ 2 Continuous Light, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 For incandescent bulb selection, see Page V7-T2-19. Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Color Function Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL4-L-B Without Light Elements, Incandescent Bulb, Maximum 4W <250 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 2 Blue Green SL4-L-G Red SL4-L-R White SL4-L-W Yellow SL4-L-Y Amber SL4-L-A 2 2 SL4 Acoustic Modules 2 SL4-AP_ 2 Continuous Tone or Pulsed Tone, UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 Adjustable with internal DIP switches. Sound pressure 80 dB, adjustable with internal potentiometer. f = 4000 Hz. 2 Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) 2 Place only at the highest position on a pole. 24 Vac/Vdc Maximum 39 Black 2 110/120 Vac Maximum 21 Black SL4-AP120 230/240 Vac Maximum 21 Black SL4-AP230 Rated Operational Current (Ie mA) Color Function Sound Type Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 SL4-AP24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL4 Base Modules 2 For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules Description SL4-PIB-_ Base with aluminum tube and plastic foot Spring-loaded terminals Tube Length 100 mm 250 mm Color Black aluminum color tube Standard Pack 1 400 mm 2 For use with … Catalog Number SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-100 2 SL4-PIB-250 2 SL4-PIB-400 2 2 2 2 SL4-PIB-T-_ Base with aluminum tube and 3/4 in NPT threaded base Spring-loaded terminals 100 mm 250 mm Black aluminum color tube 1 400 mm SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-T-100 SL4-PIB-T-250 SL4-PIB-T-400 2 2 2 2 2 2 SL4-PIB-IMH Base with internal (on the inside) fixing holes Spring-loaded terminals — Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-IMH 2 2 2 2 2 SL4-PIB-IMS Base with built-in (pre-assembled) fixing screws Spring-loaded terminals — Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-IMS 2 2 2 2 SL4-PIB-EMH Base with external fixing holes Spring-loaded terminals — Black 1 SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-EMH 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-17 2.1 2 SL Series SL4 Base Modules, continued For Horizontal Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules, continued 2 2 Stacklights Tube Length Description SL4-FMS_ 2 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) Screw terminals 100 mm 250 mm Color Black aluminum color tube Standard Pack 1 400 mm For use with … Catalog Number SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-FMS-100 SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-SWD SL4-FMS-250 SL4-FMS-400 2 2 2 2 SL4-SWD 2 2 Base with base adapter for slipping onto place (rapid mounting and wiring system) Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2 Maximum 0.3A per module External power supply connectable (24 Vdc) Configurable with SWD‐Assist (planning and ordering help) 100 mm — 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 SL4-PIB-FW 2 2 For Vertical Mounting—Includes Cover, Maximum 5 Modules Description Color Standard Pack One-sided base with bracket Spring-loaded terminals Black 1 2 For use with … Catalog Number SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-FW 2 2 SL4-PIB-D 2 2 For Mounting on Both Sides—Includes Cover, Maximum 2 x 5 Modules Description Color Standard Pack Base with external fixing holes Spring-loaded terminals Black 1 For use with … Catalog Number SL4-L-… SL4-BL-… SL4-FL-… SL4-AP-… SL4-PIB-D 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Accessories 2 SL7 and SL4 Series 2 Mounting Brackets 2 Mounting Brackets for Vertical Mounting, Plastic SL7/4-FW Standard Pack 1 2 Catalog Number For Use With … SL4-PIB… SL7-CB... 2 SL7/4-FW 2 2 M20 Cable Gland for Vertical Mounting, Metal (Includes Mounting Bracket) SL7/4-FW-T Standard Pack 1 2 Catalog Number For Use With … SL4-PIB-T… SL7-CB-T... 2 SL7/4-FW-T 2 2 Incandescent Bulb Tool Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb SL7/4-BET Standard Pack 1 2 Catalog Number For Use With … SL7-L-… SL4-L-… 2 SL7/4-BET 2 2 2 Incandescent Bulbs 2 SL7 Series SL7-L12 Incandescent Bulbs, Mounting: Ba15d 2 Lifespan (h) Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Power (Watts) Standard Pack For Use With … Catalog Number 3000 12 5 1 SL7-L-… SL7-L12 24 6.5 SL7-L24 120 7 SL7-L120 230 6.5 SL7-L230 2 2 2 2 SL4 Series SL4-L12 2 Incandescent Bulbs, Mounting: Ba15d Lifespan (h) Rated Operational Voltage (Ue V) Power (Watts) Standard Pack For Use With … Catalog Number 3000 12 4 1 SL4-L-… SL4-L12 24 SL4-L24 120 SL4-L120 230 SL4-L230 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-19 2.1 Stacklights SL Series 2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 SL7 Series 2 2 SL7 General Specifications Description Specification Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, amber 2 Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base Max. 10 with base for mounting on both sides 2 Mechanical Ratings 2 2 2 Shock (IEC 68-2-27) 11 ms, 15g Vibration (IEC 68-2-6) 20 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 1g Climate Conditions Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60069-2-30 Operating temperature –22° to +140°F (–30° to +60°C) 2 Storage temperature –22° to +185°F (–30° to +85°C) 2 IEC degree of protection UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 IEC/EN 60529 2 Protection type UL Type 4/4X/13 Environmental Ratings Materials 2 Cover Polycarbonate Lenses Polycarbonate Stacklight base Polycarbonate 2 Tubes Aluminum 2 Solid or flexible conductor 0.13–2.5 mm2 Flexible with ferrule with plastic collar 0.25–1.5 mm2 AWG 24–AWG 14 2 2 Terminal Capacity Contacts 2 2 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 4000 Vac Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250V Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL7 Light Module Specifications SL7-L-…-… SL7-BL-…-… SL7-FL-…-… SL7-L24-…-HP SL7-FL24-…-HP SL7-FL24-…-HPM SL7-L-… 2 Type of light Continuous light Flashing light Strobe light Continuous light Strobe light Multi-strobe light Continuous light 2 Light elements LED LED LED High-performance LED High-performance LED High-performance LED Incandescent bulb (max. 7W) 2 2 Unit Mounting — — — — — — Ba15d Flashing/strobe frequency — 2 Hz 1.4 Hz — 1.4 Hz 1–2.6 Hz — Transmission angle 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° A < 0.003 < 0.003 <0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.049–0.054 0.058 0.130–0.135 0.170–0.200 0.260–0.265 0.260–0.265 — 110/120 Vac A 0.028–0.031 0.028–0.030 0.010 — — — — 230/240 Vac A 0.027–0.028 0.030–0.031 0.010 — — — — — — — — — — Max. 7W with the specified voltages 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 18–30 Vdc/ 18–26 Vac 18–30 Vdc/ 18–26 Vac 18–30 Vdc/ 18–26 Vac Up to 250 Vac/Vdc Leakage current 2 Current-/power consumption Power consumption Voltage levels Lifespan h 100,000 100,000 100,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 3000 Weight g 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-21 2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series SL7 Acoustic Module Specifications Unit SL7-AP… SL7-AP…-E SL7-AP…-M 2 Type of tone Continuous or pulsed tone Continuous or pulsed tone Continuous or pulsed tone Eight types of sound 2 Types of sound Two versions, table of sound types Two versions, table of sound types Eight versions, table of sound types 2 Sound setting 2 2 Internal; single-pole DIP Can be externally actuated Internal; three-pole DIP Max.: 100 Min.: 88 Max.: 100 Min.: 88 Max.: 100 Min.: 88 Sound pressure level adjustment Built-in, potentiometer Built-in, potentiometer Built-in, potentiometer Transmission angle 360° 360° 360° Sound pressure dB Current-/power consumption 2 2 2 2 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.092 0.092 0.115 110/120 Vac A 0.041 0.041 0.045 230/240 Vac A 0.043 0.043 0.043 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 102 102 102 Voltage levels Weight g 2 2 SL7 Table of Sound Types 2 Sound Type Diagram Repeat Rate Continuous tone Approx. 2800 — — 100 Pulsed tone Approx. 2800 Approx. 2 Hz — 100 Continuous tone Approx. 2800 — — 100 Pulsed tone Approx. 2800 Approx. 2 Hz — Continuous tone 2700 — ON Tone 01 100 2 Continuous tone 1350 — ON Tone 02 100 2 Pulsed tone 2700 250 ms on, 250 ms off ON Tone 03 100 2 Pulsed tone 1350 250 ms on, 250 ms off ON Tone 04 100 2 Falling 1200–500 1 Hz ON Tone 05 98 2 Rising 500–1200 Rising 3s, 0.5s off ON Tone 06 98 2 Alternating 800–1000 2 Hz ON Tone 07 94 2 rising/falling 500–1500 10 Hz ON Tone 08 94 2 SL7-AP… Frequency (Hz) Maximum Volume at 1M (dB) DIP Switch Position 2 SL7-AP…-E 2 SL7-AP…-M 100 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 SL4 Series 2 SL4 General Specifications Description 2 Specification Standards IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Lens color Blue, green, red, clear, yellow, orange Number of signal elements Max. 5 with standard base Max. 10 with base for mounting on both sides 2 Mounting position As required 2 2 Mechanical Ratings Mechanical shock resistance 2 >15g according to IEC 60068-2-27 Shock duration 11 ms Sinusoidal 2 Climate Conditions Climatic proofing Damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78 Damp heat, cyclic, to IEC 60069-2-30 2 Ambient temperature –22°F to +140°F (–30°C to +60°C) 2 Environmental Ratings 2 IEC degree of protection UL Type 4/4X/13, IP66 IEC/EN 60529 Protection type UL Type 4/4X/13 2 Enclosure Polycarbonate (PC), black 2 Cap Polycarbonate (PC) 2 Solid or flexible conductor 0.2–1.5 mm2 0.25–1.5 mm2 2 Solid or flexible conductor, with ferrule Flexible with ferrule with plastic collar 0.25–0.75 mm2 AWG 24–AWG 16 Materials Terminal Capacity 2 2 Contacts Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 4000 Vac Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 250V Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-23 2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series SL4 Light Module Specifications Unit SL4-L…-… SL4-BL…-… Type of light Continuous light Flashing light Light elements LED LED SL4-FL…-… SL4-FL24-…-M SL4-L… Strobe light Multi-strobe light Continuous light LED LED Incandescent bulb (max. 4W) Ba15d 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Mounting — — — — Flashing/strobe frequency — 2 Hz 1.4 Hz 1–2.6 Hz — Transmission angle 360° 360° 360° 360° 360° A < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.022–0.033 0.028–0.036 0.035–0.065 0.048–0.068 — 110/120 Vac A 0.030 0.030 0.10 — — 230/240 Vac A 0.030 0.030 0.10 — — — — — — Maximum 4W with the specified voltages 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% Up to 250 Vac/Vdc Leakage current Current/power consumption Power consumption Voltage levels Lifespan h 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 Weight g 45 45 45 45 45 SL4 Acoustic Module Specifications 2 2 Unit SL4-AP… Type of tone Continuous or pulsed tone Types of sound Two versions, table of sound types 2 Sound setting 2 Sound pressure level adjustment — Sound pressure can be lowered to a minimum of — Transmission angle 360° 2 2 2 2 Internal; single-pole DIP Sound pressure dB Current/power consumption 24 Vac/Vdc A 0.039 110/120 Vac A 0.021 230/240 Vac A Voltage levels 2 0.021 24 Vac/Vdc ± 10% 110/120 Vac ± 10% 230/240 Vac ± 10% 2 2 80 Weight g 43 SL4 Table of Sound Types 2 2 SL4-AP… 2 Diagram Repeat Rate Maximum Volume at 1M (dB) Sound Type Frequency (Hz) Continuous tone Approx. 4000 — 80 Pulsed tone Approx. 4000 Approx. 2 Hz 80 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Dimensions 2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 SL7 Series Complete Devices SL7-100-L-RG-24LED 2 Light Modules SL7-100-L-RYG-24LED SL7-(B)(F)L… 2 2 2.40 (61.0) 2 2 2 Ø2.87 (Ø73.0) 11.61 (295.0) 14.02 (356.0) 2 Acoustic Modules 2 SL7-AP… 2 2 2.80 (71.0) 2 2 Ø2.88 (Ø73.2) Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 2 2 2 Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-25 2.1 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Basic Modules SL7-CB-T… SL7-CB-… SL7-CB-D 2 2 2 2 A 4.68 (119.0) A 2 1.22 (31.0) 2 2 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø2.83 (Ø72.0) 3.23 (82.0) M20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number A SL7-CB-T-100 7.48 (190.0) SL7-CB-T-250 13.38 (340.0) SL7-CB-T-400 19.29 (490.0) 3.78 (96.0) 3.31 (84.0) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Catalog Number A SL7-CB-100 6.73 (171.0) SL7-CB-250 12.64 (321.0) SL7-CB-400 18.54 (471.0) SL7-CB-EMH 2 3.25 (82.5) 2 2 2 Ø3.94 (Ø100.0) 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø3.35 (Ø85.0) 2 2 V7-T2-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL7-CB-FW 2 SL7-CB-IMS 2 2 2 3.23 (82.0) 2 4.21 (107.0) 2 Ø0.24 (Ø6.0) M5 2.05 (52.0) 2.76 (70.0) 2 0.79 (20.0) 2 2.87 (73.0) 3.54 (90.0) 2 SL7-SWD 1 SL7-FMS-… 2 2 3.31 (84.0) 2 2 A 7.56 (192.0) SL7-CB-IMH 2 2 2 3.23 (82.0) 2 Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) 2 2 2.87 (72.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø2.05 (Ø52.0) Catalog Number A SL7-FMS-100 7.55 (192.0) SL7-FMS-250 13.46 (342.0) SL7-FMS-400 19.37 (192.0) 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 For connecting to SmartWire-DT. 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-27 2.1 2 2 2 Stacklights SL Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL4 Series Complete Devices Light Modules SL4-100-L-RG-24LED SL4-100-L-RYG-24LED SL4-(B)(F)L… 2 2 2.44 (62.0) 2 2 1.69 (43.0) 2 10.28 (261.0) 12.72 (323.0) 2 Acoustic Modules SL4-AP… 2 2 2.80 (71.0) 2 2 2 Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 1.73 (44.0) 2 Ø2.84 (Ø72.0) 2 2 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Basic Modules SL4-PIB-T… SL4-PIB-… 2 SL4-PIB-D 2 2 2 A 3.82 (97.0) A 2 1.38 (35.0) 2 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.9) Ø2.83 (Ø72.0) 2 1.77 (45.0) M20 2 Catalog Number A SL4-PIB-T-100 5.90 (150.0) SL4-PIB-T-250 11.81 (300.0) SL4-PIB-T-400 17.72 (450.0) 2 2.21 (56.0) 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2.44 (62.0) Catalog Number A SL4-PIB-100 3.53 (136.0) SL4-PIB-250 11.26 (286.0) SL4-PIB-400 17.16 (436.0) 2 2 SL4-PIB-EMH 2 2 2.24 (57.0) 2 2 Ø2.72 (Ø69.0) 2 2 2 2 2 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-29 2.1 2 Stacklights SL Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SL4-PIB-FW SL4-PIB-IMS 2 2 2 2.24 (57.0) 3.15 (80.0) 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) 2 M5 0.83 (21.0) 0.87 (22.0) 2 1.77 (45.0) 2 1.69 (43.0) SL4-SWD 1 SL4-FMS-… 2 2.21 (56.0) 2 2 2 2 2.56 (65.0) A 6.18 (157.0) SL4-PIB-IMH 2 2 2.24 (57.0) 2 2 Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) Ø3.15 (Ø80.0) 1.34 (43.0) 2 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 Ø0.23 (Ø5.8) Ø0.87 (Ø22.0) 2 2 2 Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) Catalog Number A SL4-FMS-100 6.18 (157.0) SL4-FMS-250 12.09 (307.0) SL4-FMS-400 17.99 (457.0) Note 1 For connecting to SmartWire-DT. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights SL Series 2.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 Mounting Brackets Incandescent Bulbs SL7/4-FW SL7-L12 and SL4-L12 2 2 Ø0.25 (Ø6.4) 1.38 (35.0) 1.81 (46.0) 1.97 (50.0) 2.83 (72.0) 2 Ø0.51 (Ø13.0) 2 Ø0.60 (Ø15.3) 2 3.58 (91.0) 0.67 (17.0) 2 2 Ø0.64 (Ø16.2) 2 2 Tool for Replacing Incandescent Bulb SL7/4-BET Ø0.22 (Ø5.5) 2 2 Ø2.13 (Ø54.0) 2.97 (75.5) SL7/4-FW-T 2 0.94 (24.0) 2.56 (65.0) 2.76 (70.0) 2 2.13 (54.0) Ø0.47 (Ø12.0) Ø0.79 (Ø20.0) 2 2 2 1.73 (44.0) 2 1.38 (35.0) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-31 2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Contents Stacklights—E26 Series Description 2 Page E26 Series Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-33 V7-T2-34 V7-T2-35 V7-T2-40 V7-T2-41 V7-T2-42 V7-T2-43 V7-T2-44 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Description Features The E26 stacklight unit is a modular system that provides illuminated and audible status indication in all directions. Easily assembled plug-in modular units include constant, flashing and strobe light units, as well as monotonal, bi-tonal, intermittent audible alarms. Stacklights may be assembled in a variety of configurations, which are identified in the Maximum Configurations table on Page V7-T2-33. Several lamp, color and mounting options further enhance the stacklight’s versatility. ● 2 ● ● ● Modular construction Six lens colors Variety of lamp types and voltages Mono-tonal, bi-tonal and intermittent audible alarms Benefits ● ● ● ● Combination of visible and audible alarms Modular components reduce inventory requirements, increase flexibility Steady and flashing modes allow one light to signal multiple conditions No-tools assembly permits easy lamp replacement Standards and Certifications ● ● ● CE 60947-5-1 UL 508—File No. E131568 cUL C22.2 No. 14—File No. E131568 Ingress Protection ● Stacklight base and light units: IP65, NEMA 4, 4X and 13 ● Alarm units: IP20, NEMA 1 Electrical Shock Protection ● Stacklight base and light unit: IP2X ● Alarm units: IP0X 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 2.2 Stacklights E26 Series Product Identification 2 Complete Stacklight Modules ● Level 3 Level 2 Standard Stacklight Base For use with incandescent or standard LEDs for steady, non-flashing illumination or with flashing LEDs for flashing illumination. Bases include terminal block for wiring, stacklight cover and gasket. See Page V7-T2-38. Flashing Stacklight Base Allows configuration of each light in the stack for either steady or 60 times per minute flashing illumination. Flashing circuit for use with incandescent lamps only. (Maximum allowable number of light modules is 2 at 12V, 4 at 24V and 6 at 48V and above.) See Page V7-T2-38. For flashing LEDs use standard base with flashing LED light module. Level 1 Xenon Strobe Sets are similar to standard lens/diffuser units, except each set consists of two lens units. The lower unit includes the electronics and is permanently fused to the upper unit which contains the Xenon lamp. Xenon units may be placed in any position in a complete stacklight unit. They will flash 60 times per minute when used with a standard or flashing base. See Page V7-T2-36. Alarms ● Stacklight Base Stacklights accept a maximum of six incandescent or LED light modules or two Xenon Flasher modules and can be mounted in any position on the stack. Alarm units are mounted in the top most position only. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Extension Tube 2 Mounting Base 2 2 2 Maximum Configurations Incandescent or LED Modules Xenon Modules Alarm Modules Max. Number of Modules 6 — — 6 5 — 1 6 4 1 — 5 3 1 1 5 2 2 — 4 1 2 1 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 May be fitted to the top of a complete stacklight unit or directly to the stacklight bases, if desired. Available in three versions, each with adjustable sound levels. See Page V7-T2-39. 2 2 2 2 2 Light Modules 2 Available in a variety of colors for both incandescent lamps and LED lamps. To maximize illumination and light dispersion, incandescent units include an opal white diffuser while LED diffusers are clear. See Page V7-T2-36. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-33 2.2 2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Catalog Number Selection Stacklight Catalog Numbering System E26X 9 KM L 39R W – V 4 2 2 Mounting Base 1 Description Code 2 W 4 8 9 2 None (base mount) 3/4 in NPT hub, chrome Standard three-hole Standard four-hole 2 2 Code 2 W HM JM KM MM 2 2 HU JU KU MU RU 2 2 Extension Tube 5 Description None (base mount) Gray Aluminum 20 mm 3/4 in NPT 160 mm 3/4 in NPT 360 mm 3/4 in NPT 760 mm 3/4 in NPT Black Aluminum 20 mm 3/4 in NPT 160 mm 3/4 in NPT 360 mm 3/4 in NPT 760 mm 3/4 in NPT Right angle 3/4 in NPT 2 Code 2 L F 2 Component Catalog No. — E26S104 E26S108 E26S109 Code W Q N P Component Catalog No. — E26BHM E26BJM E26BKM E26BMM E26BHU E26BJU E26BKU E26BMU E26BRU Stacklight Base Description Component Catalog No. 2 Standard E26BL E26BF_ Flashing 6 M E U V K Z X0 X2 X3 X4 X6 X9 2 2 2 2 None Mono-tonal Bi-tonal Intermittent Code V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 4 Component Catalog No. 2 — E26BQ_ E26BN_ E26BP_ Light Module Description Code 0 2 3 4 6 9 W R G Y B A W1 R1 G1 Y1 B1 A1 Alarm Description Voltage 3 Description 12V 24V 48V 120V 240V Component Catalog No. 2 E26B0_ E26B2_ E26B3_ E26B4_ E26B6_ E26B9_ E26BW_ E26BR_ E26BG_ E26BY_ E26BB_ E26BA_ E26BW1_ E26BR1_ E26BG1_ E26BY1_ E26BB1_ E26BA1_ Clear incandescent Red incandescent Green incandescent Yellow incandescent Blue incandescent Amber incandescent White cluster LED with clear lens Red cluster LED with red lens Green cluster LED with green lens Yellow cluster LED with yellow lens Blue cluster LED with blue lens Amber cluster LED with amber lens White cylindrical LED with clear lens 4 Red cylindrical LED with red lens 4 Green cylindrical LED with green lens 4 Yellow cylindrical LED with yellow lens 4 Blue cylindrical LED with blue lens 4 Amber cylindrical LED with amber lens 4 Flashing white cluster LED with clear lens Flashing red cluster LED with red lens Flashing green cluster LED with green lens Flashing yellow cluster LED with yellow lens Flashing blue cluster LED with blue lens Flashing amber cluster LED with amber lens Xenon flasher with clear lens Xenon flasher with red lens Xenon flasher with green lens Xenon flasher with yellow lens Xenon flasher with blue lens Xenon flasher with amber lens E26BM_ E26BE_ E26BU_ E26BV_ E26BK_ E26BZ_ E26BX0_ E26BX2_ E26BX3_ E26BX4_ E26BX6_ E26BX9_ 2 2 2 Voltage Codes Voltage Code Incandescent Lamp Cluster LED Cylindrical LED Xenon Flasher Flasher Base/Alarm (Blank) No lamp supplied No LED supplied No LED supplied — — 2 V1 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc V2 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 2 V3 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc V4 120 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac/Vdc V5 240 Vac/Vdc 240 Vac — 240 Vac 240 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Unless base mount is specified, an extension tube must be selected for a complete unit. 2 Component catalog numbers for flashing bases, alarm units and light modules are incomplete and require the addition of a suffix code to specify the required voltage rating. See table above. 3 If no voltage is specified, assembled stacklight will be supplied without lamps or LEDs. 4 240V not available for cylindrical LEDs. 5 For complete length (extension tube and base), see Page V7-T2-39. 6 Flashing base is for use with incandescent lamps. 2 V7-T2-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com 2.2 Stacklights E26 Series Product Selection 2 Assembled Units 2 One-, Two- and Three-Light Assembled Stacklights ● Base mountable ● Incandescent or LED versions ● 24V and 120V versions 2 2 2 One-Light Unit Stacklight Volts AC/DC Alarm First Level Color Illumination Type Catalog Number 24V None Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL2W-V2 24V None Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLR1W-V2 24V None Green Incandescent—steady E26XWWL3W-V2 24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1W-V2 24V None Amber Incandescent—steady E26XWWL9W-V2 24V None Amber Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLA1W-V2 120V None Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL2W-V4 120V 1 None Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLR1W-V4 120V None Green Incandescent—steady E26XWWL3W-V4 120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1W-V4 120V None Amber Incandescent—steady E26XWWL9W-V4 120V 1 None Amber Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLA1W-V4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Two-Light Unit Stacklight Volts AC/DC 24V 2 Alarm First Level Color Illumination Type Second Level Color None Green Illumination Type Catalog Number Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL32W-V2 24V None Green Cylindrical LED—steady 120V None Green Incandescent—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V2 Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL32W-V4 120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V4 2 2 2 2 Three-Light Unit Stacklight Volts AC/DC 24V 24V Alarm First Level Color None Green None Green Illumination Type Second Level Color Incandescent—steady Amber Cylindrical LED—steady 2 Illumination Type Third Level Color Illumination Type Catalog Number Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL392W-V2 Amber Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V2 2 120V None Green Incandescent—steady Amber Incandescent—steady Red Incandescent—steady E26XWWL392W-V4 120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED—steady Amber Cylindrical LED—steady Red Cylindrical LED—steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V4 2 2 2 Note 1 LED modules have very low current draw and should not be used with triac output devices like PLC triac output modules. It is recommended that dry contact outputs be used to switch 120 Vac modules. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-35 2.2 2 2 Light modules include lens diffusers which provide even illumination and eliminate hot spots. 2 Light/LED Module 2 Without bulb or LED 2 Xenon Strobe Module 2 2 12 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 24 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 48 Vac/Vdc 2 2 2 2 120 Vac 2 2 2 2 240 Vac 2 2 2 2 ● Xenon strobes emit a bright attention-getting white flashing light. Flash rate = 60/min. ● Xenon strobe modules occupy two positions in the stacklight assembly. Light and Xenon Strobe Modules 1 LED/Lamp Voltage 2 2 E26 Series Light and Xenon Strobe Modules ● 2 Stacklights 2 Incandescent Cylindrical LED Cluster LED Cluster LED Xenon Lens Color Steady or Flashing Catalog Number Steady Only Catalog Number Steady Catalog Number Flashing Catalog Number Flashing Catalog Number Red E26B2 E26B E26BR E26BR — Green E26B3 E26BG E26BG E26BG — Yellow E26B4 E26BY E26BY E26BY — Blue E26B6 E26BB E26BB E26BB — Amber E26B9 E26BA E26BA E26BA — Clear E26B0 E26BW E26BW E26BW — Red E26B2V1 E26BR1V1 E26BRV1 E26BEV1 E26BX2V1 Green E26B3V1 E26BG1V1 E26BGV1 E26BUV1 E26BX3V1 Yellow E26B4V1 E26BY1V1 E26BYV1 E26BVV1 E26BX4V1 Blue E26B6V1 E26BB1V1 E26BBV1 E26BKV1 E26BX6V1 Amber E26B9V1 E26BA1V1 E26BAV1 E26BZV1 E26BX9V1 Clear E26B0V1 E26BW1V1 E26BWV1 E26BMV1 E26BX0V1 Red E26B2V2 E26BR1V2 E26BRV2 E26BEV2 E26BX2V2 Green E26B3V2 E26BG1V2 E26BGV2 E26BUV2 E26BX3V2 Yellow E26B4V2 E26BY1V2 E26BYV2 E26BVV2 E26BX4V2 Blue E26B6V2 E26BB1V2 E26BBV2 E26BKV2 E26BX6V2 Amber E26B9V2 E26BA1V2 E26BAV2 E26BZV2 E26BX9V2 Clear E26B0V2 E26BW1V2 E26BWV2 E26BMV2 E26BX0V2 Red E26B2V3 E26BR1V3 E26BRV3 E26BEV3 E26BX2V3 Green E26B3V3 E26BG1V3 E26BGV3 E26BUV3 E26BX3V3 Yellow E26B4V3 E26BY1V3 E26BYV3 E26BVV3 E26BX4V3 Blue E26B6V3 E26BB1V3 E26BBV3 E26BKV3 E26BX6V3 Amber E26B9V3 E26BA1V3 E26BAV3 E26BZV3 E26BX9V3 Clear E26B0V3 E26BW1V3 E26BWV3 E26BMV3 E26BX0V3 Red E26B2V4 E26BR1V4 E26BRV4 E26BEV4 E26BX2V4 Green E26B3V4 E26BG1V4 E26BGV4 E26BUV4 E26BX3V4 Yellow E26B4V4 E26BY1V4 E26BYV4 E26BVV4 E26BX4V4 Blue E26B6V4 E26BB1V4 E26BBV4 E26BKV4 E26BX6V4 Amber E26B9V4 E26BA1V4 E26BAV4 E26BZV4 E26BX9V4 Clear E26B0V4 E26BW1V4 E26BWV4 E26BMV4 E26BX0V4 Red E26B2V5 — E26BRV5 E26BEV5 E26BX2V5 Green E26B3V5 — E26BGV5 E26BUV5 E26BX3V5 Yellow E26B4V5 — E26BYV5 E26BVV5 E26BX4V5 Blue E26B6V5 — E26BBV5 E26BKV5 E26BX6V5 Amber E26B9V5 — E26BAV5 E26BZV5 E26BX9V5 Clear E26B0V5 — E26BWV5 E26BMV5 E26BX0V5 Notes 1 Include lens, diffusers and lamps unless otherwise noted. 2 Incandescent bulbs are AC/DC rated, LEDs are AC rated only. 2 2 2 V7-T2-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 LEDs—Cylindrical or Cluster Cylindrical Stacklight LED 2 Cylindrical or Cluster LEDs Cylindrical LED Cluster LED Cluster LED 2 Voltage Color Steady Only Catalog Number Steady Catalog Number Flashing Catalog Number 2 12 Vac/Vdc Red E26S110 E26S15 E26S48 Green E26S114 E26S19 E26S53 2 Yellow E26S112 E26S23 E26S58 Blue E26S115 E26S27 E26S63 White E26S116 E26S71 E26S75 Amber E26S111 E26S79 E26S84 Red E26S117 E26S16 E26S49 Green E26S121 E26S20 E26S54 Yellow E26S119 E26S24 E26S59 Blue E26S122 E26S28 E26S64 White E26S123 E26S72 E26S76 Cluster LED 24 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/Vdc 240 Vac/Vdc Amber E26S118 E26S80 E26S85 Red E26S124 E26S17 E26S50 Green E26S128 E26S21 E26S55 Yellow E26S126 E26S25 E26S60 Blue E26S129 E26S29 E26S65 White E26S130 E26S73 E26S77 Amber E26S125 E26S81 E26S86 Red E26S138 E26S18 E26S51 Green E26S142 E26S22 E26S56 Yellow E26S140 E26S26 E26S61 Blue E26S143 E26S30 E26S66 White — E26S74 E26S78 Amber E26S139 E26S82 E26S87 Red — E26S44 E26S52 Green — E26S45 E26S57 Yellow — E26S46 E26S62 Blue — E26S47 E26S67 White — E26S101 E26S102 Amber — E26S83 E26S88 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-37 2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Mounting Bases Components Standard Base Flashing Base 2 2 C or 5 2 2 or 4 3 or or 7 8 2 1 or - C 2 Factory Wiring or Field Wiring - C 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 External Switching Devices Supply Flashing Circuit 8 External Switching Devices Supply 7 Description Steady Circuit 9 10 Voltage Catalog Number 12 Vac/Vdc to 240 Vac/Vdc E26BL 12 Vdc E26BFV1 24 Vac/Vdc E26BFV2 2 48 Vac/Vdc E26BFV3 120 Vac/Vdc E26BFV4 2 240 Vac/Vdc E26BFV5 Voltage Catalog Number Standard Base For use with steady incandescent or steady/flashing LED 2 Flashing Base Enables configuration of incandescent light modules for steady or flashing operation 2 2 2 Flasher Max. Allowable No. of Light Modules 12 Vdc 2 24 Vac/Vdc 4 48 Vac/Vdc 6 120 Vac/Vdc 6 240 Vac/Vdc 6 Flasher Base Voltage Flashing Orange Module Wire 2 2 Orange Flasher Wire 6 2 2 9 10 2 1 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 2 2 C 1 2 3 2 2 1 2 or 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 4 or 6 2 2 1 2 2 or 6 Mounting Bases and Hubs Description Standard Three-Hole Mounting Base Mounting Base Standard three-hole mounting base — E26S108 Standard Four-Hole Mounting Base Standard four-hole mounting base — E26S109 Myers Type Hub Myers Type Hub — E26S104 2 2 2 2 2 3/4 in NPT threaded hub 2 2 Notes 1 Audible alarm units must be wired via the steady circuit on flashing base units. 2 Audible alarm units can be wired in positions as shown but only one unit is permitted on each stack and unit must occupy the last or top mounting position. 2 2 V7-T2-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Alarm Units and Extension Tubes Components 2 Audible Alarm Units-NEMA Type 1 (IP20) E26B_ Description 1 2 Voltage Catalog Number 12 Vac/Vdc E26BQV1 12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BQV2 9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BQV3 11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BQV4 5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BQV5 2 4.5 mA 12 Vac/Vdc E26BNV1 2 12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BNV2 9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BNV3 11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BNV4 5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BNV5 12 Vac/Vdc E26BPV1 12.6 mA 24 Vac/Vdc E26BPV2 9.4 mA 48 Vac/Vdc E26BPV3 11.5 mA 120 Vac/Vdc E26BPV4 5.1 mA 240 Vac/Vdc E26BPV5 2 Mono-Tonal 4.5 mA 2 2 Bi-Tonal 2 2 2 Intermittent 4.5 mA 2 2 2 2 Extension Tubes Voltage Catalog Number 2 0.79 in (20 mm) extension — E26BHM 2 6.30 in (160 mm) extension — E26BJM 14.17 in (360 mm) extension — E26BKM 29.92 in (760 mm) extension — E26BMM 2 0.79 in (20 mm) extension — E26BHU 2 6.30 in (160 mm) extension — E26BJU 14.17 in (360 mm) extension — E26BKU 29.92 in (760 mm) extension — E26BMU Right angle extension tube — E26BRU Description Extension Tube A Extension Tube A E26BRU Extension “A” 2 2 Extension “A” 3 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Volume adjustment range: 64 dB to 90 dB typical current draw (mA). 2 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—gray aluminum. 3 For use with standard mounting base or 3/4 in NPT threaded hub—black aluminum. 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-39 2.2 Stacklights E26 Series 2 Replacement Parts 2 Stacklight Replacement Parts 2 Description Notes Replacement cover Normally included with stacklight base 1 E26S68 Replacement lens O-ring Normally included with light modules 2 E26S106 1 Replacement lenses Clear 3 E26S38 2 2 Typical Stacklight Assemblies Number in Diagram Catalog Number 2 Red E26S39 Green E26S40 2 Yellow E26S41 Blue E26S42 2 2 Amber Replacement Xenon strobe dual high (does not include lenses) 2 2 2 Replacement diffusers E26S34 48 Vac/Vdc E26S35 120 Vac E26S36 2 2 12V 4 Light Diffuser Lamp 5 E26S31 Terminal Board E26S32 5 E26S8 24V E26S9 48V E26S10 120V E26S11 240V E26S12 2 Replacement extension tube O-rings Normally included with extension tubes 6 E26S107 2 Replacement mounting gasket 4 Normally included with stacklight base 7 E26S105 Lamp removal tool For E26 and E22 incandescent lamps 2 Lens 3 E26S37 4 Clear — normally supplied with LED light modules Replacement lamps 2 2 O-Ring E26S33 24 Vac/Vdc White — normally supplied with incandescent light modules Alarm E26S43 4 240 Vac 2 2 12 Vac/Vdc 1 Cover O-Ring 2 3 E22BA3 Set Screw Recommended Tightening Torque Is 7 in-lb (0.79 Nm) 7 Mounting Gasket Stacklight Base O-Rings 6 Extension Tube 2 2 Mounting Base 2 Typical Stacklight Assembly (Exploded View) 2 2 2 Panel 2 Myers Type ST-2 or ST-2CP Hub 2 Alternate Conduit Hub 2 2 2 Notes 1 Sold in packages of 5 pieces. 2 For replacement LEDs, see table on Page V7-T2-37. 3 Sold in packages of 10 pieces. 4 Mounting gaskets have two sets of mounting holes—one set with center-to-center spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm). V7-T2-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Technical Data and Specifications 2 General Specifications Description 2 Specification Mechanical Ratings Shock (IEC 68-2-27) 2 11 ms, 15g Vibration (IEC 68-2-6) 10 sweeps 10–150 Hz, 2g Bump (IEC 68-2-29) 1000 pulses, 6 ms, 15g 2 2 Climate Conditions Operating Maximum 104°F (40°C) at 95% RH, Temperature –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) Storage Temperature –40° to 176°F (–40° to 80°C) 2 2 Materials Cover Polycarbonate Lenses Polycarbonate Stacklight base Nylon Extension tubes Aluminum Mounting base Zinc die cast 2 Single conductor 14–30 AWG (2.5–0.05 mm2) 2 Two conductors (same size)) 18–26 AWG (0.75–0.14 mm2) Do not mix solid and stranded wire in the same terminal 2 Recommended tightening torque 4.4–5.3 lb-in (0.5–0.6 Nm) 2 Insulation voltage (Ui) 690V 2 Operational voltage (Ue) 250V Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) 1.5 kV 2 Incandescent lamp type BA15d 2 Maximum lamp wattage 6W 2 Incandescent 7,000 to 12,000 hrs. (based on voltage) 2 Xenon flasher 20,000 hrs. LED 60,000 to 100,000 hrs. (based on colors) 2 2 Terminals Electrical Ratings Bulb Specifications Bulbs—average life 2 LED/Incandescent Comparison Incandescent lamps Average operating life of 7,000 hours Each lamp can be used with any color lens Low cost results in short term savings LED lamps Average operating life of 60,000 to 100,000 hours Low power consumption Extended life results in long-term savings 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-41 2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Ratings 2 Published theoretical lamp lives are based on ideal laboratory conditions and should be used for comparison only. Actual life may be shorter due to various application conditions. 2 Stacklight Incandescent Application Data 2 Type of Light Lamp Used Approximate Current, mA per Light Theoretical Lamp Life, Hours as Applied 2 12V BA15d 417 7,000 24V BA15d 208 7,000 48V BA15d 104 7,000 110–140V BA15d 36–50 7,000 220–260V BA15d 23–27 12,000 2 2 2 Xenon Flasher Application Data 2 Type of Light 2 12V 2 24V 2 48V Lamp Used Approximate Current, mA per Light LED Application Data Type of Light Color Cluster LED Approximate Current, mA at Rated Volts Cylindrical LED Approximate Current, mA at Rated Volts Theoretical Lamp Life, Hours as Applied Continuous/Flashing Stacklight LED 12 Vac/Vdc Theoretical Lamp Life, Hours as Applied 24 Vac/Vdc Red 92 92 100,000 Amber 92 92 100,000 Yellow 92 92 100,000 Green 60 60 80,000 Blue 60 60 60,000 White 60 60 60,000 Red 47 47 100,000 100,000 DC 460 mA 20,000 AC 780 mA 20,000 Amber 47 47 20,000 Yellow 47 47 100,000 59 59 80,000 60,000 DC 190 mA AC 320 mA 20,000 Green DC 100 mA 20,000 Blue 59 59 AC 150 mA 20,000 White 59 59 60,000 Red 25 25 100,000 Amber 25 25 100,000 Yellow 25 25 100,000 2 Green 18 18 80,000 Blue 31 31 60,000 2 White 31 31 60,000 Red 25 25 100,000 Amber 25 25 100,000 2 Yellow 25 25 100,000 Green 18 18 80,000 2 Blue 17 17 60,000 White 17 17 60,000 Red 24 24 100,000 Amber 24 24 100,000 2 2 1 20,000 20,000 120V AC 60 mA 240V AC 30 mA 1 48 Vac/Vdc 60 Vac/Vdc 2 2 120 Vac/Vdc 2 Yellow 24 24 100,000 2 Green 17 17 80,000 Blue 16 16 60,000 2 White 16 16 60,000 Note 1 Represents average current draw, 1.6A peak for 120V and 0.8A peak at 240V. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Mounting Instructions Stacklight bases may be mounted without the use of an extension tube or mounting base. If additional height is required, choose Base Mounting Customer Supplied 0.8–30 in (20–760 mm) extension tubes that fit between the mounting base and stacklight base. The extension tubes are threaded with 3/4 in NPT threads, allowing for direct connection to conduit fittings or threaded holes without the use of a mounting base. Utilizing Extension Tube and Mounting Base Utilizing Extension Tube and 3/4 In (19.1 mm) Conduit Hub Set Screw Recommended Tightening Torque Is 7 in-lb (0.79 Nm) Set Screw Recommended Tightening Torque Is 7 in-lb (0.79 Nm) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Stacklight Base Stacklight Base Mounting Gasket Panel Stacklight Base O-Rings O-Rings Extension Tube Extension Tube Mounting Base Myers Type ST-2 or ST-2CP Hub Mounting Gasket Customer Supplied 2 2 2 2 2 2 Panel 2 Panel 2 2 (Use Rubber-Jawed Pliers for Installation to Avoid Scratching the Black Anodized Coating) 2 2 Mounting Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Base Mounting 0.18 (4.6) Dia. or #8–32 Thread or (M4 x 0.7) 2 Three-Hole Mounting for E26S108 Four-Hole Mounting for E26S109 1.06 Dia. (27) 2.12 (53.8) Dia. 1.92 (48.8) Dia. 2 2 0.87 (22.1) Dia. 0.87 (22.1) Dia. 0.87 Dia. (22.1) Conduit Hub for E26S104— 3/4 In (19.1 mm) 2 2 2 1.75 (44.5) or 1.65 (42.0) a 90° 120° 0.18 (4.6) Dia. or #8–32 Thread or (M4 x 0.7) 2 0.20 (5.08) Dia. or #10–32 Thread or (M5 x 0.7) 2 2 Note 1 Stacklight base and gasket are supplied as standard with two sets of base mount holes. One set with center-to-center spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm). 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-43 2.2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 2 Standard and Flashing Bases 1 Assembled Extension Tubes 2 2 1.75 (44) 2 2 2 2 2 2.32 (59) A Alarm Units 2.56 (65) 2 0.59 (15) 2 1.69 (42.9) 2 Tube Extension Height A 0.79 (20) 1.77 (45) 6.30 (160) 7.28 (185) 14.17 (360) 15.16 (385) 29.92 (760) 30.91 (785) Right Angle Extension Tubes 2 2 2.00 (50.8) 2 2 2.50 (63.5) 2 2 2 Notes 1 Bases also suitable for mounting with extension tubes listed on Page V7-T2-39. 2 Mounting gasket and cover are supplied as standard with stacklight bases. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Stacklights E26 Series 2.2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2 One-Light Unit Stacklight Standard 2 With Alarm With Xenon Flasher 2 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) 0.59 (15) 0.59 (15) 2.72 (69) 2.24 (57) 2 2.72 (69) Light Unit 2.72 (69) 1.73 (44) 2 Alarm Xenon Light Unit (2 High) Light Unit 2 2 2.72 (69) Base 1.73 (44) 2 Base 1.73 (44) Base 2 2 Two-Light Unit Stacklight Standard 2 With Alarm 2.56 (65) 2.56 (65) Light Unit 2.24 (57) 2 Xenon Light Unit (2 High) Light Unit Light Unit 2 2 2.72 (69) 2.72 (69) 1.73 (44) 2 Alarm 2.72 (69) 2.72 (69) 2.72 (69) 2 2.56 (65) 0.59 (15) 0.59 (15) 2.72 (69) With Xenon Flasher 2 Light Unit Base 1.73 (44) 2.72 (69) Light Unit 1.73 (44) Base 2 Base 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T2-45 2.2 2 2 Stacklights E26 Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Three-Light Unit Stacklight Standard 2 2.56 (65) 2 0.59 (15) 2 2.72 (69) 2 2.56 (65) 2.24 (57) Light Unit 2.56 (65) 2.72 (69) Light Unit 2.72 (69) Light Unit 1.73 (44) Base Alarm 2.72 (69) Light Unit Xenon Light Unit (2 High) 2.72 (69) 2.72 (69) 2 2 With Xenon Flasher 0.59 (15) 2.72 (69) 2 2 With Alarm 2.72 (69) 1.73 (44) 2 Light Unit 2.72 (69) Light Unit 2.72 (69) Light Unit 1.73 (44) Base Light Unit Base 2 2 2 2 Light Modules Standard a Xenon 2.56 (65) a 2 0.59 (15) 0.59 (15) 2 2.72 (69.1) 2.72 (69.1) 2.56 (65) 2 2.72 (69.1) 2 2 2 Note 1 Cover included with stacklight base. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V7-T2-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers easyRelay Programmable Relays 3.1 Relay Products Control Relays and Timers Comparison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 V7-T3-2 3 XR Series Terminal Block Relays Standard, OptoCoupler and High Current Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 3 V7-T3-3 3 Programmable Relays easy500, easy700, easy800, easy802/806 Relays and MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D1 Series General Purpose Relay 3.4 3 V7-T3-19 3.5 V7-T3-49 9575H Series 3000 Relay 3.6 V7-T3-122 D93, D96 and D99 Series V7-T3-126 D96 Series Solid-State Relay 3.7 D15, BF/BFD, AR/ARD and D26 Series 3.8 3 V7-T3-145 Timing Relays 3.9 V7-T3-171 Alternating Relays Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 V7-T3-192 Safety Relays 3.11 V7-T3-197 easySafety 3 3 ES4P Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 ESR5 Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 D85 Series Universal TR Series Timing Relay 3 3 Universal TR, TR and TMR Series Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 Machine Tool Relays Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 Solid-State Relays Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 General Purpose Open Style Relays 9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Relays—D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D7, D8 and D9 Series Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 V7-T3-203 3 3 Safety Relay 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-1 3.1 3 Control Relays and Timers Relay Product Overview Contents Relay Products Description 3 Page Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Type AA Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Machine Tool Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alternating Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-3 V7-T3-19 V7-T3-49 V7-T3-122 V7-T3-126 V7-T3-145 V7-T3-171 V7-T3-192 V7-T3-197 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Comparison 3 Selection Guide by Catalog Number Prefix Relays Type Mounting Contacts Maximum Amperage (AC) 9575H3 General purpose Panel mount Fixed 40A AR/ARD Machine tool Panel mount Convertible 10A 3 3 3 3 3 Page Number UL CSA CE — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-123 — ■ ■ — V7-T3-158 BF/BFD Machine tool Panel mount Fixed 10A ■ — ■ — V7-T3-152 D2PF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-60 D2PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / flange Fixed 10A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-60 ■ V7-T3-70 D3PF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 16A ■ — ■ D3PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 16A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-70 D4PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-79 3 D5PF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 16A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-84 D5PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / PC board Fixed 16A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-84 3 D7PF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 20A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-93 D7PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / flange Fixed 20A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-94 D8PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount / flange Fixed 30A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-107 — V7-T3-113 3 3 D9PR Standard plug-in Panel mounting Fixed 25A ■ — ■ D15 Machine tool DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-147 D26 Machine tool Panel or channel mount Convertible 10A — ■ ■ — V7-T3-163 D85 Alternating relays DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A ■ ■ — ■ V7-T3-193 D1PF Full featured plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 20A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-54 D1PR Standard plug-in DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 20A ■ — ■ ■ V7-T3-54 easyRelay Programmable relay DIN rail Fixed 8A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-23 3 TMR5 Timing relay (non-programmable) DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A ■ ■ — ■ V7-T3-184 TMR6 Timing relay (non-programmable) DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A ■ ■ — ■ V7-T3-188 3 TR Timing relay (programmable) DIN rail / panel mount Fixed 10A — ■ ■ — V7-T3-181 Universal TR Timing relay (programmable) DIN rail Fixed 8A — ■ ■ ■ V7-T3-177 XR Terminal block relay DIN rail Fixed 6A, 10A ■ — — ■ V7-T3-5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Contents Terminal Block Relays Description Page Terminal Block Relays Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 V7-T3-4 V7-T3-12 V7-T3-15 V7-T3-18 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 XR Series—Overview 3 XR U 1 D 12 G 3 Gold-Flashed Contacts Blank = No G = Yes Description XR = XR terminal block relay Connection Type U = Screw P = Spring R = Replacement relay 3 3 3 Poles 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT Type D = Standard relay S = Octocoupler (solid-state) H = High current 12 = 24 = 24U = 120U = 230U = Voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 230 Vac/220 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-3 3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Contents Standard Terminal Block Relay Description 3 Page Standard Terminal Block Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Schematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-5 V7-T3-6 V7-T3-11 V7-T3-11 V7-T3-12 V7-T3-15 V7-T3-18 3 3 3 3 3 Standard Terminal Block Relays 3 Product Description Application Description Features The XR Series Terminal Block Relays are ideal for applications that require a high switching capacity and long electrical service life. The relays are plug-in interfaces that connect to basic terminal blocks. The XR Series uses screw or spring-cage technology, as well as offers quick system wiring, superior safety features, clear labeling and a high level of modularity. Used in automation systems, electromechanical relays guarantee a safe connection between process I/O and electronic controls. The following functions are covered by relay coupling elements: ● 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● 3 ● ● 3 ● ● ● ● ● 3 ● Electrical isolation between the input and output circuits Independence of the type of switching current (AC and DC) High short-term overload resistance in the event of short circuits or voltage peaks Low switching losses Ease of operation ● ● Pluggable relay allows for field replacement Functional plug-in bridges Choice of screw connections or spring-cage connection LED status indication DIN rail mount Only 6.2 mm wide for single-pole versions, 14 mm wide for doublepole All common input voltages between 12 Vdc to 120 Vac ● ● Gold-plated contacts available Equipped with a robust, miniature relay: ● IP67 protection ● Environmentally friendly, cadmium-free contact material ● Easy, cost-effective installation and replacement using the engagement lever Standards and Certifications ● ● cULus listed CE 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Product Selection XRU1D 24U 3 Standard Terminal Block Relays Gold-Plated Contacts Rated Current Supply Voltage Standard Pack Catalog Number 3 3 1PDT Screw Connection No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU1D12 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120U Yes 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120UG No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1D24 No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24U Yes 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24UG No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRU1D230U 10 XRP1D12 3 3 3 3 3 1PDT Spring Cage Connection No 6A 12 Vdc No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRP1D120U No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRP1D24 No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRP1D24U No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRP1D230U 3 3 3 3 DPDT Screw Connection No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU2D12 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU2D120U No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU2D24 No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU2D24U No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRU2D230U 3 3 3 Standard Replacement Relays Gold-Plated Contacts Rated Current Supply Voltage 1 Standard Pack Catalog Number 3 3 1PDT No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRR1D12 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1D120U Yes 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1D120UG No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRR1D24 Yes 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRR1D24G No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRR2D12 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR2D120U No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRR2D24 No 6A 230 Vac/220 Vdc 10 XRR2D230U 3 3 3 3 DPDT 3 3 3 Note 1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay. 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-5 3.2 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Technical Data and Specifications Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRU1D12 XRU1D24 XRU1D24U Replacement Relay XRR1D12 XRR1D24 XRR1D24 XRU1D120U XRR1D120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 Connection Data Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 3 3 Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 Typical input current 15.3 mA 9 mA 11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc) 3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc) Typical response time 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 6 ms Typical release time 8 ms 8 ms 15 ms 15 ms 3 Input protection Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier 3 Output Data 3 3 3 3 3 Contact type 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT Contact material AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 Min. switching voltage 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc Limiting continuous current 6A 6A 6A 6A Min. switching current 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA Min. switching power 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW Miscellaneous Data Ambient temp range –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) 3 Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 3 Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 3 Note 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Standard 1PDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays with Gold Contacts Catalog Number 3 XRU1D24UG XRU1D120UG Replacement Relay XRR1D24G XRR1D120UG Input voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 3 3 3 Connection Data Input Data for 1PDT Screw Connection Versions with Gold Contacts Input voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 Typical input current 11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc) 3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc) Typical response time 6 ms 6 ms Typical release time 15 ms 15 ms Input protection Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier Contact type 1PDT 1PDT Contact material AgSnO, gold plated 1 3 3 3 Output Data 3 3 AgSnO, gold plated 1 2 30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) 2 Max. switching voltage 30 Vac/36 Vdc (250 Vac/Vdc) Min. switching voltage 100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 2 100 mV (12 Vac/Vdc) 2 Limiting continuous current 50 mA (6A) 2 50 mA (6A) 2 Min. switching current 1 mA (10 mA) 2 1 mA (10 mA) 2 Min. switching power 100 mW (120 mW) 2 100 mW (120 mW) 2 3 3 3 3 Miscellaneous Data Ambient temp range –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –40° to 131°F (–20° to 55°C) Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 3 3 Notes 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 2 If the maximum values are exceeded, the gold layer is destroyed and the values in parentheses apply. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-7 3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Standard 1PDT Spring Cage Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRP1D12 XRP1D24 XRP1D24U XRP1D120U 3 Replacement Relay XRR1D12 XRR1D24 XRR1D24 XRR1D120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 Connection Data Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 3 Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 Typical input current 15.3 mA 9 mA 11 mA (24 Vac)/8.5 mA (24 Vdc) 3.5 mA (120 Vac)/3 mA (110 Vdc) Typical response time 5 ms 5 ms 6 ms 6 ms Typical release time 8 ms 8 ms 15 ms 15 ms Input protection Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier 3 3 3 Output Data 3 Contact type 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT 1PDT Contact material AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO AgSnO 3 Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 Min. switching voltage 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc Limiting continuous current 6A 6A 6A 6A Min. switching current 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA Min. switching power 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW 120 mW 3 3 3 Miscellaneous Data Ambient temp range –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 131°F (–20° to 55°C) 3 Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 3 3 3 Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles Note 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.2 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Standard DPDT Screw Connection Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRU2D12 XRU2D24 XRU2D24U XRU2D120U 3 Replacement Relay XRR2D12 XRR2D24 XRR2D24 XRR2D120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 3 3 Connection Data Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions Input voltage 12 Vdc Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 Typical input current 33 mA 18 mA 17.5 mA 4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc) Typical response time 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 7 ms Typical release time 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms Input protection Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier 3 3 3 3 Output Data Contact type 2PDT Single contact, 2PDT Single contact, 2PDT Single contact, 2PDT Contact material AgNi AgNi AgNi AgNi Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc Min. switching voltage 5V 1 250 Vac/Vdc 1 5V 250 Vac/Vdc 1 5V 250 Vac/Vdc 3 1 3 5V Limiting continuous current 6A 6A 6A 6A Max. inrush current 15A (300 ms) 15A (300 ms) 15A (300 ms) 15A (300 ms) 3 3 Min. switching current 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA 10 mA Min. switching power 50 mW 50 mW 50 mW 50 mW 3 3 General Data Ambient temp range –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 Mechanical service life 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 3 Note 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-9 3.2 3 3 3 1.4 DPDT Relay Modules Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc 1.4 A 1.2 1.2 U 1.1 UN 1.0 U 1.1 UN 1.0 UN = 12 Vdc 0.9 0.9 0.8 0.8 B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 3 Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 1.4 Operating Range Voltage for 120 Vac/110 Vdc 1.4 A 1.2 1.2 3 U 1.1 UN 1.0 U 1.1 UN 1.0 3 0.9 UN = 110 Vdc/120 Vac B Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vdc 1.4 1.4 A 1.3 1.2 1.2 U 1.1 UN 1.0 3 UN = 24 Vdc 0.9 0.8 0.8 B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 1.4 Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc 1.4 A 3 1.3 1.2 1.2 3 U 1.1 UN 1.0 U 1.1 UN 1.0 3 0.9 UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac 3 3 UN = 24 Vdc/24 Vac 0.9 B 0.8 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 3 A 1.3 0.8 3 UN = 24 Vdc 0.9 Operating Range Voltage for 24 Vac/Vdc 3 A 1.3 U 1.1 UN 1.0 3 3 B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 3 3 UN = 110 Vdc 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 3 3 UN = 120 Vac 0.9 0.8 0.8 3 A 1.3 3 3 UN = 12 Vdc B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] 1.3 3 A 1.3 1.3 3 3 Terminal Block Relays Permissible Range Diagrams 1PDT Relay Modules Operating Range Voltage for 12 Vdc 3 3 Control Relays and Timers B 0.7 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 TN [°C] Notes General Conditions — Direct alignment in the block, all devices 100% operating factor, horizontal or vertical mounting. Curve A — Maximum permissible continuous operating voltage Umax with limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective technical data). Curve B — Minimum permissible relay operate voltage Uop after pre-excitation 1) (see respective technical data). 1 Pre-excitation: Relay has been operated in a thermally steady state at the ambient temperature TU with nominal voltage UN and limiting continuous current on the contact side (see respective technical data) (warm coil). After being switched off for a short time, the relay must reliably pick up again at Uop. V7-T3-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.2 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Electrical Schematics 1PDT Terminal Block Relays 3 DPDT Terminal Block Relays 3 3 21 24 A2 3 3 11 22 A2 14 A1 3 11 3 3 A1 12 14 3 3 12 3 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Standard 1PDT Terminal Block Relays 3 Standard DPDT Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 3 3.70 (94.0) 3.70 (94.0) 3 3 3 3 3.15 (80.0) 3.15 (80.0) 3 0.24 (6.2) 3 0.55 (14.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-11 3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Contents OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relay Description 3 Page Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-4 V7-T3-13 V7-T3-13 V7-T3-14 V7-T3-14 V7-T3-15 V7-T3-18 3 3 3 3 3 OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays 3 Product Description Application Description The XR Series OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays can be used in all applications and consist of a pluggable miniature OptoCoupler and a basic terminal block. The XR Series uses screw or springcage technology, as well as offers quick system wiring, superior safety features, clear labeling and a high level of modularity. The XR Series OptoCoupler relays can be used as an input or output interface. They provide the typical reliability of OptoCouplers and are especially suited for high operating frequencies. 3 3 3 3 3 Features ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 3 ● 3 ● 3 ● 3 Pluggable relay allows for field replacement Functional plug-in bridges LED status indication DIN rail mount Only 6.2 mm wide Switching capacity up to 24 Vdc/3A IP67-protected optical electronics Wear-resistant and bouncefree switching Insensitive to shock and vibration Integrated protection circuit Zero voltage switch at AC output Standards and Certifications ● ● cULus listed CE 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Product Selection 3 OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays XRU1S24 Rated Current Supply Voltage Standard Pack Catalog Number 2A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1S120U 2A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1S24 3 3 3 3 OptoCoupler Replacement Relays Rated Current Supply Voltage 1 Standard Pack Catalog Number 2A 24 Vdc 18 XRR1S24 2A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1S120U 3 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays Catalog Number XRU1S24 XRU1S120U Replacement Relay XRR1S24 XRR1S120U Input voltage 24 Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc 3 Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 3 Connection Data 3 Input Data Input voltage 24 Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Permissible range 0.8–1.2 0.8 –1.1 Typical input current 9 mA 4 mA Switching level 1 signal (“H”) >0.8 >0.8 Switching level 0 signal (“L”) <0.4 <0.25 Typical switch-on time 20 μS 6 ms Typical turn-off time 500 μS 10 ms Input protection Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Bridge rectifier Max. switching voltage 33 Vdc 33 Vdc Min. switching voltage 3 Vdc 3 Vdc Limiting continuous current 3A (See derating curve) 3A (See derating curve) Max. inrush current 15A (10 ms) 15A (10 ms) Output circuit 2-conductor floating 2-conductor floating Output protection Polarity protection, surge protection Polarity protection, surge protection Voltage drop at maximum limiting continuous current < 200 mV < 200 mV Ambient temp range –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 Mechanical service life 2 x 107 cycles 2 x 107 cycles 3 3 3 3 3 Output Data 3 3 3 3 3 General Data 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay. 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-13 3.2 3 3 3 Derating Curve OptoCoupler Dimensions Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 Terminal Block Relays Load Current (A) 3 Control Relays and Timers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 2 1 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Electrical Schematic Pluggable Power OptoCoupler (Solid-State) Terminal Block Relays 3.70 (94.0) 3 3 3 3 3 A2 13+ A1 14 3.15 (80.0) 0.24 (6.2) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Contents High Current Terminal Block Relay Description Page Standard Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OptoCoupler Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Terminal Block Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XR Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-4 V7-T3-12 V7-T3-16 V7-T3-16 V7-T3-17 V7-T3-17 V7-T3-18 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 High Current Terminal Block Relays Product Description Application Description Features The XR Series Relays include products designed to meet high continuous current and/ or long electrical service life applications. The XR Series Relays are plug-in interfaces that connect to basic terminal blocks that use screw connection technology. Overall width is 14 mm. These relays are best suited for applications that require higher continuous load currents than miniature relays can carry and switch. They can withstand inrush currents or brief overloads without damage, and allow for continuous load currents of up to 10A. The XR Series Relay boasts an average service life of the contacts that is two or three times the normal life of a less powerful relay, resulting in service cost savings. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 14 mm wide Pluggable relay allows for field replacement Convenient plug-in bridge system LED status indication DIN Rail Mount IP67-protected optical electronics Wear-resistant and bouncefree switching Insensitive to shock and vibration Integrated protection circuit Zero voltage switch at AC output Environmentally friendly, cadmium-free contact material Electrical isolation between input and output Standards and Certifications ● ● cULus listed CE 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-15 3.2 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays Product Selection High Current Terminal Block Relays XRU1H24 Supply Voltage Standard Pack Catalog Number 10A 12 Vdc 10 XRU1H12 10A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1H120U 10A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1H24 3 10A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1H24U 3 High Current Replacement Relays 3 Rated Current Supply Voltage 1 Standard Pack Catalog Number 10A 24 Vdc 10 XRR1H24 3 10A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRR1H24U 10A 12 Vdc 10 XRR1H12 10A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRR1H120U Rated Current 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications High Current Terminal Block Relays (1PDT) Catalog Number Replacement Relay XRU1H12 XRR1H12 XRU1H24 XRR1H24 XRU1H24U XRR1H24U XRU1H120U XRR1H120U Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) 26–14 (0.14–2.5) Connection Data Input Data for 1PDT Spring Cage Versions Input voltage 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac/110 Vdc Permissible range See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 See Page V7-T3-10 Typical input current 33 mA 18 mA 17.5 mA 4.5 mA (120 Vac)/4.2 mA (110 Vdc) Typical response time 8 ms 8 ms 8 ms 7 ms Typical release time 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms 10 ms Input protection Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Polarity protection diode, free-wheeling diode Bridge rectifier Bridge rectifier Output Data 3 3 3 3 3 Contact type Single contact, 1PDT Single contact, 1PDT Single contact, 1PDT Single contact, 1PDT Contact material AgNi AgNi AgNi AgNi Max. switching voltage 250 Vac/Vdc 2 250 Vac/Vdc 2 250 Vac/Vdc 2 250 Vac/Vdc 2 Min. switching voltage 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc Limiting continuous current 10A 3 10A 3 10A 3 10A 3 Max. inrush current 30A (300 ms) 30A (300 ms) 30A (300 ms) 30A (300 ms) Min. switching current 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA 100 mA Min. switching power 1.2W 1.2W 1.2W 1.2W Miscellaneous Data 3 3 3 3 3 Ambient temp range –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) Rated operating mode 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor 100% operating factor Inflammability class V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 V0, in accordance with UL 94 Mechanical service life 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles 3 x 107 cycles Notes 1 Voltage is the rating at the base. It may not match the voltage on the specific replacement relay. 2 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 3 The current rating for the normally open contact (#14) is 10A. The current rating for the normally closed contact (#12) is 6A and can be increased to 10A by bridging the two #12 contact connections. 3 V7-T3-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays 3.2 Electrical Schematic 3 High Current Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 A2 11 A1 14 3 3 3 12 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 High Current Terminal Block Relays 3 3 3 3 3 3.70 (94.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3.15 (80.0) 3 3 0.55 (14.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-17 3.2 3 Control Relays and Timers Terminal Block Relays XR Series Accessories Product Description 3 Power Terminal Block Product Selection Bridges 3 XR Series Accessories Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 3 2-Position Snap-In Jumper Red 10 XRAFBST2RD 3 Blue 10 XRAFBST2BU Gray 10 XRAFBST2GY 3 80-Position Snap-In Jumper 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 The XRAPLCESK power terminal block has the same shape as the relay modules and is used to feed in the bridging potentials. The nominal current is 32A. When the total current is less than or equal to 6A, supply can take place directly at the connecting terminal blocks of one of the connected relays. End Cover 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 The XRAATPBK end cover is required at the start and stop of a relay strip. It can also be used for visual separation of groups of relays as well as separating relays with voltages greater than 250V and separating neighboring bridges with different potentials. It is equipped with pre-scored break out points at the bridging positions so that individual bridges can be passed through as needed. It may also be necessary to use the end cover between adjacent relays when three phases (L1, L2, L3) are used on the contact side of the relay. Red 5 XRAFBST500RD Blue 5 XRAFBST500BU Gray 5 XRAFBST500GY 5 XRAPLCESK 5 XRAATPBK Power Terminal Block The XRAFBST colored, insulated plug-in bridge system reduces wiring time by up to 70% compared to conventionally wired relays. The XRAFBST2, 2-position bridges, are suited for bridging a smaller number of relays and total currents <6A. When a circuit is supplied from both sides, the circuit can be opened at any point, allowing all other modules to continue being supplied at the same time. The XRAFBST500 allow up to 80 modules to be bridged at one time. If bridges with different potentials meet in neighboring modules, the end cover XRAATPBK should be used. All bridges are equipped with a groove for removal with a standard screwdriver. Gray End Cover Black Technical Data and Specifications Power Terminal Block Description Specification Connection Data Rigid solid AWG (mm2) 24–10 (0.2–4) Flexible stranded AWG (mm2) 24–10 (0.2–4) Miscellaneous Data Max. current 32A Max. voltage 250 Vac 1 Note 1 The separating plate, XRAPLCESK, should be installed for voltages greater than 250V (L1, L2, L3) between identical terminal points of adjacent modules. Potential bridging is then possible with the XRAFBST bridge system. 3 3 V7-T3-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Contents Programmable Relays Description Programmable Relays easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 3 V7-T3-20 V7-T3-26 V7-T3-30 V7-T3-33 V7-T3-40 V7-T3-43 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Overview The easyRelays combine timers, relays, counters, special functions, inputs and outputs into one compact device that is easily programmed. The easyRelay family of products provides an exceptional level of flexibility together with a substantial savings of commissioning time and effort. The easyRelays are available in more than 35 styles that support from 12 I/O up to a network of up to 320 I/O points, providing the ideal solution for lighting, energy management, industrial control, irrigation, pump control, HVAC and home automation. Once easyRelays are installed, changes are easily accomplished through front panel programming, eliminating the need to change wiring and minimizing downtime. 3 Application Description The easy802/806 relays are even more powerful than the easy800 series and include an integrated SmartWire-DT gateway. Conventional hardwiring to pushbuttons, selector switches, pilot devices and contactors can now be eliminated, allowing for a dramatic increase in panel wiring productivity. For more information on SmartWire-DT and how it can increase productivity, go to www.eaton.com/smartwiredt. 3 The easyRelays excel in traditional applications where multiple relays, timers and pushbuttons are used. Applications span residential, commercial and industrial installations. 3 3 3 Typical control applications are: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 3 Lighting controls Duplex pump controls Water fountain controls Parking garage access controls Refrigeration control system Greenhouse temperature and ventilation controls Booster pump controls 3 3 3 3 3 See publication no. AP05013001E for the easyRelay application guide. Download from www.eaton.com/easyrelays. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-19 3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays Description 3 Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-21 V7-T3-23 V7-T3-24 V7-T3-25 V7-T3-26 V7-T3-30 V7-T3-33 V7-T3-40 V7-T3-43 3 3 3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays 3 Product Description Standards Three families make up the easyRelay programmable relay product line. All models are available with and without displays. DIN rail mounted. ● 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● ● ● ● easy500—for controlling small applications with up to 12 input/output signals. Connectable to Ethernet. easy700—for controlling medium-sized applications with 20 I/O points (expandable to 40 I/O points). Connectable to Ethernet and bus systems. ● ● ● ● Certifications ● ● ● easy800—for controlling large-scale applications with 20 points, expandable to 40 points locally, and expandable using the easyNet network up to 320 I/O points. Connectable to Ethernet and bus systems. The easyNet integrated network provides easy and inexpensive linking of up to eight easy800 devices over a distance of up to 1000 meters. Each easy800 device can run its own program, or be used as a distributed input/output module. Connect up to eight controllers with up to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O. CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 EN 55011 EN 50178 EN 61131-2 IEC EN 61000-4 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-27 UL 508 ● ● ● ● UL CSA CE CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C C-Tick GOST-R Ukrain-GOST Catalog Number Selection easy500/700/800 EASY512 - AC - R C Module Type EASY5xx = 500 Series EASY7xx = 700 Series EASY8xx = 800 Series Digital Inputs AB = 24 Vac AC = 110–240 Vac DA = 12 Vdc DC = 24 Vdc Display Blank = Display X = No display Clock C = Clock Blank = No clock Digital Outputs R = Relay T = Transistor Note: Not all combinations are possible. See selection tables. Shipping Approvals ● Bureau Veritas ● Det Norske Veritas ● Germanischer Lloyd ● Lloyd’s Register of Shipping 3 3 V7-T3-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays System Overview 3 easy500/700 Programmable Relays 3 3 3 1 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 2 3 5 3 6 7 8 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 11 12 3 10 3 Item Description 1 easy500 basic devices, standalone 2 easy700 basic devices, expandable: digital inputs/outputs, bus systems 3 MFD-Titan remote text display 4 Ethernet gateway 5 PROFIBUS-DP bus module 6 AS-Interface bus module 7 CANopen bus module 8 DeviceNet bus module 9 Output expansion 10, 11 I/O expansions 12 Coupling module for the remote connection of a digital input/output expansion 9 3 3 11 3 3 10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-21 3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays easy800 Programmable Relay 3 2 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 13 3 3 3 4 3 5 6 7 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 10 11 3 9, 12 Item Description 1 easy800 basic devices, expandable: digital inputs/outputs and bus systems, easyNet onboard 2 MFD-Titan remote text display 3 Ethernet gateway 3 4 PROFIBUS-DP bus module 5 AS-Interface bus module 3 6 CANopen bus module 7 DeviceNet bus module 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 8 Output expansion 9, 10 I/O expansions 11 Coupling module for the remote connection of a digital input/output expansion 12 I/O expansion 13 MFD-Titan multi-function display 8 10 12 3 V7-T3-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Product Selection easy500—Display 3 easy500 Programmable Relays (Standalone) Description Inputs 24 Vac 110–240 Vac 12 Vdc Outputs Relay Analog 1 24 Vdc Transistor Catalog Number 3 3 Display 12 I/O, no clock 12 I/O, clock easy500—No Display — 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-R — — — 8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-R 3 8 — — — 2 4 — EASY512-AB-RC — 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-RC — — 8 — 2 4 — EASY512-DA-RC — — — 8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-RC — — — 8 2 — 4 EASY512-DC-TC 3 8 — — — 2 4 — EASY512-AB-RCX 3 — 8 — — — 4 — EASY512-AC-RCX — — 8 — 2 4 — EASY512-DA-RCX — — — 8 2 4 — EASY512-DC-RCX — — — 8 2 — 4 EASY512-DC-TCX No Display 12 I/O, clock 3 3 3 3 3 easy700—Display easy700 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable) Description Inputs 24 Vac 110–240 Vac 12 Vdc Outputs Relay Analog 1 24 Vdc Transistor Catalog Number 3 3 Display 18 I/O, clock easy700—No Display 20 I/O, clock — — — 4 6 — EASY719-AB-RC 12 — — — 6 — EASY719-AC-RC — — 12 — 4 6 — EASY719-DA-RC — — — 12 4 6 — EASY719-DC-RC — — — 12 4 — 8 EASY721-DC-TC 3 12 — — — 4 6 — EASY719-AB-RCX 3 — 12 — — — 6 — EASY719-AC-RCX — — 12 — 4 6 — EASY719-DA-RCX — — — 12 4 6 — EASY719-DC-RCX — — — 12 4 — 8 EASY721-DC-TCX No Display 18 I/O, clock 20 I/O, clock 3 12 — 3 3 3 3 easy800—Display easy800 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable) Description Inputs 110–240 Vac 24 Vdc Analog 1 Outputs Relay 3 Transistor Analog Catalog Number 3 Display 18 I/O, clock easy800—No Display 12 — — 6 — — EASY819-AC-RC — 12 4 6 — — EASY819-DC-RC 19 I/O, clock — 12 4 6 — 1 EASY820-DC-RC 20 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 — EASY821-DC-TC 21 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 1 EASY822-DC-TC 12 — — 6 — — EASY819-AC-RCX — 12 4 6 — — EASY819-DC-RCX — 12 4 6 — 1 EASY820-DC-RCX No Display 18 I/O, clock 19 I/O, clock 20 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 — EASY821-DC-TCX 21 I/O, clock — 12 4 — 8 1 EASY822-DC-TCX 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 V7-T3-23 3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications easy500 Series Type EASY512-AB… EASY512-AC… EASY512-DA… EASY512-DC-R… EASY512-DC-TC. 3 Supply voltage 24 Vac 100–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Heat dissipation 5 VA 5 VA 2W 2W 2W 3 Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5A Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600 A — 3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900 A — Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 3 Connection cables Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 Degree of protection IP20 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 3 Ambient operating temperature –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C 3 Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C 3 easy700 Series EASY721-DC-TC. Type EASY719-AB… EASY719-AC… EASY719-DA… EASY719-DC-RC… Supply voltage 24 Vac 100–240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Heat dissipation 7 VA 10 VA 3.5W 3.5W 3.5W Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5A 3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A — Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A — 3 Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 3 Connection cables 3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 Ambient operating temperature –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C 3 Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C EASY822-DC-TC. 3 3 3 easy800 Series Type EASY819-AC… EASY819-DC-RC… EASY820-DC-RC… EASY821-DC-TC… Supply voltage 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Heat dissipation 10 VA 3.4W 3.4W 3.4W 3.4W 3 Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 8A 0.5A Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A — 3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A — Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 Connection cables 3 3 3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 3 Ambient operating temperature –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C 3 Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C 3 Note 1 Relay = 8A (10A to UL) with resistive load, 3A with inductive load. Transistor outputs = 0.5A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel. V7-T3-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 easy500 Series, Drawing Number MD05013001E 3 0.42 (10.8) 3 1.97 (50.0) easy500 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 0.18 (4.5) (M4) 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 1.87 (47.5) 3 1.41 (35.8) 2.81 (71.5) 2.22 (56.5) 2.28 (58.0) 3 3 easy700 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E 0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 3 0.64 (16.3) 3 easy700 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 0.18 (4.5) (M4) 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 3 1.87 (47.5) 4.23 (107.5) 2.22 (56.5) 3 2.28 (58.0) 3 easy800 Series, Drawing Number MD05013003E 0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3) 3 easy800 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.91 (48.5) 2.78 (70.5) 2.83 (72.0) (M4) 3 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 3 4.23 (107.5) 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-25 3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT Contents Description 3 Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-27 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-27 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-28 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-29 easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . V7-T3-30 MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33 easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-40 easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-43 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT 3 Product Description 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 SmartWire-DT is a highperformance system that can be used to quickly and easily connect motor control components such as relays, contactors, pilot devices, manual motor protectors, soft starters 1 and variable frequency drives 1 as well as digital and analog input/ output modules. On the new easy800 with integrated SmartWire-DT master, up to 99 SmartWire-DT devices in total with up to 166 inputs/ outputs can be connected via the SmartWire-DT line. All required supply voltages, including those for bus devices as well as 24 Vdc for the contactors, are provided directly with the flat eightpole SmartWire-DT bus line. This reduces wiring effort and troubleshooting and saves time and costs. Standards The easy802 features a POW power feeder for regulating power to the device as well as the SmartWire-DT devices. A second AUX power feeder provides the connected contactors with 24 Vdc. A separate 24 Vdc power supply is required to provide 24 Vdc power to the easy802 or easy806 controllers. The configuration of the SmartWire-DT devices is undertaken at a touch of the provided Configuration button. LEDs provide feedback on the connecting states on the device and the SmartWire-DT line. The serial interface serves for programming as well as for connection of a remote text display, touch panel or for connection to the Ethernet. In addition to the functionality of the easy802, the easy806 also features four fast inputs (5 kHz). Two of the four inputs can also be configured as fast outputs (5 kHz) (transistor 24 Vdc, 0.1A). In addition to the additional inputs/outputs on easy806, there is a connection option to the easyNet. Up to eight EASY806-DC-SWD controllers can be connected via easyNet, allowing up to 1360 inputs/outputs. ● ● ● EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 UL 508 Certifications ● ● ● cULus CE C-Tick For more information on SmartWire-DT and related components, see Tab 9 of this volume or go to www.eaton.com/smartwiredt. Note 1 Soft starters and variable frequency drives will be available with direct SmartWire-DT connectivity in late 2013. 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Product Selection 3 Control relay for connection of SmartWire-DT and simultaneously for supply of power to the SmartWire-DT devices, such as switchgear and contactors. EASY802-DC-SWD 3 easy800 with SmartWire-DT 3 Supply Voltage 3 24 Vdc Description Catalog Number Control relay with SmartWire-DT EASY802-DC-SWD 3 3 3 EASY806-DC-SWD 24 Vdc 3 EASY806-DC-SWD Control relay with SmartWire-DT, four inputs, two of which can be used as outputs (transistor 24 Vdc, 0.1A), easyNet onboard 3 3 3 3 3 Remote Displays 3 Both the easy802 and easy806 controllers can be connected to a MFD remote display or a XV touch panel display with Galileo. 3 3 Accessories MFD-80 3 Accessories—easy800 Description Catalog Number MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated MFD-80 3 3 3 MFD-CP4 3 24 Vdc power / communication module MFD-CP4 easy802/806 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 1.5m EU4A-RJ45-CAB2 3 easy802/806 to XV HMI communication cable, 2m EU4A-RJ45-CAB1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-27 3.3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT Description Unit Specification °C (°F) –25° to +55° (–13° to +131°) Ambient Climatic Conditions Cold to IEC 60068-2-1, heat to IEC 60068-2-2, damp heat, constant, to IEC 60068-2-78; cyclical to IEC 60068-2-30; temperature change to IEC 68000-2-14 Operating ambient temperature Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures LCD display (reliable legible) °C (°F) 0° to +55° (32° to +131°) 3 Storage °C (°F) –40° to +70° (–40° to +158°) Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC EN 60068-2-30) % 5 to 95 3 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795 up to 1080 3 Protection type EN 50178, IEC 60529, VBG4 3 Ambient Mechanical Conditions IP20 Vibrations (IEC EN 60068-2-6) Constant amplitude: easy800-SWD; 3.5 mm Hz 5–8.4 Constant acceleration: easy800-SWD: 1g Hz 8.4–150 3 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g / 11 ms Shocks 3 Drop (IEC EN 60068-2-31) Drop height Free fall, packaged (IEC EN 60068-2-32) 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 3 Electrostatic discharge (ESD), to IEC EN 61000-4-2 Air discharge 3 3 Contact discharge Electromagnetic fields (RFI), to IEC EN 61000-4-3 0.8–1.0 GHz kV 8 kV 6 V/m 10 3 2.0–2.7 GHz V/m 3 Burst, to IEC EN 61000-4-4 Supply cables 3 50 0.3 V/m Radio interference suppression 3 mm m 1.4–2.0 GHz 3 3 18 1 EN 55011 Class B kV 2 Signal cables kV 2 easyNet kV 2 SWD-line kV 2 Power pulses (surge), to IEC EN 61000-4-5 (supply cables, symmetrical) kV 1 Radiated RFI, to IEC EN 61000-4-6 V 10 Insulation Resistance 3 3 3 Overvoltage category III Pollution degree 2 Clearance in air and creepage distances EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2, No. 142 Insulation resistance EN 50178 Terminal Capacity 3 Solid, minimum to maximum mm2 0.2 to 1.5 (AWG 24–16) Flexible with ferrule, minimum to maximum mm2 0.2 to 1.5 (AWG 24–16) 3 DC POW Rated Operational Voltage Rated value Ue Vdc, (%) 24 DC (–15/+20) 3 Permissible range 1 Vdc 20.4–28.8 Residual ripple % <5 3 Protection against polarity reversal 3 Input current At rated operating voltage Yes mA Inrush current and duty factor 12.5A for 6 ms 3 Voltage dips (IEC EN 61131-2) 3 Note 1 Use power-feed modules if the cable length of the SWD line causes excessive voltage drop. V7-T3-28 easy802: 500 / easy806: 900 ms 10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT, continued 3 Description Unit Specification Heat dissipation At 24 Vdc W easy802: max. 5 / easy806: max. 6 A >3 3 Yes 3 Fuse Potential isolation (easy800-SWD) To auxiliary 1 To easyNet 1 Yes To serial interface Yes To easyLink 1 No To inputs 1 No To outputs 3 1 3 3 No To SWD 1 3 No 3 DC AUX Rated Operational Voltage (easy800-SWD) Rated value Ue Vdc, (%) Permissible range UAUX Vdc 20.4–28.8 Residual ripple % <5 Input current 2 (max.) A 2 (UL) / 3 (CE) Rated operational voltage of the 24 Vdc stations V UAUX –0.3V Protection against polarity reversal 24 (–15/+20) 3 3 3 Yes Short-circuit strength No Fuse A < 2 (UL) external fuse with FAZ B2 Heat dissipation At 24 Vdc W Normally 1 Potential isolation (easy800-SWD) To POW power supply, inputs and outputs 3 3 3 Yes To PC interface (COM), easyNet Yes To SWD Yes 3 3 Notes 1 If present. 2 If contactors with a higher total power consumption are connected, an EU5C-SWD-PF1 or EU5C-SWD-PF2 power-feed module must be used. 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 easy802 and easy806 Controllers 3 0.30 (7.5) 3 4.94 (125.5) 3 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 4.72 (120.0) 3 5.12 (130.0) 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 3 4.72 (120.0) 3 0.30 (7.5) 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-29 3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easyRelay Expansion Modules Description 3 easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules 3 Product Description Standards Expansion modules are available for increasing the input/output of the easy700/ 800 and MFD-Titan multifunction displays to 24 inputs and up to 16 outputs. Expansion modules can be mounted directly to the easy700 or easy800 relays or up to 98 ft (30m) away using coupling module EASY200-EASY. ● 3 3 3 3 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 EN 55011 EN 50178 EN 61131-2 IEC EN 61000-4 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-27 UL 508 Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● UL CSA CE CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C C-Tick GOST-R Ukrain-GOST 3 3 Shipping Approvals ● Bureau Veritas ● Det Norske Veritas ● Germanischer Lloyd ● Lloyd’s Register of Shipping 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T3-20 V7-T3-26 V7-T3-31 V7-T3-31 V7-T3-32 V7-T3-33 V7-T3-40 V7-T3-43 3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Product Selection 3 Digital I/O Expansion Modules Can be used via easyLink. EASY618_ 3 Outputs Supply Voltage Digital Inputs 100–240 Vac 12 24 Vdc 12 Transistor Catalog Number 3 6 — EASY618-AC-RE 6 — EASY618-DC-RE 3 Relay 10A (UL) 24 Vdc 12 — 8 EASY620-DC-TE 24 Vdc 6 4 — EASY410-DC-RE 24 Vdc 6 — 4 EASY410-DC-TE 24 Vdc — 2 — EASY202-RE For distributed connection of a digital input/output expansion at up to 98 ft (30m) distance 3 3 3 EASY200-EASY 3 Analog I/O Expansion Modules Can be used via easyLink. EASY406_ Inputs 3 3 Digital Outputs Supply Voltage Digital/ Analog Can Be Used for Digital Relay 10A (UL) Transistor Analog Outputs Catalog Number 24 Vdc 1/2 2 — 2 1 EASY406-DC-ME 24 Vdc 1/6 2 — 2 2 EASY411-DC-ME 3 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications easyRelay I/O Expansion Modules Type EASY202-RE 3 EASY618-AC-RE EASY618-DC-RE EASY620-DC-TE EASY200-EASY 3 Supply voltage — 100 – 240 Vac 24 Vac 24 Vac — Heat dissipation 1W 10 VA 4W 4W 1W Continuous current outputs 1 8A 8A 8A 0.5A — Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A — 3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A Line protection B16, 900A — 3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 Connection cables Degree of protection 3 3 3 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4 Ambient operating temperature –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C Certification, standards EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-31 3.3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) easy600 Series, Drawing Number MD05013002E 0.64 (16.3) 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3) easy600 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) (M4) 1.87 (47.5) 4.23 (107.5) 2.22 (56.5) 2.28 (58.0) EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E 3 3 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 0.30 (7.5) easy200 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 3 1.87 (47.5) 2.22 (56.5) 3 (M4) 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 0.30 (7.5) 1.40 (35.5) 2.28 (58.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Contents MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays Description Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 V7-T3-20 3 V7-T3-26 V7-T3-33 3 3 V7-T3-34 V7-T3-35 V7-T3-36 V7-T3-37 V7-T3-38 V7-T3-40 V7-T3-43 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays Product Description The MFD-Titan multi-function displays can be used as remote text displays for easy500, easy700, easy800 and easy802/806 relays or can be configured as standalone or networked multi-function displays. As a multi-function display, the MFD-Titan combines the control functions of an easy800 with a door-mounted graphics display. MFD-Titan multi-function display is comprised of three parts: display, controller and I/O modules. Match each piece to the needs of your application. If you need to both monitor and modify parameters within your application, choose the MFD80-B display. The preprogrammed and user programmable buttons give you the capability to make small changes to the way your application is running, start or stop a process, or change your program completely. Select a controller with or without easyNet support, and with AC or DC power. Finally, add the MFD I/O module that best suits your application. Standards MFD-Titan—for controlling small applications that require graphic visualization and for large-scale applications with 20 points, expandable to 40 points locally, and expandable using the easyNet network up to 320 I/O points. ● The MFD-Titan display can be linked to the easy500/700/ 800 models to provide an enhanced text based operator interface. ● The easyNet integrated network provides easy and inexpensive linking of up to eight MFD-Titan devices over a distance of up to 1000 meters. Each MFD-Titan device can run its program, or be used as a distributed input/output module. Connect up to eight controllers with up to 40 I/O to obtain 320 I/O. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● CSA C22.2 No. 142-M1987 CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987 EN 55011 EN 50178 EN 61131-2 IEC EN 61000-4 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-27 UL 508 3 Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● UL CSA CE CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C C-Tick GOST-R Ukrain-GOST 3 3 3 3 3 3 Shipping Approvals ● Bureau Veritas ● Det Norske Veritas ● Germanischer Lloyd ● Lloyd’s Register of Shipping 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-33 3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays System Overview MFD-Titan Multi-Function Display 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 6 3 3 3 3 3 3 9 3 11 3 8, 10 3 3 3 3 7 Item Description 1 MFD-Titan, consisting of: display/operating unit, power supply unit, CPU module, I/O module 2 Ethernet gateway 3 3 PROFIBUS-DP bus module 4 AS-Interface bus module 3 5 CANopen bus module 6 DeviceNet bus module 3 3 7 Output expansion 8, 9, 10 I/O expansions 11 Coupling module for the remote connection of a digital input/output expansion 3 V7-T3-34 9 10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Product Selection MFD-80-B 3 MFD-Titan Display/Operator Units Monochrome display 132 x 64 pixels with switchable backlight and removable front frame. Description Keypad Eaton Logo Custom Engraving Catalog Number MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — — — MFD-80-X MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — ■ — MFD-80 MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated — — ■ MFD-80-ETCH 1 MFD display with keypad 2 ■ — — MFD-80-B-X MFD display with keypad 2 ■ ■ — MFD-80-B MFD display with keypad 2 — — ■ MFD-80-B-ETCH 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 MFD-CP4 MFD-Titan Text/Graphics Display Power Module For use with MFD-Titan displays for use as remote text/graphics display. 3 Supply Voltage Description Catalog Number 3 100–240 Vac AC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-AC-CP4 AC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-500 3 AC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-800 DC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-CP4 DC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-CP4-500 DC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-CP4-800 24 Vdc MFD-CP 3 3 3 3 MFD-Titan Controller Modules For use with MFD-Titan display/operator units. Add MFD-Titan I/O modules as needed. Supply Voltage 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc 3 Description Catalog Number 3 3 Program and screen memory MFD-AC-CP8-ME Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-AC-CP8-NT Program and screen memory MFD-CP8-ME Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-CP8-NT Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8) MFD-CP10-ME Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8), with easyNet MFD-CP10-NT 3 3 3 Notes 1 To order an MFD display with custom engraving, a marking file with the required text and/or graphics must be created as a Labeleditor ZIP file. The ZIP file has to be sent to the Eaton factory, and the name of the file must be referenced in the order notes section. To download the Labeleditor configuration software, please visit www.eaton.com/software. 2 To obtain a NEMA 4X indoor rating on MFD displays with keypads, use with a protective membrane cover MFD-XM-80. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-35 3.3 3 MFD-R16 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays MFD-Titan I/O Modules For use with MFD-Titan controller modules. Inputs Outputs 3 Supply Voltage Description Digital 3 100–240 Vac 16 I/O 12 — 12 4 12 4 12 12 24 Vdc 3 24 Vdc 3 17 I/O Transistor Analog Catalog Number 4 — — MFD-AC-R16 4 — — MFD-R16 — 4 — MFD-T16 4 4 — 1 MFD-RA17 4 — 4 1 MFD-TA17 Analog 1 Relay 3 3 MFD-TP_ MFD-Titan I/O Modules with Temperature Detection For use with MFD-CP8-_ 2 and MFD-CP10-_ MFD-Titan controller modules. Inputs 3 Supply Voltage 3 24 Vdc Digital Outputs Can Be Used For Analog Pt100 Relay 10A (UL) Transistor Analog Temperature Ranges Catalog Number 6 2 2 — 4 — –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C/0° to +400°C MFD-TP12-PT-A 3 6 2 2 — 4 — –200° to +200°C/0° to +850°C MFD-TP12-PT-B 6 2 — — 4 — –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C MFD-TP12-NI-A 3 6 2 2 — 4 1 –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C/0° to +400°C MFD-TAP13-PT-A 6 2 2 — 4 1 –200° to +200°C/0° to +850°C MFD-TAP13-PT-B 6 2 — — 4 1 –40° to +90°C/0° to +250°C MFD-TAP13-NI-A 3 3 3 Accessories Miscellaneous Parts 3 Description Catalog Number 3 MFD-Titan display protective membrane cover MFD-XM-80 MFD-Titan display protective plastic cover MFD-XS-80 3 MFD-Titan display DIN rail mount kit MFD-TS-144 3 Notes 1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs 2 Version 8 and higher MFD-CP8_ controllers are compatible with the temperature detection modules. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 MFD-80, MFD-CP4, MFD-CP8 Type MFD-80… MFD-CP4/CP8 Solid — 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible — 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) IP65 IP20 3 Connection cables Degree of protection 3 3 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 Ambient operating temperature Clearly legible at –5° to 50°C –25° to 55°C Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C Hazardous location CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C CSA Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Temp. Code T3C 3 3 3 MFD-Titan I/O Modules 3 Type MFD-AC-R16 MFD-R16 MFD-RA17 MFD-T16 MFD-TA17 Supply voltage Supply via MFD-CP8 module Supply via MFD-CP8 module Supply via MFD-CP8 module Supply via MFD-CP8 module Supply via MFD-CP8 module 0.5W 0.5W 0.5W 0.5W 0.5W 8A 8A 8A 0.5A 0.5A Short-circuit proof with power factor 1 Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A — — 3 Short-circuit proof with power factor 0.7…0.7 Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A Line protection B16, 600A — — 3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4 3 3 Heat dissipation Continuous current outputs 1 3 3 3 Connection cables Ambient operating temperature –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C Mounting Snap fitted to MFD-CP8 module Snap fitted to MFD-CP8 module Snap fitted to MFD-CP8 module Snap fitted to MFD-CP8 module Snap fitted to MFD-CP8 module 3 3 3 MFD-CP4 and CP8 Communication Modules Type MFD-80… MFD-CP4-… MFD-CP8… 3 MFD-AC-CP8… Supply voltage Supply from -CP 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 100–240 Vac Heat dissipation 3W 1.5W 3W 8 VA Mounting Front mounting in 2 x 22.5 mm Standard drill holes Snap fitted to MFD-80 Snap fitted to MFD-80 or on 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 3 3 Note 1 Relay = 8A with resistive load, 3A with inductive load. Transistor outputs = 0.5A/24 Vdc, maximum four outputs switchable in parallel. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-37 3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) MFD-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013005E 3 0.89 (22.5) MFD-80 3 0.67 (17.0) 0.88 + 0.02 (22.3) + 0.4 3 1.26 (32.0) 3 1.18 (30.0) 3 3.41 (86.5) 3 3 1.18 ± 0.01 (30.0) ± 0.2 3 3 MFD-CP… 0.79 (20.0) 1.18 (30.0) 0.54 (13.7) 1.11 (28.3) 1.11 (28.3) 2.44 (62.0) 3 MFD-80 Template for Holes, Scale 1:1 3.41 (86.5) 3 3 3 MFD-CP4, MFD-80 and MFD-CP4 Series Combined, Drawing Number MD013013E 1-6 -0.24 (0.04) MFD-80 MFD-CP4 3 0.81 (20.5) 3 3 1.70 (43.2) MFD-CP4 MFD-CP4 3 2.28 (58.0) 3 3 3 0.89 (22.5) 3 1.08 (27.5) 0.89 (22.5) 1.43 (36.2) 1.18 (30.0) 2.95 (75.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 MFD-CP8 Series, Drawing Number MD05013006E 3 MFD-CP8 2.95 (75.0) 0.64 (16.3) 3 0.640 (16.3) 3 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.18 ± 0.01 (30.0 ± 0.2) 1.53 (38.8) 1.53 (38.8) 3 1.16 (29.5) 3 3 4.23 (107.5) 3 MFD-R/MFD-T I/O Module, Drawing Number MD05013007E 3 MFD-R and MFD-T I/O 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3 3 3.47 (88.1) 0.75 (19.0) 3 0.98 (25.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-39 3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easyRelay Communication Modules Description 3 Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-20 V7-T3-26 V7-T3-33 V7-T3-33 V7-T3-41 V7-T3-41 V7-T3-43 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 easyRelay Communication Modules Product Description Product Selection Four network modules are available for easily connecting to world-standard networks. The network modules can be used with the easy700/800 programmable relays and MFD-Titan multi-function displays. The Ethernet gateway connects devices provided with an RS-232 serial interface with the Ethernet network. This gateway can be used with easy500 as well as easy700/800 relays and MFD-Titan displays. EASY209-SE Ethernet Gateway Module Ethernet gateway Available communication modules support: ● ● ● ● DeviceNet PROFIBUS-DP AS-Interface CANopen Catalog Number Description EASY204-DP Serial interface easyRelay or MFD-…CP8/CP10_ to Ethernet, for connecting to easyOPC server, easySoft or easyCom Network Interface Modules Catalog Number Description All modules operate exclusively as nodes on the given network. EASY209-SE 1 DeviceNet interface module Addresses available 0 to 63 EASY222-DN PROFIBUS-DP interface module Device addresses available 1 to 126 EASY204-DP 3 AS-Interface interface module with 4 in and 4 out Device: 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 4 parameter bits Addresses available 0 to 31 EASY205-ASI 3 CANopen interface module Addresses available 1 to 127 EASY221-CO 3 3 Note 1 To set up the Ethernet gateway, download the EASY209-SE configuration software at www.eaton.com/easyrelays. 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 easy700/800/MFD Communication Interface Modules EASY204-DP, EASY205-ASI, EASY221-CO, EASY222-DN, EASY209-SE 1 Description 3 Specification Supply voltage 3 24 Vdc 2 1W 3 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 3 Flexible Heat dissipation Connection cables 3 Degree of protection IP20 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1,2,3,4 Ambient operating temperature –25° to +55°C 3 Transport and storage temperature –40° to +70°C Certification, standards EN 50178, IEC/EN 60947, UL, CSA Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 3 Notes 1 EASY209-SE is also compatible with easy500 programmable relays. 2 EASY204-DP dissipates 2W. 3 3 3 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) EASY202-RE/EASY200-EASY/EASY205-ASI/ EASY209-SE Series, Drawing Number MD05013012E EASY202-RE EASY200-EASY EASY205-ASI EASY221-CO/EASY222-DN Series, Drawing Number MD05013010E 0.30 (7.5) EASY221-CO EASY222-DN 0.157 (M4) Dia. (3.9) 3 3 0.30 (7.5) 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 4.33 (110.0) 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.87 (47.5) 2.22 (56.5) 0.30 (7.5) 1.40 (35.5) 2.28 (58.0) 3 0.18 (4.5) 0.157 (M4) Dia. (3.9) 0.30 (7.5) 1.87 (47.5) 2.22 (56.5) 2.64 (67.0) 3 1.40 (35.5) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-41 3.3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays EASY204-DP Series, Drawing Number MD05013011E 3 3 0.30 (7.5) EASY204-DP 3 3.54 (90.0) 4.02 (102.0) 4.33 (110.0) 3 1.77 (45.0) 3 3 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 3 1.87 (47.5) 2.22 (56.5) 3 (M4) 0.157 Dia. (3.9) 1.40 (35.5) 0.30 (7.5) 2.44 (62.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Contents easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software Description Page easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay and MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . MFD-Titan Multi-Function Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 V7-T3-20 3 V7-T3-26 V7-T3-30 V7-T3-33 V7-T3-40 3 V7-T3-44 V7-T3-46 V7-T3-46 V7-T3-47 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 easyRelay Power Supplies, Accessories and Software 3 3 Product Description Product Selection Power Supplies—12 Vdc and 24 Vdc power supplies for applications where only 100–240 Vac is available. Power supply units are primary switched-mode power supplies that are optimally suited for the easyRelay and easySafety product series in terms of functions and design. The new and high-performance power supply units support safe operation in plants and machines. They are simple and flexible in handling. Accessories—Memory modules, cables and other components to complete your automation solutions. Software—The easySoft software is used to program all of the easyRelays and MFD-Titan displays. The Windows®-based software provides straightforward circuit diagram input and editing and the diagrams can be displayed in the format desired. When easy800 and MFD-Titan controllers are connected using easyNet, all connected devices can be accessed and their programs loaded from a single controller. easySoft includes an integrated offline simulation tool that allows users to test a circuit diagram before commissioning. Fast diagnosis of the voltage output: continuous light on the LED—fault-free operation; flashing on the LED—short circuit or overload on voltage output. ● ● ● ● ● EASY…-POW The primary switched-mode power supply units can be used everywhere: Suitable for worldwide use due to wide range input from 85V to 264 Vac, 50/60 Hz Output voltages can be connected in parallel to increase power output or for redundant operation to achieve greater system availability Compliance with international standards and approvals Safety extra low voltage (SELV to EN 60 950) Radio interference Class B to EN 55 011 and EN 55 022 for use in industrial and public networks 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Power Supply Units Rated input voltage 100–240 Vac, single-phase. 3 Input Voltage Range Rated Output Voltage Output Voltage Setting Range Rated Output Power Rated Output Current Catalog Number 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc/12 Vdc — 8W 0.35A/20 mA EASY200-POW 24 Vdc — 30W 1.25A EASY400-POW 24 Vdc — 60W 2.5A EASY500-POW 24 Vdc — 100W 4.2A EASY600-POW 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-43 3.3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Bluetooth Adapter Conveniently commission and service machines and other equipment remotely. ● ● ● Simple communication An 8-digit PIN security Simple recognition in with easy800 or MFD-Titan code prevents Windows 7 from outside loud and/or unauthorized remote ● Full online functionality dangerous areas access with easySoft-Pro V6.91or higher EASY800-BLT-ADP 3 ● Has all necessary radio type approvals for USA, Canada and Europe Bluetooth Adapter Description Catalog Number easy800/MFD Bluetooth adapter EASY800-BLT-ADP The Blue tooth adapter provides wireless connectivity to easySoft-Pro for easy programming download and upload. Use it with the easyRemote Display Android App for simple and fast access to your easy800 relays up to a distance of 10 meters. 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories easySoft 3 3 Programming Software Description Catalog Number Programming software for easy500/700 EASY-SOFT-BASIC Programming software for easy800, easy 802/806 and MFD-Titan includes SWD-Assist for configuration of the SmartWire-DT network EASY-SOFT-PRO 3 3 3 3 EASY-USB-CAB Programming Cables Description Catalog Number 3 easy500/700 to PC programming cable—USB EASY-USB-CAB easy500/700 to PC programming cable—RS-232 EASY-PC-CAB 3 easy800/MFD to PC programming cable—RS-232 EASY800-PC-CAB easy800/MFD to PC programming cable—USB EASY800-USB-CAB easy802/806 to PC programming cable—USB, 2m EU4A-RJ45-USB-CAB1 3 3 3 MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 Cables and Connectors Description Catalog Number 3 easy500/700 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 easy800 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 5m MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 3 easy800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 2m MFD-800-CAB easy800 to MFD-CP8 communication cable, 5m MFD-800-CAB5 3 easy800 modem, printer, programming cable EASY800-MO-CAB easy802/806 to MFD-CP4 communication cable, 1.5m EU4A-RJ45-CAB2 easy802/806 to XV HMI communication cable, 2m EU4A-RJ45-CAB1 3 easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 0.3m networking cable EASY-NT-30 easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 0.8m networking cable EASY-NT-80 3 easy800/MFD easyNet cable, 1.5m networking cable EASY-NT-150 easy800/MFD easyNet cable (cable only, no connectors, see EASY-NT-RJ45), 100m EASY-NT-CAB RJ45 network connectors for easyNet cable (EASY-NT-CAB), 10/pack EASY-NT-RJ45 easy800/MFD network termination resistor, 2/pack EASY-NT-R EASY800-MO-CAB 3 3 3 V7-T3-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays EASY-M-32K EASY-M-256K 3.3 Memory Storage Modules Description Catalog Number easy500/700 32K memory storage module EASY-M-32K easy800/MFD 256K memory storage module EASY-M-256K easy800/MFD 512K memory storage module EASY-M-512K 3 3 3 3 3 3 Panel Window Mounting Kit 3 Miscellaneous Parts Description Catalog Number easy500 panel window SKF-FF4 easy700/800 panel window SKF-FF6 easy500/700/800 panel window mounting kit to front mount units SKF-HA High current input adapter, six-channel EASY256-HCI Base to expander, interface connector EASY-LINK-DS easy500 relay simulator EASY412-DC-SIM-NA Mounting feet, 9/pack ZB4-101-GF1 Grounding kit ZB4-102-KS1 3 3 3 3 3 3 Simulator 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-45 3.3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Technical Data and Specifications easyRelay Power Supplies Type EASY200-POW EASY400-POW Supply voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 85–264 Vac Maximum range 85–264 Vac Output voltage 24 Vdc (±3%) 24 Vdc (±3%) Output current (rated value) 0.25A 1.25A Overcurrent limitation form 0.3A 1.4A Short-circuit proof (secondary) Yes Yes 3 Overload proof Yes Yes 3 Potential isolation (prim/sec.) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Others Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA Additional output voltage 12 DC, 20 mA Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 22–12) Degree of protection IP20 IP20 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 3 Ambient operating temperature –25° to 55°C –25° to 55°C Transport and storage temperature –40° to 70°C –40° to 70°C 3 Mounting On 35 mm DIN rail or screw mounting with ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet 3 3 3 3 3 3 Connection cables Wiring Diagram 3 EASY256-HCI 3 L N 3 >1A S.. S.. 3 3 L 3 N N 115/230 Vh 3 3 EASY5..-AC-.. EASY7..-AC-.. 3 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 ..... N N 1 2 3 4 5 6 Input 115/230 Vh EASY256-HCI 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays 3.3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 EASY200-POW/EASY256-HCI and EASY400-POW Series, Drawing Number MD05013004E 3 EASY200-POW EASY256-HCI EASY400-POW 0.42 (10.8) 3 3 0.30 (7.5) 1.97 (50.0) 3 3 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 3 4.02 (102.0) 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 4.33 (110.0) 3 3 0.18 (4.5) 1.87 (47.5) 0.157 (M4) Dia. (3.9) 1.41 (35.8) 2.22 (56.5) 0.30 (7.5) 3 1.40 (35.5) 2.81 (71.5) 3 3 MFD-XS-80 and MFD-XM-80 Series, Drawing Number MD05013009E MFD-XS-80 3 MFD-XM-80 3 3 3.48 (88.5) 3.74 (95.0) 3 3 3 3.41 (86.5) 3 0.89 (22.5) 3.48 (88.5) 0.98 (25.0) 3 SKF-FF4 and SKF-FF6 Series, Drawing Number MD05013014E SKF-FF4 SKF-FF6 0.63 (16.0) 3 0.63 (16.0) 3 3 2.99 (76.0) 2.99 (76.0) 3 3 3.70 (94.0) 0.98 (25.0) 5.12 (130.0) 3 0.98 (25.0) 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-47 3.3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Programmable Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) SKF-HA Series, Drawing Number MD05013015E 0.43 (11.0) SKF-HA 3 3 3 2.60 (66.0) 1.89 (48.0) 3 3 3 3.23 (82.0) 3 3 ZB4-101-GF1 Mounting Feet Fitting on 35 mm Top-Hat Rail 3 Fitting on Mounting Plate (Horizontal) * * ZB4-101-GF1 3 3 3 3 * 3 3 3 * * 3 mounting feet are sufficient ZB4-102-KS1 Series— Grounding the Screen for Top-Hat Rail EASY412-DC-SIM-NA Series 3 Connect Outputs Connection Cable 3 Digital Inputs 3 3 DEL ALT ESC OK 3 3 3 ZB4-102-KS1 Series— Grounding the Screen for Mounting Plate 3 3 3 Power Supply Unit 3 3 V7-T3-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents General Purpose Plug-In Relay Description D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection Guide 3 General Purpose Relay Selection Characteristics ● ● ● ● Current rating: 1A–30A Contact arrangement: SPDT, DPDT, 3PDT, 4PDT, etc. Coil voltage: 6V–240 Vac/ 6V–110 Vdc Mounting options: socket, flange, DIN rail, panel ● ● Specifications: CSA, CE, IEC, NEMA, UL, etc. Other: physical dimensions, maximum voltage, mechanical/ electrical life, etc. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-49 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays Relay Series D1PR/D1PF D2PR/D2PF D3PR/D3PF 3 3 3 3 3 Approvals 3 3 Features 3 Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Panel, DIN and flange mounting Panel and DIN mounting Panel and DIN mounting 3 3 3 3 3 Latching 8- or 11-pin octal plug-in Latching (D3PR version) Contact Data Configuration SPDT DPDT DPDT Latching 4PDT Max. allowable load 20A 10A 3A Material Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Dielectric strength between poles 1500V 1500V 1500V AC 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac DC 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc VA (Vac) 0.9 VA 1.2 VA 3 VA 1.4W (D3PR and D3PF) Watts (Vdc) 0.7W 0.9W 2 VA 1.64W (D3PR5 latching) 10A 16A DPDT 3PDT 16A 16A Coil Data 3 3 3 3 Power General Data Ambient temperature 3 3 3 3 3 Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) Operational –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 10 million 5 million (D3PR and D3PF) 10 million (D3PR5 latching) Response time Life Mechanical operations 10 million 100,000 200,000 100,000 Page Numbers Electrical operations V7-T3-53 to V7-T3-57 V7-T3-58 to V7-T3-67 V7-T3-68 to V7-T3-77 V7-T3-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued Relay Series D4 D5PR/D5PF 3 D7PR/D7PF 3 3 3 3 Approvals 3 3 Features Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover 3 Polycarbonate cover Indicator lamp available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Panel and DIN mounting Panel, DIN and flange mounting Panel and DIN mounting 3 3 Socket has built-in hold-down spring Contact Data Configuration SPDT DPDT Max. allowable load 10A at 250 Vac 5A at 240 Vac Material AgCdO Silver alloy Silver alloy Dielectric strength 5000V 1500V 1500V AC 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac 6 to 240 Vac DC 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc 6 to 110 Vdc VA (Vac) 0.9 VA 3 VA 1.2 VA 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA Watts (Vdc) 0.5W 1.4W 0.9W 0.9W 1.4W 1.5W 3 DPDT 3PDT SPDT DPDT 3PDT 4PDT 16A 16A 20A 15A 15A 15A 3 1500V 2500V 2500V 3 Coil Data 3 3 Power 3 3 General Data Ambient temperature 3 Storage –40° to 158°F (–40° to 70°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) Operational –40° to 158°F (–40° to 70°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) 15 milliseconds 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds (30 milliseconds for latching) Mechanical operations 10 million 5 million 10 million Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100,000 V7-T3-78 to V7-T3-81 V7-T3-82 to V7-T3-90 V7-T3-91 to V7-T3-105 Response time 3 3 Life Page Numbers 100,000 200,000 200,000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-51 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays, continued Relay Series D8 D9 Dust cover Dust cover Panel, DIN and flange mounting Pushbutton available 3 3 3 3 3 Approvals 3 Features 3 3 3 3 Quick-connect and screw terminals Panel mounting Screw terminals Contact Data Configuration 4PST 3 SPST-NO DPST-NO NO NC Max. allowable load 3 30A at 220 Vac 25A at 220 Vac 25A at 220 Vac 8A at 220 Vac Material AgCdO AgCdO Dielectric strength 4000V 4000V AC 6 to 240 Vac 24 to 240 Vac DC 12 to 24 Vdc 12 to 110 Vdc VA (Vac) 2.5 VA 2.6 VA Watts (Vdc) 1.9W 2.0W Storage –4° to 185°F (–20° to 85°C) –13° to 140°F (–25° to 60°C) Operational –4° to 131°F (–20° to 55°C) –13° to 140°F (–25° to 60°C) 30 milliseconds 50 milliseconds Mechanical operations 5 million 1 million Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 V7-T3-106 to V7-T3-111 V7-T3-112 to V7-T3-115 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Coil Data Power General Data Ambient temperature Response time Life Page Numbers 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D1 Series Relay Description Page D1PR/D1PF Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 V7-T3-54 V7-T3-55 V7-T3-56 V7-T3-57 V7-T3-57 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D1PR/D1PF Series Product Description The D1 Series of relay provides a compact singlepole relay capable of handling 20A. Multiple feature and voltage options allow for the perfect fit for any application. Features D1PR ● Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load currents ● Panel and DIN rail mounting D1PF ● The contact operation can be easily checked by Push-to-Test button ● Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered condition ● LED status lamp shows coil ON or OFF status— ideal for use in low light applications ● Push-to-Test button allows for manual operation of relay without the need for coil power ● Lock-down door holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate position when activated ● Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from sockets easily ● ID tag/write label to identify relays in multiplerelay circuits ● Bipolar LED allows for reverse polarity applications 3 Standards and Certifications 3 UL Listed 3 When used with accompanying Eaton screw terminal socket. 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 D1PR/D1PF Series 3 D1PF 1 A A Family Type D1PF D1PR Contact Configuration 1 = SPDT Standard Features Blank = Mechanical flag indicator (only with D1PR) A = LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (only with D1PF) 1 = LED and mechanical flag indicator 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-53 3.4 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Product Selection D1PR/D1PF Relay/Socket Quick Reference Relay Type Socket Clip Module Type ID Tag Jumper D1PR1 D1PAA PMC-1781 B — — D1PF1 D1PAA PMC-1781 B — — D1PF Series Relay D1PR/D1PF Series 3 Coil Voltage 3 Full Featured 3 Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 6 Vac SPDT 12.2 D1PF1AP 6 Vdc SPDT 47 D1PF1AP1 12 Vac SPDT 46 D1PF1AR 12 Vdc SPDT 188 D1PF1AR1 3 24 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 180 D1PF1AT 24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1PF1AT1 3 48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PF1AW 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D1PF1AW1 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PF1AA1 120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4430 D1PF1AA 240 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 15,720 D1PF1AB 3 3 3 3 Plain Cover with LED Indicator 6 Vac SPDT 12.2 D1PR11P 3 6 Vdc SPDT 47 D1PR11P1 12 Vac SPDT 46 D1PR11R 12 Vdc SPDT 188 D1PR11R1 24 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 180 D1PR11T 24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1PR11T1 3 48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PR11W 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D1PR11W1 3 240 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 15,720 D1PR11B 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PR11A1 120 Vac SPDT 4430 D1PR11A 3 24 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 180 D1PR1T 3 6 Vac SPDT 12.2 D1PR1P 3 3 3 Plain Cover 6 Vdc SPDT 47 D1PR1P1 12 Vac SPDT 46 D1PR1R 12 Vdc SPDT 188 D1PR1R1 24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1PR1T1 3 48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PR1W 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D1PR1W1 3 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PR1A1 120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4430 D1PR1A 240 Vac SPDT 15,270 D1PR1B 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Accessories 3 D1PR/D1PF Sockets and Accessories 3 Type Module Size Nominal Voltage (Max. for Sockets) Nominal Current Mounting Style Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number Socket B 300 20 Panel/DIN rail 12 /14 (2) AWG, 4 /2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D1PAA 1 Flange mount adapter — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D11 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PMC-1781 3 Protection diode B 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BD250 LED indicator B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG24 B 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG240 B 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV120 B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV24 B 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV240 — — — — — — 25 PFP-P MOV suppressor Plastic DIN rail end stop 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection Category (Finger Safe), EN 60529: IP20. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-55 3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Technical Data and Specifications D1PF/D1PR Relay Specifications D1PR D1PF Contact rating 20A 20A 3 Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy 3 Maximum switching voltage 300V 300V Switching current at voltage—resistive 20A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 20A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 20A at 28 Vdc 20A at 28 Vdc 3 3 3 Description Contact Characteristics Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1 hp at 277 Vac 1 hp at 277 Vac Pilot duty B300 B300 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 3 3 3 Coil Characteristics Operating range 3 % of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% % of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 3 Average consumption 0.9 VA 0.9 VA 0.7W 0.7W 3 3 Dropout voltage threshold 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) Performance 3 Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 3 Response time 20 ms 20 ms Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) Between poles Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) Storage –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55ºC) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) Operation –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85ºC) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Dielectric strength Environment Ambient air temperature around the device Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n Degree of protection IP40 IP40 Cover options Plain cover Full featured Features Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED) Locking pushbutton/ Bipolar LED/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA Features 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Wiring Diagram 3 D1PF/D1PR 12 1 14 5 11 9 3 3 3 3 3 A1 A2 13 3 14 IEC 3 NEMA 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D1PF/D1PR 0.53 (14.0) 0.10 (2.1) 3 0.53 (14.0) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 1.60 (40.6) 1.40 (35.5) 3 3 D1PAA 1.18 (30.0) 3 0.74 (19.0) 0.67 (17.0) 14 5 3 12 1 3 1 0.16 (4.0) 3.14 (80.0) 1 N.C. 5 N.O. 9 14 13 3.33 (84.0) Input N.O. 9 COM A2 0.82 (21.0) A1 Input 3 COM 14 13 Module Input 1.57 (40.0) 3 N.C. 5 3 Input 3 Module Input 14 13 Input Input 11 9 IEC NEMA 3 Input 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-57 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D2 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-53 V7-T3-59 V7-T3-59 V7-T3-61 V7-T3-62 V7-T3-63 V7-T3-64 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 D2PR/D2PF Series 3 Product Description 3 3 The D2 Series is a compact line of relays with quick response time and long life. Available in DPDT, 4PDT and DPDT latching configurations. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Features D2PR ● Ultra-high sensitivity relay with quick response ● High reliability, long life ● Panel, DIN rail and flange mounting ● Small size Standards and Certifications D2PF Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered condition ● Bipolar LED status lamp allows for reverse polarity applications ● Shows coil ON or OFF status ● Ideal in low light conditions ● Color-coded pushbutton identifies AC coils with red or DC coils with blue pushbuttons ● Allows for manual operation of relay without the need for coil power ● Ideal for field service personnel to test control circuits ● Lock-down door, when activated, holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate position ● Excellent for analyzing circuit problems ● Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from sockets more easily than conventional relays ● White plastic ID tag/write label used for identification of relays in multi-relay circuits ● UL Listed When used with accompanying Eaton screw terminal socket. 3 V7-T3-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Catalog Number Selection 3 D2PF/D2PR 1 3 D2PF 2 A A Family Type D2PF D2PR Contact Configuration 2 = DPDT 4 = 4PDT 5 = DPDT latching Standard Features Blank = Plain cover (only with D2PR) A = LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (only with D2PF) 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection D2PF/D2PR Relay/Socket Quick Reference Relay Type Socket D2PR2, D2PF2 D2PAL D2PA6 D2PR4, D2PF4 D2PAP D2PA7 D2PR5 3 Clip Module Type ID Tag Jumper PWC-D24 B PWF-D2P D2PJ1 PQC-1782 — — — PQC-1342 None — — PWC-D24 B PWF-D2P D2PJ1 PQC-1782 — — — PWC-D24 B — — PQC-1782 B — — D2PA6 PQC-1342 None — — D2PA4 PYC-A1 None — — 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-59 3.4 3 D2PF Series Relay Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D2PF/D2PR Series Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D2PF2AP 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D2PF2AP1 12 Vac DPDT 46 D2PF2AR 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2PF2AR1 24 Vac DPDT 180 D2PF2AT 3 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2PF2AT1 48 Vdc DPDT 2600 D2PF2AW1 3 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D2PF2AA1 120 Vac DPDT 4430 D2PF2AA 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2PF2AB 12 Vac 4PDT 46 D2PF4AR 12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2PF4AR1 3 24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2PF4AT 24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2PF4AT1 3 48 Vdc 4PDT 2600 D2PF4AW1 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2PF4AA1 3 120 Vac 4PDT 4430 D2PF4AA 220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2PF4AB 3 Full Featured Style 3 3 3 3 3 3 Plain Cover Style 3 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D2PR2P1 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2PR2R1 3 24 Vac DPDT 180 D2PR2T 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2PR2T1 48 Vdc DPDT 2600 D2PR2W1 3 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D2PR2A1 120 Vac DPDT 4430 D2PR2A 3 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2PR2B 6 Vac 4PDT 9.6 D2PR4P 6 Vdc 4PDT 40 D2PR4P1 12 Vac 4PDT 46 D2PR4R 12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2PR4R1 3 3 3 3 24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2PR4T 24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2PR4T1 3 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2PR4A1 120 Vac 4PDT 4430 D2PR4A 220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2PR4B 3 3 Latching Style 24 Vac DPDT 180 D2PR5T 3 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D2PR5T1 110 Vac DPDT 11,000 D2PR5A 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Accessories 3 D2PF/D2PR Sockets and Accessories Type Module Size Nominal Voltage (Max. for Sockets) Nominal Current Mounting Style Socket B 300 12 DIN rail/panel Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number 14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 1 D2PAL 1 3 3 None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D2PA6 B 300 10 DIN rail/panel 14/16 (2) AWG, 2.5/1.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 1 D2PAP 1 B 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D2PA7 1 mm2 Screw clamping 5 D2PA4 PFC-D2D72 None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) Flange mount adapter — — — Flange — — 25 Plastic ejector clip — — — — — — 10 PWC-D24 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1782 — — — — — — 25 PQC-1342 — — — — — — 100 PYC-A1 Hold-down spring 3 3 3 3 Protection diode B 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BD250 LED indicator B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG24 B 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG240 MOV suppressor 3 B 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV120 B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV24 B 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV240 Coil bus jumpers — — — — — — 10 D2PJ1 Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-61 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 D2PF/D2PR Relay Specifications 3 Contact Characteristics D2PR2/D2PR4 D2PR5 D2PF Contact rating 10A 5A 10A Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in 3 Contact materials Silver alloy Silver (gold flashed) Silver alloy Maximum switching voltage 300V 250 Vac/125 Vdc 300V 3 Switching current at voltage—resistive 10A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 3A at 250 Vac 10A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 8A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — 8A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 3 Description 3 8A at 28 Vdc 5A at 30 Vdc 8A at 28 Vdc Switching current at voltage 1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1 hp at 277 Vac 1/8 hp at 250 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1 hp at 277 Vac Pilot duty B300 — B300 3 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA, 1 Vdc 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 3 Coil Characteristics 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Operating range % of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 80 to 110% 85 to 110% % of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 1.2 VA — 1.2 VA 0.9W — 0.9W 15% (AC) 30% (AC) 15% (AC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) Average consumption Dropout voltage threshold Performance Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 200,000 200,000 200,000 Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 100,000,000 10,000,000 Response time 20 ms — 20 ms Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 1500 rms — 1500 rms Between poles Vac (rms) 1500 rms — 1500 rms Operation –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) — –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) — –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) 3 Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz — 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz Shock resistance 10 g-n — 10 g-n 3 Degree of protection IP40 — IP40 Cover options Plain cover Plain cover Full featured Features Mechanical flag indicator Latching Locking pushbutton/ Bipolar LED/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA 3 3 3 Dielectric strength Environment 3 3 Ambient air temperature around the device Features 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Wiring Diagrams 3 D2PF2/D2PR2 3 12 42 1 4 3 14 44 3 8 5 3 11 41 9 12 A1 A2 13 14 3 3 3 IEC NEMA 3 3 D2PF4/D2PR4 12 22 32 42 1 2 3 4 14 24 34 44 5 6 7 8 3 3 3 11 21 31 41 9 A2 13 10 11 3 12 3 A1 IEC 14 3 3 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-63 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D2PF2/D2PR2 3 0.27 (7.0) 0.83 (21.0) 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.83 (21.0) 1.10 (27.9) 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 0.24 (6.0) 1.54 (39.1) 0.24 (6.0) 1.40 (35.5) 3 D2PF4/D2PR4 3 0.27 (7.0) 3 0.83 (21.0) 0.02 (0.5) 0.83 (21.0) 3 1.10 (27.9) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 3 0.24 (6.0) 1.40 (35.5) D2PA6 0.71 (18.0) 2 1 3 8 3 7 3 6 3 5 3 0.24 (6.0) 1.54 (39.1) 4 3 3 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 2.51 (64.0) 3 3 2.71 (69.0) 3 1.25 (32.0) 3 1 3 1 4 0.17 (4.3) Dia. Typ. 3 1 1 3 1 0 1.00 (25.4) 3 0.89 (22.7) 1.20 (30.7) 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 13 INPUT N.C. N.O. COM 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 14 INPUT A1 14 11 12 13 INPUT 31 21 IEC 11 10 NEMA 3 3 V7-T3-64 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 13 9 41 3 3 14 A2 1 2 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D2PA7 3 1.57 (40.0) 1.00 (25.4) 3 0.14 (3.8) 0.74 (19.0) 3.30 (84.0) 3.11 (79.0) 34 7 24 6 44 14 3 8 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 42 2.40 (61.0) 34 24 7 6 44 14 8 5 3 1 3 32 22 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 A2 A1 INPUT INPUT 14 41 A2 11 3 2 1 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 N.O. COM 9 14 3 3 3 INPUT MODULE INPUT 3 3 13 3 21 31 INPUT 12 11 10 INPUT 3 10 IEC 1.18 (30.0) N.C. 13 14 INPUT A1 21 41 12 4 8 11 9 13 31 COM 2 MODULE INPUT 1.55 (39.5) 11 N.C. 13 3 4 N.O. 14 0.14 (3.80) 12 3 NEMA 0.25 (6.4) 0.82 (21.0) 3 3 1.18 (30.0) 3 D2PR5 3 0.10 (2.5) AC 1 4 1 4 14 – 0.05 (1.3) Dia. x 0.09 (2.3) Elliptic Holes 5 8 5 8 0.02 (0.5) 9 12 9 10 11 12 14 13 10 11 13 RESET 0.02 (0.5) 0.24 (6.1) 3 3 0.25 1.10 (6.4) (27.9) Max. 1.42 (36.1) Max. 3 DC 0.85 (21.6) Max. R SET 3 14 3 RESET 3 Terminal Arrangement/Internal Connections (Bottom View) 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-65 3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D2PAP 2.40 (61.0) 3 0.74 (19.0) 3 3 3 3 3.34 (85.0) 3 3 41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 0.20 (5.6) 3.11 (79.0) 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 14 13 3 3 N.C. N.O. COM 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 14 13 INPUT N.O. COM INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT 1.49 (38.0) N.C. 3 A2 3 3 IEC: A1 NEMA: 14 INPUT 13 A2 INPUT IEC 3 0.90 (22.0) 3 1.06 (26.9) A1 14 INPUT NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 13 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D2PAL 3 2.40 (61.0) 1.06 (27.0) 0.74 (19.0) 3 41 11 12 9 44 14 11 12 9 3 44 14 8 5 3 42 12 4 1 3 5 8 42 12 4 3.34 (85.0) 41 3 1 0.20 (5.6) 3.11 (79.0) 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 N.C. N.O. 3 COM 3 INPUT 3 MODULE INPUT 1.49 (38.0) MODULE INPUT 3 3 A2 IEC: NEMA: A1 A2 14 INPUT 13 INPUT A1 14 IEC INPUT 13 NEMA 3 3 0.92 (23.5) 3 3 D2PA4 Socket for D2PR5 DPDT Latching Relays Only 3 Terminal Arrangement (Top View) Two 0.17 (4.3) x 0.20 (5.1) Mounting Holes 8 3 2 1 7 6 5 2.83 (71.9) Max. 1.16 (29.5) Max. 3 3 3 2.320 + – 0.004 (58.92 + – 0.10) 3 0.24 (6.1) 0.16 (4.1) Mounting Holes Two 0.18 (4.6) Dia. or M4 (Two 0.16 (4.1) Dia. or M3) 0.65 (16.5) 12 11 10 4 14 13 3 9 0.870 + – 0.008 (22.09 + – 0.20) 3 1.18 (30.0) Max. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-67 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D3 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-69 V7-T3-69 V7-T3-71 V7-T3-72 V7-T3-73 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 D3PR/D3PF Series 3 Product Description Features 3 The D3 Series of relays provides excellent functionality in a popular octal base design. Rigid pins and guide allow for quick and easy installation with little risk of damage. D3PR ● Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load currents ● Panel and DIN rail mounting ● 8- or 11-pin octal plug-in 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Standards and Certifications D3PF The contact operation can be easily checked by Pushto-Test button ● Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered condition ● LED status lamp shows coil ON or OFF status— ideal for use in low light applications ● Push-to-Test button allows for manual operation of relay without the need for coil power ● Lock-down door holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate position when activated ● Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from sockets easily ● ID tag/write label to identify relays in multiplerelay circuits ● Bipolar LED allows for reverse polarity applications ● (CSA approval not applicable to D3PR5 Relays) UL Listed When used with accompanying Eaton screw terminal socket (for D3PF only) 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Catalog Number Selection 3 D3PR/D3PF Series 1 3 D3PR 2 1 A 3 Family Type D3PR = Standard relay D3PF = Full featured relay Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc Contact Configuration 2 = DPDT (8-pin) 3 = 3PDT (11-pin) 5 = DPDT latching (11-pin) 2 Options Blank = Plain cover relay (D3PR only) A = LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (D3PF only) 1 = Indicating light (D3PR only) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection D3 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 Relay Type Socket Clip Module Type ID Tag Jumper D3PR2, D3PF2 D3PA6 PQC-1332 A — D3PJ1 D3PAL8 PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 — D3PA2 PQC-1351 None — — D3PR3, D3PF3 D3PR5 D3PA7 PQC-1332 A — D3PJ1 D3PAL11 PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 — D3PA3 PQC-1351 None — — D3PA7 PQC-1351 A — D3PJ1 D3PAL11 PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 — D3PA3 PQC-1351 None — — 3 3 3 3 3 3 Notes 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 2 D3PR only. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-69 3.4 3 D3 Series Relay Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D3PR/D3PF Series Coil Voltage 3 Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Full Featured Style 3 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D3PF2AA 240 Vac DPDT 7200 D3PF2AB 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3PF2AR1 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PF2AT1 48 Vdc DPDT 1800 D3PF2AW1 3 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D3PF3AA 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D3PF3AB 3 6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D3PF3AP1 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PF3AT 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PF3AT1 48 Vdc 3PDT 1800 D3PF3AW1 3 3 3 3 Latching Style 3 120 Vac DPDT 10,000 D3PR5A 110/125 Vdc DPDT 9000 D3PR5A1 3 240 Vac DPDT 36,000 D3PR5B 12 Vdc DPDT 90 D3PR5R1 24 Vac DPDT 470 D3PR5T 3 24 Vdc DPDT 350 D3PR5T1 48 Vdc DPDT 1400 D3PR5W1 3 Plain Cover with LED Indicator 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D3PR21A 3 24 Vac DPDT 72 D3PR21T 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PR21T1 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D3PR31B 3 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PR31T 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PR31T1 3 Plain Cover Style 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D3PR2A 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D3PR2A1 220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D3PR2B 6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D3PR2P 3 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D3PR2P1 12 Vac DPDT 18 D3PR2R 3 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3PR2R1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D3PR2T 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PR2T1 3 48 Vac DPDT 290 D3PR2W 48 Vdc DPDT 1800 D3PR2W1 3 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D3PR3A 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D3PR3A1 3 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D3PR3B 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D3PR3R 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D3PR3R1 3 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PR3T 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PR3T1 3 48 Vdc 3PDT 1800 D3PR3W1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Accessories 3 D3PR/D3PF Series Sockets and Accessories Type Module Size Nominal Voltage (Max. for Sockets) Nominal Current Mounting Style Socket A 300 16 DIN rail/panel A 300 12 None 300/600 15/10 A 600 5 Metal spring clip 3 Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D3PA6 1 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 10 D3PAL8 1 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D3PA2 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D3PA7 1 mm2 Elevator 10 D3PAL11 1 Screw clamping 10 D3PA3 A 300 12 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) None 300/600 15/5 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 — — — — — — 25 PQC-1332 — — — — — — 10 PQC-1351 3 3 3 3 Protection diode A 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AD250 LED indicator A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG24 A 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG240 A 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV120 A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV24 MOV suppressor A 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV240 R/C suppressor A 6 to 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC24 A 110 to 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC240 Write-on plastic labels — — — — — — 10 PWF-D3D5 Coil bus jumpers — — — — — — 10 D3PJ1 Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-71 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 D3PR/D3PF Series Relay Specifications 3 Description 3 3 3 D3PR D3PF D3PR5 (Latching) Contact rating 16A 16A 16A Terminal style Octal Octal 11-pin octal Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Maximum switching voltage 300V 300V 300V Switching current at voltage—resistive 16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz — 16A at 28 Vdc 16A at 28 Vdc 16A at 28 Vdc 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac Contact Characteristics 3 3 3 Switching current at voltage 3 Pilot duty B300 B300 B300 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) % of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110% % of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 3 VA 3 VA 2 VA 1.4W 1.4W 1.64W 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 100,000 operations Mechanical life operations unpowered 5,000,000 operations 5,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations Response time 20 ms 20 ms 30 ms 3 3 3 Coil Characteristics Operating range 3 Average consumption 3 Dropout voltage threshold 3 Performance 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Dielectric strength Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) 2500V (rms) Between poles Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) Operation –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n Degree of protection IP40 IP40 IP40 Cover options Plain cover Full Featured Latching Features Mechanical flag indicator Bipolar LED/ Locking pushbutton/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator — Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/UR Environment Ambient air temperature around the device Features 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D3PR2/D3PF2 3 3 3 1.39 (35.3) 1.39 (35.3) 3 3 0.24 (6.1) 1.37 (34.8) 2.20 (55.2) 1.37 (34.8) 2.10 (50.3) 3 3 12 22 5 4 14 24 3 6 A1 A2 2 7 11 31 1 IEC 3 3 3 8 3 NEMA 3 D3PR3/D3PF3 3 1.39 (35.3) 0.24 (6.1) 1.39 (35.3) 3 3 3 1.37 (34.8) 2.20 (55.2) 1.37 (34.8) 2.10 (50.3) 3 3 21 22 24 5 32 12 14 34 A1 A2 11 31 IEC 6 7 3 8 4 3 9 3 2 3 10 1 11 3 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-73 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D3PR5—Octal Base Latching Relay 3 1.39 (35.3) 3 3 3 1.37 (34.8) 2.40 (61.0) 3 RESET RESET 3 3 32 14 COMMON 31 11 IEC 3 3 3 3 COIL 8 3 A2 1 8 3 10 COMMON 31 7 4 9 2 6 5 7 4 34 A1 COIL 2 6 5 32 14 A2 11 24 12 34 A1 21 22 24 12 3 3 COIL 2 21 22 RESET RESET 9 2 11 10 1 NEMA 1 11 COIL 1 SET SET SET SET Single Coil (AC) Dual Coil (DC) Single Coil (AC) Dual Coil (DC) D3PA2 0.97 (24.6) 1.60 (40.0) 0.59 (15.0) 3 1.29 (33.0) 3 A1 7 8 1 3 0.16 (4.2) 2 2.02 (51.0) 3 INPUT 3 1 8 3 1.01 (25.6) 3 21 2 2.12 (54.0) 3 11 3 5 6 4 5 12 22 A2 2 INPUT INPUT 1 7 2 6 3 1 8 8 7 INPUT 7 6 4 5 4 14 IEC 24 3 4 5 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 6 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D3PA3 3 0.97 (24.6) 2.32 (59.0) 3 2.06 (52.0) 3 3 1 1.60 Dia. (40.0) 11 2 14 10 3 4 1.02 (25.0) 2.05 (52.0) 9 8 5 1 31 11 2.16 (54.8) INPUT 1 INPUT 11 2 10 INPUT 1 5 6 9 4 8 7 32 7 6 8 7 22 6 24 21 5 7 6 IEC 3 3 8 5 4 9 10 3 9 4 INPUT 11 2 10 3 12 3 34 3 11 2 A2 A1 3 3 NEMA 3 3 0.97 (24.6) 1.60 (40.0) 0.59 (15.0) 3 1.29 (33.0) 3 A1 7 8 1 2 2.02 (51.0) 0.16 (4.2) INPUT 2.12 (54.0) 1.01 (25.6) 3 4 5 11 21 1 8 A2 2 INPUT INPUT 1 1 8 8 3 7 3 INPUT 2 7 2 7 3 3 6 3 6 3 4 5 12 22 4 5 6 14 IEC 24 3 4 5 3 6 3 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-75 3.4 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D3PA6 1.45 (37.0) 3 1.42 (36.0) 1.10 (27.9) 3 11 22 3 3 2.86 (72.0) 3 11 12 5 1 4 1 12 4 22 5 24 21 14 24 21 14 6 8 3 6 8 3 0.15 (3.8) 3.00 (76.0) 4 5 3 7 3 1.58 (40.0) 3 6 2 7 3 2 1 8 MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT IEC: NEMA: 3 A2 A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 INPUT A1 INPUT INPUT 3 7 2 Coil Jumper Buss INPUT 7 IEC 3 2 NEMA 1.20 (30.0) 3 3 3 1 8 4 5 6 D3PA7 1.45 (37.0) 3 1.50 (38.0) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 32 24 22 8 7 5 3 31 11 3.18 (81.0) 3 21 11 6 1 14 0.15 (3.8) 3 34 9 3 12 4 3.01 (76.0) 32 22 24 21 31 34 6 7 5 8 11 11 14 9 3 2 10 11 3 8 4 9 3 12 1 MODULE 4 5 7 6 1 6 7 3 5 8 4 9 3 2 10 11 1 MODULE INPUT INPUT 1.58 (40.0) 3 A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 IEC: NEMA: 3 A2 A1 INPUT 3 INPUT IEC NEMA INPUT 2 10 3 10 Coil Jumper Buss INPUT 1.35 (34.2) 3 3 3 V7-T3-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 2 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D3PAL8 3 0.86 (22.0) 22 24 12 3 14 22 24 6 5 4 14 12 6 5 4 3 3 3 3 2.95 (75.0) 0.12 (3.10) 5 INPUT A2 3 6 3 3 7 2 7 2 3 21 11 8 7 1 2 A2 21 A1 11 INPUT INPUT 0.12 (30.0) 1.06 (27.0) 3 MODULE INPUT 3 A1 A2 7 1 MODULE INPUT 2 IEC: NEMA: A2 8 1 INPUT A1 7 A2 3 4 6 8 1.45 (37.0) 5 4 7 8 7 1 3 2 INPUT INPUT IEC 3 NEMA 3 1.49 (38.0) 3 D3PAL11 3 0.86 (22.0) 24 34 32 22 14 3 12 32 34 9 5 7 8 3 22 24 12 14 7 8 9 4 3 5 3 4 3 0.12 (3.1) 6 7 8 2.95 (75.0) 9 INPUT A2 1.06 (27.0) 10 3 1 21 11 MODULE INPUT 2 IEC: NEMA: 11 0.12 (30.0) 6 3 MODULE INPUT 3 A1 A2 10 11 1 3 2 INPUT A1 10 A2 A2 31 3 10 2 3 4 9 3 11 1.45 (37.0) 3 5 8 4 10 6 7 5 1 A2 31 21 11 A1 10 10 11 6 1 2 2 INPUT INPUT IEC 3 INPUT INPUT NEMA 3 1.49 (38.0) 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-77 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D4 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-80 V7-T3-81 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 3 3 D4 Series 3 Product Description 3 3 3 3 The D4 Series is a slim-form relay designed to fit into tight spaces. The retaining clip is built in to the socket to provide easy and secure assembly. File # E1491, E65657 Catalog Number Selection D4 Series 1 D4PR 1 1 A File # LR701519 Family Type D4PR Features ● ● 3 ● 3 Standards and Certifications Slim-styled power relay Socket has built-in holddown clip Panel or DIN rail mounting Contact Configuration 1 = SPDT 2 = DPDT Options Blank = Plain cover 1 = Indicating light 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 Product Selection 3 D4 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 3 3 Relay Type Socket Hold-Down Clip D4PR1 D4PA1 2 D4PR2 D4PA2 2 Notes 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 2 Socket has built-in hold-down spring. 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D4 Series Relay D4 Series Voltage/Poles Standard Pack Catalog Number DIN Rail Sockets Voltage/Poles Standard Pack 3 DPDT with Indicating Light Single-pole 10 D4PA1 120 Vac 1 D4PR21A Two-pole 10 D4PA2 110 Vdc 1 D4PR21A1 240 Vac 1 D4PR21B D4PR11A 6 Vac 50 D4PR21P SPDT with Indicating Light 120 Vac 3 Catalog Number 1 3 3 3 110 Vdc 1 D4PR11A1 6 Vdc 1 D4PR21P1 240 Vac 1 D4PR11B 12 Vac 50 D4PR21R 6 Vac 50 D4PR11P 12 Vdc 1 D4PR21R1 6 Vdc 50 D4PR11P1 24 Vac 1 D4PR21T 12 Vac 50 D4PR11R 24 Vdc 1 D4PR21T1 12 Vdc 1 D4PR11R1 48 Vdc 50 D4PR21W1 3 24 Vac 1 D4PR11T Standard DPDT 24 Vdc 1 D4PR11T1 120 Vac 1 D4PR2A 3 48 Vdc 50 D4PR11W1 110 Vdc 50 D4PR2A1 240 Vac 50 D4PR2B Standard SPDT 120 Vac 1 D4PR1A 6 Vac 50 D4PR2P 110 Vdc 50 D4PR1A1 6 Vdc 1 D4PR2P1 240 Vac 50 D4PR1P 12 Vac 50 D4PR2R 6 Vac 1 D4PR1P1 12 Vdc 1 D4PR2R1 6 Vdc 50 D4PR1R 24 Vac 1 D4PR2T 12 Vac 1 D4PR1R1 24 Vdc 1 D4PR2T1 12 Vdc 1 D4PR1R1-A2 48 Vdc 1 D4PR2W1 24 Vac 1 D4PR1T 24 Vdc 1 D4PR1T1 48 Vdc 1 D4PR1W1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-79 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 D4 Series 3 Description 3 Rated load 30 Vdc 10A 30 Vdc 5A 3 Carry current 10A 10A Max. operating voltage 380 Vac/125 Vdc 380 Vac/125 Vdc Max. operating current 10A 10A Contact material AgCdO AgCdO 3 3 Resistive Load (p.f. = 1) Inductive Load (p.f. = 0.4, L/R = 7 ms) 250 Vac 10A 250 Vac 7.5A D4PR1 Max. switching capacity 2500 VA 1875 VA 300W 150W Min. permissible load 100 mA, 5 Vdc 100 mA, 5 Vdc Pickup voltage (max.) 80% AC/70% DC 80% AC/70% DC 3 Dropout voltage (min.) 30% AC/15% DC 30% AC/15% DC Voltage (max.) 110% 110% 3 Mechanical life (min.) 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 100,000 Maximum hp ratings 1/3 hp (125 Vac) 1/3 hp (125 Vac) 1/2 hp (250 Vac) 1/2 hp (250 Vac) 1/2 hp (277 Vac) 1/2 hp (277 Vac) 240 Vac 5A 250 Vac 2A 3 3 3 3 3 D4PR2 Rated load 3 30 Vdc 5A 30 Vdc 3A Carry current 5A 5A Max. operating voltage 380 Vac/125 Vdc 380 Vac/125 Vdc Max. operating current 5A 5A Contact material AgCdO AgCdO 3 Max. switching capacity 1250 VA 500 VA 150W 90W 3 Min. permissible load 10 mA, 5 Vdc 10 mA, 5 Vdc Pickup voltage (max.) 80% AC/70% DC 80% AC/70% DC 3 3 3 3 3 Dropout voltage (min.) 30% AC/15% DC 30% AC/15% DC Voltage (max.) 110% 110% Mechanical life (min.) 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC 10,000,000 AC/20,000,000 DC Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 100,000 Maximum hp ratings 1/6 hp (120 Vac) 1/6 hp (120 Vac) 1/3 hp (240 Vac) 1/3 hp (240 Vac) 1/3 hp (265 Vac) 1/3 hp (265 Vac) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D4PR1 3 D4PR2 0.51 (13.0) Max. 1.14 (29.0) Max. 0.10 (2.5) 0.39 (10.0) 0.08 (2.0) 1.14 (29.0) Max. 0.79 (20.0) 0.51 (13.0) Max. 1.14 (29.0) Max. 0.01 (2.5) 3 0.39 (10.0) 3 1.10 (28.0) Max. 0.79 (20.0) 0.08 (2.0) 3 0.02 (0.5) 0.19 (4.8) 0.24 (6.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.02 (0.5) 5 – 0.035 x 0.12 (0.9 x 3) Elliptic Holes 0.35 (8.9) 0.30 (7.5) 0.20 (5.2) 0.20 (5.2) 0.69 (17.5) 2 4 3 0.02 (0.5) 3 0.16 (4.0) 3 0.30 (7.5) 0.02 (0.5) 0.76 (19.4) 1 5 0.10 (2.6) 0.02 (0.5) 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 3 3 Terminal Arrangement/ Internal Connections (Bottom View) Terminal Arrangement/ Internal Connections (Bottom View) 3 3 D4PA1 0.28 (7.1) 2.82 (71.6) Max. 0.08 (2.0) 0.16 (4.1) Dia. Holes 3 0.17 (4.2) Dia. Holes Five 3.5 x 0.32 (88.9 x 8.0) 1.40 (35.6) 5 3 1.180 0.002 (29.97 0.05) 2 0.77 (19.6) 1.18 (30.0) 2.13 (54.1) Max. 0.16 0.77 (4.1) (19.6) Max. 3 4 3 1 Terminal Arrangement 3 M3 or 3.30 (0.13) Dia. Holes 3 Mounting Holes 3 D4PA2 3 0.28 (7.1) 2.82 (71.6) Max. 0.16 0.77 (4.1) (19.6) Max. 0.08 (2.0) 0.16 (4.1) Dia. Holes 3 0.17 (4.2) Dia. Holes Eight 3.5 x 0.32 (88.9 x 8.0) 1.40 (35.6) 0.77 (19.6) 1.18 (30.0) 2.13 (54.1) Max. 6 3 5 4 7 2 8 1 Terminal Arrangement 3 1.180 0.002 (29.97 0.05) 3 3 M3 or 0.13 (3.30) Dia. Holes 3 Mounting Holes 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-81 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D5 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-83 V7-T3-83 V7-T3-85 V7-T3-86 V7-T3-87 V7-T3-88 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 D5PR/D5PF Series 3 Product Description Features 3 The D5 Series is rated at 16A and is available in fullfeatured and plain cover styles. D5PR ● Industrial rated 300V, 16A relay in two-pole and threepole configurations ● Compact design can be panel or DIN rail mounted 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Standards and Certifications D5PF Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered condition ● LED status lamp shows coil ON or OFF status— ideal for use in low light applications ● Push-to-Test button allows for manual operation of relay without the need for coil power ● Lock-down door holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate position when activated ● Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from sockets easily ● ID tag/write label to identify relays in multiplerelay circuits ● Bipolar LED allows for reverse polarity applications ● UL Listed When used with accompanying Eaton screw terminal socket (D5PF only) 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Catalog Number Selection 3 D5 Series 3 D5PR3 1 A 3 Family Type D5PR = Standard relay D5PF = Full featured relay Contact Configuration 2 = DPDT 3 = 3PDT Options Blank = Plain cover (D5PR only) A = LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (D5PF only) 1 = Indicating light (D5PR only) Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac G1 = 74 Vdc P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 D5 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 Relay Type D5PR2, D5PF2, D5PR3, D5PF3 Module Type ID Tag Jumper PQC-1351 A PWF-D3D5 D3PJ1 PQC-1351 None — — D5PA3L PQC-1351 None — — D5PA3S PQC-1351 None — — Socket Clip D5PAL D5PA2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-83 3.4 3 D5 Series Relay Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D5 Series Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D5PF2AA 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PF2AA1 220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D5PF2AB 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PF2AR1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PF2AT 3 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PF2AT1 48 Vdc DPDT 1800 D5PF2AW1 3 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D5PF3AA 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PF3AA1 3 Full Featured 3 3 3 3 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D5PF3AB 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PF3AR1 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5PF3AT 3 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5PF3AT1 3 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PR21A1 6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D5PR21P 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D5PR21P1 3 12 Vac DPDT 18 D5PR21R 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PR21R1 3 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PR21T1 48 Vac DPDT 290 D5PR21W 3 48 Vdc DPDT 1800 D5PR21W1 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D5PR31A 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PR31A1 3 6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D5PR31P1 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D5PR31R 3 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PR31R1 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5PR31T1 48 Vdc 3PDT 1800 D5PR31W1 220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D5PR24B 3 6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D5PR24P 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D5PR24P1 3 12 Vac DPDT 18 D5PR24R 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PR24R1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PR24T 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PR24T1 48 Vac DPDT 290 D5PR24W 3 Plain Cover with LED 3 3 3 Side Flange Cover 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 D5 Series, continued D5 Series Relay Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 120 Vac DPDT 1700 D5PR2A 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PR2A1 3 3 Plain Cover 220/240 Vac DPDT 7200 D5PR2B 74 Vdc DPDT 4800 D5PR2G1 6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D5PR2P 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D5PR2P1 12 Vac DPDT 18 D5PR2R 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PR2R1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PR2T 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PR2T1 48 Vac DPDT 290 D5PR2W 48 Vdc DPDT 1800 D5PR2W1 120 Vac 3PDT 1700 D5PR3A 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PR3A1 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D5PR3B 74 Vdc 3PDT 4800 D5PR3G1 6 Vac 3PDT 4.2 D5PR3P 6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D5PR3P1 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D5PR3R 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PR3R1 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5PR3T 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5PR3T1 48 Vdc 3PDT 1800 D5PR3W 48 Vdc 3PDT 1800 D5PR3W1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 D5 Sockets and Accessories Module Size Type Socket Metal spring clip Nominal Voltage (Max. for Sockets) Nominal Current Mounting Style Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number 3 3 A 300 25 DIN rail 10 /14 (2) AWG, 6/2.5 (2) mm2 Elevator 10 D5PAL 1 None 300 15 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 10 D5PA2 None 300 15 Chassis (Output): 16 AWG, 1 mm2 Solder 10 D5PA3L mm2 None 300 15 Chassis (Output): 16 AWG, 1 Solder 10 D5PA3S — — — — — — 10 PQC-1351 3 3 Protection diode A 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AD250 LED indicator A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG24 A 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG240 A 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV120 MOV suppressor A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV24 A 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV240 R/C suppressor A 6 to 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC24 A 110 to 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC240 Write-on plastic labels — — — — — — 10 PWF-D3D5 Coil bus jumpers — — — — — — 10 D3PJ1 Plastic DIN rail end stop — — — — — — 25 PFP-P 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 V7-T3-85 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 D5 Series 3 Contact Characteristics 3 Description Contact rating D5PR D5PF 16A 16A Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in 3 Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy Maximum switching voltage 300V 300V 3 Switching current at voltage—resistive 16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 16A at 28 Vdc 16A at 28 Vdc Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/2 hp at 240 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac 1/3 hp at 120 Vac Pilot duty B300 B300 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) % of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% % of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 3 Average consumption 3 VA 1.4W 3 VA 1.4W 3 Drop-out voltage threshold 10%/15% (AC) 10% (DC) 10%/15% (AC) 10% (DC) 3 Performance Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 3 Mechanical life operations unpowered 5,000,000 operations 5,000,000 operations Response time 20 ms 20 ms Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) Between poles Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) Operation –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) 3 3 3 3 Coil Characteristics 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Operating range Dielectric strength Environment Ambient air temperature around the device Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n Degree of protection IP40 IP40 3 Features Cover options Flange/plain cover with LED Full featured 3 Features Mechanical flag indicator (LED optional) Bipolar LED/ Mechanical flag indicator/ Locking pushbutton/ Removable ID tag Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Wiring Diagrams 3 D5PA3L and D5PA3S 22 32 12 N.C. 34 14 24 N.O. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 N.C. 3 3 N.O. 3 31 11 21 A1 COM A2 3 3 B A INPUT COM INPUT IEC 3 NEMA 3 D5PR2/D5PF2 DPDT 22 12 1 3 3 3 24 14 4 3 6 3 11 21 7 9 A1 A2 A B 3 3 3 3 NEMA IEC 3 D5PR3/D5PF3 3PDT 12 32 22 1 2 3 3 3 14 34 24 4 5 3 6 3 11 31 21 7 8 3 9 3 A1 A2 IEC B A 3 3 NEMA 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-87 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Dimensions 3 D5PR and D5PF Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3 1.40 (35.4) 1.40 (35.4) 3 3 0.20 (6.1) 3 1.37 (34.9) D5PA2 3 1.69 (43.0) 1.53 (39.0) 1.03 (26.0) 1.37 (35.0) 6 3 24 34 14 6 5 4 2 3 1 0.40 (10.0) 3 5 3 4 3 1.97 (50.0) 1.37 (34.9) 2.10 (53.1) 22 32 12 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 6 5 4 6 5 4 8 7 8 7 3 0.15 (3.8) 3 3.00 (76.0) 3 9 3.14 (80.0) 3 B 3 1.50 (38.0) 3 B N.C. N.O. COM 9 A INPUT B A1 B 3 9 3 8 7 21 31 IEC A INPUT INPUT 11 9 8 7 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-88 N.O. COM A INPUT A A2 N.C. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D5PA3L and D5PA3S 0.30 (7.5) 3 0.87 (22.2) 1.50 (38.1) 3 3 0.02 (0.5) 1.25 (31.7) 2 1 2.03 (51.0) 1.37 (34.7) 4 5 7 3 3 3 6 8 9 3 1.68 (42.8) A 3 B 3 0.29 (7.5) 0.50 (2.5) 0.16 Dia. (4.2) 2 Holes 3 Recommended Chassis Cutout 0.28 (5.3) 0.87 (22.2) 3 0.16 (3.9) Dia. Holes 3 3 0.63 (16.2) 0.24 (6.1) 1.37 (34.7) Solder Type Terminals 1.68 (42.6) 0.13 (3.3) 3 3 1.27 (32.3) 3 0.29 (7.5) 3 0.63 (16.2) 0.24 (6.1) 1.37 (34.7) 0.18 (4.7) Typ. 3 1.39 (35.4) 3 3 3/16 Q.C. Type Terminals 0.19 (4.7) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-89 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D5PAL 3 2.48 (63.0) 3 3 3 3 3.70 (96.0) 3 21 9 31 8 11 7 21 31 11 9 8 7 24 6 34 5 14 4 24 34 14 6 5 4 22 3 32 2 12 1 22 32 12 3 2 1 3 3.62 (92.0) 6 8 9 N.C. 4 N.O. 5 1 2 3 6 8 9 7 N.C. 4 N.O. 5 1 2 7 COM 3 B COM B A A INPUT 3 INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT 3 A2 3 7 IEC: NEMA: INPUT 3 A1 2 A2 Coil Jumper Buss A1 INPUT 1.40 (36.0) 3 INPUT IEC B Coil Jumper Buss A INPUT INPUT NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Contents D7 Series Relay Description Page D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-92 V7-T3-92 V7-T3-95 V7-T3-96 V7-T3-98 V7-T3-99 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D7PR/D7PF Series Product Description The D7 Series is a costeffective control relay with high dielectric strength and high current-carrying capacity. Features D7PR ● Arc barrier equipped relay with high dielectric strength ● Panel and DIN rail mounting Standards and Certifications D7PF Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered condition ● Bipolar LED status lamp allows for reverse polarity applications ● Shows coil ON or OFF status ● Ideal in low light conditions ● Color-coded pushbutton identifies AC coils with red or DC coils with blue pushbuttons ● Allows for manual operation of relay without the need for coil power ● Ideal for field service personnel to test control circuits ● Lock-down door, when activated, holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate position ● Excellent for analyzing circuit problems ● Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from sockets more easily than conventional relays ● White plastic ID tag/write label used for identification of relays in multi-relay circuits ● File # E37317, E65657 File # LR217017, LR217069 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-91 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Catalog Number Selection D7 Series 3 3 3 3 3 D7PR 1 1 A Family Type D7PR = Standard relay D7PF = Full featured relay Contact Configuration 1 = SPDT 3 = 3PDT 2 = DPDT 4 = 4PDT 3 Options Blank = Plain cover (D7PR only) A = LED test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (D7PF only) 1 = Indicating light (D7PR only) 3 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 Product Selection 3 D7 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 3 Relay Type D7PR1, D7PR2, D7PF1, D7PF2 3 3 3 D7PR3, D7PF3 D7PR4, D7PF4 Socket/Adapter Clip Module Type ID Tag Jumper D7PAA PQC-1342 B — — PQC-1349 B — — D7PA9 PQC-1342 None — — PFC-D2D72 — None — — D7PAB PQC-1783 A — — PMC-1783 A — — PFC-D73 — None — — D7PAD PQC-1784 A — — PMC-1784 A — — — None — — 3 PFC-D74 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D7 Series Relay 3.4 D7 Series Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 120 Vac SPDT 4430 D7PF1AA 6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PF1AP 3 3 Full Featured 6 Vdc SPDT 40 D7PF1AP1 12 Vac SPDT 46 D7PF1AR 24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PF1AT1 48 Vac SPDT 788 D7PF1AW 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D7PF1AW1 120 Vac DPDT 4430 D7PF2AA 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PF2AA1 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PF2AB 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D7PF2AP 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D7PF2AP1 12 Vac DPDT 46 D7PF2AR 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PF2AR1 24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PF2AT 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PF2AT1 48 Vac DPDT 788 D7PF2AW 48 Vdc DPDT 2600 D7PF2AW1 120 Vac 3PDT 2770 D7PF3AA 6 Vac 3PDT 6 D7PF3AP 6 Vdc 3PDT 25 D7PF3AP1 12 Vac 3PDT 25.3 D7PF3AR 24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PF3AT 24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PF3AT1 48 Vac 3PDT 412 D7PF3AW 48 Vdc 3PDT 1600 D7PF3AW1 120 Vac 4PDT 2220 D7PF4AA 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7340 D7PF4AA1 240 Vac 4PDT 9120 D7PF4AB 6 Vac 4PDT 5.4 D7PF4AP 6 Vdc 4PDT 24 D7PF4AP1 12 Vac 4PDT 21.2 D7PF4AR 12 Vdc 4PDT 96 D7PF4AR1 24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PF4AT 24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PF4AT1 48 Vdc 4PDT 1550 D7PF4AW 48 Vac 4PDT 410 D7PF4AW1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-93 3.4 3 D7 Series Relay Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D7 Series, continued Coil Voltage 3 Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Plain Cover with LED 3 120 Vac SPDT 4430 D7PR11A 110/125 Vdc SPDT 11,000 D7PR11A1 3 6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PR11P 12 Vac SPDT 46 D7PR11R 3 12 Vdc SPDT 160 D7PR11R1 24 Vac SPDT 180 D7PR11T 24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PR11T1 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D7PR11W1 120 Vac 3PDT 2770 D7PR31A 240 Vac 3PDT 12,100 D7PR31B 24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PR31T 24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PR31T1 48 Vdc 3PDT 1600 D7PR31W1 120 Vac 4PDT 2220 D7PR41A 12 Vdc 4PDT 100 D7PR41R1 3 24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PR41T1 3 120 Vac SPDT 4430 D7PR1A 110/125 Vdc SPDT 11,000 D7PR1A1 3 220/240 Vac SPDT 15,720 D7PR1B 6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PR1P 12 Vdc SPDT 160 D7PR1R1 24 Vac SPDT 180 D7PR1T 24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PR1T1 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D7PR1W1 120 Vac DPDT 4430 D7PR2A 3 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PR2A1 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PR2B 3 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D7PR2P 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D7PR2P1 3 12 Vac DPDT 46 D7PR2R 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PR2R1 24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PR2T 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PR2T1 120 Vac 3PDT 2770 D7PR3A 240 Vac 3PDT 12,100 D7PR3B 6 Vac 3PDT 6 D7PR3P D7PR3R 3 3 3 3 3 Plain Cover 3 3 3 3 3 3 12 Vac 3PDT 25.3 12 Vdc 3PDT 100 D7PR3R1 24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PR3T 24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PR3T1 3 48 Vdc 3PDT 1600 D7PR3W1 120 Vac 4PDT 2220 D7PR4A 3 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7340 D7PR4A1 240 Vac 4PDT 9120 D7PR4B 6 Vac 4PDT 5.4 D7PR4P 3 3 3 3 24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PR4T 24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PR4T1 48 Vdc 4PDT 1550 D7PR4W1 3 3 V7-T3-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Accessories 3 D7 Sockets and Accessories Type Module Size Nominal Voltage (Max. for Sockets) Nominal Current Mounting Style Socket B 300 16 DIN rail/panel Flange mount adapter Wire Size Wire Connection Standard Pack Catalog Number 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAA 1 3 3 3 None 300 10 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping 1 D7PA9 A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAD 1 A 300 16 DIN rail/panel 12/14 (2) AWG, 4/2.5 (2) mm2 Screw clamping — D7PAB 1 — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D2D72 — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D73 — — — Flange — — 25 PFC-D74 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1342 Plastic ID clip — — — — — — 10 PQC-1349 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 25 PQC-1784 3 3 3 Plastic ID clip — — — — — — 10 PMC-1784 Hold-down spring — — — — — — 25 PYC-B2 Metal spring clip — — — — — — 10 PQC-1783 Plastic ID clip — — — — — — 10 PMC-1783 A 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AD250 MOV suppressor R/C suppressor A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG24 A 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-ALG240 A 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV120 A 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV24 A 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-AMV240 A 6 to 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC24 A 110 to 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-RC240 Protection diode B 6 to 250 Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BD250 LED indicator B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG24 B 120/240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BLG240 MOV suppressor Plastic DIN rail end stop 3 3 Protection diode LED indicator 3 B 120 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV120 B 24 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV24 B 240 Vac/Vdc — — — — 20 MOD-BMV240 — — — — — — 25 PFP-P 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529: IP20. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-95 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 D7PR Relay 3 Contact Characteristics 3 3 3 Description Contact rating 3 3 D7PR (DPDT) D7PR (3PDT) D7PR (4PDT) 20A 15A 15A 15A Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Maximum switching voltage 300V 300V 300V 300V Switching current at voltage—resistive 20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 20A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — 10A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — — 3 3 D7PR (SPDT) 20A at 28 Vdc 12A at 28 Vdc 12A at 28 Vdc 12A at 28 Vdc Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1 hp at 250 Vac 1 hp at 250 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac Pilot duty B300 B300 B300 B300 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) % of nominal (AC) 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110% % of nominal (DC) 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 1.2 VA 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA 0.9W 0.9W 1.4W 1.5W 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) Coil Characteristics 3 3 Operating range 3 Average consumption 3 Dropout voltage threshold 3 Performance 3 Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 200,000 operations 200,000 operations Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations Response time 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) Between poles Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) Operation –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n 3 Degree of protection IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 Features 3 Dielectric strength 3 3 3 3 3 3 Environment Ambient air temperature around the device Cover options Plain cover Plain cover Plain cover Plain cover Features Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED) Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED) Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED) Mechanical flag indicator (optional LED) Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays D7PF Relay Description D7PF (SPDT) D7PF (DPDT) D7PF (3PDT) D7PF (4PDT) 20A 15A 15A 15A 3 3 Contact Characteristics Contact rating 3 Terminal style Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in Plug-in Contact materials Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Silver alloy Maximum switching voltage 300V 300V 300V 300V 20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 15A at 120 Vac 50/60 Hz 20A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz 12A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — 10A at 277 Vac 50/60 Hz — — 20A at 28 Vdc 12A at 28 VDC 12A at 28 Vdc 12A at 28 Vdc 3 Switching current at voltage—resistive Switching current at voltage 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 1 hp at 250 Vac 1/2 hp at 120 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac Pilot duty B300 B300 B300 B300 Minimum switching requirement 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 100 mA at 5 Vdc (0.5W) 3 Operating range % of nominal (DC) Dropout voltage threshold 3 3 Coil Characteristics Average consumption 3 3 1 hp at 250 Vac % of nominal (AC) 3 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 85 to 110% 3 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 80 to 110% 1.2 VA 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA 0.9W 0.9W 1.4W 1.5W 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 15% (AC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 10% (DC) 3 3 3 3 Performance Electrical life (UL 508) operations at rated current 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 200,000 operations 200,000 operations Mechanical life operations unpowered 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations 10,000,000 operations Response time 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms Between coil and contact Vac (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) Between poles Vac (rms) 1500V (rms) 1500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 2500V (rms) 3 3 Dielectric strength 3 Environment 3 Ambient air temperature around the device Operation –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131ºF (–40° to 55°C) –40° to 131°F (–40° to 55°C) Storage –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185ºF (–40° to 85°C) –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C) 3 3 Vibration resistance—operational 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz 3 g-n at 10–55 Hz Shock resistance 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n 10 g-n Degree of protection IP40 IP40 IP40 IP40 Cover options Full featured Full featured Full featured Full featured Features Locking pushbutton/ Bipolar LED/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator Locking pushbutton/ Bipolar LED/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator Locking pushbutton/ Bipolar LED/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator Locking pushbutton/ Bipolar LED/ Removable ID tag/ Mechanical flag indicator Product certifications RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA RoHS/UL/CE/CSA 3 Features 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-97 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Wiring Diagrams 3 D7PR1/D7PF1 3 3 12 42 1 4 14 44 5 8 11 41 9 12 A1 A2 13 14 3 3 3 3 3 IEC NEMA D7PR2/D7PF2 3 12 42 1 4 3 14 44 5 8 11 41 9 12 A1 A2 13 14 3 3 3 3 3 IEC NEMA D7PR3/D7PF3 3 12 22 42 1 2 4 3 14 24 44 5 6 8 11 21 41 9 10 12 A2 13 3 3 3 A1 3 14 IEC NEMA 3 3 D7PR4/D7PF4 12 22 32 42 1 2 3 4 14 24 34 44 5 6 7 8 11 21 31 41 9 A2 13 3 3 3 3 A1 11 10 12 14 3 IEC 3 V7-T3-98 NEMA Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D7PR1/D7PF1 3 0.27 (7.0) 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 3 1.10 (27.9) 0.19 (4.8) 1.54 (39.1) 3 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 0.19 (4.8) 1.40 (35.5) 3 0.16 (4.7) 0.38 (9.9) 3 0.23 (5.9) 3 0.30 (7.5) 3 3 0.08 (2.1)2X 3 0.55 (14.1) 3 D7PR2/D7PF2 0.27 (7.0) 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 0.19 (4.8) 3 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.9) 1.54 (39.1) 3 0.83 (21.0) 0.29 (7.4) 3 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 0.19 (4.8) 1.40 (35.5) 0.38 (9.9) 3 0.16 (4.7) 3 0.23 (5.9) 3 0.30 (7.5) 3 0.08 (2.1)2X 3 0.55 (14.1) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-99 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PR3/D7PF3 3 3 1.20 (30.8) 0.26 (6.6) 0.27 (7.0) 0.02 (0.5) 3 1.20 (30.8) 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 1.60 (40.0) 1.10 (27.9) 0.19 (4.8) 0.19 (4.8) 1.40 (35.5) 3 0.39 (9.9) 3 0.19 (4.7) 0.23 (5.9) 0.26 (6.7) 0.39 (9.9) 3 3 3 0.39 (9.9)2X 3 0.79 (20.0) 3 3 D7PR4/D7PF4 1.60 (40.6) 0.26 (6.6) 0.27 (7.0) 3 0.29 (7.4) 0.02 (0.5) 3 1.60 (40.6) 0.02 (0.5) 1.10 (27.9) 3 3 1.54 (39.1) 3 1.10 (27.9) 1.40 (35.5) 0.19 (4.8) 0.38 0.38 (9.9) 0.38 (9.9) (9.9) 3 3 0.19 (4.8) 0.16 (4.7) 0.23 (5.9) 3 0.26 (6.7) 3 3 0.38 (9.9)2X 3 1.18 (29.9) 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PA3 3 D7PA4 1 1 10 3 13 4 7 5 5 8 6 10 9 7 11 9 3 2 2 6 3 11 Wiring Diagram (Top View) 3 3 3 12 8 4 2.74 (69.8) 2.58 (67.5) Max. 14 3 Wiring Diagram (Top View) 3 2.74 (69.8) 2.58 (67.5) Max. 3 1.09 (27.8) Max. 0.65 (16.6) 1.09 (27.8) Max. 0.65 (16.6) 1.44 (36.6) 1.27 (32.5) 1 5 2 10 8 11 9 3 Combination Slotted/Phillips Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16" 7 3 6 3 3 Combination Slotted/Phillips Head Screws 6-32 x 5/16" 4 3 3 1.59 (40.5) Max. 1.83 (46.5) 1.63 (41.4) 5 1 6 2 13 9 3 10 1.98 (50.5) Max. 7 3 8 4 11 14 3 3 12 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-101 3.4 General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PA9 Standard Mount 3 0.71 (18.0) 3 8 3 44 14 8 5 1 3 5 3 Control Relays and Timers 42 12 4 1 4 3 2.52 (64.0) 3 3 2.73 (69.0) 3 0.16 (4.0) 1.26 (32.0) 14 3 3 1.02 (26.0) 3 5 12 9 13 A2 A1 41 11 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT INPUT 4 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 14 13 12 9 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT INPUT 13 9 12 3 1 8 14 3 3 4 IEC NEMA 1.03 (26.0) 1.17 (29.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D7PAA 3 1.18 (30.0) 3 0.74 (19.0) 3 44 14 8 5 42 12 4 1 44 14 8 5 42 12 4 1 4 3.14 (80.0) 0.16 (4.0) 3.33 (84.0) 1 8 5 12 9 14 2.67 (68.0) 13 4 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 1 8 5 12 9 14 13 INPUT A2 IEC: NEMA: INPUT A1 14 13 41 11 12 0.24 (6.0) N.O. COM INPUT MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT 1.57 (40.0) N.C. A2 A1 INPUT 14 41 11 12 13 INPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 9 3 IEC NEMA 3 9 3 1.06 (26.0) 3 1.18 (30.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-103 3.4 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D7PAB 1.18 (30.0) 0.74 (19.0) 1.10 (28.0) 3 44 24 14 3 8 6 5 42 22 12 4 2 1 3 3 3.14 (80.0) 0.16 (4.0) 3 44 24 14 8 6 5 42 22 12 4 2 1 4 2 1 8 6 5 12 10 9 14 3 2.67 (68.0) 3.33 (84.0) 3 13 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 4 2 1 8 6 5 12 10 9 14 13 MODULE INPUT MODULE INPUT IEC: NEMA: 3 1.57 (40.0) 3 3 3 3 A2 INPUT INPUT A2 A1 14 13 41 21 11 12 10 9 A1 14 INPUT 0.24 (6.0) 41 21 IEC 13 INPUT 11 12 10 NEMA 1.45 (37.0) 1.57 (40.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9 N.C. N.O. COM INPUT 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D7PAD 1.18 (30.0) 0.74 (19.0) 1.41 (36.0) 44 34 24 14 8 7 6 5 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 44 34 24 14 42 32 22 12 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 3 3 3 N.C. N.O. 3 COM INPUT 0.16 (4.0) 3 MODULE INPUT 3 A1 3 11 3 A2 INPUT 3.33 (84.0) 2.67 (68.0) 21 31 41 IEC 3 3.14 (80.0) 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 IEC: NEMA: 1.57 (40.0) INPUT A2 INPUT A1 14 13 41 31 21 11 12 11 10 9 1.81 (46.0) 4 2 3 8 7 6 5 12 11 10 9 3 N.C. 3 N.O. COM 3 INPUT 3 MODULE INPUT 0.24 (6.0) 1.96 (50.0) 1 14 13 3 9 3 INPUT 12 11 10 3 NEMA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-105 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D8 Series Relay Description 3 D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D8 Series 3 Product Description Features The D8 Series power relays are perfect for loads up to 30A, with versions for flange mounting and e-clip mounting available. ● 3 3 3 ● ● 3 ● 3 ● 3 3 ● 3 Allows switching of 25A and 30A loads A high-capacity, highwithstand voltage relay compatible with momentary voltage drops No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to 50% of rated voltage UL Class B construction standard Wide-range AC-activated coil that handles 100 to 120 Vac at either 50 or 60 Hz Panel, DIN rail and flange mounting Standards and Certifications File # E1491 File # LR701520 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-106 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-107 V7-T3-107 V7-T3-108 V7-T3-109 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-116 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Catalog Number Selection 3 D8 Series 1 3 D8PR 6 TE A Family Type D8PR 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac B = 240 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc Contact Configuration 6 = SPST-NO 7 = DPST-NO 3 3 3 Options TE = E-bracket TF = Flange mount 3 3 Product Selection 3 D8 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 Relay Type Mounting Bracket Adapter Track/ Panel Mount Front Connecting Sockets Track/ Panel Mount D8PR6TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2 D8PR7TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2 D8 Series Relay 3 3 3 3 D8 Series 2 Type Standard Pack 3 Catalog Number 3 SPST E-Bracket Coil voltage 24 Vac 1 D8PR6TET 24 Vdc 1 D8PR6TET1 120 Vac 1 D8PR6TFA 24 Vdc 1 D8PR6TFT1 3 3 SPST Flange Mount 3 3 DPST E-Bracket Coil voltage 1 D8PR7TEA 3 120 Vac 1 D8PR7TFA 3 24 Vdc 1 D8PR7TFT1 3 3 120 Vac DPST Flange Mount Sockets DIN rail adapter 10 D8PA1 Screw terminal adapter 10 D8PA2 Bracket adapter 10 D8PA5 3 100 PFP-M 3 Accessory DIN rail end stop 3 Notes 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 2 Additional coil voltages available—consult Sales Office or Customer Support Center. 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-107 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 Coil Resistance Coil Voltage Ohms mA 3 24 Vac 303 71 110/120 Vac 5260 20.4 3 3 220/240 Vac 21,000 10.2 12 Vdc 75 158 24 Vdc 303 79 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D8 Relays Description D8PR6 D8PR7 Rated load 220 Vac 30A 220 Vac 25A Carry current 30A 25A Max. operating voltage 250 Vac 250 Vac Max. switching current 30A 25A Contact material AgCdO AgCdO Max. switching capacity 6600 VA 5500 VA Min. permissible load 100 mA at 5 Vdc 100 mA at 5 Vdc Mechanical life (min.) 5,000,000 operations 5,000,000 operations Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 operations 100,000 operations Maximum hp ratings 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 3 3 3 3 Coil Data Coil Voltage Must Operate Must Release 24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc 75% maximum 15% minimum Maximum Voltage 110% 120 Vac 75V 18V 132V 240 Vac 150V 36V 264V 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-108 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D8PR6TF 3 3 2.70 (68.5) Max. 2.36 (60.0) 1.99 (50.5) Max. 0.25 (6.4) 0.43 (11.0) 1.32 (33.5) Max. 0.03 (0.8) Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes or M4 Tapped Holes 0 1.85 (47.0) Max. 0.12 (3.0) 3 0.08 (2.0) 3 1 4 3 6 Terminal Arrangement/ Internal Connections (Top View) 0.18 (4.5) 2.362 0.007 (60.0 0.2) 3 Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 3 3 D8PR7TF 3 2.70 (68.5) Max. 2.36 (60.0) 1.99 (50.5) Max. 0.25 (6.4) 0.43 (11.0) 1.32 (33.5) Max. 0.03 (0.8) 0 0.18 (4.5) 3 0.08 (2.0) 1.85 (47.0) Max. 0.12 (3.0) 3 Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes or M4 Tapped Holes 2 1 4 6 3 8 Terminal Arrangement/ Internal Connections (Top View) 3 2.362 0.007 (60.0 0.2) Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-109 3.4 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D8PR6TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached 3 2.07 (52.5) Max. 3 Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes or M4 Tapped Holes 1.99 (50.5) Max. 3 3 Control Relays and Timers 0.25 (6.4) 0.43 (11.0) 1.32 (33.5) Max. 0.03 (0.8) 0.08 (2.0) 4 2.07 (52.5) Max. 3 1.99 (50.5) Max. 0.25 (6.4) 0.43 (11.0) Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes or M4 Tapped Holes 1.32 (33.5) Max 0.03 (0.8) 0.08 (2.0) 0 2.09 (53.0) Max. 3 2 1 4 6 8 Terminal Arrangement/ Internal Connections (Top View) 3 3 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) Mounting Holes (Bottom View) D8PR7TE with D8PA5 Bracket Attached 3 3 6 Terminal Arrangement/ Internal Connections (Top View) 3 3 1 2.09 (53.0) Max. 3 3 0 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) Mounting Holes (Bottom View) D8PA1 3 Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes 3 2.03 (51.5) Max. 3 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 3 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 3 0.20 (5.0) 2.19 (55.5) Max. 3 0.57 (14.5) Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 1.39 (35.2) Max. 3 3 3 Note: Minimum spacing around relay = 0.20 inches (5 mm). 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-110 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D8PA2 3 Two M3.5 Screws for Coil 0.31 (8.0) 3 Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes 3 2.03 (51.5) Max. Four M4 Screws for Contact 0.36 (9.2) 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 0.98 (25.0) 1.81 (46.0) Max. 2.19 (55.5) Max. 3 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 0.20 (5.0) 3 3 Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 3 3 3 3 D8PA5 PFP-M DIN Rail End Stop Two 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes 1.57 (40.0) M4 Spring Washer 0.94 0.70 (24.0) (17.8) Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Holes 0.39 (10.0) 1.81 (46.0) 1.574 0.003 (40.0 0.1) 0.45 (11.5) 0.39 (10.0) 3 0.07 1.39 (1.8) (35.3) 0.19 (4.8) 1.97 (50.0) 3 0.39 (10.0) 0.05 (1.3) 3 1.47 (37.3) 3 3 3 Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 0.20 (5.0) 0.12 (3.0) 0.17 (4.4) 0.27 0.94 (7.0) (24.0) 0.24 (6.2) 0.07 (1.8) M4 x 8 Pan Head Screw 1.02 (26.0) 3 1.18 (30.0) 0.20 (5.0) 0.78 (19.7) 3 3 1.20 (50.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-111 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents D9 Series Relay Description 3 Page D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D9 Series 3 Product Description Features The four-pole D9 Series is ideal for three-phase motor applications. Various contact configurations are available. ● 3 3 3 ● ● 3 ● 3 3 Ideal for three-phase motor control applications No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to 50% of rated voltage Push-to-Test button is a standard feature to check contact operation Mounting bracket is supplied with relay Catalog Number Selection D9PR 8B A Family Type D9PR Contact Configuration 8B = 4PST-NO 9B = 3PST-NO/SPST-NC 10B = DPST-NO/DPST-NC Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac B = 240 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc Standards and Certifications File # E1491 3 File # LR701520 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-112 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-113 V7-T3-113 V7-T3-114 V7-T3-116 3.4 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Product Selection 3 D9 Series Catalog Number 4PST-NO Power Relay DPST-NO/DPST-NC Power Relay Coil voltage Coil voltage 24 Vac D9PR8BT 3 Catalog Number 3 24 Vac D9PR10BT 3 120 Vac D9PR8BA 120 Vac D9PR10BA 240 Vac D9PR8BB 24 Vac D9PR10BT1 24 Vdc D9PR8BT1 3 D9PR9BA 3 3PST-NO/SPST-NC Power Relay 120 Vac 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 Coil Resistance Coil Voltage Ohms mA Coil Voltage Ohms mA 24 Vac — 75 12 Vdc 72 167 120 Vac — 21.6 24 Vdc 288 83 240 Vac — 10.8 110 Vdc 6050 18 3 3 3 3 D9PR Specifications NO Contacts Resistive Load (p.f. = 1) NC Contacts Resistive Load (p.f. = 1) 3 Rated load 220 Vac 25A 30 Vdc 25A 220 Vac 8A 30 Vdc 8A 3 Carry current 25A 8A Max. operating voltage 250 Vac/125 Vdc 250 Vac/125 Vdc 3 Max. switching current 25A 8A Max. switching capacity 5500 VA 750W 1760 VA 240W Min. permissible load 100 mA at 24 Vdc 100 mA at 24 Vdc Mechanical life (min.) 1,000,000 operations 1,000,000 operations Electrical life at all contact ratings (min.) 100,000 operations 100,000 operations Maximum hp ratings 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles 1-1/2 hp (120 Vac) 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) Three-phase 3 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles Three-phase 5 hp (240/265/277 Vac) 30,000 cycles Description 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-113 3.4 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Coil Data Coil Voltage Must Operate Must Release Maximum Voltage 24 Vdc/Vac, 12 Vdc, 110 Vdc 75% maximum 10% minimum 110% 120 Vac 75V 18V 132V 240 Vac 150V 36V 264V 3 3 Terminal Arrangements 3 14 13 14 13 14 13 3 24 23 24 23 24 23 3 34 33 34 33 34 33 3 44 43 42 41 42 41 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 3 D9PR8 3 3 3 D9PR9 D9PR10 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D9PR 3 3 3 Screw Terminal Brackets Ten M3.5 1.36 (34.5) Max. 0.30 (7.6) 3 3 3 2.17 (55.2) Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. 0.17 (4.3) 1.70 (43.2) 3 2.52 (64.0) Max. 1.378 0.004 (35.0 0.1) 3 2.03 (51.5) Max. 3 0.08 (2.0) Mounting Holes (Bottom View) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-114 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 Mounting Bracket 1.37 (35.0) 3 Two M4 or 0.18 (4.5) Dia. Mounting Holes 3 Two M4 3 0.95 (24.0) 3 1.378 0.004 (35.0 1.0) 1.18 (30.0) 3 0.35 (9.0) 1.10 (28.0) 1.14 (29.0) 3 0.28 (7.0) 3 3 1.73 (44.0) 0.17 (4.4) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-115 3.4 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Contents Accessories Description 3 D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D8 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D9 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories MOD Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coil Bus Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . Flange Mount Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 Accessories Selection Guide The MOD Module System Eaton offers a variety of simple-to-install relay accessories that allow you to customize the features of a relay system to meet your exact needs. Eaton’s plug-in modules are a simple way to add functionality to your relay without the hassle of messy wiring and additional mounting of external electronics. They are available in a variety of configurations to meet the needs of almost any application. 3 3 3 3 3 3 System Diagrams Circuit Diagrams Diode Circuit The MOD Module System LED Circuit 3 3 3 3 3 A1 A2 A1 The diode module protects external drive circuitry from inductive voltages generated when removing coil voltages. The LED status lamp verifies that power is being supplied to the coil. Ideal for both AC and DC applications. Polarity sensitive for DC applications. RC Circuit Metal Oxide Varistor (MOV) Circuit 3 3 + + A2 3 3 3 A2 A1 Snubs back EMF of relay coil. 3 3 V7-T3-116 A2 A1 The MOV circuit protects by shunting potentially damaging electrical spikes away from the relay coil. Ideal for AC and DC applications. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T3-53 V7-T3-58 V7-T3-68 V7-T3-78 V7-T3-82 V7-T3-91 V7-T3-106 V7-T3-112 V7-T3-117 V7-T3-118 V7-T3-120 V7-T3-120 V7-T3-121 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3.4 MOD Modules Eaton’s relay accessories provide a complete solution for add-on modules and identification tags. 3 MOD Modules MOD-AD250 Module Size Description Nominal Voltage Catalog Number Mating Sockets A Protection diode 6–250 Vdc MOD-AD250 D3PA6, D3PAL8, D3PA7, D3PAL11, D5PAL, D7PAB, D7PAD 3 3 3 3 MOD-RC_ R/C suppressor 6–24 Vac MOD-RC24 110–240 Vac MOD-RC240 3 3 3 MOD-ALG_ LED indicator 24 Vac MOD-ALG24 120/240 Vac MOD-ALG240 3 3 3 MOD-AMV_ MOV suppressor 24 Vac MOD-AMV24 120 Vac MOD-AMV120 240 Vac MOD-AMV240 3 3 3 3 MOD-BD250 B Protection diode 6–250 Vdc MOD-BD250 D1PAA, D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7, D7PAA 3 3 MOD-BLG_ LED indicator 24 Vac MOD-BLG24 120/240 Vac MOD-BLG240 3 3 3 MOD-BMV_ MOV suppressor 24 Vac MOD-BMV24 120 Vac MOD-BMV120 240 Vac MOD-BMV240 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-117 3.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Relay Clips Eaton offers a variety of relay clips designed to improve the performance and functionality within an electrical panel. Metal Hold-Down Clips Metal hold-down clips, or spring clips, are ideal for use where high heat or humid conditions are a factor. These clips hold their shape and tension and are designed to withstand harsh environments. All clips are made of corrosionresistant stainless steel. Metal Hold-Down Clips Catalog Number Mating Sockets Mating Relays PMC-1781 PMC-1781 D1PAA D1PR, D1PF PQC-1782 PQC-1782 D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7 D2PR2, D2PF2, D2PR3, D2PF4 PQC-1342 PQC-1342 D2PA6, D7PAA, D7PA9 D2PR4, D2PF4 PQC-1332 PQC-1332 D3PA6, D3PA7 D3PR2, D3PF2, D3PR3, D3PF3 PQC-1351 PQC-1351 D3PAL8, D3PA2, D3PAL11, D3PA3, D5PAL, D5PA2, D5PA3L, D5PA3S D3PR2, D3PF2, D3PR3, D3PF4, D5PR, D5PF PQC-1783 PQC-1783 D7PAB D7PR1, D7PF1, D7PR2, D7PF3 PQC-1784 PQC-1784 D7PAD D7PR4, D7PF4 PYC- _ PYC-A1 D2PA4 D2PR5 PYC-B2 D7PA3, D7PA4 D7PR1, D7PR2, D7PR4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-118 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Plastic Ejector/ Hold-Down Clips These clips are great for applications where sockets are located in dense or tight areas. They allow for quick, safe and firm securing of relays in the sockets with the added benefit that the relay can be ejected with one finger. Plastic clips also aid in keeping operators’ fingers away from live circuits. The optional snap-in identification tag allows for custom marking of sockets when used in multi-socket applications. Plastic ID Clips Plastic ID clips allow for easy circuit identification in multirelay applications. They are designed for labeling and are not ideal for securing the relay in the socket. 3.4 3 PWC-D24 Plastic Ejector/Hold-Down Clips 3 Catalog Number Mating Sockets Mating Relays PWC-D24 D2PAL, D2PAP, D2PA7 D2PF2, D2PF4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Plastic ID Clips PQC-1349 Catalog Number Mating Sockets Mating Relays PQC-1349 D7PAA D7PF1, D7PF2 3 3 3 3 3 PMC-1783 PMC-1783 D7PAB D7PF1, D7PF2 3 3 3 PMC-1784 PMC-1784 D7PAD 3 D7PF4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-119 3.4 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Coil Bus Jumpers Eaton’s coil bus jumpers allow inputs to be bridged to adjacent sockets without additional wiring, making multi-relay connections quick and easy. The easy-to-install design requires no tools and can be complete in a matter of seconds. System Diagrams Coil Bus Jumpers 1 Coil Bus Jumpers Catalog Number Mating Sockets D2PJ1 D2PJ1 D2PAL, D2PAP D3PJ1 D3PJ1 D3PA6, D3PA7, D5PAL 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags These convenient plastic labels snap easily onto the relay socket for clear identification in multi-relay panels. The hinged design makes wiring simple and allows for angular adjustment of the tag to improve readability in the panel. Marking with a standard permanent marker creates a smudge-free surface. Write-On Plastic Labels/ID Tags Catalog Number Mating Sockets PWF-D2P PWF-D2P D2PAL, D2PAP PWF-D3D5 PWF-D3D5 D3PAL8, D3PAL11, D5PAL 3 3 3 Note 1 Jumpers in photo are colored green to improve visibility, actual jumpers are black. 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-120 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Plug-In Relays Flange Mount Adapters Eaton’s relay flange mount adapters create a modular approach to flexible mounting options. Each lowcost adapter allows for panel mounting of a standard control relay and can eliminate the need for a socket. PFC-D11 Unit with Flange Mount Adapter PFC-D2D72 3.4 Flange Mount Adapters 3 Catalog Number Mating Relay 3 PFC-D11 D1PF1, D1PR1 3 3 3 PFC-D2D72 3 D2P, D7PF2, D7PR2 3 3 3 PFC-D73 PFC-D73 D7PF3, D7PR3 3 3 3 PFC-D74 PFC-D74 D7PF4, D7PR4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-121 3.5 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Contents 9575H Series 3000 Relay Description 3 9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 9575H Series 3000—Type AA, AC and DC 3 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications Type AA panel-mounted relays are rated (each pole) 40A up to 300 Vac, 50/60 Hz; 5A at 480/600 Vac, 50/60 Hz and 40A at 28 Vdc. 9575H Series 3000 relays are ideal for applications when controlling smaller loads, such as single-phase motors. ● 3 3 ● ● UL listed, E1491 CSA 41729 CE: EN60947-4-1, EN60947-5-1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T3-123 V7-T3-123 V7-T3-124 V7-T3-125 3.5 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify Catalog number and magnet coil code letter. Example: for DPDT relay with auxiliary switch and a 120V 50/60 Hz coil, order Catalog Number 9575H3A010. 3 Coil Voltage Selection Coil Voltage Hz Suffix Code 3 120 50/60 A 3 240 50/60 B 480/440 60/50 C 600/550 60/50 D 208 50/60 E 277 50/60 H 6 50/60 J 12 50/60 K 24 50/60 L 48 50/60 M 3 110 — P 3 220 — Q 6 — R 12 — S 24 — T 48 — W Volts AC 9575H Series 3000 Relay Type AA Relays 1 Relay Style Catalog Number 2 Relay (DPDT) 9575H3_000 Relay with auxiliary switch 9575H3_010 Relay with blowout magnets 9575H3_100 Relay with auxiliary switch and blowout magnets 9575H3_110 3 3 3 3 Volts DC 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 Enclosure 3 Description Catalog Number 3 NEMA 1 Enclosure 9575H2449 3 Notes 1 There are no “repair parts” available for these relays. 2 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Selection table above. 3 Only 9575H3 relays without an auxiliary switch should be mounted in the 9575H2449 enclosure. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-123 3.5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Technical Data and Specifications Relay Specifications Dielectric Withstanding Voltage Between open contacts: 1500 Vrms ● All other mutually insulated conductive elements: 2200 Vrms ● Coil ● Pull-in voltage: 80% DC coils, 85% AC coils of nominal voltage or less at 25ºC ● Dropout voltage: 10% of nominal voltage or more at 25ºC ● Coil resistance: ±10% measured at 25ºC ● Max. DC coil dissipation capability: 4 watts DC continuous at 25ºC 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Contacts Contact combination: DPDT ● Contact rating each pole (main contacts): Each pole rated 40 amps up to 300 Vac, 50/60 Hz, 5 amps at 480/600 Vac 50/60 Hz, 0.75 PF load. 1-1/2 hp motor load (each pole) at 120–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz. 2 hp motor load at 200–600 Vac, 50/60 Hz only when using both poles to switch both sides of load, 40 amps at 28 Vdc resistive load each pole. NEMA A 600 pilot duty 50/60 Hz ● Additional contact ratings for relays with blowout magnets: 10A at 110 Vdc resistive, 4A at 225 Vdc resistive, 2A at 325 Vdc resistive. For inductive loads, contacts must be derated accordingly. ● Contact material: Silver cadmium oxide, gold flashed. 5/16 in (7.9 mm) diameter standard ● Miscellaneous ● Coil terminals: 6–32 screws ● Contact terminals: 8-–32 screws ● Main base material: Molded phenolic, UL recognized (QMFZ2) ● Weight (DPDT Relay): 11 oz (311 grams) approximately ● Weight (DPDT Relay with auxiliary switch) 14.5 oz (411 grams) approximately Auxiliary Switch Specifications Contact combination: SPDT ● Contact rating: Auxiliary switch rated 10 amps at 125 or 250 Vac, resistive load; 1/4 hp at 125 or 250 Vac, motor load; 0.4 amps at 125 Vdc or 0.20 amps at 250 Vdc, resistive load; 3 amps at 125 Vac lamp load. All AC ratings are 50/60 Hz ● Dielectric withstanding voltage: 500 Vac rms between open contacts, 1500 Vac rms between all other mutually insulated conductive elements ● Terminals: 4–40 round head screws for auxiliary contacts standard ● Average Operating Times (Milliseconds) 3 Operation DPDT Relay DPDT Relay with Auxiliary Switch Pickup 40 50 3 Dropout 35 35 3 Temperature Ranges 3 3 Temperature AC DC Operating range –30° to 55°C –30° to 55°C Non-operating range –30° to 100°C –30° to 100°C 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-124 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.5 Control Relays and Timers General Purpose Open Style Relays Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9575H3 DPDT Relay 3 9575H2449 3.31 (84.2) Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places) 3 1.88 (47.6) 8-32 Machine Screw on Contact Terminals (6 Places) 0.218 (5.5) Dia. 0.56 (4.3) 3 0.230 (5.8) Square Hole 3 2.25 (58.7) Max. 3 3.55 (90.1) 1.87 (47.5) 0.38 (9.5) 2.50 (63.5) 1.62 (41.1) 3 0.159 (4) Dia. 10-32 Tap Typ. 4 Places 3 4.50 (114.3) 3.12 (79.2) Max. 6-32 Machine Screw on Coil Terminals (2 Places) 3 5.63 (142.9) 0.136 (3.4) Dia. 8-32 Tap Typ. 2 Places 0.50 (2.7) 3 3 9575H3 DPDT Relay with Auxiliary SPDT Switch Mounting Holes 0.187 (4.75) Dia. (2 Places) 2.00 (50.8) 0.218 (5.5) Dia. Typ. 2 Places 3.00 (76.2) 3 0.36 (9.1) Typ. 2 Places 3 3 8-32 Machine Screw on Contact Terminals (6 Places) 3 2.25 (58.7) Max. 3 0.20 (5.1) 3 1.87 (47.5) 2.50 (63.5) 0.38 (9.5) 3 1.62 (41.1) 3.12 (79.2) Max. 3 6-32 Machine Screw on Coil Terminals (2 Places) 3 3 NC 10A 1/4 hp 125 OR 250 Vac 0.4A at 125 Vdc, 0.2A at 250 Vdc 3A 125 Vac “LAMP” 278 VA 125/250 Vac P.D. NO COM 3 3 Mounting Holes (2) AUX. SWITCH MARKING SURFACE 3 Insulators (2 Sides) 3 3 4.44 (112.7) Max. Screw Terminals (4-40) RHMS with External Tooth Lockwashers (3 Places) 3 3 RELAY TOP VIEW 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-125 3.6 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Contents Solid-State Relays Description 3 Page Solid-State Relays D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Overview Catalog Number Selection Solid-State Relays—D93, D96 and D99 Series 3 D93 3 25 A M D 2 3 3 Description D93 = Hockey puck D96 = Compact D99 = DIN rail 3 3 Input Voltage 1 = 90–280 Vac 2 = 3–32 Vdc 3 = 3.5–32 Vdc 4 = 4–15 Vdc 5 = 20–50 Vdc Output Voltage 1 = 2–60 Vdc 2 = 24–280 Vac 1 3 = 3–200 Vdc 4 = 48–480 Vac 6 = 48–600 Vac 3 3 Turn On Type Z = Zero cross R = Random D = DC switch 3 Current Output current in amps 3 3 Output Type C = SCR T = Triac M = MOSFET Contact Configuration A = SPST-NO B = SPST-NC C = DPST-NO D = DPST-NC 3 3 3 3 Note 1 For D96208ACZ3, output voltage is 3–150 Vdc. 3 3 3 V7-T3-126 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-127 V7-T3-134 V7-T3-139 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Contents D93 Series—Solid-State Relays Description Page 3 3 D93 Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-128 V7-T3-128 V7-T3-129 V7-T3-133 V7-T3-134 V7-T3-139 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D93 Series Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Eaton’s D93 series of solidstate relays is a line of heavyduty industrial relays in the common “hockey puck” package. The removable, finger-safe cover and optional accessories make the D93 safe and easy to install in a variety of applications. A solid-state relay (SSR) can perform many applications that an electromechanical relay can perform. The SSR differs in that it has no moving mechanical parts within it and has some distinct advantages over an electromechanical relay. ● Models are available in a variety of input voltages and switch types up to 75A. When used correctly in the intended application, the SSR provides a high degree of reliability, a long service life, significantly reduced electromagnetic interference, fast response and high vibration resistance. ● ● ● All solid-state circuitry with no moving parts to wear Compact, panel mounting for flexible installation Isolated input and output terminals to protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry to protect the SSR from transients Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● UL/cUL recognized— UL 508 CSA certified CE marked RoHS compliant 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Applications for the SSR typically include equipment that requires high cycling rates, low acoustical or electrical noise, or high vibration resistance. Some examples are medical equipment, heating/cooling equipment, lighting control and pumps/compressors, among others. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-127 3.6 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Product Selection D93210ACZ1 D93 Series 3 Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (Amps) 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ1 3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ2 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 10 D93210ATZ2 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ2 D93225ATZ2 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 25 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ2 D93240ATZ2 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 40 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ1 3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ2 3 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ2 3 3 3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 12 D93312AMD2 3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 25 D93325AMD2 3–32 Vdc 3–200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 40 D93340AMD2 3 3 3 Accessories D93HS1 3 3 3 D93 Series—Heat Sink Eaton’s D93HS1 heat sink is specifically designed to be used with D93 solid-state relays. It is pre-drilled and tapped, and matches the heat dissipation requirements for relays up to 50A. Heat Sink Accessory 3 3 Description Catalog Number Heat sink D93HS1 D93TP1 D93 Series—Thermal Transfer Pad The D93TP1 is a selfadhesive transfer pad designed for use with Eaton’s D93 solid-state relays. When used properly, it will adequately conduct the heat to a heat sink without the use of grease. Note: Always ensure that all details of the application are considered when determining heat dissipation requirements, including ambient temperature. The D93 relays must be firmly mounted to the heat sink using a suitable thermally conductive grease or thermal transfer pad. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-128 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.6 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 3 D93 Series Description Units D93210ACZ1 D93210ACZ2 D93210ATZ2 D93225ACZ1 D93225ACZ2 D93225ATZ2 3 Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO 3 Switching device SCR SCR Triac SCR SCR Triac 10 10 10 25 25 25 Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross 200 250 700 500 500 250 Output Characteristics Current rating A Switching type Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 16 16 16 16 16 Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 8 8 8 8 8 Min. load current to maintain on mA 50 120 250 120 120 120 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 83 250 1000 250 250 250 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 80 50 40 40 80 3 3 3 3 3 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 8 10 10 8 10 10 Peak blocking voltage Vpk 600 300 — 600 600 — Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.35 1.6 1.6 1.6 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 72 300 1700 312 250 300 3 3 Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 3 3 Input Characteristics Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC Typical input impedance ohms 13k Current regulator 16–25k 13k Current regulator 1.5k Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 20 2 12 20 16 2 NA Yes NA NA Yes Yes Reverse polarity protection 3 3 Performance Characteristics 3 Operating time (response time) ON ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 OFF ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 3 3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE 3 Environment Product certifications Ambient air temperature 3 Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 Operating °C –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 3 Degree of protection 3 Miscellaneous Characteristics Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 3.5 3.5 1.45 1.02 1.02 1.45 Weight g (oz) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) 100 (3.5) Green Green Green Green Green Green LED—input Input terminals M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 Output terminals M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Terminal torque (max.) Nm 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-129 3.6 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays D93 Series, continued Description Units D93240ACZ1 D93240ACZ2 D93240ATZ2 D93250ACZ1 D93250ACZ2 3 Output Characteristics Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO 3 Switching device SCR SCR Triac SCR SCR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Current rating A Switching type 40 40 40 50 50 Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 500 250 500 500 Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 30 30 20 39 39 Motor load rating (rms) A 14 14 14 14 14 Min. load current to maintain on mA 250 250 50 250 250 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 625 625 250 520 520 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 80 80 80 100 100 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 8 Peak blocking voltage Vpk 600 600 600 600 600 Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.1 1.8 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 1250 1250 438 1250 1250 1 DC Max. I2t for fusing (A2) Input Characteristics Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC 10 AC Typical input impedance ohms 13k ACL 1.5k 13k Current regulator 3 Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 20 16 2 20 16 N/A Yes Yes NA Yes 3 Performance Characteristics 3 Reverse polarity protection 3 3 3 Operating time (response time) ON ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 OFF 8.3 ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE Environment 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product certifications Ambient air temperature Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 Operating °C –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 Degree of protection Miscellaneous Characteristics Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 0.9 0.9 0.95 0.63 0.63 Weight g (oz) 100 100 100 135 (4.8) 135 (4.8) LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Input terminals M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 Output terminals Terminal torque (max.) Nm M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-130 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.6 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays D93 Series, continued Description Units D93275ACZ1 D93275ACZ2 D93312AMD2 D93325AMD2 D93340AMD2 SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO 3 Output Characteristics Contact configuration Switching device Current rating 3 A Switching type SCR SCR MOSFET MOSFET MOSFET 75 75 12 25 40 Zero cross Zero cross DC switching DC switching DC switching Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 500 NA NA NA Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 39 39 NA NA NA Motor load rating (rms) A 25 25 NA NA NA Min. load current to maintain on mA 250 250 20 20 20 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 1150 1150 27 50 90 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 150 150 NA NA NA Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 8 8 8 Peak blocking voltage Vpk 600 600 — — — Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.6 1.6 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 1.8 1.8 2.83 2.83 2.83 5000 5000 NA NA NA 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Input Characteristics Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC Typical input impedance ohms 13k Current regulator 1k 1k 1k Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA Reverse polarity protection 20 16 10 10 10 NA Yes No No No 3 3 3 Performance Characteristics Operating time (response time) 3 ON ms 8.3 8.3 300 μs 600 μs 600 μs OFF ms 8.3 8.3 1 2.6 2.6 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 2500 2500 2500 3 UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE UR, CSA, CE 3 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 3 3 Environment Product certifications Ambient air temperature Storage °C Operating °C Degree of protection –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 –40 to 80 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 3 Miscellaneous Characteristics Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 0.6 0.63 1.06 1.06 0.63 Weight g (oz) 200 135 (4.8) 110 (3.9) 110 (3.9) 135 (4.8) LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Input terminals M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 M3.5 Output terminals Terminal torque (max.) Nm M6 M6 M4 M4 M6 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-131 3.6 Temperature Derating Curves 10 Amp Styles 3 3 3 90 6" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 14 Load Current (amps rms) 3 40 and 50 Amp Styles 16 3 3 Solid-State Relays 12 Heat sink with 1°C/W thermal resistance 10 8 6 4 Free air mounting 0.14°C/W (50A) 50 5" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 40 30 20 0 0 20° 3 70 10 2 3 Mounted on heat sink with 1°C/W thermal resistance 80 Load Current (amps rms) 3 Control Relays and Timers 40° 60° 80° 20° 100° 40° 60° 80° 100° Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 25 Amp Styles 40 3 3 3 3 35 Load Current (amps rms) 3 75 Mounted on heat sink with 1°C/W thermal resistance (sink to ambient) 90 30 25 20 15 5" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 10 1.5°C/W 60 5" x 6" x 1/8" aluminum plate 45 95 100 0.14°C/W 40 105 30 20 110 Max. Allowable Temperature 3 3 75 Amp Styles Load Current (amps rms) 3 10 5 0 20° 40° 60° 80° Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 100° 0° 50° 60° 70° 80° Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 10° 20° 30° 40° 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-132 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D93 Series 3 2.28 (57.9) 3 Screw Terminals 0.66 (16.8) 3 0.18 (4.4) 0.6 (15.1) 3 1.74 (44.1) 3 3 1.87 (47.5) 1.4 (35.9) 3 3 3 2.28 (57.9) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-133 3.6 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Contents D96 Series—Solid-State Relays Description 3 3 Page D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series V7-T3-127 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-135 V7-T3-136 V7-T3-138 V7-T3-139 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D96 Series 3 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Eaton’s D96 series of solid-state relays is a technologically advanced set of electronic relays for tough applications and harsh environments. The compact 17.5 mm wide package with an integrated heat sink provides easy mounting in tight spaces. A solid-state relay (SSR) can perform many applications that an electromechanical relay can perform. The SSR differs in that it has no moving mechanical parts within it and has some distinct advantages over an electromechanical relay. ● 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 When used correctly in the intended application, the SSR provides a high degree of reliability, a long service life, significantly reduced electromagnetic interference, fast response and high vibration resistance. ● ● ● ● All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories and installation Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without additional hardware or tools Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● UL/cUL listed—UL 508 CSA certified CE marked RoHS compliant Applications for the SSR typically include equipment that requires high cycling rates, low acoustical or electrical noise, or high vibration resistance. Some examples are medical equipment, heating/cooling equipment, lighting control and pumps/compressors, among others. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-134 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Product Selection D96115ACZ3 3 D96 Series 3 Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (Amps) 3.5–32 Vdc 3–50 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 15 D96115ACZ3 3.5–32 Vdc 3–150 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 8 D96208ACZ3 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR1 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR2 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ2 Catalog Number 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NC Random 10 D96210BCR2 90–280 Vac 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR1 3–32 Vdc 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR2 90–280 Vac 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 48–480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ2 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96610ACR1 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-135 3.6 3 3 Solid-State Relays Technical Data and Specifications D96 Series 3 Description 3 Contact configuration Switching device 3 Control Relays and Timers Units D96210ACZ1 D96210ACZ2 D96210ACR1 D96210ACR2 D96115ACZ3 D96208ACZ3 D96210BCR2 SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NC SCR SCR SCR SCR MOSFET MOSFET SCR 10 10 10 10 15 8 10 Zero cross Zero cross Random turn on Random turn on DC switching DC switching Random turn on Output Characteristics Current rating A 3 Switching type Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk) V 35 35 35 35 NA NA 35 3 Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 500 500 500 NA NA 500 3 3 3 3 3 3 Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 8 8 8 NA NA 8 Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 4.5 4.5 4.5 NA NA 4.5 Min. load current to maintain on mA 50 50 50 50 20 20 50 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 500 500 500 500 50 35 500 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 24 24 24 24 17 24 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Typical on state voltage drop (rms) V 1.25 AC 1.25 AC 1.25 AC 1.25 AC 1.25 DC 1.25 DC 1.25 AC Max. on state voltage drop (rms) V 1.6 AC 1.6 AC 1.6 AC 1.6 AC 1.6 DC 1.6 DC 1.6 AC 1250 1250 1250 1250 NA NA 1250 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC Max. I2t for fusing (A2) Input Characteristics Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 3 Typical input impedance ohms 16–25k Current regulator 16–25k ACL Current regulator Current regulator ACL Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 12 16 12 16 12 12 12 3 Reverse polarity protection NA Yes NA Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Performance Characteristics Operating time (response time) ON ms 40 8.3 8.3 8.3 5 5 8.3 OFF ms 80 8.3 8.3 8.3 5 5 8.3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 2500 2500 4000 4000 2500 2500 4000 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 Environment Product certifications Ambient air temperature Storage °C Operating °C Degree of protection –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 Miscellaneous Characteristics 3 3 Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 0.66 Integral heat sink °C/W 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 Weight g (oz) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) 127 (4.1) Green Green Green Green Green Green Green 3 LED—input Terminal wire capacity AWG (mm2) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 14 (2.1) 3 Terminal torque (max.) in-lb (Nm) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 7.1 (0.8) 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-136 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.6 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Temperature Derating Curves 3 15 Amp Style 35 24 3 30 18 3 15 3 12 3 Current (amps DC) Load Current (amps rms) 8 Amp Style 25 20 15 9 10 8 6 5 3 1.5 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 85° 80° 90° Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 3 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° 3 Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 Load Current (amps rms) 10 Amp Style 14 3 12 3 10 3 8 3 6 3 4 3 1.8 2 3 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° 3 Max. Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-137 3.6 3 Dimensions 3 D96 Series 3 0.69 (17.6) 3 0.20 (5.0) Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.20 (5.0) 0.07 (1.7) 3 3 0.56 (14.2) 3 3.54 (90.0) 1.78 (45.3) 3 1.40 (35.6) 3.64 (92.4) 2.63 (66.8) 3 1.39 (35.2) 3 3 3 0.27 (6.9) 3 0.63 (16.0) 1.36 (34.6) 0.13 (3.4) 0.56 (14.3) 2.56 Max. (65.0) 3 0.24 (6.0) 3 3 0.62 (15.8) 0.55 (14.9) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-138 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays 3.6 Contents D99 Series—Solid-State Relays Description Page D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series V7-T3-127 V7-T3-134 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-140 V7-T3-141 V7-T3-144 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D99 Series Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Eaton’s D99 series of solidstate relays is a line of heavy-duty industrial relays with an integrated heat sink. The attached metal hardware can be used for DIN rail or panel mounting. A solid-state relay (SSR) can perform many applications that an electromechanical relay can perform. The SSR differs in that it has no moving mechanical parts within it and has some distinct advantages over an electromechanical relay. ● Models are available in a variety of input voltages in 10A, 25A and 40A sizes. When used correctly in the intended application, the SSR provides a high degree of reliability, a long service life, significantly reduced electromagnetic interference, fast response and high vibration resistance. ● ● ● ● All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories and installation Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without additional hardware or tools Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● UL/cUL listed—UL 508 CSA certified CE marked RoHS compliant 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Applications for the SSR typically include equipment that requires high cycling rates, low acoustical or electrical noise, or high vibration resistance. Some examples are medical equipment, heating/cooling equipment, lighting control and pumps/compressors, among others. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-139 3.6 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Product Selection D99210ACZ1 D99 Series 3 Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (Amps) Catalog Number 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ1 3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ2 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ1 3 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ2 90–280 Vac 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 24–280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ2 3 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ2 3 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ2 90–280 Vac 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ1 3–32 Vdc 48–600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-140 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.6 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 3 D99 Series Description Units D99210ACZ1 D99210ACZ2 D99225ACZ1 D99225ACZ2 D99240ACZ1 D99240ACZ2 3 Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO 3 Switching device SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR 10 10 25 25 40 40 Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross 35 35 35 35 35 35 Output Characteristics Current rating A Switching type Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk) V Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 500 200 500 500 500 500 Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 8 16 16 20 20 Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 4.5 8 8 14 14 Min. load current to maintain on mA 50 50 120 120 250 250 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 83 83 800 800 800 800 3 3 3 3 3 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 24 40 40 100 100 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 10 10 Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.25 1.25 1.35 1.35 1.6 1.6 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.8 1.8 1.6 1.6 83 83 3700 3700 3700 83 3 3 Max. I2t for fusing (A2) 3 3 Input Characteristics Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC Typical input impedance ohms 16–25k Current regulator 16–25k Current regulator 13k Current regulator Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 12 12 12 12 16 16 NA Yes NA Yes NA Yes Reverse polarity protection 3 3 Performance Characteristics 3 Operating time (response time) ON ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 10 OFF ms 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 8.3 10 3 3 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE 3 Environment Product certifications Ambient air temperature 3 Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 Operating °C –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 3 Degree of protection 3 Miscellaneous Characteristics Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 1.5 1.5 1.5 0.43 1.5 0.43 Integral heat sink °C/W 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 Weight g (oz) 320 (11.3) 320 (11.3) 320 (11.3) 326 (11.5) 320 (11.3) 332 (11.7) LED—input Green Green Green Green Green Green Terminal wire capacity AWG (mm2) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) Terminal torque (max.) in-lb (Nm) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-141 3.6 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays D99 Series, continued Description Units D99610ACZ1 D99610ACZ2 D99625ACZ1 D99625ACZ2 D99640ACZ1 D99640ACZ2 Contact configuration SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO SPST-NO Switching device SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR SCR 10 10 25 10 40 40 Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross Zero cross 35 Output Characteristics Current rating A Switching type Maximum zero turn-on voltage (Vpk) V 35 35 35 35 35 Maximum rate of rise off state voltage (DV/DT) V/us 200 200 700 700 500 500 Incandescent lamp ampere rating (rms) A 8 8 16 16 20 20 Motor load rating (rms) A 4.5 4.5 8 8 14 14 Min. load current to maintain on mA 80 80 250 250 250 250 Non-repetitive surge current (1 cycle) A 83 83 1000 1000 800 800 Max. rms overload current (1 second) A 24 24 50 50 100 100 3 Max. off state leakage current (rms) mA 10 10 10 10 10 10 Typical on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.25 1.25 1.35 1.35 1.6 1.6 3 Max. on state voltage drop (rms) Vac 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 83 83 1700 1700 3700 3700 3 Max. I2t for fusing (A2) Input Characteristics 3 Must release voltage V 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC 10 AC 1 DC Typical input impedance ohms 16–25k Current regulator 16–25k Current regulator 13k Current regulator 3 Nominal input current at 5 Vdc or 240 Vac mA 12 16 12 16 16 16 NA Yes NA Yes NA Yes Reverse polarity protection 3 3 3 3 Performance Characteristics Operating time (response time) ON ms 8.33 8.3 8.33 8.3 10 10 OFF 10 ms 8.33 8.3 8.33 8.3 10 Rated insulation voltage—input to input Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 Dielectric strength—terminal to chassis Vac 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE UL, CSA, CE Environment 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product certifications Ambient air temperature Storage °C –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 –40 to 100 Operating °C –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 –30 to 80 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 Degree of protection Miscellaneous Characteristics Thermal resistance (junction to case) °C/W 1.8 1.8 0.43 0.43 0.43 0.43 Integral heat sink °C/W 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.2 Weight g (oz) 320 (11.3) 321 (11.3) 326 (11.5) 326 (11.5) 332 (11.7) 332 (11.7) Green Green Green Green Green Green Terminal wire capacity AWG (mm2) 8 (10) 9 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) 8 (10) Terminal torque (max.) in-lb (Nm) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) 12.5 (1.4) LED—input 12.5 (1.4) 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-142 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.6 Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Temperature Derating Curves 3 40 Amp Styles 12 40 3 10 30 3 25 3 20 3 Current in amps Current in amps 10 Amp Styles 8 6 4 15 2 10 0 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 90° Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 3 90° Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 25 Amp Styles Current in amps 3 25 3 20 3 15 3 10 3 5 3 0 0° 10° 20° 30° 40° 50° 60° 70° 80° 3 90° Ambient Temperature (°C) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-143 3.6 3 Dimensions 3 D99 Series Control Relays and Timers Solid-State Relays Output – 3 2 Input 3 + 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3.20 (80.0) 3 1.20 (30.0) 3 1.20 (30.0) 3 3 3 0.05 (1.20) 4.20 (107.0) 3 3 3 3 3.10 (77.5) 0.20 (5.0) Radius 3 3 0.20 (5.0) Radius 0.50 (11.9) 3 3 3.70 (92.9) 3 4.00 (102.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-144 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Contents Description Machine Tool Relays D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 3 3 V7-T3-146 3 V7-T3-151 3 V7-T3-157 V7-T3-162 V7-T3-167 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Overview Eaton’s machine tool relay offering includes a variety of NEMA type relays. Included in this are open style relays and relays with convertible or side-mount contacts. Also included in this family are a variety of accessories to match the application, including suppressors, timing contacts and enclosures. The relay coils are available in a variety of line and control level voltages. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-145 3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Contents D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole Description 3 Page D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-147 V7-T3-148 V7-T3-149 V7-T3-150 V7-T3-151 V7-T3-157 V7-T3-162 V7-T3-167 3 3 3 D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole 3 Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits Contact poles on the D15 relay are of the fixed design and are not convertible. The basic four-pole relay will accept a front-mounted contact pole deck and/or sidemounted contact blocks (one per side). In addition, a sidemounted solid-state timer or a front-mounted pneumatic timer can be added to the relay. Only one frontmounted attachment can be added to the basic relay. Side-mounted contact blocks can be used to provide additional poles in applications where a pneumatic timer is installed on the front of the relay. They can also be used where panel depth is restricted. ● 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 The maximum number of contacts recommended per relay is eight, six of which can be NC. When a pneumatic timer is used, the maximum recommended number of NC contacts is three. Relays with DC coils are supplied with a coil clearing NC contact mounted on the side of the relay. 3 3 ● ● ● ● 600V, 10A continuous thermal current State indicator visually shows relay ON or OFF status Relay base has mounting holes on 35 x 60 mm centers, permitting direct replacement of competitive relays Relay also mounts on 35 mm DIN rail as standard Magnet coil has three terminals, permitting either top or diagonal wiring— easy to replace European or U.S. relays without changing wiring layout ● ● Contact pole terminals have captive, backed-out, self-lifting pressure plates with ± screws—reduced wiring time All terminals are shrouded or “finger-proofed” to reduce possibility of electrical shock Standards and Certifications ● ● UL CSA certified 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-146 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify Catalog number and magnet coil code letter. Example: For a four-pole relay having 4NO contacts with a 120V 60 Hz coil, order Catalog Number D15CR40AB. 3 3 Factory-Assembled Multipole Relays D15CR40_B Number of Poles Type of Contacts Open Type NO NC Catalog Number 1 4 4 0 D15CR40_B 3 1 D15CR31_B 2 2 D15CR22_B 1 3 D15CR13_B 0 4 D15CR04_B 3 3 3 3 3 D15CR60_B D15CR80_B 6 (four-pole relay with two-pole front-mounted deck) 8 (four-pole relay with four-pole front-mounted deck) 6 0 D15CR60_B 5 1 D15CR51_B 4 2 D15CR42_B 3 3 D15CR33_B 2 4 D15CR24_B 1 5 D15CR15_B 2 0 6 D15CR06_B 2 8 0 D15CR80_B 7 1 D15CR71_B 6 2 D15CR62_B 5 3 D15CR53_B 4 4 D15CR44_B 3 5 D15CR35_B 2 2 6 D15CR26_B 2 Additional Contact Poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Magnet Coil Selection Catalog Number Description 3 Front Contact Pole Deck AC Coils Volts and Hertz Code Suffix DC Coils Volts Code Suffix 120/60 or 110/50 A 12 R1 3 3 1NO-1NC C320KGT3 240/60 or 220/50 B 24 T1 2NO C320KGT4 480/60 or 440/50 C 48 W1 2NC C320KGT5 600/60 or 550/50 D 120 A1 1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening) C320KGT7 208/60 E 4NO C320KGT13 277/60 H 3NO-1NC C320KGT14 208–240/60 J 2NO-2NC C320KGT15 24/60 T 1NO-3NC C320KGT16 4NC C320KGT17 3 1NO-1NC C320KGS3 3 2NO C320KGS4 2NC C320KGS5 1NO (early closing)–1NC (late opening) C320KGS7 3 3 3 3 Side-Mounted Contact Blocks 3 3 Notes 1 Underscore indicates missing code suffix for magnet coil—see Magnet Coil Selection table above. 2 Not all suffix codes available: consult Customer Support Center. 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-147 3.7 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Accessories C320 Pneumatic Timer Attachment 3 3 Pneumatic Timer Attachment C32MP1 Metal Mounting Plate Timing Range Catalog Number Description Catalog Number 0.1 to 30 seconds C320TP1 Metal mounting plate C321MP1 10 to 180 seconds C320TP2 Maximum Ampere Ratings 3 Volts AC 3 3 3 3 3 240 480 600 30 15 7.5 6 Break 3 1.5 0.75 0.6 Application Catalog Number D15 C320LS1 Snap-on shields for both contactors and starters provide IEC Type IP20 Finger Protection. Prevents accidental contact with line/ load terminals. 3 Adhesive Dust Cover 3 Description Catalog Number 25 to a package C320DSTCVR 3 3 3 3 These adhesive stickers come 25 to a package and provide extra protection from contaminants when applied to the sides of Freedom D15. Adhesive covers are easily Solid-State Timer applied to side opening where auxiliaries are not installed and provide extra protection from metal filings and other debris. Solid-State ON DELAY Timer 1 Timing Range Catalog Number 234 3 0.1 to 1.0 seconds C320TDN1_ 1 to 30 seconds C320TDN30_ 3 30 to 300 seconds C320TDN300_ 5 to 30 minutes C320TDN3000_ 3 3 3 3 3 3 This timer is designed to be wired in series with the load (typically a coil). When the START button is pushed (power applied to timer), the ON delay timing function starts. At the completion of the set timing period, timer and series wired load will both be energized. Fits all D15 multipole relays. DIN Rail timed contacts—circuits in each pole must be the same polarity. Units are convertible from OFF to ON delay or vice-versa. Finger Protection Shields 3 3 120 Make Attachment mounts on top of any Freedom Series relay (top-mounted auxiliary contacts can not be installed on device when timer is used). Timer unit has DPST 3 3 Description Mounting Channel (DIN Rail) Description Catalog Number 1 meter length XBANS3575P Designed for DIN rail mounting of Freedom Series relays. C320TS2 Transient Suppressor Kits Coil Voltage 50/60 Hz 5 Catalog Number Transient 24/120V C320TS1 Suppressor 208/240V C320TS2 277/480V C320TS3 Description These kits limit high voltage transients produced in the control circuit when power is removed from the contactor or starter coil. There are three separate suppressors for use on 24–120V, 208–240V or 27– 480V coils respectively. These devices mount directly to the coil terminals. Notes 1 Side mounted on Freedom Series NEMA 00–2, D15, IECA-K and C25D, C25E and C25F frame. 2 Add operating voltage suffix to catalog number; A = 120V, B = 240V, E = 208V. 3 Rated 0.5 ampere pilot duty—not to be used on larger contactors. 4 Terminal connections are quick connects only. Two per side. 5 Suppressor is compatible with coil voltages/ranges as shown, both 50 and 60 Hz. 3 3 V7-T3-148 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays AC/DC Interface Module— Controller Coil Voltage Ranges C320DC Controller Catalog Number Prefix Controller Size or Rating Coil Range Volts AC AE16, AE17, AE56, AE57, CE15, CE55 A–F 24–240 G–K 48–240 AN16, AN56, CN15, CN55 CN35 L–N 110–240 00–0 24–240 1–2 48–240 3 110–240 10–30A 24–240 60A 48–240 100A 110–240 The Catalog Number C320DC Interface Module is an optically isolated solid-state switch that provides a means of operating AC coils with a 24 Vdc control signal. It acts as a space-saving interposing relay that can switch a specified 50/60 Hz AC source to the contactor or starter coil. 3.7 provisions for DIN rail mounting. 3 The module will operate coils within the voltage ranges shown in the table to the left. 3 Design Characteristics ● ● The module may be directly attached to the coil terminals of any Freedom Series contactor or starter—NEMA Sizes 00–3, D15, IEC Sizes A–N and lighting contactors 10–100A. It also has ● DC input: 24V ±10% at mA nominal AC operating voltage: 24–240 Vac ±10% 50/60 Hz AC current rating: 10A make (inrush), 1A break (sealed) 3 3 3 3 3 Typical Application—Solid-State Switch 3 Contactor Coil 24 Vdc Input Observe Polarity on Module 3 3 24–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 Example of Terminal Marking with 2NO and 2NC Contacts Contact Ratings—NEMA A600 Continuous Thermal Rating: 10A 3 Location AC Volts Make Break 120 60 6.0 240 30 3.0 480 15 1.5 600 12 1.2 13 125 1.1 250 0.55 31 3 43 3 14 Continuous Thermal Rating: 5A Make/Break Amperes 21 3 Contact Ratings—NEMA P300 DC Volts Status (NO or NC) Magnet Coil Data AC Voltage Pickup Sealed VA Watts VA Watts 12–600V 80 49 7.5 2.4 DC Voltage Pickup Amps Watts VA Watts 12 6.4 76.8 0.28 3.36 24 3.2 76.8 0.14 3.36 48 1.6 76.8 0.07 3.36 120 0.64 76.8 0.028 3.36 22 32 44 Relay terminals are identified by a two-digit number in accordance with International Standards approved by CENELEC (European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization). The number is marked on the relay and is used to identify location and status of the contacts. 3 The first digit indicates the location of the contact on the relay. The numbering begins with 1 and continues without a break from left to right. The second digit indicates the status of the contacts (NO or NC). Terminal marking 1 and 2 mean NC and 3 and 4 mean NO. 3 3 3 3 3 3 Sealed 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-149 3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Dimensions 3 D15 Four-Pole Relay 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.8 (45.7) 3 C 3 3 2.36 (59.9) Frt. Mtd. Acc. Side Mtd. Blk. 2.96 (75.2) 3 3 3 3 3 3 1.36 (34.5) Optional Additional Contact Poles or Accessories Mtg. Holes for M4 or #8 Screws D15 Six- and Eight-Pole Relays 0.54 (13.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.8 (45.7) 3 4.66 (118.4) 3 3 2.36 (59.9) Frt. Mtd. Acc. Side Mtd. Blk. 2.96 (75.2) 3 3 3 1.36 (34.5) Mtg. Holes for M4 or #8 Screws Optional Additional Contact Poles or Accessories 3 3 Dimensions and Shipping Weights 3 Description Dimension C Shipping Weights Lbs (kg) 3 Relay only 3.30 (83.8) 1.3 (0.6) Relay with timer attachment 5.55 (141.0) 1.5 (0.7) 3 Relay with front contact pole deck 4.66 (118.4) 1.7 (0.8) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-150 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control 3.7 Contents Description D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T3-146 3 3 3 V7-T3-152 V7-T3-154 V7-T3-155 V7-T3-156 3 3 V7-T3-157 3 V7-T3-162 3 V7-T3-167 3 3 3 3 BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control Product Description Type BF is AC operated, 300V maximum, and the BFD is DC operated, 250V. Fixed contact relays are available in any combination of NO and NC from two to 12 poles. BF and BFD relays have captive clamp terminals fully accessible from the front, a molded coil with low operating temperature and silver alloy contacts suitable for low voltage circuits. Features and Benefits ● Wiring to Relay ● In parallel with coil—one timed and up to 12 instantaneous contacts, or ● In series with coil—up to 12 timed contacts in one relay 3 Standards and Certifications ● UL recognized, UL File No. E19223 (AC relays only) CSA certified, File No. LR39402-6, LR28548-10, 11 (AC and DC relays) 3 3 3 3 Permanent Magnet Latch ● Field mountable on Catalog Number BF; factory installed on BFD ● Latch coil continuously rated ● Latch plunger adjustable for optimum performance 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-151 3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number of basic relay ● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: BF80V for a 110/60 AC coil 3 Type BF 3 Complete Relay—Type BF and BFD, Two-, Three-, Four- and Six-Pole 1 3 Type of Contact BF 300 Vac Basic Relays 120/60, 110/50 AC Coil BFD 250 Vdc Basic Relays 120 DC Coil 3 Number of Poles NO (Form A) NC (Form B) Catalog Number Catalog Number 3 2 2 0 BF20F BFD20S 1 1 BF11F BFD11S 0 2 BF02F BFD02S 3 0 BF30F BFD30S 2 1 BF21F BFD21S 2 1 2 BF12F BFD12S 3 3 Type BFD 3 3 3 4 3 3 3 6 3 3 3 3 0 3 BF03F BFD03S 4 0 BF40F BFD40S 3 1 BF31F BFD31S 2 2 BF22F BFD22S 1 3 BF13F BFD13S 0 4 BF04F BFD04S 6 0 BF60F BFD60S 5 1 BF51F BFD51S 4 2 BF42F BFD42S 3 3 BF33F BFD33S 2 4 BF24F BFD24S 0 6 BF06F BFD06S Coil Voltage 3 BF Coils Volts AC Hz Suffix Code Volts DC Suffix Code 3 12 60 H 6 C 24 60 I 12 D 48 60 J 24 L 110 60 V 38 N 110/120 50/60 F 48 M 3 208 60 K 72 E 220/240 50/60 G 95 B 3 440 60 C 120 S 130 U 240 T 3 3 3 3 BFD Coils Notes 1 Relays listed above with equal number of NO and NC contact poles are specially priced—1NO and 1NC pole are supplied at no additional charge. 2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-152 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number of basic relay ● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: BF80V for a 110/60 AC coil Type BF 3 3 3 Complete Relay—Type BF and BFD, Eight-, 10- and 12-Pole 1 Type of Contact BF 300 Vac Basic Relays 120/60, 110/50 AC Coil BFD 250 Vdc Basic Relays 120 DC Coil 3 Number of Poles NO (Form A) NC (Form B) Catalog Number Catalog Number 3 8 8 0 BF80F BFD80S 3 7 1 BF71F BFD71S 6 2 BF62F BFD62S 5 3 BF53F BFD53S 4 4 BF44F BFD44S 0 8 BF08F BFD08S 10 0 BF100F BFD100S 8 2 BF82F BFD82S 2 7 3 BF73F 2 BFD73S 6 4 BF64F BFD64S Type BFD 10 12 3 3 3 3 3 2 5 5 BF55F BFD55S 4 6 BF46F BFD46S 2 8 BF28F BFD28S 12 0 BF120F BFD120S 8 4 BF84F BFD84S 7 5 BF75F BFD75S 6 6 BF66F BFD66S 5 7 BF57F BFD57S 4 8 BF48F BFD48S 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Coil Voltage BF Coils BFD Coils Volts AC Hz Suffix Code Volts DC Suffix Code 12 60 H 6 C 24 60 I 12 D 48 60 J 24 L 110 60 V 38 N 110/120 50/60 F 48 M 208 60 K 72 E 220/240 50/60 G 95 B 440 60 C 120 S 130 U 240 T 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Notes 1 Relays listed above with equal number of NO and NC contact poles are specially priced—1NO and 1NC pole are supplied at no additional charge. 2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-153 3.7 3 Permanent Magnet Latch, Relay Mounted 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Permanent Magnet Latch Coil Volts Coil Hz Catalog Number 24 60 BFMLI 2 48 60 BFMLJ 2 110/120 50/60 BFMLF 220/240 50/60 BFMLG AC Relays 3 3 3 DC Relays 3 24 — BFMLL 48 — BFMLM 3 120 — BFMLS 240 — BFMLT 3 3 Options 3 FASTON Push-On Terminals 3 Description 3 Insert letter F after relay type designation in listed catalog number. Example: BFF20F or BFDF20S NEMA 1 Enclosure for Relay Types Code Letter Catalog Number Description Code Letter Catalog Number F — BF, AR—all poles — 4977D40G04 BFD—4–8 poles — 4977D40G04 ARD—4–8 poles — 4977D40G04 3 3 Overlapping Contacts 3 Description 3 3 NO contact closes before corresponding NC contact opens— supplied as NO/NC set(s). Insert letter A after relay type designation in listed catalog number. Example: BFA22F or BFDAF22S Code Letter Catalog Number A — Notes 1 For panel mount, add Suffix F. 2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-154 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Technical Data and Specifications 3 General Specifications 3 BF Relay Electrical Ratings—NEMA A300 Maximum Current Maximum VA Volts Cont. Make Break Make Break 120 10 60 6 7200 720 240 10 30 3 7200 720 Horsepower Ratings (UL Recognized) 3 3 3 DC Rating—NEMA P300 AC Volts Maximum Current Phase 115 230 Volts Cont. Make Break Max. Make or Break (VA) 3 1 1/6 1/2 125 5.0 1.1 1.1 138 3 3 — 1 250 5.0 0.55 0.55 138 3 Resistive Rating 125 Vdc 3A 250 Vdc 1.5A 3 3 Coil Power Requirements AC 72 VA open, 22 VA closed DC 12 watts (nominal), 250V max. 3 3 Permanent Magnet Latch Specifications Item Specification 3 Unlatching power requirements Open gap: 24 VA AC Closed gap: 7 VA Burden: 4 watts (AC) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-155 3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Contact Arrangements—BF and BFD Relays 2 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 3 3 6 Poles 8 Poles 3 3 3 Rear Rear Front Front 3 10 Poles 12 Poles 3 Rear Rear 3 Center Center 3 Front Front 3 3 3 Note: NO = Normally Open NC = Normally Closed Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 BF Relay with Permanent Magnet Latch and SolidState Timer BFD Relay with Solid-State Timer Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD 2.83 (71.9) 3 3 0.19 (4.8) 1.72 (43.7) KO KO KO 3 B E C 3 3.13 (79.5) 6.59 (167.4) D A 3 3.13 (79.5) 1.97 (50) 3 0.38 x 0.5 (9.7 x 12.7) Conduit (2 Top, 2 Bottom) 1.69 (42.9) 3.38 (85.9) Number of Poles A BF Only D BFD Only 4 3.22 (81.8) 6.22 (158.0) 5.88 (149.4) 8 4.19 (106.4) 7.19 (182.6) 6.88 (174.8) 12 4.81 (122.2) 7.81 (198.4) 7.50 (190.5) 5.63 (143.0) Catalog Number A NEMA 1 Poles 4.03 (102.4) 7.06 (179.3) Relays without Attachments 4.97 (126.2) 8.00 (203.2) All BF, AR, ARD 5.34 (135.6) 8.66 (220.0) 4–8 BFD 5.34 (135.6) 3 10, 12 BFD 7.97 (202.4) 3 All 3 C BF w/Timer 0.63 (16) E BFD w/Timer 3 B BF w/Latch 4.5 (114.3) NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD Dimensions BF and BFD Relay Dimensions Relays with Attachments BF, AR, ARD 7.97 (202.4) 3 3 V7-T3-156 KO 0.25 (6.4) Dia. Mtg. Holes (3) KO KO KO KO 1.69 (42.9) 3 3 5.66 (143.8) 1.05 1.72 (26.7) (43.7) Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com A Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control 3.7 Contents Description Page D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 V7-T3-146 3 V7-T3-151 3 3 V7-T3-158 V7-T3-159 V7-T3-159 V7-T3-160 V7-T3-161 V7-T3-162 V7-T3-167 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control Product Description Features and Benefits The AR/ARD relays are electromechanical convertible contact relays. AR relays are AC devices and the ARD is for DC applications. Permanent Magnet Latch By energizing the relay coil, the latch attachment “sets” (when the base relay’s armature/crossbar assembly has closed) holding the relay ON, even after the relay coil has been de-energized. The clearing coil on the latch is energized to release the armature/crossbar assembly. Application Description Type AR and ARD relays are designed for use on machine tools, process lines, conveyors and similar automatic and semiautomatic equipment. ● ● ● ● Field mountable to fourand six-pole Latch plunger is adjustable Latch coil continuously rated Unlatching power requirements ● Open gap: 24 VA ● Closed gap: 7 VA ● Burden: 4 watts AC, 6 watts DC 3 Operation Surge Suppressor ● Mounts in contact cavity of AR relays ● Limits high transient voltages resulting from deenergizing relay coil or other electromechanical devices ● Protects sensitive instruments and solid-state devices ● 120 Vac maximum, not used on Vdc ● For noise suppression, see Catalog Number SS-56 starter mounted surge suppressor. AR relays are available in either four- or six-pole configurations. AR relays are easily converted to eight- or 10-poles simply by adding a four-pole deck. In addition, mechanical latch attachments are available with four- and six-pole relays. Contacts are convertible from NO to NC, to provide any combination desired up to a maximum of 10. For the ARD, the number of poles cannot exceed four NC in any pole configuration. Wide spacing of contacts simplifies installation, contact testing and maintenance. Contacts are electrically and mechanically isolated from each other. Overlap contacts are also available in one or two sets. These contacts should be mounted in the center pole positions. AC and DC contact cartridges should not be used in the same relay. Standards and Certifications ● ● UL File No. E19223 CSA File No. LR39402-6, LR54517 and LR54520 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Reference Information ● ART, ARTD: IL 14510, IL 14485 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-157 3 3 3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Product Selection 3 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number of basic relay with 120/60, 110/50 AC coil from AR/ARD Relays table. ● If a coil voltage other than listed is required, select the suffix code from the Coil Voltage table below and substitute it for the last letter in the catalog number. Example: AR64V for a 110/60 AC coil. 3 AR/ARD Relays 3 AR/ARD Relays 3 Contact 3 NO NC Blank Cavities Catalog Number Catalog Number 4 0 0 4 AR4A ARD4S 2 0 2 AR420A ARD420S 4 0 0 AR440A ARD440S 0 0 6 AR6A ARD6S 4 0 2 AR640A — 6 0 0 AR660A ARD660S 6 0 2 AR860A ARD860S 2 8 0 0 AR880A ARD880S 10 0 0 AR10100A ARD10100S 6 3 3 81 3 10 3 ARD 600 Vdc Relays 120 DC Coil Number of Poles 3 3 AR 600 Vac Relays 120/60, 110/50 AC Coil 1 Coil Voltage 3 AR Coils ARD Coils Volts AC Hz Suffix Code Volts DC Suffix Code 12 60 F 12 D 3 24 60 I 24 L 48 60 G 48 M 3 110 60 V 95 B 110/120 50/60 A 120 S 3 208 60 B 130 U 3 220/240 50/60 W 240 T 277 60 C 3 3 3 380/440 50/60 H 440/480 50/60 X 550 60 D 550/600 50/60 E 3 Contact Cartridges—600V 3 3 Terminal Type 3 Standard Contact Cartridge Overlap Contact Cartridge Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 4 AC Cartridges 3 With clamp terminals ARC AROC With screw terminals ARCR AROCR 3 DC Cartridges With clamp terminals ARDC ARDOC With screw terminals ARDCR ARDOCR 3 Notes 1 Will not accept top-mounted latch or timers. 2 Contact Customer Support Center for availability. 3 Standard cartridges are sold in cartons of four cartridges. Catalog number is for single cartridge. 4 Overlap contact cartridges are sold in sets of two cartridges. Catalog number is for sets of two. 3 3 3 V7-T3-158 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays ARML Permanent Magnet Latch for AR/ARD Relays Permanent Magnet Latch Operating Volts 3 Catalog Number Coil Hz 3 For AC Control Circuits 24 60 ARMLI 48 60 ARMLG 120 60/50 ARMLA 240 60/50 ARMLW 3 3 3 For DC Control Circuits 24 — ARMLL 48 — ARMLM 120 — ARMLS 240 — ARMLT 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 Four-Pole Top Deck Adder ● Increases contact capacity from four/six-poles to eight/10-poles ● Mounts on top of basic relay using three screws ● Will not interfere with wiring, testing or convertible cartridges ● Screw terminals for ring connectors available; to order, add Suffix R to catalog number listed below Four-Pole Top Deck Adder Four-Pole Top Deck Adder Contacts No. of Poles NO NC Blank Cavities Catalog Number 3 3 3 ARSS Surge Suppressor for AR Relays Surge Suppressor With 600 Vac Cartridges 4 3 Surge Suppressor 2 0 2 ARA20 4 0 0 ARA40 Catalog Number 3 ARSS 3 3 3 With 600 Vdc Cartridges 4 2 0 2 ARDA20 4 0 0 ARDA40 3 3 3 Options Convertible Contacts Description AR and ARD relays listed are supplied with NO contacts that are easily converted to NC. If both NO and NC poles are required, order by catalog number. Example: four-pole relay with 1NO and 3NC contacts, order AR413A. Overlapping Contacts Code Letter Catalog Number 1 — Description Code Letter NO contact closes before corresponding NC contact opens — S or supplied as NO/NC sets of two cartridges. Insert letter S after S2 1 relay type designation in listed catalog number. Example: AR402AS. Specify the number of sets required: S for one set and S2 for two sets. Catalog Number — For ring-type connectors, add suffix R to the catalog number. Example: AR420AR. Code Letter Catalog Number R — 3 3 3 Screw Terminals Description 3 3 Note 1 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-159 3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 General 3 3 3 3 Contact Ratings—600 Vac Cartridge NEMA A600 Maximum Current Maximum VA Volts Cont. Make Break Make Break 120 10 60 6 7200 720 240 10 30 3 7200 720 480 10 15 1.5 7200 720 600 10 12 1.2 7200 720 DC Cartridges—NEMA P600 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Maximum Current Maximum VA Volts Continuous Make or Break Make or Break 125 5 1.10 138 250 5 0.55 138 600 5 0.20 138 Resistive Rating 125 Vdc 3A 250 Vdc 1.5A Coil Power Requirements AC 96 VA open, 14 VA closed DC 14 watts open, 250V max. Voltage AR Relays ARD Relays Pickup voltage (max.) 85% 65% Dropout voltage (min.) 60% 15% Voltage (max.) 110% 110% 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-160 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch 3 4.09 (103.9) 2.88 (73.2) 3 3.44 (87.4) 2.75 (69.9) 2.88 (73.2) Latch S.S. Timer 3 Adder Deck 3 3 Base Relay 3 D C B 3 A 3 3.13 (79.5) 1.44 (36.6) CL of Mounting Slots (2) for 0.164 Screws End View, 4- and 6-Pole CL of Mounting Slots (2) for 0.164 Screws Side View, 4-Pole 2.05 (52.1) 3 CL of Mounting Slots (2) for 0.164 Screws 3 Side View, 6-Pole 3 Four- and Six-Pole with Four-Pole Adder, Solid-State Timer and Mechanical Latch Relay Catalog Number A Four-, Six-Pole Relays B Relay Adder C Relay with Timer D Relay with Latch AR 3.56 (90.4) 4.94 (125.5) 6.00 (152.4) 6.39 (162.3) ARD 4.63 (117.6) 6.00 (152.4) 7.06 (179.3) 7.45 (189.2) 3 3 3 3 Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD 3 2.83 (71.9) 5.66 (143.8) 1.05 1.72 (26.7) (43.7) KO KO KO 6.59 (167.4) 3 0.63 (16) 0.38 x 0.5 (9.7 x 12.7) Conduit (2 Top, 2 Bottom) 3 KO KO KO KO 1.69 (42.9) 3.38 (85.9) 3 KO 0.25 (6.4) Dia. Mtg. Holes (3) 4.5 (114.3) 3 0.19 (4.8) 1.72 (43.7) 3 A 3 3 Enclosures—NEMA 1 for BF, BFD, AR and ARD Poles Catalog Number 3 Dimension A NEMA 1 3 Relays without Attachments All BF, AR, ARD 5.34 (135.6) 4–8 BFD 5.34 (135.6) 10, 12 BFD 7.97 (202.4) 3 3 Relays with Attachments All BF, AR, ARD 7.97 (202.4) 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-161 3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts Contents Description 3 Page D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole. . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-146 V7-T3-151 V7-T3-157 V7-T3-163 V7-T3-165 V7-T3-166 V7-T3-167 3 3 3 3 D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts 3 Product Description Features Options Standards and Certifications Relays can be ordered as complete devices in any pole combination up to a maximum of 12NO or 8NC and 4NO poles, or can be assembled from components shown on Page V7-T3-164. Contact poles D26MPR and D26MPF in 2- through 8-pole relays are convertible NO to NC or vice versa. Simply reverse the terminal screws and rotate the unit pole 180° (in either direction). Adding a front deck, the total number of poles can be increased to 8, all convertible NO to NC. ● 3 3 3 3 3 Relay base assembly (D26MB) will accept from 1 to 4 rear poles (D26MPR, D26MPS and/or D26MPL). 3 ● UL listed—Class No. NKCR2, File E1230(N) CSA certified—File LR353 Adding a D26MF, 4-pole fixed NO attachment, builds a 12pole relay with 8 convertible poles and 4 fixed NO poles. Relays with mechanical latch are available in any convertible pole combination up to eight poles maximum. 3 Normally Closed Contact 3 3 3 Normally Open Contact 3 To obtain overlapping contacts, use D26MPS (NO early closing) and D26MPL (NC late opening) rear poles, in related circuits. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-162 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3.7 Product Selection 3 Complete AC Relays 3 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number and magnet coil suffix letter. ● Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalog Number D26MR40, with a 120V, 60 Hz coil, order D26MR40A. ● For fast delivery and minimum inventory, it is recommended that component parts or complete relays with NO poles be ordered. 3 3 3 Complete AC Relays—Open Type 4-Pole Type of Contact 4-Pole with Latch Relay with Mechanical Latch Catalog Number Number of Contacts NO (Form A) NC (Form B) Relay Only Catalog Number 2 2 0 D26MR20 D26MR202 3 4 4-Pole with Pneumatic Timer Attachment 61 81 1 1 D26MR11 D26MR112 0 2 D26MR02 D26MR022 3 0 D26MR30 D26MR302 2 1 D26MR21 D26MR212 1 2 D26MR12 D26MR122 0 3 D26MR03 D26MR032 4 0 D26MR40 D26MR402 3 1 D26MR31 D26MR312 2 2 D26MR22 D26MR222 1 3 D26MR13 D26MR132 0 4 D26MR04 D26MR042 6 0 D26MR60 D26MR602 5 1 D26MR51 D26MR512 4 2 D26MR42 D26MR422 3 3 D26MR33 D26MR332 2 4 D26MR24 D26MR242 1 5 D26MR15 D26MR152 0 6 D26MR06 D26MR062 8 0 D26MR80 D26MR802 7 1 D26MR71 D26MR712 6 2 D26MR62 D26MR622 5 3 D26MR53 D26MR532 4 4 D26MR44 D26MR442 3 5 D26MR35 D26MR352 2 6 D26MR26 D26MR262 1 7 D26MR17 D26MR172 0 8 D26MR08 D26MR082 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Magnet Coil Selection Volts/Hertz Suffix Code Volts/Hertz Suffix Code 120/60–110/50 A 32/60 2 V 240/60–220/50 B 12/60 2 R 208/60 2 E 6/60 P 24/60 T 380/50 2 L 277/60 H 480/60 or 440/50 C 600/60 or 550/50 2 D 3 3 3 3 Notes 1 10- and 12-Poles: The 6 and 8 contact relays (without mechanical latch only) listed above can be provided with four additional NO non-convertible contacts. Add suffix number 4 to above listed catalog number plus magnet coil suffix. Example: For a 12 contact relay, order D26MR804A. 2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-163 3.7 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Relay Component Parts Location Relay Base Assembly D26MF Front Attachment Timer Attachments or Mechanical Latch 3 Relay Base Assembly (without Poles) Description Catalog Number Relay base assembly D26MB 4 3 D26MD10 Front Deck D26MF Front Attachment Pneumatic Timer or Mechanical Latch 3 3 D26MB Relay Base Assembly Basic four-pole D26 relay without contacts. Provision for adding one to four poles 3 Rear Pole 3 3 3 3 3 Front Deck with … 1NO contact pole D26MD10 Contact Positions 1 Timer Operation Catalog Number 2 2NO contact poles D26MD20 4NO contact poles D26MD40 4 ON delay D26MR005 4 OFF delay D26MR006 The relays listed above will accept up to four catalog number D26MPR contacts (convertible—NO or NC) for instantaneous operation. Order contacts separately. 3 3 Rear Pole For additional information on timer attachment, see Page V7-T3-165. For assembly of relays from component parts and relay accessories, see components tables below. 3 Catalog Number Convertible Contacts Rear pole—NO D26MPR Rear pole—NC D26MPR02 3 Front pole—NO D26MPF Front pole—NC D26MPF02 3 Gold plated (for low power circuits) Front Pole 3 3 Provides up to four additional front pole type D26MPF contacts. Convertible, NO to NC. Four-Pole Front Attachment Four-Pole Front Attachment (4NO Fixed Circuit) Description Catalog Number Front attachment D26MF Separate Contacts Description 3 Catalog Number Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment Factory Installed (without Relay Contacts) 3 3 Front Deck (Convertible Contact Poles) Description 3 3 as needed, D26MPR, D26MPL and/or D26MPS rear pole type. Rear pole—NO D26MPR03 Front pole—NO D26MPF03 Can be added to any two- to eight-pole Type M, D26 relay to provide up to a 12-pole relay. Four NO, nonconvertible contacts are included in this assembly. Notes 1 Number of available instantaneous contact positions (order contacts separately—Catalog Number D26MPR). 2 Consult Customer Support Center for availability. 3 To obtain overlapping contacts, these two special poles must be used in related circuits. 4 Add magnet coil suffix letter, see Page V7-T3-163. Example: D26MBA. Non-Convertible Contacts 3 Rear pole NO early closing 3 D26MPS Rear pole NC late opening 3 D26MPL 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-164 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Relay State Indicating Light Relay State Indicating Light Manual Test Accessory Manual Test Accessory 3 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz D26MAP120 Manual test accessory D26MTA 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz D26MAP240 Light provided with leads and bracket for mounting on twoto 12-pole relays. May be Tool to manually hold relays in the energized position for circuitry testing on completed used to monitor state of magnet coil or relay contact operation. Transient Suppressor panel. (10 per box, order in multiples of 10.) 3 Description Catalog Number Description Magnet coil transient suppressor D26MAS1 ON delay D26MTE Latch coil transient suppressor D26MAS2 OFF delay D26MTD May be mounted on any 120 Vac relay magnet coil or latch coil or 120 Vdc latch coil—connects directly across coil terminals. All DC magnet coils have a built-in varistor for transient suppression. range—0.1 to 180 seconds, repeat accuracy ±10%. Units are convertible from OFF delay to ON delay or vice versa. 3 3 Transient Suppressor Catalog Number Attachment mounts on any 0to four-pole D26 relay without latch. Timer unit has DPDT timed contacts (circuits in each pole must be the same polarity). Adjustable timing 3 3 Pneumatic Timer Attachment Pneumatic Timer Attachment 3.7 Limits high voltage transients produced in the circuit when power is removed from the coil. 3 3 3 3 3 3 Mounting Channel Mounting Channel Description Catalog Number 10 in length for 4 relays D26MC4 20 in length for 8 relays D26MC8 30 in length for 12 relays D26MC12 40 in length for 16 relays D26MC16 Pre-spaced mounting for adjacent relay installation. Indexed for cutting to desired 3 3 3 3 length. Captive mounting screws provided in channel for easier installation. 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 General 3 Contact Ratings (Amperes) A600 3 AC Volts 1 Make and Emergency Interrupting Capacity Break Continuous Thermal Rating 3 120 60 6 10 3 240 30 3 10 480 15 1.5 10 600 12 1.2 10 3 3 Coil Power Operating Time Watts VA Relay Inrush Sealed Inrush Sealed Range in Milliseconds Two- to 12-pole 95.0 9 155 22 Pickup: 6–13 Latch coil 18.5 11 41 17 Dropout: 8–26 3 3 3 Note 1 For DC contact ratings, see Page V7-T3-169. 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-165 3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Dimensions 3 AC and DC D26 Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D26MAS1 A 1 Slot #10 Screw 0.44 (11.2) 3 3 3 3.50 (88.9) 3.13 (79.5) 2 Holes #10 Screw 3 3 3 0.75 (19.1) D26MAS2 2.38 (60.5) Max. 3 3 3 0.44 (11.2) AC Relay D26 DC Relay D26 Dimension A Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 1–4 poles 1–3 poles 4.00 (101.6) 2.5 (1.1) 1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87 1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87 6.00 (152.4) 3.3 (1.5) 1–4 poles with latch 1–2 poles with latch 6.13 (155.7) 3.5 (1.6) 1–4 poles with D26MF 1–3 poles with D26MF 5.81 (147.6) 2.8 (1.3) 3 5–8 poles 4–7 poles 5.25 (133.4) 2.8 (1.3) 5–8 poles with timer D87 4–7 poles with timer D87 7.25 (184.2) 3.5 (1.6) 3 5–8 poles with latch 3–6 poles with latch 7.31 (185.7) 3.8 (1.7) 9–12 poles 8–11 poles 7.00 (177.8) 3.0 (1.4) 3 3 Mounting Channel 3 3 A 0.69 (17.5) B 2.50 (63.5) 2.38 (60.5) 3 3 3.63 (92.2) 3 3 3 3 3 0.38 (9.7) Type M Relay D26 3 3 1.06 (26.9) 1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5) 1.38 (35.1) Catalog Number Dimension A Dimension B D26MC16 40 (1016) 37.5 (952.5) D26MC12 30 (762) 27.5 (698.5) D26MC8 20 (508) 17.5 (444.5) D26MC4 10 (254) 7.5 (190.5) Note: Channel mounts through keyholes with #10 screws (two each end and one every fourth relay). Relays mount with screws captive in channel. All screws must be tightened firmly. 3 3 3 V7-T3-166 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts Contents Description Page D15 Series—Freedom 600V Multipole . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series—Fixed Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series—Convertible Contact Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac Multipole with Convertible Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 V7-T3-146 3 V7-T3-151 3 V7-T3-157 3 V7-T3-162 3 V7-T3-168 V7-T3-169 V7-T3-170 3 3 3 3 3 3 D26 Series—Type M, DC Multipole with Convertible Contacts Product Description Type M, DC multipole relays are physically and mechanically similar to the (D26) Type M AC relays described on Page V7-T3-163. They differ only in the electrical ratings and available pole combinations due to the use of a normally closed late opening, coil clearing contact, factory wired to the pickup winding of the magnet coil. (Contact is shown as L in figure to the right.) Magnet coil has built-in varistor for transient suppression. The mechanically latched relay has one extra contact, normally open early closing, factory wired in series with the winding of the intermittent rated latch coil. (Contact is shown as S in figure to the right.) 3 Latch Operation Component parts for these relays are the same as those listed for the (D26) Type M AC relays on Page V7-T3-163, except for the Indicating Light, which is not applicable to a DC relay. Contact poles D26MPR and D26MPF in 2- to 7-pole relays are convertible NO to NC or vice versa. Simply reverse the terminal screws and rotate the unit pole 180° (in either direction). With the latch coil deenergized, energizing the relay coil will pick up the relay and mechanically latch it in the pickup position. With the relay coil de-energized, energizing the latch coil will allow the relay to drop out. Convertible Contacts Normally Closed Contact Normally Open Contact DC Type M Relay 3 DC Input 3 LS1 Pick-Up L = NC Late Opening 3 3 DC Type M Relay with Latch Relay DC Input Coil Pick-Up LS1 L Hold (Not Used) L = NC Late Opening LS1 S Latch Coil Release S = NO Early Closing 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-167 3.7 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays Product Selection Complete DC Relays When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number and magnet coil suffix letter. ● Example: For a 4-pole relay having 4NO contacts, order Catalog Number D26MRD40, with a 120 Vdc coil, order D26MRD40A1. 3-Pole Complete DC Relays—Open Type 3 Type of Contact 1 Relay with Mechanical Latch Catalog Number Number of Contacts NO (Form A) NC (Form B) Relay Only Catalog Number 2 2 0 D26MRD20 D26MRD202 1 1 D26MRD11 D26MRD112 0 2 D26MRD02 D26MRD022 3 0 D26MRD30 D26MRD302 3 2 1 D26MRD21 D26MRD212 1 2 D26MRD12 D26MRD122 3 0 3 D26MRD03 D26MRD032 4 0 D26MRD40 D26MRD402 3 1 D26MRD31 D26MRD312 2 2 D26MRD22 D26MRD222 1 3 D26MRD13 D26MRD132 0 4 D26MRD04 D26MRD042 6 0 D26MRD60 D26MRD602 5 1 D26MRD51 D26MRD512 4 2 D26MRD42 D26MRD422 3 3 D26MRD33 D26MRD332 2 4 D26MRD24 D26MRD242 1 5 D26MRD15 D26MRD152 0 6 D26MRD06 D26MRD062 7 0 D26MRD70 — 6 1 D26MRD61 — 3 5 2 D26MRD52 — 4 3 D26MRD43 — 3 3 4 D26MRD34 — 2 5 D26MRD25 — 1 6 D26MRD16 — 0 7 D26MRD07 — 3 3 3 3-Pole with Latch 3 4 3 3 3 62 3 3 3 72 3 3 3 Magnet Coil Selection 3 3 3 Volts/Hertz Suffix Code Volts/Hertz Suffix Code 12 R1 120 A1 24 T1 240 B1 48 W1 Notes 1 Relay has additional factory wired normally closed coil clearing contact (see diagram). 2 10- and 11-Poles: The 6 and 7 contact relays (without mechanical latch only) listed above can be provided with four additional NO non-convertible contacts. Add suffix number 4 to above listed catalog number plus magnet coil suffix. Example: For an 11 contact relay, order D26MRD704A1. 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-168 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3-Pole with Timer Attachment 3.7 Relay with Pneumatic Timer Attachment (without Relay Contacts) 3 Contact Positions 1 Timer Operation Catalog Number 3 3 ON delay D26MRD005 3 OFF delay D26MRD006 3 3 The relays listed above will accept up to three catalog number D26MPR contacts (convertible—NO or NC) for instantaneous operation. Order contacts separately. For additional information on timer attachment, see Page V7-T3-165. 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 General 3 Contact Ratings (Amperes) 2 DC Volts Inductive Make/Break Resistive Make/Break 3 28 7.0 10.0 3 48 2.5 10.0 120 1.1 2.0 240 0.2 0.4 Coil Power 3 3 Operating Time Watts 3 Average Milliseconds Relay Inrush Sealed Two- to 11-pole 168 13.2 Pickup: 10 Latch coil 21.6 intermittent 21.6 intermittent Dropout: 16 3 3 Notes 1 Number of available instantaneous contact positions (order contacts separately—Catalog Number D26MPR). 2 Contact ratings do not apply to contacts D26MPL and D26MPS. For AC contact ratings, see Page V7-T3-165. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-169 3.7 Control Relays and Timers Machine Tool Relays 3 Dimensions 3 AC and DC D26 Relays Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 D26MAS1 A 1 Slot #10 Screw 0.44 (11.2) 3 3 3 3.50 (88.9) 3.13 (79.5) 2 Holes #10 Screw 3 3 3 0.75 (19.1) D26MAS2 2.38 (60.5) Max. 3 3 3 0.44 (11.2) AC Relay D26 DC Relay D26 Dimension A Ship. Wt. Lbs (kg) 1–4 poles 1–3 poles 4.00 (101.6) 2.5 (1.1) 1–4 poles with timer D26 or D87 1–3 poles with timer D26 or D87 6.00 (152.4) 3.3 (1.5) 1–4 poles with latch 1–2 poles with latch 6.13 (155.7) 3.5 (1.6) 1–4 poles with D26MF 1–3 poles with D26MF 5.81 (147.6) 2.8 (1.3) 3 5–8 poles 4–7 poles 5.25 (133.4) 2.8 (1.3) 5–8 poles with timer D87 4–7 poles with timer D87 7.25 (184.2) 3.5 (1.6) 3 5–8 poles with latch 3–6 poles with latch 7.31 (185.7) 3.8 (1.7) 9–12 poles 8–11 poles 7.00 (177.8) 3.0 (1.4) 3 3 3 3 Mounting Channel A 0.69 (17.5) B 2.50 (63.5) 2.38 (60.5) 3 3 1.06 (26.9) 0.38 (9.7) Type M 3.63 (92.2) Relay D26 3 3 1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5) 1.38 (35.1) 3 Catalog Number Dimension A Dimension B 3 D26MC16 40 (1016) 37.5 (952.5) D26MC12 30 (762) 27.5 (698.5) D26MC8 20 (508) 17.5 (444.5) D26MC4 10 (254) 7.5 (190.5) 3 3 3 Note: Channel mounts through keyholes with #10 screws (two each end and one every fourth relay). Relays mount with screws captive in channel. All screws must be tightened firmly. 3 3 3 V7-T3-170 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.8 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Contents Timing Relays Description Page Timing Relays Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 V7-T3-176 V7-T3-180 V7-T3-183 V7-T3-187 V7-T3-189 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection Guide Function Code Cross-Reference Guide 3 Timer Series Function Description Universal TR TR TMR5 TMR6 TMRP E5-248 3 1 Asymmetrical flasher, pause first lp — R/P — — RC DLY 2 Asymmetrical flasher, pulse first li — Y — — RC 3 ON delay and OFF delay with control contact ER — — — — — 4 ON delay and single shot leading edge voltage controlled EWu — — — — — 5 ON delay and single shot leading edge control contact EWs — — — — — 6 Single shot leading and single shot trailing edge with control contact WsWa — — — — — 7 Pulse sequence monitoring Wt — — — — — 8 ON delay, power triggered E A1 N — A — 9 Single shot leading edge voltage controlled Wu B1 T — C — 2 10 OFF delay/signal OFF delay R E F — D OFF DLY 11 Single shot leading edge with control input Ws F2 C/G — H SS 12 Single shot trailing edge with control input Wa — — — — — 13 ON delay control signal start, trailing edge OFF Es — — — — — 14 Flasher, pause first Bp C1 L — B — 15 Retriggerable single shot — — W/D — E SS 16 Flasher, ON first — D1 — — F — 17 ON delay control signal start, leading edge OFF — A2 — — — ON DLY 18 Flasher—control signal start, pause first — B2 — — — RC DLY 19 Flasher—control signal start, ON first — C2 — — — RC 20 Signal ON/OFF delay — D2 — — — — 21 ON/OFF delay — — — — I — 22 Single pulse generator — — — — G OS 23 Memory latch — — — — J — 24 True OFF delay — — — X — — Notes 1 Applies to TRN model only. 2 Applies to TRF model only. 3 The E5-248 is battery powered and has three programmable trigger functions. This product may perform somewhat differently from the standard timing relays. Refer to the operator instructions for details. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-171 3.8 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Product Overview Timer Function Descriptions Function #1—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248 Asymmetrical Flasher, Pause First Repeat Cycle, OFF/ON Delay Function #4—Universal TR ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Voltage Controlled When the supply voltage U is applied, the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into ON position and the set interval t2 begins. When the supply voltage U is applied, the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into ON position and the set interval t2 begins. After the interval t2 has expired, the output relay After the interval t2 has expired, the output relay switches into OFF position. The output relay is triggered at the ratio of t1:t2 until the supply voltage is interrupted. 3 Input Power (U) 3 Input Power (U) LED U/t* LED U/t* 3 Output LED** Output LED** Output Relay (R) switches into OFF position. If the supply voltage is interrupted before the interval t1 + t2 has expired, the interval already expired is erased and is restarted when the supply voltage is next applied. t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 Output Relay (R) t1 t2 3 3 3 3 3 3 Function #2—Universal TR, TMR5, E5-248 Asymmetrical Flasher, Pulse First Repeat Cycle, ON/OFF Delay Function #5—Universal TR ON Delay and Single Shot Leading Edge Control Contact When the supply voltage U is applied, the output relay R switches into the ON position and the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into OFF position The supply voltage U must be constantly applied to the device. When the control contact S is closed, the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into ON position and the set and the set interval t2 begins. After the interval t2 has expired, the output relay switches into ON position. The output relay is triggered at the ratio of t1:t2 until the supply voltage is interrupted. 3 3 3 Input Power (U) Input Power (U) LED U/t* LED U/t* Output LED** Trigger Signal (S) Output Relay (R) t1 t2 t1 t2 t1 3 3 3 3 3 3 Output LED** Output Relay (R) 3 3 interval t2 begins. After the interval t2 has expired, the output relay R switches into OFF position. During the interval, the control contact is ignored. A new cycle can only be initiated when the cycle has been completed. t1 t2 Function #3—Universal TR ON Delay and OFF Delay with Control Contact Function #6—Universal TR Single Shot Leading and Single Shot Trailing Edge with Control Contact Asymmetrical Signal ON/OFF Delay The supply voltage U must be constantly applied to the device. When the control contact S is closed, the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into ON position. If the control contact is opened, the set The supply voltage U must be constantly applied to the device. When the control contact S is closed, the output relay R switches to the ON position and the set interval t1 begins. After the interval t1 has expired, the output relay R switches into OFF position. If the control contact S is opened, the interval t2 begins. After the interval t2 has expired, the output relay R switches into OFF position. If the control contact is opened before the interval t1 has expired, the interval already expired is erased and is restarted with the next cycle. 3 Input Power (U) 3 Input Power (U) LED U/t* LED U/t* 3 Trigger Signal (S) Trigger Signal (S) 3 Output Relay (R) Output LED** Output LED** V7-T3-172 output relay again switches to the ON position and the set interval t2 begins. After the interval t2 has expired, the output relay R switches into OFF position. During the interval, the control contact is ignored. During the interval, the control contact can be operated any number of times. t1 t230% of rated supply voltage >30% of rated supply voltage >30% of rated supply voltage >30% of rated supply voltage Overvoltage category III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) Rated surge voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV Contact configuration SPDT (one changeover contact) SPDT (one changeover contact) DPDT (two changeover contacts) DPDT (two changeover contacts) Rated voltage 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 3 3 3 3 Output Switching capacity 2000 VA (8A/250V) 2000 VA (8A/250V) 2000 VA (8A/250V) 2000 VA (8A/250V) Fusing 8A fast acting 8A fast acting 8A fast acting 8A fast acting 3 3 3 Mechanical life 20 x 10^6 operations 20 x 10^6 operations 20 x 10^6 operations 20 x 10^6 operations Electrical life 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, resistive 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, resistive 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, resistive 2 x 10^5 operations at 1000 VA load, resistive Switching frequency Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) Max. 6/min. at 1000 VA resistive load (in accordance with IEC 60947-5-1) Overvoltage category III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) III (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) Rated surge voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Control Signal Loadable Maximum cable length 10m 10m 10m 10m Trigger level (sensitivity) Automatic adaption to supply voltage Automatic adaption to supply voltage Automatic adaption to supply voltage Automatic adaption to supply voltage DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms Minimum control pulse length DC 50 ms/AC 100 ms 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Refer to Function Code Cross-Reference Guide on Page V7-T3-171 for function details. 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-177 3.8 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Universal TR Timing Relays, continued Description TRL04 TRL07 TRL27 TRW27 Base accuracy ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value ±1% of maximum scale value Adjustment accuracy <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value <5% of maximum scale value Repetition accuracy <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms <0.5% or ±5 ms Temperature influence <0.01% /°C <0.01% /°C <0.01% /°C <0.01% /°C Accuracy 3 Physical Ambient temperature –25 to 55°C –25 to 55°C –25 to 55°C –25 to 55°C 3 Storage temperature –25 to 70°C –25 to 70°C –25 to 70°C –25 to 70°C Relative humidity 15% to 85% (in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) 15% to 85% (in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) 15% to 85% (in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) 15% to 85% (in accordance with IEC 60721-3-3 Class 3K3) Pollution degree 2, if built in 3 (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) 2, if built in 3 (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) 2, if built in 3 (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) 2, if built in 3 (in accordance with IEC 60664-1) Housing material Self-extinguishing plastic housing, IP40 rating Self-extinguishing plastic housing, IP40 rating Self-extinguishing plastic housing, IP40 rating Self-extinguishing plastic housing, IP40 rating Mounting Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according to EN 60715, any position Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according to EN 60715, any position Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according to EN 60715, any position Mounted on DIN rail TS 35 according to EN 60715, any position Terminal rating Shockproof terminal connection according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), IP20 rating Shockproof terminal connection according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), IP20 rating Shockproof terminal connection according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), IP20 rating Shockproof terminal connection according to VBG 4 (PZ1 required), IP20 rating Tightening torque Max. 1 Nm Max. 1 Nm Max. 1 Nm Max. 1 Nm 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Terminal Capacity 3 Description 3 1 x 4 mm2 without multicore cable end 1 x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 with/without multicore cable end 2 x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 with/without multicore cable end 3 3 3 3 3 2 x 2.5 mm2 flexible without multicore cable end Wiring Diagrams Single-Pole, Double-Throw Units (SPDT)— TRL04 and TRL07 Double-Pole, Double-Throw Units (DPDT)— TRL27 and TRW27 (+) U= (–) (+) U= (–) 3 15 3 A1 B1 A1 15 S (Used only for control switch triggered functions) S (Used only for control switch triggered functions) 25 15 A1 B1 3 3 A1 15 25 R R 18 26 28 26 28 R 3 A2 3 16 18 A2 A2 16 3 18 16 A2 16 18 3 3 3 V7-T3-178 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 17.5 mm (TRL04 and TRL07) 3 35 mm (TRL27 and TRW27) 3 3 3.43 1.77 (45.0) (87.0) 1.77 3.43 (45.0) (87.0) 3 3 3 0.20 (5.0) 1.73 (44.0) 2.36 (60.0) 0.69 (17.5) 0.20 (5.0) 1.73 (44.0) 2.36 (60.0) 3 1.38 (35.0) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-179 3.8 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Contents TR Series Description 3 Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TR Series 3 Product Description Features The upgraded TR Series Timing Relays are designed to meet most timing requirements by offering more flexibility in range of input voltage, timing range and functionality. Use a rotary switch to choose from 20 selectable time ranges from 0.1 second to 600 hours. We offer both a power triggered and signal triggered model—each with expanded operation modes. There is a green LED to indicate when power is ON and an orange LED when output is ON. ● 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 20 time ranges and 10 timing functions Time delays from 0.1 sec to 600 hrs Space-saving, compact package High repeat accuracy of ± 0.2% LED indication Standard 8- or 11-pin and 11-blade termination 2 Form C DPDT delayed output contacts 10A contact rating Operation TRNP and TRNB Internal Connections 4 5 3 6 2 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A 8 (–/+) 1 (–/–) B (–/+) TRNP (–/–) TRNB TRFP and TRFB Internal Connections External Control Start Signal 4 3 3 5 6 7 2 3 1 11 8 9 10 4 5 7 8 A (–/–) (–/+) 3 External Control Start Signal 1 2 3 9 B (–/+) TRFP 6 (–/–) TRFB 3 Standards and Certifications 3 ● ● 3 ● ● 3 cULus listed CSA CE marked TUV TUV 3 3 3 V7-T3-180 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-176 V7-T3-181 V7-T3-181 V7-T3-181 V7-T3-182 V7-T3-182 V7-T3-183 V7-T3-187 V7-T3-189 3.8 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Catalog Number Selection 3 TR N P 240 AC Family Type 3 Input Voltage 24AD = 24 Vac (50/60 Hz)/24 Vdc 240AC = 100–240 Vac (50/60 Hz) TR Operational Mode N = Power Triggered F = Signal Triggered A = ON delay A = ON delay, control signal start B = Interval (leading edge OFF) C = Flasher (pause first) B = Flasher, control signal start D = Flasher (ON first) (pause first) C = Flasher, control signal Start (ON first) D = Signal ON/OFF delay E = OFF delay F = Single shot leading edge with control input 3 3 3 3 Model Type P = Pin/octal B = Blade style 3 3 3 3 Product Selection Accessories TR Plug-In Timing Relays—Power Triggered Sockets for Use with TR Timers—Standard Pack of 10 3 Octal Blade Catalog Number Timing Relay Terminal Style Catalog Number 3 Coil Voltage Catalog Number TRNP 8-pin octal D3PA2 24 Vac/Vdc TRNP24AD TRNB24AD 3 TRFP 11-pin octal D3PA3 100–240 Vac TRNP240AC TRNB240AC TRNB, TRFB 0.187 in solder/QC terminals (blade style) D5PA2 3 3 TR Plug-In Timing Relays—Signal Triggered Octal Blade Coil Voltage Catalog Number Catalog Number 24 Vac/Vdc TRFP24AD TRFB24AD 100–240 Vac TRFP240AC TRFB240AC 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-181 3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) General Description Specification 3 Operation system Solid-state CMOS circuit Time range 0.1 sec to 600 hours 3 Pollution degree 2 (IE60664-1) TR Series Dimensions and Weights Description 3 3 3 Overvoltage category III (IE60664-1) Rated operational voltage TRNP 87g 24 AC 24 Vac (50/60 Hz)/24 Vdc TRFP 89g 12 DC 12 Vdc TRNB, TRFB 85g Voltage tolerance 20.4–26.4 Vac (50/60 Hz)/21.6–26.4 Vdc 3 12 DC 10.8–13.2 Vdc 85–264 Vac (50/60 Hz) Input OFF voltage Rated voltage x 10% minimum Ambient operating temperature –4 to 149°F (–20 to 65°C) Reset time 100 ms maximum Repeat error ± 0.2%, ± 20 ms 1 Voltage error ± 0.2%, ± 20 ms 1 Temperature error ± 0.5%, ± 20 ms 1 3 Setting error ± 10% maximum Insulation resistance 100M ohm minimum (500 Vdc) 3 Dielectric strength 3 Between power and output terminals 2000 Vac, 1 minute Between contacts of different poles 2000 Vac, 1 minute Between contacts of same pole 1000 Vac, 1 minute 3 Vibration resistance 3 Shock resistance 3 3 3 3 3 1.58H x 1.42W x 2.95D in. (40H x 36W x 74.9D mm) 100–240 Vac (50/60 Hz) 24 AC 3 1.58H x 1.42W x 3.07D in. (40H x 36W x 77.9D mm) TRNB, TRFB 240 AC 240 AC 3 TRNP, TRFP Weights 3 3 Specification Dimensions 3.07 (77.9) Pin (P) Type 2.95 (74.9) Blade (B) Type Note 1 For the value of the error against a preset time, whichever value is larger should apply. 10–55 Hz amplitude 0.5 mm; 2 hrs in each of 3 axes Operating extremes 10G Damage limits — TRNP, TRFP 40G (3x in each of 3 axes) TRNB, TRFB 10G (3x in each of 3 axes) Power consumption (approx.) 240 AC 6.5 VA TRNP, TRNB/6.6 VA TRFP, TRFB 240 Vac/60 Hz 11.6 VA TRNP, TRNB/12.1 VA TRFP, TRFB 24 AC (AC/DC) 3.4 VA–1.7W TRNP, TRNB/3.5 VA–1.7W TRFP, TRFB 12 DC 1.6W 3 3 TR Series Contact Ratings Description Specification 3 Contact configuration 2 Form C, DPDT (delayed output) Allowable voltage/current 240 Vac, 30 Vdc/10A 3 Max. permissible operating frequency 1800 cycles per hour 3 3 3 3 Rated load Resistive 10A, 240 Vac/30 Vdc Inductive 7A, 240 Vac/30 Vdc Horsepower rating 1/6 hp 120 Vac, 1/3 hp 240 Vac Life Electrical 500,000 operations minimum (resistive) Mechanical 50,000,000 operations minimum V7-T3-182 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Contents TMR5 Series Description Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176 V7-T3-180 V7-T3-184 V7-T3-184 V7-T3-184 V7-T3-185 V7-T3-185 V7-T3-186 V7-T3-187 V7-T3-189 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TMR5 Series Product Description Features The TMR5 Series Time Delay Relays are designed for a broad range of OEM applications. The TMR5 Series offers non-programmable plug-in style timers with a variety of functions available. Each unit offers a single function and single input voltage, and operates over a defined time delay range. Units with fixed time delays are also available. Eaton also offers customization capabilities for these timers—remote adjustments, special pin configurations, and more. Contact us to discuss your specific application and design of a custom timer. ● ● ● ● ● ● Single timing range for each unit Ranges available from 0.02 sec to 24 hours Wide variety of functions available Plugs into standard 8- or 11-pin socket 10A DPDT output contacts Can be easily customized to meet your needs 3 Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● cRUus UL listed (with Eaton socket) RoHS compliant CE marked 3 3 3 with Eaton socket 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-183 3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Catalog Number Selection All configurations from Catalog Number Selection are available. 3 TMR5 N 05 120 Family Type TMR5 3 3 N T L R 3 3 Y 3 Operational Mode 8-Pin Octal Sockets 11-Pin Octal Sockets = ON delay F = OFF delay, control switch trigger = Interval ON C = Single shot, control switch trigger W = Watchdog, control switch trigger = Flasher-pause-first (retriggerable single shot) = Repeat cycle 1 P = OFF delay, power trigger (OFF time first followed by G = Single shot, power trigger ON time and repeating) D = Watchdog, power trigger (retriggerable = Repeat cycle 1 single shot) (ON time first followed by OFF time and repeating) Input Voltage 120 = 120 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 240 = 240 Vac/Vdc Timing Range 2 04 = 0.05–5 sec 05 = 0.1–10 sec 08 = 0.6–60 sec 12 = 3–300 sec 15 = 0.3–30 min 16 = 0.6–60 min 22 = 6 sec–10 min 3 3 Product Selection 3 TMR5 Time Delay Relays 3 Input Voltage 3 3 24 Vac/Vdc 3 3 3 120 Vac/Vdc Description Standard Pack 8-pin socket 10 D3PA2 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5N05120 11-pin socket 10 D3PA3-A2 0.6–60 sec TMR5N08120 Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS 0.1–10 sec TMR5N0524 0.6–60 sec TMR5N0824 0.1–10 sec TMR5F05120 0.6–60 sec TMR5F08120 0.1–10 sec TMR5F0524 0.6–60 sec TMR5F0824 11-pin 24 Vac/Vdc 3 24 Vac/Vdc 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5T05120 0.6–60 sec TMR5T08120 0.1–10 sec TMR5T0524 0.6–60 sec TMR5T0824 Single Shot, Control Switch Trigger 120 Vac/Vdc 11-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5C05120 0.6–60 sec TMR5C08120 0.1–10 sec TMR5C0524 0.6–60 sec TMR5C0824 3 24 Vac/Vdc 3 Repeat Cycle (OFF Time First Followed by ON Time and Repeating) 3 120 Vac/Vdc 3 3 3 3 Notes 1 Indicates DUAL knob unit. All dual knob units can have independently selectable and adjustable ON and OFF times. If different ON and OFF times are desired, add two codes for time ranges in the part number. The first code listed indicates the first timing range of the unit (OFF time for R, ON time for Y) and the second code indicates the second timing range (ON time for R, OFF Time for Y). 2 Fixed time delay settings are available for orders of 50 pieces or more. Contact EatonCare for additional information at 877-ETN-CARE (386-2273). Interval ON 120 Vac/Vdc 3 Catalog Number Socket Catalog Number OFF Delay, Control Switch Trigger 3 3 Accessories for Use with TMR5 Time Delay Relays Timing Range ON Delay 120 Vac/Vdc 3 Accessories 8-pin 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1–10 sec TMR5R05120 0.6–60 sec TMR5R08120 0.1–10 sec TMR5R0524 0.6–60 sec TMR5R0824 Repeat Cycle (ON Time First Followed by OFF Time and Repeating) 120 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 3 V7-T3-184 8-pin 0.1–10 sec TMR5Y05120 0.6–60 sec TMR5Y08120 0.1–10 sec TMR5Y0524 0.6–60 sec TMR5Y0824 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.8 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams TMR5 Time Delay Relays Wiring for 8-Pin Units Description Specification Voltage tolerance AC operation Load burden Control Switch 4 5 +10/–15% of nominal at 50/60 Hz DC operation Wiring for 11-Pin Control Switch Trigger Units +10/–15% of nominal 3 6 2 VA 2 7 4 1 8 Setting accuracy Maximum setting (adjustable) +5%, –0% Minimum setting (adjustable) +0%, –50% Fixed time delay < 2 seconds +1% 0.1–2 seconds ±5% (DC)+ L1 3 2 −(DC) L2 Input Voltage 5 6 7 Reset time ON Delay/interval/repeat cycle OFF Delay/single shot/watchdog ±2% 12, 24 and 48V units Temperature 12–120V input voltage 240V input voltage 3 3 (DC)+ L1 (DC)− L2 Input Voltage 3 Power Trigger * 3 + 0.08 second 4 3 2 2000V DPDT 10A @ 240 Vac/30 Vdc, 1/2 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NO contacts) 1/3 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NC contacts) B300 and R300; AC-15 and DC-13 Full load 5 6 7 8 3 9 10 3 1 11 Output contacts Life Mechanical − 3 0.01 second Insulation voltage 3 3 0.04 second –18 to 150°F (–28 to 65°C) 3 Wiring for 11-Pin Power Trigger Units 0.1 second –18 to 122°F (–28 to 50°C) 3 9 10 1 11 Startup time (time from when power is applied until unit is timing) 120 and 240V units 0.05 second Maintain function time (time unit continues to time after power is removed) 3 8 Repeat accuracy (constant voltage and temperature) > 2 seconds delay ±0.1% 0.1–2 seconds delay 3 (DC)+ L1 (DC)− L2 Input Voltage * Should Be Same Voltage as Input Voltage 3 3 3 3 10,000,000 operations 3 100,000 operations 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-185 3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) TMR5 3 Dual Knob Only 3 3 2.40 (61.0) 3 3 2.90 (73.7) 1.70 (43.2) 3 3.50 (88.9) 3 3 3 3 3 D3PA2 Socket D3PA3 Socket 6–32 x 0.312 Combination Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate (8 places) 6–32 x 0.312 Combination Head Screw and Pressure Clamp (11 places) Two 0.165 (4.2) Dia. Slots 2.14 (54.3) 2.03 (51.6) 3 1.30 (33.0) 1.60 (40.6) Max. 3 3 3 0.82 (20.8) 0.58 (14.7) 0.97 (24.6) Tolerances: ± 0.010 Max. ± (0.25) Unless Otherwise Shown Two 0.17 (4.3) Dia. Holes 2.05 (52.1) Max. 2.06 (52.3) 0.13–0.16 (3.2–4.0) 0.15 (3.8) 0.58 (14.7) 0.77 (19.6) 2.33 (59.2) 0.97 Max. (24.6) Tolerances: ± 0.010 ± (0.25) Unless Otherwise Shown 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-186 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Contents TMR6 Series Description Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176 V7-T3-180 V7-T3-183 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-189 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TMR6 Series Product Description Features Most electronic time delay relays with an OFF delay function require input voltage to be applied continuously in order to operate correctly. However, there are many applications where this is not possible—-keeping a relay energized for some amount of time after input voltage has been removed. Eaton’s TMR6 true OFF delay product provides this function even when input voltage is removed. It duplicates the operation of the older OFF delay pneumatic time delay relays. ● ● ● ● ● ● 3 Operation Provides OFF delay function without requiring input voltage during OFF time delay Duplicates operation of pneumatic OFF delay timers Each unit has eight timing ranges built in, covering 0.05 seconds to 30 minutes Selecting a range is easy using a rotary switch (no math is required or DIP switches to set) Uses industry-standard 8-pin octal socket 10A DPDT output contacts Timing Ranges Select one of the eight timing ranges using the selector knob, and then adjust the time within that range for an accurate delay setting. True OFF Delay Upon application of input voltage, the relay is energized. When the input voltage is removed, the preset time begins. At the end of the preset time, the relay is de-energized. Voltage must be applied for a minimum of 0.1 second to assure proper operation. Any application of the input voltage during the preset time will keep the relay energized and reset the time delay. No external trigger switch is required. 3 3 3 3 3 True OFF Delay Input Power (Voltage) 3 ON 3 OFF 3 ON Output (Load) 3 Delay OFF 3 3 Standards and Certifications ● Timing Ranges ● Dial Setting Timing Range ● A 0.05–5 sec. ● B 0.1–10 sec. C 0.3–30 sec. D 0.6–60 sec. E 1.8–180 sec. F 3–300 sec. G 0.1–10 min. H 0.3–30 min 3 cRUus UL listed (with Eaton socket) RoHS compliant CE marked 3 3 3 with Eaton socket Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 3 V7-T3-187 3.8 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Catalog Number Selection Wiring Diagram All configurations from Catalog Number Selection are available. Wiring for 8-Pin Units 3 TMR6 X 00 120 4 5 3 3 3 3 Input Voltage 120 = 120 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 240 = 240 Vac/Vdc Family Type TMR6 Operational Mode X = True OFF delay 7 1 8 (DC)+ L1 −(DC) L2 Input Voltage Timing Range 00 = Programmable 3 6 2 3 Dimensions 3 Product Selection 3 TMR6 True OFF Delay Relays 3 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Input Voltage Catalog Number 0.05 sec–30 min (user selectable, 8 ranges) TMR6X00120 TMR6 True OFF Delay 120 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 3 Timing Range 240 Vac/Vdc TMR6X0024 2.40 (61.0) TMR6X00240 3 3 3 Accessories 2.90 (73.7) Accessories for Use with TMR6 Time Delay Relays Description Standard Pack Catalog Number 8-pin socket 10 D3PA2 3 Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 3 3 3 3 1.70 (43.2) Description D3PA2 Socket 6–32 x 0.312 Combination Head Screw and Pressure Clamping Plate (8 places) Two 0.165 (4.2) Dia. Slots 2.14 (54.3) TMR6 Time Delay Relays Specification 3.50 (88.9) 2.03 (51.6) Voltage tolerance AC operation +10/–15% of nominal at 50/60 Hz DC operation +10/–15% of nominal Load burden 2 VA Setting accuracy 3 Maximum setting (adjustable) +5%, –0% Minimum setting (adjustable) +0%, –50% 3 Repeat accuracy (constant voltage and temperature) 3 Temperature –18 to 150°F (–28 to 65°C) Insulation voltage 2,000V 3 Output contacts DPDT 10A @ 240 Vac/30 Vdc, 1/2 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NO contacts) 1/3 hp @ 120/240 Vac (NC contacts) B300 and R300; AC-15 and DC-13 3 1.30 (33.0) 1.60 (40.6) Max. 0.82 (20.8) 0.58 (14.7) 0.97 (24.6) Max. Tolerances: ± 0.010 ± (0.25) Unless Otherwise Shown ±0.1% or 50 ms, whichever is greater Life 3 Mechanical 2,000,000 operations Full load 100,000 operations 3 3 V7-T3-188 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Contents TMRP Series Description Page Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-176 V7-T3-180 V7-T3-183 V7-T3-187 V7-T3-190 V7-T3-190 V7-T3-191 V7-T3-191 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 TMRP Series Product Description Application Description Features Eaton’s TMRP Series timers combine flexibility with ease of use and installation to make the most versatile timer in our offering. The thumbwheel setting design allows for quick selection and review of up to 10 timing functions and seven timing ranges. The TMRP units can be mounted in a 1/16 DIN cutout or on a DIN rail with our D3 series sockets. Input voltage is 12– 240 Vac/Vdc to work with all popular control voltages. A timing relay is a simple form of time-based control, allowing the user to open or close the contacts based on a specified timing function. The TMRP series is equipped with a set of thumb-wheel style selector switches, which can easily be set to a specific function and time, thereby reducing the number of product variations required. The universal input voltage of 12–240 Vac/Vdc further reduces the number of product variations. ● The TMRP timers are ideal for high-variability operations, such as systems integrators, distributors, and small equipment manufacturers. The flexible enclosure design allows for back-panel mounting, through-panel mounting, or DIN rail mounting. LED Indicator ● ● ● 3 Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in a single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units (SKUs) Universal input voltages from 12–240 Vac/Vdc eliminate the need to order and stock separate coil voltages Timing ranges up to 9990 hours Dual LED indication makes troubleshooting easy LED Description ● ● ● ● Flexible design for backpanel, through-panel (45 mm x 45 mm cutout), or DIN rail mounting SPDT or DPDT contacts with 12A ratings Plastic dust cover keeps out contaminants and eliminates accidental set point changes Use with standard Eaton D3 sockets—see Technical Data and Specifications Supply voltage present Solid red “Output” Relay energized Slowly flashing red “Output” Timing cycle activated, relay not energized Rapidly flashing red “Output” Timing cycle activated, relay energized 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Function Solid green “Input” 3 3 3 3 3 Standards and Certifications ● ● ● 3 UL recognized CE marked RoHS compliant 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-189 3.8 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays Product Selection TMRP Timing Relays TMRP5100 Supply Voltage 3 Description Catalog Number Control switch trigger, DPDT TMRP5100 Control switch trigger, SPDT TMRP5101 Power trigger, DPDT TMRP5102 10-Function 3 12–240 Vac/Vdc 3 3 3 3 Technical Data and Specifications 3 TMRP Timing Relays 3 3 3 3 3 Description TMRP5100 Functions 1 TMRP5101 TMRP5102 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, B, C Time range 0.1 sec to 9,990 hours 0.1 sec to 9,990 hours 0.1 sec to 9,990 hours Input Supply voltage 12–240 Vac/Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc 12–240 Vac/Vdc Supply voltage tolerance ±15% ±15% ±15% Rated consumption 2.5 VA (2W) maximum 2.5 VA (2W) maximum 2.5 VA (2W) maximum Reset time 150 ms 150 ms 150 ms Reverse polarity protection Yes Yes Yes 3 Operate time 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum Release time 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 25 ms maximum 3 Rated surge voltage 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV Contact configuration DPDT SPDT DPDT Contact rating (AC) 12A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508 12A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508 12A resistive at 120, 240 UL 508 Contact rating (DC) 12A resistive at 30 UL 508 12A resistive at 30 UL 508 12A resistive at 30 UL 508 3 Contact rating horsepower 1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac 1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac 1/2 at 120 Vac, 1 at 240 Vac Contact rating pilot duty A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac A300, 720 VA at 240 Vac 3 Minimum load 12V/100 mA 12V/100 mA 12V/100 mA Contact material Silver-nickel 90/10 Silver-nickel 90/10 Silver-nickel 90/10 Contact resistance 100 milliohms max. at 1A 12 Vdc 100 milliohms max. at 1A 12 Vdc 100 milliohms max. at 1A 12 Vdc Mechanical life—full load 10 million operations 10 million operations 10 million operations Electrical life—full load 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 100,000 operations 50 ms minimum 50 ms minimum 50 ms minimum 0.10% at constant voltage and temperature 0.10% at constant voltage and temperature 0.10% at constant voltage and temperature Output 3 3 3 3 3 Control Signal 3 Accuracy Minimum control pulse length Repetition accuracy 3 Physical 3 Ambient temperature –10 to 55°C –10 to 55°C –10 to 55°C Storage temperature –40 to 85°C –40 to 85°C –40 to 85°C 3 Mounting Use with D3PA3 socket Use with D3PA2 socket Use with D3PA2 socket 3 Note 1 Refer to Function Code Cross-Reference Guide on Page V7-T3-171 for function details. 3 3 V7-T3-190 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Timing Relays 3.8 Wiring Diagrams TMRP5100 TMRP5101 Instant if 6–7 Shorted 6 5 7 4 8 3 9 2 10 1 11 5 3 6 2 7 1 3 External Control Switch External Control Switch 4 3 TMRP5102 8 4 6 2 7 3 3 8 3 INPUT 3 1 INPUT 5 3 3 3 INPUT 3 Dimensions 3 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 TMRP Series 3 4 5 2.83 (71.9) 1 OUTPUT TIME SET FUNCTION 0 0 1.76 (44.7) TIME BASE 0 3 8-Pin Octal Base 3 S 3 5 3 8 9 3 3 10 2 3.15 (80.0) 6 0.64 (16.3) 4 0.25 (6.4) 7 A 3 8 R.045 INPUT 1.88 (47.8) 3 7 2 0.06 (1.5) 6 3 1.88 (47.8) 1 11 3 11-Pin Octal Base 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-191 3.9 3 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays Contents D85 Series—Alternating Relays Description 3 Page D85 Series—Alternating Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 3 V7-T3-193 V7-T3-193 V7-T3-194 V7-T3-194 V7-T3-196 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description Alternating relays are used in applications where the optimization of load usage is required by equalizing the run time of two loads. They are also used where additional capacity is required in case of excess load requirements. This alternating action is initiated by a control switch— such as a float switch, manual switch, timing relay, pressure switch or other isolated contact. Each time the initiating switch is opened, the output relay contacts will change state, thus alternating the two loads. Two LED indicators show the status of the output relay. The D851 and D852 Series Relays are used with one control switch and are available in either SPDT or DPDT output configurations with or without a selector switch to lock in one sequence. The D852X Series Relays are available in DPDT cross-wired output configurations for use with one or two control switches (LEAD and LAG). Features The D853 Series is designed for use with three-switch applications (LEAD, LAG and STOP). The D853 Series combines a standard DPDT Cross-Wired alternating relay, contactor auxiliary contacts, and a control relay into one compact and economical product. This saves space and labor, while reducing the number of components needed. The D853 Series uses Sequence On– Simultaneous Off (S.O.S.O.) operation, where the two loads are energized sequentially, but remain on together until the STOP switch is opened. This device also protects against failure of the STOP and LEAD switches. If both switches fail, the two pump motors will be energized simultaneously when the LAG switch is closed. Each of the D85 Series alternating relays is available with an optional threeposition selector switch, which allows the unit to alternate the two loads as normal, or lock the relay to one load or the other. By locking the alternating relay to one load, the other load can be removed for service without rewiring the first load for continuous operation. The selector switch has a low profile to prevent any accidental actuation. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● For duplex loads Works with one-, two-, or three-switch applications Compact plug-in design using industry standard sockets 10A SPDT or DPDT output configurations Optional low profile selector switch to lock in one sequence Two LEDs indicate relay status D853 Series replaces separate components in duplex panel—saving space and reducing labor Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● CE cRUus UL listed 1 RoHS compliant Note 1 When used with appropriate Eaton socket. 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-192 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays 3.9 Product Selection 3 D85 Series—Alternating Relays 1 Output Contacts Control Voltage Socket Catalog Number SPDT 12 Vac 8-pin D851NR SPDT 24 Vac 8-pin D851NT SPDT 120 Vac 8-pin D851NA SPDT 240 Vac 8-pin D851NB SPDT w/selector switch 12 Vac 8-pin D851LR SPDT w/selector switch 24 Vac 8-pin D851LT SPDT w/selector switch 120 Vac 8-pin D851LA SPDT w/selector switch 240 Vac 8-pin D851LB DPDT 12 Vac 11-pin D852NR DPDT 24 Vac 11-pin D852NT DPDT 120 Vac 11-pin D852NA DPDT 240 Vac 11-pin D852NB DPDT w/selector switch 12 Vac 11-pin D852LR DPDT w/selector switch 24 Vac 11-pin D852LT DPDT w/selector switch 120 Vac 11-pin D852LA DPDT w/selector switch 240 Vac 11-pin D852LB DPDT cross-wired 12 Vac 8-pin D852XNR DPDT cross-wired 24 Vac 8-pin D852XNT DPDT cross-wired 120 Vac 8-pin D852XNA DPDT cross-wired 240 Vac 8-pin D852XNB DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 12 Vac 8-pin D852XLR DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 24 Vac 8-pin D852XLT DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 120 Vac 8-pin D852XLA DPDT cross-wired w/selector switch 240 Vac 8-pin D852XLB 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 D85 Series—Alternating Relays Description Standard Pack Catalog Number 8-pin socket 10 D3PA2 11-pin socket 10 D3PA3-A2 Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Contact Eaton for relays for 3-switch applications (Lead-Lag-Stop). 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-193 3.9 3 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays Technical Data and Specifications D85 Series—Alternating Relays 3 Description Specification Voltage tolerance +10%/-15% of control voltage at 50/60 Hz Load (burden) Less than 3 VA 3 Output contacts 10A resistive at 240 Vac / 30 Vdc, 1/2 hp at 120/240 Vac (NO), 1/3 hp at 120/240 Vac (NC) Mechanical life 10,000,000 operations 3 Electrical life 100,000 operations Temperature –20° to 150°F (–28° to 65°C) 3 Transient protection 10,000 volts for 20 microseconds Indicator LEDs 2 LEDs marked LOAD A and LOAD B 3 Optional selector switch settings ALTERNATE, LOCK LOAD A, LOCK LOAD B 3 Wiring Diagrams 3 D851 Series Relays, SPDT 3 3 Input Voltage L2 3 L1 Control Switch D852X Series Relays, DPDT Cross-Wired L2 Input Voltage Input Voltage L1 D853 Series Relays, Three-Switch Applications L1 L2 L2 Stop Control Switch 4 5 4 5 5 3 8 6 7 Lag 8 9 10 3 6 2 7 1 8 1 11 Load A: Pin 2 Load B: Pin 8 3 5 3 2 7 1 3 4 6 2 3 Input Voltage L1 4 3 3 D852 Series Relays, DPDT Lag 3 6 2 Load B Lead Lead Load A Load A Load A: Pins 3 or 11 Load B: Pins 1 or 9 Typical Installations for SPDT and DPDT Alternating Relays, Standard Installation L2 L1 Typical Installations for SPDT and DPDT Alternating Relays, Anti-Bounce Installation L1 L2 3 M2 M2 SPDT 3 3 3 O/L 1 2 M1 8 M2 Control Switch M1 M1 O/L 5 3 4 3 SPDT 1 Off 2 Control Switch 5 3 4 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Load B 7 1 8 In the OFF state (standard installation), the control switch is open, the alternating relay is in the LOAD A position, and both loads (M1 and M2) are off. When the control switch closes, it energizes the first load (M1). The red LED marked “LOAD A” glows. As long as the control switch remains closed, M1 remains energized. When the control switch opens, the first load (M1) is turned off and the alternating relay toggles to the LOAD B position. When the control switch closes again, it energizes the second load (M2). The red LED marked “LOAD B” glows. When the control switch opens, the second load (M2) is turned off, the alternating relay toggles back to the LOAD A position, and the process can be repeated again. On relays with DPDT contacts, two pilot lights can be used for remote indication of LOAD A or LOAD B status. 8 3 To eliminate any bounce condition of the control switch, the addition of a second switch (OFF) along with two auxiliary contacts is recommended as shown in the Anti-Bounce Installation. 3 V7-T3-194 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.9 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Alternating Relays, Standard Installation Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Alternating Relays, Anti-Bounce Installation L1 L1 L2 L2 M2 M2 M1 8 3 M1 O/L 2 Cross-Wired M1 3 Lag Lead 2 O/L 1 7 3 M2 Off Lead 3 3 Cross-Wired Lag 3 8 3 7 3 1 3 6 3 6 3 In the OFF state, both the LEAD control switch and the LAG control switch are open, the alternating relay is in the LOAD A position, and both loads are off. When the LEAD control switch closes, it energizes the first load (M1). The red LED marked “LOAD A” glows. As long as the LEAD control switch remains closed, M1 remains energized. If the LAG control switch closes, it energizes the second load (M2). When the LEAD control switch closes, it turns on the second load (M2). The red LED marked “LOAD B” glows. If the LAG control switch closes, it will energize the first load (M1). When the LAG control switch opens, the first load (M1) is turned off. When the LEAD control switch opens, the second load (M2) is turned off, the alternating relay toggles back to the LOAD A position, and the process can be repeated again. When the LAG control switch opens, the second load (M2) is turned off. When the LEAD control switch opens, the first load (M1) is turned off and the alternating relay toggles to the LOAD B position. To eliminate any bounce condition of the control switch, the addition of a second switch (OFF) along with two auxiliary contacts is recommended as shown in the Anti-Bounce Installation. 3 3 3 3 3 3 Typical Installations for DPDT Cross-Wired Relays for Three-Switch Applications L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 3 Lag Switch M1 8 M1 7 Stop Switch M2 3 M2 4 3 L1 3 3 L2 6 3 M2 Motor 2 3 O/L 1 M1 M2 M1 Lead Switch Motor 1 3 O/L 2 In the OFF state, all three switches are open, the alternating relay is in the LOAD A position, and both loads are off. No action happens with the alternating relay or either load when the STOP switch closes. When the LEAD switch closes, Load #1 (M1) turns on. When the LAG switch closes, Load #2 (M2) turns on. Both loads remain on as long as all three switches are closed. The alternating relay toggles to the LOAD B position. The entire cycle is then repeated, but with Load #2 (M2) energized first followed by Load #1 (M1). This type of operation is known as “Sequence On–Simultaneously Off (S.O.S.O.)”—the two loads are energized sequentially, but remain on together until the STOP switch is opened. When the LAG switch opens, Load #2 (M2) remains on because the STOP switch is still closed. When the LEAD switch opens, Load #1 (M1) remains on because the STOP switch is still closed. When the STOP switch opens, both Load #1 (M1) and Load #2 (M2) are turned off simultaneously. If both the STOP switch and LEAD switch fail to close and turn on the first load, both loads will be turned on simultaneously when the LAG switch is closed. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-195 3.9 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) D85 Series—Alternating Relays 3 3 3 2.4 (60) 3 3 1.7 (43) 3 2.9 (74) 3.1 (79) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-196 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays 3.10 Contents Safety Relays Description Page Safety Relays Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 V7-T3-198 V7-T3-199 V7-T3-202 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description Application Description Features Safety relays are intended to reliably monitor the signals from safety devices at all times and switch off quickly and reliably in an emergency. Single-channel and dual channel versions are available for the construction of safety applications. The internal logic of the safety relays monitors the safety circuits (emergency stop, guard door, and so on) and activates the enable paths in a fault-free condition. Upon actuation of the safety device or in the even of a fault, the enable paths are switched off. Any faults that occur in the control circuit, such as ground fault, cross connection fault or wire breakage are also detected. Eaton’s ESR5 safety relays provide optimal safety and a high degree of reliability on plant machinery. Applications that meet the highest safety requirements in accordance with EN 954-1, EN ISO 13849-1 up to PL e and accordance with IEC 62061 up to SILCL 3 can be realized with the ESR5 safety relay. ● Compatible with a wide variety of safety devices: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Emergency stops Rope pulls Two-hand control stations Light curtain (OSSD) Gate enable device Safety switches ● ● ● ● Use for the highest safety requirements in accordance with EN 954-1 EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061 and EC 61508 Suitable for the world market with UL, cUL certifications and TÜV Rhineland functional safety certifications Applicable for EN 60204 stop categories 0 or 1 Plug-in screw terminals for fast and fault-free replacement Multi-voltage versions (24–230 Vac/Vdc) for a flexible range of application Delayed and non-delayed contact expansions accommodate a wide variety of applications 3 Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● UL 508; CSA C22.2 No 14-95; CE Marked UL/cUL file number: E29184 Degree of protection: IP20 TÜV Rhineland certified UL/cULus listed 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-197 3.10 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Product Selection Safety Relays Technical Overview Safety Safety Output (NO) Output Output (NO) (Delayed) Delay Feedback Control Output Voltage Removable Terminal Type of Blocks Unit Catalog Number 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC — 1 — 230 Vac ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-230VAC — — 1 — 24–230 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC 2 2 0.1–30s — — 24 Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NV3-30 ■ 2 — — 1 — 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Main ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC ■ — 5 — — 1 1 24 Vac/Vdc ■ Expansion ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC ■ — — 4 0.3–3s 1 1 24 Vdc ■ Expansion ESR5-VE3-42 Single Channel Dual Channel ■ — 4 — — ■ ■ 2 — — 3 ■ ■ 3 — — ■ ■ 3 — 3 ■ ■ 3 ■ ■ — 3 3 3 3 Signal Output (NC) 3 Application Overview 3 Emergency Stop Safety Switches Light Curtain/ Two-Hand Control OSSD 1 (EN 574 Type III C) Contact Expansion Off-Delayed Cross Circuit Recognition Monitored Manual Reset 2 Catalog Number ■ ■ — — — — — — ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC ■ ■ — — — — ■ — ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC ■ ■ — — — — ■ — ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ■ ■ — — — — ■ ■ ESR5-NO-31-230VAC ■ ■ — — — — ■ ■ ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC ■ ■ ■ — — ■ ■ ■ ESR5-NV3-30 3 — ■ — ■ — — ■ — ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC — — — — ■ — — — ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC 3 — — — — ■ ■ — — ESR5-VE3-42 3 3 3 3 Application Overview, continued 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Single Channel Dual Channel Stop Category EN 60204 Control Category to EN 954-1 ■ ■ Achievable PL per ISO 13849-1 Achievable SIL per EN IEC 62061 — 0 2 PL d SIL 3 ESR5-NO-41-24VAC-DC ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-21-24VAC-DC ■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-31-230VAC ■ ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NO-31-AC-DC ■ ■ 0/1 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NV3-30 — ■ 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NZ-21-24VAC-DC ■ — 0 4 PL e SIL 3 ESR5-NE-51-24VAC-DC ■ — 1 3 PL d SIL 2 ESR5-VE3-42 Catalog Number Notes 1 Laser scanners or light curtains with OSSD outputs. 2 All main units can also be reset automatically or manually. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-198 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.10 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Technical Data and Specifications 3 Safety Relay Description Unit 3 ESR5-NO-21_ ESR5-NO-41_ ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ESR5-NZ-21_ Standards EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed Type-dependent standards — — — EN 574 Part no. IIIC General 3 3 Lifespan, mechanical—c (contacts) x 106 10 10 10 10 Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 3600 3600 Cold according to EN 60068-2-1, dry heat according to EN60068-2-2, damp heat according to EN 60068-2-3 Dry heat according to EN60068-2-2, damp heat according to EN 60068-2-3 Cold according to EN 60068-2-1, dry heat according to EN60068-2-2, damp heat according to EN 60068-2-3 Dry heat according to EN60068-2-2, damp heat according to EN 60068-2-3 Climatic proofing 3 3 3 3 Ambient temperature °F (°C) –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) Ambient temperature storage °F (°C) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) Mounting position Any Any Any Any 3 Vibration resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-6) 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, amplitude: 0.15 mm 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, amplitude: 0.15 mm 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, amplitude: 0.15 mm 2 g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, amplitude: 0.15 mm 3 Shock resistance (IEC 60068-2-27) — — — — Protection type Housing IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof 3 Terminals Protection against direct contact when actuated from front (IEC 0106 Part 100) Weight kg 0.17 0.22 0.17 0.22 Terminal capacity Solid or flexible mm2 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) Flexible with ferrule mm2 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) Solid or stranded AWG 24–12 24–12 24–12 24–12 Size 2 2 2 2 Flat-blade screwdriver mm 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 Max. tightening torque Nm 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Vac 6000 4000 4000 6000 III/2 III/2 III/2 III/2 Terminal screw Pozidriv screwdriver 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Main Contacts Rated impulse withstand voltage—Uimp 3 Overvoltage category/pollution degree Outside Inside 3 — — — — Rated insulation voltage—Ui Vac 250 250 250 250 Rated operating voltage—Ue Vac 230 230 230 230 230V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 5 4 5 4 230V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 3 3 3 3 3 24V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 6 4 6 4 3 24V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 3 2.5 3 2.5 A 72 72 72 72 A — — — — 72 A2 (6 + 6) 72 A2 (4.2 + 4.2 + 4.2 + 4.2) 72 A2 (4.9 + 4.9 + 4.9) 72 A2 (6 + 6) 10 6 10 6 3 Rated operation current AC-15 3 DC-13 Max. summation current of all poles 24 Vac/Vdc devices 230 Vac devices Square of the total current (and total current) of all current paths Short-circuit protection Max. fuse 3 3 3 3 A gG/gL 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-199 3.10 3 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Safety Relay, continued Description Unit ESR5-NO-21_ ESR5-NO-41_ ESR5-NO-31-24VAC-DC ESR5-NZ-21_ 3 Power Supply Circuit Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz Vac 24 24 24 24 3 Actuating voltage—Us Vdc 24 24 24 24 Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage xe 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 3 Power consumption AC operated 50/60 Hz VA — — — — 3 AC operated 50/60 Hz W 3.4 3.4 3.4 3 DC operated W 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.5 Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof — — — — 3 3 Fuse for control circuit supply 24V 115/230V Control Circuit 3 3 3 3 3 3 Rated output voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated operational current mA S12, S22: 30, S34: 45 S12: 65, S34: 40 S12, S22: 30, S34: 45 S11, S21: 60, Y2: 45 50 22 50 22 Short-circuit current Resistance—R A 2.3 2.3 2.3 2.3 Response time ms 100 65 100 50 Recovery time ms — — — — Response time with reset monitoring—tA1 ms — — — — Response time without reset monitoring—tA2 ms 100 65 100 50 Reset time—tR/tR1 ms Single-channel 45; dual-channel 10 45 Single-channel 45; dual-channel 10 20 Minimum on duration—tM ms — — — — 3 Recovery time—tW ms Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Synchronous monitoring time—tS ms — — — 500 3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 3 Interference immunity According to EN 61000-6-2, EN 62061 According to EN 61000-6-2 According to EN 61000-6-2, EN 62061 According to EN 61000-6-2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-200 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3.10 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Safety Relay, continued Description Unit ESR5-NO-31-230VAC ESR5-NO-31-24V230VAC-DC 3 ESR5-NV3_ ESR5-VE3_ ESR5-NE-51_ 3 General Standards EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, EN ISO 13849-1, IEC 62061, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, IEC 61508, DIN EN 50178, UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed UL/CUL listed 3 Type-dependent standards EN 60204 (if applicable) — 3 3 EN 60204 (if applicable) EN 60204 (if applicable) — Lifespan, mechanical—c (contacts) x 106 10 10 10 10 10 Maximum operating frequency Ops/h 3600 3600 3600 900 3600 Climatic proofing Dry heat according to Dry heat according to Cold in accordance with: Dry heat according to Dry heat according to EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN 60068-2-1, dry heat in EN60068-2-2, damp heat EN60068-2-2, damp heat according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN 60068-2-3 accordance with EN according to EN 60068-2-3 according to EN 60068-2-3 60068-2-2, humidity storage test in accordance with 60068-2-78 Ambient temperature °F (°C) –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) Ambient temperature storage °F (°C) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) –13° to 167° (–25° to 75°) Any –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) Any 3 3 Any Vibration resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-6) 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, 2g, frequency: 10–150 Hz, amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm amplitude: 0.15 mm 3 Shock resistance (IEC 60068-2-27) — — — — — Protection type Housing 3 IP40 IP40 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 3 Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof Finger- and back-of-hand proof 3 Protection against direct contact when actuated from front (IEC 0106 Part 100) Any –4° to 131° (–20° to 55°) 3 Mounting position Terminals Any –4° to 113° (–20° to 45°) 3 Weight kg 0.3 0.3 0.17 0.17 0.22 Terminal capacity Solid or flexible 3 mm2 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 1 x (0.2–2.5) 2 x (0.2–1) 3 Flexible with ferrule mm2 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 1 x (0.25–2.5) 2 x (0.25–1) 3 Solid or stranded AWG 24–12 24–12 24–12 24–12 24–12 Size 2 2 2 2 2 Flat-blade screwdriver mm 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 0.6 x 3.5 Max. tightening torque Nm 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 Rated impulse withstand voltage—Uimp Vac 6000 6000 4000 4000 4000 Overvoltage category/pollution degree Outside III/2 III/2 III/2 III/2 III/2 Terminal screw Pozidriv screwdriver 3 3 3 Main Contacts Inside 3 3 — — — — — Rated insulation voltage—Ui Vac 250 250 250 250 250 Rated operating voltage—Ue Vac 230 230 230 230 230 230V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 4 4 — 5 4 230V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 3 3 3 3 3 24V (360 ops./h)—Ie A 4 4 — 6 4 24V (3600 ops./h)—Ie A 2.5 2.5 3 3 2.5 3 A 50 50 49 50 50 A 50 50 — — — 3 50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4) 50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4) 50 A2 (4 + 4 + 4) 49 A2 (3.5 + 3.5 + 3.5 + 3.5) 50 A2 (3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7 + 3.7) 6 6 10 10 6 3 Rated operation current AC-15 3 3 DC-13 Max. summation current of all poles 24 Vac/Vdc devices 230 Vac devices Square of the total current (and total current) of all current paths Short-circuit protection Max. fuse A gG/gL Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-201 3.10 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Control Relays and Timers Safety Relays Safety Relay, continued Description Unit ESR5-NO-31-230VAC ESR5-NO-31-24V230VAC-DC ESR5-NV3_ ESR5-VE3_ ESR5-NE-51_ Power Supply Circuit Actuating voltage 50/60 Hz Vac 230 24–230 — — 24 Actuating voltage—Us Vdc — 230 24 24 24 Voltage tolerance pick-up voltage xe 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.85–1.1 0.8–1.1 — Power consumption AC operated 50/60 Hz VA — — — — AC operated 50/60 Hz W 5.8 5.8 — — 2.2 DC operated W 2.9 2.9 1.8 2 2.2 — Short-circuit proof — — — Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof — — — Fuse for control circuit supply 24V 115/230V 3 Control Circuit Rated output voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24 24 3 Rated operational current mA S10, S12, S22: 35, S34, S35: 45 S10, S12, S22: 35, S34, S35: 45 S12, S22: 3.5, S34, S35: 7 A1, A2: 84, K1/K2: 5 A1, A2: 92 3 Resistance—R 11 11 500 — — Short-circuit current A 0.7 0.7 0.1 — — 3 Response time ms 250 250 150 20 20 Recovery time ms — — — — — 3 Response time with reset monitoring—tA1 ms 60 60 150 20 20 3 Response time without reset monitoring—tA2 ms 250 250 150 20 20 3 Reset time—tR/tR1 ms 20 20 20 (non-delayed enable paths); 100 (min. delayed enable paths) 0.3–3 s (+50%) adjustable 20 3 3 3 3 Minimum on duration—tM ms — — — — — Recovery time—tW ms Approx. 1000 Approx. 1000 Approx. 330 Approx. 1000 — Synchronous monitoring time—tS ms — — — — — Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-4 Interference immunity According to EN 61000-6-2 According to EN 61000-6-2 According to EN 61000-6-2, According to EN 62061 EN 61000-6-2 According to EN 61000-6-2 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 3 3 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3 3 Safety Relays, Contact Expansion Modules ESR5_ 24 Vac/Vdc 0.88 (22.5) ESR5_ 230 Vac 3 3 3 1.77 (45.0) 4.51 (114.5) 3.06 3.90 (77.6) (99.0) 3.26 2.62 (82.8) (66.5) 4.51 (114.5) 3.06 3.90 (77.6) (99.0) 3.26 2.62 (82.8) (66.5) 3 3 0.26 (6.6) 3 3.74 (95.1) 0.26 (6.6) 3.74 (95.1) 3 V7-T3-202 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers easySafety 3.11 Contents easySafety Description Page easySafety Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 V7-T3-204 V7-T3-204 V7-T3-205 V7-T3-208 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Description Application Description The easySafety control relay for safety-related applications monitors all commonly used safety devices and also takes over the required control tasks for the machine. Packed with a host of conventional safety relays in the form of safety function blocks, easySafety not only features integrated safety functions but also standard functions in a single device—all in one. Because of the large number of safety function blocks, the user can tackle a large number of application options with only one device. The user can also respond directly to future and changing application requirements. This saves financial resources and offers future investment security. Last but not least, it reduces the stock-keeping required for special safety relays. The easySafety meets the requirements of Category 4 to EN 954‐1, PL e to EN ISO 13849‐1, SILCL 3 to EN IEC 62061 and SIL 3 to EN IEC 61508. With easySafety, it is possible to implement applications meeting the most stringent safety requirements. In addition to the safety circuit diagram containing the safety configuration, the safety control relay also contains a standard circuit diagram. This circuit diagram can be used for standard tasks, such as the processing of diagnostics signals or general control tasks of a machine. 3 Features Safety function blocks: ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Emergency stop Guard door monitoring with and without interlock/ guard locking Two-hand control (EN 574) Electro-sensitive protective devices (light curtains) Light curtain muting Enable switch Start device Operating mode selector Safety timing relay Overspeed monitoring Feedback loop monitoring (EDM) Zero speed monitoring ● ● ● ● All-in-one: Safety and control functions combined in one device Simple configuration through prefabricated and tested safety components Direct state display and increased machine availability due to fast error diagnosis through integrated display Multistep password concept prevents unwanted manipulation Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product standards: CE marked; UL 508; CSA C22.20.4-04; CSA 22.2 No. 142-MI1987 UL CCN: NRAQ CSA File No. 012528 CSA Class No. 2252-81 and 2252-01 TÜV Rhineland certified Degree of Protection IEC: IP20 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T3-203 3.11 3 3 Control Relays and Timers easySafety Product Selection easySafety easySafety Relays 1 Inputs (Safety) Outputs (Safety) Outputs (Safety) Outputs (Safety) Digital 6A Relay Transistor Test Signal Display + Keypad Catalog Number 3 14 1 (redundant) 4 4 — ES4P-221-DMXX1 14 1 (redundant) 4 4 Yes ES4P-221-DMXD1 3 14 4 — 4 — ES4P-221-DRXX1 14 4 — 4 Yes ES4P-221-DRXD1 3 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories easySoft 3 Programming Software Memory Card Memory Card Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number easySoft-Safety (including easySoftPro) 2 ESP-SOFT 256 kB module ES4A-MEM-CARD1 3 Programming Cables 3 3 Input/Output Simulator Input/Output Simulator Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number SUB-D Cable SUB-D, nine-pole, serial, 2m EASY800-PC-CAB With plug-in power supply unit 100–240 Vac/24 Vdc ES4A-221-DMX-SIM USB Cable USB, 2m EASY800-USB-CAB 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Notes 1 EN 954-1: 1996, Category 4. EN ISO 13849-1: 2006, PL e (Performance Level). IEC 61508: 1998, SIL 3 (Safety Integrity Level). IEC 62061: 2005, SILCL 3 (Safety Integrity Level Claim Limit). Expandable: standard inputs/outputs and standard bus systems. 24 Vdc supply voltage. 2 Operating systems: Windows® 2000 SP4, Windows XP SP1, Windows Vista (32 bit). 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-204 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers easySafety 3.11 Technical Data and Specifications 3 easySafety Relay Description Unit 3 ES4P_ General Standards 3 EN 55011, EN 55022, IEC/EN 61000-4, IEC 60068-2-6, IEC 60068-2-27, EN 954-1: Category 4, EN ISO 13849-1: PL e, EN IEC 62061: SILCL 3, EN IEC 61508: SIL 3 Dimensions (W x H x D) mm Mounting 3 107.5 (6 space units) x 90 x 72 Top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm or screw fixing using fixing brackets ZB4-101-GF1 (accessories) Times 3 3 Inputs Maximum duration of external test pulse ms 1 Semi-conductor output Off test pulse ms <1 ms <0.15 3 Solid mm2 0.2–4 (AWG 22–12) 3 Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.2–2.5 (AWG 22–12) Standard screwdriver mm 3.5 x 0.8 Maximum tightening torque Nm 0.6 3 °C –25 to +55, low temperatures to IEC 60068-2-1, high temperatures to IEC 60068-2-2 3 Switch-off delay 3 Terminal Capacity 3 Ambient Climatic Conditions Operating ambient temperature Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures LCD display (clearly legible) °C 0 to +55 Storage °C –40 to +70 Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 5 to 95 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795 to 1080 3 3 3 Ambient Mechanical Conditions Protection type, IEC/EN 60529 IP20 Vibrations (IEC/EN 60068-2-6) Constant amplitude 0.15 mm Constant acceleration, 2g Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Shocks Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 Drop Hz 10 to 57 Hz 57 to 150 3 3 18 mm Mounting position 3 50 3 Horizontal/vertical Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) According to IEC/EN 61000-6-2 Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61000-4-2, Level 3, ESD) Air discharge Contact discharge 3 kV 8 kV 6 Radio interference suppression (EN 55011) Power pulses (surge) (IEC/EN 61000-4-5, Level 2) 3 3 EN 55011 Class B, EN 55022 Class B kV 1 (supply cables, symmetrical) 3 Insulation Resistance Overvoltage category/pollution degree III/2 Clearance in air and creepage distances EN 50178, UL 508, CSA C22.2, No. 142, EN 60664-1:2003 Insulation resistance EN 50178 3 3 Backup/Accuracy of the Real-Time Clock Accuracy of the real-time clock s/day Normally ±5 (±0.5 h/year) % ±0.02 3 ms 5 3 s 1 3 Repetition Accuracy of Timing Relays in Standard Circuit Accuracy of timing relay (of value) Resolution Range “S” Range “M:S” 3 Retentive Memory Write cycles of the retentive memory (minimum) 10,000,000,000 (1010) (read/write cycles) Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 V7-T3-205 3.11 3 Control Relays and Timers easySafety easySafety Relay, continued Description Unit ES4P_ 3 Power Supply V 24 Vdc (–15/+20%) 3 Permissible range Vdc 20.4 to 28.8 Ripple % 3 3 3 Rated operational voltage Ue 5 Interfaces EASYNet (CAN-based) Bus termination (first and last station) Yes Control operating mode EASYNet Number of users Maximum 8 NET Network 3 Stations Number Maximum 8 Data transfer rate/distance 1000 Kbit/s, 6m 500 Kbit/s, 25m 250 Kbit/s, 60m 125 Kbit/s, 125m 50 Kbit/s, 300m 20 Kbit/s, 700m 10 Kbit/s, 1000m Bus lengths greater than 40m can only be achieved with enhanced cross-section conductors and terminal adapters 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Potential isolation From power supply Yes From the inputs Yes From the outputs Yes From the PC interface, memory card, NET network, EASYLink Yes Bus termination (first and last station) Yes Terminal type RJ45 Digital Inputs 24 Vdc Number 14 3 Inputs can be used as analog inputs — Status display LCD display (if provided) 3 Potential isolation From power supply No 3 Between digital inputs From the outputs No Yes 3 From PC interface, memory card, EASYLink No From network EASYNet Yes 3 Rated operational voltage Ue Vdc At signal “0” Ue Vdc <5 3 At signal “1” Ue Vdc >15 24 Clock Outputs 3 Number Voltage 3 Electrical isolation 4 Vdc 24 No 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-206 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Control Relays and Timers easySafety 3.11 easySafety Relay, continued Description Unit 3 ES4P_ Relay Outputs Number 3 4 for ES4P-…-DR_, 1 redundant for ES4P-…-DM_ 3 Outputs in groups of 1 Parallel switching of outputs to increase power Not permissible Protection of an output relay Fuse: 6A gG, circuit breaker with characteristic C: 24 Vdc 4A, Short-circuit current <250A 3 Yes 3 Potential isolation From power supply From the inputs Yes From PC interface, memory card, EASYNet, EASYLink Basic insulation Lifespan, mechanical Operations Contacts Conventional thermal current Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp contact coil Rated operational voltage Rated insulation voltage DC-13, 24 Vdc, 5A, 0.1 Hz Vac 300 Vac 600 x 106 10 A 6 3 3 3 kV 6 Ue Vac 250 Ui Vac 250 Vac 300 Safe isolation to EN 50178 between coil and contact Making capacity AC-15, 230 Vac, 3A 3 Yes Safe isolation according to EN 50178 3 3 Operations 80,000 Operations 40,000 3 x 106 10 3 Hz 10 Switching frequency Mechanical operations Switching frequency UL/CSA UL 508 3 B300/R300 3 Transistor Outputs Number 4 3 Rated operational voltage Ue Vdc 24 Permissible range Ue Vdc 20.4–28.8 Ripple % Protection against polarity reversal Potential isolation From power supply Yes (Caution: A short-circuit will result if 0V or GND is applied to the outputs in the event that the supply voltage is connected to the wrong poles.) 3 Yes 3 From the inputs Yes From PC interface, memory card, network, EASYNet, EASYLink Yes Rated operational current at signal “1” DC At signal “1” with Ie = 0.5A Ie A V Short-circuit protection Short-circuit tripping current for RA 10 m ohms A 3 Maximum 0.5 U = Ue –1 V 3 Yes, thermal 3 0.7 Ie Total short-circuit current A 8 Peak short-circuit current A 16 Ops/h 40,000 Thermal cutout 3 5 2 per output 3 3 Yes Maximum operating frequency at constant resistive load RL <100 kO (dependant on program and load) Parallel connection of outputs No Status indication of the outputs LCD display (if provided) Inductive load Without external suppressor circuit Duty factor 3 3 3 T0.95 ≈ 3 x T0.65 = 3 x L/R T0.95 = Time in ms, until 95% of the steady-state current has been reached 3 With external suppressor circuit Utilization factor g 1 Duty factor % DF 100 Maximum switching frequency, maximum duty factor Operations 3 Depending on the suppressor circuit Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 3 V7-T3-207 3.11 3 Dimensions 3 ESR5_ Control Relays and Timers easySafety Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 3 3 3 3 1.77 (45.0) 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 3 3 3 1.87 (47.5) 3 2.68 (68.0) 4.23 (107.5) 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V7-T3-208 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products 4.1 ELC Series PLCs ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC Series PLCs 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 V7-T4-5 V7-T4-14 V7-T4-16 V7-T4-18 V7-T4-18 V7-T4-24 V7-T4-25 V7-T4-26 V7-T4-26 V7-T4-28 V7-T4-31 V7-T4-34 V7-T4-50 V7-T4-52 V7-T4-53 V7-T4-53 V7-T4-53 V7-T4-54 V7-T4-55 V7-T4-56 V7-T4-56 V7-T4-57 V7-T4-57 XI/ON Series Remote I/O Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XV Series HMI-PLCs Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XI/ON Series Distributed I/O V7-T4-4 XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV Series HMI-PLC V7-T4-3 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC152 Series PLCs V7-T4-2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-58 V7-T4-59 V7-T4-60 V7-T4-62 V7-T4-66 V7-T4-75 V7-T4-76 V7-T4-89 V7-T4-101 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note: For EASY Programmable Relays, see Tab 3 in this volume. 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-1 4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description 4 Page ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection ELCB Brick Style PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELCM Modular Brick PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Modular PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Master Communication Modules . . . . ELC Distributed I/O Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-3 V7-T4-4 V7-T4-5 V7-T4-6 V7-T4-8 V7-T4-10 V7-T4-11 V7-T4-12 V7-T4-14 V7-T4-16 V7-T4-18 V7-T4-18 4 4 Product Overview 4 Controllers 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 There are five controller styles: ELCB Brick-Style Controllers The ELCB controllers are the simplest and most affordable members of the ELC portfolio. With ELCB, the focus is on “just enough control” for applications up to 40 I/O points. These controllers pack a lot into a small, low-profile package. Like the ELCM controllers, these controllers are AC powered and provide 24 Vdc sensor power. But unlike the rest of the ELC family, the ELCB controllers do not offer expansion I/O. The ELCB is great as a standalone controller, or is capable of networking with other controllers, operator interfaces, drives, or other Modbus® serial devices. 4 4 4 ELCM Modular Brick-Style Controllers The next member of the ELC portfolio of controllers is the ELCM. This midrange family comprises “brick-style” controllers, with expansion I/O modules. These all-in-one controllers combine inputs, outputs, logic processing, and an integrated AC power supply into a compact package—but also provide the means to expand as applications change or grow. The controller also provides 24 Vdc power for sensors, eliminating the space, wiring, and expense of an additional power supply. And with three communication ports, the ELCM is able to interface into a local operator interface, connect to other controllers or supervisory computers, and still maintain an open port for programming. ELC Modular Controllers The ELC lineup is focused on compact size, powerful features, and affordability. Whether your needs involve discrete standalone control, necessitate distributed control networks, or even a control system, using centralized control with distributed I/O, ELCs provide the solution your application demands. While the ELCs are perfectly suited for small applications of <40 I/O with a diverse mix of I/O, they can also expand to hundreds of I/O points when needed. These controllers are modular, with a wide range of digital, analog, thermocouple, RTD, and even motion expansion modules. Despite a worldclass small footprint—with controllers as small as 1.00inch wide, these controllers perform like much larger PLCs. With online editing, high-speed processing (basic instructions as fast as 0.24 microseconds), multiple highspeed inputs/outputs (up to 200 kHz), and multiple independent master communication channels, these controllers excel where only the largest PLCs could go only a few years ago. Electrical/EMC ESD Immunity ● 8 kV air discharge ● ● EFT Immunity ● Power Line: 2 kV ● Digital I/O: 1 kV ● Analog and Communication I/O: 250V ● Damped-Oscillatory Wave ● Power Line: 1 kV ● Digital I/O: 1 kV ● RS Immunity ● 26 MHz–1 GHz, 10 V/m Standards and Certifications 4 ● ● 4 ● cULus CE; C-Tick RoHS 4 4 V7-T4-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Product Selection Guide 4 ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 4 4 4 Model Product Description 4 ELCB Brick Style PLCs ELCM Modular Brick PLCs ELC Modular PLCs Page V7-T4-5 Page V7-T4-6 Page V7-T4-8 Compact and economical PLCs ● Digital I/O only ● 10, 14, 20, 30 or 40 I/O controllers ● 24 Vdc inputs ● Relay or transistor outputs ● Non-expandable I/O ● Built-in 110 Vac power supply ● On board 400 mA 24 Vdc sensor power ● RS-232 programming port ● RS-485 Modbus serial port ● DIN rail or panel mount Expandable brick PLCs ● Digital, analog, thermocouple and RTD I/O ● 16, 20, 24, 32 or 40 I/O base controllers ● 8 and 16 digital I/O expansion modules ● 2, 4 and 6 analog I/O expansion modules ● 24 Vdc inputs ● Relay or transistor outputs ● Built-in 110 Vac power supply ● On board 400 mA 24 Vdc sensor power ● RS-232 programming port ● Two RS-485 Modbus serial ports ● DIN rail or panel mount Modular and expandable PLCs with distributed I/O capability ● Digital, analog, thermocouple and RTD I/O ● 10, 12, 14 and 28 I/O base controllers ● 6, 8 or 16 digital I/O expansion modules ● 2, 4 and 6 analog I/O expansion modules ● 24 Vdc and 110 Vac inputs ● Relay or transistor outputs ● High current relay output module ● High speed pulse capture and high speed pulse output up to 200 kHz ● Two RS-485 Modbus serial ports ● DIN rail mounting only ● Distributed I/O adapters for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS-DP and RS-485 4 Features Input voltage 120 Vac 120 Vac 24 Vdc Maximum local I/O points 40 264 252 Built-in power supply Yes Yes No Built-in 24 Vdc sensor power supply Yes Yes No DC inputs Yes Yes Yes AC inputs No No Yes Transistor outputs Yes Yes Yes Relay outputs Yes Yes Yes High current relay outputs No No Yes Clock/calendar No No Yes Expandable No Yes Yes Removable terminal blocks No Yes Yes Built-in display No No Yes RS-232 communication ports 1 1 1 RS-485 communication ports 1 2 1 High speed counters No Yes Yes Analog I/O No Yes Yes Thermocouple module No Yes Yes Platinum RTD module No Yes Yes Single axis motion control module No No Yes DeviceNet master No No Yes Ethernet (Modbus TCP) master No No Yes Distributed I/O adapters No No Yes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-3 4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers System Overview DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL 14 DIGITAL 13 ANALOG 12 ANALOG 11 ANALOG 10 ANALOG 9 ANALOG 8 ANALOG 7 ANALOG 6 ANALOG 5 ANALOG ELC-COENETM 4 ANALOG ELC-COENETM 3 ANALOG ELC-COENETM 2 ANALOG ELC-COENETM 1 ANALOG 1 ANALOG 2 ANALOG 3 ANALOG 4 ELC-PV 5 ELC-COENETM 4 6 ELC-COENETM 4 7 ELC-COENETM 4 8 ELC-COENETM Configuration and Layout 4 4 Left Side Bus Modules — Up to 8 modules 4 4 ELC-CAENET 4 4 4 Ethernet I/O Adapters — Up to 4 adapter modules per master 4 Right Side Bus Modules — Up to 8 analog modules — Up to 14 digital modules 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection 4 ELCB Brick Style PLCs Features ● Basic PLC logic with just enough I/O for simple DC in/relay or transistor out applications 4 ● This non-expandable PLC has a built-in AC power supply and provides up to 400 mA of DC sensor power ● Each controller supports one RS-232 programming port and one RS-485 Modbus serial (master/ slave) port 4 4 4 Controllers 4 ELCB – PB 10 N N D R 4 Device Types PB = Base model I/O Count xx = Total number of I/O (10, 14, 20, 30, 40) Analog Inputs N = None Analog Outputs N = None Digital Inputs D = DC Digital Outputs T = Transistor R = Relay 4 4 4 ELCB-PB10NNDR Controllers Inputs 4 Outputs Description AC DC Analog Relay NPN Sinking Transistor Analog Catalog Number 10 I/O — 6 — 4 — — ELCB-PB10NNDR — 6 — — 4 — ELCB-PB10NNDT — 8 — 6 — — ELCB-PB14NNDR — 8 — — 6 — ELCB-PB14NNDT — 12 — 8 — — ELCB-PB20NNDR — 12 — — 8 — ELCB-PB20NNDT — 18 — 12 — — ELCB-PB30NNDR — 18 — — 12 — ELCB-PB30NNDT — 24 — 16 — — ELCB-PB40NNDR — 24 — — 16 — ELCB-PB40NNDT 14 I/O 20 I/O 30 I/O 40 I/O 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-5 4.1 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers ELCM Modular Brick PLCs Features ● Midrange brick style controller with digital, analog, thermocouple and RTD expansion capability 4 4 ● Expansion modules can optionally be used to increase the total number of I/O, to provide a mix of different types of I/O, or both ● Each controller supports two RS-485 Modbus serial (master/node) and one RS232 programming port ELCM – PA 16 A A D R 4 4 These controllers include an embedded AC power supply and provide up to 400 mA of DC sensor power Controllers 4 4 ● PH PA AN EX PT TC Device Types = High-speed model = Analog model = Analog expansion module = Digital expansion module = Platinum rtd expansion module = Thermocouple expansion module I/O Count xx = Total number of I/O (16, 24, 32, 40 digital; 20 analog and digital) Analog Inputs A = Analog N = None Analog Outputs A = Analog N = None Digital Inputs A = AC D = DC N = None Digital Outputs T = Transistor R = Relay N = None 4 4 ELCM-PH16NNDR Controllers Inputs 4 Description 4 16 I/O PH model AC Outputs DC Analog Relay NPN Sinking Transistor Analog Catalog Number — 8 — 8 — — ELCM-PH16NNDR — 8 — — 8 — ELCM-PH16NNDT 24 I/O PH model — 16 — 8 — — ELCM-PH24NNDR — 16 — — 8 — ELCM-PH24NNDT 32 I/O PH model — 16 — 16 — — ELCM-PH32NNDR — 16 — — 16 — ELCM-PH32NNDT 4 40 I/O PH model — 24 — 16 — — ELCM-PH40NNDR — 24 — — 16 — ELCM-PH40NNDT 4 20 I/O PA model — 8 4 6 — 2 ELCM-PA20AADR — 8 4 — 6 2 ELCM-PA20AADT 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Right Side Digital Expansion Modules Inputs 4 Outputs Description AC DC Sink/Source Relay NPN Sinking Transistor Catalog Number 8 DC input module — 8 — — ELCM-EX08NNDN 16 DC input module — 16 — — ELCM-EX16NNDN 8 Relay output module — — 8 — ELCM-EX08NNNR 16 Relay output module — — 16 — ELCM-EX16NNNR 8 Transistor output module — — 8 — ELCM-EX08NNNT 16 Transistor output module — — 16 — ELCM-EX16NNNT 8 DC input/relay output module — 4 4 — ELCM-EX08NNDR 16 DC input/relay output module — 8 8 — ELCM-EX16NNDR 8 DC input/output module — 4 — 4 ELCM-EX08NNDT 16 DC input/output module — 8 — 8 ELCM-EX16NNDT 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Right Side Analog and Specialty Modules Description Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Catalog Number 4 Analog input module 4 — ELCM-AN04ANNN 2 Analog input module — 2 ELCM-AN02NANN 4 Analog input module — 4 ELCM-AN04NANN 6 Analog input/output module 4 2 ELCM-AN06AANN 4 Thermocouple input module (J, K, R, S, T) 4 — ELCM-TC04ANNN 4 Platinum RTD input module (PT100) 4 — ELCM-PT04ANNN 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-7 4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers ELC Modular PLCs 4 Features ● PB Base Model— ● 14 I/O (8i/6o) ● Over 130 instructions ● Two Modbus (ASCII/RTU) serial ports for master/ slave communications ● RS-485 master port with the ability to communicate to 31 other devices ● The master port can also be configured to communicate to devices such as ASCII, bar code readers, and so on ● EEPROM program retention in the event of power loss 4 Note: This model does not provide a real-time clock 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 ● ● PC Clock/Calendar Model ● 12 I/O (8i/4o) ● Same features as the basic model plus clock/calendar ● Distributed I/O capability with up to 16 devices ● File area for data storage and retrieval ● RAM program memory with battery backup ● Replaceable battery has greater than a 5-year life ● Two digital potentiometers that vary the data in internal registers PH High-Speed Model ● 12 I/O (8i/4o) ● All the features of the PC model ● High speed pulse capture up to 100 kHz ● Single-axis motion control ● PA Analog Model ● 10 I/O (6i/4o) ● Same features as PC model with a different I/O mix ● Four digital inputs, two digital outputs, two analog inputs, and two analog outputs ● Analog channels can be set up for either voltage or current ● Two 7-segment LEDs that can be used to display unit ID, error codes, process steps, and so on ● PV Advanced Model ● 28 I/O (16i/12o) ● The PV model has the most extensive features ● Programs written for the other controllers can be migrated to a PV model controller where greater speed or more I/O is required ● 10 times increase in processing speed for about 0.24μ seconds/step ● RAM program storage and backed using a rechargeable lithium-ion battery that charges with normal use ● Includes 2-axis motion control ● Additional expansion bus to the left of the controller ● Add high-speed and specialty modules to the left ● Left side Ethernet master and DeviceNet master modules are available for use with the PV model controller 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Controllers and Modules 4 ELC - PA 10 A A D R PB = PC = PA = PV = Device Type Base model Clock/calendar model Analog model Advanced model I/O Count xx = Total number of I/O 4 Digital Inputs A = AC D = DC (sink or source) Digital Outputs T = Transistor (NPN) P = Transistor (PNP) R = Relay 4 4 4 Analog Inputs A = Analog N = None Analog Outputs A = Analog N = None 4 4 ELC-PV_ Controllers (PB, PC, PH, PV, PA) Description ELC-PB model and 14 I/O built-in ELC-PC model and 12 I/O built-in ELC-PA model and 10 I/O built-in ELC-PV model and 28 I/O built-in Inputs 4 Outputs Analog High Speed I/O Max. Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number 4 4 (8) 24 Vdc (6) Relay, 1.5A — (2) 20 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PB14NNDR (8) 24 Vdc (6) Transistor, 100 mA — (2) 20 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PB14NNDT (8) 24 Vdc (4) Relay, 1.5A — (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNDR (8) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor, 100 mA — (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNDT (4) 24 Vdc (2) Relay, 1.5A (2) In and (2) Out (1) 30 kHz inputs 210 mA ELC-PA10AADR (4) 24 Vdc (2) Relay, 1.5A (2) In and (2) Out (1) 30 kHz inputs 210 mA ELC-PA10AADT (16) 24 Vdc (12) Relay, 1.5A — (2) 200 kHz inputs 220 mA ELC-PV28NNDR (16) 24 Vdc (12) Transistor, 100 mA — (2) 200 kHz inputs 220 mA ELC-PV28NNDT 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-9 4.1 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers ELC Master Communication Modules ELC Master Communication Modules ELC - CO ENETM 4 Device Type CO = Communication interface module 4 Module Type DNETM = DeviceNet master module 1 ENETM = Ethernet master module 1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Ethernet Master Communication Module (Left Side Bus) Features ● Ethernet communication module ● Enables the ELC-PV model controller to connect to Modbus TCP networks auto detecting 10/100MB connections ● Enables the uploading and downloading of programs in addition to program monitoring ● ● ● Use ELCSoft to search for all the Ethernet modules attached to the network and manage them remotely Share data in a peer-to-peer network to reduce long I/O wiring Send e-mails for alerts and notifications. For example, advise personnel of alarm condition or send daily production yield summaries 4 4 ELC-COENETM 4 4 ● ● ● Keep accurate time with the NTP (Network Time Protocol) feature, which synchronizes your controller with an NTP server The Ethernet module will automatically detect and use the type of patch or crossover cable attached IP addresses may be filtered to manage module traffic in order to maximize communication performance. Ethernet Master Communication Module (Left Side Bus) Description Inputs Points Type Outputs Points Catalog Number Ethernet Modbus TCP (master/slave) N/A Modbus TCP N/A ELC-COENETM 4 4 4 DeviceNet Master Communication Module (Left Side Bus) 4 Features ● DeviceNet master module maps up to 380 bytes of data directly into the PV model controller for quick and easy access ● Use Polled, Bit-Strobe and Change of State/Cyclic DeviceNet commands, or send explicit messages 4 4 4 4 4 ELC-CODNETM 4 ● ● Configuration of DeviceNet components in ELCSoft is easy with the drag-anddrop interface Use the pre-populated EDS files within ELCSoft and add others to simplify the configuration DeviceNet Master Communication Module (Left Side Bus) Description Inputs Points Type Outputs Points Catalog Number DeviceNet Scanner (master/slave) 190 bytes DeviceNet 190 bytes ELC-CODNETM 4 4 4 4 Note 1 Left side bus communications module—for use with ELC-PV controllers only. V7-T4-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 ELC Distributed I/O Adapters Features ● Combine with ELC expansion modules to create distributed I/O racks for different PLC networks ● Use ELC-CAENET and ELC-COENETM to create distributed I/O racks to the ELC-PV controllers 4 ● ● Connect cost effective ELC expansion modules to third-party PLCs using standard networks EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS-DP and Modbus serial RS-485 distributed I/O adapters ● 4 Connect up to 8 analog expansion modules or 14 digital expansion modules 4 4 4 4 ELC Distributed I/O Adapters 4 ELC – CA ENET 4 Device Type CA = Distributed I/O adapter ENET DNET RS485 PBDP = = = = Module Type EtherNet/IP or Modbus TCP I/O adapter DeviceNet I/O adapter Modbus serial RS-485 I/O adapter PROFIBUS-DP I/O adapter 4 4 4 ELC-CAENET 4 Distributed I/O Adapter Modules Description Catalog Number EtherNet/IP or Modbus TCP I/O adapter ELC-CAENET Modbus serial RS-485 I/O adapter ELC-CARS485 DeviceNet I/O adapter ELC-CADNET PROFIBUS-DP I/O adapter ELC-CAPBDP 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-11 4.1 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) Expansion Modules ELC - EX 16 N N D P 4 4 Device Type AN = Analog expansion module EX = Digital expansion module PT = Platinum RTD expansion module TC = Thermocouple expansion module 4 I/O Count xx = Total number of I/O A= D= S= N= 4 Analog Inputs A = Analog N = None 4 Digital Inputs AC DC (sink or source) Switch None T= P= R= I= N= Digital Outputs Transistor (NPN) Transistor (PNP) Relay Relay—high current None Analog Outputs A = Analog N = None 4 4 4 4 4 Features ● Digital right side expansion modules can be used with any ELC controller ● They simply snap together to allow the ELC backplane to pass through each connected module ● ● Add only the amount of I/O you need Choose I/O counts as small as 6 points and as large as 14 points per module ● ● I/O modules are available in a broad selection of AC/DC inputs, relay/transistor and high current outputs that may be used together in any combination Maximum of 14 modules per controller 4 4 ELC-EX08NNDN 4 4 4 4 4 ELC-EX08NNDT Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) 1 of 2 Outputs Inputs 8 DC input module (8) 24 Vdc — 50 mA ELC-EX08NNDN 8 AC input module (8) 110 Vac — 50 mA ELC-EX08NNAN 8 Transistor output module — (8) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNNT 8 Relay output module — (8) Relay, 1.5A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNNR Outputs Max. Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) 2 of 2 Description 4 Catalog Number Description 4 4 Max. Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Inputs 8 DC input/output module (4) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNDT 8 DC input/relay output module (4) 24 Vdc (4) Relay, 1.5A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNDR 6 High current relay output module — (6) Relay, 6A 70 mA ELC-EX06NNNI 4 16 DC input module (16) 24 Vdc — 100 mA ELC-EX16NNDN 16 DC input/output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 90 mA ELC-EX16NNDT 4 16 DC input/output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Transistor (source), 0.3A 100 mA ELC-EX16NNDP 16 DC input/relay output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Relay, 1.5A 90 mA ELC-EX16NNDR 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers ELC-AN04ANNN Analog Input and Output Modules (Right Side Bus) Analog input/output modules uses voltage or current mode for any channel—see table for resolution based on type and mode. 4 4 Output Points Resolution Mode Maximum Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) ±10V ±20 mA — — — 90 mA ELC-AN04ANNN 4 — — 2 12 bit 0–20 mA; 4–20 mA 0–10V; 2–10V 125 mA ELC-AN02NANN 4 — — — 2 12 bit 0–20 mA; 4–20 mA 0–10V; 2–10V 170 mA ELC-AN04NANN 4 4 V = 12 bit I = 11 bit ±10V ±20 mA 2 12 bit 0–20 mA 0–10V 170 mA ELC-AN06AANN 4 Description Input Points 4 Analog input module Resolution Mode 4 V = 12 bit I = 13 bit 2 Analog output module — 4 Analog output module 6 Analog input/output module Catalog Number 4 4 ELC-PT04ANNN Temperature Input Modules (Right Side Bus) Thermocouple and Platinum RTD temperature sensor input modules with 14 bit resolution. 4 Resolution Sensor Type Maximum Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number 4 — J, K, R, S, T 90 mA ELC-TC04ANNN 4 14 bit PT100 90 mA ELC-PT04ANNN Description Input Points 4 Thermocouple input module 4 Platinum RTD input module 4 4 4 4 ELC-MC01 ELC-485APTR Motion Control Module (Right Side Bus) Single axis motion control module—up to 8 modules can be added to controllers. If used with PH controller, it can provide a second axis since the PH controller has a single axis built-in. If used with the PV controller, it can provide a third axis since the PV incorporated two axis of motion control and is capable of output pules up to 200 kHz 4 4 4 Description Input Type Output Type Catalog Number 4 Single axis motion control module Phase in, start, stop, and so on Phase, pulse, direction ELC-MC01 4 4 RS-485 Adapter Module (Right Side Bus—End Module) Passive RS-485 connection device module. RJ12 port for connecting to a drive. 2-pin screw terminal to connect to ELC controller. Male and female DB9 connectors to connect to other RS-485 devices. 4 4 Description Connector Types Catalog Number RS-485 Connect adapter module RJ12, DB9 (male and female), 2-pin screw terminals ELC-485APTR 4 4 4 ELC-EX08NNSN Toggle Switch Input Module (Right Side Bus) 8 input switch module for manual switch inputs to the ELC controllers—used for debugging applications or product training demonstrations 4 4 Description Maximum Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number 8 Toggle switch input module 20 mA ELC-EX08NNSN 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-13 4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Accessories Power Supplies 4 4 All ELC controllers, analog and specialty expansion modules operate from 24 Vdc. 4 4 ELC-PS01 4 4 These power supplies provide a convenient way to provide robust DC voltage for ELC and other products. Power Supplies Description Input Power Output Volts Output Current (A) Watts Catalog Number 24 watt, 1 amp power supply 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 24 Vdc 1A 24 ELC-PS01 48 watt, 2 amp power supply 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 24 Vdc 2A 48 ELC-PS02 4 4 4 4 4 Cables Use these cables to connect your PC’s RS-232 serial port to your ELC controller to download, upload and monitor your ELC controllers, or to connect any ELC-GP to an ELC controller. The ELC-CBPCELC1 cable is 1 meter long and has a right angle connector to the ELC controller to help reduce depth when cable is attached. The ELCCBPCELC3 is 3 meters long with a straight connector. 4 Cables 4 Description Catalog Number Cable to connect a PC or an ELC-GP unit to ELC, 3 meters (DB 9-pin female to 8-pin DIN) ELC-CBPCELC3 4 Cable to connect a PC or an ELC-GP unit to ELC, 1 meter with right angle connector (DB 9-pin female to 8-pin DIN) ELC-CBPCELC1 4 4 Storage Devices 4 The ELC-ACPGMXFR module is a multifunction device that provides the ability to back up an application already loaded onto one of the ELC controllers. The transfer module can be used for copying the same application 4 Storage Devices 4 Description Catalog Number Program transfer module for ELC controllers ELC-ACPGMXFR 4 4 4 4 to multiple controllers and to transfer an existing application to a new controller in the event of a failure. It will store system settings, passwords and the application, including the data registers for pre-loaded recipes. Once stored in the module, the application, data registers and settings can be transferred to another ELC controller of the same model number. Hand-Held Programmer 4 ELC-HHP is an easy-to-use, hand-held programming and monitoring tool for ELC controllers when a PC is not available. With ELC-HHP, applications can be programmed directly with the 4 Hand-Held Programmer 4 Description Catalog Number Hand-held programmer (Includes interface cables) ELC-HHP 4 4 4 V7-T4-14 attached keypad. Applications can also be uploaded from an ELC, saved and transferred to a different ELC, or downloaded from a PC and transferred to other ELCs. External power is not required when using the hand-held programmer because it draws its power from either the ELC or the PC through the attached cable. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Plate Mount Use the ELC-ACCOVER surface mount stand-alone modules instead of mounting to a DIN rail. This may be 4 used to mount analog, temperature or the RS-485 adapters remotely. 4 4 Plate Mount Description Catalog Number Plate mount for specialty modules, qty. 10 ELC-ACCOVER 4 4 Spare Parts 4 ELC Spare Parts Description Quantity Kit consists of: 4 Catalog Number ELC-SPKIT Module to module locking clips (white) 4 Module DIN rail clip (white) 2 3-pin power plug and cable assembly (white) 4 2-pin RS-485 communications connector (green—for latest version PA, PB, PC and PH) 4 3-pin RS-485 communications connector (green—PV controllers only) 2 Left side expansion port cover (PV controllers and left side communications modules) 2 Right side I/O expansion port cover (all controllers and I/O modules) 2 Battery cover door (for PA, PC and PH controllers) 2 Metal mounting clips (only for PV controllers) 2 Kit consists of: 4 4 4 4 4 4 ELC-IOBLOCK 9-pin replacement I/O blocks (green) 4 4 Kit consists of: ELC-BAT Battery with pigtail and connector (for PA, PC and PH controllers only) 4 2 4 Programming Software ELCSoft programming software configures all ELC controllers. With ELCSoft, applications can be created, edited and monitored. Move programs from one controller to another with ease. Program in ladder, sequential function chart or instruction language. ELCSoft is the single program to develop ELCSoft Editor ELC controller applications. ELCSoft is also used to configure the DeviceNet master and Modbus TCP Ethernet modules. New program simulation capabilities are available in ELCSoft ver. 2. 4 Requirements Operating Systems ● Windows® 2000 ● Windows XP ● Windows Vista ● Windows 7 4 4 4 Hard Drive ● At least 100M bytes 4 RAM ● At least 512M bytes 4 4 4 ELC Software Description Catalog Number Programming Software for ELC Controllers ELCSOFT 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-15 4.1 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Technical Data and Specifications Controllers Description ELC-PB14NNDR/DT ELC-PC12NNAR/DR/DT ELC-PH12NNDT ELC-PA10AADR/DT ELC-PV28NNDR/DT 4 Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 25.2 x 90 x 60 37.4 x 90 x 60 37.4 x 90 x 60 37.4 x 90 x 60 70 x 90 x 60 I/O type—embedded 14 (8DI/6DO) 12 (8DI/4DO) 12 (8DI/4DO) 10 (4DI/2DO/2AI/2AO) 28 (16DI/12DO) 4 Maximum additional I/O points Up to 14 expansion modules Up to 14 expansion modules Up to 14 expansion modules Up to 14 expansion modules Up to 14 expansion modules (maximum of 8 analog/ (maximum of 8 analog/ (maximum of 8 analog/ (maximum of 8 analog/ (maximum of 8 analog/ specialty modules) specialty modules) specialty modules) specialty modules) specialty modules) DC in sink/source Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Execution speed Basic Instructions— 2 μs minimum Basic Instructions— 2 μs minimum Basic Instructions— 2 μs minimum Basic Instructions— 2 μs minimum 0.24 μs minimum 4 Program language Program capacity (steps) 3792 7920 7920 7920 15,872 4 Data memory capacity (bits) 1280 4096 4096 4096 4096 Data memory capacity (words) 744 5000 5000 5000 10,000 Index registers 2 8 8 8 16 File memory capacity (words) None 1600 words 1600 words 1600 words 10,000 words Retentive storage Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 4 4 4 Instructions + Ladder Logic + Sequential Function Chart Commands basic/advanced 32/107 32/168 32/168 32/168 32/193 Floating point Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SFC commands (steps) 128 1024 1024 1024 1024 Timers qty. 128 Timers resolution 1–100 ms 1–100 ms 1–100 ms 1–100 ms 1–100 ms 4 Counters qty. 128 250 250 250 253 High-speed counters (see note) Up to 4 Up to 6 Up to 8 Up to 6 Up to 8 4 Max. high-speed counting (see note) 2 at 20 kHz 1 at 30 kHz 1 at 100 kHz 1 at 30 kHz 2 at 200 kHz Pulse output 2 channels, 10 kHz max. 2 channels, 50 kHz max. 100 kHz 2 channels, 50 kHz max. 200 kHz Yes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 244 Standard with additional timers for subroutine and retentive applications PID Yes Yes Yes Yes Master control loop 8 loops 8 loops 8 loops 8 loops 8 loops Subroutines 64 subroutines 256 subroutines 256 subroutines 256 subroutines 256 subroutines For/next loops Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Interrupts 6 15 15 15 22 Real-time clock/calendar No Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Password security Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Diagnostic relays Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Diagnostic word registers Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Serial ports Remote I/O No With 16 other devices With 16 other devices With 16 other devices 4 Runtime editing No Yes Yes Yes Yes Run/stop switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Removable terminal strips Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Special features — 2 potentiometers 2 potentiometers 2, 7-segment displays 2 potentiometers highspeed, left side bus 4 4 Specialty expansion modules Up to a maximum of 8 (Analog In/Analog Out/TC/RTD/PT) Modules 2 Modbus (ASCII/RTU) 1 = Slave (RS-232)/11 = Master-Slave (RS-485) With 32 other devices 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Distributed I/O Adapter Modules ELC-CANET, refer to Volume 9—OEM, CA08100011E, Tab 3, section 3.2. 4 Environmental Ratings 4 Description Specification 4 Transportation and Storage Temperature –13° to +158°F (–25° to +70°C) Humidity 5–95% 4 4 Operating Temperature 32° to 131°F (0° to 55°C) Humidity 50–95% 4 Power supply voltage ELC: 24 Vdc (–15%–20%) (with DC input reverse polarity protection), expansion unit: supplied by the ELC Power consumption 3–6W Insulation resistance >5M ohms at 500 Vdc (between all inputs/outputs and earth) Grounding The diameter of grounding wire cannot be smaller than the wire diameter of terminals L and N (All ELC units should be grounded directly to the ground pole) Vibration / shock resistance IEC1131-2, IEC 68-2-6 (TEST Fc)/IEC1131-2 and IEC 68-2-27 (TEST Ea) 4 4 4 4 DC Input Point Electrical Specifications Description 4 Specification Input type DC (SINK or SOURCE) Input current 24 Vdc 5 mA Active level OFF ➔ ON, above 16 Vdc 4 4 ON ➔ OFF, below 14.4 Vdc Response time 4 About 10 ms (an adjustment range of 0–10,000 ms could be selected through D1020 and D1021) 4 Output Point Electrical Specifications Output Type Relay–R Current specification 1.5A/1 point (5A/COM) 0.3A/1 point @ 40°C; When the output of Y0 and Y1 is high-speed pulse, Y0 and Y1 = 30 mA Voltage specification Below 250 Vac, 30 Vdc 30 Vdc Maximum loading 75 VA (inductive) 9W/1 point When the output of Y0 and Y1 is high-speed pulse, Y0 and Y1 = 0.9W (Y0 = 32 kHz, Y1 = 10 kHz), Y0 can be 50 kHz using D registers 90W (resistive) Response time Adjustable 0–15 ms, default is 10 ms 4 Transistor–T 4 4 4 OFF ➔ ON 20 μs. Y0 and Y1 are specified points for high-speed pulse ON ➔ OFF 30 μs. Y0 and Y1 are specified points for high-speed pulse 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-17 4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Circuit Diagrams DC Input Sink Mode DC Input Source Mode 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 +24V 0V S/S X1 X2 Sink Mode DC Power Supply DC Transistor Sinking Output Trigger Circuit 4 4 X0 LED +24V 0V S/S X0 X1 X2 Source Mode DC Power Supply Relay Outputs Load Load Y0 Y0 <0.5A LED C0 Power RY 4 C0 Transistor Output 4 Relay Output 4 4 4 4 4 4 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) ELC-PB14 Controllers 0.12 (3.0) 0.99 (25.2) ELC-PC12, ELC-PH12 and ELC-PA10 Controllers 2.36 (60.0) 0.12 (3.0) 1.47 (37.4) 2.36 (60.0) POWER 4 RUN ERROR BAT.LOW 4 4 RUN 3.54 (90.0) EXTENSION PORT 3.54 (90.0) STOP 4 4 4 4 4 0.12 (3.0) 0.12 (3.0) 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com EXTENSION PORT 4.1 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 ELC-PV Controller 4 2.75 (70.0) 2.09 (53.2) ELC-PV28NNDR POWER RUN ERROR BAT. LOW 4.31 (109.4) IN S S OUT C0 X0 Y0 X1 Y1 X2 Y2 4 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 X3 RS-232 RS-495 IN 0.12 (3.0) OUT 3.98 (101.0) X4 C1 X5 Y3 X6 Y4 X7 Y5 S 4 Y6 X11 Y7 X12 Y10 4 3.54 (90.0) C2 S X10 4 X13 RUN X14 C3 X15 Y11 X16 Y12 X17 Y13 4 STOP 4 1 4 0 4 0.12 (3.0) 4 ELC-COENETM ELC-CODNETM 4 0.12 (3.0) 0.12 (3.0) 4 2 3 DR 1 DR 0 IN 1 IN 0 1 2 3 4 DP 1 ELC-CODNETM 0 x10 On 2 3 0 5 6 9 Node Address 1 4 x10 9 ELC-COENETM 4 5 6 7 8 3.54 (89.9) RS-232 4 7 8 3.54 (89.9) 4 POWER MS NS POWER RS-232 100M LINK 4 4 4 4 4 4 LAN 2.36 (59.9) 0.12 (3.0) 1.29 (32.8) 2.36 (59.9) 0.12 (3.0) 4 1.29 (32.8) 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-19 4.1 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Right Side Specialty and Expansion Modules 0.12 (3.0) 2.36 (60.0) 0.99 (25.2) 4 4 4 4 3.54 (90.0) EXTENSION PORT 4 4 4 4 0.12 (3.0) 4 4 ELC-ACCOVER Plate Mount for Specialty Modules 0.12 (3.0) 4 4 4 4 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 3.54 (89.9) 4.20 (106.5) 4 4 4 4 0.27 (6.8) 0.12 (3.0) 2.51 (63.4) 4 0.28 (7.1) 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 ELC-PS01 4 4 4 L 4 N 3.54 (90.0) 4 24V 0V 4 POWER 4 ELC-PS01 4 13.30 (0.5) 1.44 (36.5) 0.12 (3.0) 4 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 ELC-PS02 0.12 (3.0) 2.17 (55.0) 13.30 (0.5) 4 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 4 4 L 3.94 (100.0) N 3.54 (90.0) 4 24V 4 0V 4 POWER 4 ELC-PS02 4 0.12 (3.0) 1.28 (32.5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-21 4.1 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) ELC-CBPCELC1 Cable (Right Angle Connector not Shown) and ELC-CBPCELC3 Cable (Straight Connector as Shown) 4 4 4 4 4 4 PC/HMI COM Port 9 PIN D-SUB Female 4 Rx 2 5 Tx Tx 3 4 Rx 5 8 GND 1,2 5V 4 GND 4 1 7 4 8 4 6 4 PLC COM1 Port 8 PIN MINI DIN 2 5 1 4 8 7 3 6 ELC-ACPGMXFER Storage Device 4 6 5 4 POWER COM OK ERR 4 RD 4 ELC-ACPGMXFR WR ERASE 4 1.29 (32.8) 4 4 1 4 11.81 (292.4) 2 3 4 2.61 (66.3) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 ELC-HHP Hand-Held Programmer 4 4 4 2.64 (67.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4 1.14 (29.0) 4 M3 p0.5 4 Places 4 4 4 4 3.60 (91.5) 4 7.09 (180.0) 4 4 4 4 1.81 (46.0) 4 4 1.73 (44.0) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-23 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description 4 Page XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-25 V7-T4-26 V7-T4-26 V7-T4-28 V7-T4-31 V7-T4-34 V7-T4-50 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Overview Features and Benefits The XC100 and XC200 series modular PLCs stand out on account of their highly scalable design. Different CPU performance classes and a wide range of expansion modules are available. An important feature is their ability to be integrated in modern communication systems. Innovative solutions can be created thanks to the possibility of exchanging data with OPC clients via the Ethernet interface and the integrated web server. Flexible Range ● ● ● ● Compact and modular CPU versions to suit the needs of the application With or without on-board Ethernet and/or built-in web server Range of CPU performance Integrated CANopen interface for easy integration with XI/ON remote I/O High Performance ● ● ● Parallel backplane bus for faster processing speed Fiber optic CANopen interface for environments with severe electromagnetic interference High performance XC202 CPU with ● 10/100 Mbit Ethernet ● XSoft-CoDeSys programming software Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● IEC—UL508; CSA C22.2 No. 0-M; CSA C22.2 No. 142-M; CE marking UL File No.—E135462 UL CCN—NRAQ CSA File No. 012528 CSA Class No. 2252-01 NA Certification— ● UL Listed ● CSA certified/cUL RoHS 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 Product Selection Guide 4 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 4 4 4 XC121 Compact PLC XC101 Modular PLCs XC201 Modular PLCs XC202 Modular PLCs Page V7-T4-28 Page V7-T4-28 Page V7-T4-29 Page V7-T4-29 This PLC is particularly suitable for applications where space is at premium and with high communication requirements. ● Two serial and two CAN interfaces enable: – the coupling of two CAN networks – Modbus master/slave coupling (RS-232 or RS-485)—CAN – RS-232—CAN coupling ● I/O expansion with 18 digital and 8 analog inputs/outputs ● 6 interrupt inputs ● Expandable with standard XIOC modules The modular PLCs of the XC101 series are universal automation devices for small and medium-sized applications. ● Locally expandable with up to 15 XIOC modules ● Data storage on SD card ● CAN interface The modular PLCs of the XC201 series offer a high CPU performance, a high speed and a wide range of communication options. ● Locally expandable with up to 15 XIOC modules ● Ethernet interface for communication and programming ● CAN interface ● Data storage on SD card or USB stick ● Web server enables visualization via CoDeSys ● Operating system update SD card or USB The modular PLCs of the XC202 series offer higher CPU performance and memory than the XC201 PLCs. ● Locally expandable with up to 15 XIOC modules ● Ethernet interface for communication and programming ● CAN interface ● Data storage on SD card or USB stick ● Operating system update via Ethernet, SD card or USB ● Up to three IP addresses can be configured ● 29-bit CAN identifier Features XC121 XC101 XC201 XC202 Input voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Memory size 256 kB 64, 128 or 256 kB 256 kB or 2 MB 4 MB Microprocessor Infineon CC161 Infineon C164 MIPS RISC ARM11 Processor speed 36 MHz 24 MHz 131 MHz 532 MHz Cycle time per 1k instructions <0.3 ms <0.5 ms <0.15 ms <0.025 ms SD card slot Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 USB interface No No Yes Yes Real time clock Yes Yes Yes Yes On-board digital inputs — 8 8 8 On-board digital outputs — 6 6 6 Interrupt inputs 6 4 2 2 Expandability XIO-EXT base module + Up to 15 XIOC modules Up to 15 XIOC modules Up to 15 XIOC modules Up to 15 XIOC modules Removable terminal blocks Yes Yes Yes Yes Screw terminal option No Yes Yes Yes Spring-cage terminal option Yes Yes Yes Yes Serial interface 1, RS-232 1, RS-232/RS-485 1, RS-232 1, RS-232 1, RS-232 4 Ethernet port No No Yes Yes 4 CANopen interface 2 1 1 1 On-board high speed counters No No Yes Yes On-board encoder inputs No No Yes Yes OPC server Yes Yes Yes Yes Integrated web server No No On suffix “-XV” models Yes FTP server No No On suffix “-XV” models Yes Networks master CANopen/easyNet CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/easyNet Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ easyNet Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ easyNet Networks node/device CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP®/ easyNet CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ easyNet Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ easyNet Ethernet/CANopen/PROFIBUS-DP/ easyNet 4 Operating system Proprietary Proprietary Windows CE Windows CE 4 X-Soft-CoDeSys version V2.3 V2.3 V2.3 V2.3 and 3.0 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-25 4.2 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Catalog Number Selection Controllers XC - CPU 201 - EC 512K - XV 4 4 101 = 121 = 201 = 202 = 4 Visualization Option XV = Web server Model Number Modular (Infineon C164—16 bit at 24 MHz) Compact (Infineon XC161—16 bit at 36 MHz) Modular (MIPS RISC—32 bit at 131 MHz) Modular (ARM 11—32 bit at 532 MHz) Communication Ports C = 1 CANopen 2C = 2 CANopen EC = Ethernet and CANopen 4 User Memory 64K = 64 kB 128K = 128 kB 256K = 256 kB 512K = 2 MB 4M = 4 MB 4 4 4 4 System Overview System Configuration CPU XIOC-BP-XC 4 4 4 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-XC1 CPU XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-3 1 2 3 4 XIOC-BP-3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 2 XIOC-BP-XC 4 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-XC1 XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-EXT XIOC-BP-EXT XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-2 4 4 Notes 1 Maximum basic version, <7 signal modules. 2 Maximum total version, <15 signal modules. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Identification 1 4 2 4 4 7 4 4 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 6 4 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 7 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 9 8 4 9 4 Item Number Description Item Number Description 1 XC121 Compact PLC CPU 6 Battery 2 XC121 I.O Expansion module 7 SD Memory card 3 XC100/XC200 Modular PLC 8 XIOC Terminal block, screw terminals 4 XIOC I/O modules 9 XIOC Terminal block, spring-cage terminals 5 XIOC Module backplane 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-27 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Product Selection XC121 Compact PLC CPU 4 4 4 4 4 Can be locally expanded with I/O module XIO-EXT-121-1. ● ● 24 Vdc input supply RS-232 interface for programming and ● Real time clock communication ● 2 CANopen interfaces ● Second RS-232/RS-485 (500 kB) interface XC121 4 ● ● ● ● Slot for SD memory card Spring-cage terminal blocks OPC server RUN/STOP switch XC121 Compact PLC Program Memory Size Cycle Time 1 Ethernet CAN 256 kB <0.3 ms — 2 Serial Interface Web Server Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 1, RS-232 1, RS-232/RS-485 — 1 290446 XC-CPU121-2C256K 4 4 4 4 4 XC121 I/O Expansion Module Base I/O module for the XC121. ● 10 digital inputs 24 Vdc ● 6 interrupt inputs ● 8 digital inputs/outputs 24 Vdc 0.5A 4 XC121 I/O Module ● ● ● ● 2 analog inputs 0–10V 2 analog inputs 0–20 mA 2 analog inputs PT100 RTD 2 analog outputs 0–10V ● ● Removable spring-cage terminals Expandable with 15 XIOC modules 2 XC121 I/O Expansion Module 4 Digital Inputs Digital Inputs/Outputs Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 4 10, 24 Vdc 8, 24 Vdc 0.5A 2, 0–10V 2, 0–20 mA 2, PT100 RTD 2, 0–10V 1 290450 XIO-EXT121-1 Style Number Catalog Number 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XC101 Modular PLCs Order backplane, terminals and battery separately. ● ● 24 Vdc input supply 4 interrupt inputs ● ● Real time clock 6 digital outputs ● ● Expandable with 15 XIOC RS-232 interface for modules programming and communication ● 8 digital inputs XC101 ● ● ● CANopen interface (500 kB) Slot for SD memory card RUN/STOP switch and LED indicators XC101 Modular PLCs 4 Program Memory Size 4 64 kB <0.5 ms — 1 1, RS-232 typ. — 1 262152 XC-CPU101-C64K 128 kB <0.5 ms — 1 1, RS-232 typ. — 1 262146 XC-CPU101-C128K 4 256 kB <0.5 ms — 1 1, RS-232 typ. — 1 274399 XC-CPU101-C256K 4 4 Cycle Time 1 Ethernet CANOpen Serial Interface Web Server Pkg. Qty. Notes 1 Cycle time per 1k of instructions. 2 Except the XIOC-NET-DP-M module. 4 4 4 V7-T4-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC201 Modular PLCs Order backplane, terminals and battery accessories separately. ● ● 24 Vdc input supply Incremental encoder inputs ● Real time clock ● High speed counter ● Expandable with 15 XIOC (50 kHz) inputs modules ● 6 digital outputs ● 8 digital inputs ● ● ● ● ● 2 interrupt inputs XC201 4 Ethernet and RS-232 interface for programming and communication CANopen interface (1 MB) Slot for SD memory card USB interface ● ● RUN/STOP switch and LED indicators Built-in Web server on XV models 4 Cycle Time 1 Ethernet CANOpen Serial Interface Web Server Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 4 4 256 kB <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 — 1 262155 XC-CPU201-EC256K 2 MB <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 — 1 262157 XC-CPU201-EC512K 256 kB Integrated web server <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 ✓ 1 262156 XC-CPU201-EC256K-XV 4 2 MB Integrated web server <0.15 ms ✓ 1 1, RS-232 ✓ 1 262158 XC-CPU201-EC512K-XV 4 4 XC202 Modular PLCs Order backplane, terminals and battery accessories separately. ● ● 24 Vdc input supply Incremental encoder inputs ● Real time clock ● High speed counter ● Expandable with 15 XIOC (50 kHz) inputs modules ● 6 digital outputs ● 8 digital inputs ● 2 interrupt inputs XC202 4 4 XC201 Modular PLCs Program Memory Size 4 4 ● ● ● ● Ethernet and RS-232 interface for programming and communication CANopen interface (1 MB) Slot for SD memory card USB interface ● ● RUN/STOP switch and LED indicators Built-in Web server Cycle Time 1 Ethernet 4 MB Integrated web server <0.025 ms ✓ 4 4 XC202 Modular PLCs Program Memory Size 4 4 CANOpen Serial Interface Web Server Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 1 1, RS-232 ✓ 1 134238 XC-CPU202-EC4M-XV 4 4 4 4 XIOC Expansion Modules Order screw, spring-cage terminals or 40-pin connector cable for 32 I/O modules separately. ● ● ● 8, 16 and 32 input modules User configurable input/ Isolated relay output output module module ● 8, 16 and 32 output modules XIOC Digital Expansion Modules XIOC—Digital 4 4 4 Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 8 inputs, 24 Vdc 1 257891 XIOC-8DI 16 inputs, 24 Vdc 1 257892 XIOC-16DI 32 inputs, 24 Vdc 1 267411 XIOC-32DI 8 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.3A 1 257894 XIOC-8DO 16 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.3A 1 257896 XIOC-16DO 16 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.8A, short-circuit protected 1 257895 XIOC-16DO-S 16 terminals, 4 inputs, 12 configurable as inputs/outputs, 24 Vdc—outputs 0.5A 1 262322 XIOC-16DX 32 outputs, 24 Vdc, 0.2A 1 267413 XIOC-32DO 12 relay outputs, isolated 1 257897 XIOC-12DO-R 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 Cycle time per 1k of instructions. 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-29 4.2 4 XIOC—Analog PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Analog Modules Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number Inputs: 8 inputs 4–20 mA 1 262549 XIOC-8AI-I2 Inputs: 8 voltage inputs 0–10V 1 257899 XIOC-8AI-U1 Inputs: 8 voltage inputs, ±10V 1 257900 XIOC-8AI-U2 Inputs: 4 inputs for temperature monitoring, PT100/1000 1 257901 XIOC-4T-PT Inputs: 4 inputs for thermocouples Type K, J, L, B, N, E, R, S, T 1 289933 XIOC-4AI-T Outputs: 2 outputs, ±10V 1 257904 XIOC-2AO-U2 4 Outputs: 2 outputs 0–10V, 2 outputs 4–20 mA 1 257902 XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I2 Outputs: 4 outputs 0–10 V 1 257903 XIOC-4AO-U1 4 Combination modules: 2 inputs and 1 output 0–10V/1 ms conversion time 1 262409 XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1 Combination modules: 2 inputs and 1 output 0–10V, 0–20 mA/1 ms conversion time, individual changeover 1 281545 XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1-I1 Combination modules: 4 inputs and 2 outputs 0–10V/1 ms conversion time 1 262405 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1 Combination modules: 4 inputs and 2 outputs 0–10V, 0–20 mA/1 ms conversion time, individual changeover 1 281544 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1-I1 Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XIOC—Counter Counter Modules 4 Description 4 1 input up to 100 kHz, 24 Vdc, 5 Vdc, 2 digital transistor outputs, opto-isolated, 24 Vdc 30-pin connector required for counter module 1 257906 XIOC-1CNT-100KHZ 4 2 inputs up to 100 kHz, (24 Vdc or 5V diff), 4 digital transistor outputs, opto-isolated, 24 Vdc 30-pin connector required for counter module 1 257907 XIOC-2CNT-100KHZ 2 incremental encoders up to 400 kHz, 5 Vdc, 2 analog outputs ±10V 1 262417 XIOC-2CNT-2AO-INC Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 4 PROFIBUS-DP master module 1 257908 XIOC-NET-DP-M PROFIBUS-DP node module 1 286419 XIOC-NET-DP-S 4 Serial interfaces: RS-232C, RS-485, RS-422 (for XC101, XC201 and XC202) Modes of operation: Transparent mode, Modbus master/node 1 267191 XIOC-SER 4 Serial interfaces: RS-232C, RS-485, RS-422 (for XC201 and XC202 only) Modes of operation: Transparent mode, Modbus master/node 1 135265 XIOC-TC1 4 4 4 XIOC—Communication Card Communication Modules 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Accessories Terminals 4 Terminals One 18 pole terminal plug is required for each digital and analog module. 4 Pkg. Qty. Description Style Number Catalog Number 4 4 18-pin connector with screw terminals for digital or analog I/O 10 258102 XIOC-TERM-18S 18-pin connector with spring-cage terminal for digital or analog I/O 10 258104 XIOC-TERM-18T 40-pin connector for digital module, with 4 m cable XIOC-32DI XIOC-32DO 1 267414 XIOC-TERM32 30-pin connector for counter module, with 4 m cable XIOC-1CNT-100KHZ XIOC-2CNT-100KHZ 1 262248 XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 4 4 4 4 Module Backplane Backplane 4 Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number Basic backplane for mounting XC100/200 on top-hat rail, can be expanded Width: 2 slots for controller 1 260792 XIOC-BP-XC 4 Expansion backplane for mounting XIOC modules on top-hat rail, can be expanded Width: 2 slots for XIOC modules 1 260794 XIOC-BP-2 4 Description 4 4 4 Backplane Basic backplane for mounting XC100/200 on DIN rail, can be expanded Width: 3 slots for controller and one XIOC module 1 260793 XIOC-BP-XC1 Expansion backplane for mounting XIOC modules on DIN rail, can be expanded Width: 3 slots for XIOC modules 1 260795 XIOC-BP-3 Expansion backplane for mounting XIOC modules on DIN rail, can be expanded Width: 3 slots for XIOC modules 1 1 274291 XIOC-BP-EXT 4 4 4 4 4 Memory Card 4 Memory Card For storage of programs, data, recipes for XC100, XC121, XC200. 4 Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 512 MB 1 138257 XT-MEM-MM512M 32 MB 1 262731 XT-MEM-MM32M 4 4 4 Note 1 Module backplane for expansion with up to 15 modules, must be plugged into the 6th slot. 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-31 4.2 4 Battery 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Battery Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number Lithium 1/2 AA 3.6V battery for backup of real-time clock 1 256209 XT-CPU-BAT1 4 4 Programming Cables 4 Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number D-Sub 9-Pin 2m, D-sub 9-pin, serial 1 262186 XT-SUB-D/RJ45 Ethernet Cross 2m, Ethernet cross 1 256487 XT-CAT5-X-2 5m, Ethernet cross 1 256488 XT-CAT5-X-5 Programming Programming cable for XC through USB interface 1 115735 EU4A-RJ45-USB-CAB1 Connection Cable Connection Cables Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 0.3m: Connection cable for XC200 to interface switch 1 256283 EASY-NT-30 0.8m: Connection cable for XC200 to interface switch 1 256284 EASY-NT-80 1.5m: Connection cable for XC200 to interface switch 1 256285 EASY-NT-150 Description Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number Empty module to cover open XIOC slots 1 288894 XIOC-NOP Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 1 289170 XT-RJ45-ETH-RS232 Pkg. Qty. Style Number Catalog Number 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Empty Module 4 Empty Module 4 4 4 Interface Switch Interface Switch 4 Description 4 Interface adapter to split the combined RS-232/Ethernet interface of the XC200 into RJ45 sockets. Connection cable EASY-NT-30/80/150 usable for connection to XC200 4 4 Filter 4 Filter Description 4 Interference suppression of the external 24 Vdc supply of the XC100/200. Maximum current consumption: 2.2A 1 285316 XT-FIL-1 4 Power supply interference suppression of I/O modules of XC100/200. Maximum current consumption: 12A 1 118980 XT-FIL-2 4 V7-T4-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software 4 Combined Logic and Visualization Development for XC Series PLCs and XV Series HMI-PLCs 4 IEC 61131-3 Programming Languages ● Ladder Diagram ● Structured Text ● Sequential function chart ● Function block diagram ● Freely definable function block chart/continuous function chart ● Instruction List Project Development ● Automatic variable declaration ● On-line editing ● Pop-up variable and function search/pick tools ● Automatic formatting and color coding of logic/ declaration text ● Re-usable Visual-Logic Function Blocks Debugging and commissioning XSoft-CoDeSys-2 offers you a number of important functions for debugging, testing and commissioning your applications quickly and efficiently. Target Visualization Integrated design of Operator Interface screens for the XV HMI-PLC series. Visualization and logic developed as part of the same project. Simplifies screen design and always keeps the Logic and visualization in synch. Web Visualization Optionally XSoft-CoDeSys-2 can automatically generate XML-based runtime screens to make the screens from the XV HMI-PLC accessible remotely using a web browser with a JavaScript plug-in such as Internet Explorer®, Firefox® and others. All these features are available as soon as you log on to the XV HMI-PLC or XC200 PLC (online mode) over an Ethernet connection. 4 4 4 Simulation Users can also test the application when the XV HMIPLC is not connected to the process. This is possible thanks to the integrated online simulation feature. Simulation supports both the screens and logic that have been designed using XSoftCoDeSys. Advanced Features ● Up to 16 time and/or event driven tasks per project ● Each task can include multiple logic programs or subroutines ● Programs and screen designs can be exported and imported to support reuse ● Powerful, built-in function block libraries ● Ability to create userdefined function blocks ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Fieldbus Configurator for CANopen, PROFIBUSDP and SmartWire-DT device I/O Ethernet and serial communication function blocks (OPC server, UDP, TCP/IP, FTP client/ server, Modbus Master/Node, email, SMS, and more) 8 level password protection Web access selectable per screen System function libraries (OS Storage Card, and more) On-line and historical alarms On-line and historical trends System Requirements Windows XP and Windows 7 32-bit systems 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software Description Catalog Number Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-33 4.2 4 4 XC121 Compact PLC Description 4 Standards 4 4 4 4 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Technical Data and Specifications 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products Unit XC-CPU121-2C256K General IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) Mounting position Horizontal Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 Vibration resistance Frequency 5–9 Hz; 3.5 mm amplitude 9–150 Hz; 1.0g constant acceleration Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 4 Degree of protection IP20 4 Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 4 Backup time Rated insulation voltage (Ui) 4 4 kg Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 0.15 Refer to Page V7-T4-49 Connections Supply voltage Connection type — mm2 Terminal capacity 4 COM1 interface Connection type 4 COM2, CAN1, CAN2 interfaces Connection type 4 500 At least 72 hours Weight 4 V 0.14–1 (AWG28-18) RJ45 Terminal capacity Spring-loaded terminal block, 6-pole mm² 0.14–0.5 (AWG28-20) Power Supply 4 Input voltage Vdc 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 4 Input power W Max. 1.44 Input current mA 60 4 Ripple % <5 Maximum heat dissipation (without local I/O) (Pv) W 6 4 4 4 4 4 Overvoltage protection Yes Protection against polarity reversal Yes Inrush current x In No limitation (limited only by upstream 24 Vdc power supply unit) Supply failure bridging Duration of power failure ms 10 Repetition rate s External supply filter 1 Part No.: XT-FIL-1, Refer to Page V7-T4-32 Memory 4 Program code/program data kByte Marker/input/output/retain data kByte 256/244 16/4/4/8 4 Cycle time for 1k of instructions (bits, bytes) ms <0.3 4 4 V7-T4-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC121 Compact PLC, continued Description Unit 4 XC-CPU121-2C256K Interfaces Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines Baud rate 4 Programming (character format: 8 data bits, No parity, 1 stop bit) 19.2, 38.4 (default), 57.6 4 Connector type RJ45 Potential isolation No 4 0.3, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6, 115.2 4 In transparent mode Baud rate kbit/s kbit/s 4 Character formats 8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2, 7N2, 7E1 Number of send bytes for block 190 Number of receive bytes for block 190 4 Transparent mode (setting through function blocks) 0.3, 0.6, 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, 57.6 4 Character formats 8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2, 7N2, 7E1 (setting through function blocks) 4 Potential isolation No Bus termination External, for RS-485 4 COM2 (RS-232/RS-485) without handshake lines Baud rate CAN1/CAN2 interface Baud rate kbit/s kbit/s 4 10 – 500 Potential isolation No Stations 126 Bus termination Adjustable for each interface (CAN1/CAN2) PDO type Asyn., cyc., acyc. 4 4 4 Power Supply of Local Inputs/Outputs (24 VQ/0 VQ) Input voltage Vdc 24 Voltage range Vdc 19.2–30, observe polarity 4 Potential isolation Between power supply and CPU voltage Yes 4 Overvoltage protection Yes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-35 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC121 Expansion Module Description Unit XIO-EXT121-1 4 General 4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) 4 4 4 4 4 4 Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 Mounting position Horizontal Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 Vibration resistance Frequency 5–9 Hz; 3.5 mm amplitude 9–150 Hz; 1.0g constant acceleration Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 Degree of protection IP20 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 500 Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4 4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 4 Weight 4 Connections 4 4 4 4 4 Backup time At least 72 hours kg Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 0.15 Refer to Page V7-T4-49 X1 connector Connector type Spring-loaded terminal block, 20 pole, B2L 3.5 mm2 Terminal capacity (solid) X2/X3 connector Connector type 0.5–1 Spring-loaded terminal block, 10-pole, BLZF 3.5/180 or BLI/O 3.5/10F with LEDs Terminal capacity (solid) mm² 0.5–1 ms 10 s 1 Power Supply Supply failure bridging Duration of power failure Repetition rate 4 Input voltage Vdc 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4 – 28.8 4 Input power W Max.1.68 Input current mA 70 Ripple % <5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Overvoltage protection Yes Protection against polarity reversal Yes Inrush current x In Max. 1A Output voltage for signal modules Max. field current (IL) A 2 Digital Inputs Number X2: 9 with plug BLI/O 3.5/10F or 10 with plug BLZF 3.5/ 180 X3: 8 (can also be used as outputs) Rated voltage (Ue) At state “0” (Ue) Vdc Vdc 24 <5 At state “1” (Ue) Vdc >15 Rated operational current At state “1” (Ie) mA 3.3 Delay time X2: DI0–DI3 μs 20 X2: DI4–DI9 μs 250 X2: DX0–DX7 ms Potential isolation 20 No 4 V7-T4-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC121 Expansion Module, continued Description Unit 4 XIO-EXT121-1 Digital Outputs Number 4 At X3: 8 (can also be used as inputs) Rated voltage Rated voltage (Ue) Vdc 24 % <5 A 0.5 at 24 Vac Permissible range 4 4 20.4–28.8 Vdc Ripple Rated operational current At state “1” (Ie) Utilization factor (%) g 1 Maximum duty factor ms 100% Lamp load without (Rv) W 5 Potential isolation 4 4 4 No Residual current at state “0” per channel mA <0.1 4 Max. output voltage At state “0” with external load <10M ohms V 2.5 4 V U = Ue–1V A 0.7 < Ie <2 for output At state “1” at Ie = 0.5A Short-circuit tripping current Short-circuit tripping current for Ra <10M ohms Total short-circuit current A 16 Peak short-circuit current A 32 ops/h 40,000 Max. operating frequency Parallel connection capability 4 4 4 Yes 4 2 4 Analog Inputs 0–10V Number of channels Primary voltage range V 0–10 Resolution bit 10 Conversion time ms <5 4 4 < ± 1% (of full-scale value) Overall accuracy Input resistance kohm 200 4 Analog Inputs 0–20 mA Number of channels 2 Primary voltage range mA 0–20 Resolution bit 10 Conversion time ms <5 4 4 < ± 1% (of full-scale value) Overall accuracy Input resistance ohm 4 50 PT100 RTD Number of channels 4 2 Temperature range °F (°C) –348° to 392° (–200° to 200°) Resistance range ohm 18.5–175.8 Resolution bit 4 4 10 < ± 2% Overall accuracy 4 Analog Outputs Number of channels 2 Secondary voltage range V 0–10 Resolution bit 12 Conversion time ms <5 4 4 < ± 1% (of full-scale value) Overall accuracy External load resistance (R) kohm 4 10 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-37 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC101 Modular PLCs Description Unit XC-CPU101-C64K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-FC128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C256K-8DI-6DO IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 4 General IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) 4 4 4 4 Standards Mounting position Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 10–95 10–95 10–95 10–95 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 795–1080 795–1080 795–1080 Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm/57–150 Hz ±1.0g Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms Overvoltage category II II II II 4 Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 4 Rated insulation voltage (Ui) V 500 500 500 500 Emitted interference Ui EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A 4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 Battery (lifespan) Normally 5 years Normally 5 years Normally 5 years Normally 5 years 4 Weight 0.23 0.23 0.23 0.23 Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block kg Terminals 4 4 4 4 Terminal capacity Screw terminals Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 Solid mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 Flexible mm2 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 Solid mm2 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 Spring-cage terminal 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 4 Mains failure duration ms 10 10 10 10 Repetition rate s 1 1 1 1 4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 Input power W Max. 26 Max. 26 Max. 26 Max. 26 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Refer to Page V7-T4-49 Power Supply Ripple % <5 <5 <5 <5 Maximum heat dissipation (without local I/O) (Pv) W 6 6 6 6 Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes Yes Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Mains filter (external) Inrush current x In Output voltage for signal modules Rated value Not limited, (limiting only by a supply-side 24 Vdc PSU) Vdc 5 5 5 5 A 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 Short-circuit rating Yes Yes Yes Yes Isolated from supply voltage No No No No Infineon C164 Infineon C164 Infineon C164 Infineon C164 256/256 Output current CPU Microprocessor 4 Memory Program code/program data kByte 64/64 128/128 128/128 4 Marker/retain data kByte 4/4 8/8 8/8 8/8 4 Cycle time for 1k of instructions (bits, bytes) ms <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 <0.5 4 V7-T4-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC101 Modular PLCs, continued Description Unit XC-CPU101-C64K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-C128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101-FC128K-8DI-6DO XC-CPU101- C256K-8DI-6DO Interfaces Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines Baud rate 4 4 kbit/s Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 Max. 57.6 4 Max. 57.6 Connections RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Potential isolation No No No No 4 500,000 500,000 500,000 500,000 4 Potential isolation Yes Yes Yes Yes Device profile To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4 PDO type Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Connection Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Optical fiber interface, wavelength Plug-in terminal block 660 mm, plug for example HFBR-4516 Agilent Technologies CANopen Maximum data transfer rate bit/s Bus terminating resistors Stations Number External External External External Max. 126 Max. 126 Max. 126 Max. 126 Watchdog Yes Yes Yes Yes RTC (real-time clock) Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 4 4 4 4 4 Power Supply of Local Inputs/Outputs (24 VQ/0 VQ) Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 24 Voltage range Vdc 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 4 Potential isolation Between power supply and CPU voltage Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Digital Inputs Input current for channel at rated voltage mA Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Heat dissipation for channel mW Normally 85 Normally 85 Normally 85 Normally 85 Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc,/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 4 Voltage level to IEC/EN 61131-2 Limit value type 1 4 Input delay OFF ON ON 4 ms OFF 4 ms Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Normally 0.1 Inputs Number 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) 8 (of which 4 interrupt inputs) Channels with the same reference potential Number 8 8 8 8 4 LED LED LED LED 4 4 Status indication Digital Outputs Channels Number 6 6 6 6 Heat dissipation for channel W 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 Load circuits A 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 4 Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms 4 Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms 6 6 6 6 Status indication LED LED LED LED 4 Switching capacity IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13 4 4 Output delay OFF ON ON OFF Channels with the same reference potential Number Duty factor % DF 100 100 100 100 Utilization factor g 1 1 1 1 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-39 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC200 Series Modular PLCs Description Unit XC-CPU201-EC256K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU201-EC512K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU202-EC4M-8DI-6DO-XV IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 4 General IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 4 Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) Horizontal 4 4 4 4 4 Standards Horizontal Horizontal Relative humidity, noncondensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) Mounting position % 10–95 10–95 10–95 Air pressure (in operation) hPa 795–1080 795–1080 795–1080 Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm 57–150 Hz ±1.0g 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm 57–150 Hz ±1.0g 10–57 Hz ±0.075 mm 57–150 Hz ±1.0g Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms Overvoltage category II II II Pollution degree 2 2 2 IP20 IP20 IP20 850 850 850 Degree of protection 4 Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) Emitted interference EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A EN 61000-6-4, Class A 4 Interference immunity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 Battery (lifespan) Normally 5 years Normally 5 years Normally 5 years 4 Weight 0.23 0.23 0.23 Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block V kg Terminals 4 4 4 4 Terminal capacity Screw terminals Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–1.5 Solid mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 Flexible mm2 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 0.34–1.0 Solid mm2 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0 Spring-cage terminal 4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 4 Duration of mains failure ms 10 10 10 Repetition rate s 1 1 1 4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 4 Input power W Max. 33 Max. 33 Max. 33 4 Ripple % <5 <5 <5 Maximum heat dissipation (Pv) W 6 6 6 Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes 4 Line filter Yes Yes Yes 4 Output voltage for signal modules Rated value 4 4 4 Refer to Page V7-T4-49 Power Supply Inrush current x In Not limited (limiting only by a supply-side 24 Vdc PSU) Vdc 5 5 5 A 3.2 3.2 3.2 Short-circuit rating Yes Yes Yes Isolated from supply voltage No No No NEC VR4181 A MIPS NEC VR4181 A MIPS ARM 532 MHz Output current CPU 4 4 4 Microprocessor Memory Program code/program data 256 kByte/256 kByte 2 Mbyte/512 kByte 4 Mbyte/512 kByte Marker/retain data kByte 16/32 16/32 16/64 Cycle time for 1k of instructions (bits, bytes) ms <0.15 <0.15 <0.025 4 4 V7-T4-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XC200 Series Modular PLCs, continued Description Unit XC-CPU201-EC256K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU201-EC512K-8DI-6DO(-XV) XC-CPU202-EC4M-8DI-6DO-XV Interfaces 4 4 Ethernet Baud rate 10/100–Autodetect 10/100–Autodetect 10/100–Autodetect Connector type Mbit/s RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Potential isolation No No No 4 4 Serial interface (RS-232) without handshake lines Baud rate Max. 115.2 Max. 115.2 Max. 115.2 Connector type kbit/s RJ45 RJ45 RJ45 Potential isolation No No No 1.0 1.0 2.0 1 1 1 USB interface CANopen Maximum data transfer rate Mbit/s Potential isolation Yes Yes Yes Device profile To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4 To DS 301 V4 PDO type Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Asyn., cyc., acyc. Connection Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Bus terminating resistors External External Internal Stations Number 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Max. 126 Max. 126 Max. 126 Watchdog Yes Yes Yes RTC (real-time clock) Yes Yes Yes 4 4 Power Supply of Local Inputs/Outputs (24 VQ/0 VQ) Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 Voltage range Vdc 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity 19.2–30, observe polarity Yes Yes Yes Potential isolation Between power supply and CPU voltage Between power supply and inputs/outputs 4 4 No No No Status indication LED LED LED Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Overvoltage protection Yes Yes Yes Protection against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Normally 3.5 Heat dissipation per channel Normally 85m W Normally 85m W Normally 85m W 4 Voltage level to IEC/EN 61131-2 Limit value type 1 Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc Low <5 Vdc/High >15 Vdc 4 4 4 4 4 Digital Inputs Input current per channel at rated voltage Input delay OFF ON ON OFF mA ms Type 0.1 Type 0.1 Type 0.1 ms Type 0.1 Type 0.1 Type 0.1 Inputs Number Channels with the same reference potential Number Status indication 4 8, of which parameterizable: 2 counters, 50 kHz, 2 interrupt inputs, 1 incremental input 8 8 8 LED LED LED 4 6 6 6 4 Digital Outputs Channels Number Heat dissipation per channel W 0.08 0.08 0.08 Load circuits A 0.5 0.5 0.5 Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 ms 6 6 6 LED LED 4 4 Output delay OFF ON ON OFF Channels with the same reference potential Number Status indication LED Switching capacity 4 4 4 IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13 Duty factor % DF 100 100 100 Utilization factor g 1 1 1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4 V7-T4-41 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Digital Input Modules Description Unit XIOC-8DI XIOC-16DI XIOC-32DI 4 Modules DC input DC input DC input 4 Input voltage Vdc 24 24 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 Input voltage Vac — — — Permissible range Vac — — — Normally 3.5 kohm Normally 5.9 kohm Normally 5.6 kohm 4 4 4 4 4 Input type Input resistance Input current mA Normally 6.9 Normally 4.0 Normally 4.3 Voltage level to IEC 61131-2, limit value type 1 ON Vdc >15 >15 >15 Vdc <5 <5 <5 OFF Input delay OFF ON ms 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4) ms 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4) 5 (normally 4) Input channels Number 8 16 32 4 Channels with the same reference potential Number 8 16 32 Potential isolation With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers 4 Indication LED (green) LED (green) 16 LEDs (green), switchable: 0–15, 16–31 4 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block XIOC-TERM32 (connector and cable) 4 4 OFF ON Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 26 Normally 51 Normally 100 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.16 Unit XIOC-8DO XIOC-16DO XIOC-16DO-S XIOC-32DO Transistor (source type) 4 4 XIOC Digital Output Modules 4 Modules Description Output type Transistor (source type) Transistor (source type) Transistor (source type) Output voltage Vdc 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 4 Switching current, minimum mA 1 1 1 1 Leakage current mA 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 4 Maximum load current Per circuit A 0.3 0.3 0.8 0.2 A 2.4 4 5 3.2 ms <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 <0.3 ms <1 <1 <1 <1 4 Output channels Number 8 16 16 32 Channels with the same reference potential Number 8 16 16 32 4 Overvoltage protection Diode Diode Integrated Diode 8 4 4 4 Per common potential terminal Output delay OFF ON OFF ON Fuse rating 4 4 8 None Potential isolation A With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers Indication LED (green) LED (green) LED (green) 16 LEDs (green) switchable: 0–15, 16–31 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block XIOC-TERM32 (connector and cable) 4 4 4 4 Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 30 Normally 50 Normally 50 Normally 250 External voltage for outputs/module (30 mA for module supply) (Us) Vdc 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) 24 (–15 to +20%) — — Yes — 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 Short-circuit protection Weight kg 4 4 V7-T4-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XIOC Relay Output Module Description Unit 4 XIOC-12DO-R Modules Output type 4 Relays 4 Output voltage Vdc 24 Output voltage Vac 100/240 Switching current, minimum mA 1 4 4 Maximum load current Per circuit Per common potential terminal A 2 A 5 ms <10 4 Output delay OFF ON ms <10 Output channels Number 12 Channels with the same reference potential Number 12 OFF ON Overvoltage protection Fuse rating 4 External A Potential isolation 4 External With optocouplers Indication LED (green) Terminals Plug-in terminal block Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA External voltage for operating the relay Weight 4 4 4 Normally 40 4 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%, max. 70 mA) kg 0.2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-43 4.2 4 Description 4 4 Ripple 4 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Digital Input/Output Module Power Supply 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products Unit XIOC-16DX % <5 Supply voltage 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%) Overvoltage protection Yes Protection against polarity reversal Yes Potential isolation Between power supply and I/O bus Yes Between power supply and I/O 4 4 4 No Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Channels Number Normally 80 16 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Status indication LED Inputs 4 Input type Input voltage Vdc 24 4 Inputs Number 4, 12, configurable Input current mA Normally 4 4 Voltage level to IEC 61131-2, limit value type 1 ON Vdc >15 Vdc <5 4 4 4 DC input OFF Input delay OFF ON OFF ON ms Normally 0.1 ms Normally 0.1 Outputs Output type 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Transistor (source type) Output voltage Vdc 12/24 –15 to +20%) Output current A Normally 0.5 Outputs Number Max. 12, configurable Short-circuit tripping current A Max. 1.2 over 3 ms for output Lamp load W Max. 3 μs Normally 100 Drop-out delay (High Low) Switching capacity IEC/EN 60947-5-1, utilization category DC-13 Short-circuit rating Yes Parallel connection of outputs In groups 0 – 3, 4 – 7, 8 – 11; Actuation of the outputs within a group only in the same program cycle Number of outputs that can be switched in parallel Max. 3 Total maximum current A 2 for group Weight kg 0.16 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Analog Modules Description Unit XIOC-8AI-I2 XIOC-8AI-U1 XIOC-8AI-U2 XIOC-4T-PT Input voltage Vdc — 0 to 10 –10 to +10 — Input current mA 4–20 — — — Resolution, digital bit 12 12 12 15 bit with sign 4 Modules 4 4 4 <5 ms <5 ms <5 ms — Total errors % < ± 1 (of full-scale value) < ± 1 (of full-scale value) < ± 1 (of full-scale value) < ± 1 (of full-scale value) Input resistance kohm — 100 100 — 4 4 Conversion time Potential isolation Circuit within each channel With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers With optocouplers No No No No 8 8 8 4 Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block External power supply 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15 to +20%), 100 mA — — — Max. 0.4, 4 channels Between the input channels Input channels Number External resistance (R) kohm 4 4 4 Connection type 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) Shielded cable Platinum RTD — — — PT100 (IEC 751), PT1000 °C — — — ±0.5 –50° to 400°C (PT100) °C — — — ±3 –50° to 400°C (PT1000) °C — — — ±6 — — — –20 to 40°/–50 to 400° (uninterrupted current: 2 mA) 4 4 Accuracy –20° to 40°C (PT100) Temperature measuring range Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA 4 4 Normally 100 Normally 100 Normally 100 Max. 200 Additional function — — — Linearization Fault detection –20° to 40°C — — — < –25°C or > +45°C = resistance value 7FFFFhex –50° to 400°C — — — < –60°C or > +410°C = resistance value 7FFFFhex — — — In these cases, the resistance value is 7FFFhex 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.18 Response to cable break or unused inputs Weight kg 4 4 4 4 4 4 XIOC Thermocouple Module Description Unit 4 XIOC-4AI-T Channels Number 4 4 Temperature measuring range Voltage measurement °C mV 4 Type K: –270 to 1370 Type J: –210 to 1200 Type B: 100 to 1800 Type N: –270 to 1300 Type E: –270 to 1000 Type R: –50 to 1760 Type T: –200 to 400 4 4 –50 to 50 –100 to 100 –500 to 500 –1000 to 1000 Cold-junction compensation Yes, built-in Interference suppression 50 Hz, 60 Hz Unit 0.1°C, 0.1 F Resolution bit 16 Total errors % ±0.5 of measurement range Conversion time <1s Temperature coefficient <200 ppm/°C of measurement range 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-45 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Analog Modules Description Unit XIOC-2AO-U1-2AO-I2 XIOC-4AO-U1 XIOC-2AO-U2 4 Modules Output voltage Vdc 0–10 0–10 –10 to 10 4 Output current mA 4–20 — — Resolution bit 12 4 Conversion time 4 4 4 4 4 4 Total errors % External load resistance Voltage output Current output ohm Potential isolation Circuit within each channel 4 4 4 12 <5 ms <5 ms < ±1 (of full-scale value) < ±1 (of full-scale value) < ±1 (of full-scale value) >10 kohm >10 kohm >10 kohm 0 to 500 ohm — — No No With optocouplers Between channels No Number of outputs Output voltage Output current Terminals Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) 4 12 <5 ms mA 2 (channels 0 and 1) 4 2 2 (channels 2 and 3) — — Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Normally 100 Normally 100 Normally 100 External power supply 24 Vdc (–15/+20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15/+20%), approx. 150 mA 24 Vdc (–15/+20%), approx. 150 mA Connection type 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) 2-core shielded cable (<20m) XIOC Analog Modules Description Unit XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1 XIOC-2AI-1AO-U1-I1 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1 XIOC-4AI-2AO-U1-I1 Inputs 4 Input voltage Vdc 0–10 0–10 0–10 0–10 Input current mA — 0–20 — 0–20 4 Resolution bit 14 14 14 14 <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms <1 ms 4 Total errors Normally 0.4 Normally 0.4 Normally 0.4 Normally 0.4 Potential isolation Circuit within each channel No No No No Between the input channels No No No No Between input/output channels No No No No 4 4 4 Conversion time % Channels Number 2 2 4 4 Input resistance kohm 40 40 40 40 4 Outputs Output voltage Vdc 0–10 0–10 0–10 0–10 4 Output current mA — 0–20 — 0–20 Resolution bit 12 12 12 12 4 Errors Normally 0.4% Normally 0.4% Normally 0.4% Normally 0.4% 4 4 4 4 4 Potential isolation Circuit within each channel No No No No No No No No Number of channels 1 1 2 2 External load resistance >2 kohm >2 kohm >2 kohm >2 kohm Short-circuit rating Yes Yes Yes Yes Plug-in terminal block Between the output channels Terminal Connection Terminals Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Plug-in terminal block Internal current consumption (5 Vdc) mA Normally 200 Normally 200 Normally 200 Normally 200 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.16 0.16 4 4 V7-T4-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 XIOC Communication Modules Description Unit 4 XIOC-NET-DP-M XIOC-NET-DP-S XIOC-SER XIOC-TC1 Interfaces PROFIBUS-DP, RS-485, EN 50170 PROFIBUS-DP, RS-485, EN 50170 RS-232(C), RS-422, RS-485 RS-232(C), RS-422, RS-485 Protocol PROFIBUS-DP master (class 1) PROFIBUS-DP slave Transparent mode, Modbus master/slave Transparent mode, Modbus master/slave, DNP3 protocol 4 Character formats — — 8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2, 7N2, 7E1 8E1, 8O1, 8N1, 8N2, 7E2, 7O2, 7N2, 7E1 4 — — RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD RTS, CTS, DTR, DSR, DCD 9.6 to 12,000 9.6 to 12,000 0.3 –57.6 0.3–57.6 4 Potential isolation Yes Yes Yes (RS-485, RS-422) Yes (RS-485, RS-422) Number of slaves 124 — — — Send/receive data 3500 Byte each Max. 244 Byte 250 Byte per slave 120 Byte per slave 250/500 4 4 Interfaces Control and signal cables Transfer rate kbit/s 4 Bus terminating resistors Switchable Switchable Switchable for RS-485, RS-422 Switchable for RS-485, RS-422 Connector type D-sub 9-pin socket D-sub 9-pin socket RS-232: D-sub 9-pin RS-485, 422: plug-in terminal block RS-232: D-sub 9-pin RS-485, 422: plug-in terminal block Current consumption mA <300 <300 <275 <275 Weight kg Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2 Approx. 0.2 Number of modules XC100: 1/XC200: 3 XC100: 1/XC200: 3 XC100: 2/XC200: 4 XC200: 4 Slots 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 Any Any 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-47 4.2 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XIOC Counter Modules Description Unit XIOC-1CNT-100KHZ 0–4294967295 (32 bit) 0–4294967295 (32 bit) 0–4294967295 (32 bit) 200 200 450 4 Inputs 4 Internal current consumption mA Frequency kHz Counter limits XIOC-2CNT-100KHZ XIOC-2CNT-2AO-INC 100 (25 with four times resolution) 100 (25 with four times resolution) 400 (100 with four times resolution) 1 2 2 Vdc 12–24 12–24 — Vdc >10 >10 — VA/W <4 <4 — Input current mA >4 >4 — 4 Differential input voltage Vdc ±5 ±5 ±5 Voltage for ON Vdc 2–5 2–5 0.2–5 4 Voltage for OFF Vdc –5 to 8 –5 to 8 –5 to –0.2 4 Number of channels 4 Input voltage Voltage for ON Voltage for OFF 4 4 Differential input current mA 35 35 5 Minimum pulse width μs ON >4/OFF >4 ON >4/OFF >4 — Potential isolation With optocouplers With optocouplers — Connection for external cabling 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 Plug-in terminal block 4 External cabling Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded, twisted pair cable 4 Output type Transistor (open collector) Transistor (open collector) Analog External power supply 12/24 Vdc (30 max.) 12/24 Vdc (30 max.) — 4 Minimum load current 1 1 — Maximum load current (Ie) mA 20 20 — 4 Max. leakage current mA 0.5 0.5 — Max. voltage drop at ON V 1.5 1.5 — Debounce OFF OFF ON ms <1 <1 — ms <1 <1 — Number 2 4 2 With optocouplers With optocouplers — 4 4 4 Outputs OFF mA ON 4 Output channels 4 Output voltage Vdc — — –10 to 10 Resolution bit — — 12 — — <1 ms — — Normally 0.4 Load resistance — — >1 kohm Connection for external cabling 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 30-pin plug: XIOC-TERM30-CNT4 Plug-in terminal block 4 4 4 Potential isolation Conversion time Total errors % External cabling mA Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded, twisted pair cable Shielded 2-core cable — — <300 5 Vdc 4 Current per channel — — 4 Current consumption mA 200 200 Max. 450 Weight kg 0.16 0.16 0.18 Power supply of encoders 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.2 Power Supply Suppression Filters Description Unit XT-FIL-1 XT-FIL-2 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 4 4 General Standards Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Storage °F (°C) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) –13° to 158° (–25° to 70°) 4 Mounting position Vertical or horizontal Vertical or horizontal 4 Vibration resistance 10–57 Hz ± 0.075 mm 57–150 Hz ± 1.0g 10–57 Hz ± 0.075 mm 57–150 Hz ± 1.0g 4 Mechanical shock resistance 15g/11 ms 15g/11 ms Impact strength 500g /50 mm ±25g 500g/50 mm ±25g Overvoltage category II II Pollution degree 2 2 IP20 IP20 850 850 Protection type Rated impulse withstand voltage (Uimp) V Interference immunity Weight kg Dimensions (W x H x D) mm Terminals EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-2 0.1 0.1 35 x 90 x 30 35 x 90 x 57 Screw terminals Screw terminals 4 4 4 4 4 4 Terminal capacity Screw terminals 4 Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) Solid mm2 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) 0.2–2.5 (AWG22–12) 4 4 Power Supply Input voltage Vdc 24 24 Permissible range Vdc 20.4–28.8 20.4–28.8 Ripple % <5 <5 Mains overvoltage protection Yes Yes Potential isolation Between input voltage and PE Yes Yes Between input voltage and output voltage No No Between output voltage and PE Yes Yes 4 4 Rated value Vdc 24 24 Output current A 2.2 12 4 4 4 4 General Information on Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) of Automation Systems Description Specification Emitted interference EN 55011/22 Class A (VDE 0875, Part 11) 4 4 Interference immunity ESD IEC/EN 61000-4-2 Contact discharge: 4 kV Air discharge 8 kV RFI IEC/EN 61000-4-3 AM (80%) 80–1000 MHz 10V/m Mobile phones/cellphones IEC/EN 61000-4-3 PM 800–960 MHz 10V/m Burst IEC/EN 61000-4-4 Mains/digital I/O (direct): 2 kV Analog I/O, fieldbus (capacitive coupling): 1 kV Surge IEC/EN 61000-4-5 Digital I/O, asymmetric, analog I/O, asymmetric, connection to shielding: 0.5 kV Mains DC, asymmetric: 1 kV Mains DC, symmetric: 1 kV Mains AC, asymmetric: 0.5 kV Mains AC, symmetric: 2 kV Conducted interference, induced by high-frequency fields IEC/EN 61000-4-6; 2003 AM (80%) 4 4 4 4 4 150 kHz–80 MHz 3V 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-49 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 Dimensions 4 XC-CPU101, XC-CPU201, XC-CPU202 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 4 4 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 2.36 (60.0) 4 4 XIOC_ 4 4 3.94 (100.0) 4 2.87 (73.0) 4 4 1.18 (30.0) 3.74 (95.0) 0.83 (21.0) 3.74 (95.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4 4 4 Backplates XIOC-BP-2 XIOC-BP-XC XIOC-BP-3 XIOC-BP-EXT XIOC-BP-XC1 4 0.14 (3.5) 4 3.46 (88.0) 4 1.54 (39.0) 2.36 (60.0) 2.11 (53.5) 4 0.12 (3.0) 0.12 (3.0) 1.54 (39.0) 0.14 (3.5) 3.54 (90.0) 2.11 (53.5) 1.97 (50.0) 1.40 (35.5) 0.19 (5.0) 1.97 (50.0) 4 4 M4 0.18 (4.5) 0.33 (8.5) 4 2.11 (53.5) 2.11 (53.5) 1.97 (50.0) 4 0.55 (14.0) 4 4 0.83 (21.0) 0.04 (1.0) 1.97 (50.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.04 (1.0) 2.36 (60.0) 0.63 (16.0) 4 V7-T4-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.2 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XC-CPU-121_, XIO-EXT121-1 4 XT-RJ45-ETH-RS232 4 4 1.97 (50.0) 4 1.38 (35.0) 3.54 (90.0) 3.94 (100.0) 4 4 1.97 (50.0) 4 1.85 (47.0) 3.54 (90.0) 1.38 (35.0) 1.18 (30.0) 4 4 4 0.63 (16.0) 0.90 (22.8) 1.47 (37.3) 0.24 (6.0) 4 4 4 4 3.46 (88.0) 4 0.34 (8.5) 4 4 0.27 (6.8) 4 0.18 (4.5) 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-51 4.3 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Contents XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description 4 Page XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 V7-T4-53 V7-T4-53 V7-T4-53 V7-T4-54 V7-T4-55 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description The XC152 compact PLC combines plenty of processing power with a large number of communication interfaces. This makes the device particularly well-suited to standardized automation solutions in modular machine building applications. The XC152 not only provides machine segment control functions that can be programmed with CoDeSys, but it can store modulespecific visualizations. These visualizations can be retrieved and displayed on a central HMI or a computer as needed. In addition, the XC152 connects SmartWire-DT systems to standard fieldbus systems via its interfaces. This enables the XC152 PLC to support Eaton’s Lean Automation strategy while enabling users to design automation systems in a flexible manner and run them cost-effectively. Application Description Flexible Solutions for Modular Machine Units In the field of automation, complex processes are subdivided into easily manageable functional units to make programming, production and installation easier. For example, a packaging machine can be subdivided into infeed, positioning (erector), filling and sealing (gluing) modules. Other systems and machines can also be effectively subdivided to create a wide variety of different models or to delimit various expansion stages. With the XC152, a powerful PLC controls individual system modules while making it possible to directly connect SmartWire-DT system devices and standard fieldbus components. Data transfers via the Ethernet interface to OPC clients, together with the available remote visualization system, support a connection to a central control and visualization system. Features and Benefits SmartWire-DT The XC152 relies on Eaton’s tried-and-true SmartWire-DT connection system, eliminating the need for control current wiring in every single machine module and simplifying the commissioning process by means of better diagnostic options. This results in significant design, commissioning and maintenance cost reductions. Standard CAN and PROFIBUS Fieldbus Systems Servo drives, frequency inverters and hydraulic components can all be easily connected using the large number of fieldbus interfaces available on the XC152. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Standards and Certifications ● Visualization The integrated Web visualization function offers a key advantage, as machine module diagnostic and visualization information can be displayed on a central HMI or a terminal. CoDeSys PLC and Web visualization Galileo/CoDeSys remote visualization Ethernet port on all models Windows® CE 5 operating system 32-bit RISC CPU at 400 MHz 64 MB internal memory SD card slot for external memory Run/Stop switch Optional: Integrated SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes Optional: RS-232, RS-485, PROFIBUS-DP/MPI, CANopen/easyNet ● ● ● IEC/EN 61131-2, EN 50178 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 cULus CE 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.3 Catalog Number Selection 4 XC152 PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT 4 XC-152 – E6 – 11 4 Family XC-152 = Windows CE OS CoDeSys firmware Mounting 11 = DIN rail or panel mount Features Base Unit Variant D = Ethernet, RS-485 and USB host E = SmartWire-DT, Ethernet and USB host 4 4 Features Additional COMM Options 3 = None 6 = 1-CANopen 8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP 4 4 4 Product Selection 4 XC152 PLC XC152 PLC CoDeSys Firmware Fieldbus Type Yes CANopen Yes PROFIBUS-DP RS-485 Ethernet Catalog Number Yes Yes Yes XC-152-D6-11 Yes Yes Yes XC-152-D8-11 RS-232 4 4 4 4 XC152 PLC SmartWire-DT XC152 PLC SmartWire-DT CoDeSys Firmware Fieldbus Type SmartWire-DT Catalog Number RS-232 RS-485 Ethernet 4 Yes None Y None Yes CANopen None Yes Yes Yes XC-152-E3-11 Yes Yes XC-152-E6-11 4 Yes PROFIBUS-DP None Yes Yes Yes XC-152-E8-11 4 4 Accessories 4 4 XC PLC Accessories Description Catalog Number PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-53 4.3 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Technical Data and Specifications XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers Description Unit XC-152-D6-11 XC-152-D8-11 XC-152-E3-11 XC-152-E6-11 XC-152-E8-11 RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz RISC, 32 bit at 400 MHz Mbyte 64 64 64 64 64 NAND FLASH (can be used for data security) Mbyte Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available Approx. 128 available NVRAM (retain) kByte Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available Approx. 32 available SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 SDA Specification 1.00 4 System 4 Internal memory DRAM (OS-, program and data memory) 4 4 Processor 4 External memory SD memory card slot 4 Real-time clock (battery backup) Battery (not rechargeable) 4 Backup time at zero voltage Operating system 4 Engineering 4 Visualization WEB-VISU PLC-Programming software Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Zero maintenance Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Normally 10 years Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 Windows CE 5 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys 2/3 CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Galileo/CoDeSys Ethernet 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T 100Base-TX/10Base-T USB host 1 — — — — — USB device 1 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 System port (RS-232) 1 ■ ■ ■ — — SmartWire-DT 1 — — ■ ■ ■ 4 CAN 1 ■ — — ■ — PROFIBUS/MP 1 — ■ — — ■ 4 RS-485 1 ■ ■ — ■ ■ 4 Rated operating voltage 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV 24 Vdc SELV Max. 5 Max. 5 Max. 5 Max. 5 Max. 5 Protect against polarity reversal Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Approvals CE, cULus CE, cULus CE, cULus CE, cULus CE, cULus 4 Remote Client Communication Interfaces 4 4 4 General Power consumption 4 4 W Ambient air temperature °C 0 to 55 0 to 55 0 to 55 0 to 55 0 to 55 Storage temperature °C –40 to +70 –40 to +70 –40 to +70 –40 to +70 –40 to +70 Protection type IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 4 Flush mounting DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail EN 60715, 35 mm Dimensions (H x W x D) mm 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 105 x 155 x 40 4 Weight (approximate) kg 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 IEC/EN 61131-2, EN50178 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4 4 4 4 Applied standards and directives Product standard EMC Note 1 Interface not galvanically isolated. 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4.3 Dimensions 4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 XC152 Series Programmable Logic Controllers 4 1.63 (41.5) Ø 0.18 (4.5) 4 4 4 4.77 (121.2) 4 4.34 (110.2) 4.16 (105.6) 4.04 (102.6) 4 4 4 4 0.06 (1.5) 5.15 (130.8) 4 1.99 (50.6) 4 6.11 (155.1) With Fixing Brackets 4 Without Fixing Brackets 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-55 4.4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XV Series HMI-PLCs Contents XV Series HMI-PLC Description 4 Page XV Series HMI-PLC Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 V7-T4-57 V7-T4-57 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Description Features The XV HMI-PLC is a powerful combination of logic and visualization based on the open CoDeSys programming platform. It is ideal for small to mid-range PLC applications where integrated logic and visualization is advantageous and/or where remote administration is critical. ● ● ● ● The XV HMI-PLC is also available with an integrated SmartWire-DT™ master. This combination of visualization, control and SmartWire-DT connectivity is the ultimate lean automation solution. ● Built-in SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes Brilliant image display with 65,536 colors High resolution resistive touch TFT displays 3.5 in, 5.7 in or 7 in widescreen displays in a robust plastic housings and bezels, or 5.7 in, 8.4 in or 10.4 in displays in high-end aluminum front bezels and metal housings ● ● ● ● ● Ethernet on all models RS-232 or RS-485 serial ports available PROFIBUS-DP or CANopen master on all models larger than 3.5 in Programmable with IEC 61131-3 compliant XSoft-CoDeSys software Easy connection direct to motor control components or I/O modules on the SmartWire-DT flat cable Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● CE UL cUL RoHS 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection XV HMI-PLC 4 XV – 102 – E6 – 35TQRG – 10 4 4 4 4 Family Bezel 10 = Standard blank front bezel XV = Windows® CE operating system Housing 102 = Plastic housing 152 = Metal housing 4 Features Base Unit Variant B = Retentive memory D = Retentive memory, USB host, RS-232 E = SmartWire-DT, retentive memory, USB host, RS-232 Features Additional COMM Options 6 = 1-CANopen 8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP E = SmartWire-DT Display Size 35 = 3.5 in 57 = 5.7 in 70 = 7.0 in 84 = 8.4 in 10 = 10.4 in Display Technology TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive TWR = TFT (WGA) resistive OS Build C = XSoft-CoDeSys 4 4 V7-T4-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XV Series HMI-PLCs Product Selection 4 XV HMI-PLC XV HMI-PLC Display Resolution CoDeSys Firmware 3.5 in TFT Resistive QVGA 320x240 5.7 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 7.0 in TFT Resistive WGA 800x480 Display Size/Type 4 Fieldbus Type RS485 Ethernet Catalog Number 4 Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10 4 Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10 Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10 Plastic Housing 4 4 4 Metal Housing 5.7 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10 8.4 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10 10.4 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10 4 4 4 4 4 XV HMI-PLC SmartWire-DT Display Size/Type Display Resolution CoDeSys Firmware Fieldbus Type RS485 Ethernet SmartWire-DT Catalog Number 4 3.5 in TFT QVGA 320x240 Y None None Y Y XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10 4 5.7 in TFT VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10 4 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10 WGA 800x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10 4 4 Plastic Housing 7.0 in TFT Metal Housing 5.7 in TFT 8.4 in TFT 10.4 in TFT VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10 VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10 VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10 4 4 4 4 4 Accessories 4 XV HMI-PLC Accessories Description Catalog Number HMI-PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 1 HMI-PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 1 SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S XV-102 parts kit (1 power conductor, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen) ACC-TP-57-KG-1 XV-152 parts kit (1 power conductor, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen) ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1 4 4 4 4 Note 1 For details on SW-XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Page V7-T4-33. 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-57 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Contents XI/ON Series Remote I/O Description 4 XI/ON Series Remote I/O Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Connection Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Overview Whether for controlling movements, measuring temperature or speed, or logging currents and voltages, the application ranges for remote I/Os are as extensive as the different applications involved. They are used wherever decentralized signal processing is the essential element of the automation concept. Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● UL File No. E205091 UL CCN—NRAQ, NRAQ7 cULus CE RoHS Thanks to the high modularity of the XI/ON system and the wide range of functions, Eaton is able to offer the right I/O solution for every application. XI/ON: A modular concept with simple handling— adaptable to any application, intelligent and ready for future developments. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T4-59 V7-T4-60 V7-T4-62 V7-T4-66 V7-T4-75 V7-T4-76 V7-T4-89 V7-T4-101 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Product Selection Guide 4 XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4 4 4 4 4 XI/ON As many as needed, as few as possible— this is the principle on which the XI/ON modular I/O system was built. An extensive range of digital and analog I/Os as well as technology modules are available. ● High level of modularity ● Fieldbuses: CANopen, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet and Ethernet ● Bus-independent, pluggable modules ● Low wiring requirement ● Precise diagnostics ● Space and cost saving with XNE modules ● Programmable CANopen gateway ● Standard and XNE modules can be mixed XNE Gateways and Integrated Modules XN Standard Gateways and Plug-in Modules Page V7-T4-66 Page V7-T4-68 XI/ON XNE completes the XI/ON I/O system with price and space optimized I/O modules and gateways. The XNE gateways use the EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP Ethernet, CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP bus systems. ● XNE gateways with integrated bus terminating resistors ● Full compatibility with the standard XI/ON system ● No base module required ● High channel density (up to 16 DI/DO on 12.5 mm width) ● “Push-In” spring-loaded terminals ● Multi-functional slices ● Diagnostics interface The standard gateways use the Modbus TCP, DeviceNet, Ethernet, CANopen and PROFIBUS-DP bus systems. ● The use of pluggable I/O modules is independent on the fieldbus used ● Wiring is implemented on the base module, fixed wiring ● Fast module exchange under power (hot swapping) ● Generation of diagnostics information to higher-level controller ● Up to 74 slice modules can be connected per gateway ● Mechanical coding of modules ● Diagnostics interface 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Programmable CANopen Gateway Base Modules for Every Requirement Page V7-T4-68 Page V7-T4-72 The programmable CANopen gateway brings the power of the PLC directly to the fieldbus terminal. The device is ideal for handling decentralized automation tasks and thus for relieving the load of a higherlevel PLC. The base modules are used to connect the field wiring for the standard XI/ON modules. They are available for 2-, 3- and 4-wire connections, as block or slice modules, with either spring-loaded terminals or screw terminals—the right format for every application. The serial onboard interface is used for local programming access and as an interface for the I/Oassistant configuration and diagnostics tool. Alternatively, this interface can also be used as a free user interface. The gateway is programmed with XSoft-CoDeSys-2. I/Oassistant—the Universal Configuration and Diagnostics Tool 4 4 The I/Oassistant provides you with a universal tool that offers interactive support with the entire planning and implementation of your XI/ON installation. The I/Oassistant is integrated in XSoft-CoDeSys-2. 4 4 A project is first of all created and structured on the screen. For this you choose gateways, electronic and base modules as well as the appropriate accessories. The individual stations are then configured offline or online. Once everything is set to your satisfaction, you simply put your installation into operation. The I/Oassistant also automatically generates a parts list for your order. 4 4 4 4 I/Oassistant checks the station, reads the process data, outputs values and visualizes the diagnostics data of the channel. This enables you to commission your station without a higher-level PLC and ensure that a section of the system is functioning correctly. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4 4 4 V7-T4-59 4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Catalog Number Selection Gateway Modules XNE - GWBR - 2ETH - IP 4 Module Type XNE = Integrated I/O Modules XN = Plug-in I/O Modules 4 Gateway Type GWBR = Standard Gateway PLC = Programmable Gateway 4 4 Fieldbus Type 2ETH-IP = EtherNet/IP 2ETH-MB = Modbus TCP/Ethernet MODBUS-TCP = Modbus TCP/Ethernet DVP1 = PROFIBUS-DP (DVP1) PBDP = PROFIBUS-DP (DVP0) CANOPEN = CANopen DNET = DeviceNet 4 4 Digital I/O Modules XNE - 16DO - 24VDC - 0.5A - P 4 Module Type XNE = Integrated I/O Modules XN = Plug-in I/O Modules 4 4 Switching P = Positive switching N = Negative switching Number of Digital I/O DI = Number of digital inputs DO = Number of digital outputs 4 Rated Voltage VDC = 24 Vdc VAC = 120/230 Vac Current Rating 4 4 Analog I/O Modules XN - 2AO - U - (–10/0 … +10 Vdc) 4 4 Module Type XNE = Integrated I/O Modules XN = Plug-in I/O Modules 4 Number of Analog I/O AI = Number of analog inputs AO = Number of analog outputs Input/Output Range I = 0/4 to 20 mA U = –10/0 to +10 Vdc U/I = 0/4 to 20 mA or –10/0 to +10 Vdc 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Base Modules 4 XN - S 6 T - S B C S B C 4 Module Type XN = Plug-in I/O modules Terminals 16 and 26 B = Bridged terminals C = Common bus terminals S = Signal terminals Module Type B = Block module (white) P = Power module (gray) S = Slice module (white) 4 4 Terminals 15 and 25 B = Bridged terminals C = Common bus terminals S = Signal terminals Connection Levels 3 = 3 levels 4 = 4 levels 6 = 6 levels Terminal Connections S = Screw terminals T = Spring-cage terminals 4 4 4 Terminals 14 and 24 B = Bridged terminals C = Common bus terminals S = Signal terminals 4 4 Terminals 13 and 23 B = Bridged terminals C = Common bus terminals S = Signal terminals 4 4 4 Terminals 12 and 22 B = Bridged terminals C = Common bus terminals S = Signal terminals 4 4 Terminals 11 and 21 B = Bridged terminals C = Common bus terminals S = Signal terminals 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-61 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O System Overview System Configuration 4 XN Module and Base Compatibility Chart XN-S4S-SBCS XN-S4T-SBCS XN-S4S-SBBS-CJ XN-S4T-SBBS-CJ XN-S6S-SBBSBB XN-S6T-SBBSBB XN-S6S-SBCSBC XN-S6T-SBCSBC XN-B3S-SBB XN-B3T-SBB XN-B3S-SBC XN-B3T-SBC XN-B4S-SBBC XN-B4T-SBBC XN-B6S-SBBSBB XN-B6T-SBBSBB XN-B6S-SBCSBC XN-B6T-SBCSBC XN-P3S-SBB XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3S-SBB-B XN-P3T.-SBB-B XN-P4S-SBBC XN-P4T-SBBC XN-P4S-SBBC-B XN-P4T-SBBC-B — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ✓ — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-2DI-120/230VAC ✓ — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-4DI-24VDC-P — — — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-4DI-24VDC-N — — — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — XN-16DI-24VDC-P — — — — — — — — ✓ — ✓ — — — — — — XN-32DI-24VDC-P — — — — — — — — — — — ✓ — — — — — 4 4 4 XN-S4S-SBBC XN-S4T-SBBC ✓ XN-2DI-24VDC-N 4 XN-S3S-SBC XN-S3T-SBC XN-2DI-24VDC-P 4 XN-S3S-SBB XN-S3T-SBB 4 Base Modules XN-S4S-SBBS XN-S4T-SBBS 4 Electronics Modules Digital Input Modules Digital Output Modules XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P — — — — ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P — — — — — — — — — ✓ — — — — — — — XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P — — — — — — — — — — — — ✓ — — — — XN-2DO-R-NC — — — ✓ ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-2DO-R-NO — — — ✓ ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-2DO-R-CO — — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-1AI-I(0/4…20MA) ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-1AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) ✓ — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 4 4 4 Relay Modules Analog Input Modules ✓ — ✓ — XN-2AI-THERMO-PI — — — — — ✓ — XN-4AI-U/I — — — — — — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — 4 Analog Output Modules XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 Technology Modules XN-1CNT-24VDC — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 ✓ XN-1RS232 — — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-1RS485/422 — — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — XN-1SSI — — — ✓ — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 4 Supply Modules XN-BR-24VDC-D — — — — — — — — — — — — — ✓1 ✓2 ✓1 ✓2 4 XN-PF-24VDC-D — — — — — — — — — — — — — ✓ — ✓ — XN-PF-120/230VAC-D — — — — — — — — — — — — — ✓ — ✓ — 4 4 Notes 1 Base module for gateway supply. 2 Base module for bus refreshing within the station. V7-T4-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Maximum System Configuration Plan your XI/ON station with the software “I/Oassistant”. Maximum 74 XI/ON Modules in Slice Design 4 4 Advantage 1: Automatically generates a full parts list for your order. Style Number: Catalog Number: 4 Advantage 2: Generates an error message as soon as the system limits are exceeded. 4 IMPORTANT: When extending your system, make sure that you have a sufficient number of bus refresh or power feed modules. 4 140045 XNE-GWBR-PBDP Channels Modules 140044 XNE-GWBR-CANOPEN Channels Modules 140047 XNE-GWBR-2ETH-IP Channels Modules 152279 XNE-GWBR-2ETH-MB Channels Modules XN-4DI-24VDC-P 136 34 244 61 288 72 288 72 XN-4DI-24VDC-N 136 34 244 61 288 72 288 72 XN-16DI-24VDC-P 128 8 128 8 128 8 128 8 Modules XN-32DI-24VDC-P 256 8 256 8 256 8 256 8 XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 384 48 512 64 512 64 512 64 XNE-16DI-24VDC-P 768 48 512 32 512 32 512 32 XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 132 33 244 61 288 72 288 72 XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 128 8 128 8 128 8 128 8 XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 256 8 256 8 256 8 256 8 XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 384 48 488 61 512 64 512 64 XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 640 40 512 32 512 32 512 32 XN-2DO-R-_ 70 35 122 61 144 72 144 72 XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) 56 28 100 50 126 63 126 63 XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 56 28 100 50 126 63 126 63 XN-2AI-PT/NI2/3 44 22 98 49 126 63 126 63 XN-2AI-THERMO-PI 44 22 98 49 126 63 126 63 XN-4AI-U/I 64 (132) 16 (33) 108 27 124 31 124 31 XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI 72 (120) 9 (15) 144 18 128 16 128 16 XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) 50 25 70 35 126 63 126 63 XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 46 23 70 35 126 63 126 63 XNE-4AO-U/I 64 (76) 16 (19) 108 27 64 16 64 16 XN-1CNT-24VDC 13 13 27 27 31 31 31 31 XN-1RS232 7 7 27 27 31 31 31 31 XN-1RS485/422 16 16 27 27 31 31 31 31 XN-1SSI 20 20 27 27 31 31 31 31 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note Numeric values in parentheses. Maximum number when diagnostic alarm disabled. The supply module XN-BR-24VDC-D must be mounted immediately next to the gateway XN-GW-_ to provide power for the gateways. 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-63 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Maximum System Configuration, continued Plan your XI/ON station with the software “I/Oassistant”. Maximum 74 XI/ON Modules in Slice Design 4 Advantage 1: Automatically generates a full parts list for your order. 4 Advantage 2: Generates an error message as soon as the system limits are exceeded. 4 4 IMPORTANT: When extending your system, make sure that you have a sufficient number of bus refresh or power feed modules. 4 4 4 Style Number: Catalog Number: 140154 XN-GWBR-PBDP Channels Modules 140055 XN-GWBR-CANOPEN Channels Modules 140156 XN-GWBR-DNET Channels Modules 140162 XN-GWBR-MODBUS-TCP Channels Modules XN-4DI-24VDC-P 288 72 288 72 288 72 288 4 XN-4DI-24VDC-N 288 72 288 72 288 72 288 72 XN-16DI-24VDC-P 128 8 128 8 128 8 128 8 4 XN-32DI-24VDC-P 256 8 256 8 256 8 256 8 XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 592 74 512 64 576 72 512 64 4 XNE-16DI-24VDC-P 1184 74 512 32 1152 72 512 32 4 4 4 Modules 72 XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 288 72 288 72 128 32 288 72 XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 128 8 128 8 128 8 128 8 XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 256 8 256 8 256 8 256 8 XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 592 74 512 64 256 32 512 64 4 XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 1168 73 512 32 512 32 512 32 XN-2DO-R-_ 144 72 144 72 64 32 144 72 4 XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) 78 39 144 72 32 16 144 72 XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 78 39 144 72 32 16 144 72 4 XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 46 23 144 72 32 16 144 72 XN-2AI-THERMO-PI 58 (76) 29 (38) 144 72 32 16 144 72 XN-4AI-U/I 112 28 144 36 64 16 144 36 XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI 88 11 144 18 128 16 144 18 XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) 38 19 144 72 32 16 144 72 4 4 4 4 XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 38 19 144 72 32 16 144 72 XNE-4AO-U/I 36 9 144 36 64 16 124 31 4 XN-1CNT-24VDC 7 7 72 72 16 16 72 72 XN-1RS232 22 22 68 68 8 8 68 68 4 XN-1RS485/422 22 22 72 72 8 8 72 72 XN-1SSI 22 22 72 72 8 8 72 72 4 4 Note Numeric values in parentheses. Maximum number when diagnostic alarm disabled. 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-64 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 System Overview 4 5 4 4 4 3 4 4 1 4 2 4 8 7 4 4 4 8 4 6 4 4 4 4 13 12 11 10 9 5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 14 4 Item Number Description Item Number 4 Description 1 Gateway 8 End bracket 2 Digital input module 9 Power supply module 3 Relay module 10 Analog input module 4 Coding element 11 Digital output module 5 Base module 12 Analog output module 6 Relay jumper 13 Technology module 7 End plate 14 Marker 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-65 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Product Selection XNE Series 4 4 The following are included as standard with all gateways: 2 x End bracket XN-WEW-32/2-SW, 1 x End plate XN-ABPL. XNE Gateway with Integrated Supply 4 4 4 Description XNE Gateways 4 4 4 4 Fieldbus Connection Terminal Capacity (Fieldbus/Supply Voltage) Servicing Interface Transfer Rate Style Number Catalog Number Ethernet Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE) 2xRJ45 socket Address set with decimal rotary coding switches, BootP, DHCP or I/Oassistant Address range: 1–254 (dec.) Ethernet (EtherNet/IP protocol) Push-in spring-cage terminals Mini USB 10/100 MBit/s 140047 XNE-GWBR-2ETH-IP Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE) RJ45 Ethernet switch Address set with decimal rotary coding switches, BootP, DHCP or I/Oassistant Address range: 1–254 (dec.) Ethernet (Modbus TCP) Push-in spring-cage terminals Mini USB 10/100 MBit/s 152279 XNE-GWBR-2ETH-MB PROFIBUS-DP (DPV0/DPV1 protocol) Push-in spring-cage terminals PS/2 socket 9.6 kbit/s to 140045 12 Mbit/s XNE-GWBR-PBDP CANopen Push-in spring-cage terminals PS/2 socket 1000 kbit/s 800 kbit/s 500 kbit/s 250 kbit/s 125 kbit/s 50 kbit/s 20 kbit/s XNE-GWBR-CANOPEN 4 4 PROFIBUS-DP 4 Supports up to 48 slice type modules (XN, XNE) Address setting through DIP switch Address range: 1–125 (dec.) 4 4 4 4 4 CANopen 4 Supports up to 62 disc type modules (XN, XNE) Address set with DIP switch Address range: 1–63 (dec.) 4 4 140044 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XNE Digital Input XNE Digital Input Modules Positive switching. 4 Channels Rated Voltage via Power Supply Terminal Input Delay tRise/tFall Input Voltage High Signal Style Number Catalog Number 8 24 Vdc <100/<200 μs 11 V-UL 140035 XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 16 24 Vdc <150/<300 μs 11 V-UL 140040 XNE-16DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 XNE Digital Output XNE Digital Output Modules Resistive inductive and lamp load connectable. 4 Channels Rated Voltage via Power Supply Terminal Switching Frequency with Resistive Load in Hz Utilization Factor g in % Style Number Catalog Number 8 24 Vdc <100 16 24 Vdc <100 100 140036 XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 50%, maximum 4A 140039 XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 4 XNE Analog Input 4 XNE Analog Input and RTD Module Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. Channels Measured Variables Measuring Ranges Value Representation 8 (U/I)/ 4 (PT/NI/R) Voltage, current temperature (PT, NI), resistance R –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc PT100, 200, 500, 1000, NI100, 1000 2-, 3-wire Standard: 16-bit/12-bit (flush-left) 4 Limit Frequency Style in Hz Number Catalog Number 1.5 XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI 140037 4 4 Extended range: 16-bit/12-bit (flush-left) PA (NE43), 16-bit/12-bit (flush-left) 4 4 XNE Analog Output XNE Counter XNE Analog Output Module Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. 4 Channels Measured Variables Output Variables Value Representation 4 Voltage, current –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Standard: 16-bit/12-bit (flush-left) Style Number Catalog Number 140034 XNE-4AO-U/I 1 4 4 4 4 XNE Counter Module Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. Signal evaluation A, B: Pulse and direction, rotary encoder single/double/quadruple. Channels Operating Modes Pulse Duration PWM Module 2 Continuous, once only and periodic counting 32-bit/maximum 120s ✓ 4 Resolution Style Number Catalog Number 32-bit 140038 XNE-2CNT-2PWM Note 1 cUL pending. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-67 4.5 4 4 XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN Series The following are included as standard with all gateways: 2 x End bracket XN-WEW-32/2-SW, 1 x End plate XN-ABPL. 4 XN Gateway with Integrated Supply 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products Terminal Capacity (Fieldbus/Supply Voltage) Servicing Interface Transfer Rate Ethernet (Modbus TCP protocol) Screw terminals PS/2 socket 10/100 Mbit/s 140162 XN-GWBR-MODBUS-TCP DeviceNet Screw terminals PS/2 socket 500 kbit/s 250 kbit/s 125 kbit/s 140156 XN-GWBR-DNET CANopen Screw terminals PS/2 socket 1000 kbit/s 800 kbit/s 500 kbit/s 250 kbit/s 125 kbit/s 50 kbit/s 20 kbit/s 10 kbit/s 140155 XN-GWBR-CANOPEN Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE) PROFIBUS-DP Screw terminals 1 x D-sub 9-pin socket (DVP1 protocol) Address set with decimal rotary coding switches Address range: 1–99 (dec.) PS/2 socket 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s 148561 XN-GWBR-DVP1 Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE) PROFIBUS-DP Screw terminals 1 x D-sub 9-pin socket (DVP0 protocol) Address set with decimal rotary coding switches Address range: 1–99 (dec.) PS/2 socket 9.6 kbit/s to 12 Mbit/s 140154 XN-GWBR-PBDP Style Number Catalog Number Description XN-GWBR-MODBUS_ 4 Style Number Catalog Number Ethernet Supports up to 74 slice type modules (XN, XNE) 1 x RJ45 socket Address set with decimal rotary coding switches, BootP, DHCP or I/Oassistant Address range: 1–254 (dec.) 4 Fieldbus Connection 4 4 4 XN-GWBR-D_, XN-GWBR-C_ 4 4 Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE) 1 x open-style connector Address set with two decimal rotary coding switches Address range: 1–63 (dec.) CANopen 4 Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE) 1 x open-style connector Address set with two decimal rotary coding switches Address range: 1–99 (dec.) 4 4 4 DeviceNet XN-GWBR-DVP1 4 4 4 4 PROFIBUS-DP 4 4 4 XN-PLC-CANOPEN 4 XN Programmable Gateway with Integrated Supply Description Fieldbus Connection Terminal Capacity (Fieldbus/Supply Voltage) Servicing Interface Transfer Rate CANOpen Screw terminals PS/2 socket Adjustable up 140157 to 1 Mbit/s CANopen 4 Supports up to 74 disc type modules (XN, XNE to limited extent) 1 x open-style connector Operating mode and address setting with two hexadecimal rotary coding switches Address range: 1–99 (dec.) 4 4 XN-PLC-CANOPEN 4 4 4 V7-T4-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Slice Module XN Power Supply Modules Number of diagnostic bits: 4. Ripple <5% (to EN 61131-2). 4 Operating and Field Voltage System Power Supply Rated Current Consumption from Modbus 24 Vdc 24 Vdc — Maximum System Supply Current 1.5A 4 For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3S-SBB XN-P4T-SBBC XN-P4S-SBBC XN-P3T-SBB-B XN-P3S-SBB-B XN-P4T-SBBC-B XN-P4S-SBBC-B 140071 XN-BR-24VDC-D 4 4 4 24 Vdc — <28 mA — XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3S-SBB XN-P4T-SBBC XN-P4S-SBBC 140070 XN-PF-24VDC-D 120/230 Vac — <25 mA — XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3S-SBB XN-P4T-SBBC XN-P4S-SBBC 140072 XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 4 4 4 4 4 XN Digital Input Modules Base module required. Slice Module 4 4 Channels Rated Voltage via Power Supply Terminal Input Delay tRise/tFall Input Voltage High Signal For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number 2 24 Vdc <200/<200 μs 11–30 Vdc XN-S3T-SBB XN-S3S-SBB XN-S4T-SBBC XN-S4S-SBBC 140056 XN-2DI-24VDC-P 140057 XN-2DI-24VDC-N 140058 XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS XN-S6T-SBBSBB XN-S6S-SBBSBB 140052 XN-4DI-24VDC-P 140059 XN-4DI-24VDC-N 0–5 Vdc 2 120/230 Vac <20,000/<20,000 μs 79–265 Vac 4 24 Vdc <200/<200 μs 15–30 Vdc 0–5 Vdc 4 4 4 4 4 Block Module 16 24 Vdc <200/<200 μs 15–30 Vdc XN-B3T-SBB XN-B3S-SBB XN-B4T-SBBC XN-B4S-SBBC 140142 XN-16DI-24VDC-P 32 24 Vdc <200/<200 μs 15–30 Vdc XN-B6T-SBBSBB XN-B6S-SBBSBB 140147 XN-32DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-69 4.5 XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN Digital Output Modules Base module required. Resistive inductive and lamp load connectable. 4 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products Slice Module Channels Rated Voltage via Power Supply Terminal Switching Frequency with Resistive Utilization Load in Hz Factor g in % 2 24 Vdc <5000 (RLO <1 kohm) 100 <100 (RLO <1 kohm) 4 <5000 (RLO <1 kohm) 4 XN-S3T-SBC XN-S3S-SBC XN-S4T-SBCS XN-S4S-SBCS 140053 XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 140060 XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N 140055 XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P 140150 XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A Catalog Number 120–230 Vac (45–65 Hz) — 100 (observe derating requirements) 4 24 Vdc <1000 (RLO <1 kohm) 100 XN-S4T-SBCS XN-S4S-SBCS XN-S6T-SBCSBC XN-S6S-SBCSBC 140148 XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 16 24 Vdc <100 (RLO <1 kohm) 100 XN-B3T-SBC XN-B3S-SBC 140141 XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 32 24 Vdc <100 (RLO <1 kohm) See total module current XN-B6T-SBCSBC XN-B6S-SBCSBC 140161 XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number Block Module 4 Style Number 2 4 4 For Use With … 4 4 4 Slice Module 4 XN Relay Modules Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. Resistive inductive and lamp load connectable. 4 4 4 Rated Load Voltage Maximum Continuous Current per Channel/ 230 Vac Resistive Load Channels Contact Type 2 Changeover Contacts 230 Vac, 30 Vdc 5A XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS 140054 XN-2DO-R-CO 2 NC 230 Vac, 30 Vdc 5A XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS XN-S4T-SBCS XN-S4S-SBCS 140061 XN-2DO-R-NC 140062 XN-2DO-R-NO For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number XN-S3T-SBB XN-S3S-SBB XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS 140063 XN-1AI-I 140144 XN-2AI-I 140064 XN-1AI-U 140145 XN-2AI-U 140158 XN-4AI-U/I 4 NO 4 4 Slice Module 4 4 4 XN Analog Input Modules Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. Channels Measured Variables Measuring Range Value Representation 1 Current 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA Standard 16-bit/12-bit (flush left) 2 4 1 2 4 4 4 Voltage –10…10 Vdc, 0…10 Vdc Voltage/Current –10…10 Vdc, 0…10 Vdc Limit Frequency in Hz — — 200 50 20 XN-S6T-SBCSBC XN-S6S-SBCSBC 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Slice Module XN Temperature Modules Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. 4 Channels Connectable Sensors Measuring Range (°C) Value Representation For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number 2 PT100. 200. 500, 1000 Platinum sensors: –200…850/–200…150 XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 Nickel sensors: –60…250/–60…150 XN-S3T-SBB XN-S3S-SBB XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS 140067 Ni100, Ni1000 Standard 16-bit/12-bit (flush left) Type B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T Thermocouples See user manual Standard 16-bit/12-bit (flush left) XN-S4T-SBBS-CJ XN-S4S-SBBS-CJ 140068 2 Slice Module 4 4 4 XN-2AI-THERMO-PI 1 4 4 XN Analog Output Modules Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. 4 4 Channels Measured Variables Output Variables Value Representation For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number 1 Current 0–20 mA/4–20 mA Standard 16-bit/12-bit (flush left) XN-S3T-SBB XN-S3S-SBB 140065 XN-1AO-I 140146 XN-2AO-I 140066 XN-2AO-U 2 2 Voltage 4 –10…10 Vdc/0…10 Vdc 4 4 4 Slice Module XN Counter Modules Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. Signal evaluation A, B: Pulse and direction, rotary encoder single/double/quadruple. Channels 1 Operating Modes Pulse Duration Continuous, once only and periodic counting 8-bit max. 0.51s Resolution 32-bit 4 4 For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS 140069 XN-1CNT-24VDC 4 4 4 Slice Module XN Serial Interfaces Base module required. Rated voltage via power supply terminal: 24 Vdc. 4 4 Type Transfer Channels Bit Transfer Rate RS-232 RxD, TxD, RTS, CTS Max. 15m RS-485/RS-422 RxD, TxD Max. 115,200 bits/s (adjustable) SS1 CL, D Max. 1 MHz (adjustable) Max. 30m Cable Length Max. 30m For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS 140151 XN-1RS232 140152 XN-1RS485/422 140153 XN-1SSI 4 4 4 Note 1 cUL pending. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-71 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Base Modules Spring-Cage Terminals 4 Description 4 For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number 140074 XN-P3T-SBB Three Connection Levels Slice Module Base module for field power supply Base module for the gateway supply (with XN-BR-24VDC-D) XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D Base module for bus refresh within the station XN-BR-24VDC-D 140073 XN-P3T-SBB-B — XN-2DI-_ XN-1AI-_ XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-_ 140077 XN-S3T-SBB Connection to C rail XN-2DO-24VDC-_ XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A 140079 XN-S3T-SBC — XN-16DI-24VDC-P 140133 XN-B3T-SBB Connection to C rail XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5-P 140134 XN-B3T-SBC XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 140076 XN-P4T-SBBC 4 Base module for field power supply Base module for the gateway supply (with XN-BR-24VDC-D) Connection to C rail 4 Base module for bus refresh within the station Connection to C rail XN-BR-24VDC-D 140075 XN-P4T-SBBC-B 4 Connection to C rail XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-2DI-120/230VAC 140078 XN-S4T-SBBC Connection to C rail XN-2DO-24VDC-_ XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-R-NO XN-2DO-R-NC 140080 XN-S4T-SBCS — XN-4DI-_ XN-2DO-R-_ XN-1AI-_ XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XN-1CNT-24VDC XN-1RS_ 140081 XN-S4T-SBBS Base module with temperature sensors for cold-junction compensation XN-2AI-THERMO-PI 140084 XN-S4T-SBBS-CJ Connection to C rail XN-16DI-24VDC-P 140135 XN-B4T-SBBC 4 4 4 4 4 4 Block Module 4 4 4 4 Four Connection Levels 4 Slice Module 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Block Module 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Spring-Cage Terminals, continued Description For Use With … 4 Style Number Catalog Number 4 Six Connection Levels Slice Module — XN-4DI-24VDC-P XN-4DI-24VDC-N 140082 XN-S6T-SBBSBB 4 Connection to C rail XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-4AI-U/I 140083 XN-S6T-SBCSBC 4 4 4 4 Block Module — XN-32DI-24VDC-P 140136 XN-B6T-SBBSBB Connection to C rail XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 140159 XN-B6T-SBCSBC 4 4 4 4 4 4 Screw Terminals Description For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number XN-P3S-SBB 4 4 Three Connection Levels Slice Module Block Module Base module for field power supply Base module for the gateway supply (with XN-BR-24VDC-D) XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 140085 — XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-1AI-_ XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-_ 140088 Connection to C rail XN-2DO-24VDC-_ XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A 140090 XN-S3S-SBC — XN-16DI-24VDC-P 140137 XN-B3S-SBB Connection to C rail XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 140138 XN-B3S-SBC 4 XN-S3S-SBB 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-73 4.5 XI/ON Series Remote I/O Screw Terminals, continued 4 Description 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products Style Number Catalog Number Four Connection Levels Slice Module 4 4 Base module for field power supply Base module for the gateway supply (with XN-BR-24VDC-D) Connection to C rail XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 140087 XN-P4S-SBBC Base module for bus refresh within the station Connection to C rail XN-BR-24VDC-D 140086 XN-P4S-SBBC-B Connection to C rail XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-2DI-120/230VAC 140089 XN-S4S-SBBC Connection to C rail XN-2DO-24VDC-_ XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-R-NO XN-2DO-R-NC 140091 XN-S4S-SBCS — XN-4DI-_ XN-2DO-R-_ XN-1AI-_ XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XN-1CNT-24VDC XN-1RS_ XN-1SSI 140092 XN-S4S-SBBS Base module with temperature sensors for cold-junction compensation XN-2AI-THERMO-PI 140095 XN-S4S-SBBS-CJ Connection to C rail XN-16DI-24VDC-P 140139 XN-B4S-SBBC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 For Use With … Block Module 4 4 4 4 4 Slice Module Six Connection Levels 4 — XN-4DI-24VDC-P XN-4DI-24VDC-N 140093 XN-S6S-SBBSBB 4 Connection to C rail XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-4AI-U/I 140094 XN-S6S-SBCSBC — XN-32DI-24VDC-P 140140 XN-B6S-SBBSBB Connection to C rail XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 140160 XN-B6S-SBCSBC 4 4 4 4 Block Module 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Accessories Coding Elements 4 Coding Elements 4 Description For Use With … Style Number Catalog Number Included as standard with every electronics module. Prevents incorrect connection of the electronics modules XN-…DI-24VDC_ 140114 XN-KO/2 XN-2DI-120/230VAC 140117 XN-KO/5 XN-xDO-24VDC_ 140118 XN-KO/6 XN-2DO-R-NO 140119 XN-KO/8 XN-2DO-R-NC 140120 XN-KO/9 4 4 4 4 XN-2DO-R-CO 140121 XN-KO/10 XN-1AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) 140122 XN-KO/11 XN-1AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XN-2AI-THERMO-PI XN-4AI-U/I 140123 XN-KO/12 XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) 140124 XN-KO/13 XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 140125 XN-KO/14 XN-1CNT-24VDC XN-1RS232 XN-1RS485/422 XN-1SSI 140126 XN-KO/15 XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D 140127 XN-KO/16 4 XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 140128 XN-KO/17 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Relay Jumper Relay Jumpers End Cover Description Style Number Catalog Number 1-grid 140097 XN-QV/1 2-grid 140098 XN-QV/2 3-grid 140099 XN-QV/3 4-grid 140100 XN-QV/4 5-grid 140101 XN-QV/5 6-grid 140102 XN-QV/6 7-grid 140103 XN-QV/7 8-grid 140104 XN-QV/8 Style Number Establishes the connection 140096 between I/O assistant and the service interface at the gateway End Bracket For covering an XI/ON station. 140129 An end cover is supplied with the gateway as standard Description For fixing the XI/ON station on 140130 the top-hat rail. Two end brackets are supplied as standard with the gateways 4 Catalog Number 4 XN-ABPL 4 4 4 Connection Level Labels Connection Level Labels Description Style Number Catalog Number Blue 140105 XN-ANBZ-BL 4 4 4 Catalog Number Red 140106 XN-ANBZ-RT XN-PS2-CABLE Green 140107 XN-ANBZ-GN Black 140108 XN-ANBZ-SW Brown 140109 XN-ANBZ-BR Red/blue 140110 XN-ANBZ-RT/BL-BED Yellow/green 140111 XN-ANBZ-GN/GE-BED White 140112 XN-ANBZ-WS End Bracket Style Number Style Number Description Servicing Cable Description End Cover 4 4 4 Catalog Number XN-WEW-35/2-SW 4 Labels 4 Description Style Number Catalog Number A5 sheet, perforated, 1 x 57 labels 140131 XN-LABEL/SCHEIBE A5 sheet, perforated, 1 x 6 labels 140132 XN-LABEL/BLOCK Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4 4 V7-T4-75 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4 Technical Data and Specifications 4 XI/ON General 4 Standards EN 61000-6-2, EN 61000-6-4, EN 61131-2 Supported fieldbus systems PROFIBUS-DP, CANopen, DeviceNet, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP (depending on gateway) 4 Description Unit Potential isolation 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Specification Yes, through optocoupler Ambient temperature °F (°C) 32° to 131° (0° to 55°) Ambient temperature, storage °F (°C) –13° to 185° (–25° to 85°) Relative humidity % 5–95 (indoor), Level RH-2, noncondensing (for storage at 45°C) SO2 ppm 10 (relative humidity <75%, noncondensing) H2S ppm 1.0 (relative humidity <75%, noncondensing) Harmful gases Vibration resistance, operating conditions According to IEC 60068-2-6 Mechanical shock resistance According to IEC 60068-2-27 Repetitive shock resistance According to IEC 60068-2-29 Drop and free fall According to IEC 60068-2-31, free fall to IEC 60068-2-32 Protection type IP20 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 4 ESD EN 61000-4-2 Electromagnetic fields EN 61000-4-3 4 Burst EN 61000-4-4 Surge EN 61000-4-5 HF, asymmetric EN 61000-4-6 4 4 4 Radiated interference (RFI) EN 55016-2-3 Voltage fluctuations EN 61131-2 Type test To EN 61131-2 Approvals CE, cUL 4 4 Terminals 4 Description 4 Unit Dimensional data Connection from above 4 4 XN Gateways and XN Basic Modules XNE Gateways and Integrated XNE Modules To VDE 0611 Part 1/8.92/ IEC/EN 60947-7-1 To VDE 0611 Part 1/8.92/ IEC/EN 60947-7-1 Spring-loaded/screw terminals Push-in spring-cage terminals Cable stripped length mm 8 8 Max. terminal capacity mm2 0.5–2.5 0.14–1.5 Connectable conductors 4 “e” solid H07V-U mm2 0.5–2.5 0.25–1.5 “f” flexible H 07V-K mm2 0.5–1.5 0.25–1.5 4 “f” with ferrule without plastic collar to DIN 46228-1 (ferrules gas-tight) mm2 0.5–1.5 0.25–1.5 4 “f” with ferrule with plastic collar to DIN 46228-1 (ferrules gas-tight) mm2 0.5–1.5 0.25–0.75 A1 A1 4 Gauge pin IEC/EN 60947-1 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XNE Gateways Description Unit 4 XNE-GWBR-PBDP XNE-GWBR-CANOPEN XNE-GWBR-2ETH-IP Fieldbus PROFIBUS-DP CANopen Ethernet Protocol PROFIBUS-DPV0 and PROFIBUS-DPV1 CANopen EtherNet/IP Maximum number of stations 48 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 62 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 74 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m System supply (USYS) Vdc 24/5 24/5 24/5 Permissible range, 5 Vdc (USYS) Vdc 4.7–5.3 4.7–5.3 4.7–5.3 4 4 4 Permissible range, 24 Vdc (USYS) Vdc 18–30 18–30 18–30 Field voltage (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 Permissible range (UL) Vdc 18–30 18–30 18–30 Ripple % <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) PS/2 socket PS/2 socket Mini USB Servicing interface Fieldbus terminals 4 4 4 Push-in spring-cage terminals Push-in spring-cage terminals 2x RJ45 socket 9.6–12,000 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 10,000, 100,000 Data transfer rate setting Automatic Through DIP switch or automatically Automatic Address assignment Through DIP switch Through DIP switch Through DIP switch, BootP, DHCP or PGM Fieldbus termination Through DIP switch Through DIP switch — Number of parameter bytes 2 — — Number of diagnosis bytes 2 — — Address range 1–125 decimal 1–63 decimal 1–254 decimal Transfer rate kBit/s 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN Gateways with Built-In Supply Module Description Unit XN-GWBR-PBDP XN-GWBR-CANOPEN XN-GWBR-DNET XN-GWBR-MODBUS-TCP XN-PLC-CANOPEN Fieldbus PROFIBUS-DP CANopen DeviceNet Ethernet CANopen Protocol PROFIBUS-DPV0 CANopen DeviceNet Modbus-TCP CANopen Maximum number of stations 74 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 74 modules (XN, XNE) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 74 modules (XN) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 74 modules (XN, XNE) of slice 74 modules (XN, XNE with design or max. length of station: limitations) of slice design or max. length of station: 1m 1m 24/5 24/5 24/5 24/5 System supply (USYS) Vdc Vdc 4.7–5.3 4.7–5.3 4.7–5.3 4.7–5.3 4.7–5.3 Permissible range, 24 Vdc (USYS) Vdc 18–30 18–30 18–30 18–30 18–30 24 24 24 24 24 18–30 18–30 18–30 18–30 18–30 Field voltage (UL) Permissible range (UL) Vdc Ripple % 4 24/5 Permissible range, 5 Vdc (USYS) 4 4 4 4 4 4 <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) Servicing interface PS/2 socket PS/2 socket PS/2 socket PS/2 socket PS/2 socket Fieldbus terminals 1 x D-sub 9-pin socket Open style connector Open style connector RJ45 bus Open style connector 9.6–12,000 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 125, 250, 500 10,000, 100,000 10, 20, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800, 1000 4 4 Transfer rate kBit/s Data transfer rate setting — Through DIP switch Through DIP switch Automatic Software Address assignment 2 decimal rotary coding switches 2 decimal rotary coding switches 2 decimal rotary coding switches Decimal rotary coding switch, BootP, DHCP or I/Oassistant Software Fieldbus termination External External External — External Number of parameter bytes 5 — — — — Number of diagnosis bytes 3 — — — — Address range 4 4 4 4 1–99 decimal 1–99 decimal 1–63 decimal 1–254 decimal 1–127 decimal Program data kByte — — — — 128 Program code kByte — — — — 128 Cycle time for 1k of instructions (bits, bytes) ms — — — — 0.5 4 — — — — Yes 4 Real-time clock 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-77 4.5 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Supply Modules Description Unit Operating voltage XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 120/230 Vac System supply (USYS) Vdc 24 — — Permissible range, 24 Vdc (USYS) Vdc 18–30 1 — — Permissible range, 5 Vdc (UMB [built into system]) Vdc 4.7–5.3 — — Field voltage (UL) 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 120/230 Vac Permissible range (UL) 18–30 Vdc 18–30 Vdc 2 102–132 Vac (120 Vac) 195.5–253 Vac (230 Vac) 3 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) mA — <28 <25 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 500 500 1500 Ripple % <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) <5 (to EN 61131-2) Maximum operating current (IL) A 10 10 10 Maximum system supply current (IMB) A 1.5 — — 4 4 4 Without C connection XN-P3…-SBB/XN-P3…-SBB-B XN-P3…-SBB XN-P3…-SBB With C connection XN-P4…-SBBC/XN-P4…-SBBC-B XN-P4…-SBBC XN-P4…-SBBC Number of diagnostic bits Base module without gateway power supply 4 4 Digital Input Modules Description Unit XN-2DI-24VDC-P 4 Channels Number 2 2 4 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-4DI-24VDC-P XN-4DI-24VDC-N 2 4 4 120/230 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) 45 mA <20 <20 <20 <40 <40 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 5 mA <28 <28 <28 <29 <28 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 500 500 1500 500 500 Heat dissipation W 0.7 0.7 1 1 1 Input voltage Input voltage, rated value 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 120/230 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Low level –30V to 5V 30V (UL–11V) 0–20 Vac –30V to 5V 30V (UL–11V) High level 11–30V 0–5V 79 Vac–265 Vac 6 15 V–30V 0–5V — — 48–63 — — Input current Low level/active level 0 mA–1.5 mA 0 mA–1.7 mA 0 mA–1 mA 0 mA–1.5 mA 0 mA–1.2 mA High level/active level 2 mA–10 mA 1.8 mA–10 mA 3 mA–10 mA 2 mA–10 mA 1.3 mA–6 mA Frequency range Hz 4 Input delay trising edge μs <200 <200 <20,000 <200 <200 4 tfalling edge μs <200 <200 <20,000 <200 <200 XN-S3…-SBB XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S6…-SBBSBB XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S6…-SBBSBB XN-S4…-SBBC — — 4 4 4 4 4 Basic modules Without C connection With C connection XN-S3…-SBB 2-conductor proximity switches (Bero®) can be connected, with a permissible quiescent current of up to 1.5 mA XN-S4…-SBBC XN-S4…-SBBC Notes 1 Permissible range for system supply: for U SYS = 24 Vdc: 18 to 30 Vdc (to EN 61131-2). 2 Permissible range for field voltage U : to EN 61131-2 (18 to 30 Vdc). L 3 Permissible range for rated voltage and field voltage U : to EN 61131-2. L 4 The supply terminal (U ) provides power for the module electronics and for the sensors at the inputs. The total current required for each module consists of the sum of all partial currents. L 5 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L 6 Maximum permissible capacity: 141 nF at 79 Vac/50 Hz; 23 nF at 265 Vac/50 Hz. 4 4 V7-T4-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Input Modules, continued Description Unit XN-16DI-24VDC-P XN-32DI-24VDC-P XNE-8DI-24VDC-P XNE-16DI-24VDC-P Channels Number 16 32 8 16 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) 12 mA <40 <30 <1.5 <3 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 2 mA <45 <30 <15 <15 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 500 500 500 500 Heat dissipation W 2.5 4.2 <1.5 <2.5 Input voltage Input voltage, rated value Vdc 24 24 24 24 –30V to 5V –30V to 5V –ULto 5V –UL to 5V Low level High level 4 4 4 4 4 4 15V–30V 15V–30V 11V–UL 11V–UL — — — — Input current Low level/active level 0 mA–1.5 mA 0 mA–1.5 mA –1 mA–1.5 mA –1 mA–1.5 mA High level/active level 2 mA–10 mA 2 mA–10 mA 2 mA–5 mA 2 mA–5 mA 4 4 Frequency range Hz Input delay trising edge μs <200 <200 <100 <150 tfalling edge μs <200 <200 <200 <300 XN-B3…-SBB XN-B6…-SBBSBB Already built in Already built in XN-B4…-SBBC — — — Basic modules Without C connection With C connection 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 The supply terminal (U ) provides power for the module electronics and for the sensors at the inputs. The total current required for each module consists of the sum of all partial currents. L 2 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-79 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Output Modules Description Unit XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 Channels Number 2 2 2 2 4 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 120/230 Vac (45–65 Hz) 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 4 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (for 0 mA load current) (IL) 1 mA <20 <20 <20 <50 <25 4 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 2 mA <32 <32 <35 <33 <30 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 500 500 1500 500 500 Heat dissipation W Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 >UL–1 Vdc UL–2 Vac, (zero-point switching triac) >UL–1 Vdc >UL–1 Vdc 0.5 4 4 4 4 4 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Output voltage High level Output current High level (rated) A 0.5 0.5 0.5 3 2 High level (permissible range) A <0.6 <0.6 0.02–0.5 <2.4 <0.6 Low level mA — — <1.5 — — — — 500 mA FF — — — — 8 (1 period at 60 Hz) — — — — — — 4 2 Back-up fuse 4 4 4 4 Surge current (IS) A Number of parallel-switchable outputs (maximum) Total module current A 1 1 1 4 Delay for signal changeover, resistive load From Low to High level μs <100 <100 48 ohm >48 ohm At 120 Vac: 240 ohm to 6 kohm At 230 Vac: 460 ohm to 11.5 kohm <12 ohm >48 ohm 100 100 100 (observe derating) 100 100 From High to Low level 4 Load resistance range 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Utilization factor (%) g The following can be connected: Resistive loads/Inductive loads/Lamp loads Resistive load ohm >48 >48 — >12 >48 Inductive load H <1.2 <1.2 — <1.2 <1.2 Lamp load (RLL) W <3 <12 — <6 <6 Switching frequency For resistive load (f) Hz <5000 (RLO <1 kohm) <100 (RLO <1 kohm) — <5000 (RLO <1 kohm) <1000 (RLO <1 kohm) For inductive load Hz <2 <2 — <2 <2 For lamps Hz <10 <10 — <10 <10 Number of diagnostic bits 2 2 — 2 1 Diagnostics Yes Yes No Yes Yes Outputs to EN 61131-1 Protected Protected — Protected Short-circuit proof Retriggering after elimination of short circuit (Ii) Self-acting Self-acting — Self-acting Self-acting XN-S3…-SBC XN-S4…-SBCS XN-S3…-SBC XN-S4…-SBCS XN-S3…-SBC XN-S4…-SBCS XN-S3…-SBC XN-S4…-SBCS XN-S4…-SBCS XN-S4…-SBCSBC Basic modules With C connection Notes 1 The supply terminal (U ) provides power for the module electronics and for the consumers at the outputs. The total current required for each module consists of the sum of all partial currents. L 2 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L 3 To increase the maximum output current to up to 1A, two outputs can be connected in parallel. 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Output Modules, continued Description Unit XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 Channels Number 16 32 8 16 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (for mA 0 mA load current) (IL) 1 <30 <50 <3 (all outputs OFF) <3 (all outputs OFF) 4 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 2 mA <120 <30 <15 <25 4 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 500 500 500 500 Heat dissipation W Normally 4 Normally 5 Normally 1.5 Normally 2.5 4 Output voltage High level Vdc >UL–1 >UL–1 >UL–1 >UL–1 4 Output current High level (rated) 4 A 0.5 0.5 0.5 3 0.5 3 High level (permissible range) A <0.6 <1.0 <1.0 <1.0 Low level mA Back-up fuse Surge current (IS) A Number of parallel-switchable outputs (maximum) 4 — — — — — — — — — — — — — 2 — — 4 4 Total module current A 8 10 4 4 Delay for signal changeover, resistive load From Low to High level 4 μs <100 <300 <300 <300 μs <100 <300 <300 <300 4 From High to Low level Load resistance range 4 >48 ohm >48 ohm >48 ohm >48 ohm g 100 See total module current 100 50%, max. 4A Resistive load ohm >48 >48 Inductive load H <1.2 <1.2 As for DC13 to IEC 60947-5-1 As for DC13 to IEC 60947-5-1 Lamp load (RLL) W <3 <6 <6 <6 Switching frequency For resistive load (f) Hz <100 (RLO <1 kohm) <100 (RLO <1 kohm) <100 <100 For inductive load Hz — — As for DC13 to IEC 60947-5-1 As for DC13 to IEC 60947-5-1 For lamps Hz Utilization factor (%) The following can be connected: 4 Resistive loads/Inductive loads/Lamp loads >48 >48 — — <10 <10 Number of diagnostic bits 4 8 — — Diagnostics Yes Yes — — Outputs to EN 61131-1 Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Short-circuit proof Retriggering after elimination of short circuit (Ii) Self-acting Self-acting Self-acting Self-acting XN-B3…-SBC XN-B6…-SBCSBC Already built in Already built in Basic modules With C connection 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 The supply terminal (U ) provides power for the module electronics and for the consumers at the outputs. The total current required for each module consists of the sum of all partial currents. L 2 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L 3 To increase the maximum output current to up to 1A, two outputs can be connected in parallel. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-81 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Analog Input Modules Description Unit XN-1AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-1AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) Current Current Voltage Voltage 4 Measured variables Channels Number 1 2 1 2 4 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) 12 mA <50 <12 <50 <12 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 2 mA <41 <35 <41 <35 Heat dissipation W <1 <1 <1 <1 Bridged with UL and GNDL of incoming unit; not protected <250 mA; bridged with UL and GNDL of incoming unit; not protected Bridged with UL and GNDL of incoming unit; not protected <250 mA; bridged with UL and GNDL of incoming unit; not protected 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Sensor/transmitter supply Voltage measurement Measurement ranges — — –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc Value representation — — Standard, 16-bit/12-bit left-aligned Standard, 16-bit/12-bit left-aligned 2-/3-conductor + shield The following can be connected: — — 2-/3-/4-conductor + shield Maximum input voltage (Umax.) Vdc — — 35 35 Input resistance (RL) kohm — — >98.5 >98.5 Limiting frequency (fG) Hz — — 200 50 Basic error limit at 23°C % — — <0.2 <0.2 — — <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <150 ppm/°C of full-scale value Temperature coefficient Current measurement Measurement ranges mA Value representation 4 The following can be connected: 4 4 4 4 — 2-/3-conductor + shield — — 50 50 — — Input resistance (RL) ohm <125 ohm <125 ohm — — Limiting frequency (fG) Hz 200 50 — — Basic error limit at 23°C % <0.2 <0.2 4 4 — — 2-/3-/4-conductor + shield Temperature measurement Connectable sensors 4 — Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) mA Temperature coefficient 4 0–20/4–20 Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Maximum input current (Imax.) 4 4 0–20/4–20 — — <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value — — — — — — Measurement ranges — — — — Value representation — — — — The following can be connected: — — — — Measuring current (Imess) — — — — — — — — Destruction limit (Umax.) Vdc Basic error limit at 23°C % Temperature coefficient R (resistance measurement) Measurement ranges Value representation The following can be connected: — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 4 Destruction limit (Umax.) Vdc — — — — Limiting frequency (fG) Hz — — — — 4 Basic error limit at 23°C % — — — — — — — — XN-S3…-SBB XN-S3…-SBB XN-S3…-SBB XN-S3…-SBB XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS Temperature coefficient 4 4 4 4 Basic modules Without C connection Without C connection, for sensor supply Notes 1 The supply terminal (U ) provides power for the module electronics and for the analog transmitters at the inputs. The total current required for each module consists of the sum of all partial currents. L 2 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L V7-T4-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Analog Input Modules, continued Description Unit Measured variables 4 XN-4AI-U/I XN-2AI-THERMO-PI XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI Voltage, current Temperature (thermocouples) Temperature PT, NI resistance R Voltage, current, temperature PT, NI resistance R 4 4 Channels Number 4 2 2 8 (U/I)/4 (PT/NI/R) Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) 12 mA <20 <30 <30 Normally 35 4 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 2 mA <50 <45 <45 <30 4 Heat dissipation W <1 <1 <1 <1.5 Sensor/transmitter supply — — — — 4 Voltage measurement Measurement ranges –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc –50 to 50 mV, –100 to 100 mV –500 to 500 mV, –1,000 to 1,000 mV — –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) — Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Extended range, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) PA (NE43), 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Value representation The following can be connected: 4 2-conductor + shield 2-conductor — 2-conductor Maximum input voltage (Umax.) Vdc 30 10 — ±20 Input resistance (RL) kohm >98.5 — — >200 Limiting frequency (fG) Hz 20 — — 1.5 Basic error limit at 23°C % <0.3 <0.2 (normally) — <0.2 <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value — Temperature coefficient Current measurement Measurement ranges mA Value representation The following can be connected: Maximum input current (Imax.) mA 4 <200 ppm/°C of full-scale value 4 4 0–20/4–20 — — 0–20/4–20 Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) — — Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Extended range, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) PA (NE43), 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) 2-conductor + shield — — 2-conductor 50 — — 40 (Max. input voltage: <17V) <62 — — <52 20 — — 1.5 Basic error limit at 23°C % <0.3 — — <0.2 <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value — — <200 ppm/°C of full-scale value 4 4 4 — Thermocouple type B, E, J, K, N, PT100 RTD, PT200, PT500, PT100 PT100 RTD, PT200, PT500, PT100 R, S, T to IEC 584, Class 1, 2, 3 RTD0 (EN 60751) RTD0 (all: EN 60751) NI100, NI1000 (DIN 43760) NI100, NI1000 (DIN 43760), NI1000TK5000 — Type B: 100 to 1820 °C Type E: –270 to 1000 °C Type J: –210 to 1200 °C Type K: –270 to 1370 °C Type N: –270 to 1300 °C Type R: –50 to 1760 °C Type S: –50 to 1540 °C Type T: –270 to 400 °C Platinum RTDs: –200 to 850°C/–200 to 150°C Nickel RTDs: –60 to 250°C/–60 to 150°C 4 4 ohm Hz Measurement ranges 4 4 Limiting frequency (fG) Temperature measurement Connectable sensors 4 4 Input resistance (RL) Temperature coefficient 4 Platinum RTDs: –200 to 850°C/–200 to 150°C Nickel RTDs: –60 to 250°C/–60 to 150°C 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 The supply terminal (U ) provides power for the module electronics and for the analog transmitters at the inputs. The total current required for each module consists of the sum of all partial currents. L 2 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-83 4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Analog Input Modules, continued Description Unit Temperature measurement, continued Value representation XN-4AI-U/I XN-2AI-THERMO-PI — XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI Standard, 16-bit/12-bit left-aligned 4 The following can be connected: 4 Measuring current (Imess) — — <1 mA <0.5 mA Destruction limit (Umax.) Vdc — — >30 >30 4 Basic error limit at 23°C % — <0.2 (type T, –200 to 0°C: 0.6%) <0.2 PT100 RTD, NI100: 0.35%, PT200, PT500, PT100 RTD0, NI1000, NI1000TK5000: 0.2% — 2-conductor (cold-junction compensation in base module) 2-conductor/3-conductor 2-conductor/3-conductor 4 Temperature coefficient — <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <200 ppm/°C of full-scale value 4 R (resistance measurement) Measurement ranges — — 0–100 ohm, 0–200 ohm, 0–400 ohm, 0–1000 ohm 0–250 ohm, 0–400 ohm, 0–800 ohm, 0–2000 ohm, 0–4000 ohm — — Standard, 16-bit/ 12-bit left-aligned Standard, 16-bit/ 12-bit left-aligned 2-conductor/3-conductor 4 Value representation 4 The following can be connected: 4 4 4 4 — — 2-conductor/3-conductor Destruction limit (Umax.) Vdc — — >30 >30 Limiting frequency (fG) Hz — — — 1.5 Basic error limit at 23°C % — — <0.2 <0.2 — — <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <200 ppm/°C of full-scale value Temperature coefficient Basic modules Without C connection Without C connection, for sensor supply 4 XN-S6…-SBCSBC — XN-S3…-SBB Already built in — With integrated cold-junction compensation XN-S4…-SBBS-CJ XN-S4…-SBBS — 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Analog Output Modules Description Unit Measured variables XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) Current Current Voltage Voltage, current 1 2 2 4 4 XNE-4AO-U/I 4 Channels Number Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) 1 mA <50 <50 <50 <150 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) 1 mA <39 <40 <43 <40 Heat dissipation W Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 <3 Vdc — — –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc –10 to 10 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc Value representation — — Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Extended range, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) PA (NE43), 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) The following can be connected: — — 2-conductor + shield 2-conductor ohm — — >1000 >1000 Capacitive load μF — — <1 <1 Transfer frequency Hz — — <100 <20 ms — — — — <0.1 <1 4 4 4 4 Output Value, Voltage Output voltage Load resistor Resistive load Recovery time Resistive load 4 4 4 4 4 Inductive load ms — — <0.5 <2 Capacitive load ms — — <0.5 <2 4 4 Short-circuit current mA — — <40 <40 Basic error limit at 23°C % — — <0.2 <0.2 — — <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <200 ppm/°C of full-scale value 0–20/4–20 0–20/4–20 — 0–20/4–20 Value representation Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) — Standard, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) Extended range, 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) PA (NE43), 16-bit/12-bit (left-aligned) The following can be connected: 2-conductor + shield 2-conductor + shield — 2-conductor 4 <550 <450 — <450 4 Temperature coefficient 4 Output Value, Current Output current mA Load resistor Resistive load ohm Inductive load μH <1 <1 — <1 Transfer frequency Hz <200 <200 — <20 Recovery time Resistive load ms <0.1 <2 — <1 Inductive load ms <0.5 <2 — <2 Capacitive load ms <0.5 — — <2 Short-circuit current mA — — — <40 Basic error limit at 23°C % <0.2 <0.2 — <0.2 <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value <300 ppm/°C of full-scale value — <200 ppm/°C of full-scale value XN-S3…-SBB XN-S3…-SBB XN-S3…-SBB Already built in Temperature coefficient Basic modules Without C connection 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 Part of the XI/ON module’s electronics is supplied with module bus voltage (5 Vdc), the other part through the supply terminal (U ). L 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-85 4.5 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Relay Modules Description Unit XN-2DO-R-NC 2 NC 2 N/O 2 change-over contacts Vdc 24 24 24 Contact type Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) XN-2DO-R-NO XN-2DO-R-CO Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) mA <20 <20 <20 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) mA <28 <28 <28 Insulation test (Ui) Vac 1500, 500 1500, 500 1500, 500 4 Heat dissipation W Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 4 Nominal load voltage 4 The following can be connected: Resistive loads/Inductive loads/Lamp loads 230 Vac, 30 Vdc 230 Vac, 30 Vdc 230 Vac, 30 Vdc 2 2 2 5A, load-dependent 5A, load-dependent 5A, load-dependent mA 100 at 12 Vdc 100 at 12 Vdc 100 at 12 Vdc % 100 100 100 At 5A (Operations) x 106 >0.1 >0.1 >0.1 At 0.5A (Operations) x 106 >1 >1 >1 Without C connection XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS With C connection XN-S4…-SBCS XN-S4…-SBCS — Output current for channel/230 Vac 4 4 Maximum continuous current Minimum load current 4 Output current for DC voltage (resistive) 4 Lifespan at 230 Vac 4 4 4 A Maximum continuous current, resistive load Utilization factor (g) Load limit curve, see Page V7-T4-99 Basic modules 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Technology Modules Description Unit Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Vdc 24 24 mA <50 1 <20 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) mA <40 <50 Heat dissipation W <1.3 <3 Output voltage UL (–0.8V) Output current <0.5A, short-circuit proof Output voltage UL, GNDL Output current 0.5A, not protected 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) Power supply of encoders XN-1CNT-24VDC 4 XNE-2CNT-2PWM 4 4 4 4 Digital Inputs Input voltage Input voltage, rated value Vdc Low level Vdc –30 to 5 –30 to 5 High level Vdc 11 to 30 11 to 30 mA –8 to 1.5 –1 to 1.5 4 4 4 Input current Low level High level 4 mA 2 to 10 2 to 10 μs Filter on: >25 (20 kHz) Filter off: <2.5 (200 kHz) Filter on: >25 (20 kHz) Filter off: <2.5 (200 kHz) Channels Number 1 2 Resolution bit 32 32 4 4 Minimum pulse width 4 Counter Modules 4 Measurement Ranges Frequency 0.1 Hz–200 kHz 0.01 Hz–200 kHz (scaleable) Rotational speed 1–25,000 rpm Scaleable Period duration 5 ms to 120s 5 ms to 120s (scaleable) 4 4 Counter Modes Signal evaluation A, B Pulse and direction, rotary encoder: single/double/quadruple Pulse and direction, rotary encoder: single/double/quadruple Operating mode Endless count, count once, count periodically Endless count, count once, count periodically 8 32 Pulse duration 8-bit/max. 0.51s 32-bit/max. 120s Synchronization Once/periodic Once/periodic Counter limits Upper count limit: 0–7FFF FFFF Lower count limit: 8000 0000–FFFF FFFF Upper count limit: 0–7FFF FFFF Lower count limit: 8000 0000–FFFF FFFF Pulse and direction, single rotary encoder Pulse and direction, single rotary encoder 24 24 Hysteresis bit 4 4 4 4 Measurement Modes Signal evaluation A, B 4 Digital Outputs Output voltage Output voltage, nominal value Vdc Low level Vdc 4 <3 <3 >UL (–1V) >UL (–1V) High level (permissible range) 5 mA to 2A 5 mA to 0.6A High level (nominal) <0.5A (55°C) 0.5A (55°C) 4 4 High level 4 4 Output current Switching frequency For resistive load Hz 100 20,000/100 For inductive load Hz 2 — For lamps Hz <10 — Lamp load (RLL) W <10 — Output delay μs 100 (resistive load) 25 (resistive load) Yes Yes Short-circuit rating 4 4 4 Note 1 The figures for rated operational current from the supply terminal apply for load current = 0 mA. 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-87 4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Technology Modules, continued Description Unit XN-1CNT-24VDC XNE-2CNT-2PWM PWM Module Channels — 2 PWM — 0.01Hz–20 kHz Period duration/duty cycle — 32-bit at 41.6 ns/bit Pulse duration — 32-bit at 41.6 ns/bit 4 Pause time — 32-bit at 41.6 ns/bit Output, number of pulses — 32-bit counter 4 Pulse output modes — Once, endless 4 4 Number General Data 4 Diagnostics 1 bit 4 Byte 4 Parameters 15 bit 16 Byte 4 No C-connection for sensor/transmitter supply XN-S4…-SBBS Already built in 4 4 4 4 4 Basic Modules Interfaces Description Unit Type 4 4 4 4 4 XN-1SSI SSI RS-232 RS-485/RS-422 Vdc 24 24 24 Rated current drawn from supply terminal (IL) mA 0 <25 <25 1 Rated current drawn from module bus (IMB) mA <140 <60 <50 Heat dissipation W Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 RxD, TxD, RTS, CTS RxD, TxD CL, D Data buffer Receive Byte 128 128 — Send Byte 64 64 — RS-232 Full-duplex — — RS-485 — 2-wire, half-duplex — RS-422 — 2-conductor, half-duplex or 4-conductor, full-duplex 4-conductor, full-duplex (clock output/signal input) Max. 115200 bits/s (parameterizable), Standard: 9600 bits/s, 7 data bits, odd parity and 2 stop bits Max. 115200 bits/s (parameterizable), Standard: 9600 bits/s, 7 data bits, odd parity and 2 stop bits Max. 1 MHz (parameterizable), default settings: 500 kBit/s Veff 500 500 500 500 Connection type Bit transfer rate 4 4 XN-1RS485/422 Rated voltage at supply terminal (UL) Transfer channels 4 XN-1RS232 Insulation test (Ui) Between interface and module bus⁄ system voltage Veff 500 500 Common-mode range Vdc –7 to 12 — — Cable impedance ohm — 120 120 Bus termination ohm — 120 (external) Internal Cable length m Max. 15 Max. 30 Max. 30 4 Number of diagnosis bytes 1 1 1 Number of parameter bytes 4 4 4 4 Basic modules XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS XN-S4…-SBBS 4 4 4 4 Between interface and field voltage No C-connection for sensor/transmitter supply Note 1 The figures for rated operational current from the supply terminal apply when there is no sensor/transmitter current. 4 4 V7-T4-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Connection Diagrams 4 Gateway XN…GWBR_ 4 24V Supply from Gateway (UL) and System Bus (Usys) 4 4 4 24V 4 Bus Refreshing Modules 4 XN-P3x-SBB with Gateway Power Supply XN-P3…-SBB-B without Gateway Power Supply XN-P4…-SBBC with Gateway Power Supply XN-P4…-SBBC-B without Gateway Power Supply 24V Module Bus Supply 4 24V Module Bus Supply 4 4 4 4 4 24V Fieldbus Supply 24V Fieldbus Supply 4 4 4 Power Feeding Modules XN-P3…-SBB for XN-PF-24VDC-D 4 XN-P4…-SBBC for XN-PF-24VDC-D 4 4 24V 4 24V 4 4 4 XN-P3…-SBB for XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 4 XN-P4…-SBB for XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-89 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Digital Input Modules XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-S4…-SBBC for XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-S4…-SBBC for XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-S4…-SBBC for XN-2DI-120/230VAC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-4DI-24VDC-P 4.5 XN-S6…-SBBSBB for XN-4DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-4DI-24VDC-N XN-S6…-SBBSBB for XN-4DI-24VDC-N 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-B3…-SBB for XN-16DI-24VDC-P XN-B4…-SBBC for XN-16DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-91 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-B6…-SBBSBB for XN-32DI-24VDC-P XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 4 4 4 4 XNE-16DI-24VDC-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-92 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Digital Output Modules XN-S3…-SBC for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P and XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P and XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S3…-SBC for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S3…-SBC for XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S4…-SBCS for XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 XN-B3…-SBC for XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-93 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S6…-SBCSBC for XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 GND 4 24V 4 4 XN-B6…-SBCSBC for XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 GND 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V7-T4-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Analog Input Modules XN-S3…-SBB for XN-1AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-S3…-SBB for XN-1AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) Analog Sensor/Transmitter, without Transmitter Supply XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-1AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-1AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) Analog Transmitter with Non-Isolated Transmitter Supply 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA), XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) Analog Sensor/Transmitter, without Transmitter Supply XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA), XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) Analog Transmitter with Non-Isolated Transmitter Supply 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) Two-Conductor Connection without External Transmitter Supply 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-95 4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S6…-SBCSBC for XN-4AI-U/I Analog Sensor/Transmitter, without Transmitter Supply XN-S3…-SSB for XN-AI-U/I Two-Conductor Connection without External Transmitter Supply 4 4 24V 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 Two-Conductor Connection XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 Three-Conductor Connection XN-S4…-SBBS-CJ for XN-2AI-THERMO-PI XNE-8AI-U/I-4PT/NI 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 U/I PT/NI 2-Conductor 2-Conductor 3-Conductor 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 Cold-junction compensation in base module. 4 V7-T4-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Analog Output Modules XN-S3…-SSB for XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) 4 XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) 4 4 4 Channel 1 4 Channel 2 4 XN-S3…-SBB for XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) 4 XNE-4AO-U/I U 4 I 4 4 Channel 1 4 Channel 2 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-97 4.5 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Relay Modules XN-S4x…-SBBS with Externally Applied Supply and Common Potential Link for XN-2DO-R-NC Module Circuit XN-S4x…SBBS for XN-2DO-R-NC XN-S4x…-SBCS Supply via C-Rail and Common Potential Link for XN-2DO-R-NC Module Circuit XN-S4x…-SBCS for XN-2DO-R-NC 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Power Relais 1 Feeding Relais n 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 24V XN-S4x…-SBBS with Externally Applied Supply and Common Potential Link for XN-2DO-R-NO Module Circuit XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-2DO-R-NO 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Linked in the electronics. 2 Cross-link via QVR in the base module. 3 Electronics module. 4 Supply via C-rail. 5 Maximum eight relay modules. 4 4 4 V7-T4-98 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O XN-S4x…-SBCS Supply via C-rail and Common Potential Link for XN-2DO-R-NO Power Relais 1 Feeding 4.5 4 Module Circuit XN-S4x…SBCS for XN-2DO-R-NO Relais n 4 4 4 4 4 4 24V 4 24V 4 XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-2DO-R-CO 4 Module Circuit XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-2DO-R-CO 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Load Limit Curve 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Supply via C-rail. 2 Maximum eight relay modules. 3 Top-hat rail. 4 Cross-link via QVR in the base module. 5 Electronics module. 6 Electronics module— Definition: At 1000 operations, no arc with a duration >10 ms must occur. 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-99 4.5 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Serial Interfaces XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-1RS232 and D-Sub Plug XN-S4x…SBBS for XN-1RS485/422 in RS422 Mode 4 RxD 4 4 TxD 4 GND SHLD SHLD Data In RxD- SHLD SHLD XN-S4x…-SBBS for XN-1SSI on an SSI Rotary Encoder SSI Device GND 4 UL UL UL D+ D- Data Out GND GND Opto Array Clock XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-1RS485/422 in RS485 Mode TxD+/RxD+/P CL- Analog Array CL+ 4 4 GND RxD+ Parallel-Serial-Converter 4 GND RTS 4 4 TxD- Data Out CTS 4 TxD+ TxD-/RxD-/N Data In GND GND SHLD SHLD TxEnable Data Out SHLD 4 4 4 4 Technology Modules/Counter XN-S4…-SBBS for XN-1CNT-24VDC Counter Input A or Pulse Input Counter Input B or Direction Input 4 4 4 4 4 XNE-2CNT-2PWM 4 Counter Input A, Pulse Input 4 4 Counter 1 Counter Input B, Directional Input Synchronization Z Counter 2 4 Supply 24 Vdc Supply GND Counter Input A, Pulse Input Counter Input B, Directional Input Synchronization Z 4 Supply 24 Vdc Supply GND Output PWM 4 4 4 Output Direction Drive 2 M GND Drive 1 M Output PWM Output Direction GND 4 V7-T4-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 4.5 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Dimensions 4 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XN Gateways XN-GWBR-PBDP XN-GWBR-CANOPEN XN-GWBR-DNET XN-GWBR-MODBUS-TCP XN-PLC-CANOPEN 1.99 (50.6) XNE Gateways 4 XNE-GWBR-PBDP XNE-GWBR-CANOPEN XNE-GWBR-2ETH-IP 4 4 2.93 (74.4) 4 4 2.95 (75.0) 4 4.52 (114.8) 4.46 (113.3) 3.35 (85.0) 5.08 (129.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4 1.32 (33.5) 4 4 4 Note: The plugs/connectors used depends on the version. 4 XNE Electronics Modules XNE-16DI-24VDC-P XNE-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-8AI-U/I/4PT/NI XNE-8DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XNE-8DI-24VDC-P 4 XNE-4AO-U/I XNE-2CNT-2PWM 4 4 4 2.93 (74.5) 2.93 (74.5) 4 4 5.10 (129.5) 3.54 (90.0) 0.51 (13.0) 6.36 (161.5) End Cover End Bracket XN-ABPL XN-WEW-35/2-SW 1.91 (48.4) 1.63 (41.3) 1.85 (47.0) 3.54 (90.0) 0.51 (13.0) 4 4 4 0.31 (8.0) 4 0.18 (4.5) 4 2.20 (56.0) 4 4 4.50 (114.4) 4 4 4 4 0.36 (9.2) 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-101 4.5 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XN Electronics Modules in Slice Design XN-BR-24VDC-D XN-PF-24VDC-D XN-PF-120/230VAC-D 4 4 4 4 4 4 0.50 (12.6) XN-2DI-24VDC-P XN-2DI-24VDC-N XN-2DI-120/230VAC XN-4DI-24VDC-P XN-4DI-24VDC-N XN-2DO-24VDC-2A-P XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-24VDC-0.5A-N XN-2DO-120/230VAC-0.5A XN-4DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-2DO-R-CO XN-2DO-R-NC XN-2DO-R-NO XN-1AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AI-I(0/4…20MA) XN-1AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-2AI-PT/NI-2/3 XN-2AI-THERMO-PI XN-4AI-U/I XN-1AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-I(0/4…20MA) XN-2AO-U(-10/0…+10VDC) XN-1CNT-24VDC XN-1RS232 XN-1RS485/422 XN-1SSI 2.18 (55.4) 4 4 4 2.92 (74.1) 2.84 (72.1) 1.81 (46.1) 2.92 (74.1) 2.84 (72.1) 4 4 4 4 1.86 (47.3) XN Electronics Modules in Block Design XN-16DI-24VDC-P XN-32DI-24VDC-P 3.97 (100.8) 4 4 4 4 XN-16DO-24VDC-0.5A-P XN-32DO-24VDC-0.5A-P 4 2.92 (74.1) 1.81 (46.1) 2.92 (74.1) 2.84 (72.1) 2.84 (72.1) 4 4 2.18 (55.4) 1.86 (47.3) XN Electronics Modules Completed with Base Module All Types 2.93 (74.5) 4 4 4 3.54 (90.0) 4 4 4 4 2.67 (67.8) V7-T4-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O 4.5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 4 Base Modules in Slice Design 4 Spring-Cage Terminals 3 Connection Levels XN-S3T-SBB XN-S3T-SBC XN-P3T-SBB XN-P3T-SBB-B 0.69 (17.6) 4 Connection Levels XN-S4T-SBBC XN-S4T-SBBS XN-S4T-SBBS-CJ XN-S4T-SBCS XN-P4T-SBBC XN-P4T-SBBC-B 1.96 (49.9) 6 Connection Levels XN-S6T-SBBSBB XN-S6T-SBCSBC 4 4 4 1.96 (49.9) 4 1.96 (49.9) 4 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 0.95 (24.1) 4.63 (117.6) 0.95 (24.1) 4 5.07 (128.9) 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 4 6.08 (154.5) 4 4 4 1.64 (41.6) 1.64 (41.6) 4 4 1.64 (41.6) 0.50 (12.6) 0.93 (23.5) 4 Screw Terminals 3 Connection Levels XN-S3S-SBB XN-S3S-SBC XN-P3S-SBB XN-P3S-SBB-B 0.69 (17.6) 4 Connection Levels XN-S4S-SBBC XN-S4S-SBBS XN-S4S-SBBS-CJ XN-S4S-SBCS XN-P4S-SBBC XN-P4S-SBBC-B 1.96 (49.9) 4 6 Connection Levels XN-S6S-SBBSBB XN-S6S-SBCSBC 4 4 4 1.96 (49.9) 1.96 (49.9) 4 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 0.95 (24.1) 4.63 (117.6) 4 0.95 (24.1) 5.07 (128.9) 3.54 (90.0) 4 3.54 (90.0) 6.08 (154.5) 4 4 4 1.90 (48.3) 4 1.90 (48.3) 4 0.50 (12.6) 1.90 (48.3) 4 0.93 (23.5) Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T4-103 4.5 4 4 4 4 PLC, I/O and Communications Products XI/ON Series Remote I/O Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Base Modules in Block Design Spring-Cage Terminals 3 Connection Levels XN-B3T-SBB XN-B3T-SBC 4 Connection Levels XN-B4T-SBBC 3.97 (100.8) 1.96 (49.9) 0.69 (17.6) 4 6 Connection Levels XN-B6T-SBBSBB XN-B6T-SBCSBC 1.96 (49.9) 1.96 (49.9) 4 4 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 0.95 (24.1) 4.63 (117.6) 4 5.07 (128.9) 3.54 (90.0) 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 6.08 (154.5) 4 4 1.64 (41.6) 4 1.64 (41.6) 4 4 4 4 0.93 (23.5) 1.64 (41.6) Screw Terminals 3 Connection Levels XN-B3S-SBB XN-B3S-SBC 4 4 Connection Levels XN-B4S-SBBC 3.97 (100.8) 1.96 (49.9) 0.69 (17.6) 4 6 Connection Levels XN-B6S-SBBSBB XN-B6S-SBCSBC 1.96 (49.9) 1.96 (49.9) 4 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 4 0.95 (24.1) 4.63 (117.6) 4 5.07 (128.9) 3.54 (90.0) 4 0.95 (24.1) 3.54 (90.0) 6.08 (154.5) 4 4 1.90 (48.3) 4 1.90 (48.3) 4 4 0.93 (23.5) 1.90 (48.3) 4 V7-T4-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panel 5.1 Product Overview Product and Software Selection Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 HMi Operator Interface XV Operator Interface 5.4 V7-T5-5 V7-T5-5 V7-T5-6 V7-T5-7 V7-T5-7 V7-T5-8 V7-T5-10 V7-T5-11 HMi Operator Interface Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-13 V7-T5-13 V7-T5-14 V7-T5-15 V7-T5-15 V7-T5-16 V7-T5-18 V7-T5-19 XV and XP Operator Interface XP Operator Interface 5 5 ELC Graphics Panels Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 V7-T5-2 V7-T5-21 V7-T5-23 V7-T5-28 V7-T5-32 V7-T5-35 V7-T5-36 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Learn Online 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-1 5.1 5 5 Operator Interface Products Product Overview Product and Software Selection Guides Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide 5 5 5 5 5 Description ELC-GP Graphics Panel HMi Operator Interface Page V7-T5-5 Page V7-T5-13 Screen size Two-line and four-line 3.5-inch, 5.7-inch, 7.0-inch, 8.0-inch and 10.4-inch 5 Screen options Monochrome 65k color TFT Interface Keypad only Resistive touchscreen only or touchscreen and keypad 5 Communication ports 2 serial 3 serial; USB; Expansion port for Ethernet or Local I/O, onboard Ethernet VU models 5 Simultaneous protocols 1 3 or 4 Ethernet drivers — Yes Upload/download Serial cable Serial, Ethernet, and/or USB Operating system Proprietary Proprietary Third-party software support — — Screen saver — Yes 5 5 5 5 5 Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide, continued 5 5 5 5 5 5 Description 5 Screen size 3.5-inch, 5.7-inch, 7.0-inch, 8.4-inch and 10.4-inch 8.4-inch, 10.4-inch, 12.1-inch, 15.0-inch and blind node (no screen) Screen options Color TFT, 64k colors; resolutions from QVGA (320 x 240) to WVGA (800 x 480) Color TFT, 16 million colors; resolutions from SVGA (800 x 600) to UVGA (1600 x1200) 5 XV Operator Interface XP Operator Interface Page V7-T5-21 Page V7-T5-28 Interface Resistive touchscreen Infrared, non-reflective safety glass 5 Communication ports Ethernet, RS-232 and/or RS-485, USB; CANopen or PROFIBUS®-DP, SmartWire-DT, USB and RS-485 on CoDeSys models 2 serial; 2 Ethernet; removable CompactFlash®; 4 USB; VGA 5 Simultaneous protocols 3 on Visual Designer, varies for Galileo and XSoft-CoDeSys-2 5 or 8 Ethernet drivers Yes Yes Upload/download Serial, Ethernet, USB Serial, Ethernet, USB 5 Operating system Windows® CE 5.0 Professional Windows XP Embedded (protected) Third-party software support — Yes 5 Screen saver Yes Yes 5 5 5 V7-T5-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.1 Operator Interface Products Product Overview Software Product Selection Guide 5 5 5 5 Description Visual Designer XSoft-CoDeSys-2 1 Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP Overview Feature-rich software package with SCADA functionality and Web serving capabilities that can be run on XV, XP, ePro PS operator interfaces or personal computers Feature-rich software package with integrated logic and visualization that can be run on specific XV operator interface models Intuitive visualization tool. Use Galileo on XV-102-H_ units or on XV units running CoDeSys when a stronger visualization package is needed Use HMi Soft to create, edit, upload and download applications to the HMi family of operator interfaces Use ELCSoftGP to create, edit, upload and download applications to ELC Graphics Panels 5 5 5 Catalog ID Development software seat license VISUALDCE (CE hardware) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 2 SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 3 VISUALDXP5 (5-pack of VISUALDXP) VISUALDCE5 (5-pack of VISUALDCE) VISUALDXP (PCs, XPe, and CE hardware) SW-GALILEO-S SW-GALILEO-M Runtime software for a PC HMISOFT 5 ELCSOFTGP 5 5 VISUALRTPC N/A ■ N/A N/A 5 5 Time-Saving Editor Features Online and offline simulation ■ ■ ■ ■ — Macro capability ■ ■ ■ ■ — VB scripting ■ — — — — Multi-language ■ ■ ■ ■ — System/internal variables ■ ■ ■ ■ — Auto-scale application to different resolution/screen size ■ ■ ■ ■ — 5 Scripting (IF, THEN, ELSE, GOTO) ■ ■ ■ ■ — 5 Graphics library ■ — ■ ■ — Master pages ■ Screen groups ■ One ■ Screen groups ■ Base screen — 5 5 5 5 User-created controls ■ ■ ■ ■ — Customizable application symbols ■ ■ ■ — — Full math evaluation ■ ■ ■ With macros ■ With macros — Reusable controls, images and pages ■ Via indirect tag and/ ■ ■ — — Advanced search and replace ■ ■ ■ — — Advanced context sensitive help ■ ■ ■ — — Conversion of legacy PanelMate™ configurations ■ — — — — 5 Optional PanelBuilder™ conversion utility ■ — — — — 5 Online configuration/editing ■ ■ — — — 5 5 or PLC assignments 5 5 Notes 1 See the logic section of the catalog for details on the logic features in the XSoft-CoDeSys-2 software package. 2 Includes XSoft-CoDeSys-2 software for developing applications, runtime software for the XV Series. Single User License. 3 Includes XSoft-CoDeSys-2 software for developing applications, runtime software for the XV Series. Multi User License. 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-3 5.1 5 Operator Interface Products Product Overview Software Product Selection Guide, continued 5 5 5 Visual Designer XSoft-CoDeSys-2 1 Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP Clock synchronization with controller ■ ■ Configured via visualization ■ ■ ■ Sound actions or control ■ — ■ ■ ■ Security ■ Advanced multi-level ■ ■ ■ Multi-level ■ Pop-up screens ■ And group screens — ■ ■ — Animated graphics ■ ■ ■ ■ — 5 Real-time trending ■ ■ ■ ■ — Recipes ■ ■ ■ ■ — 5 Report generation ■ — ■ ■ Using Excel and VU Server — Timer scheduling ■ ■ ■ ■ — Calendar scheduling ■ ■ — — — 5 Notification of data and events via email/text messaging ■ ■ — — — 5 Data archiving ■ ■ ■ ■ — Archive to shared network drive ■ ■ ■ — — 5 Alarm and event archiving ■ ■ ■ ■ — Historical trending ■ ■ ■ ■ — 5 Import/export from XML or CSV ■ ■ ■ — — Database interface ■ ADO.net compliant ■ DDE — ■ — Vision system interfaces ■ — ■ — — ■ With user created — — — 5 5 5 5 5 5 Description Runtime Features screens 5 Secure document and Web network ■ browser 5 Web server—viewing and control ■ ■ — — — Automatic scaling of Web clients ■ — — — — 5 Remote desktop ■ VNC and RemoteClient ■ VNC and RemoteClient ■ VNC and RemoteClient ■ VU Remote — Launch/control third-party applications ■ — — — — Embedded PLC logic — ■ — — — 5 5 passwords Note 1 See the logic section of the catalog for details on the logic features in the XSoft-CoDeSys-2 software package. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 Contents ELC Graphics Panels Description Page ELC Graphics Panels Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings Online 5 5 V7-T5-6 V7-T5-7 V7-T5-7 V7-T5-10 V7-T5-11 An Eaton Green Solution 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Description Features 5 ELC Graphics Panels are simple to program and easily connect to ELC products. ELC graphics panels make modifying an application quick and easy. With more than 30 objects that can be placed anywhere on the display, these tough panels also communicate to other major controllers. These graphics panels have two serial ports that can be used simultaneously to communicate. Transfer applications to or from these graphics panels using the handy transfer module. Ten programmable functions keys on the outdoor rated display provide easy-to-change pages, input numeric values, enter alpha-numeric passwords, set, reset and more. Create alarms, password protect, import bitmaps and use many different fonts. Protocols 5 Supported Protocols 5 Protocol 5 Eaton ELC Eaton D50/D32LT, D320 5 Eaton MVX ASCII Eaton MVX RTU 5 Modbus ASCII Modbus RTU 5 Allen-Bradley DF1 5 Mitsubishi FX Series Mitsubishi FX2N Series 5 Koyo K-Sequence LG 200S 5 OMRON C-Series 5 Siemens S7-200 Series ASCII Slave Mode 5 And more... 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-5 5.2 5 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels ELC Graphics Panel Features 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Item ELC-GP02 Screen STN-LCD STN-LCD Color Monochromatic Monochromatic Backlight The backlight automatic turn off time is 1–99 minutes (0 = do not to turn off) (backlight life is 50 thousand hours at 25°C) The backlight automatic turn off time is 1–99 minutes (0 = do not to turn off) (backlight life is 50 thousand hours at 25°C) Resolution 160 x 32 pixels 128 x 64 pixels Display range 72 mm (W) x 22 mm (H) 67 mm (W) x 32 mm (H) Contrast adjustment 15-step contrast adjustment 10-step contrast adjustment Language font ASCII: characters (including European fonts) Taiwan: (BIG 5 code) traditional Chinese character font China: (GB2324-80 code) simplified Chinese character font ASCII: characters (including European fonts) Taiwan: (BIG 5 code) traditional Chinese character font China: (GB2324-80 code) simplified Chinese character font Font size (ASCII) 5 x 8, 8 x 8, 8 x 12, 8 x 16 5 x 8, 8 x 8, 8 x 12, 8 x 16 ALARM indication LED 1. Power-on indication (flash three times) 2. Flash for communication error or other alarm 3. Special indication by user programming 1. Power-on indication (flash three times) 2. Flash for communication error or other alarm 3. Special indication by user programming 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 RS-232 LED (yellow) Flashes when communicating Flashes when communicating RS-485 LED (green) Flashes when communicating Flashes when communicating 256 KB flash memory 256 KB flash memory Serial communication port RS-232 (COM1) 9 PIN D-SUB male Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits Parity: None/Odd/Even Baud rate: 4800 bps–115,200 bps Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits Parity: None/Odd/Even Baud rate: 4800 bps–115,200 bps Extension communication port RS-485 (COM2) 5-pin removal terminal (RS-485 or RS-422) Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits Parity: None/Odd/Even Baud rate: 4800 bps–115,200 bps Data length: 7 or 8 bits Stop bits: 1 or 2 bits Parity: None/Odd/Even Baud rate: 4800 bps–115,200 bps Program memory External interface 5 5 5 5 5 Extension slot The slot for program copy card The slot for program copy card Power 24 Vdc input 24 Vdc input Standards and Certifications 5 ● 5 ● 5 ELC-GP04 Display screen ● ● UL 508 cUL (CSA C22.2 No. 14) CE (Low Voltage Directive); Class 1 Div 2 Groups A, B, C, D RoHS 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 Catalog Number Selection 5 ELC-GP Graphics Panel 5 ELC-GP 5 ELC-GP 02 5 Series ELC-GP = ELC Graphics Panel Display 02 = Monochromatic, two-line 04 = Monochromatic, four-line 5 5 5 Product Selection ELC-GP04 5 Graphics Panels Catalog Number 5 160 x 32 pixels, 10 function keys, monochrome ELC-GP02 5 128 x 64 pixels, 10 function keys, monochrome ELC-GP04 5 ELC-GPSPKIT 5 Description Panels Spare Parts Kit Includes several power connectors, battery doors, gaskets, mounting clips, etc. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-7 5.2 5 5 5 5 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels Software and Accessories ELCSoftGP Programming Software System Requirements ● Operating Systems—Windows 2000, Windows XP ELCSoftGP Programming Software configures all ELC graphic panels. With ELCSoftGP, applications can be created, edited, downloaded and uploaded. Move programs from one controller to a different one with ease. 5 ELCSoftGP 5 5 ELCSoftGP Editing Environment Description Catalog Number Programming software for GP units ELCSOFTGP 5 5 5 5 5 5 ELC-GPXFERMOD Program Transfer Module The ELC-GPXFERMOD is a multifunction device that provides the ability to back up an application already loaded onto one of the ELC-GP units. It will store all system settings such as baud and ID, as well as passwords and the application itself. Once stored in the module, the application and settings can be transferred to another ELC-GP unit of the same model number. ELC-GPXFERMOD 5 ELC-GPXFERMOD Description Catalog Number Program transfer module ELC-GPXFERMOD 5 5 5 ELC-CBPCELC_ Description 5 5 Catalog Number 1 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic Controller (ELC) ELC-CBPCELC1 3 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic Controller (ELC) ELC-CBPCELC3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 ELC-CBPCGP3 Cable 5 Use this cable to download or upload applications between a PC and the ELC-GP graphics panels. This cable can also be used to transfer a program from an ELC-GP to another ELC-GP. 5 Pin definition of 9 PIN D-SUB RS-232: ON PC (RS-232) 5 ON ELC-GP02/04 9 5 1 6 6 1 5 9 9 PIN D-SUB 5 5 9 PIN D-SUB PC COM Port 9 PIN D-SUB Female 5 GP02/04 COM Port 9 PIN D-SUB Female Rx Tx 2 3 3 2 Tx Rx GND 5 5 GND 5 5 PC to ELC-GPxx Cable Description Catalog Number Cable, PC to ELC-GP, 9.8 ft (3m) ELC-CBPCGP3 5 5 5 5 Power Supplies 5 All ELC modules operate from 24 Vdc. These power supplies provide a convenient way to provide robust DC voltage. 5 ELC Power Supplies ELC-PS01 5 Description Catalog Number Power supply, 24 watt, 1 amp ELC-PS01 5 5 L N 5 24V 0V POWER ELC-PS01 5 ELC-PS02 Power supply, 48 watt, 2 amp ELC-PS02 5 5 L N 24V 0V 5 POWER ELC-PS02 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-9 5.2 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5 Technical Data and Specifications 5 ELC Graphics Panels 5 Environmental 5 5 Description Specification Transportation and storage Temperature –4° to 140°F (–20° to 60°C) Operating Temperature 32° to 122°F (0° to 50°C) 5 Humidity 20–90% RH (noncondensing) Communication interface COM1: RS-232; COM2: RS-485/RS-422 5 Vibration 0.5 mm displacement, 10–55 Hz, X, Y, Z three directions and two hours for each direction Impact 10G, 11 ms, from X, Y, Z three directions and three times for each direction 5 Weight 0.53 lbs (0.24 kg) Cooling method Natural air cooling 5 Electrical/EMC Approvals 5 Electrostatic discharge immunity Radiated immunity EN61000-4-3/1995 5 Electrical fast transient EN61000-4-4/1995 Radiated emission CISPR22, Class A 5 5 EN61000-4-2/1995 Other Approvals Waterproof class of front panel UL Type 4X outdoor rated UV resistant UL 746C 5 5 ELC Power Supply Item ELC-PS01 ELC-PS02 5 Dimensions W x H x D in inches (mm) 1.44 x 3.54 x 2.36 (36.5 x 90 x 60) 2.17 x 3.54 x 2.36 (55 x 90 x 60) 5 Input power 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz 100–240 Vac 50/60 Hz Output volts 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 5 5 Output current (A) 1A 2A Watts 24 48 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels 5.2 Dimensions 5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5 ELC-GP04 5 ALARM RS-232 RS-485 5 5 Up Pg Up 3.82 (97.0) 5 Pg Dn Down Esc Shift 3.35 (85.0) Right Left 5 F0 F2 F1 F5 F6 F3 F7 F4 F8 F9 5 Enter 5 5.79 (147.0) 5 5 1.20 (30.5) 0.14 1.40 (3.5) (35.5) 5 5 Cut-Out Dimensions 5.31 (135.0) 5 5 5 5 3.35 (85.0) 5 5 5 5.31 ~ 5.37 (135 ~ 136.5) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-11 5.2 5 Operator Interface Products ELC Graphics Panels Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) ELC-GP02 5 5 ALARM RS-232 RS-485 5 5 3.82 (97.0) 5 3.35 (85.0) F0 Esc 5 F1 F2 F3 F4 0 1 2 3 F6 F7 F8 F9 Up Pg Up 4 Right Left F5 5 6 7 8 9 Enter Pg Dn Down 5 5.79 (147.0) 5 5 5 1.20 (30.5) 0.14 1.40 (3.5) (35.5) 5 5 Cut-Out Dimensions 5.31 (135.0) 5 5 5 3.35 (85.0) 5 5 5 5 5 5.31 ~ 5.37 (135 ~ 136.5) ELC-GPXFERMOD 5 2.00 (50.9) 5 5 0.78 (19.8) 5 5 0.39 (10.0) 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5.3 Contents HMi Operator Interface Description Page HMi Operator Interface Features Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawings Online 5 5 V7-T5-14 V7-T5-14 V7-T5-15 V7-T5-15 V7-T5-18 V7-T5-19 An Eaton Green Solution 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Description Features Positioned between the ELC graphics panels and the XV series of operator interfaces, HMi is the workhorse of the industry. Ideal for machinery OEMs, the HMi series provides the most value with the latest technology and advanced feature set in an economical hardware and software package. All units offer RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 communications. The 7-, 8- and 10-inch units also offer Ethernet communication options. ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Auto-scale application from 10 to 4 inches Screen and backlight saver Pop-up screens Animated graphics Conditional visibility Application lock for IP protection Data archiving Multi-language Eight levels of security Ethernet communication drivers 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Ethernet, COMM port and USB upload/download USB ports for data storage Three serial ports Up to four simultaneous protocols Math and logic functions CSV import/export tags and recipes Macro capability Alarm/event recording and viewing Real-time and historical trending Online and offline simulation HMi VU Exclusive Features ● ● ● ● ● ● VU server VU remote Multi-link Onboard Ethernet on some models Audio and SD on some models Supports USB mouse and other industrial pointing devices 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-13 5.3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface Protocols Supported Protocols Manufacturer and Protocol Manufacturer and Protocol Manufacturer and Protocol Manufacturer and Protocol Allen-Bradley Festo M2i Modicon MicroLogix Festo PLC SLC 5 FuFeng DH485 APC EtherNet/IP (Micro, Compact and ControlLogix, SCL 5 Cimon 5 5 5 CP Series Loader Protocol XP Series Loader Protocol Copley Stepnet 5 5 5 VLT 2800 (FC Protocol) Delta 5 5 Hitachi Delta DVP PLC Delta Controller RTU Delta DVP TCP/IP CJ1 Series A2A/A2AS/A2USH Jetter Eaton Controller ASCII Eaton Controller RTU Emerson TPM1A Parker Q Series CPU Port Compax 3 Q Series Ethernet SIEMENS Q Series Computer Link S7 200 Nano Series J2s Series S7 300 (with PC Adapter) MKS S7 300 (Direct MPI) CT150 S7 300 (ISO TCP) MC700/720 Modbus ASCII (Master) 984 RTU (Master) RTU 2W (Master) ASCII Hex Address (Master) Glofa GM6 CNET RTU Hex Address (Master) Master-K CNET ASCII nW (Master) XGT CNET RTU nW (Master) LiYan S7 300 (without PC Adapter) BY125 Master-K 120S/200S LYPLC EX EC20 Series A1SH/A3N/A2ASH CPU Port JC Series LECOM-A/B Protocol NFX—ASCII NCS-FI/FS Series Omron Hust CNC Controller v2 LG NFX—RTU PS4 Series NIKKI DENSO C Series Lenze MVX—ASCII PS3 Series A Series/J71UC24 K-Sequence MVX—RTU FX Series TWIDO Moeller FX Series Computer Link DL/SU Series GVX—RTU FAMA SC Mitsubishi NEZA (Uni-Telway) Hust CNC Controller Koyo ELC Series TCP/IP Mirle FX3U KV/KZ Series ELC Series Serial FP Series FX2N Keyence Eaton TSX Premium (Uni-Telway 1-1) Matsushita EH Series Procedure 2 Micro Smart Delta DVP EH/SA ES/EX/SS (V5.1) TSX Micro (Uni-Telway) M2i Slave EH Series Procedure 1 IDEC EasyPLC 800/MFD (EasyCom) 5 Series 90 SNP Hust Danfoss GVX—ASCII 5 Frenic Inverter GE Fanuc BP Series Loader Protocol Delta Controller ASCII 5 Fuji Electric M2i Master ASCII (Slave) RTU (Slave) S7 1200 (ISO TCP) Taian TP02 Ti Ti435 Vigor M Series VIPA S7 300 (with PC Adapter) YOKOGAWA ACE TCP/IP Facon FB Series 5 5 5 Standards and Certifications ● ● ● 5 ● ● 5 CE UL cUL C-Tick RoHS 5 5 V7-T5-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5.3 Catalog Number Selection 5 HMi Operator Interface 5 HMi 5 HMIVU 07 CU NB E 5 Series HMIVU = HMi VU Series Display 04 = 4.3-inch LCD 06 = 5.6-inch LCD 07 = 7.0-inch LCD 08 = 8.0-inch LCD 10W = 10.1-inch-wide LCD Options E = On-board Ethernet and audio out Options CU = Color TFT without expansion port 5 5 Options NBx = HMi VU Firmware Series NB = HMi VU Series no function buttons 5 5 5 Product Selection HMI_ 5 HMi VU Products Description Catalog Number 4-inch color TFT, no function buttons, on-board Ethernet HMIVU04CUNBE 6-inch color TFT, no function buttons, no Ethernet HMIVU06CUNB1 7-inch color TFT, no function buttons, on-board Ethernet HMIVU07CUNBE 8-inch color TFT, no function buttons, on-board Ethernet HMIVU08CUNBE 10-inch color TFT, no function buttons, on-board Ethernet HMIVU10WCUNBE 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-15 5.3 5 5 5 5 5 HMiSoft Programming Software For use with the of HMi and HMi VU series touchscreens. This easy to use Windows based software can run on Windows XP and Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit systems. ● ● 5 5 HMi Operator Interface Software and Accessories 5 5 Operator Interface Products ● ● Ethernet and serial communication drivers Up to four simultaneous protocols Screen manager Over 70 on-screen objects HMi Editor 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Pop-up screens Animated graphics Conditional visibility Built-in picture library Create your own picture library Multi-language Eight levels of security Macro editing with math and logic functions CSV import/export tags and recipes ● ● ● ● ● ● Alarm/event recording and viewing Store archived data, alarms and events to USB Real-time and historical trending Auto-scale application from 10 to 4 inches On and offline simulation Upload/download applications over USB, serial or Ethernet ● ● ● ● ● Application lock for IP protection Screen and backlight saver Multi-link allows sharing of PLC data over Ethernet 1 VU Server optional download 1 VU Remote optional download 1 HMi Editor Description Catalog Number Programming software for HMi and HMi VU models HMISOFT 5 5 HMi Screen Management 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 HMiSoft Editor 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Note 1 Exclusive HMiVU features. V7-T5-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5.3 Adapter Plate Description Catalog Number 6-inch HMi adapter plate for PM1000 APPM1HMI6 5 5 5 Kits Description Catalog Number HMi spare parts kits (includes several power connectors, battery doors, gaskets, mounting clips, etc.) HMI-SPKIT 5 5 5 Replacement Gaskets Description 5 Catalog Number 4-inch HMi replacement gasket (2/kit) HMI04-GASKET 6-inch HMi and 7-inch HMi VU replacement gasket (2/kit) HMI06-GASKET 8-inch HMi replacement gasket (2/kit) HMI08-GASKET 10-inch HMi replacement gasket (2/kit) HMI10-GASKET 5 5 5 5 Cable Description Catalog Number 1 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic Controller (ELC) ELC-CBPCELC1 3 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic Controller (ELC) ELC-CBPCELC3 5 5 5 Power Supply Description Catalog Number 1 amp 24 Vdc power supply ELC-PS01 2 amp 24 Vdc power supply ELC-PS02 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-17 5.3 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface 5 Technical Data and Specifications 5 HMi VU Operator Interface 5 Description 5 5 5 5 5 LCD module Display type 5 HMIVU06CUNB1 5.6-inch TFT LCD 7-inch TFT LCD 8-inch TFT LCD 10.1-inch widescreen TFT LCD 65536 colors 65536 colors 65536 colors 65536 colors Resolution 480 x 234 pixels 320 x 234 pixels 800 x 600 pixels 800 x 600 pixels 1024 x 600 pixels Backlight LED backlight (20,000 hours half-life at 25°C) 1 LED backlight (20,000 hours half-life at 25°C) 1 LED backlight (10,000 hours half-life at 25°C) 1 LED backlight (10,000 hours half-life at 25°C) 1 LED backlight (10,000 hours half-life at 25°C) 1 Brightness NIT rating 400 DC/m2 200 DC/m2 200 DC/m2 250 DC/m2 200 DC/m2 Display size 95.04 x 53.856 mm 113.28 x 84.70 mm 141 x 105.75 mm 162 x 121.5 mm 226 x 128.7 mm Operation system Real Time OS Real Time OS Real Time OS Real Time OS Real Time OS MCU 32-bit RISC micro-controller 32-bit RISC micro-controller 32-bit RISC micro-controller 32-bit RISC micro-controller 32-bit RISC micro-controller NOR Flash ROM Flash ROM 128 MB OS System: 30 MB Backup: 16 MB User Application: 82 MB Flash ROM 128 MB OS System: 30 MB Backup: 16 MB User Application: 82 MB Flash ROM 128 MB OS System: 30 MB Backup: 16 MB User Application: 82 MB Flash ROM 128 MB OS System: 30 MB Backup: 16 MB User Application: 82 MB Flash ROM 128 MB OS System: 30 MB Backup: 16 MB User Application: 82 MB SDRAM 64M bytes 64M bytes 64M bytes 64M bytes 64M bytes Backup memory 16M bytes 16M bytes 16M bytes 16M bytes 16M bytes N/A N/A Stereo output Stereo output Stereo output IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u 10/100 Mbps auto-sensing has built-in isolated power circuit 3 IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u 10/100 Mbps auto-sensing has built-in isolated power circuit 3 IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u 10/100 Mbps auto-sensing has built-in isolated power circuit 3 SD card (supports SDHC) SD card (supports SDHC) SD card (supports SDHC) Sound effect output Buzzer Multi-tone frequency (2–4 kHz)/85 dB Ethernet interface N/A 5 IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u 10/100 Mbps auto-sensing has built-in isolated power circuit 3 Memory card N/A N/A 5 5 5 HMIVU10WCUNBE 4.3-inch TFT LCD 5 5 HMIVU08CUNBE 65536 colors AUX 5 HMIVU07CUNBE Display color 5 5 Specification HMIVU04CUNBE 1 USB Host 2 Ver 2.0 1 USB Client Ver 1.1 USB Serial COM port COM1 RS-232 (supports hardware flow control) / RS-485 RS-232 (supports hardware flow control) RS-232 (supports hardware flow control) RS-232 (supports hardware flow control) RS-232 (supports hardware flow control) COM2 RS-422/RS-485 RS-232/RS-485 RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (has built-in isolated power circuit) 3 COM3 N/A RS-422/RS-485 RS-232/RS-422/RS-485 (has built-in isolated power circuit) 3 Perpetual calendar (RTC) Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Built-in Cooling method Natural air circulation Natural air circulation Natural air circulation Natural air circulation Natural air circulation Safety approval CE/UL CE/UL CE/UL CE/UL CE/UL Waterproof degree IP65/NEMA 4X (indoor use only) Operation voltage 4 DC +24V (–10 to +15%) Please use isolated power supply 5 Voltage endurance Power consumption 4 4.8W 3.0W 7.68W 7.8W 12W 5 Backup battery 3V lithium battery CR2032 x 1 3V lithium battery CR2032 x 1 3V lithium battery CR2032 x 1 3V lithium battery CR2032 x 1 3V lithium battery CR2032 x 1 5 Operation temp. 0° to 50°C 0° to 50°C 0° to 50°C 0° to 50°C 0° to 50°C Storage temp. –20° to 60°C –20° to 60°C –20° to 60°C –20° to 60°C –20° to 60°C 5 Ambient humidity 5 AC500V for 1 minute (between charging [DC24 terminal] and FG terminals) Backup battery life It depends on the temperature used and the conditions of usage, about 3 years or more at 25°C 10%~90% RH [0° to 40°C], 10%~55% RH [41° to 50°C] / Pollution Degree 2 5 Hz < f < 8.3 Hz = continuous: 3.5 mm 8.3 Hz < f < 150 Hz = continuous: 1.0g Vibration resistance Shock IEC 61131-2 Compliant 5 Hz < f < 9 Hz = continuous: 1.75 mm/occasional: 3.5 mm < < 9 Hz f 150 Hz = continuous: 0.5g/occasional: 1.0g X, Y, Z directions for 10 times 5 5 Dimensions (W) x (H) x (D) mm 5 Panel cutout (W) x (H) mm 118.8 x 92.8 172.4 x 132.4 172.4 x 132.4 219.4 x 166.5 261.3 x 189.3 Weight Approx. 264g Approx. 670g Approx. 800g Approx. 1228g Approx.1520g 5 5 5 5 129 x 103 x 39 184 x 144 x 50 184 x 144 x 50 227.1 x 174.1 x 61 272 x 200 x 61 Notes 1 The half-life of backlight is defined as original luminance being reduced by 50% when the maximum driving current is supplied to HMi. The life of LED backlight shown is an estimated value under 25°C normal temperature and humidity conditions 2 USB Host port can provide up to 5V/500 mA of power. 3 The withstand voltage of the isolated power circuit is 1500V peak for 1 minute. 4 The value of the power consumption indicates the electrical power consumed by HMi only without connecting to any peripheral devices. In order to ensure the normal operation, it is recommended to use a power supply where the capacity is 1.5~2 times the value of the power consumption. V7-T5-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.3 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface Dimensions 5 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 5 HMIVU04 4.88 (124.0) 3.87 (98.3) 0.52 (13.1) 0.83 (21.2) 0.28 0.41 (7.0) (10.4) 0.79 (20.0) 2.11 (53.7) 5 1.43 (36.3) 5 5 Cutout 2.21 (56.1) 5 2.82 (71.7) 5 5 0.39 (10.0) 5 5 0.83 (21.0) 5 HMIVU06 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 6.79 (172.4) 5 7.24 (184.0) 5 5 5.21 (132.4) 5.67 (144.0) 5 5 5 5 5 HMIVU07 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 5 6.79 (172.4) 7.24 (184.0) 5 5 5.67 (144.0) 5 5.21 (132.4) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-19 5.3 5 5 Operator Interface Products HMi Operator Interface Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) HMIVU08 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 8.64 (219.4) 5 8.94 (227.1) 5 5 5 6.56 (166.5) 6.85 (174.1) 5 5 5 5 HMIVU10 5 0.063 (1.6) to 0.24 (6.0) 10.29 (261.3) 10.71 (272.0) 5 5 5 7.88 (200.0) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.45 (189.3) Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface 5.4 Contents XV Operator Interface Description Page XV with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 V7-T5-25 V7-T5-25 V7-T5-26 V7-T5-27 V7-T5-28 V7-T5-32 V7-T5-35 V7-T5-36 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 XV with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Product Description XV with Visual Designer Positioned between the HMi and the XP series of operator interface, the XV series is ideal for applications requiring extensive connectivity and the advanced features available in Visual Designer without the expense associated with more powerful open platforms. XV with XSoft-CoDeSys The XV series with XSoftCoDeSys combines powerful logic and visualization capabilities into a single device. It is ideal for OEM applications where low component count and ease of program development and remote administration is critical. The XV models were designed with OEMs in mind featuring an attractive bezel and slim and light weight housing. The clip mount design simplifies installation. The XV Models with XSoftCoDeSys offer multiple field bus options built directly onboard the unit to provide an overall solution optimized both for size and cost. XV with Galileo The XV Series with Galileo offers a global visualization software package for all applications in system and machine building. It is designed to optimize performance on the XV platform. Galileo can also run as the visualization package on XV CoDeSys units when a stronger visualization tool is required. 5 Features XV with Visual Designer XV Series operator interface with Windows CE operating system ● ● ● ● ● ● 3.5-, 5.7-, 7.0- (widescreen), 8.4- and 10.4-inch screen sizes Cost effective plastic or metal housing Resistive touch with flush bezel Ethernet and serial ports on all models Visual Designer XP or CE development software Pre-installed Visual Designer runtime and Web serving licenses XV with Galileo only units ● 3.5-, 5.7- and 7.0-inch (widescreen) ● Plastic housing ● Resistive touch with flush bezel ● Ethernet on all models ● RS-232 or RS-485 serial ports available ● Prelicensed for Galileo Run Time (GRS) XV with XSoft-CoDeSys XV Series operator interface with Windows CE operating system ● 3.5-, 5.7-, 7.0- (widescreen), 8.4- and 10.4-inch screen sizes ● Cost effective plastic or metal housing Resistive touch with flush bezel ● ● ● Ethernet and serial ports on all models PROFIBUS, CANopen and SmartWire-DT optional ● XSoft-CoDeSys-2 programming software ● Pre-licensed for CoDeSys run time Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● CE UL cUL RoHS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-21 5.4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 XV and XP Operator Interface Selecting the right model for your application The XV product offered with Visual Designer, Galileo or XSoft-CoDeSys offers the highest level of flexibility for one operator interface product. Galileo provides a visualization environment designed around the needs of machine building OEMs. Use Galileo when designing high-performance machines in the OEM space. Visual Designer provides a fully integrated SCADA and HMI platform. Use Visual Designer when Web enabling, remote access, database and connectivity, and when one operator software package is required across XV and XP platforms. XSoft-CoDeSys turns the XV into a fully integrated Logic and OI platform (HMI-PLC). Use XSoftCoDeSys to unleash the PLC functionality on an XV. With optional communication interfaces like SmartWire-DT, CANopen and PROFIBUS, Eaton welcomes you into the Lean Automation space. 5 5 Operator Interface Products Take advantage of the best of both worlds with Galileo and XSoft-CoDeSys together. Combining the power of these two software platforms provides limitless possibilities on an HMI/PLC platform. Software Suite 5 5 Features 5 5 5 5 FTP, Remote Client, Real VNC ® Gateway, SD Slot 5 5 C PL HMI 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.4 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Product Selection Guide 5 XV and XP Operator Interface with Visual Designer Series XV Model Screen Size Housing material Operating system XV-152 3.5, 5.7, 7.0 5.7, 8.4, 10.4 Plastic Metal WinCE 5.0 Professional Touchscreen technology 5 XP XV-102 Resistive XP-702 8.4, 10.4, 12.1, 15.0 Blind Node (no display) Metal 5 Windows XPe Infrared, non-reflective safety glass N/A Communication ports 1 Ethernet, 1 or 2 serial, 0 or 1 USB 2 Ethernet, 2 serial, 4 USB Development software Visual Designer (VISUALDCE or VISUALDXP) Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session Standard models 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session Pre-licensed tags, drivers, Web sessions 5 5 5 Enterprise models 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session 5 4000 tags, 3 drivers, 1, 2, 4, or 8 Web sessions simultaneously 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 Web sessions simultaneously 5 Alarm online/history Yes Yes Trend online/history Yes Yes Scripting Yes (VB Script) Yes (VB Script) Scheduler Yes Yes Recipe Yes Yes Reports Yes Yes OPC, TCP/IP, and communication drivers Yes Yes Field upgradeable max tags, drivers, Web sessions Web Server and Web Thin Client support Yes Yes Full remote access Yes Yes Local/remote database interface Yes Yes Ability to run third-party software No Yes ActiveX and .NET controls No Yes Full document viewing No Yes Windows media player No Yes Vision system interfaces No Yes Network camera monitoring No Yes 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-23 5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface XV Series with Galileo Only Run Time Option (Not Available on XP Series) Series XV 5 Model Model XV-102-H 5 Housing material Plastic Operating system WinCE 5.0 standard 5 5 Screen Size 3.5, 5.7, 7.0 Touchscreen Resistive Communications ports 1 Ethernet, 1 RS-232, or 1 RS-485, 1 USB Optional field buses N/A 5 Development software Galileo Alarm online/historical Yes 5 Trend online/historical Yes Scripting 5 5 Structured text Scheduler No Recipe Yes Reports No 5 Full remote access Yes Ability to run third-party software No 5 Vision system interfaces Yes Multi-language support Yes PLC variable import Yes 5 5 5 XV Series with CoDeSys Run Time (Not Available on XP Series) Series 5 Model 5 Housing material 5 Touchscreen 5 XV Screen Size XV-102 XV-152 3.5, 5.7, 7.0 5.7, 8.4, 10.4 Plastic Operating system Metal WinCE 5.0 Standard Resistive Communications ports 1 Ethernet, 1 or 2 serial, 0 or 1 USB Optional field buses PROFIBUS, CANopen, SmartWire-DT 5 Development software 5 Integrated screen design Yes Integrated field bus configuration Yes Alarm online/historical Yes 5 5 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 IEC-61131-3 logic programming Trend online/historical (LD, ST, SFC, IL, FBD, CFC) Yes Yes Scripting Structured Text 5 Scheduler Yes Recipe Yes 5 Reports No OPC, TCP/IP and communication driver 5 5 Yes (OPC Server for PC) Web Server and Web Thin Client support Yes Full remote access Yes Local/remote data base access Limited (DDE) 5 Ability to run third-party software No ActiveX and .NET controls No 5 Full document viewing No Windows media player No Vision system interfaces No Network camera monitoring No 5 5 V7-T5-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.4 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Catalog Number Selection 5 XV Operator Interface 5 XV XV – 102 – B3 – 35TQRG – 10 Family XV = Microsoft Windows CE operating system Performance Class 102 = CE, plastic housing, 2nd gen 152 = CE, metal housing, 2nd gen 5 Branding and Bezel 10 = Standard blank front bezel with Eaton branded product label Features Base Unit Variant 1 B = Retentive memory D = Retentive memory, USB host, RS-232 E = Retentive memory, USB host, SmartWire-DT H = Galileo only unit, USB host Features Additional COMM Options 3 = 1-RS-232 4 = 1-RS-485 6 = 1-CANopen 8 = 1-PROFIBUS E = 1-SmartWire-DT Display Size 35 = 3.5-inch 57 = 5.7-inch 70 = 7.0-inch 84 = 8.4-inch 10 = 10.4-inch Display Technology TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive TWR = TFT (widescreen) resistive OS Build C = XSoft-CoDeSys/Galileo G = CE Professional OS and Visual Designer runtime 1500 tags 2 L = Galileo only unit 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection XV Operator Interface 5 5 XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet and RS-232 XV-102-B3-35TQRG-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet and RS-485 XV-102-B4-35TQRG-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D4-57TVRG-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT wide screen, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D4-70TWRG-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-57TVRG-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-84TVRG-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-10TVRG-10 5 5 5 5 5 Notes 1 All 1xx performance class units have 400 MHz processor, 64 MB DRAM, 1 x 10/100 Ethernet, and 1 x USB device. 2 Standard software on embedded hardware. These XV models have a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional operating system and are pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime for up to 1500 tags, 3 simultaneous communication drivers, and 1 Web session. Field upgrades are available for up to 4000 tags, 3 drivers, and 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-25 5.4 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface XV Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys, HMI-PLC 5 5 5 Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-485 XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-485 XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, SmartWire-DT XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10 5 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10 5 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10 5 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10 5 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10 5 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10 5 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10 5 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10 5 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT, RS-485 XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10 5 5 5 5 5 XV Operator Interface with Galileo Only 5 Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-35TQRL-10 5 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-35TQRL-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-57TVRL-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-57TVRL-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-70TWRL-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-70TWRL-10 5 5 5 5 Accessories XV Family Accessories 5 5 5 5 Description Catalog Number SD memory card for all XV models MEMORY-SD-A1-S Spare part kit for XV-102 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-57-KG-1 XV-102 Spare part kit for XV-152 models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.4 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Technical Data and Specifications 5 XV Operator Interface Series 5 XV Midrange Operator Interface Model XV-102 Screen Size 3.5-Inch XV-152 5.7-Inch Operating system 7.0-Inch 5.7-Inch 8.4-Inch WinCE 5.0 Professional/Standard Touchscreen technology Resistive Resistive Resistive 5 10.4-Inch WinCE 5.0 Professional/Standard Resistive Resistive 5 Resistive Display, colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Pixel resolution (landscape) portrait mode also available QVGA 320 x 240 VGA 640 x 480 WVGA 800 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 Brightness (cd/m2) 250 250 250 350 350 350 5 5 Backlight LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming Lifespan of backlight (half-life) 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs Processor 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz Volatile memory 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM Non-volatile memory 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND, 1 SD card slot Real time clock Yes Communication ports Ethernet 10/100, RS-485 or RS-232 USB Device Slots for COMM modules None Power supply rated voltage 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND/ 2 MB NOR, 1 SD card slot Yes Yes Yes Ethernet 10/100, RS-485, RS-232 USB Host, USB Device None None 5 Yes 5 Ethernet 10/100, RS-485, RS-232 USB Host, USB Device None None 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) with polarity protection 5 5 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND/ 2 MB NOR, 1 SD card slot Yes 5 None 5 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) with polarity protection Continuous current consumption 0.2 (max. amps) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.6 5 Starting current inrush (A2s) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 5 Operation—relative humidity, noncondensing 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 5 Storage/transport—relative humidity, noncondensing –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% 5 Ambient conditions Shock IEC 60068-2-27 15g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15g for 11 ms duration 5 IEC 60068-2-6 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement 9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement 60–150 Hz: 2g acceleration IEC 60068-2-6 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement 9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement 60–150 Hz: 2g acceleration 5 CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS Vibration Agency certifications and standards 5 5 Protection type Front IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) Rear IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 Housing material Plastic Plastic Plastic Metal Metal Metal Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 136 x 100 x 30 170 x 130 x 39 210 x 135 x 38 212 x 156 x 53 275 x 208 x 53 345 x 260 x 54 Mounting cutout W x H (mm) 123 x 87 157 x 117 197 x 122 198 x 142 261 x 194 329 x 238 Approximate weight lbs (kg) 0.7 (0.3) 1.3 (0.6) 1.3 (0.6) 2.9 (1.3) 4.3 (2.1) 6.1 (3.0) Ability to run third-party software No No No No No No 5 5 5 5 VISUALDCE or VISUALDXP VISUALDCE or VISUALDXP 5 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session 5 Field upgradeable max tags, drivers, Web sessions (Visual Designer Models) 4000 tags, 3 drivers, 1, 2, 4, or 8 Web sessions simultaneously 4000 tags, 3 drivers, 1, 2, 4, or 8 Web sessions simultaneously XSoft-CoDeSys-2 development software SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S (seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M (multi-seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S (seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M (multi-seat) Galileo development software SW-GALILEO-S (seat) SW-GALILEO-M (multi-seat) SW-GALILEO-S (seat) SW-GALILEO-M (multi-seat) Visual Designer development software Pre-licensed tags, drivers, Web sessions (Visual Designer models) 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5 5 V7-T5-27 5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Contents XP Operator Interface Description 5 XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XP with Visual Designer Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 XP with Visual Designer 5 Product Description Features Standards and Certifications The XP models were designed for performance. This series is perfect for OEMs who require extensive connectivity, the advanced features available in Visual Designer, have large or high speed applications, or need an open platform for running thirdparty software. The unique infrared touchscreen with scratch resistant safety glass is ideal for harsh environments where traditional touchscreens are easily damaged. The two externally accessible solid state CompactFlash® drives provide both easy access and reliability. Protect Mode, available only on Eaton’s XP embedded operator interface products, protects the operating system from unwanted changes providing improved up-time and reliability. XP Series operator interface with Windows XP Embedded operating system ● 8.4-, 10.4-, 12.1- and 15.0inch screen sizes as well as blind node Infrared touch screen, safety glass and metal housing for demanding environments Multiple Ethernet, serial, and USB ports on all models All solid-state media increases reliability Open architecture compatible with third-party software and hardware Non-corruptible OS with Protect Mode® increases security and minimizes emergency and preventative maintenance downtime Visual Designer XP development software Pre-installed Visual Designer runtime and Web serving licenses ● 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 5 ● 5 ● ● CE UL cUL RoHS 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T5-21 V7-T5-29 V7-T5-29 V7-T5-30 V7-T5-30 V7-T5-32 V7-T5-35 V7-T5-36 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface 5.4 Catalog Number Selection 5 XP Operator Interface 5 XP 5 XP – 702 – F0 – 84TSIK – 10 5 Family XP = X86 Microsoft Windows XPe operating system Branding and Bezel 00 = No bezel (blind node) 10 = Standard blank front bezel with Eaton branded product label Performance Class 702 = XPe, metal housing, 2nd gen Features Base Unit Variant 1 E = 1 GHz Celeron with 1 GB RAM 4 GB C drive CF and 1 GB D drive CF F = 1.8 GHz Pentium with 2GB RAM 4 GB C drive CF and 1 GB D drive CF 5 5 5 Features Additional COMM Options 0 = No additional communication options Display Size 84 = 8.4-inch 10 = 10.4-inch 12 = 12.1-inch 15 = 15.0-inch BOX = Blind node (no display) Display Technology TSI = TFT (SVGA) Infrared TXI = TFT (XVGA) Infrared Blank = No display OS Build 2 J = XPe OS and License Visual Designer Runtime 4000 tags K = XPe OS and License Visual Designer Runtime 64,000 tags 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 Series Information All XP models have a Microsoft Windows XP embedded operating system and are pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime. The standard models are licensed for 4000 tags, 5 simultaneous communication drivers and 1 Web session. The enterprise models are licensed for 64,000 tags, 8 simultaneous communication drivers and 1 Web session. Field upgrades are available for up to 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, and 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128 or 256 simultaneous Web sessions. XP Operator Interface 5 5 5 5 XP Operator Interface Description Catalog Number XP 8.4-inch TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-84TSIJ-10 XP 10.4-inch TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-10TSIJ-10 XP 12.1-inch TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-12TXIJ-10 XP 15.0-inch TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-15TXIJ-10 XP blind node (no display), 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-BOXJ-00 XP 8.4-inch TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-84TSIK-10 XP 10.4-inch TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-10TSIK-10 XP 12.1-inch TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-12TXIK-10 XP 15.0-inch TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-15TXIK-10 XP blind node (no display), 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-BOXK-00 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Notes 1 All 7xx Performance Class units have 1 x 10/100, 1 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet, 4 x USB Host V2.0, 2 x RS-232. 2 Standard software on embedded hardware. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-29 5.4 5 5 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Accessories XP Operator Interface Description Catalog Number 5 Hard drive, 80 GB minimum for all XP models for application or data storage HDU-A7-S XP700 Industrial grade hard drive, 80 GB minimum for all XP models for application or data storage HDU-A7-SI XP700 5 XP700 externally mounted fan for all XP models (included with 1.8 GHz Enterprise models) ACC-FAN-700-S CompactFlash memory card, minimum 4 GB MEMORY-CF-A8-S XP-702 spare part kit for all XP models—1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip ACC-TP-57-RES-1 5 5 5 5 Technical Data and Specifications XP Operator Interface Series XP Performance Operator Interface Model XP-702 Screen Size 8.4-Inch 10.4-Inch 5 Operating system Windows XPe Windows XPe 5 Display, colors 5 5 5 5 Touchscreen technology 12.1-Inch 15.0-Inch Blind Node (no display) Windows XPe Windows XPe Windows XPe Infrared, non-reflective safety glass N/A Color TFT, selectable 16 million, 64k, or 256 colors VGA and DVI-D output Pixel resolution (landscape)— Portrait mode also available SVGA 800 x 600 SVGA 800 x 600 XGA 1024 x 768 XGA 1024 x 768 800 x 600 to 1920 x 1200 Brightness (cd/m2) 400 400 400 400 N/A Backlight 2 CCFL 2 CCFL 2 CCFL 4 CCFL N/A Lifespan of backlight (half-life) 50,000 hrs 50,000 hrs 50,000 hrs 50,000 hrs N/A Processor 5 5 5 Standard models 1 GHz Celeron M 1 GHz Celeron M 1 GHz Celeron M 1 GHz Celeron M 1 GHz Celeron M Enterprise models 1.8 GHz Pentium M 1.8 GHz Pentium M 1.8 GHz Pentium M 1.8 GHz Pentium M 1.8 GHz Pentium M Volatile memory Standard models 1 GB 1 GB 1 GB 1 GB 1 GB Enterprise models 2 GB 2 GB 2 GB 2 GB 2 GB 5 Non-volatile memory 5 Enterprise models 1 5 5 5 Standard models 1 4 GB min C drive (OS), 1 GB min D drive 4 GB min C drive (OS), 1 GB min D drive Real time clock Yes Yes Communication ports Yes Yes Yes Ethernet 1 x 10/100 and 1 x 10/100/1000; 2 x RS-232; 4 x USB 2.0 Host Slots for COMM modules 1 x PCI 32-bit Power supply rated voltage 1 x PCI 32-bit 1 x PCI 32-bit 1 x PCI 32-bit 1 x PCI 32-bit 24 Vdc nominal (–15%/+20%) with polarity protection Note 1 All are removable CompactFlash. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.4 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface XP Operator Interface, continued Series 5 XP Performance Operator Interface Model XP-702 Screen Size 8.4-Inch 10.4-Inch 12.1-Inch 15.0-Inch Blind Node (no display) Standard models 2.0 2.0 2.1 2.1 1.4 Enterprise models 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.2 2.8 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 5 Operation—relative humidity, 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% noncondensing 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 5 Storage/transport—relative humidity, noncondensing –20° to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20° to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20° to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20° to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20° to 60°C, 10 to 95% 5 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6 5 Continuous current consumption (maximum amps) Starting Current Inrush (A2s) 5 5 Ambient conditions Shock 5 IEC 60068-2-27 15g for 11 ms duration Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-6 5 5–9 Hz 3.5 mm displacement 3.5 mm displacement 3.5 mm displacement 3.5 mm displacement 3.5 mm displacement 9–60 Hz 0.15 mm displacement 0.15 mm displacement 0.15 mm displacement 0.15 mm displacement 0.15 mm displacement 60–150 Hz 1g acceleration 1g acceleration 1g acceleration 1g acceleration 1g acceleration Agency certifications and standards 5 CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS 5 Protection type Front IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP20, NEMA 1 Rear IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 Metal Metal Metal Metal Metal Housing material Dimensions W x H x D (mm) 275 x 208 x 102/140 345 x 260 x 91/129 361 x 279 x 98/136 427 x 322 x 101/139 264 x 194 x 58/96 Mounting cutout W x H (mm) 261 x 194 329 x 238 344 x 262 410 x 315 N/A 5 5 5 5 Approximate weight lbs (kg) 6.4/7.3 (3.2/3.6) 8.3/9.1 (4.1/4.5) 9.5/10.3 (4.7/5.1) 12.8/13.6 (6.3/6.7) 3.9/4.7 (1.9/2.3) Development software Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) Visual Designer (VISUALDXP) Ability to run third-party software Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 Pre-licensed tags, drivers, Web sessions Standard models 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session Enterprise models 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session Field upgradeable max. tags, drivers, Web sessions 5 5 5 64,000 tags, 8 drivers, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 Web sessions simultaneously 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-31 5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Contents Visual Designer Software Description 5 Page XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 5 V7-T5-21 V7-T5-28 V7-T5-33 V7-T5-35 V7-T5-36 5 5 5 5 5 5 Visual Designer Software 5 Product Description Features 5 Advanced GUI Development, Made Easy 5 Time-saving solutions, lower costs. Visual Designer is a software development package optimized for OEMs. New tools streamline the application development process, and the creation of Web-based applications has never been easier. In addition to basic monitor and control functionality, Visual Designer is packed with advanced features streamlining the design of sophisticated applications. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 With application development expense often outweighing the hardware expense, the demand to quickly design and implement advanced GUI solutions is greater than ever. Even advanced features such as data archiving, recipe management, multi-language, SQL database access, and Web serving are made easy through an elegant and modern user interface. Visual Designer’s ease-of-use and time-saving features lower your total installed cost. 5 5 5 Advanced Features Pop-ups and group screens ● Full mathematical and logical evaluation ● Web browsing and document viewing ● Remote access and control without having to install software to the remote PC ● Database interfacing ● Historical alarms and events ● Historical data archiving and trending ● Recipe management ● Multi-language ● VB scripting ● Report generation ● Scheduling ● Resolution conversion ● Emailing and text messaging ● Launch and control of thirdparty applications ● Advanced Development Features ● Conversion of legacy PanelMate configurations ● Optional PanelBuilder conversion utility ● Online configuration/ editing ● Advanced search and replace ● Automatic scaling of Web clients ● Customizable application symbols ● Reusable controls, images, and screens via indirect tag and/or PLC assignments System Requirements Windows XP and Windows 7 32-bit and 64-bit systems 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface 5.4 Fully connected, Web-enabled Today’s operator interface applications range from basic monitor and control to high-end, featurerich HMI software with Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA). Customers demand communications capability with any network, PLC, Web client, and database. The answer: Eaton’s Web-enabled Visual Designer operator interface software. Web-based thin client ● Zero admin client—no need to install software on the remote PC ● Supports multiple simultaneous and independent Web clients ● Simplified security—the same local user accounts and passwords for viewing and control also apply remotely Connectivity ● Extensive list of over 240 native communication drivers for PLCs, drives, and many other industrial and commercial devices ● Visual Designer software can interface to any relational database—access both local and enterprise functions such as MRP/ERP through databases such as Microsoft® Access, Fox Pro, SQL Server, Oracle®, PI System® and many others ● Other connectivity tools provide redundancy capabilities, Real-Time Data Exchange, Centralized Alarm Management, and more Open platform ● Visual Designer Software can host third-party ActiveX® and .NET controls and Visual Basic® programs ● In addition to Eaton’s Operator Interface families, Visual Designer’s runtime may be licensed on any 32 or 64-bit Windows PC Interoperability ● Software is designed to open standards such as XML, OPC, ActiveX, .NET, ODBC, ADO, SOAP, DDE and more 5 5 Peace of mind All of these capabilities— combined with Eaton’s commitment to provide free technical support for both OI hardware and software— make it quick and easy to purchase, develop and deploy XV and XP operator interface solutions. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 Visual Designer Software Visual Designer 5 5 Visual Designer Development Software License Key Description Catalog Number For CE hardware VISUALDCE For PCs, XPe and CE hardware VISUALDXP For CE hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDCE VISUALDCE5 For PCs, XPe and CE hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDXP VISUALDXP5 For a PC Runtime software license with a maximum of 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTPC64K Visual Designer development software and PC runtime software licenses for a maximum of 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTDEVPC For a PC Runtime software license with a maximum of 4k tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTPC4K For a PC Runtime software license with a maximum of 1500 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTPC1500 For a PC Runtime software license with a maximum of 300 tags, 3 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTPC300 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-33 5.4 5 Visual Designer 5 5 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Software Updates and Upgrades Description Catalog Number Update to current version Visual Designer development software for CE hardware VISUALDUPCE Update to current version Visual Designer development software PCs/XPe/CE VISUALDUPXP Update to current version of Visual Designer runtime license for PCs VISUALRTUPPC Upgrade from Visual Designer CE 1500 tag to 4000 tag runtime VISUALRT4KCE Upgrade from Visual Designer XPe 4000 tag, 5 driver to 64k tag, 8 driver runtime license VISUALRT64KXP 5 Upgrade from Visual Designer development software CE to CE plus PC and XPe (64k tag, 8 drivers) VISUALDCE2XP Visual Designer PanelBuilder conversion utility optional plug-in (requires Visual Designer software) VISUALDPBCU 5 Visual Designer 1 additional Web thin client license for Internet Explorer: Total of 2 VISUALWEB1 Visual Designer 3 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 4 VISUALWEB3 Visual Designer 7 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer Total of 8 VISUALWEB7 5 Visual Designer 15 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 16 VISUALWEB16 Visual Designer 31 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 32 VISUALWEB32 5 Visual Designer 63 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 64 VISUALWEB64 Visual Designer 127 additional Web thin client licenses for Internet Explorer: Total of 128 VISUALWEB128 5 Visual Designer 1 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 2 VISUALSVT2 Visual Designer 3 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 4 VISUALSVT4 Visual Designer 7 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 8 VISUALSVT8 5 Visual Designer 15 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 16 VISUALSVT16 Visual Designer 31 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 32 VISUALSVT32 5 Visual Designer 63 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 64 VISUALSVT64 Visual Designer 127 additional Secure Viewer Thin Client license: Total of 128 VISUALSVT128 Visual Designer 1 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 2 VISUALSMA2 Visual Designer 3 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 4 VISUALSMA4 Visual Designer 7 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 8 VISUALSMA8 5 Visual Designer 15 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 16 VISUALSMA16 Visual Designer 31 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 32 VISUALSMA32 5 Visual Designer 63 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 64 VISUALSMA64 Visual Designer 127 additional SMA Thin Client license: Total of 128 VISUALSMA128 Visual Designer collaborative server VISUALCBSERVER Visual Designer business dashboard tool VISUALDASHBOARD Visual Designer communication package for electrical products VISUALDELECDRVS 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 5.4 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Contents Galileo Software Description Page XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21 V7-T5-28 V7-T5-32 5 5 5 5 V7-T5-36 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Galileo Software Product Description The Intuitive Visualization Tool Galileo is an easy to learn yet powerful and extensive project design environment that can be used ideally in all system and machine building applications close to the machine and process. Galileo is designed for use in all sectors and offers comprehensive project design tools. Galileo provides a full range of functions without any graduated restrictions on tags or screens, and is optimized for our XV operator interface panels. Features ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Easy to learn and intuitive graphical user interface with a project overview window User-friendly project design with project simulation on development PC Different user interface styles Drag and drop positioning of objects, WYSIWYG (what you see is what you get) Simple, clear user guidance Tabular object properties, easy and fast assignment of attributes—copy and paste Convenient series assignment of texts and images to tags Many graphical objects such as bar graph, slide adjuster, graph plotter, curve chart, camera Anti-aliased gauge display Enhanced password handling with complex password and aging Extensive recipe handling Alarm handling with time stamp, history and diagnostics support with image display ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Multi-line display of alarm entries Online language selection Unicode support (also Asian character sets) Text import/export in XML format (example, Excel®) Brilliant image display, up to 65536 colors Import of 15 different image formats Dynamic objects Object parameter list, any number of data objects in a screen Dynamic unit of measure selection (example, °C–°F, inch–mm) Direct printing on panel (reports, forms) Many specific objects and system functions Simple import of PLC variables Full functionality always available, no graduated performance level Product Selection 5 Galileo Development Software 5 Description Catalog Number Single-seat license SW-GALILEO-S Multiple-seat license SW-GALILEO-M 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 System Requirements Windows XP and Windows 7 5 5 5 5 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T5-35 5.4 5 Operator Interface Products XV and XP Operator Interface Contents XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software Description 5 Page XV with Visual Designer, Galileo, or XSoft-CoDeSys-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software 5 5 5 V7-T5-21 V7-T5-28 V7-T5-32 V7-T5-35 5 5 5 5 5 5 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software 5 Product Description Features 5 Combined Logic and Visualization Development 5 IEC 61131-3 Logic Programming ● Ladder Diagram (LD) ● Structured Text (ST) ● Sequential function chart (SFC) ● Function block diagram (FBD) ● Freely definable function block chart/continuous function chart (CFC) ● Instruction List (IL) Project Development ● Automatic variable declaration ● On line editing ● Pop-up variable and function search/pick tools ● Automatic formatting and color coding of logic/ declaration text ● Re-usable Visual-Logic Function Blocks 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Target Visualization Integrated design of Operator Interface screens for the XV series. Visualization and logic developed as part of the same project. Simplifies screen design and always keeps the Logic and visualization in synch. Web Visualization Optionally XSoft-CoDeSys-2 can automatically generate XML-based runtime screens to make the screens from the XV accessible remotely using a Web browser with a JavaScript plug-in such as Internet Explorer®, Firefox® and others. Debugging and commissioning XSoft-CoDeSys-2 offers you a number of important functions for debugging, testing and commissioning your XV applications quickly and efficiently. All these features are available as soon as you log on to the XV (online mode) over an Ethernet connection. Simulation Users can also test the application when the XV is not connected to the process. This is possible thanks to the integrated online simulation feature. Simulation supports both the screens and logic that have been designed using XSoft-CoDeSys. Advanced Features ● Up to 16 time and/or event driven tasks per project ● Each task can include multiple logic programs or subroutines ● Programs and screen designs can be exported and imported to support reuse ● Powerful, built-in function block libraries ● Ability to create userdefined function blocks ● Fieldbus Configurator for CANopen, PROFIBUSDP and SmartWire-DT device I/O ● Ethernet and serial communication function blocks (OPC server, UDP, TCP/IP, FTP client/ server, Modbus Master/Slave, email, SMS, and more) ● ● ● ● ● 8-level password protection Web access selectable per screen System function libraries (OS Storage Card, and more) Online and historical alarms Online and historical trends System Requirements Windows XP and Windows 7 32-bit systems Product Selection XSoft-CoDeSys-2 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software Description Catalog Number Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 5 5 V7-T5-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies Power Supply 6.1 General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-2 V7-T6-3 V7-T6-22 V7-T6-25 V7-T6-29 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-1 6.1 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Contents Power Supplies Description 6 Page General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 V7-T6-3 V7-T6-22 V7-T6-25 V7-T6-29 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Product Selection Guide 6 Power Supply Series and Features 6 6 6 6 6 6 Features 6 6 PSG Series ELC Series easyRelay Power Series Sensor Power Supplies General-purpose 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc output for 1.25A to 40A loads Compact, low cost 24 Vdc control for loads up to 2A Low profile power supplies for 12 Vdc or 24 Vdc applications 27 Vdc supplies for tough sensor applications Single-phase and three-phase inputs up to 500 Vac Plastic enclosure can be DIN rail or panel mounted 8W, 30W, 60W or 100W output power 150% power surge output Single-phase (100–240 Vac) input easyRelay styling provides optimal panel aesthetics Rugged housings with integrated junction box for mounting outside of electrical enclosures 6 Redundancy modules 6 DIN rail mount 6 Heavy-duty screw and finger-safe terminals 6 NEC® Class II rated model Plastic enclosure can be DIN rail or panel mounted (with optional kit) Buffer module Advanced diagnostic features CSA Class 1, Division 2 qualified Rugged metal and plastic housing options Single-phase (100–240 Vac) input Hazardous Location Class I, Division 2 rated models Protection from overvoltage, overcurrent and overtemperature conditions 6 Product Selection Page V7-T6-4 Page V7-T6-23 Page V7-T6-26 Page V7-T6-30 6 Technical Data and Page V7-T6-5 Specifications Page V7-T6-23 Page V7-T6-27 Page V7-T6-30 6 Dimensions Page V7-T6-24 Page V7-T6-28 Page V7-T6-31 Page V7-T6-16 6 6 6 V7-T6-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Contents PSG Series Description Page PSG Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Power Derating Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 V7-T6-4 V7-T6-5 V7-T6-13 V7-T6-16 V7-T6-22 V7-T6-25 V7-T6-29 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 PSG Series Product Description Application Description Eaton’s PSG Series of power supplies is designed to be a high-performance, highquality line of products covering a majority of 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc control applications. With global certifications, a compact size and an impressive operating temperature range, the PSG Series fits a wide variety of applications at a competitive price. The PSG Series is a line of general-purpose power supplies for use in a wide variety of industrial control applications. Applications include communication networks, sensors, PLCs and many other electrical systems. Each model is equipped with the options of a rugged metal or plastic housing, heavy-duty screw or finger-safe terminals and a variety of protection features, making the PSG one of the most versatile industrial power supply lines on the market. Our expansive 22 model offering is able to provide solutions for most applications with PSG outputs ranging from 12 Vdc at 1.25A up to 24 Vdc at 40A, plus redundancy and buffer modules to ensure uptime. Features, Benefits and Functions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Universal input voltages: 100–240 Vac for singlephase units, 400–500 Vac for three-phase units General-purpose 12 Vdc and 24 Vdc adjustable output 150% power surge output Wide operating temperature range: –25°C to +80°C MTBF up to 1,000,000 hours ensures uptime and reliability Protection from overvoltage, overcurrent and overtemperature conditions Rugged aluminum and plastic housings provide the durability required to stand up to harsh environments 6 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● All-metal DIN rail mounting hardware Heavy-duty screw and finger-safe terminals LED indicating light for DC OK simplifies troubleshooting Conformal coated electronics Hazardous Location Class I, Division 2 rated models NEC® Class II rated model Redundancy modules keep loads up and running in the event of a device failure Buffer module has the stored power needed to keep loads running through a short duration power failure Three-year standard warranty 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● cULus listed—UL 508 CSA listed—CSA 22.2 No. 107.1-01 Hazardous Location, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D IEC EN NEC Class 2 ● ● 6 CE marked RoHS compliant 6 6 6 Note: Some models may not carry all certifications listed. 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-3 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 PSG Series PSG 240 F 24 R M 6 6 Series PSG = PSG power supply 6 6 15 = 30 = 60 = 100 = 6 6 6 Output Power 15W 120 = 30W 240 = 60W 480 = 100W 960 = Housing M = Aluminum P = Plastic Blank = Aluminum 120W 240W 480W 960W Terminals S = Screw R = Finger-safe Blank = Screw E= F= R= B= N= 6 Model Single-phase Three-phase Redundancy module Buffer module NEC Class II Output Voltage 24 = 24 Vdc 12 = 12 Vdc Blank = 24 Vdc 6 6 Note: Not all combinations are available. See Pages V7-T6-5–V7-T6-12 for all available combinations. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Technical Data and Specifications 6 PSG Series 6 Single-Phase PSG15E12SP PSG30E12SP PSG60E12SM PSG100E12SM PSG60E PSG60E24SP PSG60E24RM Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac AC input range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac DC input range 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz Nominal current 1 <0.37A <0.7A <1.35A <2.5A 1.1A <1.10A <1.4A Inrush current limitation 1 <30A <30A <50A <100A 30A <40A <20A Input 6 6 6 6 6 Internal fuse T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V External fusing 4A or 6A 4A or 6A 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA 6 Power 15W 30W 60W 100W 60W 60W 60W 6 Nominal output voltage 12 Vdc ±2% 12 Vdc ±2% 12 Vdc ±2% 12 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% Adjustment range 11–14 Vdc 11–14 Vdc 11–14 Vdc 11–14 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc Output 6 6 Nominal current 1.25A 2.5A 5A 8.33A 2.5A 2.5A 2.5A Startup with capacitive loads Max. 5000 μF Max. 6600 μF Max. 8000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 8000 μF Max. 8000 μF Max. 8000 μF Efficiency >84% at 115 Vac, >83% at 230 Vac >85% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac >85% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac >85.5% at 115 Vac, >87.5% at 230 Vac >85% typ >86% at 115 Vac, >87% at 230 Vac >90% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac 6 6 Current surge 1.875A 3.75A 7.5A 12.495A 3.75A 3.75A 3.75A Current surge time 3s 3s 3s 3s 1s (at 10s intervals) 3s 5s Residual ripple/peak switching (20 MHz) <100m Vpp <100m Vpp <100m Vpp <100m Vpp <50m V / <240m Vpp <50m V / <240m Vpp <50m Vpp / <150m Vpp 6 6 Turn-on time <2.5s <2.5s <2.5s <0.6s <2.5s <3s <2s Mains buffering at nominal load (typ.) 1 >22 ms >22 ms >22 ms >22 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms Parallel operation With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode 4k Vac 4k Vac 6 Galvanic Isolation 6 6 Input/output 4k Vac 4k Vac 4k Vac 4k Vac 4k Vac (type test) / 3k Vac (routine test) Input/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (routine test) 1.5k Vac 6 Output/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 500 Vac (routine test) 1.5k Vac 6 Plastic Plastic Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum 6 General/Physical Data Housing material Plastic Signals Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK MTBF >1,000,000 hr >1,000,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr Dimensions (L) 100 mm 100 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 120.6 mm 121 mm Dimensions (W) 32 mm 32 mm 32 mm 50 mm 32 mm 32 mm 32 mm Dimensions (H) 100.6 mm 100.6 mm 120 mm 118.7 mm 120 mm 113 mm 125 mm Weight (kg) 0.18 0.2 0.33 0.64 0.37 0.33 0.37 Terminals Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Screw Finger-safe, removable Wire size AWG 22–14 AWG 22–14 AWG 22–14 AWG 18–24 AWG 22–14 AWG 22–14 AWG 22–12 Operating temperature –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +80°C Storage temperature –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C >1,000,000 hr 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note 1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac. 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-5 6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Single-Phase PSG15E12SP 6 6 6 PSG60E12SM PSG100E12SM PSG60E PSG60E24SP PSG60E24RM >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C <0°C to –20°C derate >50°C derate power by 1% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C General/Physical Data, continued Power derating— vertical mounting >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C >50°C derate >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, power by 2.5% / °C >70°C derate power by 4% / °C Power derating— horizontal mounting N/A N/A N/A >50°C derate N/A power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C N/A >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C Operating humidity <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing 6 6 PSG30E12SP <95% RH, noncondensing 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 Vibration Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 6 Climatic class 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 6 Safety and Protection Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor 6 Surge voltage protection against internal surge Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Safety class Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection 6 Shock 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Single-Phase, continued PSG60N24RP PSG120E 6 PSG120E24RM PSG240E PSG240E24RM PSG480E PSG480E24RM 6 6 Input Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac AC input range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac DC input range N/A 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc 120–375 Vdc Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz Nominal current 1 <1.5A at 100 Vac 1.4A <2.2A 2.9A <2.5A 5.7A <5A Inrush current limitation 1 <40A <80A <35A N/A <35A N/A <35A 6 6 6 Internal fuse T3.15AH / 250V T3.15AH / 250V T4AH / 250V T6.3AH / 250V T6.3AH / 250V F10H / 250A T8AH / 250V External fusing 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 6A, 10A or 16A 10A or 16A 10A or 16A 10A or 16A 10A or 16A Leakage current <1 mA <1 mA <1 mA <3.5 mA <1 mA <1 mA <3 mA 6 Power 60W 120W 120W 240W 240W 480W 480W 6 Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% Adjustment range 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc 22–28 Vdc Nominal current 2.5A 5A 5A 10A 10A 20A 20A Startup with capacitive loads Max. 8000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Efficiency >86% at 115 Vac, >87% at 230 Vac >84% typ >89% at 115 Vac, >90% at 230 Vac >84% typ >90% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac >86% typ >90% at 115 Vac and 230 Vac Output 6 6 6 6 Current surge N/A 7.5A 7.5A 15A 15A 30A 30A Current surge time N/A 1s (at 10s intervals) 5s 1s (at 10s intervals) 5s 1s (at 10s intervals) 5s Residual ripple/peak switching (20 MHz) <50m Vpp / <240m Vpp <50m V / <240m Vpp <50m Vpp / <150m Vpp <50m V / <240m Vpp <50m Vpp / <150m Vpp <50m V / <240m Vpp <50m Vpp 6 Turn-on time <3s <1s <1s <1s <1s <1s <1s 6 Mains buffering at nominal load (typ.) 1 >20 ms >35ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms Parallel operation PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode Input/output 4k Vac 4k Vac (type test) / 3k Vac (routine test) 4k Vac 4k Vac (type test) / 3k Vac (routine test) 4k Vac 4k Vac (type test) / 3k Vac (routine test) 4k Vac Input/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (routine test) 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (routine test) 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (routine test) Output/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 500 Vac (routine test) 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 500 Vac (routine test) 1.5k Vac (type test) / 1.5k Vac 500 Vac (routine test) Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Galvanic Isolation 6 6 6 6 6 General/Physical Data Housing material 6 Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Signals Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK MTBF >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >800,000 hr >300,000 hr >500,000 hr >300,000 hr >500,000 hr Dimensions (L) 120.6 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm Dimensions (W) 32 mm 32 mm 50 mm 85 mm 85 mm 160 mm 144 mm Dimensions (H) 119.3 mm 120 mm 123.1 mm 118.5 mm 124.1 mm 115 mm 118.6 mm 6 6 6 Weight (kg) 0.33 0.54 0.72 1.04 1.1 1.8 1.37 Terminals Finger-safe, fixed Screw Finger-safe, removable Screw Finger-safe, removable Screw Finger-safe, fixed Wire size AWG 22–10 AWG 22–14 AWG 20–12 AWG 22–14 AWG 16–12 AWG 16–14 (input) AWG 18–10 AWG 12–10 (output) Operating temperature –20°C to +80°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +80°C –20°C to +75°C –20°C to +80°C –20°C to +75°C –25°C to +75°C Storage temperature –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C 6 6 Note 1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac. 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-7 6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Single-Phase, continued PSG60N24RP PSG120E PSG120E24RM PSG240E PSG240E24RM PSG480E PSG480E24RM General/Physical Data, continued Power derating— vertical mounting >50°C derate power >50°C derate power >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C >70°C derate power by 4% / °C Power derating— horizontal mounting >50°C derate power N/A by 2.5% / °C N/A N/A N/A 6 >50°C derate power N/A by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 4% / °C Operating humidity <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing 6 Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30 m/s2, single amplitude (3G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 150 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 50 m/s2, single amplitude (5G max.) for 90 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Climatic class 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Surge voltage protection against internal surge Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Safety class Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Shock 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according directions according to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 to IEC60068-2-27 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 >50°C derate power >50°C derate power >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, by 2.5% / °C by 2.5% / °C >70°C derate power by 4% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C to 75°C derate power by 5% / °C Safety and Protection 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Three-Phase PSG60F24RM 6 PSG120F24RM PSG240F24RM PSG480F24RM PSG960F24RM 6 6 Input Nominal voltage 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac 3 x 400–500 Vac AC input range 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac 3 x 320–600 Vac DC input range 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc 450–800 Vdc Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 6 6 Nominal current 1 <0.3A <0.5A <0.75A <1A <1.7A Inrush current limitation 1 <30A <30A <40A <50A <40A Internal fuse T 3.15AH / 500V, 600V T 3.15AH / 500V, 600V T 3.15AH / 500V, 600V T 3.15AH / 500V T 4 AH / 500V 6 External fusing 3 x circuit breakers 6A, 10A or 16A 3 x circuit breakers 6A, 10A or 16A 3 x circuit breakers 6A, 10A or 16A 3 x circuit breakers 6A, 10A or 16A 3 x circuit breakers 10A or 16A 6 Leakage current <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA <3.5 mA Power 60W 120W 240W 480W 960W Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% 24 Vdc ±2% Adjustment range 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc 24–28 Vdc Nominal current 2.5A 5A 10A 20A 40A 6 Output Startup with capacitive loads Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Max. 10,000 μF Efficiency >86% at 3 x 400 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac >88% at 3 x 400 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac >92% at 3 x 400 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac >91% at 3 x 400 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac >92% at 3 x 400 Vac and 3 x 500 Vac Current surge 3.75A 7.5A 15A 30A 60A 6 6 6 6 6 Current surge time 5s 5s 5s 5s 5s Residual ripple/peak switching (20 MHz) <50m Vpp <50m Vpp <150m Vpp <150m Vpp <240m Vpp Turn-on time <1s <1s <1s <1s <1.5s Mains buffering at nominal load (typ.) 1 >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms >20 ms 6 Parallel operation PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG480R24RM / PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode PSG960R24RM / With o-ring diode 6 Input/output 4k Vac 4k Vac 4k Vac 4k Vac 4k Vac Input/ground 2k Vac 2k Vac 2k Vac 2k Vac 2k Vac Output/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 6 Housing material Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Aluminum Signals Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK Green LED for DC OK 6 6 6 Galvanic Isolation 6 General/Physical Data MTBF >500,000 hr >500,000 hr >300,000 hr >500,000 hr >300,000 hr Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm 121 mm Dimensions (W) 50 mm 50 mm 70 mm 140 mm 255 mm Dimensions (H) 117.3 mm 117.3 mm 117.3 mm 117.3 mm 117.3 mm Weight (kg) 0.66 0.66 0.89 1.35 2.6 Terminals Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Finger-safe, fixed Wire size AWG 18–12 AWG 18–12 AWG 18–12 (input) AWG 16–12 (output) AWG 18–8 (input) AWG 12–10 (output) AWG 18–8 (input) AWG 12–10 (output) Operating temperature –25°C to +75°C –25°C to +75°C –25°C to +75°C –25°C to +80°C –25°C to +65°C Storage temperature –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C –25°C to +85°C 6 6 6 6 6 6 Note 1 Ratings for single-phase models are at 115 Vac; three-phase models are at 400 Vac. 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-9 6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Three-Phase, continued PSG60F24RM 6 6 6 6 PSG960F24RM >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >50°C derate power by 2.5% / °C Power derating— horizontal mounting >45°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >55°C derate power by 1.66% / °C, >70°C derate power by 5% / °C >40°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >60°C derate power by 5% / °C >40°C derate power by 2.5% / °C, >60°C derate power by 5% / °C N/A N/A Operating humidity <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing <95% RH, noncondensing 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing 5 to 95% RH, noncondensing 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30 m/s2, single amplitude (3G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 Vibration 6 PSG480F24RM Power derating— vertical mounting 6 6 PSG240F24RM General/Physical Data, continued 6 6 PSG120F24RM Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 Climatic class 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 Transient surge voltage Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Varistor Surge voltage protection against internal surge Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Safety and Protection Safety class Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Class I with ground connection Shock 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions 30G (300 m/s2) in all directions according to IEC60068-2-27 according to IEC60068-2-27 according to IEC60068-2-27 according to IEC60068-2-27 according to IEC60068-2-27 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 PSG Series, continued 6 Redundancy Modules PSG480R24RM PSG960R24RM 6 Nominal voltage 24–48 Vdc 24–48 Vdc 6 DC input range 22–60 Vdc 22–60 Vdc Nominal current <20A <40A Inrush current limitation <25A <50A 6 Nominal output voltage Vin–0.65V (typ.) Vin–0.65V (typ.) 6 Nominal current <20A <40A Efficiency >97% typ. >97% typ. 6 Input/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 6 Output/ground 1.5k Vac 1.5k Vac 6 Housing material Aluminum Aluminum 6 Signals 1 Green LED for DC Vin1 OK and DC Vin2 OK Green LED for DC Vin1 OK and DC Vin2 OK Input 6 Output Galvanic Isolation General/Physical Data MTBF >800,000 hr >800,000 hr Dimensions (L) 121 mm 121 mm Dimensions (W) 50 mm 50 mm Dimensions (H) 122.1 mm 122.1 mm Weight (kg) 0.375 0.515 6 6 6 6 Terminals Finger safe—fixed Finger safe—fixed Wire size AWG 12–10 AWG 12–10 Operating temperature –40°C to +80°C –40°C to +80°C Storage temperature –40°C to +85°C –40°C to +85°C Power de-rating—vertical mounting > 50°C de-rate power by 2.5% / °C > 50°C de-rate power by 2.5% / °C Power de-rating—horizontal mounting N/A N/A Operating humidity < 95% RH, noncondensing < 95% RH, noncondensing Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30m/s², single amplitude (3G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30m/s², single amplitude (3G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 Pollution degree 2 2 Climatic class 3K3 according to EN 60721 3K3 according to EN 60721 Safety class Class III with ground connection Class III with ground connection Shock 30G (300m/S²) in all directions according to IEC 60068-2-27 30G (300m/S²) in all directions according to IEC 60068-2-27 6 6 6 6 6 6 Safety and Protection 6 Note 1 The LED will turn on when the Vin1 and Vin2 > 18V ±5% (for 24V system) or > 36V ±5% (for 48V system) and not more than 30V (for 24V system) or not more than 60V (for 48V system), the relay contacts will be closed. If Vin1 and Vin2 is under or over this range, the LED will be turned off. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-11 6.1 6 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies PSG Series, continued Buffer Module PSG480B24RM Input Nominal voltage 24 Vdc DC input range 22.8–28.8 Vdc Maximum voltage 35 Vdc Current Charging mode: <0.6A 6 Power (standby mode) 2.5W average Maximum signal (inhibit) 35V / 10 mA 6 Max inrush current < 20A Charging time < 30s 6 Output 6 Discharging mode: 20A max. Nominal voltage 24 Vdc typ. 6 DC adjustment range Switch = “Fix 22V”: Buffering starts if terminal voltage falls below 22V 6 Maximum voltage 35 Vdc Current 20A max. buffering time 250 ms min. at 24V/20A load, 5s min. at 24V/1A load 6 Maximum signal 35V / 10 mA PARD (20MHz) <200 mVpp 6 Galvanic isolation Input/ground 1.5 kVac 6 Output/ground 1.5 kVac Signal/ground 1.5 kVac 6 6 6 Switch = “Vin-1V” (Factory Setting): Buffering starts if terminal voltage is decreased by >1V General/Physical Data Housing material Aluminum Signals Green LED off: unit is discharged or Vin < 22 Vdc Green LED on: unit is fully charged 6 6 6 6 Green LED blinking slowly: unit is charging Green LED blinking quickly: unit is discharging MTBF >800,000 hr Parallel connection Yes Series connection No Dimensions (L) 121 mm Dimensions (W) 70 mm Dimensions (H) 120.1 mm 6 Weight (kg) 0.76 Terminals Finger safe–fixed 6 Wire Size Input / Output: AWG 12–10 6 Operating temperature –25°C to +75°C Storage temperature –25°C to +85°C Power de-rating—vertical mounting >70°C de-rate power by 5% / °C Operating humidity < 95% RH, noncondensing Vibration 10 to 500 Hz, 0.35 mm acc. 30m/s², single amplitude (3G max.) for 60 min. in each X, Y and Z directions, in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6 Pollution degree 2 6 6 6 6 6 Signal: AWG 24–10 Safety and Protection Shock 30G (300m/S²) in all directions according to IEC60068-2-27 Safety class Class I with ground connection 6 6 V7-T6-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Power Derating Curves 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 6 6 Load (%) Load (%) 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 6 Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E Vertical Mounting Position PSG15E12SP 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) 70 80 6 6 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 6 70 80 85 Ambient Temperature (°C) 6 Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E24SP 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 6 6 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 6 6 0 6 Load (%) Load (%) -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) 70 0 80 6 6 6 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 6 80 Ambient Temperature (°C) Load (%) Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG60N24RP 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Vertical Mounting 70 80 6 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 6 6 6 6 6 0 -10 6 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG100E12SM Load (%) 6 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG60E24RM Vertical Mounting Position PSG60E12SM 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 10 Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 6 Load (%) Load (%) Vertical Mounting Position PSG30E12SP -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Ambient Temperature (°C) 6 Horizontal Mounting 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-13 6.1 6 6 6 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 0 6 6 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 6 6 6 -20 -10 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 6 6 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -25 70 80 70 80 85 -15 -5 10 20 30 40 50 60 65 75 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 0 5 15 25 35 45 55 Ambient Temperature (°C) Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG60F24RM 0 70 80 85 10 20 Vertical Mounting Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG240E24RM 30 40 50 60 70 80 Ambient Temperature (°C) Ambient Temperature (°C) 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 30 40 50 60 Horizontal Mounting Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG120F24RM 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Load (%) 6 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Load (%) 6 0 Vertical Mounting Position PSG240E 6 6 10 20 Vertical Mounting Position PSG480E24RM Load (%) 6 0 Ambient Temperature (°C) Load (%) 6 70 80 85 Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG120E24RM 6 6 30 40 50 60 Load (%) 6 10 20 Load (%) 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 Ambient Temperature (°C) 6 6 Vertical Mounting Position PSG480E Vertical Mounting Position PSG120E Load (%) 6 General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Load (%) 6 Power Supplies -20 -10 6 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Vertical Mounting 70 80 Horizontal Mounting -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Vertical Mounting 70 80 Horizontal Mounting 6 6 V7-T6-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Load (%) 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature (°C) Vertical Mounting 70 80 6 6 Load (%) Load (%) -20 -10 6 6 6 0 10 20 30 40 50 Ambient Temperature (°C) 60 6 70 80 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Ambient Temperature (°C) 6 6 6 6 6 6 Vertical Mounting Position PSG480B24RM 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -25 6 6 Load (%) 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -25 6 Vertical Mounting Position PSG960R24RM Vertical Mounting Position PSG960F24RM Load (%) 6 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Ambient Temperature (°C) Horizontal Mounting Vertical Mounting Position PSG480F24RM 110 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 Vertical Mounting Position PSG480R24RM Load (%) Vertical and Horizontal Mounting Position PSG240F24RM -15 -5 5 15 25 35 45 Ambient Temperature (°C) 55 65 6 6 6 -15 -5 5 15 25 35 45 55 65 75 6 Ambient Temperature (°C) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-15 6.1 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. 6 PSG15E12SP 6 32.0 ±0.5 (C) PSG60E12SM 10.6 90.0 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5 32.0 ±0.5 106.4 ±0.5 Catalog Number: PSG60E12SM 24V 2.5A 6 CAUTION HOT SURFACE 6 6 Adjust DC OK 100.0 ±0.5 6 SPEC LABEL 121.0 ±0.5 3.3 6 6 100-240V~1.5A 50-60Hz 6 5.0 ±0.2 6 6 PSG30E12SP 32.0 ±0.5 PSG100E12SM 10.6 7.1 ±0.5 90.0 ±0.5 6 111.6 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5 6 6 6 Catalog Number: PSG100E12SM 24V 8.33A 100.0 ±0.5 6 Adjust 121.0 ±0.5 DC OK 1.6 3.3 6 SPEC LABEL 6 6 100–240V~ 2.5A 50–60 Hz 6 5.0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG60E 6 PSG60E24RM 105.2 ±0.5 32.0 ±0.3 Catalog Number: PSG60E 24V 2.5A 6 125.0 ±1.0 106.6 ±0.5 120.5 ±0.5 32.0 ±0.5 6 5.5 ±0.2 6 CAUTION HOT SURFACE 6 Adjust DC OK SPEC LABEL 121.0 ±0.5 6 121.0 ±0.4 6 Spec Label 6 100-240V~1.5A 50-60Hz 6 5.0 ±0.2 6 PSG60E24SP 6 PSG60N24RP 32.0 ±0.6 10.0 ±0.3 0.8 ±0.4 32.0 ±0.6 113.0 ±0.6 6 16.4 ±0.5 0.8 (ref.) 101.0 ±0.3 101.0 ±0.3 6 6 Catalog Number: PSG60N24RP 24V 2.5A Catalog Number: PSG60E24SP 24V 2.5A 126.0 ±0.6 120.6 6 120.6 ±0.3 Adjust Adjust DC OK 6 5.5 ±0.4 1.5 ±0.4 SPEC LABEL 35.5 ±0.2 DC OK SPEC LABEL NEC Class 2 35.5 ±0.5 6 6 6 100–240V~ 1.5A 50–60 Hz 6 100–240V~ 1.5A 50–60 Hz 6 119.3 (ref.) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-17 6.1 6 6 6 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG120E PSG240E 50.0 ±0.2 118.5 ±0.5 DC 24V 5A 105.2 ±0.5 6 6 Adjust DC OK CAUTION HOT SURFACE 121.0 ±0.2 6 24V Catalog Number: PSG240E SPEC LABEL AC 100-240V 2A 50-60 Hz 6 13.0 100-240V~5A 50-60Hz 4.0 115.0 ±0.6 5.5 6 6 PSG120E24RM PSG240E24RM 5.5 ±0.2 124.1 ±1.0 116.6 ±1.0 85.0 ±0.5 105.2 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 6 121.0 ±0.5 6 6 24V Catalog Number: PSG120E24RM 24V 5A Adjust 10A Adjust CAUTION HOT SURFACE DC OK 121.0 ±0.5 1.6 Catalog Number: PSG240E24RM DC OK SPEC LABEL 1.6 6 SPEC LABEL 6 100–240V~ 3.5A 50–60 Hz 6 6 5.0 ±0.2 85.0 ±0.5 6 6 Adjust DC OK 121.0 ±0.5 6 6 10A 5.0 100–240V~ 2.5A 50–60 Hz 5.0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG480E 6 PSG60F24RM 7.1 160.0 ±0.5 6 117.3 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 6 24V 6.6 ±0.1 Catalog Number: PSG480E N L 2.5A 97.5 ±0.5 Adjust DC OK Catalog Number: PSG60F24RM 6.6 ±0.35 121.0 ±0.5 6 6 Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.3A 50–60 Hz Adjust 6 DC OK 100-240V~ 24V 7A 50-60Hz 6 20A 121.0 ±0.5 96.6 ±0.5 86.8 ±0.5 5.0 111.4 ±0.5 6 110.2 ±0.5 6 PSG120F24RM PSG480E24RM 121.0 ±0.5 6 117.3 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 7.1 6 96.7 ±0.5 144.0 ±1.0 24V 6.6 ±0.5 5A 97.5 ±0.5 Adjust DC OK Catalog Number: PSG120F24RM Catalog Number: PSG480E24RM 6.6 ±0.35 121.0 ±0.5 DC OK N L + 24V + Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.3A 50–60 Hz 6 20A – 6 6 Adjust 100–240V ~6A 50–60 Hz 6 – 111.5 ±1.0 5.0 6 86.8 ±0.5 110.2 ±0.5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-19 6.1 6 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG240F24RM PSG960F24RM + + 24V – 6.6 ±0.35 117.3 ±0.5 70.0 ±0.5 6 6 General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 6 Power Supplies – 117.3 ±0.5 255.0 ±0.5 24V 5A 97.5 ±0.5 Adjust DC OK Catalog Number: PSG240F24RM SPEC LABEL 121.0 ±0.5 6.6 ±0.5 40A 121.0 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL Catalog Number: PSG960F24RM Adjust DC OK Three-Phase 400–500V ~1.7A 50–60 Hz + 6 + 6 – – 88.1 ±0.5 106.0 ±0.5 110.2 ±0.5 111.3 ±0.5 5.0 86.8 ±0.5 5.0 110.2 ±0.5 PSG480F24RM 6 PSG480R24RM 117.3 ±0.7 140.0 ±0.5 115.0 ±1.0 98.0 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 6 24V 6 – Three-Phase 400–500V ~0.75A 50–60 Hz 6 6 + 97.5 ±0.5 20A 7.1 (ref) Catalog Number: PSG480F24RM 6 Adjust 121.0 ±0.8 SPEC LABEL 6.6 Vin1 Vin2 Com DC OK 24V–60V Three-Phase 400–500V ~1A 50–60 Hz 6 + + – 20A Vin1 OK *121.0 ±0.5 Vin2 OK – 1.6 Catalog Number: PSG480R24SM SPEC LABEL 6 5.0 6 6 87.0 110.2 ±0.5 Vout OK 20A Max. Redundancy Module 6 5.0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com 6.1 Power Supplies General-Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Approximate Dimensions in mm 6 Note: Dimensions are for reference only. PSG960R24RM 6 PSG480B24RM 115.0 ±1.0 70.0 ±0.5 50.0 ±0.5 1.2 24V 40A Vin1 OK 20A Catalog Number: PSG480B24RM Vin1 Vin2 Com 22V–60V 6 5.5 ±0.5 98.0 ±0.5 121.0 ±0.5 6 +0.5 –0.3 Status 121.0 ±0.5 35.5 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL Vin2 OK 7.1 ±0.5 SPEC LABEL Vout 6 6 1.6 Catalog Number: PSG960R24RM 6 OK 5.0 96.6 ±0.8 113.0 ±1.0 6 6 6 20A Max. Redundancy Module 6 5.0 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-21 6.1 6 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Contents ELC Series Description 6 PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 ELC Series 6 Product Description 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Eaton’s ELC power supplies are the perfect products for those applications requiring a very compact and low-cost source for 24 Vdc power. While these products were developed to be a perfect match for our Eaton Logic Controllers, they can be used in a variety of applications. The lightweight, DIN rail mounted enclosures, wide input voltage range and robust screw terminals make these power supplies easy to install and use. They are available in 1A and 2A models. Features, Benefits and Functions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 6 6 Universal input voltage: 85–264 Vac Compact size, with common depth and height across models allows for common panel depths and family consistency ELC styling provides maximum aesthetic appeal when used with Eaton Logic Controllers Front-mounted pressure plate screw terminals for a robust connection Removable finger-safe protective cover for terminals Power ON indication LED Integrated mounting hardware for panel mounting or DIN rail mounting Standards and Certifications ● ● ● cULus listed CE marked RoHS compliant 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T6-3 V7-T6-23 V7-T6-23 V7-T6-24 V7-T6-25 V7-T6-29 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Product Selection 6 ELC Series ELC-PS01 Description Catalog Number 24 watt, 1 amp power supply ELC-PS01 48 watt, 2 amp power supply ELC-PS02 6 6 6 6 6 Technical Data and Specifications 6 ELC Series 6 ELC-PS01 24W ELC-PS02 48W Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac Voltage range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 6 Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 6 Nominal current 1A 2A Efficiency 78% to 87% typical at full load 78% to 87% typical at full load Capacity 6 Input 6 Output Residual ripple/peak switching < 100 mV typical at full load (20 MHz) 6 < 240 mV typical at full load 6 General/Physical Data Housing material Plastic Plastic Dimensions (D) 60 mm 60 mm Dimensions (W) 36.5 mm 55 mm Dimensions (H) 90 mm 90 mm Weight (g) 158 250 Operating temperature 0°C to +55°C 0°C to +55°C Storage temperature –25°C to +70°C –25°C to +70°C Operating humidity 50% to 95% RH, noncondensing 50% to 95% RH, noncondensing Pollution degree 2 6 6 6 6 6 2 6 Approvals/Certifications UL 508, CE, RoHS, EMC directive UL 508, CE, RoHS, EMC directive 89/336/EEC, low voltage 89/336/EEC, low voltage directive 73/23/EEC directive 73/23/EEC 6 6 Safety and Protection Overload/short circuit protection Auto recovery Auto recovery 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-23 6.1 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6 Dimensions 6 ELC-PS01 Power Supply Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 6 6 6 6 L N 3.54 (90.0) 6 24V 0V 6 POWER 6 ELC-PS01 6 6 13.3 (0.52) 1.44 (36.5) 0.12 (3.0) 2.36 (60.0) 6 ELC-PS02 Power Supply 6 2.17 (55.0) 6 6 13.3 (0.52) 2.36 (60.0) 0.12 (3.0) 6 L 6 6 6 N 3.94 (100.0) 3.54 (90.0) 0V POWER 6 ELC-PS02 6 6 24V 0.12 (3.0) 1.28 (32.5) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Contents easyRelay Power Supply Description Page PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-3 V7-T6-22 V7-T6-26 V7-T6-27 V7-T6-28 V7-T6-29 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 easyRelay Power Supply Product Description Eaton’s easyRelay power supplies are the perfect products for those applications requiring a low amperage 24 Vdc power source. While these products were developed to be a perfect match for our easyRelay products, they can be used in a variety of applications. Features, Benefits and Functions ● ● ● ● ● Universal input voltage: 85–264 Vac, 50/60 Hz Wide operating temperature range (–25°C to +55°C) Power ON / diagnostics LED: continuous light on— fault-free operation; flashing LED—short circuit overload on voltage output Optional mounting hardware for panel mounting (EZB4-101-GF1) or standard DIN rail mounting Finger-safe, side-entry screw clamp terminals for clean wiring Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● Primary switched-mode power supplies Output voltages can be connected in parallel to increase power output or for redundant operation to achieve greater system availability Safety extra low voltage (SELV to EN 55 022) Radio interference Class B to EN 55 011 and EN 55 022 for use in industrial and public networks ● ● ● ● ● UL listed CSA certified CE marked RoHS compliant CSA Class I, Division 2 rated for groups A, B, C, D 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-25 6.1 6 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Product Selection 6 easyRelay Power Supply Units Rated input voltage 100–240 Vac, single-phase. 6 Input Voltage Range Rated Output Voltage Output Voltage Setting Range Rated Output Power Rated Output Current Catalog Number EASY200-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc/12 Vdc — 8W 0.35A / 20 mA EASY200-POW EASY400-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 30W 1.25A EASY400-POW EASY500-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 60W 2.5A EASY500-POW EASY600-POW 100–240 Vac 24 Vdc — 100W 4.2A EASY600-POW 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Technical Data and Specifications 6 easyRelay Series 6 EASY200-POW 8W EASY400-POW 30W EASY500-POW 60W EASY600-POW 100W Nominal voltage 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac 100–240 Vac Voltage range 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac 85–264 Vac Frequency 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz 47–63 Hz Nominal output voltage 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% 24 Vdc ± 3% Nominal current 0.35A 1.25A 2.5A 4.2A 6 6 Capacity 6 Input 6 6 Output 6 24 Vdc 12 Vdc Nominal output voltage 12 Vdc — — — Nominal current 20 mA — — — Plastic 6 General/Physical Data Housing material Plastic Plastic Plastic Dimensions (D) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) 2.22 in (56.5 mm) Dimensions (W) 1.40 in (35.5 mm) 2.81 in (71.5 mm) 2.81 in (71.5 mm) 4.23 in (107.5 mm) Dimensions (H) 3.54 in (90 mm) 3.54 in (90 mm) 3.54 in (90 mm) 3.54 in (90 mm) 6 6 6 Operating temperature –25°C to +55°C –25°C to +55°C –25°C to +55°C –25°C to +55°C Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C –40°C to +70°C –40°C to +70°C –40°C to +70°C Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 6 Solid 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12) 0.2–4.0 mm2 (AWG 22-12) 6 Flexible 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 221-12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 221-12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 221-12) 0.2–2.5 mm2 (AWG 221-12) UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 UL, CE, RoHS, CSA, EN 50178m IEC/EN 60947 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Connection cables 6 Approvals/Certifications Safety and Protection Overload/short circuit protection Overcurrent limitation form 0.3A 1.4A 2.8A 4.6A Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 6 RFI suppression EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 EN 55011, EN 55022 Class B, IEC 61000-6-1, 2, 3, 4 6 Potential isolation (prim./sec.) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) Yes, SELV, (to EN 600950, VDE 805) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-27 6.1 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6 Dimensions 6 EASY200-POW, EASY400-POW and EASY500-POW Series Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 6 EASY400-POW EASY500-POW EASY200-POW 0.30 (7.5) 6 0.42 (10.8) 1.97 (50.0) 6 6 3.54 (90.0) 3.54 (90.0) 6 4.02 (102.0) 4.02 (102.0) 1.77 (45.0) 6 4.33 (110.0) 4.33 (110.0) 6 6 6 0.18 (4.5) 6 1.87 (47.5) .157 DIA. (3.9) 2.22 (56.5) 6 6 (M4) 0.30 (7.5) (M4) 1.41 (35.8) .157 DIA. (3.9) 2.81 (71.5) 1.40 (35.5) EASY600-POW Series 6 2.96 (75.0) 0.64 (16.25) M4 #8 0.64 (16.25) 6 6 4.33 (110.0) 6 4.02 (102.0) 3.54 (90.0) 1.77 (45.0) 6 6 6 6 0.18 (4.5) 1.87 (47.5) 2.22 (56.5) 4.23 (107.5) 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Contents Sensor Power Supply Description Page PSG Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easyRelay Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sensor Power Supply Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-3 V7-T6-22 V7-T6-25 V7-T6-30 V7-T6-30 V7-T6-31 V7-T6-31 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Sensor Power Supply Product Description Eaton’s sensor power supply was specially designed to be used with the 200 Series and E68 Series zero pressure accumulation systems, but is also suitable for use in a wide variety of applications. The unit delivers 100W output at 27 Vdc and supports easy, Class II wiring. The power supply is a tamper-proof, rugged component easily mounted to a conveyor sidechannel or support. Internal components are fully encapsulated in a strong diecast housing to stand up to rugged handling, ensuring flawless performance in any material handling environment. Features, Benefits and Functions ● ● ● ● Integrated AC junction box for one-step mounting and wiring without the need for additional accessories Built-in DC power health contact allows easy monitoring of power supply status Unitized design features a tamper-proof encapsulated construction to reduce the risk of damage associated with conventional open control-panel type construction Built-in slug-release input converts an AC or DC input to the appropriate DC signal for integration with the 200 Series and E68 Series zero pressure accumulation systems Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Dual output connection terminals to make it easy and convenient to locate the power supply at the center of the cable run Power switch protected against accidental operation Power in and out indicators show status at a glance Conduit entry box for NEC compliance Simple mounting with two 1/4-inch bolts Rugged die-cast housing Fully encapsulated electronics ● ● 6 6 UL listed CSA approved 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-29 6.1 6 6 Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies Product Selection PS256A_ Sensor Power Supply Output 6 Slug Input Catalog Number Type Slug Output 15–132 Vac/Vdc 3 mA minimum Standard For use with 200 Series and E68 systems Sinking or sourcing, switch selectable; 80 mA maximum; short circuit protection for loads less than 32 Vac or Vdc (auto reset) PS256A-01B1 2 15–132 Vac/Vdc 3 mA minimum High current slug For use with solenoid valve systems requiring full current slug signals Sinking only; 100W output; short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection (cycle power to reset) 1 PS256A-04B1 2 Operating Voltage 105–132 Vac 6 27 Vdc, 100W; short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection (cycle power to reset) 6 6 6 6 Technical Data and Specifications 6 Sensor Power Supply Description PS256A-01B1 PS256A-04B1 6 Input power 144W, maximum inrush 30A from cold start 144W, maximum inrush 30A from cold start Input voltage 105–132 Vac 105–132 Vac 6 Input current (full load) 105 Vac–1.92A, 115 Vac–1.65A, 132 Vac–1.5A 105 Vac–1.92A, 115 Vac–1.65A, 132 Vac–1.5A Output power 100W 100W Output voltage 27 Vdc 27 Vdc Output protection Short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection (cycle power to reset), diode protected Short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection (cycle power to reset), diode protected Regulation ± 3% ± 3% Slug input 15–132 Vac/Vdc 15–132 Vac/Vdc Slug output Sinking or sourcing, switch selectable; 80 mA maximum; short circuit protection for loads less than 32 Vac or Vdc (auto reset) Sinking only; 100W output; short circuit, overload and overvoltage protection (cycle power to reset) 1 Indicators Red LED: AC In; Green LED: DC Out Red LED: AC In; Green LED: DC Out DC fail indication output NO contact, solid-state relay, 80 mA maximum NO contact, solid-state relay, 80 mA maximum Temperature range –13° to 131°F (–25° to 55°C) –13° to 131°F (–25° to 55°C) Vibration 20g 20g Enclosure material Die-cast aluminum Die-cast aluminum Enclosure rating NEMA 1 NEMA 1 Connections Main output/slug output: Two three-position finger protected barrier strips; AC line input, DC fail indication and slug input: 8-position screw terminal strip inside conduit entry box Main output/slug output: Two three-position finger protected barrier strips; AC line input, DC fail indication and slug input: 8-position screw terminal strip inside conduit entry box 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 Total output power of supply is 100W. Total supply output power (100W) = main output power + slug output power. 2 Stocked product, typical order quantities guaranteed in stock. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V7-T6-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com Power Supplies General Purpose and Sensor Power Supplies 6.1 Wiring Diagram 6 Sensor Power Supply Slug V+ Output Com 6 Slug V+ Output Com 6 Junction Box PS256A-01B1 only 6 Sinking Slug Sourcing Slug Power Monitor 15-132 VAC/ 15-132 VDC Chassis internally connected to AC GND Slug In L1 L2 L1 L2 L1 L2 GND 6 AC Input Power 6 Not Used 6 6 6 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 6 Sensor Power Supply 4.6 (117) 6 4.6 (117) 6 6 6 9.0 (229) 8.2 (208) 6 9.7 (246) 6 3.0 (76) 6 6 Hole for 1/4 Inch Hardware 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—May 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T6-31 Industrial Control Transformers Types MTE and MTK 7.1 Transformers Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-2 V7-T7-3 V7-T7-4 V7-T7-13 V7-T7-18 V7-T7-25 7 7 7 7 7 7 Learn Online 7 7 7 CE Marked 7 7 7 7 7 7 Type AP 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-1 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Contents Industrial Control Transformers Description 7 Page Transformers Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 V7-T7-4 V7-T7-13 V7-T7-18 V7-T7-25 7 7 7 7 7 Standards and Certifications 7 Eaton dry-type distribution transformers are approved, listed, recognized or may comply with the following standards. 7 Engineering Standards 7 Catalog Product Name 7 Industrial Control Transformer 7 UL Standard 1 UL/cUL File Number UL Listed Control Number cUL Energy Efficiency File Number CSA File Number Insulation System Temp/ºC kVA SinglePhase kVA ThreePhase Applicable IEC Standard MTE 5085 E46323 702X — — 105 0.025–1.5 N/A 61558 MTK 5085 E46323 702X — — 180 0.05–5 N/A 61558 7 Encapsulated Transformer AP 5085 E10156 591H — — 180 3–10 N/A 61558 7 AP 1561 E78389 591H — — 180 15 N/A 61558 EP 5085 E10156 591H — LR60545 180 0.05–10 N/A 61558 EP 1561 E78389 591H EV157 2 LR60545 3 180 15–50 N/A 61558 4 / 726 5 EPT 5085 E10156 591H — LR60545 180 N/A 3–9 61558 6 / 726 7 EPT 1561 E78389 591H EV157 8 LR60545 9 180 N/A 15–75 726 MPC 1062 E53449 591H — LR60546 180 3–25 15–30 — 60726 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Ventilated Transformer DS-3 1561 E78389 591H — — 220 15–167 N/A DT-3 1561 E78389 591H — — 220 N/A 15–750 60726 KT 1561 E78389 591H — — 220 N/A 9–500 N/A Notes 1 UL 5085 replaces UL 506. 2 Applies to 25–50 kVA. 3 Applies to 25 kVA. 4 Applies to 15–25 kVA. 5 Applies to 37.5 kVA. 6 Applies to 3 kVA. 7 Applies to 5–9 kVA. 8 Applies to 30–75 kVA. 9 Applies to 30 kVA. 7 7 7 In addition to the above standards, Eaton dry-type distribution transformers are also manufactured in compliance with the applicable standards listed below. Not all of the following standards apply to every transformer. NEC: National Electrical Code®. NEMA ST-1: Specialty Transformers (C89.1) (control transformers). NEMA ST-20: General-Purpose Transformers. NEMA TP-1: Guide for Determining Energy Efficiency for Distribution Transformers. NEMA 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts maximum). IEEE C57.12.01: General Requirements for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers (including those with solidcast and/or resin-encapsulated windings). ANSI C57.12.70: Terminal Markings and Connections for Distribution and Power Transformers. ANSI C57.12.91: Standard Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers. CSA C22 No. 47-M90: Air-Cooled Transformers (Dry-Type). CSA C9-M1981: Dry-Type Transformers. CSA C22.2 No. 66: Specialty Transformers. CSA 802-94: Maximum Losses for Distribution, Power and Dry-Type Transformers. NEMA TP-2: Standard Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Distribution Transformers. NEMA TP-3 7 V7-T7-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Catalog Number Selection 7 Industrial Control Transformers, CE Marked Control Transformers—Example: CE0250E2FCE 1 7 CE 0250 E 2F CE Type C = Industrial control transformer CE = CE Marked control transformer 0025 = 0050 = 0075 = 0100 = 0150 = 0200 = 0250 = 0300 = 25 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 VA Rating 0350 = 350 0500 = 500 0750 = 750 1000 = 1000 1500 = 1500 2000 = 2000 3000 = 3000 5000 = 5000 Type AP Only: 0003 = 3000 0005 = 5000 0007 = 7500 0010 = 10000 0015 = 15000 Transformer Design A = MTA C = MTC E = MTE K = MTK P = AP AC AG 1B 2A = = = = 2B 2C 2F 2G 2U = = = = = 2V 2W 3A 3B 3C 3D 4B 4C 4D 4E 4H 4W 5E = = = = = = = = = = = = = 6U = 7G (Type = AP only) Voltage Primary 380 x 415 208/240/277/380/480 120 x 240 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 240 x 480 240 x 480 230/460 230/460 220/380/440/550, 230/400/460/575, 240/416/480/600 208/230/400/460/575 208/230/400/460/575 208/277 115 230/460/575 208/380/416 208/230/460/575 550/575/600 380/400/415 208/230/460/575 380/400/415 550/575/600 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 240/416/480/600, 230/400/460/575, 220/380/440/550, 208/500 240 x 480 7 Secondary 24 24 24 120/115/110 24 120 x 240 115 115/230 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 24/115/230 115/230 120 24 115/95 115/95 24 110/115/120 110 x 220 115 22/23/24 22/23/24 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 Modifications Type MTE/MTK CE = CE Marked control transformer FB = Factory-mounted two-pole primary fuse block for rejection type fuses FBN = Factory-mounted two-pole primary fuse block for non-rejection–type fuses Q = Secondary fuse clips for 1/4 x 1-1/4 inch fuses XX = No secondary fuse clips RT = Ring type terminals for connection to fuse block ES = Electrostatic shield FS = Factory-mounted finger-safe terminal shields 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Type AP B = Bottom mounted S = Side/wall mounted ES = Electrostatic shield CU = Copper windings 7 7 Type MTA/MTC FB = Factory-mounted three-pole fuse block (two-pole primary rejection type with single-pole secondary non-rejection type) ES = Electrostatic shield L = Lead terminations 7 7 7 7 99/120/130, 95/115/125, 91/110/120, 85/100/110 120/240 7 7 Notes 1 For Eaton’s dry-type transformers catalog number selection, see Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 Contact your local Eaton sales office for voltage combinations not shown. Use table for catalog number breakdown only. Do not use to create catalog numbers because all combinations may not be valid. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-3 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Contents Type MTE Transformer Description 7 Page Type MTE Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-5 V7-T7-10 V7-T7-10 V7-T7-11 V7-T7-13 V7-T7-18 V7-T7-25 7 7 7 7 7 Type MTE 7 Product Description 7 7 7 7 Note: The following pages provide listings for most standard transformer ratings and styles. For other ratings or styles not shown, or for special enclosure types (including stainless steel), refer to Eaton. ● Epoxy-encapsulated coils 7 7 7 Application Description Transformers provide stepped-down voltages to machine tool control devices, enabling control circuits to be isolated from all power and lighting circuits. This allows the use of grounded or ungrounded circuits that are independent of the power or lighting grounds; thus, greater safety is afforded the operator. The control transformer line is particularly adaptable on applications where compact construction is demanded. Note: The MTG “open core-coil design” has been superseded by the epoxy-encapsulated core-coil design MTE with no change to dimensions or functionality. 7 7 Features, Benefits and Functions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 7 7 ● ● 7 Epoxy encapsulated Laminations of high-quality silicon steel to minimize core losses and optimize performance Copper magnet wire for high-quality, efficient operation Secondary fuse clips where applicable Optional primary fusing Molded in terminals 50/60 Hz operation 130°C insulation system standard Performance meets/ exceeds requirements of ANSI/NEMA ST-1 Regulation exceeds ANSI/NEMA requirements for all ratings 25–1500 VA ratings Molded-in terminals for maximum durability Standards and Certifications ● ● ● UL listed cUL listed RoHS compliant Industry Standards All Eaton dry-type distribution and control transformers are built and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards. All 600 volt class transformers are UL listed unless otherwise noted. Catalog Number Selection Please refer to Page V7-T7-3. 7 7 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 Type MTE 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers Secondary: 120/115/110 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 25 1 1.7 (0.8) C0025E2A 2 50 1 2.6 (1.2) C0050E2A 2 75 1 3.5 (1.6) C0075E2A 2 100 1 4.2 (1.9) C0100E2A 2 150 1 6.7 (3.0) C0150E2A 200 1 8.5 (3.9) C0200E2A 250 1 10.0 (4.5) C0250E2A 300 1 11.3 (5.1) C0300E2A 350 1 13.6 (6.2) C0350E2A 500 1 19.2 (8.7) C0500E2A 750 1 28.1 (12.8) C0750E2A 1000 1 29.5 (13.4) C1000E2A 1500 1 40.0 (18.1) C1500E2A Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses (through 500 VA) VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 2 2.7 (1.2) C0050E2B 2 75 2 3.5 (1.6) C0075E2B 2 100 2 4.2 (1.9) C0100E2B 2 150 2 6.7 (3.0) C0150E2B 200 2 8.5 (3.9) C0200E2B 250 2 10.1 (4.6) C0250E2B 300 2 11.4 (5.2) C0300E2B 350 2 13.4 (6.1) C0350E2B 500 2 17.5 (7.9) C0500E2B 750 2 28.1 (12.8) C0750E2B 7 Primary: 120 X 240 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 3 2.6 (1.2) C0050E1B 2 75 3 3.6 (1.6) C0075E1B 2 100 3 4.4 (2.0) C0100E1B 2 150 3 6.7 (3.0) C0150E1B 200 3 8.3 (3.8) C0200E1B 250 3 10.1 (4.6) C0250E1B 300 3 11.2 (5.1) C0300E1B 350 3 13.2 (6.0) C0350E1B 500 3 17.5 (7.9) C0500E1B 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 208/277 Secondary: 120 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 4 2.9 (1.3) C0050E3A 2 75 4 3.8 (1.7) C0075E3A 2 100 4 4.5 (2.0) C0100E3A 2 150 4 6.9 (3.1) C0150E3A 200 4 8.7 (3.9) C0200E3A 250 4 10.2 (4.6) C0250E3A 300 4 11.4 (5.2) C0300E3A 350 4 13.7 (6.2) C0350E3A 500 4 17.2 (7.8) C0500E3A 750 4 25.7 (11.7) C0750E3A 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-11 for wiring diagrams. 2 105°C insulation system. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-5 7.1 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers Secondary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers, Secondary Fuse Clips Not Applicable Primary: 550/575/600 Secondary: 22/23/24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 12 2.5 (1.1) C0050E4W 2 75 12 3.5 (1.6) C0075E4W 2 100 12 4.0 (1.8) C0100E4W 2 150 12 6.5 (3.0) C0150E4W 200 12 8.2 (3.7) C0200E4W 250 12 10.0 (4.5) C0250E4W C0250E2CXX 300 12 11.0 (5.0) C0300E4W 11.8 (5.4) C0300E2CXX 350 12 13.6 (6.2) C0350E4W 11 13.6 (6.2) C0350E2CXX 500 12 17.7 (8.0) C0500E4W 500 11 17.5 (8.0) C0500E2CXX 750 12 28.0 (12.7) C0750E4WXX 3 750 11 26.4 (12.0) C0750E2CXX VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 11 2.6 (1.2) C0050E2CXX 2 7 75 11 3.5 (1.6) C0075E2CXX 2 100 11 4.2 (1.9) C0100E2CXX 2 7 150 11 6.7 (3.1) C0150E2CXX 200 11 8.5 (3.9) C0200E2CXX 250 11 10.0 (4.6) 300 11 350 7 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 550/575/600 Secondary: 110/115/120 with for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 5 3.5 (1.6) C0050E3C 2 75 5 4.5 (2.0) C0075E3C 2 100 5 6.0 (2.7) C0100E3C 2 150 5 7.7 (3.5) C0150E3C 200 5 9.0 (4.1) C0200E3C C0200E4C 250 5 9.7 (4.4) C0250E3C 10.0 (4.6) C0250E4C 300 5 11.7 (5.3) C0300E3C 10 11.3 (5.1) C0300E4C 350 5 16.5 (7.5) C0350E3C 350 10 13.6 (6.2) C0350E4C 500 5 21.5 (9.8) C0500E3C 500 10 16.8 (7.6) C0500E4C 750 5 28.0 (12.7) C0750E3C 750 10 25.7 (11.7) C0750E4C VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 7 50 10 2.7 (1.2) C0050E4C 2 75 10 3.6 (1.6) C0075E4C 2 7 100 10 4.2 (1.9) C0100E4C 2 150 10 6.8 (3.1) C0150E4C 200 10 8.4 (3.8) 250 10 300 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 380/400/415 Secondary: 22/23/24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses Wiring Diagram 1 C0050E4H 2 50 6 3.0 (1.4) C0050E4D 2 C0075E4H 2 75 6 4.0 (1.8) C0075E4D 2 4.0 (1.8) C0100E4H 2 100 6 5.2 (2.4) C0100E4D 2 6.5 (3.0) C0150E4H 150 6 7.0 (3.2) C0150E4D 13 8.2 (3.7) C0200E4H 200 6 8.7 (3.9) C0200E4D 13 10.0 (4.5) C0250E4H 250 6 10.2 (4.6) C0250E4D 300 13 11.0 (5.0) C0300E4H 300 6 11.0 (5.0) C0300E4D 350 13 13.6 (6.2) C0350E4H 350 6 13.0 (5.9) C0350E4D 500 13 17.7 (8.0) C0500E4H 500 6 20.0 (9.1) C0500E4D 750 6 28.0 (12.7) C0750E4D Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 13 2.5 (1.1) 75 13 3.5 (1.6) 100 13 150 13 7 200 250 7 7 7 7 Primary: 380/400/415 Secondary: 110 x 220 with Jumpers; Fuse Clips Not Applicable VA VA 7 Primary: 230/460/575 Secondary: 115/95 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses 7 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-11 for wiring diagrams. 2 105°C insulation system. 3 Secondary fuse clips are not available on this catalog number. 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Primary: 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 Secondary: 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 7 3.4 (1.5) C0050E5E 2 75 7 4.8 (2.2) C0075E5E 2 100 7 5.9 (2.7) C0100E5E 2 150 7 7.9 (3.6) C0150E5E 200 7 10.6 (4.8) C0200E5E 250 7 13.9 (6.3) C0250E5E 300 7 15.5 (7.0) C0300E5E 350 7 16.8 (7.6) C0350E5E 500 7 23.4 (10.6) C0500E5E Universal Design (MTE Epoxy Encapsulated) Primary: 240/416/480/600, 230/400460/575, 220/380/440/550, 208/500 Secondary: 99/120/130, 95/115/125, 91/110/120, 85/100/110 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 8 4.0 (1.8) C0050E6U 23 100 8 6.6 (3.0) C0100E6U 23 150 8 8.8 (4.0) C0150E6U 24 250 8 14.7 (6.7) C0250E6U 24 Transformers with Primary Fuse Blocks 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers and Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 120/115/110 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 1 2.8 (1.3) C0050E2AFB 2 75 1 3.7 (1.7) C0075E2AFB 2 100 1 4.4 (2.0) C0100E2AFB 2 150 1 6.9 (3.1) C0150E2AFB 200 1 8.7 (3.9) C0200E2AFB 250 1 10.2 (4.6) C0250E2AFB 300 1 11.5 (5.2) C0300E2AFB 350 1 13.8 (6.3) C0350E2AFB 500 1 19.4 (8.8) C0500E2AFB 750 1 28.3 (12.8) C0750E2AFB 1000 1 29.7 (13.4) C1000E2AFB 1500 1 40.2 (18.1) C1500E2AFB VA 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers and Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses Wiring Diagram 1 7 7 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 7 7 350 8 18.6 (8.4) C0350E6U 24 50 2 2.8 (1.3) C0050E2BFB 2 500 8 25.6 (11.6) C0500E6U 24 75 2 3.8 (1.7) C0075E2BFB 2 750 8 30.5 (13.8) C0750E6U 24 100 2 4.4 (2.1) C0100E2BFB 2 150 2 6.9 (3.1) C0150E2BFB 200 2 8.7 (3.9) C0200E2BFB 250 2 10.3 (4.7) C0250E2BFB 300 2 11.6 (5.3) C0300E2BFB 350 2 13.6 (6.2) C0350E2BFB 500 2 17.7 (8.0) C0500E2BFB 7 7 7 7 Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-11 for wiring diagrams. 2 105°C insulation system. 3 Type MTG open core-coil universal design has been superseded by Type MTE epoxy encapsulated universal design with no changes to form, fit or function. 4 Type MTE epoxy encapsulated universal design. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-7 7.1 7 7 Transformers Primary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers and Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA 7 Industrial Control Transformers Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number Primary: 380/400/415 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 22/23/24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 3 2.8 (1.3) C0050E1BFB 2 50 13 2.6 (1.2) C0050E4HFB 2 7 75 3 3.8 (1.7) C0075E1BFB 2 75 13 3.7 (1.7) C0075E4HFB 2 100 3 4.6 (2.1) C0100E1BFB 2 100 13 4.2 (1.9) C0100E4HFB 2 7 150 3 6.9 (3.1) C0150E1BFB 150 13 6.7 (3.0) C0150E4HFB 200 3 8.5 (3.9) C0200E1BFB 200 13 8.4 (3.8) C0200E4HFB 7 250 3 10.3 (4.7) C0250E1BFB 250 13 10.2 (4.6) C0250E4HFB 300 3 11.4 (5.2) C0300E1BFB 350 3 13.4 (6.1) C0350E1BFB 500 3 17.7 (8.0) C0500E1BFB 7 7 7 7 Primary: 208/277 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 120 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses Primary: 550/575/600 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 22/23/24 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 11/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 12 2.7 (1.2) C0050E4WFB 2 75 12 3.7 (1.7) C0075E4WFB 2 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 100 12 4.2 (1.9) C0100E4WFB 2 50 4 3.1 (1.4) C0050E3AFB 2 150 12 6.7 (3.0) C0150E4WFB 75 4 4.0 (1.8) C0075E3AFB 2 200 12 8.4 (3.8) C0200E4WFB 7 100 4 4.7 (2.1) C0100E3AFB 2 250 12 10.2 (4.6) C0250E4WFB 150 4 7.1 (3.2) C0150E3AFB 7 200 4 8.9 (4.0) C0200E3AFB 250 4 10.4 (4.7) C0250E3AFB 300 4 11.6 (5.3) C0300E3AFB 350 4 13.9 (6.3) C0350E3AFB 500 4 17.4 (7.9) C0500E3AFB 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 550/575/600 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 110/115/120 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 10 2.9 (1.3) C0050E4CFB 2 75 10 3.8 (1.7) C0075E4CFB 2 7 100 10 4.4 (2.0) C0100E4CFB 2 150 10 7.0 (3.2) C0150E4CFB 7 200 10 8.6 (3.9) C0200E4CFB 250 10 10.2 (4.6) C0250E4CFB 300 10 11.5 (5.2) C0300E4CFB 350 10 13.8 (6.3) C0350E4CFB 500 10 17.0 (7.7) C0500E4CFB 750 10 25.9 (11.8) C0750E4CFB 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 230/460/575 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 115/95 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 5 3.7 (1.7) C0050E3CFB 2 75 5 4.7 (2.1) C0075E3CFB 2 100 5 6.2 (2.8) C0100E3CFB 2 150 5 7.9 (3.6) C0150E3CFB 200 5 9.2 (4.2) C0200E3CFB 250 5 9.9 (4.5) C0250E3CFB 300 5 11.9 (5.4) C0300E3CFB 350 5 16.7 (7.6) C0350E3CFB 500 5 21.7 (9.9) C0500E3CFB Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-11 for wiring diagrams. 2 105°C insulation system. 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Primary: 380/400/415 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 110 x 220 with Jumpers; Fuse Clips Not Available VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 6 3.2 (1.5) C0050E4DFB 2 75 6 4.2 (1.9) C0075E4DFB 2 100 6 5.4 (2.5) C0100E4DFB 2 150 6 7.2 (3.3) C0150E4DFB 200 6 8.9 (4.0) C0200E4DFB 250 6 10.4 (4.7) C0250E4DFB 300 6 11.2 (5.1) C0300E4DFB 350 6 13.2 (6.0) C0350E4DFB 500 6 20.2 (9.2) C0500E4DFB Primary: 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 7 3.6 (1.6) C0050E5EFB 2 75 7 5.0 (2.3) C0075E5EFB 2 100 7 6.1 (2.8) C0100E5EFB 2 150 7 8.1 (3.7) C0150E5EFB 200 7 10.8 (4.9) C0200E5EFB 250 7 14.1 (6.4) C0250E5EFB 300 7 15.7 (7.1) C0300E5EFB 350 7 17.0 (7.7) C0350E5EFB 500 7 23.6 (10.7) C0500E5EFB Universal Design (MTE Epoxy Encapsulated) Primary: 240/416/480/600, 230/400/460/575, 220/380/440/550, 208/500 with Two-Pole Primary Fuse Block for Rejection-Type Fuses Secondary: 99/120/130, 95/115/125, 91/110/120, 85/100/110 with Fuse Clips for 13/32 x 1-1/2 Fuses 7 7 7 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 8 4.2 (1.9) C0050E6UFB 23 100 8 6.8 (3.1) C0100E6UFB 23 150 8 9.0 (4.1) C0150E6UFB 24 250 8 14.9 (6.8) C0250E6UFB 24 350 8 18.8 (8.5) C0350E6UFB 24 500 8 25.8 (11.7) C0500E6UFB 24 Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-11 for wiring diagrams. 2 105°C insulation system. 3 Type MTG open core-coil universal design has been superseded by Type MTE epoxy encapsulated universal design with no changes to form, fit or function. 4 Type MTE epoxy encapsulated universal design. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-9 7.1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Primary Fuse Kit The primary fuse kit includes a two-pole class CC fuse block, instructions, and all associated mounting and wiring hardware. Fuses are not included. When installed, the primary fuse kit will add a maximum of 11/16 inch to the transformer depth and 1-15/16 inches to the transformer height. Insulation System and Temperature Rise Industry standards classify insulation systems and rise as shown below: Primary Fuse Kit Description Catalog Number Primary fuse kit PFK1 Finger-Safe Terminal Covers (Optional) ● Fits CE Marked designs 50–750 VA ● Fits MTE designs 0.25–750 VA 7 Insulation System Classification Ambient + Winding Rise + Hot Spot = Temp. Class 40°C 55°C 10°C 105°C 40°C 80°C 30°C 150°C 25°C 135°C 20°C 180°C 40°C 115°C 30°C 185°C 40°C 150°C 30°C 220°C The design life of transformers having different insulation systems is the same—the lower-temperature systems are designed for the same life as the higher-temperature systems. Finger-Safe Terminal Covers 7 Series-Multiple Windings Series-multiple windings consist of two similar coils in each winding that can be connected in series or parallel (multiple). Transformers with series-multiple windings are designated with an “x” or “/” between the voltage ratings, such as voltages of “120/240” or “240 x 480.” If the series-multiple winding is designated by an “x,” the winding can be connected only for a series or parallel. With the “/” designation, a mid-point also becomes available in addition to the series or parallel connection. As an example, a 120 x 240 winding can be connected for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series), but a 120/240 winding can be connected for 120 (parallel), 240 (series) or 240 with a 120 mid-point. 7 For additional information, please refer to Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 FSK4 Description Catalog Number Four terminal transformers FSK4 Four terminal Series 2 transformers only FSK4S2 Six terminal transformers FSK6 7 7 7 7 7 7 FSK6 Finger-Safe Primary Fuse Block Covers ● Fits two-pole primary fuse blocks on MTE designs Finger-Safe Primary Fuse Block Covers 7 7 FSKFB Description Catalog Number Primary fuse block covers FSKFB 7 7 7 Secondary Fuse Clip Cover 7 Secondary Fuse Clip Cover 7 Description Catalog Number Fits 500 VA and smaller models SFCS 7 Fits models greater than 500 VA SFCL 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Wiring Diagrams Diagram 1 7 Diagram 5 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 2 Diagram 6 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 3 7 Diagram 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 4 Diagram 8 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-11 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Diagram 9 Diagram 13 H1 7 H2 420 V 400 V 380 V 7 7 7 7 24 V 23 V 22 V X2 X1 7 Diagram 14 7 7 H3 440,460,480 V 550,575,600 V H2 H4 X3 Diagram 11 Diagram 15 H1 H3 H2 H4 X4 X2 X3 X1 7 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 120 V 240 V 0V 7 X4 X3 H5 X2 H6 0V 208 V H4 230 V 7 H3 230 V H1 H3 H2 H4 H2 115 V H1 H3 H2 H4 H1 400 V 480 V 575 V 240 V 7 7 X1 24 V 7 X2 460 V 7 23/24/25 0V 7 110,115,120 V 7 7 H5 0V H1 7 220,230,240 V Diagram 10 380,400,416 V 7 X1 7 H2 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 0V 7 600 V 575 V 550 V 208 V H1 230 V 7 Diagram 16 400 V Diagram 12 460 V 7 575 V 7 7 7 X2 V7-T7-12 X1 X4 X3 X2 115 V 115 V 24 V 23 V 22 V 0V 7 0V 7 X1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Contents Type MTK Transformer Description Page Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-4 V7-T7-14 V7-T7-15 V7-T7-15 V7-T7-18 V7-T7-25 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Type MTK Product Description Note: The following pages provide listings for most standard transformer ratings and styles. For other ratings or styles not shown, or for special enclosure types (including stainless steel), refer to Eaton. ● ● Epoxy resin-impregnated coil Economical solution for high inrush applications Application Description Transformers provide stepped-down voltages to machine tool control devices, enabling control circuits to be isolated from all power and lighting circuits. This allows the use of grounded or ungrounded circuits that are independent of the power or lighting grounds; thus, greater safety is afforded the operator. The control transformer line is particularly adaptable on applications where compact construction is demanded. Features, Benefits and Functions ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Epoxy resin impregnated coil design Copper magnet wire for high-quality, efficient operation 50/60 Hz operation 180ºC insulation system Performance meets/ exceeds requirements of ANSI/NEMA ST-1 Regulation exceeds ANSI/NEMA requirements for all ratings 500–5000 VA ratings Standards and Certifications ● ● ● UL listed cUL listed RoHS compliant 7 7 7 7 Industry Standards All Eaton dry-type distribution and control transformers are built and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards. All 600 volt class transformers are UL listed unless otherwise noted. Catalog Number Selection Please refer to Page V7-T7-3. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-13 7.1 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. Type MTK Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 Secondary: 120/115/110 7 Primary: 380/400/415 Secondary: 110 x 220 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 500 1 13.0 (5.9) C0500K2A 750 1 19.5 (8.9) C0750K2A 1000 1 29.8 (13.6) C1000K2A 7 1500 1 30.0 (13.6) C1500K2A 2000 1 38.0 (17.3) C2000K2A 7 3000 1 53.0 (24.1) C3000K2A 5000 1 89.0 (40.5) C5000K2A 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 1000 1500 2000 Wiring Diagram 1 4 Weight Lbs (kg) 29.0 (13.1) 4 33.0 (15.0) 4 43.0 (19.5) 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 C1000K4D 1500 6 33.0 (15.0) C1500K4D 2000 6 43.0 (19.5) C2000K4D 3000 6 64.0 (29.0) C3000K4D 5000 6 102.0 (46.3) C5000K4D Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers Secondary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers, Secondary Fuse Clips Not Applicable 11 26.4 (12.0) C1000K2CXX C1000K3A 1500 11 31.0 (14.1) C1500K2CXX C1500K3A 2000 11 40.0 (18.2) C2000K2CXX 3000 11 56.0 (25.5) C3000K2CXX 5000 11 85.5 (28.9) C5000K2CXX C2000K3A 5000 4 102.0 (46.3) C5000K3A Primary: 230/460/575 Secondary: 115/95 7 28.0 (12.7) 1000 7 7 6 Style Number C3000K3A Weight Lbs (kg) 1000 Style Number 64.0 (29.0) Wiring Diagram 1 Style Number Weight Lbs (kg) 4 VA Weight Lbs (kg) Wiring Diagram 1 3000 7 Wiring Diagram 1 VA Primary: 208/277 Secondary: 120 VA VA Primary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number Style Number 750 3 19.0 (8.6) C0750K1B 1000 3 26.4 (12.0) C1000K1B 1000 5 29.2 (13.3) C1000K3C 1500 5 33.5 (15.2) C1500K3C 2000 5 42.5 (19.3) C2000K3C 3000 5 63.7 (29.0) C3000K3C 5000 5 102.0 (46.4) C5000K3C Primary: 240/416/480/600, 230/400/460/575, 220/380/440/550, 208/500 Secondary: 99/120/130, 95/115/125, 91/110/120, 85/100/110 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 1000 8 26.5 (12.0) C1000K6U Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 1500 8 38.5 (17.5) C1500K6U VA Wiring Diagram 1 2000 8 52.0 (23.6) C2000K6U 1000 9 29.0 (13.1) C1000K3D 3000 8 68.0 (30.9) C3000K6U 1500 9 43.0 (19.5) C1500K3D 5000 8 105.0 (47.7) C5000K6U 2000 9 55.0 (25.0) C2000K3D 3000 9 74.0 (33.5) C3000K3D 5000 9 108.0 (49.0) C5000K3D Primary: 208/380/416 Secondary: 115/95 Note 1 See Page V7-T7-15 for wiring diagrams. Primary: 550/575/600 Secondary: 110/115/120 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 1000 10 29.0 (13.1) C1000K4C 1500 10 33.0 (15.0) C1500K4C 2000 10 43.0 (19.5) C2000K4C 3000 10 64.0 (29.0) C3000K4C 5000 10 102.0 (46.3) C5000K4C 7 7 V7-T7-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Technical Data and Specifications Wiring Diagrams Insulation System and Temperature Rise Industry standards classify insulation systems and rise as shown below: Diagram 1 Insulation System Classification Ambient + Winding Rise + Hot Spot = Temp. Class 40°C 55°C 10°C 105°C 40°C 80°C 30°C 150°C 25°C 135°C 20°C 180°C 40°C 115°C 30°C 185°C 40°C 150°C 30°C 220°C The design life of transformers having different insulation systems is the same—the lower-temperature systems are designed for the same life as the higher-temperature systems. Series-Multiple Windings Series-multiple windings consist of two similar coils in each winding that can be connected in series or parallel (multiple). Transformers with series-multiple windings are designated with an “x” or “/” between the voltage ratings, such as voltages of “120/240” or “240 x 480.” If the series-multiple winding is designated by an “x,” the winding can be connected only for a series or parallel. With the “/” designation, a mid-point also becomes available in addition to the series or parallel connection. As an example, a 120 x 240 winding can be connected for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series), but a 120/240 winding can be connected for 120 (parallel), 240 (series) or 240 with a 120 mid-point. For additional information, please refer to Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7.1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 2 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 3 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Diagram 4 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-15 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Diagram 5 Diagram 9 Diagram 6 Diagram 10 Diagram 7 Diagram 11 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 240 V 480 V H1 H3 H2 H4 H1 H3 H2 H4 7 7 7 H1 H3 H2 H4 X4 X2 X3 X1 7 7 7 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 120 V 240 V Diagram 8 7 7 Diagram 12 7 H1 7 600 V 575 V 550 V H2 7 7 7 7 X2 24 V 23 V 22 V X1 7 V7-T7-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Diagram 15 7 H4 H5 H6 7 0V H3 208 V H2 575 V H1 230 V H2 420 V 400 V 380 V 400 V H1 460 V Diagram 13 7.1 7 X2 X1 X4 Diagram 14 X2 X2 230 V 7 X1 7 H5 7 H6 7 0V H4 208 V H3 7 X4 X3 X2 7 115 V 115 V 0V 7 0V 110,115,120 V 0V 230 V H2 575 V H1 400 V H5 460 V H4 220,230,240 V 380,400,416 V 440,460,480 V H3 23/24/25 0V X3 X3 7 Diagram 16 H2 550,575,600 V H1 24 V 0V 24 V 23 V 22 V 115 V 7 7 X1 7 X1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-17 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Contents Type MTE CE-Marked CPT Description 7 Page Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-4 V7-T7-13 V7-T7-19 V7-T7-21 V7-T7-21 V7-T7-22 V7-T7-25 7 7 7 7 7 CE Marked 7 Product Description 7 7 Note: The following pages provide listings for most standard transformer ratings and styles. For other ratings or styles not shown, or for special enclosure types (including stainless steel), refer to Eaton. 7 Application Description 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Transformers provide steppeddown voltages to machine tool control devices, enabling control circuits to be isolated from all power and lighting circuits. This allows the use of grounded or ungrounded circuits that are independent of the power or lighting grounds; thus, greater safety is afforded the operator. The control transformer line is particularly adaptable on applications where compact construction is demanded. 7 Features, Benefits and Functions Type MTE ● Epoxy encapsulated coil design ● Copper magnet wire for high-quality, efficient operation ● Laminations of high-quality silicon steel to minimize core losses and optimize performance ● Molded-in terminals ● 50/60 Hz operation ● 130°C insulation system standard ● Performance meets/ exceeds requirements of ANSI/NEMA ST-1 ● Regulation exceeds ANSI/NEMA requirements for all ratings ● Non-short circuit-proof transformer, isolation type Standards and Certifications ● Type MTK Epoxy resin-impregnated coil design ● Copper magnet wire for high-quality, efficient operation ● 50/60 Hz operation ● 180°C insulation system ● Performance meets/ exceeds requirements of ANSI/NEMA ST-1 ● Regulation exceeds ANSI/NEMA requirements for all ratings ● 500–5000 VA ratings ● ● ● ● UL listed cUL listed CE Marked units comply with IEC EN-61558-2 RoHS compliant Industry Standards All Eaton dry-type distribution and control transformers are built and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards. All 600 volt class transformers are UL listed unless otherwise noted. Catalog Number Selection Please refer to Page V7-T7-3. 7 7 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 Type MTE CE Marked IP00 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers Secondary: 120/115/110 7 Primary: 550/575/600 Secondary: 110/115/1204 7 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 1 3.5 (1.6) CE0050E2ACE 2 50 10 3.5 (1.6) CE0050E4CCE 2 75 10 4.8 (2.2) CE0075E4CCE 2 100 10 5.9 (2.7) CE0100E4CCE 2 75 1 4.8 (2.2) CE0075E2ACE 2 100 1 5.9 (2.7) CE0100E2ACE 2 150 1 8.5 (3.9) CE0150E2ACE 150 10 8.5 (3.9) CE0150E4CCE 200 1 10.6 (4.8) CE0200E2ACE 200 10 10.6 (4.8) CE0200E4CCE 250 1 11.3 (5.1) CE0250E2ACE 250 10 11.3 (5.1) CE0250E4CCE 300 1 13.2 (6.0) CE0300E2ACE 300 10 13.2 (6.0) CE0300E4CCE 350 1 14.9 (6.8) CE0350E2ACE 350 10 14.9 (6.8) CE0350E4CCE 500 1 21.0 (9.5) CE0500E2ACE 500 10 21.0 (9.5) CE0500E4CCE 750 1 29.8 (13.5) CE0750E2ACE 750 10 29.8 (13.5) CE0750E4CCE 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Primary: 380/400/415 Secondary: 110 x 220 with Jumpers Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number VA Wiring Diagram 1 7 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 7 7 50 2 3.4 (1.5) CE0050E2BCE 2 50 6 3.5 (1.6) CE0050E4DCE 2 75 2 4.2 (1.9) CE0075E2BCE 2 75 6 4.8 (2.2) CE0075E4DCE 2 100 2 5.9 (2.7) CE0100E2BCE 2 100 6 5.9 (2.7) CE0100E4DCE 2 150 2 8.5 (3.9) CE0150E2BCE 150 6 8.5 (3.9) CE0150E4DCE 200 2 10.6 (4.5) CE0200E2BCE 200 6 10.6 (4.8) CE0200E4DCE 250 2 11.3 (5.1) CE0250E2BCE 250 6 11.3 (5.1) CE0250E4DCE 300 2 13.2 (6.0) CE0300E2BCE 300 6 13.2 (6.0) CE0300E4DCE 350 2 14.9 (6.8) CE0350E2BCE 350 6 15.2 (6.9) CE0350E4DCE 500 2 19.2 (8.7) CE0500E2BCE 500 6 21.0 (9.5) CE0500E4DCE 750 2 28.1 (12.8) CE0750E2BCE 750 6 29.8 (13.5) CE0750E4DCE Primary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Style Number 7 7 7 7 VA Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 50 7 4.2 (1.9) CE0050E5ECE 2 7 50 3 3.4 (1.5) CE0050E1BCE 2 75 3 4.2 (1.9) CE0075E1BCE 2 75 7 5.9 (2.7) CE0075E5ECE 2 100 7 7.9 (3.6) CE0100E5ECE 2 100 3 5.9 (2.7) CE0100E1BCE 2 150 3 8.5 (3.9) CE0150E1BCE 150 7 10.0 (4.5) CE0150E5ECE 200 3 10.6 (4.5) CE0200E1BCE 200 7 12.8 (5.8) CE0200E5ECE 250 3 11.3 (5.1) CE0250E1BCE 250 7 15.2 (6.9) CE0250E5ECE 300 3 13.2 (6.0) CE0300E1BCE 300 7 16.8 (7.6) CE0300E5ECE 350 3 14.9 (6.8) CE0350E1BCE 350 7 19.2 (8.7) CE0350E5ECE 500 3 19.2 (8.7) CE0500E1BCE 500 7 27.0 (12.3) CE0500E5ECE 750 3 29.8 (13.5) CE0750E1BCE Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-22 for wiring diagrams. 2 105°C insulation system. 7 7 7 7 7 7 Transformers are designed to operate in a maximum ambient of 40°C. Contact your local Eaton sales office for availability on additional CE Marked control transformers. For other ratings or styles not shown, refer to Eaton. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7 7 Primary: 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 Secondary: 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 Weight Lbs (kg) 7 V7-T7-19 7 7 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Type MTK CE Marked with Factory Mounted Finger-Safe Terminal Covers IP20 7 Primary: 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 with Jumpers Secondary: 120/115/110 7 VA Terminal Type Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 250 A 1 8.8 (4.0) CE0250K2ACEFS 300 A 1 11.0 (5.0) 7 Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number CE0300K2ACEFS 250 B 14 14.3 (6.5) CE0250K2UCEFS CE0350K2ACEFS 300 B 14 15.8 (7.2) CE0300K2UCEFS 350 B 14 16.5 (7.5) CE0350K2UCEFS 500 A 1 14.8 (6.7) CE0500K2ACEFS 7 750 A 1 18.0 (8.2) CE0750K2ACEFS 500 B 14 20.5 (9.3) CE0500K2UCEFS CE1000K2ACEFS 750 C 14 28.8 (13.1) CE0750K2UCEFS 1000 C 14 39.4 (17.9) CE1000K2UCEFS A 1 11.2 (5.1) Terminal Type 350 1000 1 VA 7 7 A Primary: 220/380/440/550, 230/400/460/575, 240/416/480/600 Secondary: 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 26.3 (11.9) 1500 C 1 40.0 (18.1) CE1500K2ACEFS 7 2000 C 1 45.1 (20.5) CE2000K2ACEFS 3000 C 1 65.2 (29.6) CE3000K2ACEFS 7 5000 C 1 104.8 (47.5) CE5000K2ACEFS 7 7 7 7 VA 250 300 350 7 7 VA Terminal Type Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 250 B 15 14.9 (6.8) CE0250K2VCEFS 300 B 15 17.4 (7.9) CE0300K2VCEF Style Number 350 B 15 17.8 (8.1) CE0350K2VCEFS CE0250K2BCEFS 500 B 15 26.6 (12.1) CE0500K2VCEFS CE0300K2BCEFS 750 B 15 32.5 (14.7) CE0750K2VCEFS 1000 C 15 44.0 (20.0) CE1000K2VCEFS C 15 45.4 (20.6) CE1500K2WCEFS Primary: 240 x 480 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 Terminal Type C C C Wiring Diagram 1 2 2 2 Weight Lbs (kg) 8.2 (3.7) 9.5 (4.3) 12.2 (5.5) CE0350K2BCEFS 500 C 2 14.4 (6.5) CE0500K2BCEFS 1500 750 C 2 19.5 (8.9) CE0750K2BCEFS 2000 C 16 58.6 (26.6) CE2000K2WCEFS 3000 C 16 92.9 (42.1) CE3000K2WCEFS 5000 C 16 127.4 (57.8) CE5000K2WCEFS 1000 C 2 26.2 (11.9) CE1000K2BCEFS 7 7 Primary: 120 x 240 with Jumpers Secondary: 24 VA Terminal Type Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 7 250 C 3 8.3 (3.8) CE0250K1BCEFS 300 C 3 9.3 (4.2) CE0300K1BCEFS 7 350 C 3 12.0 (5.4) CE0350K1BCEFS 500 C 3 14.4 (6.5) CE0500K1BCEFS 750 C 3 19.5 (8.9) CE0750K1BCEFS 1000 C 3 25.2 (11.4) CE1000K1BCEFS 7 7 7 7 7 Primary: 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 Secondary: 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 VA Terminal Type Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 250 B 7 12.5 (5.7) CE0250K5ECEFS 7 300 B 7 14.0 (6.3) CE0300K5ECEFS 350 B 7 15.3 (6.9) CE0350K5ECEFS 7 500 B 7 20.8 (9.4) CE0500K5ECEFS 750 C 7 29.8 (13.5) CE0750K5ECEFS 1000 C 7 30.2 (13.7) CE1000K5ECEFS 7 7 Primary: 208/230/400/460/575 Secondary: 24 2/115/230 Primary: 240/416/480/600, 230/400/460/575, 220/380/440/550, 208/500 Secondary: 99/120/130, 95/115/125, 91/110/120, 85/100/110 VA Terminal Type Wiring Diagram 1 Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 250 A 8 11.4 (5.2) CE0250K6UCEFS 300 A 8 13.6 (6.2) CE0300K6UCEFS 350 A 8 14.2 (6.4) CE0350K6UCEFS 500 A 8 17.4 (7.9) CE0500K6UCEFS 750 A 8 27.5 (12.5) CE0750K6UCEFS 1000 A 8 27.9 (12.6) CE1000K6UCEFS 1500 A 8 43.1 (19.5) CE1500K6UCEFS 2000 B 8 56.0 (25.4) CE2000K6UCEFS 3000 B 8 76.2 (34.6) CE3000K6UCEFS Notes 1 See Page V7-T7-22 for wiring diagrams. 2 24 volt secondary only available through 1000 VA. 7 7 V7-T7-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Accessories Technical Data and Specifications Protection Index IP00 When terminal covers are installed on primary and secondary, and fuse block covers are used, the protection index is IP20. Overload Capability Short-term overload is designed into transformers as required by ANSI. Basically, dry-type distribution transformers will deliver 200% nameplate load for one-half hour, 150% load for one hour and 125% load for four hours without being damaged, provided that a constant 50% load precedes and follows the overload. See ANSI C57.96-01.250 for additional limitations. Finger-Safe Terminal Covers (Optional) ● Fits CE Marked designs 50–750 VA ● Fits MTE designs 0.25–750 VA Finger-Safe Terminal Covers FSK4 FSK6 Description Catalog Number Four terminal transformers FSK4 7 Insulation System Classification 7 Ambient + Winding Rise + Hot Spot = Temp. Class 40°C 55°C 10°C 105°C FSK6 40°C 80°C 30°C 150°C 25°C 135°C 20°C 180°C 40°C 115°C 30°C 185°C 40°C 150°C 30°C 220°C Catalog Number Primary fuse block covers FSKFB Secondary Fuse Clip Cover Secondary Fuse Clip Cover Description Catalog Number Fits 500 VA and smaller models SFCS Fits models greater than 500 VA SFCL 7 Insulation System and Temperature Rise Industry standards classify insulation systems and rise as shown below: Six terminal transformers Description 7 7 FSK4S2 Finger-Safe Primary Fuse Block Covers 7 Continuous overload capacity is not deliberately designed into a transformer because the design objective is to be within the allowed winding temperature rise with nameplate loading. Four terminal Series 2 transformers only Finger-Safe Primary Fuse Block Covers ● Fits two-pole primary fuse blocks on MTE designs FSKFB 7 7 7 7 7 7 The design life of transformers having different insulation systems is the same—the lower-temperature systems are designed for the same life as the higher-temperature systems. Series-Multiple Windings Series-multiple windings consist of two similar coils in each winding that can be connected in series or parallel (multiple). Transformers with series-multiple windings are designated with an “x” or “/” between the voltage ratings, such as voltages of “120/240” or “240 x 480.” If the series-multiple winding is designated by an “x,” the winding can be connected only for a series or parallel. With the “/” designation, a mid-point also becomes available in addition to the series or parallel connection. As an example, a 120 x 240 winding can be connected for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series), but a 120/240 winding can be connected for 120 (parallel), 240 (series) or 240 with a 120 mid-point. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 For additional information, please refer to Volume 2, CA08100003E. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-21 7.1 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Wiring Diagrams Diagram 1 Diagram 5 Diagram 2 Diagram 6 Diagram 3 Diagram 7 Diagram 4 Diagram 8 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7.1 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Diagram 9 Diagram 13 7 H1 H2 420 V 400 V 380 V 7 7 7 7 24 V 23 V 22 V X2 7 X1 7 Diagram 14 7 23/24/25 0V X3 Diagram 11 H4 H5 7 0V 7 7 7 110,115,120 V 440,460,480 V H3 220,230,240 V H2 550,575,600 V H1 380,400,416 V Diagram 10 X2 7 7 X1 7 Diagram 15 7 H6 7 0V 208 V H5 230 V H4 H1 H3 H2 H4 H4 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 X4 X2 X3 X1 120 V 240 V 7 7 X4 X3 X2 230 V H2 115 V H3 24 V H1 0V H1 H3 H2 H4 H3 400 V H2 460 V H1 480 V 575 V 240 V 7 7 X1 7 7 H3 H4 H5 H6 7 7 0V H2 208 V H1 230 V H2 400 V 600 V 575 V 550 V 575 V H1 7 Diagram 16 460 V Diagram 12 7 X2 X1 X4 X3 X2 115 V 115 V 0V 24 V 23 V 22 V 0V 7 7 X1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 7 V7-T7-23 7.1 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Acceptable Rating of Primary Overcurrent Protection for CE Marked Control Transformers 1 Regulation Data Chart Fuses 13/32 x 1-1/2 Inches (10 x 38 mm) Timelag (IEC 269) Inrush VA at 20% Power Factor Sec. Voltage 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 500 115 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 750 Transformer VA Rating NEMA/IEC 95% Sec. Voltage NEMA/IEC 90% Sec. Voltage NEMA/IEC 85% Sec. Voltage 20.0 25 2 100/— 130/— 150/— 7 120 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 20.0 50 2 170/190 200/220 240/270 200 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 75 2 310/350 410/460 450/600 7 208 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 100 2 370/410 540/600 730/810 220 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 150 3 780/850 930/1030 1150/1270 230 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 200 3 810/900 1150/1270 1450/1600 240 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 10.0 250 3 1400/1540 1900/2090 2300/2530 277 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 300 3 1900/2090 2700/2970 3850/4240 7 380 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 350 3 3100/3410 3650/4020 4800/5280 400 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 500 3 4000/4400 5300/5830 7000/7700 7 415 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 750 3 8300/9130 11,000/12,100 14,000/15,400 440 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 1000 3 15,000/16,500 21,000/23,000 27,000/29,500 460 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 1000 4 9000/9900 13,000/14,300 18,500/20,300 7 480 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 6.0 1500 4 10,500/11,500 15,000/16,500 20,500/22,500 550 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 2000 4 17,000/18,900 25,500/27,300 34,000/36,400 7 575 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 3000 4 24,000/25,700 36,000/38,500 47,500/50,200 600 0.5 0.5 0.5 1.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 5000 4 55,000/58,800 92,500/98,900 115,000/122,000 7 7 7 7 7 Acceptable Maximum Rating of Secondary Overcurrent Protection 1 7 Miniature Fuses 5 x 20 mm Timelag (IEC 127-2/III) Notes 1 For values over 6.3A, use 10 x 38 mm timelag (IEC - 269-3-1). T = 40°C control type. a 2 For units with Class 105°C insulation system. 3 For units with Class 130°C insulation system. 4 For units with Class 180°C insulation system. Sec. Voltage 50 75 100 150 200 250 300 350 500 750 23 2.50 4.00 5.00 8.00 10.0 12.00 16.00 16.00 25.00 — 24 2.50 4.00 5.00 8.00 10.0 12.00 16.00 16.00 25.00 32.00 25 2.50 4.00 5.00 8.00 10.0 12.00 16.00 16.00 25.00 32.00 90 0.63 1.00 1.25 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 4.00 6.30 10.00 7 95 0.63 0.80 1.25 1.60 2.50 3.15 4.00 4.00 6.30 8.00 100 0.50 0.80 1.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 5.00 8.00 7 110 0.50 0.80 1.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.00 5.00 8.00 115 0.50 0.80 1.00 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 3.15 5.00 8.00 120 0.50 0.63 1.00 1.25 2.00 2.50 2.50 3.15 5.00 6.30 220 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 1.60 2.50 4.00 230 0.25 0.40 0.50 0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 1.60 2.50 4.00 240 0.25 0.32 0.50 0.63 1.00 1.25 1.25 1.60 2.50 3.15 7 7 7 7 7 7 To comply with NEMA standards that require all magnetic devices to operate successfully at 85% of rated voltage, the 90% secondary column is most often used in selecting a transformer. No comparable requirement is available for IEC. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 V7-T7-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Industrial Control Transformers Transformers 7.1 Contents Type AP Transformer Description Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AP Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T7-4 V7-T7-13 V7-T7-18 V7-T7-26 V7-T7-26 V7-T7-26 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Type AP Product Description ● Encapsulated designs Features, Benefits and Functions ● Application Description ● Transformers provide stepped-down voltages to machine tool control devices, enabling control circuits to be isolated from all power and lighting circuits. This allows the use of grounded or ungrounded circuits that are independent of the power or lighting grounds; thus, greater safety is afforded the operator. The control transformer line is particularly adaptable on applications where compact construction is demanded. ● ● ● ● ● ● Resin encapsulated 60 Hz operation 180°C insulation system 115°C rise standard; 80°C rise optional Convenient screw-type terminal board Bottom or side/wallmounting designs Performance meets/ exceeds requirements of ANSI/NEMA ST-1 Regulation exceeds ANSI/NEMA requirements for all ratings 7 Standards and Certifications ● UL recognized 7 7 7 Industry Standards All Eaton dry-type distribution and control transformers are built and tested in accordance with applicable NEMA, ANSI and IEEE Standards. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T7-25 7.1 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Industrial Control Transformers Transformers Catalog Number Selection Please refer to Page V7-T7-3. Product Selection Additional Product Selection information is available in Volume 2, CA08100003E. 240/480 Volts to 120/240 Volts, 60 Hz kVA Mounting Wiring Diagram 1 Frame Weight Lbs (kg) Style Number 3 Bottom FR133 5 65 (29.5) C0003P7GB 5 Bottom FR99 5 104 (47.2) C0005P7GB 7.5 Bottom FR100 5 129 (58.6) C0007P7GB 10 Bottom FR101 5 148 (67.2) C0010P7GB 15 Bottom FR134 5 197 (89.4) C0015P7GB 3 Side/Wall FR292 5 65 (29.5) C0003P7GS C0005P7GS 5 Side/Wall FR256 5 104 (47.2) 7.5 Side/Wall FR257 5 129 (58.6) C0007P7GS 10 Side/Wall FR258 5 148 (67.2) C0010P7GS 15 Side/Wall FR259 5 197 (89.4) C0015P7GS 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 Technical Data and Specifications Overload Capability Short-term overload is designed into transformers as required by ANSI. Dry-type distribution transformers will deliver 200% nameplate load for one-half hour, 150% load for one hour and 125% load for four hours without being damaged, provided that a constant 50% load precedes and follows the overload. See ANSI C57.96-01.250 for additional limitations. Continuous overload capacity is not deliberately designed into a transformer because the design objective is to be within the allowed winding temperature rise with nameplate loading. 7 7 7 7 Insulation System and Temperature Rise Industry standards classify insulation systems and rise as shown below: Insulation System Classification Ambient + Winding Rise + Hot Spot = Temp. Class 40°C 55°C 10°C 105°C 40°C 80°C 30°C 150°C 25°C 135°C 20°C 180°C 40°C 115°C 30°C 185°C 40°C 150°C 30°C 220°C The design life of transformers having different insulation systems is the same—the lower-temperature systems are designed for the same life as the higher-temperature systems. Sound Levels All Eaton 600 volt class general-purpose dry-type distribution transformers are designed to meet NEMA ST-20 levels. Winding Terminations Eaton recommends external cables be rated 90ºC (sized at 75°C ampacity) for encapsulated designs. Series-Multiple Windings Series-multiple windings consist of two similar coils in each winding that can be connected in series or parallel (multiple). Transformers with series-multiple windings are designated with an “x” or “/” between the voltage ratings, such as voltages of “120/240” or “240 x 480.” If the series-multiple winding is designated by an “x,” the winding can be connected only for a series or parallel. With the “/” designation, a mid-point also becomes available in addition to the series or parallel connection. As an example, a 120 x 240 winding can be connected for either 120 (parallel) or 240 (series), but a 120/240 winding can be connected for 120 (parallel), 240 (series) or 240 with a 120 mid-point. For additional information, please refer to Volume 2, CA08100003E. Note: For additional information, refer to Eaton’s Industrial Control Transformer Binder B1228A. For other ratings or styles not shown, or for special enclosure types (including stainless steel), refer to Eaton. Note 1 See Page V7-T7-22 for wiring diagrams. 7 7 7 V7-T7-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 8.1 Screw Connection IEC—XB Series IEC—XB Series Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screw Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XB Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Spring Cage V7-T8-58 V7-T8-67 V7-T8-82 V7-T8-90 V7-T8-106 V7-T8-107 V7-T8-111 Power Distribution Power Distribution Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 V7-T8-4 V7-T8-31 NEMA NEMA Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 V7-T8-2 V7-T8-116 V7-T8-117 V7-T8-123 V7-T8-126 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-128 V7-T8-129 V7-T8-131 Insulation Displacement Connection 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Learn Online 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-1 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents IEC—XB Series Description 8 Page IEC—XB Series Screw Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Miniature Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XB Series Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-4 V7-T8-31 V7-T8-58 V7-T8-67 V7-T8-82 V7-T8-90 8 8 8 8 8 IEC—XB Series Overview 8 Product Description Features The XB Series from Eaton offers a complete terminal block system with a universal range of accessories. Marking, bridging and testing accessories are standardized across the different termination technologies— reducing inventory and logistics costs. The modular terminal block design allows for use of the different terminal block types together or individually, providing the highest degree of flexibility. Global acceptance—The XB Series terminal blocks are designed to worldwide standards and meet the latest international requirements. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Application Description The metal portion of the XB Series terminal blocks are made from high-grade, straincrack and corrosion-proof copper alloys. They won’t experience any electrolytic corrosion or rusting, even when moisture is present. The metal surfaces are protected with a lead-free, galvanic nickel or tin plating. The good electrical conductivity permits only a low temperature rise. The Polyamide 6.6 housings allow for operating temperatures up to 257°F (125°C) and are certified for inflammability Class V0 in accordance with UL 94. Flexible Plug-in bridge system—All three technologies (screw, spring and IDC) use the same bridge system, allowing for individual potential distribution and quickly bridged connections among the same terminal block type or across different types. The XB Series terminal blocks have two bridge shafts arranged in one line, making flexible chain bridging and skip bridging between nonadjacent terminal blocks possible. Plug-in bridges are available from 2 to 50 positions. Reducing bridges are also available to connect a larger terminal block to a smaller one. Standards and Certifications Large surface area for marking—All XB Series terminal blocks have generously sized surface areas for labeling. This allows for clearly labeled wiring that results in reduced startup time and simplifies activities such as testing and maintenance. There are provisions for marking individual terminal blocks and end stops, strips of terminal blocks, and large groups of terminal blocks. Standardized testing system—All test plugs make contact in one of the easily accessible bridge shafts. A 2.3 mm diameter test plug is available for individual measuring wires. Modular test plugs are also available for more advanced testing. ● ● ● ● UL® and cUL® recognized—File No. E67464 CE approved LVD 1 ● EN 60947-7-1 ● EN 60947-7-2 ● EN 60998-2-3 ● EN 60352-4/A1 ATEX approval (Eex e applications) Note 1 Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks. Contact Eaton for details. 8 8 V7-T8-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 IEC—XB Series Description Specification Insulation material Polyamide 6.6 Dielectric strength 600 kV/cm Creep resistance 600 CTI Internal insulation resistance 1012 ohms cm Surface resistance 1010 ohms 8 8 8 8 Flammability rating UL 94 V0 Continuous operating temperature –40 to 257°F (–40 to 125°C) 8 8 Modular Terminal Blocks for Potentially Explosive Environments The standard modular The modular terminal blocks terminal blocks from Eaton are approved for fitting in are approved for potentially Zone 1, the Ex environment, explosive environments. In as well as Zone 2. Zone 1 addition to the usual fitting is conditional upon approvals, they also have terminal blocks being used in been approved by a testing connection boxes approved center authorized by the EU. for EEx e type protection and No extra approval is required having the equivalent of at in Intrinsic Safety type least IP54 protection. applications. The EEx approved modular Modular terminal blocks on terminal blocks can be www.eaton.com fulfill the divided into the following requirements for “Increased groups: Safety” protection type when ● Screw connection installation instructions are terminal blocks followed, and have a type ● Spring-cage connection examination certificate terminal blocks in accordance with the ● Ex directive Ex-RL 94/9/EU. Insulation Displacement Connection terminal blocks These test certificates are ● Mini terminal blocks recognized in all the EU ● Terminal blocks for member states and beyond. specialized applications 8 More detailed information on modular terminal blocks in the EEx e area is available on the Internet at www.eaton.com for downloading. 8 8 8 Here you will find the following: ● ● ● ● ● 8 Technical data in accordance with EN 50 019 Approved accessories Important installation instructions and mounting diagrams EU type examination certificates General information on Ex protection 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Identifications Explosion protected electrical equipment must be marked so that the safety characteristics are identifiable. The identification of electrical equipment is described in the harmonized standard EN 50014, as shown in the following example: EN 50014 Standard Example Description Identification Manufacturer or trademark Eaton Type designation XBUT25 Abbreviation of explosion protection Identification in Accordance with ATEX-RL Electrical equipment that is certified in accordance with the ATEX 100a guideline also receives identification describing the site for use. ATEX Guideline Example 8 Description Identification Manufacturing data 02.01.2004 Address of the manufacturer Duncan, SC 8 EEx e ll Number of the appointed dept. 344 8 Protection type increased safety “e” e Common marking Ex symbol Equipment group II 8 Equipment group II Category 2 Mark of the testing body KEMA Use in gas and/or dust atmospheres GD Approval number 05ATEX2158 U 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-3 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Screw Connection Description 8 Page Screw Connection Terminal Blocks Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 Drawings Online 8 8 8 Screw Connection Terminal Blocks Overview 8 Product Description Application Description Features The XBUT Series uses a screw connection system that is accepted worldwide and is suitable in most applications. The maintenance-free connection provides the reliability you expect from Eaton. Designed for applications with high demands, the XBUT Series screw terminal block has a maintenance-free wire connection. re-tightening of the terminal screws is not necessary to ensure proper operation. The screw locking technique prevents the screws from backing out. Copper wires can be clamped without pre-treatment or ferrules can be used for splicing protection. Multiple conductors can be connected in the same clamping mechanism, saving space. ● 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ● ● ● ● ● ● Maintenance-free connections Global acceptance Multi-conductor connections Flexible Plug-in bridge system Large surface area for marking Standardized testing system Metal parts made of tinplated copper alloy Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● UL and cUL recognized— File No. E67464 CE approved LVD 1: ● EN 60947-7-1 ● EN 60947-7-2 ● EN 60998-2-3 ● EN 60352-4/A1 ATEX approval (Eex e applications) Note 1 Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks. Contact Eaton for details. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Single Level—Through-Feed Description Single Level—Through-Feed Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 8 V7-T8-6 V7-T8-7 V7-T8-9 V7-T8-9 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Single Level—Through-Feed 8 Product Description The XBUT terminal blocks feature a compact design and maintenance-free screw connection. There is a double bridge shaft providing maximum flexibility. The double bridge shaft can accommodate individual chain bridging and step-down bridging from other terminal blocks. There are numerous options for accessories, including those for testing and marking. Terminal blocks are available for wire crosssections ranging from 12 AWG (2.5 mm2) to 2/0 AWG (150 mm2). 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-5 8.1 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Product Selection XBUT4 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/32/26–12 750/22/28/26–12 600/20/26–12 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBUT25 Blue 50 XBUT25BU Gray 50 XBUT4 Blue 50 XBUT4BU Orange 50 XBUT4OR Yellow 50 XBUT4YE 8 Red 50 XBUT4RD White 50 XBUT4WH 8 Black 50 XBUT4BK Green 50 XBUT4GN Gray 50 XBUT6 Blue 50 XBUT6BU Gray 50 XBUT10 8 Blue 50 XBUT10BU Orange 50 XBUT10OR 8 Yellow 50 XBUT10YE Red 50 XBUT10RD Gray 50 XBUT16 Blue 50 XBUT16BU Gray 50 XBUT35 Blue 50 XBUT35BU 8 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/41/26–10 750/30/38/26–10 600/30/26–10 8 8 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 800/57/24–8 750/40/50/24–8 600/50/24–8 8 10.2 mm 6 AWG/10 mm2 1000/76/20–6 750/54/69/20–6 600/65/20–6 8 12 mm 8 16 mm 4 AWG/16 mm2 0 AWG/35 mm2 1000/101/17–4 1000/150/15–0 — — 8 600/85/16–4 600/150/14–1/0 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBUT25 Catalog Number XBUT4 Catalog Number XBUT6 Catalog Number XBUT10 Catalog Number XBUT16 Catalog Number XBUT35 Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT16 1 Partition plate Gray — 10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 — — Plug-in bridge— for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 — — — — 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 — — — — 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 — — — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 — — — — Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 — — — 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 — — — — Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS8 — — — Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB8 2 XBMZB10 2 XBMZB12 2 XBMZB15 2 8 8 8 Notes 1 Enclosed block, no end cover needed. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-7 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series XBUT with Reducing Bridge XBACPU25D12 XBACUT10 8 8 lmax lmax 8 8 XBARBUT10ST XBARBUT10 8 8 Central Input One-Sided Input 8 XBUT10 XBUT25 8 XBPU25D12 8 8 Step-Down Bridge with Standard Feed-Through Terminal Blocks Input Pick-Off 8 Terminal Blocks Cross-Section Terminal Blocks Cross-Section AWG (mm2) One-Sided Input Imax 8 XBUT10 6 AWG (10 mm2) XBUT25 12 (2.5) 40 65 XBARBUT10 XBUT4 10 (4) 45 65 XBARBUT10 8 8 8 XBUT16 8 8 8 4 AWG (16 mm2) Bridge Central Input Imax Catalog Number XBPT25 12 (2.5) 40 65 XBARBUT10ST XBPT4 10 (4) 45 65 XBARBUT10ST XBQT15 14 (1.5) 35 65 XBARBUT10ST XBQT25 12 (2.5) 40 65 XBARBUT10ST XBUT25 12 (2.5) 40 80 XBARBUT16 XBUT4 10 (4) 45 90 XBARBUT16 XBPT25 12 (2.5) 40 80 XBARBUT16ST XBPT4 10 (4) 45 90 XBARBUT16ST XBQT15 14 (1.5) 35 70 XBARBUT16ST XBQT25 12 (2.5) 40 80 XBARBUT16ST 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Description 8 XBUT25 XBUT4 XBUT6 XBUT10 XBUT16 XBUT35 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 32/4 41/6 57/10 76/16 101/25 150/50 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/II III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–6/0.25–6 0.5–10/0.5–10 1.0–16/1.0–16 1.5–35/1.5–35 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) 8 8 Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.2–2.5/0.2–2.5 0.5–4/0.5–4 1.0–6/1.0–4 1.5–16/1.5–10 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 1.0–4 1.5–10 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–4 0.5–6 0.75–10 1.5–10 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.63 (16) Thread M3 M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 13.3–15.9 (1.5–1.8) 13.3–15.9 (1.5–1.8) 22.1–26.6 (2.5–3) 28.3–32.7 (3.2–3.7) 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Catalog Number Width XBUT25 0.20 (5.2) 8 Height for— Length Cover Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT4 0.24 (6.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT6 0.32 (8.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT10 0.40 (10.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT16 0.47 (12.0) 2.08 (52.8) 0.09 (2.2) 2.16 (54.8) 2.45 (62.3) XBUT35 0.63 (16.0) 2.37 (60.2) — 2.59 (65.7) 2.88 (73.2) 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 XBUT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-9 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Single Level—Ground Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-11 V7-T8-11 V7-T8-11 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 Single Level—Ground Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 The ground terminal blocks have the same shape and pitch as the standard terminal block, in a green-yellow housing. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60947-7-2. 8 8 8 Product Selection XBUT6PE Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/26–12 —/—/26–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT25PE 8 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/26–10 —/—/26–10 —/—/26–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT4PE 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 —/—/24–8 —/—/24–8 —/—/24–8 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT6PE 8 10.2 mm 6 AWG/10 mm2 —/76/20–6 —/54/69/20–6 —/—/20–6 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT10PE 12 mm 4 AWG/16 mm2 —/101/15–4 — —/—/16–4 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT16PE 8 16 mm 2 AWG/35 mm2 —/125/15–2 — —/—/14–1/0 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT35PE 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U. 8 Standard Pack 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Catalog Number 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks Standard Pack XBUT25PE Catalog Number XBUT4PE Catalog Number XBUT6PE Catalog Number XBUT10PE Catalog umber XBUT16PE Catalog Number XBUT35PE Catalog Number 10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT16 3 Description Color Number of Positions End cover Gray — Partition plate — — 10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 — — Plug-in bridge— for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS212 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 — — — — 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 — — — — 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 — — — — 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 — — — — Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 — — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 — — — — Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS8 — — — Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB8 2 XBMZB10 2 XBMZB12 2 XBMZB15 2 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks XBUT25PE XBUT4PE XBUT6PE XBUT10PE XBUT16PE XBUT35PE 8 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 — — — 76/16 101/25 125/50 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/II III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–6/0.25–6 0.5–10/0.5–10 1.0–16/1.0–16 1.5–35/1.5–35 Description Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.2–2.5/0.2–2.5 0.5–4/0.5–4 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–4 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) Thread M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 1.0–6/1.0–4 1.5–16/1.5–10 0.5–2.5 1.0–4 1.5–10 0.5–6 0.75–10 1.5–10 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.63 (16) M3 M4 M4 M5 M6 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 13.3–15.9 (1.5–1.8) 13.3–15.9 (1.5–1.8) 22.1–26.6 (2.5–3) 28.3–32.7 (3.2–3.7) 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks Catalog Number Width Height for— Length Cover Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBUT25PE 0.20 (5.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT4PE 0.24 (6.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT6PE 0.32 (8.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT10PE 0.40 (10.2) 1.85 (46.9) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT16PE 0.47 (12.0) 2.08 (52.8) 0.09 (2.2) 2.16 (54.8) 2.45 (62.3) XBUT35PE 0.63 (16.0) 2.37 (60.2) — 2.59 (65.7) 2.88 (73.2) 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 3 XBUT35PE has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 8 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-11 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-13 V7-T8-13 V7-T8-13 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 8 The multi-conductor terminal blocks offer a space-saving alternative to standard feedthrough terminal blocks allowing for high density wiring. Often, three 8 Product Selection 8 XBUT25D12 8 8 The XBUT…D22 terminal blocks allow four wires to be connected to one potential— and can therefore be used as compact power distributors. Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Three-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/28/26–12 150/20/26–12 6.2 mm 8 connections have to be led to one terminal block. The XBUT…D12 terminal block accomplishes this without any additional terminal blocks or bridging required. 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/39/26–10 150/30/26–10 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBUT25D12 Blue 50 XBUT25D12BU Gray 50 XBUT4D12 Blue 50 XBUT4D12BU 8 8 XBUT4D22 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Four-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/28/26–12 150/20/26–12 Gray 50 XBUT25D22 Blue 50 XBUT25D22BU 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/39/26–10 150/30/26–10 Gray 50 XBUT4D22 Blue 50 XBUT4D22BU 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks XBUT4D12 Catalog Number XBUT25D22 Catalog Number XBUT4D22 Catalog Number 8 Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBUT25D12 Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D22 XBACUT4D22 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASUT4 XBASUT4 XBASUT4 XBASUT4 8 Partition plate — — 10 XBATUTD12 XBATUTD12 XBATUTD22 XBATUTD22 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 10 2 2 2 2 White — XBMZB5 XBMZB6 XBMZB5 XBMZB6 8 8 Test adapter Blank marker strip (strip of 10) 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Description XBUT25D12 XBUT4D12 XBUT25D22 XBUT4D22 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 28/4 39/6 28/4 39/6 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 8 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.0 0.14–1/0.14–1.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Thread M3 M3 M3 M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Catalog Number Width Length Cover Width Height for— 35 x 7.5 in 8 35 x 15 in XBUT25D12 0.20 (5.2) 2.24 (56.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT4D12 0.24 (6.2) 2.24 (56.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT25D22 0.20 (5.2) 2.52 (64.1) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT4D22 0.24 (6.2) 2.52 (64.1) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8 V7-T8-13 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-15 V7-T8-15 V7-T8-15 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 The ground terminal blocks have the same shape and pitch as the standard terminal block, in a green-yellow housing. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60-947-7-2. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBUT4D12PE 8 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks—Three-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/26–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT25D12PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/26–10 —/—/26–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT4D12PE 8 8 8 8 XBUT25D22PE 8 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks—Four-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/26–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT25D22PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/26–10 —/—/26–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBUT4D22PE 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBUT25D12PE Catalog Number XBUT4D12PE Catalog Number XBUT25D22PE Catalog Number XBUT4D22PE Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D22 XBACUT4D22 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASUT4 XBASUT4 XBASUT4 XBASUT4 Partition plate — — 10 XBATUTD12 XBATUTD12 XBATUTD22 XBATUTD22 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 10 2 2 XBMZB5 2 2 White — XBMZB5 XBMZB6 XBMZB6 8 8 8 8 Test adapter Blank marker strip (strip of 10) 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks 8 Description XBUT25D12PE XBUT4D12PE XBUT25D22PE XBUT4D22PE 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 — — — — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 8 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.0 0.14–1.0/0.14–1.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 0.5–1 0.5–1 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Thread M3 M3 M3 M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Multi-Connector Ground Blocks 8 Catalog Number Width Cover Width Height for— Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBUT25D12PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.24 (56.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT4D12PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.24 (56.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT25D22PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.52 (64.1) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBUT4D22PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.52 (64.1) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8 V7-T8-15 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Double Level Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-17 V7-T8-17 V7-T8-17 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 Double Level 8 Product Description 8 8 The potentials of the XBUTT double-level terminal blocks are on two levels to reduce space requirements by 50% over single-level terminal blocks. The XBUTT Series can be bridged on both levels for maximum flexibility. Marking can be provided at each termination point. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBUTT4 Screw Connection Double Level Blocks, XBUTT4 Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Screw Connection Double Level Blocks 8 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/36/26–10 300/30/26–10 Gray 50 XBUTT4 Blue 50 XBUTT4BU Red 50 XBUTT4RD Gray 50 XBUTT4PV UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number —/—/26–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBUTT4PE 8 8 Screw Connection Double Level Block (terminal block with potential distribution between the levels) 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/36/26–10 300/30/26–10 8 8 XBUTT4PE Screw Connection Double Level Ground Block, XBUTT4PE Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG Screw Connection Double Level—Ground Blocks 8 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/26–10 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Accessories 8 Screw Connection Terminal/Ground Blocks, Double Level Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBUTT4 Catalog Number XBUTT4PE Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACUTT4 XBACUTT4 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBDPUTT4 XBDPUTT4 Partition plate — — 10 XBATUTT4 XBATUTT4 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS6 10 2 2 Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — XBMZB6 XBMZB6 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Double Level 8 Description XBUTT4 XBUTT4PE 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 30/6 —/6 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–4/0.25–4 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 8 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) Thread M3 M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Double Level 8 Length Cover Width Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBUTT4 0.24 (6.2) 2.75 (69.9) 0.09 (2.2) 2.56 (65.0) 2.85 (72.5) XBUTT4PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.75 (69.9) 0.09 (2.2) 2.56 (65.0) 2.85 (72.5) Catalog Number 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-17 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-19 V7-T8-20 V7-T8-20 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 Triple Level Sensor/Actuator 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 The XB3UK sensor terminal blocks reduce installation time by terminating threewire devices such as photoelectric and proximity sensors in a single terminal block. The XB3UK Series accommodates a design where the positive and negative connections are grouped so that only the signal lines and one pair of wires for the power supply need to be wired between the terminal box and the control. The upper level accommodates the markable feed-through terminals for the signal line. The two lower terminal points can be bridged. These are used for the sensor power supply. The positive and negative potential can be fed into the bridges with XB3UKF25. The first sensor can also be connected to this three-wire feed-through block. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XB3UKA25 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 250/26/24–12 — 300/15/30–14 Gray 50 XB3UKA25 300/15/30–14 Gray 50 XB3UKA25L24 Screw Connection Triple Level 8 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 Screw Connection Triple Level with Red LED, 15–30 Vdc, 2.5–7.5A 8 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 250/26/24–12 — 8 8 8 XB3UKF25 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number — 250/30/24–12 300/15/30–14 Gray 50 XB3UKF25 Screw Connection Triple Level 8 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 8 8 8 V7-T8-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series XB3UKA25PE 8.1 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size 8 Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 250/26/24–12 300/15/30–14 Gray 50 XB3UKA25PE 8 Gray 50 XB3UKA25PEL24 8 8 Screw Connection Triple Level 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 Screw Connection Triple Level with Red LED, 15–30 Vdc, 2.5–7.5A 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 250/26/24–12 300/15/30–14 8 XB3UKF25PE 8 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number — 300/15/30–14 Gray 50 XB3UKF25PE 8 Screw Connection Triple Level 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 8 8 8 8 Accessories 8 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Description Color Insertion bridge Insertion bridge Blank marker strip (strip of 10) Number of Positions Standard Pack XB3UKA25 Catalog Number XB3UKF25 Catalog Number XB3UKA25PE Catalog Number XB3UKF25PE Catalog Number Blue 80 1 XBAEB80DIKB XBAEB80DIKB XBAEB80DIKB XBAEB80DIKB Red 80 1 XBAEB80DIKR XBAEB80DIKR XBAEB80DIKR XBAEB80DIKR Blue 10 10 XBAEB10DIKB XBAEB10DIKB XBAEB10DIKB XBAEB10DIKB Red 10 10 XBAEB10DIKR XBAEB10DIKR XBAEB10DIKR XBAEB10DIKR White — 10 XBMZB6 1 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB6 2 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-19 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Description XB3UKA25 XB3UKF25 XB3UKA25PE XB3UKF25PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 26/2.5 30/4 26/2.5 26/2.5 8 Maximum cross section with insertion bridge solid/stranded in mm2 4/2.5 4/2.5 4/2.5 4/2.5 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 4/3 4/3 4/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.2–1.0/0.2–1.0 0.2–1.0/0.2–1.0 0.2–1.0/0.2–1.0 0.2–1.0/0.2–1.0 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.0 0.25–1.0 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 0.5–1.0 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Thread M3 M3 M3 M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 4.4–5.3 (0.5–0.6) 4.4–5.3 (0.5–0.6) 4.4–5.3 (0.5–0.6) 4.4–5.3 (0.5–0.6) Wiring for Three-Level Sensor Terminal Blocks Wiring for Four-Level Sensor Terminal Blocks 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator 8 Catalog Number Width Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 8 XB3UKA25 0.24 (6.2) 2.17 (55.0) 2.15 (54.5) 2.44 (62.0) XB3UKF25 0.24 (6.2) 2.85 (72.5) 2.15 (54.5) 2.44 (62.0) 8 XB3UKA25PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.46 (62.5) 2.76 (70.0) 3.05 (77.5) XB3UKF25PE 0.24 (6.2) 3.25 (82.5) 2.76 (70.0) 3.05 (77.5) 8 Height for— 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 8 V7-T8-23 V7-T8-23 V7-T8-23 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description The UT Series fuse terminal blocks come in two varieties— lever type and cap. Each performs two functions. They act as a fuse carrier for most common North American and European fuses and they allow for potential distribution with the double bridge shaft. The terminal blocks therefore allow bypass routing of two separate potentials next to each other. This has the advantage of a time-saving potential infeed and a correct, functional configuration of the terminal strip. For signaling a triggered fuse, fuse terminal blocks with light indicators are available (for both AC and DC voltage). 8 8 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBUT4FBE Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks, for 5 x 20 mm Fuse Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size 8 IEC 60 947-7-3 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 1/6.3/26–10 600/6.3/26–10 Black 50 XBUT4FBE 600/6.3/26–10 Black 50 XBUT4FBEL24 8 600/6.3/26–10 Black 50 XBUT4FBEL60 8 600/6.3/26–10 Black 50 XBUT4FBEL250 8 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/6.3/26–10 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/6.3/26–10 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/6.3/26–10 8 Note 1 As disconnect terminal block 400V, as fuse terminal block 250V. 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-21 8.1 8 XBUT6FBN Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 in x 1–1/4 in) Fuse Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-3 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 1/10/24–8 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBN 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBNL24 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBNL60 400/10/24–8 Black 50 XBUT6FBNL250 Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 1/10/24–8 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0 mA 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 1/10/24–8 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 1/10/24–8 8 8 XBUK10FBCE Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks, XBUK10FBC IEC 60 947-7-3 with Fuse in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 800/10/20–6 300/20/22–6 Black 50 XBUK10FBCE 300/20/22–6 Black 50 XBUK10FBCN Black 50 XBUK10FBCEL24 Black 50 XBUK10FBCNL24 Black 50 XBUK10FBCEL250 Black 50 XBUK10FBCNL250 Terminal Width 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks for 5 x 20 mm fuse 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 in x 1–1/4 in) fuse 12 mm 12 mm 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnected t.b. in V/A/AWG 8 6 AWG/16 mm2 6 AWG/16 mm2 1/1/20–4 1/1/20–4 800/10/20–6 Fuse Terminal Blocks with Light Indicator 15–30V, 1–2.5 mA, 5 x 20 mm 12 mm 8 6 AWG/16 mm2 1/1/20–4 800/10/20–6 300/20/22–6 Fuse Terminal Blocks with Light Indicator 15–30V, 1–2.5 mA, 6.3 x 32 mm 8 12 mm 8 12 mm 6 AWG/16 mm2 1/1/20–4 800/10/20–6 300/20/22–6 Fuse Terminal Blocks with Light Indicator 110–250V, 0.5–1.1A, 5 x 20 mm 6 AWG/16 mm2 1/1/20–4 800/10/20–6 300/20/22–6 Fuse Terminal Blocks with Light Indicator 110–250V, 0.5–1.1A, 6.3 x 32 mm 8 12 mm 6 AWG/16 mm2 1/1/20–4 800/10/20–6 300/20/22–6 8 Cartridge Fuse Inserts 5 x 20 mm Based on DIN EN 60 947-7-3: 2003-7 8 8 8 Terminal Blocks Overload Protection Short-Circuit Protection Only U (V) Individual Interconnected Individual Interconnected Imax. (A) XBUT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W 4W 2.5W 6.3 Notes Max. power dissipation at 73.4°F (23°C) based on DIN EN 60 947-7-3: 2003-7. When selecting cartridge fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified above is not exceeded. Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. If the fuse is defective, the downstream circuit is not off load. 8 8 1 As disconnect terminal block 500V, as fuse terminal block 400V. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBUT4FBE Catalog Number XBUT6FBN Catalog Number XBUK10FBCE Catalog Number End cover — — — 1 1 — Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 — 3 10 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS38 — 5 10 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS58 — 10 10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS108 — 50 10 XBAFBS506 — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — — XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 — Blank marker strip external labeling (strip of 10) White — — XBMZB6 2 XBMZB8 2 — Fixed bridge — 2 10 — — XBAFBI212 Screw heads with insulating collar — 10 10 — — XBAFBI1012 Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 — — XBMZB6 2 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks Description XBUT4FBE XBUT4FBN XBUK10FBCE — — G/5 x 20/5 x 25/6.3 x 32 8 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Fuse type/dimensions in (mm) Maximum cross section with insertion bridge solid/stranded in mm2 6.3/6 10/10 10/10 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 4/3 4/3 4/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/II III/II III/I 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–6/0.25–6 0.5–10/0.5–10 Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 — 0.5–4/0.5–4 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 — 0.5–4 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–2.5 0.5–4 0.5–10 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.35 (9) 0.39 (10) 0.43 (11) Thread M3 M4 M4 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 13.3–15.9 (1.5–1.8) 13.3–15.9 (1.5–1.8) 8 8 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 8 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Height for— Catalog Number Width Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 32 in XBUT4FBE 0.24 (6.2) 2.24 (56.8) 2.87 (73.0) 3.17 (80.5) — XBUT4FBN 0.32 (8.2) 2.24 (56.8) 2.87 (73.0) 3.17 (80.5) — XBUK10FBCE 0.47 (12.0) 2.44 (62.0) 2.32 (59.0) 2.62 (66.5) 2.52 (64.0) 8 8 8 Notes 1 XBUT4FBE and XBUT6FBN have an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-23 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description 8 Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 8 8 The XB Series includes application specific terminal blocks like the XBUT4TG disconnect block that accommodates disconnect component and fuse terminal blocks. It can also be bridged with standard terminal blocks via the double bridge shaft. The component plug XBPCO serves to accommodate different components such as resistors or capacitors. 5 x 20 mm fuses can be inserted into the fuse plug XBPFU, also available with light indication. The XBUT4MT knife disconnect terminal block features a compact design and a high current carrying capacity of 16A. Versions with test socket screws provide a test option for 2.3 mm diameter test plugs on both sides of the disconnect point. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-25 V7-T8-26 V7-T8-26 V7-T8-26 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-29 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Product Selection XBUT4TG Disconnect 8 Screw Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Terminal Width 8 Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings for Disconnect in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings for Disconnect with Test Sockets in V/A/AWG 500/16/26–10 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Gray 50 XBUT4TG 500/16/26–10 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Gray 50 XBUT4TGP 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Gray 10 XBPCO 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Black 10 XBPFU 8 300/16/26–10 Black 10 XBPFUL24 8 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Black 10 XBPFUL250 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Gray 50 XBUT4MT 300/16/26–10 Gray 50 XBUT4MTP 8 — Gray 50 XBUKK4DIO 8 Maximum Wire Size Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 8 Screw Connection Disconnect 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 8 Screw Connection Disconnect with Test Sockets 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 Component Plug 6.2 mm Fuse Plug 6.2 mm Fuse Plug with Light Indicator for 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 600/16/26–10 Fuse Plug with Light Indicator for 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 8 Screw Connection Disconnect Knife Disconnect 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 8 Screw Connection Disconnect Knife Disconnect with Test Sockets 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 600/16/26–10 Screw Connection Terminal Blocks with Integrated Diodes 6.2 mm XBTKT25 Thermal Electric Voltage 12 AWG/4 mm2 500/32/24–10 600/30/26–10 8 Screw Connection Thermoelectric Voltage Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size 8 Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 400/—/24–12 300/10/28–12 Gray 50 XBTKT25 (Type T) 400/—/24–12 300/10/28–12 Gray 50 XBTKJ25 (Type J) 8 400/—/24–12 300/10/28–12 Gray 50 XBTKE25 (Type E) 8 400/—/24–12 300/10/28–12 Gray 50 XBTKK25 (Type K) 8 400/—/24–12 300/10/28–12 Gray 50 XBTKR25 (Type R) 8 8 Copper/Constantan (CU/CUNI44) 10.4 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 8 Iron/Constantan (FE/CUNI44) 10.4 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 Nickel-Chrome/Constantan (NICR/CUNI44) 10.4 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 8 Nickel-Chrome/Nickel (NICRNI) 10.4 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 Copper/Copper Nickel (E-CU/A-CU) 10.4 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-25 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Screw Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Description Color 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red Number of Positions Standard Pack XBUT4TG Catalog Number XBUT4MT Catalog Number XBUKK4DI0 Catalog Number XBTKT25 Catalog Number 2 10 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26 — — 3 10 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36 — — 8 5 10 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56 — — 10 10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106 — — 8 50 10 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506 — — Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 — — 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 — — Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSDPPS6 XBATSDPPS6 — — Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB10 2 End cover Gray — 10 — — XBACUKK35 XBACTK4 Spacer cover Gray — 10 — — XBADGUKK35 — 8 Spacer plate — — 10 — — XBADPUKK35 — Partition plate — — — — — — XBATTK4 8 Fixed bridge — 10 10 — — XBAFBI106 — 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 8 8 8 8 Description XBUT4TG XBUT4MT XBUKK4DI0 XBTK Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 16/6 16/6 32/4 — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 — Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I — 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–4/0.25–2.5 — Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.2–1.5/0.2–1.5 — Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 — Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 — 0.5–2.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–1.5 8 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.31 (8) 0.28 (7) Thread M3 M3 M3 M3 8 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Screw Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Catalog Number Length Cover Width Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 32 in XBUT4TG 0.24 (6.2) 2.24 (56.8) — 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) — XBUT4MT 0.24 (6.2) 2.24 (56.8) — 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) — XBUKK4DI0 0.24 (6.2) 2.20 (56.0) 0.10 (2.5) 2.44 (62.0) 2.74 (69.5) 2.64 (67.0) XBTK 0.20 (5.2) 1.81 (46.0) 0.04 (1.0) 1.57 (40.0) 1.87 (47.5) 1.77 (45.0) Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. V7-T8-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents High Current Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 8 V7-T8-28 V7-T8-28 V7-T8-28 V7-T8-29 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 High Current Blocks 8 Product Description Eaton’s XBUK high current terminal blocks offer a reliable connection via the superior construction that includes three-point centering of the wire in the prism-shaped sleeve base, a fluted contact surface for low contact resistance, and screws secured with spring-loaded elements. The terminal blocks have an enclosed housing made from polyamide 6.6. Greenyellow ground terminal blocks are also available. 8 8 8 8 Product Selection XBUK150 8 Screw Connection High Current Blocks 1 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 20.0 mm 1/0/50 mm2 1000/150/1/0 750/135/1/0 600/150/1/0 Gray 10 XBUK50 Blue 10 XBUK50BU Gray 10 XBUK150 31.0 mm 300 kcmil/150 mm2 1000/309/2–300 726/265/2–300 600/285/ 2 AWG–300 kcmil 8 8 8 8 8 XBUK95PE Screw Connection High Current Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 25.0 mm 000 AWG/95 mm2 —/232/4–000 —/—/4–000 —/—/2–4/0 Green/Yellow 10 Standard Pack 8 Catalog Number 8 XBUK95PE 8 8 8 Note 1 U type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2170 U (XBUK50), KEMA 05ATEX2171 U (XBUK150). 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-27 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Screw Connection High Current Blocks XBUK150 Catalog Number XBUK95PE Catalog Number Description Color 8 Fixed bridge, screw heads with insulating color — 2 10 XBAFBI220 — — Insertion bridge — 2 10 — XBAEB231 — 8 Blank marker strip external labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB10 1 XBMZB10 1 XBMZB10 1 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection High Current Blocks 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Description XBUK50 Standard Pack XBUK50 Catalog Number Number of Positions XBUK150 XBUK95PE Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 150/50 309/150 232/95 Maximum cross-section with insertion bridge solid/stranded in mm2 —/— 150/120 —/— Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I 25–50/25–50 50–150/50–150 35–95/35–95 Connection Capacity Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 10–16/10–16 25–50/35–50 25–35/25–35 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 10–16 25–50 16–35 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.94 (24) 1.57 (40) 1.18 (30) M8 Thread M6 M10 Terminal point—thread/torque in in-lb (Nm) 53–71 (6–8) 221–267 (25–30) 133–177 (15–20) Fastening—thread/torque in in-lb (Nm) 53–71 (6–8) 221–267 (25–30) 133–177 (15–20) Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection High Current Blocks 8 Catalog Number Width Length 8 XBUK50 0.79 (20.0) 2.78 (70.5) 3.29 (83.5) 3.21 (81.5) — XBUK150 1.22 (31.0) 3.94 (100.0) 4.67 (118.5) 4.57 (116.0) — 8 XBUK95PE 0.98 (25.0) 3.27 (83.0) — 3.90 (99.0) 3.80 (96.5) 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 Height for— 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 32 in For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Mini Screw Connection Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Screw Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-30 V7-T8-30 V7-T8-30 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Mini Screw Connection 8 Product Description The XB miniature terminal blocks have a connection cross-section from 2 mm2 through 4 mm2 and mount on 15 mm DIN rail. There is an opening for bridging with a fixed bridge in the center of the terminal blocks. These miniature terminal blocks also offer the same accessories that you would find with the larger blocks—including marking tags, end covers, end stop and ground blocks. 8 8 8 Product Selection XBMUK4 8 Mini Screw Connection Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 400/32/24–12 275/28/21/24–12 600/20/28–12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/41/24–10 —/—/— 600/10/26–10 8 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBMUK25 Blue 50 XBMUK25BU Gray 50 XBMUK4 Blue 50 XBMUK4BU 8 8 8 8 8 XBMUK25PE Mini Screw Connection Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/24–12 —/—/30–12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/2.4 mm2 —/—/24–10 —/—/26–14 8 Standard Pack Catalog Number Green/ Yellow 50 XBMUK25PE 8 Green/ Yellow 50 XBMUK4PE 8 Color 8 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2169 U (XBMUK25). 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-29 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Mini Screw Connection Terminal/Ground Blocks 8 Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBMUK25 Catalog Number XBMUK4 Catalog Number XBMUK25PE Catalog Number XBMUK4PE Catalog Number — 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACMU254 XBACMU254 — Blue — 10 XBACMU254B XBACMU254B — 8 Partition plate — — — 10 XBATMU254 XBATMU254 — — Fixed bridge — 8 Separating plate — 10 10 XBAFBR105N — — — — 10 XBATMPKK15 XBATMPKK15 — — Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 1 XBMZB6 1 XBMZB5 1 XBMZB6 1 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Mini Spring Cage Terminal/Ground Blocks 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Description XBMUK25 XBMUK4 XBMUK25PE XBMUK4PE 41/6 — — 8 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 32/4 Maximum cross-section with insertion bridge (solid/stranded) 2.5/2.5 4/4 — — 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–2.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 Solid/stranded in mm2 0.2–1.0/0.2–1.5 0.2–1.5/0.2–1.5 0.2–1.0/0.2–1.5 0.2–1.5/0.2–1.5 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.0 0.5–2.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 Stripping length in Inches (mm) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Thread M3 M3 M3 M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 4.4–5.3 (0.5–0.6) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 8 8 8 8 8 8 Connection Cross-Section Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mini Spring Cage Terminal/Ground Blocks Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width XBMUK25 0.20 (5.2) 1.10 (28.0) 0.04 (1.0) 1.26 (32.0) XBMUK4 0.24 (6.2) 1.10 (28.0) 0.04 (1.0) 1.26 (32.0) XBMUK25PE 0.20 (5.2) 1.10 (28.0) — 1.24 (31.5) XBMUK4PE 0.24 (6.2) 1.10 (28.0) — 1.26 (32.0) 15 in Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Spring Cage Connection Description Page Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 8 8 8 Drawings Online 8 8 8 Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Overview Product Description Application Description Features The XBPT Series incorporates a spring cage connection system proven in applications that are sensitive to vibration. The spring mechanism always exerts the same constant force on the wire, resulting in a vibrationproof, gas-tight connection, independent of the user. The space-saving front connection, with the wire and screwdriver coming in parallel from the same direction, allows for simple wiring in places where there is little space available. The connection point is opened with a standard screwdriver. After the wire has been inserted into the wire guide of the terminal block, the screwdriver is removed and the wire automatically makes contact. ● ● ● ● ● ● Vibration-resistance Global acceptance Multi-conductor connections Flexible Plug-in bridge system Large surface area for marking Standardized testing system Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● UL recognized—File No. E67464 CE approved LVD 1: ● EN 60947-7-1 ● EN 60947-7-2 ● EN 60998-2-3 ● EN 60352-4/A1 ATEX approval (Eex e applications) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Note 1 Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks. Contact Eaton for details. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-31 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Single Level—Through-Feed Description 8 Single Level—Through-Feed Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Single Level—Through-Feed 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 The space-saving design and front entry design make the XBPT Series ideal for control systems where there is little space. Even so, they offer maximum connection space, resulting in fast wiring of stranded and solid conductors with or without ferrules. XBPT terminal blocks are available with cross-sections from 2.5 mm2 up to 35 mm2. The double bridge shaft can accommodate individual chain bridging and stepdown bridging from other terminal blocks. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T8-34 V7-T8-36 V7-T8-36 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Product Selection XBPT6 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/31/28–12 550/25/21/24–12 600/20/26–12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28–10 550/34/30/24–10 600/30/20–10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 800/52/24–8 550/45/36/20–8 600/50/20–8 10.2 mm 6 AWG/10 mm2 800/65/24–6 550/50/63/16–6 600/65/16–6 12 mm 4 AWG/16 mm2 800/90/24–4 550/65/82/16–4 600/50/16–4 16 mm 2 AWG/35 mm2 800/125/14–2 750/108/14–2 600/115/14–2 8 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBPT25 Blue 50 XBPT25BU White 50 XBPT25WH Red 50 XBPT25RD Black 50 XBPT25BK Gray 50 XBPT4 Blue 50 XBPT4BU Gray 50 XBPT6 Blue 50 XBPT6BU Gray 50 XBPT10 Blue 50 XBPT10BU Gray 50 XBPT16 Blue 50 XBPT16BU Gray 50 XBPT35 Blue 50 XBPT35BU 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-33 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed, XBPT25, XBPT4 and XBPT6 Standard Pack XBPT25 Catalog Number XBPT4 Catalog Number XBPT6 Catalog Number Description Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25 XBACPT4 XBACPT6 Partition plate Gray — 10 XBATPT4 XBATPT4 XBATPT6 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 — 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 — 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 — 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 — 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS8 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 XBMZF8 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB8 2 XBPT16 Catalog Number XBPT35 Catalog Number Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed, XBPT10, XBPT16 and XBPT35 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPT10 Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT10 XBACPT16 3 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 1 XBAFBS216 2 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — 10 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZF10 2 XBMZBF12 2 XBMZBF15 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB10 2 XBMZB12 2 XBMZB15 2 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 3 XBPT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 XBPT with Reducing Bridge 8 XBPT6 8 XBACPT6 lmax 8 lmax 8 8 8 XBARBST6 8 8 Central Input One-Sided Input XBPT25 XBPT25 8 XBACPT25 8 Step-Down Bridge with Standard Feed-Through Terminal Blocks Input Pick-Off Terminal Blocks Cross-Section Terminal Blocks Cross-Section AWG (mm2) XBPT6 8 AWG (6 mm2) XBPT25 12 (2.5) XBPT4 10 (4) XBQT15 14 (1.5) XBQT25 12 (2.5) XBPT10 XBPT16 6 AWG (10 mm2) 4 AWG (16 mm2) Central Input Imax Bridge 8 Catalog Number 8 40 56 XBARBST6 45 56 XBARBST6 8 35 56 XBARBST6 40 56 XBARBST6 One-Sided Input Imax XBPT25 12 (2.5) 40 65 XBARBST10 XBPT4 10 (4) 45 65 XBARBST10 XBQT15 14 (1.5) 35 65 XBARBST10 XBQT25 12 (2.5) 40 65 XBARBST10 XBPT25 12 (2.5) 40 80 XBARBST16 XBPT4 10 (4) 45 90 XBARBST16 XBQT15 14 (1.5) 35 70 XBARBST16 XBQT25 12 (2.5) 40 80 XBARBST16 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-35 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 31/4 40/6 52/10 65/16 90/25 125/35 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I 0.25–4 0.25–6 0.25–10 0.25–16 2.5–35 8 Description XBPT25 XBPT4 XBPT6 XBPT10 XBPT16 XBPT35 Connection Capacity 8 Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 8 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–6 0.25–10 0.25–16 2.5–35 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5–1 0.5–1.5 1.5–2.5 1.5–4 2.5–10 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.47 (12) 0.71 (18) 0.71 (18) 0.98 (25) 8 8 Stripping length in inches (mm) Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Through-Feed 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Width Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 8 XBPT25 0.20 (5.2) 1.91 (48.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.45 (36.8) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4 0.24 (6.2) 2.20 (56.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.45 (36.8) 1.73 (44.0) 8 XBPT6 0.32 (8.2) 2.74 (69.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.71 (43.5) 2.01 (51.0) XBPT10 0.39 (10.0) 2.81 (71.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.99 (50.5) 2.30 (58.5) XBPT16 0.47 (12.0) 3.15 (80.0) 0.09 (2.2) 2.01 (51.0) 2.30 (58.5) 3.94 (100.0) 1 2.32 (59.0) 2.62 (66.5) 8 8 8 XBPT35 0.63 (16.0) Note 1 XBPT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Single Level—Ground Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-32 V7-T8-38 V7-T8-38 V7-T8-38 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Single Level—Ground Blocks 8 Product Description 8 The XBPT ground blocks are the same shape as the feedthrough terminal blocks with the same wide range of cross-sections available. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60-947-7-2. 8 8 8 8 Product Selection XBPT4PE 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level—Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/28–12 —/—/24–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT25PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/28–10 —/—/24–10 —/—/20–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT4PE 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 —/—/24–8 —/—/20–8 —/—/20–8 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT6PE 10.2 mm 6 AWG/10 mm2 —/65/24–6 —/—/16–6 —/—/16–6 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT10PE 12 mm 4 AWG/16 mm2 —/90/24–4 —/—/16–4 2 —/—/16–4 Green/Yellow 25 XBPT16PE 16 mm 2 AWG/35 mm2 —/125/14–2 —/—/14–2 2 —/—/14–2 Green/Yellow 10 XBPT35PE Notes 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25PE), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4PE). 2 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2156 U. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-37 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level Ground Blocks, XBPT25PE, XBPT4PE and XBPT6PE Standard Pack XBPT25PE Catalog Number XBPT4PE Catalog Number XBPT6PE Catalog Number Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25 XBACPT4 XBACPT6 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF6 1 XBMZBF8 1 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 1 XBMZB6 1 XBMZB8 1 8 8 Description Spring Cage Connection Single Level Ground Blocks, XBPT10PE, XBPT16PE and XBPT35PE 8 Standard Pack XBPT10PE Catalog Number XBPT16PE Catalog Number XBPT35PE Catalog Number 8 Description Color Number of Positions End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT10 XBACPT16 2 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft — 2 10 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216 8 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF10 1 XBMZBF12 1 XBMZBF15 1 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB10 1 XBMZB12 1 XBMZB15 1 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Single Level Ground Blocks Description XBPT25PE XBPT4PE XBPT6PE XBPT10PE XBPT16PE XBPT35PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 — — — 65/16 90/25 125/35 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–6 0.25–10 0.25–16 2.5–35 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–6 0.25–10 0.25–16 2.5–35 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5–1 0.5–1.5 1.5–2.5 1.5–4 2.5–10 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.47 (12) 0.71 (18) 0.71 (18) 0.98 (25) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 Surge voltage category/insulating material group 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Spring Cage Connection Single Level Ground Blocks Catalog Number Length Cover Width Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT25PE 0.20 (5.2) 1.91 (48.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.45 (36.8) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.20 (56.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.45 (36.8) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT6PE 0.32 (8.2) 2.74 (69.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.71 (43.5) 2.01 (51.0) XBPT10PE 0.39 (10.0) 2.81 (71.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.99 (50.5) 2.28 (58.0) XBPT16PE 0.47 (12.0) 3.15 (80.0) 0.09 (2.2) 2.01 (51.0) 2.30 (58.5) XBPT35PE 0.63 (16.0) 3.94 (100.0) — 2.32 (59.0) 2.62 (66.5) Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 2 XBPT35PE has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 V7-T8-38 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-40 V7-T8-41 V7-T8-41 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description The multi-conductor terminal blocks offer a space-saving alternative to standard feedthrough terminal blocks, allowing for high-density wiring. Often, three connections have to be led to one terminal block. The XBPT…D12 terminal block accomplishes this without any additional terminal blocks or bridging required. The XBPT…D22 terminal blocks allow four wires to be connected to one potential— and can therefore be used as compact power distributors. There is also a version, XBPT25D22U or XBPT4D22U, with an interrupted bus bar in the terminal center. This makes two feed-through terminal blocks available in one level. One side of this block can be bridged using the standard Plug-in bridges. Double marker carriers are available for clear marking of the feed-through levels. 8 8 8 8 8 Product Selection XBPT4D12 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Three-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/28/28–12 550/25/21/24–12 600/20/26–12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28–10 550/34/29/24–10 600/30/20–10 8 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBPT25D12 Blue 50 XBPT25D12BU Gray 50 XBPT4D12 Blue 50 XBPT4D12BU 8 8 8 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25D12), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4D12). 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-39 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Four-Wire XBPT25D22 Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 800/28/28–12 550/24/21/24–12 600/20/26–12 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Spring Cage Multi-Conductor 8 5.2 mm 8 6.2 mm 8 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28–10 550/34/25/24–10 600/30/20–10 Gray 50 XBPT25D22 Blue 50 XBPT25D22BU Gray 50 XBPT4D22 Blue 50 XBPT4D22BU Spring Cage Multi-Conductor with Interrupted Bus Bar 8 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/28/28–12 550/24/21/24–12 600/20/26–12 Blue 50 XBPT25D22U 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28–10 550/34/25/24–10 600/30/20–10 Blue 50 XBPT4D22U 8 8 8 Accessories Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Standard Pack XBPT25D12 Catalog Number XBPT4D12 Catalog Number XBPT25D22 Catalog Number XBPT4D22 Catalog Number 8 Description Color Number of Positions End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25D12 XBACPT4D12 XBACPT25D22 XBACPT4D22 8 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASPT25 XBASPT4 XBASPT25 XBASPT4 Partition plate — — 10 XBATPTD12 XBATPTD12 XBATPTD22 XBATPTD22 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 2 XBATSMPS-_ 2 XBATSMPS-_ 2 XBATSMPS-_ 2 8 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 3 XBMZBF6 3 XBMZBF5 3 XBMZBF6 3 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 3 XBMZB6 3 XBMZB5 3 XBMZB6 3 8 8 Notes 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25D22), KEMA 05ATEX2155 (XBPT4D22). 2 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 3 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-40 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description XBPT25D12 XBPT4D12 XBPT25D22 XBPT4D22 28/4 40/6 28/4 40/6 8 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5–1 0.5 0.5–1 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Width Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT25D12 0.20 (5.2) 2.38 (60.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4D12 0.24 (6.2) 2.81 (71.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT25D22 0.20 (5.2) 2.83 (72.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4D22 0.24 (6.2) 3.43 (87.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-41 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-43 V7-T8-43 V7-T8-43 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 The ground terminal blocks have the same shape and pitch as the standard terminal block, in a green-yellow housing. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60-947-7-2. 8 8 8 Product Selection XBPT25D12PE 8 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks, Three-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/28–12 —/—/24–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT25D12PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/28–10 —/—/24–10 —/—/20–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT4D12PE 8 8 8 XBPT4D22PE Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks, Four-Wire Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/28–12 —/—/24–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT25D22PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/28–10 —/—/24–10 —/—/20–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBPT4D22PE Terminal Width 8 8 8 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25D12PE), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4D12PE). 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-42 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPT25D12PE Catalog Number XBPT4D12PE Catalog Number XBPT25D22PE Catalog Number XBPT4D22PE Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25D12 XBACPT4D12 XBACPT25D22 XBACPT4D22 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASPT25 XBASPT4 XBASPT25 XBASPT4 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF6 1 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF6 1 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 1 XBMZB6 1 XBMZB5 1 XBMZB6 1 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks 8 Description XBPT25D12PE XBPT4D12PE XBPT25D22PE XBPT4D22PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 — — — — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5–1 0.5 0.5–1 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Width Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT25D12PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.38 (60.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4D12PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.81 (71.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT25D22PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.83 (72.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4D22PE 0.24 (6.2) 3.43 (87.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-43 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Double Level Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-45 V7-T8-45 V7-T8-45 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 Double Level Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 8 The potentials of the XB double level terminal blocks routed on two levels reduce space requirements by 50% compared with single level terminal blocks. 8 Product Selection 8 XBPTT4 customization for each application. The XBPTT25PV and XBPTT4PV terminal blocks have two interconnected levels. Equipotential bonding is marked by an imprint on the housing. These terminal blocks can also be bridged and used to construct compact potential distributor blocks. Spring Cage Connection Double Level Blocks Terminal Width 8 The XBPTT blocks can be bridged on both levels with the Plug-in bridge system and labeling options are available for each terminal point, resulting in maximum Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 420/23/19/24–12 600/20/26–12 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Spring Cage Connection Double Level Blocks 8 5.2 mm 8 6.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/26/28–12 500/32/28–10 420/32/27/24–10 300/30/20–10 8 Gray 50 XBPTT25 Blue 50 XBPTT25BU Gray 50 XBPTT4 Blue 50 XBPTT4BU Spring Cage Connection Double Level Blocks (terminal block with potential distribution between the levels) 8 8 8 XBPTT25PE 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/26/28–12 420/23/19/24–12 600/20/26–12 Gray 50 XBPTT25PV 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/32/28–10 420/32/27/24–10 300/30/20–10 Gray 50 XBPTT4PV Spring Cage Connection Double Level Ground Blocks 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/28–12 —/—/24–12 —/—/26–12 Green/Yellow 50 XBPTT25PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/28–10 —/—/24–10 —/—/20–10 Green/Yellow 50 XBPTT4PE 8 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPTT25), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPTT4). 8 8 V7-T8-44 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Double Level Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPTT25 Catalog Number XBPTT4 Catalog Number XBPTT25PE Catalog Number XBPTT4PE Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACPTT25 XBACPTT4 XBACPTT25 XBACPTT4 Partition plate — — 10/50 XBATPTT4 XBATPTT4 — — Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 — — Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 — — Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF6 1 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF6 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Double Level Blocks 8 Description XBPTT25 XBPTT4 XBPTT25PE XBPTT4PE 8 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 26/4 32/6 — — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 8 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 0.25–2.5 0.25–4 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5–1 0.5 0.5–1 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Double Level Blocks Catalog Number Width Length Cover Width Height for— 35 x 7.5 in 8 35 x 15 in XBPTT25 0.20 (5.2) 2.66 (67.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBPTT4 0.24 (6.2) 3.29 (83.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBPTT25PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.66 (67.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) XBPTT4PE 0.24 (6.2) 3.29 (83.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.87 (47.5) 2.17 (55.0) 8 8 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-45 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Triple Level Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-47 V7-T8-47 V7-T8-47 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 Triple Level Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 8 The spring cage triple level terminal block incorporates three feed-through levels in a 5.2 mm wide housing. This is ideal for high density wiring, especially important 8 Product Selection 8 XBPTK25 8 8 8 when switchgear space is restricted. There is a bridge shaft on each level allowing use of this block as a compact potential distributor or as a sensor terminal. The XBPTK25PV has all six terminal points interconnected. All the triple level blocks can be labeled on each level. Spring Cage Connection Triple Level Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/28/28–12 600/20/26–12 Gray 50 XBPTK25 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/28/28–12 600/20/26–12 Gray 50 XBPTK25PV 1 Note 1 Terminal block with potential distribution between the levels. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-46 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Triple Level Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPTK25 Catalog Number XBPTK25PV Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25K XBACPT25K Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 Blank marker strip (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF5 1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Triple Level Blocks Description XBPTK25 XBPTK25PV 28/4 28/4 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 8 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Triple Level Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPTK25 0.20 (5.2) 3.92 (99.5) 0.09 (2.2) 2.28 (58.0) 2.58 (65.5) XBPTK25PV 0.20 (5.2) 3.92 (99.5) 0.09 (2.2) 2.28 (58.0) 2.58 (65.5) 8 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-47 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-49 V7-T8-50 V7-T8-50 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 The spring cage fuse terminal blocks act as a fuse carrier for 5 x 20 mm or 6.3 x 32 mm fuses. They also allow for potential distribution with the double bridge shaft. For signaling a triggered fuse, fuse terminal blocks with light indicators are available (for both AC and DC voltage). 8 8 8 Product Selection XBPT4FBE Spring Cage Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks, for 5 x 20 mm Fuse 8 Terminal Width 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks 6.2 mm 8 Maximum Wire Size 10 AWG/4 mm2 IEC 60 947-7-3 with Fuse in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnect Terminal Blocks in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 1/1/28–10 250/6.3/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBE 250/6.3/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBEL24 250/6.3/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBEL60 250/6.3/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBEL250 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 15–30V, 3.5–8.1A 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/1/28–10 8 6.2 mm 8 6.2 mm 8 6.2 mm 8 Notes The cartridge fuse holders should be selected according to the maximum power dissipation (self-heating) of the cartridge fuse inserts. The thermal conditions in closed fuse holes should be checked according to the application and installation. Higher ambient temperatures are an additional strain on fuse inserts. In applications of this kind, the shift of the rated current should be taken into consideration accordingly. Maximum power dissipation at 73.4°F (23°C) (in accordance with IEC 60 947-7-3). When selecting cartridge fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified at right is not exceeded. Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. Cartridge Fuse Inserts 5 x 20 and 6.3 x 32 mm in accordance. with IEC 60 947-7-3. Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0A 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/1/28–10 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 110–250V, 0.5–1.0A 8 8 8 1 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/1/28–10 The current is determined by the fuse used, the voltage by the selected light indicator. See Page V7-T8-49. 8 8 V7-T8-48 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series XBPT4FBN Spring Cage Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks, for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 in x 1–1/4 in) Fuse Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size 8 IEC 60 947-7-3 with Fuse in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnect Terminal Blocks in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 400/10/28–10 400/10/28–10 300/10/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBN 400/10/28–10 300/10/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBNL24 8 300/10/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FBNL250 8 8 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 12–30V, 1.0–2.5 mA 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/10/28–10 Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/10/28–10 400/10/28–10 8 8 Accessories 8 8 Spring Cage Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPT4FBE Catalog Number XBPT4FBN Catalog Number 8 8 Partition plate — — 10 XBATPT4 XBATQTD12 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 3 10 XBAFBS36 — 5 10 XBAFBS56 — 10 10 XBAFBS106 — Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF6 1 XBMZBF8 1 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 1 XBMZB6 1 8 8 8 8 Notes The cartridge fuse holders should be selected according to the maximum power dissipation (self-heating) of the cartridge fuse inserts. The thermal conditions in closed fuse holes should be checked according to the application and installation. Higher ambient temperatures are an additional strain on fuse inserts. In applications of this kind, the shift of the rated current should be taken into consideration accordingly. Maximum power dissipation at 73.4°F (23°C) (in accordance with IEC 60 947-7-3). When selecting cartridge fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified at right is not exceeded. Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. Cartridge Fuse Inserts 5 x 20 and 6.3 x 32 mm in accordance. with IEC 60 947-7-3. 1 8 8 8 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-49 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Overload and Short-Circuit Protection 8 8 Terminal Blocks Overload Protection Short-Circuit Protection Only U (V) Individual Interconnected Individual Interconnected Imax. (A) XBPT4FBN 400 1.6W 1.6W 4W 2.5W 10.0 XBPT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W 4W 2.5W 6.3 8 Spring Cage Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Description XBPT4FBE XBPT4FBN 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Fuse type/dimensions in mm2 G/5 x 20 G/6.3 x 32 8 Maximum current with single arrangement in A 6.3 10 1 Maximum Power Dissipation 8 8 8 8 At 73.4°F (23°C) in accordance with IEC 60 947-7-3 in W 1 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 4/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–4/0.25–4 Stranded with twin ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Spring Cage Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks Height for— Catalog Number Width Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT4FBE 0.24 (6.2) 2.42 (61.5) 2.46 (62.5) 2.76 (70.0) XBPT4FBN 0.32 (8.2) 3.01 (76.5) 2.72 (69.0) 3.01 (76.5) Note 1 The current is determined by the fuse used, the voltage by the selected light indicator. See Page V7-T8-49. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-50 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-52 V7-T8-53 V7-T8-53 V7-T8-54 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description The XBPT knife disconnect terminal blocks feature narrow construction and high current carrying capacity. They also have a test connection parallel to the disconnect point for a 2.3 mm diameter test plug. Potential distribution is easily accomplished with the Plugin bridges. There are front connection spring cage terminal blocks available for multi-conductor connections in the smallest possible space. The XBPT4TG disconnect terminal block accommodates component plugs for resistors, diodes, or capacitors, and fuse plugs with or without indication. 8 8 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBPT25MT Knife Disconnect Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 8 Single Level Knife Disconnect 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 400/16/28–12 600/16/26–12 Gray 50 XBPT25MT 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/16/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Gray 50 XBPT4MT 400/16/28–12 600/16/26–12 Gray 50 XBPT25D12MT 400/16/28–12 600/16/26–12 Gray 50 XBPT25D22MT 400/16/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Gray 50 XBPT4TG 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/16/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Gray 10 XBPCO 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/16/28–10 300/6.3/24–10 Black 10 XBPFU 8 300/6.3/24–10 Black 10 XBPFUL24 8 300/6.3/24–10 Black 10 XBPFUL250 8 Three-Wire Knife Disconnect 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 8 Four-Wire Knife Disconnect 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 Spring Cage Disconnect/Component Plug 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 Component Plug 6.2 mm 8 8 Fuse Plug 6.2 mm Fuse Plug with Light Indicator for 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/16/28–10 Fuse Plug with Light Indicator for 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/16/28–10 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-51 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Standard Pack XBPT25MT Catalog Number XBPT25D12MT Catalog Number XBPT25D22MT Catalog Number XBPT4MT Catalog Number XBPT4TG Catalog Number Description Color End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25D12 XBACPT25D22 XBACPT25D22MT 3 3 End cover segment Gray — 10 — XBACPT25 XBACPT25 — — Partition plate — — — XBATPTD12 XBATPTD22 — XBATPT4 XBATPT4 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26 8 8 Number of Positions 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS6 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 XBMZBF6 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB6 2 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 3 XBPT4MT and XBPT4TG have an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-52 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks, XBPT25MT, XBPT25D12MT and XBPT25D22MT Description 8 XBPT25MT XBPT25D12MT XBPT25D22MT 8 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 16/4 16/4 16/4 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 8 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 Spring Cage Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks, XBPT25D12MT and XBPT4TG Description 8 XBPT4MT XBPT4TG Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 16/6 16/6 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 8 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Height for— Length Cover Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 2.38 (60.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) 0.20 (5.2) 2.83 (72.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) 0.20 (5.2) 3.31 (84.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4MT 0.24 (6.2) 2.42 (61.5) — 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT4TG 0.24 (6.2) 2.42 (61.5) — 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) Catalog Number Width XBPT25MT 0.20 (5.2) XBPT25D12MT XBPT25D22MT 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-53 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Hybrid Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-32 V7-T8-37 V7-T8-39 V7-T8-42 V7-T8-44 V7-T8-46 V7-T8-48 V7-T8-51 V7-T8-55 V7-T8-55 V7-T8-55 V7-T8-56 8 8 8 Hybrid Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 The XBPU spring cage hybrid terminal blocks offer the best of both worlds. One side offers a spring cage connection and the other side offers the universal screw connection. Use the spring cage connection on the internal (factory) control cabinet side and the screw connection on the end customer (field) side. Ground terminal blocks of the same shape are also available. Product Selection 8 8 XBPU25D12 8 8 Spring Cage Hybrid Terminal Blocks IEC 60 947-7-1 with … IEC 60 947-7-2 with … UL-cUL Ratings with … Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Spring in V/A/AWG Screw in V/A/AWG Spring in V/A/AWG Screw in V/A/AWG Spring in V/A/AWG Screw in V/A/AWG Color Std. Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/ 2.5 mm2 800/28/28–12 800/28/26–14 — — 600/15/28–12 600/15/26–12 Gray 50 XBPU25D12 Color Std. Pack Catalog Number 50 XBPU25D12PE 8 8 8 XBPU25D12PE Spring Cage Hybrid Ground Blocks IEC 60 947-7-1 with … IEC 60 947-7-2 with … UL-cUL Ratings with … 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Spring in V/A/AWG Screw in V/A/AWG Spring in V/A/AWG Screw in V/A/AWG Spring in V/A/AWG Screw in V/A/AWG 8 5.2 mm 12 AWG/ 2.5 mm2 — — —/—/28–12 —/—/26–14 —/—/28–12 —/—/28–12 Green/ Yellow 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-54 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 Spring Cage Hybrid Terminal/Ground Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPU25D12 Catalog Number XBPU25D12PE Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACPU25D12 XBACPU25D12 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 — 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 — Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 — Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF5 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB5 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Hybrid Blocks 8 Description XBPU25D12 XBPU25D12PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 28/4 — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 8 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1 0.5–1 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Hybrid Blocks Height for— Length Cover Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 0.20 (5.2) 2.57 (65.3) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) 0.20 (5.2) 2.57 (65.3) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) Catalog Number Width XBPU25D12 XBPU25D12PE 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-55 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Mini Spring Cage Description 8 Page Single Level—Through-Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single Level—Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Triple Level Sensor/Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . High Current Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mini Spring Cage Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-5 V7-T8-10 V7-T8-12 V7-T8-14 V7-T8-16 V7-T8-18 V7-T8-21 V7-T8-24 V7-T8-27 V7-T8-57 V7-T8-57 V7-T8-57 8 8 8 Mini Spring Cage 8 Product Description 8 8 The XB miniature terminal blocks have a connection cross-section from 1.5 mm2 through 4 mm2 and mount on 15 mm DIN rail. There is an opening for bridging with a fixed bridge in the center of the terminal blocks. These miniature terminal blocks also offer the same accessories that you would find with the larger blocks—including marking tags, end covers, end stop and ground blocks. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBMPK15 8 Mini Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 14 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/24/26–14 — 600/15/26–14 8 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBMPK15 Blue 50 XBMPK15BU Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 50 XBMPK15PE 8 8 8 XBMPK15PE 8 Mini Spring Cage Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 14 AWG/1.5 mm2 — —/—/26–14 —/—/26–14 8 Green/ Yellow 8 8 8 XBMPKK15 8 Mini Spring Cage Terminal Blocks—Double Level Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 14 AWG/1.5 mm2 500/20/26–14 600/15/26–14 Gray 50 XBMPKK15 8 8 V7-T8-56 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Accessories 8 Mini Spring Cage Terminal/Ground Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBMPK15 Catalog Number XBMPK15PE Catalog Number XBMPKK15 Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACMPK15 XBACMPK15 XBACMPKK15 Fixed bridge — 2 10 XBAFBR25N — XBAFBR25N Separating plate — — 10 XBATMPKK15 — XBATMPKK15 Blank marker strip White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF5 1 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Mini Spring Cage Terminal/Ground Blocks Description 8 XBMPK15 XBMPK15PE XBMPKK15 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 24/2.5 — 20/2.5 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 8 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 — — — 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 Connection Cross-Section Stripping length in Inches (mm) 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Mini Spring Cage Terminal/Ground Blocks 8 Height for— Length Cover Length 15 x 5.5 in 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 1.57 (40.0) 0.04 (1.1) 1.36 (34.5) — — 1.36 (34.5) — — 1.65 (42.0) 1.67 (42.5) 1.97 (50.0) Catalog Number Width XBMPK15 0.20 (5.2) XBMPK15PE 0.20 (5.2) 1.57 (40.0) 0.04 (1.1) XBMPKK15 0.20 (5.2) 3.35 (85.0) 0.04 (1.1) 8 8 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-57 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Pluggable Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Pluggable Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-59 V7-T8-62 V7-T8-64 V7-T8-66 Drawings Online 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Terminal Blocks Overview 8 Product Description Application Description Features The pluggable spring cage connection terminal blocks allow signal and power wiring to be made pluggable. This complete pluggable system has a spring that provides maximum connection space in a space-saving design. The pluggable system accommodates stranded conductors with a nominal cross-section of 2.5 mm2, with or without ferrules. For applications requiring pluggable wiring up to a rated current of 32A and a rated voltage of 800V. The integrated overspring meets the most stringent vibration requirements. Also ideal where safety is a concern and flexibility is required. The basic terminal blocks and the plugs are finger-safe, which also means the supply voltage can be input via either the terminal blocks or the plugs. With the XBAPSC receptacles, plug-in contacts can be accommodated safely in cable ducts and distributor shafts using minimal space. A test hole can accommodate a 2.3 mm diameter test plug in each receptacle, providing a practical solution. The XBAPSP plugs are intended for connecting one wire, while the XBAPSPDB plugs are designed to connect two wires and provide an optional bridge. ● 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 ● ● Standards and Certifications Space-saving design Powerful contact Finger-safe ● ● ● ● Pluggability UL recognized—File No. E67464 CE approved LVD 1: ● EN 60947-7-1 ● EN 60947-7-2 ● EN 60998-2-3 ● EN 60352-4/A1 ATEX approval (Eex e applications) Note 1 Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks. Contact Eaton for details. 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-58 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Connection Terminal Blocks Description Page Connection Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-60 V7-T8-60 V7-T8-61 V7-T8-62 V7-T8-64 V7-T8-66 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Connection Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description Contact to the DIN rail is made by simply snapping the terminal block onto the rail. These blocks act as the stationary position of the pluggable terminal blocks. 8 8 8 Product Selection XBPT25P 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 61 984 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/24/28–12 300/20/26–12 Gray 50 XBPT25P 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/24/28–12 300/20/26–12 Gray 50 XBPT25PD12 8 Single Level 5.2 mm 8 8 Three-Wire 5.2 mm 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-59 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks Standard Pack XBPT25P Catalog Number XBPT25PD12 Catalog Number XBACPT25D12 Description Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACPT25 End cover segment Gray — 10 — XBASPT25 8 Partition plate — — 10 XBATPT4 XBATPTD12 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS505 50 10 XBAFBS505 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 Blank marker strip external labeling White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF5 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB5 2 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks Derating Curve for Pluggable Terminal Blocks Description XBPT25P and XBPT25PD12 XBPT25P XBPT25PD12 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 24/4 24/4 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 8 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 25 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 20 2 pos. 15 pos. 15 10 5 0 8 8 5 pos. 10 pos. Maximum Load Current – A 8 0 20 40 60 80 Ambient Temperature – °C Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-60 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 100 120 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Terminal Blocks—Without Plug 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT25P 0.20 (5.2) 1.91 (48.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) XBPT25PD12 0.20 (5.2) 2.38 (60.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.44 (36.5) 1.73 (44.0) 8 8 8 XBPT25P 8 1.99 (50.5) 8 8 8 2.42 (61.5) 8 8 8 8 8 XBPT25PD12 2.42 (61.5) 8 8 8 8 2.42 (61.5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-61 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Connection Plugs Description 8 Page Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 V7-T8-59 V7-T8-63 V7-T8-63 V7-T8-63 V7-T8-64 V7-T8-66 8 8 8 8 8 8 Connection Plugs 8 Product Description 8 8 Just like the basic terminal blocks, the plugs also offer the perfect solution for every application. The XBAPSP25_ plugs are designed for connecting one conductor. The XBAPSPDB25_ plug is designed for connecting two conductors and provides an additional bridging option. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBAPSP25_ 8 Spring Cage Connection Plugs, Single, Not Bridgeable Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/24/28–12 300/20/26–12 Gray Number of Positions Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 25 XBAPSP251 2 25 XBAPSP252 3 25 XBAPSP253 4 25 XBAPSP254 8 5 25 XBAPSP255 6 25 XBAPSP256 8 7 25 XBAPSP257 8 25 XBAPSP258 9 25 XBAPSP259 10 25 XBAPSP2510 11 10 XBAPSP2511 12 10 XBAPSP2512 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-62 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Spring Cage Connection Plugs, Double, Bridgeable XBAPSPDB25_ 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Number of Positions Standard Pack Catalog Number 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/24/28–12 300/20/26–12 Gray 1 25 XBAPSPDB251 2 25 XBAPSPDB252 3 25 XBAPSPDB253 4 25 XBAPSPDB254 5 25 XBAPSPDB255 6 25 XBAPSPDB256 7 25 XBAPSPDB257 8 25 XBAPSPDB258 9 25 XBAPSPDB259 10 25 XBAPSPDB2510 11 10 XBAPSPDB2511 12 10 XBAPSPDB2512 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Accessories 8 Spring Cage Connection Plugs 8 Description Color Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red Number of Positions Standard Pack XBAPSP25_ Catalog Number XBAPSPDB25_ Catalog Number 8 8 2 10 — XBAFBS25 3 10 — XBAFBS35 5 10 — XBAFBS55 XBAFBS105 10 10 — Snap-lock fitting and strain relief Orange 2 10 XBAPPRZ XBAPPRZ Snap-lock fitting Orange 1 10 XBAPPR XBAPPR Orange 2 10 XBAPPR2 XBAPPR2 Black 2 10 XBAPPZ2 XBAPPDZ2 Black 4 10 XBAPPZ4 XBAPPDZ4 White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 XBMZBF5 1 Strain relief Blank marker strip 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Plugs Description XBAPSP25_ XBAPSPDB25_ 24/4 24/4 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 8 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 See Page V7-T8-61 for dimensions. 8 Notes 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-63 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Connection Receptacles Description 8 Page Connection Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Receptacles Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 V7-T8-59 V7-T8-62 V7-T8-65 V7-T8-65 V7-T8-65 V7-T8-66 8 8 8 8 8 8 Connection Receptacles 8 Product Description 8 8 With the XBAPSC25_, Plug-in contacts can be accommodated safely in cable ducts and distributor shafts without using much space. The standard strain reliefs can also be used. Large-surface labeling makes it possible to mark the terminal points and the entire receptacle. A test hole can accommodate a 2.3 mm diameter test plug in each receptacle element, providing a practical solution. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBAPSC25_ 8 Pluggable Spring Connection Receptacles Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/24/28–12 300/20/26–12 Gray Number of Positions Standard Pack Catalog Number 2 25 XBAPSC252 3 25 XBAPSC253 8 4 25 XBAPSC254 5 25 XBAPSC255 8 6 25 XBAPSC256 7 25 XBAPSC257 8 25 XBAPSC258 9 25 XBAPSC259 10 25 XBAPSC2510 11 10 XBAPSC2511 12 10 XBAPSC2512 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-64 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Accessories 8 Pluggable Spring Connection Receptacles Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBAPSC25_ Catalog Number 2.3 mm diameter test plug Red — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 Strain relief Black 2 10 XBAPPDZ2 Black 4 10 XBAPPDZ4 White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 Blank marker strip 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Spring Cage Connection Plugs Description 8 XBAPSP25_ 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 24/4 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 8 0.25–2.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 8 Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 0.39 (10) 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Spring Cage Connection Plugs 8 Catalog Number Width Length Cover Length Height XBAPSP25_ 0.20 (5.2) 1.46 (37.2) 0.09 (2.2) 0.71 (18.0) 8 8 Receptacle Widths 8 Catalog Number Width Catalog Number Width XBAPSC252 0.41 (10.4) XBAPSC258 1.64 (41.6) XBAPSC253 0.61 (15.6) XBAPSC259 1.84 (46.8) XBAPSC254 0.82 (20.8) XBAPSC2510 2.05 (52.0) XBAPSC255 1.02 (26.0) XBAPSC2511 2.25 (57.2) XBAPSC256 1.23 (31.2) XBAPSC2512 2.46 (62.4) XBAPSC257 1.43 (36.4) 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-65 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Connection Accessories Product Description 8 8 8 8 The pluggable XBPT series features an extensive range of application-oriented accessories. Strain reliefs are available for the plugs and the plug housing as an option and hooks onto the terminal block housing when the plug is snapped on. Product Selection 8 Pluggable Spring Cage Connection Accessories 8 8 can be snapped on at the required points as an option. The snap-lock fitting can be used for all plug variants. It is snapped into the outside of Description XBAPPZ2 Strain relief for single plugs Number of Positions Standard Pack Catalog Number 2 10 XBAPPZ2 4 10 XBAPPZ4 2 10 XBAPPDZ2 4 10 XBAPPDZ4 8 8 8 XBAPPDZ4 Strain relief for double plugs and receptacles 8 8 XBAPPR2 Snap-lock fitting for plugs 8 1 10 XBAPPR 2 10 XBAPPR2 2 10 XBAPPRZ 8 8 XBAPPRZ Snap-lock fitting and strain relief for plugs 8 8 8 Strain Relief Snap-Lock Fitting 8 8 8 8 8 8 Optional Accessory Recommendations 8 8 8 Number of Positions Receptacle Strain Relief 2–4 XBAPPZ2 5–10 XBAPPZ4 or (2) XBAPPZ2 11–15 (2) XBAPPZ4 or (4) XBAPPZ2 8 8 V7-T8-66 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents IDC Terminal Blocks Description Page IDC Terminal Blocks Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-68 V7-T8-70 V7-T8-73 V7-T8-75 V7-T8-77 V7-T8-79 8 8 8 8 Drawings Online 8 8 8 8 8 IDC (Insulation Displacement Connection) Terminal Blocks Overview Product Description The superior design of Eaton’s Insulation Displacement Connection (IDC) technology terminal blocks reduces wiring installation time and labor, especially in high-volume applications. IDC terminal blocks are suited for applications in automated equipment and machine tools, packaging and material handling machinery, railway/ mass transit systems, petrochemical, and any other application requiring highvolume connections for lowvoltage control and signal circuitry where labor cost reduction and ease of assembly is desired. These terminal blocks are designed for long-term use under demanding conditions. The XBQT Series allows for wire to be connected without any prior stripping. The quick connection provides up to 60% reduction in wiring time. One turn of a standard screwdriver results in a simple, fast and reliable connection. Application Description Features The XBQT is operated with a standard screwdriver. The switching states are clearly signaled by engagement points in the start and end positions. Solid and stranded wires of 0.25 to 2.5 mm2 can be wired without the use of ferrules. Stripping the wire is not required—the wire's insulation is cut open when it is properly connected. The wire is securely placed in the end position where it makes large-area, gas-tight contact. Connections are made in seconds! ● ● ● ● ● 8 Quick connection capability Global acceptance Flexible plug-in bridge system Large surface area for marking Standardized testing system Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● UL recognized—File No. E67464 CE approved LVD 1 ● EN 60947-7-1 ● EN 60947-7-2 ● EN 60998-2-3 ● EN 60352-4/A1 ATEX approval (Eex e applications) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Note 1 Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks. Contact Eaton for details. 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-67 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Single Level Description 8 Page Single Level Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-69 V7-T8-69 V7-T8-69 V7-T8-70 V7-T8-73 V7-T8-75 V7-T8-77 V7-T8-79 8 8 8 8 8 Single Level 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 The XBQT IDC terminal block has the fastest connection time in a compact design. The space-saving front connection design offers additional space for wiring between the cable ducts. The double bridge shaft can 8 Product Selection 8 XBQT25 accommodate individual chain bridging and step-down bridging from other terminal blocks. The XBQT ground blocks are the same shape as the feed-through terminal blocks with the same wide range of cross-sections available. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60-947-7-2. IDC—Single Level Terminal Blocks 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 8 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24–16 550/16/24–16 600/10/24–16 8 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/24/20–14 — 600/15/20–14 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBQT15 Blue 50 XBQT15BU Gray 50 XBQT25 Blue 50 XBQT25BU Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 8 8 XBQT15PE 8 8 IDC—Single Level Terminal Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 Green/Yellow 50 XBQT15PE 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/20–14 — —/—/20–14 Green/Yellow 50 XBQT25PE UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U (XBQT15), KEMA 05ATEX2160 U (XBQT25). 8 8 8 V7-T8-68 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Accessories 8 IDC—Single Level Terminal/Ground Blocks XBQT25 Catalog Number XBQT15PE Catalog Number XBQT25PE Catalog Number 8 Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBQT15 Catalog Number End cover Gray — 10 XBACQT15 XBACQT25 XBACQT15 XBACQT25 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 Plug-in bridge Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 8 8 8 8 8 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 IDC—Single Level Terminal/Ground Blocks Description XBQT15 XBQT25 XBQT15PE XBQT25PE 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 17.5/1.5 24/2.5 — — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I 8 Core insulation PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE 8 Single/multiple/fine strand in mm2 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 Halogen-free in mm2 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 8 Connection Cross-Section Fine strand/superfine strand in AWG (mm2) Repeated connections minimum 100 x in mm2 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 IDC—Single Level Terminal/Ground Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBQT15 0.20 (5.2) 2.31 (58.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT25 0.24 (6.2) 2.46 (62.6) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT15PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.31 (58.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT25PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.46 (62.6) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-69 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Multi-Conductor Description 8 Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-68 V7-T8-71 V7-T8-72 V7-T8-72 V7-T8-73 V7-T8-75 V7-T8-77 V7-T8-79 8 8 8 8 8 Multi-Conductor 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 8 8 The XBQT IDC terminal block has the fastest connection time in a compact design. The space-saving front connection design offers additional space for wiring between the cable ducts. The double bridge shaft can accommodate individual chain bridging and step-down bridging from other terminal blocks. The XBQT ground blocks are the same shape as the feed-through terminal blocks with the same wide range of cross-sections available. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60-947-7-2. Product Selection XBQT25D12 8 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Three-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24–16 550/16/24–16 600/10/24–16 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/24/20–14 — 600/15/20–14 8 8 XBQT15D22PE Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBQT15D12 Blue 50 XBQT15D12BU Gray 50 XBQT25D12 Blue 50 XBQT25D12BU Color Standard Pack Catalog Number IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Four-Wire 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 8 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24–16 550/16/24–16 600/10/24–16 Gray 50 XBQT15D22 Blue 50 XBQT15D22BU Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Four-Wire Ground Blocks 8 8 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 Green/Yellow 50 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U (XBQT15), KEMA 05ATEX2160 U (XBQT25). 8 V7-T8-70 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com XBQT15D22PE 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks, Three-Wire Ground Blocks XBQT15D12PE 8 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 Green/Yellow 50 XBQT15D12PE 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/20–14 — —/—/20–14 Green/Yellow 50 XBQT25D12PE Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 8 8 8 Accessories 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBQT15D12 Catalog Number XBQT25D12 Catalog Number 8 XBQT15D22 Catalog Number 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACQT15D12 XBACQT25D12 XBACQT15D22 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASQT15 XBASQT25 XBASQT15 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD22 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS505 Test adapter — 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2 8 8 8 8 XBATSPAI4 2 8 2 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF5 3 XBMZBF6 3 XBMZBF5 3 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 3 XBMZB6 3 XBMZB5 3 8 XBATSMPS-_ XBATSMPS-_ 8 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal/Ground Blocks Standard Pack XBQT15D12PE Catalog Number XBQT25D12PE Catalog Number XBQT15D22PE Catalog Number Description Color Number of Positions End cover Gray — 10 XBACQT15D12 XBACQT25D12 XBACQT15D22 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASQT15 XBASQT25 XBASQT15 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD22 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 2 XBATSMPS-_ 2 XBATSMPS-_ 2 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF5 3 XBMZBF6 3 XBMZBF5 3 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 3 XBMZB6 3 XBMZB5 3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U (XBQT15PE), KEMA 05ATEX2160 U (XBQT25PE). 2 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 3 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-71 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 8 8 8 Description XBQT15D12 XBQT25D12 XBQT15D12PE XBQT25D12PE XBQT15D22 XBQT15D22PE Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 17.5/1.5 24/2.5 — — 17.5/1.5 — Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I Connection Cross-Section Core insulation PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE Single/multiple/fine strand in mm2 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 Halogen-free in mm2 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 Fine strand/superfine strand in AWG (mm2) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Repeated connections minimum 100 x in mm2 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 IDC—Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 8 XBQT15D12 0.20 (5.2) 3.01 (76.4) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT25D12 0.24 (6.2) 3.25 (82.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQT15D12PE 0.20 (5.2) 3.01 (76.4) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT25D12PE 0.20 (5.2) 3.25 (82.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQT15D22 0.20 (5.2) 3.70 (94.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT15D22PE 0.20 (5.2) 3.70 (94.0) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-72 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Double Level Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-68 V7-T8-70 V7-T8-74 V7-T8-74 V7-T8-74 V7-T8-75 V7-T8-77 V7-T8-79 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Double Level 8 Product Description The XBQTT IDC terminal block has the fastest connection time in a compact design. The space-saving front connection design offers additional space for wiring between the cable ducts. The double bridge shaft, found in each level, can accommodate individual chain bridging and step-down bridging from other terminal blocks. The XBQTT ground blocks are the same shape as the feed-through terminal blocks with the same wide range of cross-sections available. They easily snap onto the DIN rail to make a reliable mechanical and electrical contact that meets all requirements of IEC 60-947-7-2. 8 8 8 8 8 Product Selection XBQTT15 8 IDC—Double Level Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24–16 420/15/24–16 600/10/24–16 Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 Gray 50 XBQTT15 Blue 50 XBQTT15BU 8 Color 8 8 XBQTT15PE 8 IDC—Double Level Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 —/—/24–16 Green/Yellow 50 Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 XBQTT15PE 8 8 8 Note 1 EU type—examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U (XBQT15), KEMA 05ATEX2160 U (XBQT25). 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-73 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 IDC—Double Level Terminal/Ground Blocks Standard Pack XBQTT15 Catalog Number XBQTT15PE Catalog Number Description Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACQTT15 XBACQTT15 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQTT15 XBATQTT15 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 20 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 8 8 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 Blank marker strip White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF5 2 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications IDC—Double Level Terminal/Ground Blocks Description XBQTT15 XBQTT15PE — 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 17.5/1.5 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 8 8 8 Connection Cross-Section Core insulation PVC/PE PVC/PE Single/multiple/fine strand in mm2 1.5 1.5 Halogen-free in mm2 1.5 1.5 Fine strand/superfine strand in AWG (mm2) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Repeated connections minimum 100 x in mm2 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 IDC—Double Level Terminal/Ground Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 8 XBQTT15 0.20 (5.2) 3.92 (99.6) 0.09 (2.2) 1.96 (49.9) 2.26 (57.4) XBQTT15PE 0.20 (5.2) 3.92 (99.6) 0.09 (2.2) 1.96 (49.9) 2.26 (57.4) 8 8 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-74 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-68 V7-T8-70 V7-T8-73 V7-T8-76 V7-T8-76 V7-T8-76 V7-T8-77 V7-T8-79 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description The XBQT lever-type fuse terminal blocks perform two main functions. It is a carrier for a 5 x 20 mm cartridge fuse insert and can also allow for potential distribution via the double bridge shaft. This means that two potentials can be carried separately alongside each other. Versions with light indication (AC and DC voltage) are available to signal a triggered fuse. 8 8 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBQT25FB IDC—Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size 8 Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 1/6.3/20–14 300/15/20–14 Black 50 XBQT25FBE 300/15/20–14 Black 50 XBQT25FBEL24 8 300/15/20–14 Black 50 XBQT25FBEL60 8 300/15/20–14 Black 50 XBQT25FBEL250 8 8 IDC Fuse Terminal Blocks 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 IDC Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 1/6.3/20–14 IDC Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 30–60V, 0.8–2.0 mA 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 1/6.3/20–14 IDC Fuse Terminal Blocks with LED 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 1/6.3/20–14 8 8 Note 1 As disconnect terminal block, 400V; as fuse terminal blocks 250V. 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-75 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 IDC—Fuse Terminal Blocks Standard Pack XBQT25FBE Catalog Number XBACQT25D12 Description Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQTD12 8 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 10 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS106 XBATSPAI4 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 8 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 8 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF6 2 Blank marker strip lever labeling White — 10 XBMZB5 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB6 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications IDC—Fuse Terminal Blocks Description XBQT25FBE Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 6.3/2.5 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 4/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I Connection Cross-Section 8 Core insulation PVC/PE Single/multiple/fine strand in mm2 2.5 8 Halogen-free in mm2 2.5 Fine strand/superfine strand in AWG (mm2) 24–14 (—) 8 8 Repeated connections minimum 100 x in mm2 0.5–2.5 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 IDC—Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 8 XBQT25FBE 0.24 (6.2) 3.25 (82.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-76 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-68 V7-T8-70 V7-T8-73 V7-T8-75 V7-T8-78 V7-T8-78 V7-T8-78 V7-T8-79 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description The XB Series includes application specific terminal blocks like disconnect blocks. The knife disconnect terminal blocks (XBQT15MT) has a fitted knife. The XBQT15TG can accommodate component plugs for resistors or capacitors and fuse plugs for 5 x 20 mm fuses with or without a light indicator for signaling a triggered fuse. Both terminal blocks have three bridge shafts—two in the standard positions and one on the other side of the disconnect point. 8 8 8 8 Product Selection XBQT15MT Knife Disconnect 8 IDC—Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size UL-cUL Ratings for Disconnect with Test Sockets in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings for Disconnect in V/A/AWG 400/16/24–16 600/10/24–16 — — Gray 50 XBQT15MT Knife Disconnect 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 Component Disconnect 8 8 8 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 400/16/24–16 600/10/24–16 — — Gray 50 XBQT15TG 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 400/16/20–14 300/10/20–14 — — Gray 50 XBQT25TG 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 — 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Gray 10 XBPCO 8 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 — 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Black 10 XBPFU 8 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Black 10 XBPFUL24 600/16/26–10 300/16/26–10 Black 10 XBPFUL250 Component Plug 6.2 mm Fuse Plug 6.2 mm Fuse Plug with Light Indicator for 12–30V, 1–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 — 8 Fuse Plug with Light Indicator for 110–250V, 0.5–2.5 mA 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/16/26–10 — 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-77 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 IDC—Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Number of Positions Standard Pack XBQT15MT Catalog Number XBQT15TG Catalog Number XBQT25TG Catalog Number XBACQT25D12 Description Color 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACQT15D12 XBACQT15D12 End cover segment Gray — 10 XBASQT15 XBASQT15 XBASQT25 8 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 Plug-in bridge Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 8 8 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS5 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications IDC—Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Description XBQT15MT XBQT15TG XBQT25TG Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 16/1.5 16/1.5 16/2.5 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 6/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Connection Cross-Section 8 Core insulation PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE Single/multiple/fine strand in mm2 1.5 1.5 2.5 8 Halogen-free in mm2 1.5 1.5 2.5 Fine strand/superfine strand in AWG (mm2) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 8 8 Repeated connections minimum 100 x in mm2 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 IDC—Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks 8 Catalog Number Length Cover Length Height for— Width 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in 8 XBQT15MT 0.20 (5.2) 3.01 (76.4) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) XBQT15TG 0.20 (5.2) 3.01 (76.4) 0.09 (2.2) 1.55 (39.3) 1.84 (46.8) 8 XBQT25TG 0.24 (6.2) 3.25 (82.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 V7-T8-78 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Hybrid Terminal Blocks Description Page Single Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Conductor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Double Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks . . . . Hybrid Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-68 V7-T8-70 V7-T8-73 V7-T8-75 V7-T8-77 V7-T8-80 V7-T8-81 V7-T8-81 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Hybrid Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description The XBQT hybrid terminal blocks offer the best of both worlds. One side offers the time-saving advantage of our insulation displacement connection technology, while the other side offers a universal screw connection. Use the IDC side on the internal (factory) control cabinet side and the screw connection on the end customer (field) side. Ground terminal blocks of the same shape are also available 8 8 8 Product Selection XBQU25 8 IDC—Hybrid Terminal Blocks, Single Level Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC Screw Connection in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/17.5/26–12 800/17.5/24–16 600/10/26–12 600/10/24–16 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/24/26–10 800/24/20–14 600/15/26–10 600/15/20–14 IEC IDC Connection in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Screw Connection in V/A/AWG UL-cUL IDC Connection in V/A/AWG 8 Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 Gray 50 XBQU15 Gray 50 XBQU25 8 Color 8 XBQU15D12 8 IDC—Hybrid Terminal Blocks, Three-Wire Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC Screw Connection in V/A/AWG IEC IDC Connection in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Screw Connection in V/A/AWG UL-cUL IDC Connection in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/17.5/26–12 800/17.5/24–16 800/10/26–12 800/10/24–16 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/24/26–10 800/24/20–14 600/15/26–10 600/15/20–14 8 Color Standard Pack Catalog Number Gray 50 XBQU15D12 Gray 50 XBQU25D12 8 8 8 XBQU25PE 8 IDC—Hybrid Terminal/Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC Screw Connection in V/A/AWG IEC IDC Connection in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Screw Connection in V/A/AWG UL-cUL IDC Connection in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 —/—/26–12 —/—/24–16 —/—/26–12 —/—/24–16 Gray 50 XBQU15PE 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 —/—/26–10 —/—/20–14 —/—/26–10 —/—/20–14 Gray 50 XBQU25PE 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-79 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 IDC—Hybrid Terminal Blocks Standard Pack XBQU15 Catalog Number XBQU25 Catalog Number XBQU15D12 Catalog Number XBQU25D12 Catalog Number XBACQU25D12 Description Color Number of Positions 8 End cover Gray — 10 XBACQU15 XBACQU25 XBACQU15D12 End segment Gray — 10 — — XBASQT15 XBASQT25 8 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 8 8 8 8 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 8 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 8 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 XBQU15PE Catalog Number XBQU25PE Catalog Number XBACQU25 8 IDC—Hybrid Terminal/Ground Blocks 8 8 8 8 Description Color Number of Positions End cover Gray — 10 XBACQU15 Partition plate — — 10 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 Plug-in bridge—for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 10 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 10 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 10 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 8 Standard Pack 50 10 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 8 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS5 XBATSPS6 8 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF5 2 XBMZBF6 2 8 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) XBMZB5 2 XBMZB6 2 8 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 8 For additional accessories, see Page V7-T8-90. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-80 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Technical Data and Specifications 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed Description XBQU15 XBQU25 XBQU15PE XBQU25PE XBQU15D12 XBQU25D12 Maximum load current in A/cross-section in mm2 17.5/1.5 24/2.5 — — 17.5/1.5 24/2.5 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 8/3 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I III/I 8 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC 8 8 Connection Cross-Section Core insulation PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE PVC/PE Single/multiple/fine strand in mm2 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 Halogen-free in mm2 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 Fine strand/superfine strand in AWG (mm2) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 24–16 (0.25–0.34) 20–14 (—) 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.25–1.5 0.5–2.5 8 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 0.25–2.5/0.25–2.5 0.25–4/0.25–4 8 Repeated connections minimum 100 x in mm2 8 8 Connection Capacity—Screw Connection Stranded with ferrule/with ferrule and plastic sleeve in mm2 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) Solid/stranded in mm2 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.5–1.5 0.5–2.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 0.14–1.5/0.14–1.5 8 8 8 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) 0.35 (9) Thread M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 M3 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 5.3–7.1 (0.6–0.8) 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Screw Connection Single Level—Through-Feed 8 Catalog Number Width Length Cover Width Height for— 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBQU15 0.20 (5.2) 2.31 (58.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQU25 0.24 (6.2) 2.46 (62.6) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQU15PE 0.20 (5.2) 2.31 (58.8) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQU25PE 0.24 (6.2) 2.46 (62.6) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQU15D12 0.20 (5.2) 3.01 (76.4) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) XBQU25D12 0.24 (6.2) 3.25 (82.5) 0.09 (2.2) 1.69 (42.8) 1.98 (50.3) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-81 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Miniature Circuit Breakers Description 8 Miniature Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Miniature Circuit Breakers Overview 8 Product Description 8 8 8 8 8 8 The new XB Series thermal miniature circuit breaker offers convenient overload protection. This space-saving single-pole circuit breaker, available up to 10 amps, can be inserted into a screw connection fuse terminal block, XBUK6FSI, or a spring cage fuse terminal block, XBPT4FSI, which is available with or without light indication. The XBATCP combines the Standards and Certifications reclosing capability of a circuit breaker with the overload protection of a fuse. The integrated switching function makes it possible to switch the circuit breaker back on immediately, guaranteeing system availability. The device can also be used for switching purposes, as an ON/OFF switch. The Plug-in design allows for quick and efficient replacement. ● ● ● UL and cUL recognized UL 1077—File No. E301915 CE approved 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-82 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T8-83 V7-T8-86 V7-T8-88 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Contents Circuit Breakers Description Circuit Breakers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Time/Current Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 8 8 V7-T8-84 V7-T8-84 V7-T8-85 V7-T8-85 V7-T8-86 V7-T8-88 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Circuit Breakers 8 Product Description The thermal miniature circuit breaker can be switched back on again, has a compact design, and is available in 10 finely graded steps for nominal currents from 0.1 to 10A. 8 8 8 Product Selection XBAT 8 Thermal Miniature Circuit Breaker Connection Data in Vac/Vdc 250/65 Nominal Current Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 8 0.1A Black 20 XBATCPT 0.25A Black 20 XBATCPQ 0.5A Black 20 XBATCPH 1.0A Black 20 XBATCP1 2.0A Black 20 XBATCP2 3.0A Black 20 XBATCP3 4.0A Black 20 XBATCP4 6.0A Black 20 XBATCP6 8.0A Black 20 XBATCP8 10.0A Black 20 XBATCP10 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-83 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Accessories 8 Thermal Miniature Circuit Breaker 8 8 Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBAT Catalog Number Blank marker strip White — 10 XBMZBF5 1 Flat type terminal blocks — — — XBUK6FSI 8 XBUK6FSIL12 8 XBPT4FSI XBUK6FSIL24 XBPT4FSIL12 8 XBPT4FSIL24 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Thermal Miniature Circuit Breaker Description XBAT Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Nominal voltage in Vac/Vdc 250/65 Nominal current in A 0.25–10 Ambient temperature –4 to 140°F (–20 to 60°C) Maximum Power Dissipation Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 2.5/2 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I Switching Capacity Cycles with 1 x IN (low-induction) 6000 Cycles with 1 x IN (induction) 3000 Cycles with 2 x IN (induction) 500 8 Switching Capacity I CN 8 Switching capacity (UL 1077) 250 Vac/65 Vdc 6 x IN/8 x IN For nominal currents of 0.25–4A/6–10A 2000/200 8 8 Nominal Currents and Internal Resistances Nominal Current (A) Internal Resistance (3/4) 0.25 14 0.5 3.4 1.0 0.9 2.0 0.25 3.0 0.11 4.0 0.07 8 6.0 <0.05 8.0 <0.05 8 10.0 <0.05 8 Note 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-84 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Time/Current Curve 8 Total Switch-Off Period for Nominal Current, 73.4°F (23°C) 0.25A - 4A 6A- 10A 8 Temperature Factor 1000 Response Time in Seconds 8 Note: When mounted in rows, the nominal current of the devices can only be transmitted at 80% or must be correspondingly over-dimensioned. 10,000 100 Ambient Temperature Temperature Factor –4°F (–20°C) 0.76 14°F (–10°C) 0.84 32°F (0°C) 0.91 73.4°F (23°C) 1.00 104°F (40°C) 1.08 122°F (50°C) 1.16 140°F (60°C) 1.24 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 10 8 8 8 1 8 8 0.1 0.8 1 2 3 4 5 6 Multiples of IN 8 10 8 20 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) XBUK6FSI with XBAT XBPT4FSI with XBAT 2.52 (64) 0.96 (24.4) 8 3.41 (86.5) 0.32 (8.2) 0.96 (24.4) 0.32 (8.2) 8 8 8 1.75 (44.5) 8 3.39 (86.2) 8 8 1.93 (49) 2.03 (51.5) 1.73 (44) 8 1.72 (43.7) 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-85 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 V7-T8-83 V7-T8-86 V7-T8-87 V7-T8-87 V7-T8-88 8 8 8 8 8 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 The fuse terminal blocks can be used as a basic terminal blocks for the XBAT overload miniature circuit breaker, see Page V7-T8-83. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBUK6FSI Screw Connection Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 250/—/24–8 300/30/26–8 Black 50 XBUK6FSI 300/30/26–8 Black 50 XBUK6FSIL12 300/30/26–8 Black 50 XBUK6FSIL24 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Block 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Block with LED, Red 12 Vdc, 2.0 mA 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 250/—/24–8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Block with LED, Red 24 Vdc, 2.0 mA 8 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 250/—/24–8 8 8 Accessories 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 8 8 Description Color Number of Positions Blank marker strip White — Standard Pack XBUK6FSI Catalog Number XBUK6FSIL_ Catalog Number 10 XBMZB8 1 XBMZB8 1 Note 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 8 8 V7-T8-86 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 XBUK6FSI XBUK6FSIL_ Fuse type ISO C C Maximum current with single arrangement in A 30 30 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 4/3 4/3 8 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 8 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–6 0.25–6 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 — — Solid/stranded in mm2 0.2–2.5/0.2–2.5 0.2–2.5/0.2–2.5 Stranded with ferrules without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–2.5 0.25–2.5 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5–4.0 0.5–4.0 Stripping length in inches (mm) 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) Thread M4 M4 Torque in in-lb (Nm) 13.3–14.2 (1.5–1.6) 13.3–14.2 (1.5–1.6) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum Power Dissipation Connection Capacity 8 Multi-Conductor Connection (same cross-section) 8 8 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Height for— Catalog Number Width Length 32 in 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBUK6FSI 0.32 (8.2) 2.91 (74.0) 2.24 (57.0) 2.05 (52.0) 2.34 (59.5) XBUK6FSIL12 0.32 (8.2) 2.91 (74.0) 2.24 (57.0) 2.05 (52.0) 2.34 (59.5) XBUK6FSIL24 0.32 (8.2) 2.91 (74.0) 2.24 (57.0) 2.05 (52.0) 2.34 (59.5) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-87 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 Page Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 V7-T8-83 V7-T8-86 V7-T8-88 V7-T8-89 V7-T8-89 8 8 8 8 8 8 Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Product Description 8 8 Flat-type fuses or the XBAT miniature circuit breaker (see Page V7-T8-83) can be used as the fuse element in these XBPT Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks with a light indicator are available for quick error diagnosis. 8 8 Product Selection 8 XBPT4FSI Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width 8 Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color Standard Pack Catalog Number 400/30/28–10 300/30/24–10 Black 50 XBPT4FSI Black 50 XBPT4FSIL12 Black 50 XBPT4FSIL24 Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Block 8 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Block with LED, Red 12 Vdc, 2.0 mA 8 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/30/28–10 300/30/24–10 Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Block with LED, Red 24 Vdc, 2.0 mA 8 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/30/28–10 300/30/24–10 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Accessories Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description Color Number of Positions Standard Pack XBPT4FSI Catalog Number XBPT4FSIL_ Catalog Number Test adapter — — 10 XBATSPAI4 XBATSPAI4 2.3 mm diameter test plug — — — XBATSMPS-_ 1 XBATSMPS-_ 1 Modular test plug — — 10 XBATSPS8 XBATSPS8 Blank marker strip center and external marking White — 10 XBMZBF8 2 XBMZBF8 2 Blank marker strip center labeling (strip of 10) White — 10 XBMZB8 2 XBMZB8 2 Notes 1 For ordering information, see Page V7-T8-105. 2 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V7-T8-98. 8 V7-T8-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Description 8 XBPT4FSI XBPT4FSIL_ Fuse type ISO C C Maximum current with single arrangement in A 30 30 8 Rated surge voltage in kV/contamination class 6/3 6/3 8 Surge voltage category/insulating material group III/I III/I 8 Stranded with ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 8 Stranded with ferrule without plastic sleeve in mm2 0.25–4 0.25–4 Stranded with twin ferrule with plastic sleeve in mm2 0.5 0.5 0.39 (10) 0.39 (10) 8 Technical Data in Accordance with IEC Maximum Power Dissipation Connection Capacity Stripping length in inches (mm) 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks 8 Height for— Catalog Number Width Length 35 x 7.5 in 35 x 15 in XBPT4FSI 0.32 (8.2) 3.41 (86.5) 1.71 (43.5) 2.01 (51.0) XBPT4FSIL12 0.32 (8.2) 3.41 (86.5) 1.71 (43.5) 2.01 (51.0) XBPT4FSIL24 0.32 (8.2) 3.41 (86.5) 1.71 (43.5) 2.01 (51.0) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-89 8.1 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Contents XB Series Accessories Description 8 Page XB Series Accessories End Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIN Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferrules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marking Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separating Plates, Covers and Bridges . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-91 V7-T8-92 V7-T8-93 V7-T8-94 V7-T8-97 V7-T8-98 V7-T8-105 V7-T8-105 8 8 8 8 8 XB Series Accessories Overview 8 End Stops Angled Mounting Brackets Hand Tools Marking Accessories The end stop provides an anchor point at each end of the rail assembly by attaching directly to the DIN rail. A wide range of end stop options are available, including those that mount with one or multiple screws and those that do not require screws for mounting. End stops also have a location for marking material to be placed. Angled mounting brackets are used to mount DIN rail at a more accessible angle for wiring and troubleshooting. Eaton offers an array of hand tools to make it easier to work with our terminal blocks. The XBTCUTSTP tool is recommended for cutting and stripping PVC insulated wires. The ergonomically shaped crimping pliers, XBTCRMP66, result in fatigue-free work by spreading the manual force equally between the six jaws. The XBTDVR screwdrivers have a rotating cap that prevents user discomfort even at high torques and allows rapid rotation. The ergonomically shaped handle further aids the user’s comfort. The blade is made from CVM steel, hardened and chrome-plated. The marking system provides logical and clear identification of the modular terminal blocks and interface modules. The blank marker strip is designed for marking terminal blocks, equipment and smaller modules with marker grooves. The marker strip is available in all common pitches in printed and unprinted versions. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 DIN Rail Eaton offers ways for timesaving and secure mounting of components needed for electrical connections. DIN rail provides the basis for the inner design of the control cabinet and ensures a firm hold of the rail-mountable components. Eaton offers a wide range of standard DIN rails sizes and materials, solid or slotted. Or, contact us about custom lengths of pre-cut rail or ordering predrilled rail. The DIN rails are designed in accordance with the European standard EN 60715. Ferrules Ferrules are available with or without an insulating sleeve. The plastic insulating sleeve simplifies the fitting of the conductor and the color indicates the size of the cross-section. The closer the connections are, the more reliable the insulation is and the less likely the wires are to splice. Twin ferrules are also available allowing two wires to be easily compressed in one ferrule. Chain bridging, frequently used in industry, becomes easier with twin ferrules. Testing Accessories The range of test accessories available includes different test plugs, so that an optimum solution can be realized for every application. In addition to pre-assembled test plugs, plugs are also available that can be configured individually to form test adapters. 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-90 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series End Stops 8 Product Selection XBAES35AL Universal End Stop (15 mm) Aluminum End Standard Pack Catalog Number Standard Pack Catalog Number Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 50 XBAES15N 50 XBAES15C 10 XBAES35AL 8 Snap-On End Stop (35 mm) Universal End Stop (35 mm) Standard Pack Catalog Number Standard Pack Catalog Number 50 XBAES35N 50 XBAES35T 50 XBAES35C XBAES35C XBAES35T 8 Snap-On End Stop (15 mm) Snap-on end stops for 35 mm and 15 mm DIN rails can be fitted with blank marker strips and adjustable terminal strip markers, parking facility for bridges and testing accessories. Snaps on, for end support of 50–240 mm terminal blocks, labeling with XBMZB10. 8 8 8 Screwed on, labeling with blank marker strips and terminal strip markers. 8 8 Cross-Reference of Terminal Blocks Marking, End Stops 8 Catalog Number XBMKLM2 XBMGLMA XBMUBE XBAES35N X — — XBAES35T — X X 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Snap-On End Stop XBAES35N XBAES15N 1.91 (48.5) 1.38 (35) 0.98 (24.8) 0.87 (22) Aluminum End Stop 8 XBAES35AL 8 2.32 (59) 0.20 (5.2) 8 8 1.73 (44) 0.89 (22.6) 8 8 0.20 (5) 8 0.39 (10) 8 8 Universal End Stop XBAES35T 8 XBAES15C XBAES35C 0.83 (21.2) 1.91 (48.6) 1.99 (50.5) 8 8 0.71 (18) 1.39 (35.3) 1.29 (32.8) 8 0.24 (6.1) 8 0.37 (9.5) 8 0.37 (9.5) 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-91 8.1 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series DIN Rails Product Selection 8 8 Perforated and unperforated DIN rails in accordance with E 60715. 35 x 7.5 mm x 2m 15 x 5.5 mm x 2m Standard Pack Standard Pack Catalog Number Features Slotted 25 XBANS15P ● 8 ● 8 ● 8 ● ● High dimensional accuracy Restricted tolerances Double surface tempering, galvanized and chromated All 2m in length Customization available 8 25 Catalog Number XBANS3575P Solid 25 XBANS3575U 35 x 15 mm x 2m Standard Pack 25 8 25 Standard Pack Catalog Number 35/7.5/2m Catalog Number 25 XBANS3575PL 35/58/2m Slotted 8 Aluminum DIN Rails (Perforated) XBANS3515P 6 XBANS35PL Solid XBANS3515U 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 35 x 7.5 mm DIN Rail 8 8 35 x 15 mm DIN Rail 0.04 (1) 0.30 (7.5) 1.06 (27) 8 0.24 (6.2) 0.03 (0.8) Rad. 0.59 (15) 15° 0.05 (1.25) Rad. 1.06 (27) 0.41 (10.5) 0.01 (0.2) Rad. 0.02 (0.5) Rad. XBANS35PL Raised Rail 0.08 (2) 2.28 (58) 1.89 (48) 1.02 (26) 0.48 (12.2) 0.59 (15) 0.98 (25) 0.79 (20) 1.02 (26) 5.00 (127) 0.98 (25) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-92 0.95 (24) 1.38 (35) 0.17 (4.2) 0.59 (15) 8 0.59 (15) 0.22 (5.5) 0.05 (1.25) Rad. 0.24 (6.2) 8 0.04 (1) 1.38 (35) 8 8 0.03 (0.8) 0.06 (1.5) 1.38 (35) 0.03 (0.8) Rad. 15 x 5.5 mm x 2m DIN Rail Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Angled Mounting Brackets 8 Product Selection The angled brackets enable the DIN rail to be mounted with a spacing or at an angle of 30°. Features ● ● ● ● For mounting DIN rail at 30° angle For use with M6 screw Chromated steel Provides better visibility 8 Angled Mounting Bracket Standard Pack 8 Catalog Number Height Inches (mm) 1.39 (35.4) 8 10 8 XBANBGS Height Inches (mm) 1.81 (46) 10 8 XBANBGSH 8 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 XBANBGS 8 XBANBGSH 0.61 (15.4) 0.65 (16.5) 3.43 (87) M6 Screw 8 3.31 (84) M6 Screw 8 2.44 (62) 2.54 (64.5) 8 30° 30° 0.08 (2) 1.39 (35.4) 8 0.54 (13.7) 0.55 (14) 0.79 (20) 0.28 (7) Dia. 0.08 (2) 1.81 (46) 0.79 (20) 8 0.28 (7) Dia. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-93 8.1 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Ferrules Product Selection 8 Ferrules are offered in two basic designs—an insulated style available in models for wire sizes 20 through 4 AWG and a non-insulated type available in models for wire sizes 22 through 6 AWG. 8 Insulated 8 8 8 8 ● ● Note: UL Ratings do not typically pertain to the use of Ferrules— Ferrules are covered under DIN VDE 0611. Non-Insulated Tube: soft electrolytic copper (E-CU), tin plated Plastic sleeve: polypropylene ● Long-term temperature 105°C ● Short-term temperature 120°C 8 ● Tube: soft electrolytic copper (E-CU), tin plated XBAF20 Insulated Ferrules Non-Insulated Ferrules Wire Size AWG (mm2) Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number 20 (0.5) 100 XBAF20 Catalog Number 18 (0.75) 100 XBAF21 Color 1 Standard Pack 2 18 (1) 100 XBAF23 20 (0.5) White 100 XBAF1 16 (1.5) 100 XBAF24 18 (0.75) Gray 100 XBAF3 14 (2.5) 100 XBAF25 18 (1) Red 100 XBAF4 12 (4) 100 XBAF26 16 (1.5) Black 100 XBAF6 10 (6) 100 XBAF27 14 (2.5) Blue 100 XBAF9 8 (10) 100 XBAF28 8 14 (2.5) Blue 100 XBAF10 6 (16) 100 XBAF29 12 (4) Gray 100 XBAF11 8 12 (4) Gray 100 XBAF12 10 (6) Yellow 100 XBAF13 Special Applications 10 (6) Yellow 100 XBAF14 8 8 (10) Red 100 XBAF15 8 (10) Red 100 XBAF16 The twin ferrules allow two conductors to be compressed practically in one ferrule. 8 6 (16) Blue 100 XBAF17 6 (16) Blue 100 XBAF18 4 (25) Yellow 50 XBAF19 XBAF1 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Wire Size AWG (mm2) XBAFT1 The colored coding of the various cross sections corresponds to DIN 46 228-4. Non-Insulated Twin Ferrules Wire Size AWG (mm2) Color 1 Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number 20 (0.5) 18 (0.75) White 100 XBAFT1 Gray 100 XBAFT3 8 18 (1) Red 100 XBAFT4 16 (1.5) Black 100 XBAFT6 8 14 (2.5) Blue 100 XBAFT9 12 (4) Gray 100 XBAFT11 10 (6) Yellow 100 XBAFT13 8 (10) Red 100 XBAFT15 6 (16) Blue 50 XBAFT18 8 8 8 Notes 1 The colored coding of the various cross-sections corresponds to DIN 46 228-4. 2 Standard pack is the number of ferrules that come in each bag. Must order in multiples of standard pack. Example: XBAF1—an order for 200 pieces will receive 2 bags of ferrules, each with 100 pieces. 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-94 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8.1 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Ferrules with Insulating Collar 8 8 L1 L2 S1 8 D1 D2 8 S2 8 Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions D1 D2 L1 L2 S1 S2 XBAF1 0.04 (1.1) 0.10 (2.5) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAF3 0.05 (1.3) 0.11 (2.8) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAF4 0.06 (1.5) 0.12 (3.0) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF6 0.07 (1.8) 0.13 (3.4) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF9 0.09 (2.3) 0.17 (4.2) 0.55 (14.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF10 0.09 (2.3) 0.17 (4.2) 0.94 (24.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF11 0.11 (2.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.67 (17.0) 0.39 (10.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF12 0.11 (2.8) 0.19 (4.8) 1.02 (26.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF13 0.14 (3.5) 0.24 (6.2) 0.79 (20.0) 0.47 (12.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF14 0.14 (3.5) 0.24 (6.2) 1.02 (26.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF15 0.18 (4.6) 0.30 (7.5) 0.87 (22.0) 0.47 (12.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF16 0.18 (4.6) 0.30 (7.5) 1.10 (28.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAF17 0.23 (5.8) 0.35 (8.8) 0.94 (24.0) 0.47 (12.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.016 (0.40) XBAF18 0.23 (5.8) 0.35 (8.8) 1.10 (28.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.016 (0.40) XBAF19 0.29 (7.3) 0.43 (11.0) 1.26 (32.0) 0.71 (18.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.020 (0.50) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Ferrules without Insulating Collar 8 L1 L2 8 D2 D1 8 S 8 Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions D1 D2 L1 L2 S XBAF20 0.04 (1.0) 0.08 (2.1) 0.24 (6.0) 0.21 (5.3) 0.006 (0.15) XBAF21 0.05 (1.2) 0.09 (2.3) 0.24 (6.0) 0.21 (5.3) 0.006 (0.15) XBAF23 0.06 (1.4) 0.10 (2.5) 0.24 (6.0) 0.21 (5.3) 0.006 (0.15) XBAF24 0.07 (1.7) 0.11 (2.8) 0.28 (7.0) 0.24 (6.0) 0.006 (0.15) XBAF25 0.09 (2.2) 0.13 (3.4) 0.28 (7.0) 0.24 (6.0) 0.006 (0.15) XBAF26 0.11 (2.8) 0.16 (4.0) 0.35 (9.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.008 (0.20) XBAF27 0.14 (3.5) 0.19 (4.7) 0.47 (12.0) 0.35 (9.0) 0.008 (0.20) XBAF28 0.18 (4.5) 0.23 (5.8) 0.47 (12.0) 0.43 (10.8) 0.008 (0.20) XBAF29 0.23 (5.8) 0.30 (7.5) 0.47 (12.0) 0.41 (10.5) 0.008 (0.20) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-95 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Twin Ferrules L1 8 L2 8 D2 D1 8 8 8 S1 S2 Catalog Number Approximate Dimensions D1 D2 L1 L2 S1 S2 XBAFT1 0.06 (1.5) 0.10 (2.5) 0.59 (15.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAFT3 0.07 (1.8) 0.11 (2.8) 0.59 (15.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.010 (0.25) XBAFT4 0.08 (2.1) 0.13 (3.4) 0.59 (15.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) XBAFT6 0.09 (2.3) 0.14 (3.6) 0.63 (16.0) 0.31 (8.0) 0.006 (0.15) 0.012 (0.30) 8 XBAFT9 0.11 (2.9) 0.17 (4.2) 0.73 (18.5) 0.39 (10.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) XBAFT11 0.15 (3.8) 0.19 (4.9) 0.91 (23.0) 0.47 (12.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.012 (0.30) 8 XBAFT13 0.19 (4.9) 0.23 (5.9) 0.98 (25.0) 0.55 (14.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.016 (0.40) XBAFT15 0.26 (6.5) 0.28 (7.2) 1.02 (26.0) 0.55 (14.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.016 (0.40) XBAFT18 0.33 (8.5) 0.35 (8.8) 1.22 (31.0) 0.63 (16.0) 0.008 (0.20) 0.020 (0.50) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-96 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Hand Tools 8 Stripping Tools Product Selection Stripping Tools 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 XBTCUTSTP Stripping Tools Technical Data and Specifications Conductor/Cable Stripping Range Description Specification Conductor/cable 0.2–6 mm2/24–10 AWG Wire cutter 6 mm2/10 AWG 8 Length Stripping Length Weight In lbs (g) 8.07 (205) Up to 18 mm 0.44 (200) 8 8 8 8 8 8 Crimping Pliers 8 The crimping pliers deform the ferrules hexagonally. For 0.25–6 mm2 ferrules in accordance with DIN 46 228-1: 1992-08 and DIN 46 228-4: 1990-09. Product Selection Crimping Pliers Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 XBTCRMP66 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Crimping Pliers Length Weight In lbs (g) 6.85 (175) 0.79 (360) 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications Areas of Application Description Specification Conductor 0.25–6 mm2 Conductor 23–10 AWG 8 8 8 8 8 Slotted Screwdrivers 8 The crimping pliers deform the ferrules hexagonally. For 0.25–6 mm2 ferrules in accordance with DIN 46 228-1: 1992-08 and DIN 46 228-4: 1990-09. 8 8 Product Selection Slotted Screwdrivers Standard Pack 8 Catalog Number 8 3.5 mm 1 XBTDVR35 8 XBTDVR40 8 4.0 mm 1 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-97 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Printed Marking Tag Options 8 Horizontally Printed Marking Tags and Marking Directions 8 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 10 6 5 4 3 2 8 2 Marking Direction: Horizontal 1 8 1 9 8 8 Marking Accessories 7 8 Marking Direction: Vertical 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Marking Tags for 5.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Marking Tags for 6.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Standard Pack Standard Pack Number Sequence Catalog Number ZB5 Tags Vertically Numbered Number Sequence Catalog Number ZB6 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 1–10 1 XBMZB5V/1 10 1–10 1 XBMZB6V/1 10 11–20 XBMZB5V/11 10 11–20 XBMZB6V/11 XBMZB6V/21 10 21–30 XBMZB5V/21 10 21–30 10 31–40 XBMZB5V/31 10 31–40 XBMZB6V/31 10 41–50 XBMZB5V/41 10 41–50 XBMZB6V/41 10 51–60 XBMZB5V/51 10 51–60 XBMZB6V/51 10 61–70 XBMZB5V/61 10 61–70 XBMZB6V/61 8 10 71–80 XBMZB5V/71 10 71–80 XBMZB6V/71 10 81–90 XBMZB5V/81 10 81–90 XBMZB6V/81 8 10 91–100 XBMZB5V/91 10 91–100 XBMZB6V/91 8 8 8 8 8 8 ZBF5 Tags Vertically Numbered ZBF6 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 1–10 1 XBMZBF5V/1 10 1–10 1 XBMZBF6V/1 10 11–20 XBMZBF5V/11 10 11–20 XBMZBF6V/11 10 21–30 XBMZBF5V/21 10 21–30 XBMZBF6V/21 10 31–40 XBMZBF5V/31 10 31–40 XBMZBF6V/31 10 41–50 XBMZBF5V/41 10 41–50 XBMZBF6V/41 10 51–60 XBMZBF5V/51 10 51–60 XBMZBF6V/51 10 61–70 XBMZBF5V/61 10 61–70 XBMZBF6V/61 10 71–80 XBMZBF5V/71 10 71–80 XBMZBF6V/71 10 81–90 XBMZBF5V/81 10 81–90 XBMZBF6V/81 10 91–100 XBMZBF5V/91 10 91–100 XBMZBF6V/91 8 Note 1 For text printed horizontally, change “V” in catalog number to “H.” 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-98 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marking Tags for 8.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Marking Tags for 12 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Standard Pack Standard Pack Number Sequence Catalog Number Number Sequence 8.1 8 Catalog Number 8 ZB12 Tags Vertically Numbered ZB8 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 1–10 1 XBMZB8V/1 10 1–10 1 XBMZB12V/1 10 11–20 XBMZB8V/11 10 11–20 XBMZB12V/11 21–30 XBMZB12V/21 8 8 10 21–30 XBMZB8V/21 10 10 31–40 XBMZB8V/31 ZBF12 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 41–50 XBMZB8V/41 10 1–10 1 XBMZBF12V/1 10 51–60 XBMZB6V/51 10 11–20 XBMZBF12V/11 10 61–70 XBMZB8V/61 10 21–30 XBMZBF12V/21 10 71–80 XBMZB8V/71 10 81–90 XBMZB8V/81 10 91–100 XBMZB8V/91 10 1–10 1 XBMZBF8V/1 10 11–20 XBMZBF8V/11 10 21–30 XBMZBF8V/21 10 31–40 XBMZBF8V/31 10 41–50 XBMZBF8V/41 10 51–60 XBMZBF8V/51 10 61–70 XBMZBF8V/61 10 71–80 XBMZBF8V/71 10 81–90 XBMZBF8V/81 10 91–100 XBMZBF8V/91 8 8 Marking Tags for 16 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Standard Pack ZBF8 Tags Vertically Numbered 8 Number Sequence 8 Catalog Number 8 ZB15 Tags Vertically Numbered 8 10 1–10 1 XBMZB15V/1 10 11–20 XBMZB15V/11 10 21–30 XBMZB15V/21 8 XBMZBF15V/1 8 ZBF15 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 1–10 1 10 11–20 XBMZBF15V/11 10 21–30 XBMZBF15V/21 8 8 Note 1 For text printed horizontally, change “V” in catalog number to “H.” 8 8 Marking Tags for 10.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Standard Pack Number Sequence Catalog Number 8 ZB10 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 1–10 1 XBMZB10V/1 10 11–20 XBMZB10V/11 10 21–30 XBMZB10V/21 8 8 ZBF10 Tags Vertically Numbered 10 1–10 1 XBMZBF10V/1 10 11–20 XBMZBF10V/11 10 21–30 XBMZBF10V/21 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-99 8.1 8 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Pre-Printed Marking Tags Terminal Blocks Marking Tags The tags are made of white self-extinguishing polyamide 6.6 and the imprint is hot stamped with rubproof black ink. ● 8 8 8 8 White marking strip available preprinted. Strip covers 10 terminals. Marking 1–10, 11–20, up to 991–999. Contact Eaton for more options. ● XBMZB5 or XBMZBF5 for terminal blocks 5.2 mm wide ● ● ● XBMZB6 or XBMZBF6 for terminal blocks 6.2 mm wide XBMZB8 or XBMZBF8 for terminal blocks 8.2 mm wide XBMZB10 or XBMZBF10 for terminal blocks 10.2 mm wide ● ● XBMZB12 or XBMZBF12 for terminal blocks 12 mm wide XBMZB15 or XBMZBF15 for terminal blocks 16 mm wide 8 8 8 Marking Tag Sizes Note: Marking Tag Sizes are for all catalog numbers starting with given prefix, EXCEPT FUSE TERMINAL Blocks. Proper Marking Tag Size XBMZB5 XBMZBF5 XBMZB6 XBMZBF6 XBMZB8 XBMZBF8 XBMZB10 XBMZBF10 XBMZB12 XBMZBF12 XBMZB15 XBMZBF15 XBMSSZB XBUT25 XBPT25 2 XBUT4 XBPT4 2 XBUT6 XBPT6 2 XBUT10 XBPT10 2 XBPT16 1 XBPT16 2 XBUT35 XBPT35 2 XBMKLMZ XBUT4FBE 1 XBPTT25 XBUTT4 XBPTT4 XBPT6 1 XBPT4FBN 2 XBUT16 — — — XBPT35 1 — — XBUT6FBN 1 XBPTK XB3UKA XBPT4FBE 2 XBUK6 XBPT4FSI 2 XBTK — — — — — — XBPT25 1 XBPU25 2 XB3UKF XBQT25 3 XBPT4FSI 1 — XBUK50 — — — — — — 8 XBPT4FBE 1 XBAP … XBUT4FBE 2 XBQT25FBE 3 — — XBUK150 — — — — — — XBQU25 3 — — XBUK95 — — — — — — 8 XBQT15 1 XBUK10 — — — XBPT10 1 — — — — — — XBUKK4 — — — XBMKLMZ 5 — — — — — — 8 8 8 XBPU25 1 XBQT15 3 XBQTT15 XBQT25FBE 4 XBQU15 XBQU15 1 XBMPK15 XBPT4 1 — — — — — — — — — — XBMUK25 XBMPKK15 XBPT4FBN 1 — — — — — — — — — — — XBATCP… XBQT25 1 — — — — — — — — — — 8 — — XBQT25FBE 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — XBQU25 8 — — XBMUK4 8 Notes 1 For center labeling. 2 For external labeling. 3 For center and outside labeling. 4 For lever labeling. 5 Two (2) XBMZB10 tags fit in one (1) XBMKLMZ. 8 8 8 8 3 XBUT6FBN 2 1 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-100 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marker Strips and Sheets (for use with XBAPLT2006K1 plotter) The XB Series marking system provides logical and clear identification of the modular terminal blocks and interface modules. 8 8 Product Selection XBMZB_ 8 Marker Sheets (Strip of 10) Marker Strips (Strip of 10) Terminal Width Standard Pack XBMPZB_ Blank Strips 5.2 mm Terminal Width) Catalog Number 10 Standard Pack Catalog Number Marker Sheets (10 rows of 12) 5.2 mm XBMZB5 Color White 50 XBMPZB5 50 XBMPZB5BU 6.2 mm 10 XBMZB6 Blue 8.2 mm 10 XBMZB8 Red 50 XBMPZB5RD 50 XBMPZB5YE 50 XBMPZB5GN 10.2 mm 10 XBMZB10 Yellow 12 mm 10 XBMZB12 Green 16 mm 10 XBMZB15 1 Marker Sheets (10 rows of 10) 6.2 mm Flat Strips White 50 XBMPZB6 5.2 mm 10 XBMZBF5 Blue 50 XBMPZB6BU 6.2 mm 10 XBMZBF6 Red 50 XBMPZB6RD 8.2 mm 10 XBMZBF8 Yellow 50 XBMPZB6YE Green 50 XBMPZB6GN 10.2 mm 10 XBMZBF10 12 mm 10 XBMZBF12 16 mm 10 XBMZBF15 XBMPZBF_ Flat Marker Sheets (10 rows of 10) 5.2 mm White 10 XBMPZBF5 Orange 10 XBMPZBF5OG White 10 XBMPZBF6 Orange 10 XBMPZBF6OG White 10 XBMPZBF8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Label Sheets for Laser Printers The XBM labels have been specially developed for laser printers and have considerable advantages: ● ● ● ● ● ● Can be printed on all commercially available laser printers Or can use plotter or pen for printing Good adhesive properties A4 size XBMKL25X12WH designed to fit XBGBS2512 group marker XBMLMAL447 is perforated for terminal strip marker XBMGLMA and is 44 x 7 mm 8 8 Product Selection XBM_ 8 Label Sheets Standard Pack Catalog Number 8 10 XBMKL25X12WH 10 XBMLMAL447 8 8 8 Note 1 All markers are strips of 10, except XBMZB15, which is a strip of 5. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-101 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Terminal Block Group Marking Terminal block groups are marked using marking labels that are snapped into the marker strip groove of the terminal blocks. The group is marked using either labels or insert markers. Insert Markers for Laser Printers One sheet = 56 labels. Lettering field is 40 x 17 mm. 8 Product Selection XBMUBEL4017 8 XBGBS2512 8 8 8 Product Selection Insert Markers for XBMUBE(D) Terminal Block Group Marking 1 Standard Pack Catalog Number Standard Pack Catalog Number 10 XBMUBEL4017 100 XBGBS2512 8 8 8 8 Terminal Strip Markers Adjustable height for end bracket labeling. 8 Product Selection 8 Refillable Marker Pen Refillable marker pen for manual labeling, line thickness 0.35 mm. Product Selection Terminal Strip Markers 1 XBM_ Standard Pack 8 Catalog Number XBMXPEN Standard Pack 20 x 8 mm Wide 10 8 10 Catalog Number Pen XBMKLM2 1 44 x 7 mm Wide 8 Terminal Strip Markers 1 XBMXPEN Ink Cartridge XBMGLMA 1 XBMINK 8 8 Terminal Strip Marker Carriers For labeling terminal groups, for mounting on DIN rail. Lettering field is 40 x 17 mm. Non-Refillable Marker Pen For manual labeling, line thickness 0.5 mm. 8 Product Selection Product Selection 8 XBMUB_ 8 8 8 Terminal Strip Marker Carriers XBMUBE Non-Refillable Marker Pen Standard Pack Catalog Number Standard Pack 10 XBMUBE 1 10 XBMUBED Catalog Number XBMBSTIFT Note 1 See Page V7-T8-101 for insert labels. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-102 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marking Plotter The automatic Prepare Pen function ensures optimum marking results right from the first character. 8 Pens can remain in the pen station even for prolonged intervals without drying out. 8 8 Custom Marking Tag System This plotter system uses Windows®-based software to interface with a PC, allowing custom printing on standard terminal blocks marking tags. These standard marking tags provide circuit identification for Eaton DIN rail mount terminal blocks. Features ● ● ● ● ● Enter tag text directly into EMARK software program or import file from AutoCAD or Excel® Selectable font sizes, types and colors including common symbols for circuit identification (ground, ~ etc.) Various text formatting options including copy, paste, increment functions, text alignment, etc. Durable templates allow printing of four different tag sizes at the same time Automatic prepare pen function for optimum results Technical Data and Specifications 8 Marking Plotter 8 Description Specification 8 Plotter Plotter type Flatbed plotter Maximum plotting surface 440 mm x 296 mm Maximum material height 10.5 mm Maximum plotting speed 40 cm/sec Pen station Four depots with double sealing Drive Two-phase impulse-driven motor Interfaces Parallel (Centronics)/USB Level 1.1 8 Based on HP-GL 7475A 8 8 8 8 Electronics Command language Data buffer 16 MB Addressable resolution 0.01 mm Repeat accuracy 0.05 mm Repeat accuracy on pen change 0.05 mm with optimum pen 8 8 8 Power Supply Power supply Via separate power supply unit with exchangeable mains feeder cable Power supply unit input voltage 100–240 Vac/50–60 Hz Power supply unit input current (maximum) 0.3A at 230V~ Power supply unit output voltage 24 Vdc Power supply unit output current (maximum) 1.4A 8 8 8 8 Environmental conditions Operation 50° to 95°F (10° to 35°C) 35% to 75% relative humidity Storage 14° to 122°F (–10° to 50°C) 10% to 90% relative humidity 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Marking Plotter Approx. Weight L W H In Lbs (kg) 25.98 (660) 17.32 (440) 4.92 (125) 18 (8) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-103 8.1 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Marking Plotter 8 Description Standard Pack Catalog Number Plotter kit 1 1 XBAPLT2006K1 Pen station sealing set 1 XBMP1PENDEPOT Plotter pen preparation plate 1 XBMP1PREPLATES Template for marker strips 1 XBMP1MZB Template for flat marker strips 1 XBMP1MZBF Template for XBMPZB marker sheets 1 XBMP1MPZB 8 Template for XBMPZBF marker sheets 1 XBMP1MPZBF Template for Weidmuller multicard sheet 1 XBMP1MCSF46 8 Template for Weidmuller multicard sheet universal 1 XBMP1MCU Template for Entrelec sheets 1 XBMP1MRC 0.25 mm disposal pen 1 XBMDPEN25R 0.35 mm disposal pen 1 XBMDPEN35R 0.25 mm pen 1 XBMPEN25 8 0.35 mm pen 1 XBMPEN35 Ink Cartridge 2 XBMINK 8 Pen cleaning set 1 XBMRSET Cleaning cartridges 2 XBMRMEKFC2 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 EMARK Software Eaton’s EMARK software makes labeling your terminal blocks quick and simple. You can import your data from ECHART, any other CAD/CAE program, or enter text directly into EMARK. The software allows marking tags to be printed on the PLT2006 plotter in a professional manner. 8 8 8 8 Note 1 Plotter kit includes PLT2006 plotter system with EMARK software and user manual, starter ink and cleaning sets, and templates for marking all XBMZB and XBMZBF tags. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-104 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders IEC—XB Series Testing Accessories Separating Plates, Covers and Bridges Test Adapter For 4 mm diameter test plug and 4 mm diameter safety test plug. Makes contact in the bridge shaft. Product Selection Test Adapter XBATSPAI4 Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 XBATSPAI4 Modular Test Plugs For individual assembly of test plug strips. Product Selection Modular Test Plugs XBATS_ 8.1 Standard Pack Catalog Number Test Plugs 10 XBATSPS5 10 XBATSPS6 10 XBATSPS8 Spacer Plate 10 XBATSDPPS5 10 XBATSDPPS6 10 XBATSDPPS8 8 End Cover Used to cover an open end of terminal block when changing sizes within an assembly and/ or for last terminal block in a row. 8 8 Partition Plate Protrudes over the terminal block and is used to increase electrical clearance between terminals. Also provides visual indications of the functions of terminal blocks. For example, terminal blocks between two partition plates may provide an exact location for test points. 8 End Cover Segment Covers protruding terminal block segments of three- and four-wire terminal blocks when next to a two wire blocks. This ensures that all is touch-proof and saves space over using a standard end cover. 8 Jumper/Bridge Provides the ability to electrically connect terminal blocks. Non-adjacent blocks may be bridged by snapping off the contact tabs of the standard bridge. The reducing bridge permits simple connection of terminal blocks with different nominal cross-sections. 8 Note See these accessories as listed with terminal blocks for more information. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Test Plugs Consisting of metal part for socket hole and insulating sleeve. 8 Product Selection 8 Test Plugs Standard Pack XBATSMP_ XBATSMP_ 8 Catalog Number 8 2.3 mm 10 — XBATSMPSMT 10 Blue XBATSMPSIHBU 10 White XBATSMPSIHWH 10 Red XBATSMPSIHRD 10 Black XBATSMPSIHBK 8 10 — XBATSPSMT 8 10 Blue XBATSPSIHBU 10 White XBATSPSIHWH 10 Red XBATSPSIHRD 10 Black XBATSPSIHBK 8 8 4 mm 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-105 8.2 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Contents NEMA Description 8 NEMA C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted . . TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 NEMA Overview 8 Product Description Standards and Certifications NEMA terminal blocks provide a panel or DIN rail mount block that can be assembled from modular pieces. These blocks accommodate wire from 22 to 1/0 AWG and up to 175A and 600V. ● 8 8 8 8 UL File #E67464 and #E56797 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-106 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T8-107 V7-T8-111 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Contents C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted Description Page C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-108 V7-T8-109 V7-T8-109 V7-T8-110 V7-T8-110 V7-T8-111 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted Product Description ● ● Standards and Certifications 600V Snap-fit nylon sections ● Control circuit blocks ● Power circuit blocks ● Fuse blocks ● Switch blocks ● ● Sections can be interlocked in any quantity and any mixture for direct panel mounting or channel mounting Three terminal choices in control circuit blocks, up to 32 circuits per foot ● ● ● Power circuit blocks for heavy-duty applications, up to 16 circuits per foot Fuse blocks accommodate any 0.406 x 1.5 in (10.3 x 38.1 mm) ferrule type cartridge fuse up to 30A Switch blocks have removable blade for extra safety ● UL File #E67464 8 8 8 8 8 8 A Typical Mixture of Control Circuit Blocks, Power Blocks, Switch and Fuse Blocks in a Mounting Channel C381TP C381PE C381PT 8 8 C381EF C381SB C381FB 8 C381CC 8 C381MC 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-107 8.2 8 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Product Selection When Ordering Specify Catalog number and quantity, which must be in a multiple of the available minimum standard package. 8 Examples: 200 Cat. No. C381ST ● 20 Cat. No. C381PT ● 100 Cat. No. C381CC ● 8 Control, Power, Switch and Fuse Blocks 1 8 Description 8 AWG Wire Size Catalog number and quantity of end sections also in minimum quantity standard package. Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number Example: 25 Cat. No. C381ES ● Control Circuit Terminal Blocks—Rated 50A C381ST Type ST (screw terminal) 22–14 AWG 100 C381ST C381TP Type TP (tubular pressure plt) 22–10 100 C381TP C381TS Type TS (tubular screw) end section 18–8 100 C381TS C381ES End section — 25 C381ES 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Power Circuit Terminal Blocks—Rated 155A C381PT Type PT (tubular screw) 10–1/0 10 C381PT C381PE End section — 10 C381PE 8 8 8 8 8 Switch Blocks—Rated 15A and Fuse Blocks—Rated 30A C381SB Switch blocks 18–8 10 C381SB C381FB Fuse blocks 18–8 10 C381FB C381EF End section — 10 C381EF 8 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 Available only in minimum quantity standard packages. 2 Must be ordered in standard package quantity or in multiples of these quantities. 8 8 V7-T8-108 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Accessories 8 C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted 1 Description Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number Aluminum mounting channel—6 ft (1.8m) lengths 25 C381MC Screw type channel clamp (one required each end) 3 100 C381VC Spring type channel clamp (one required each end) 3 100 C381CC Vinyl marking strip—3/8 in x 25 ft (9.5 mm x 7.6m) coil 1 C381MS Marking paper—pressure sensitive—5/16 x 11-11/16 in (7.9 x 296.9 mm), 24 strips/sheet 5 sheets C381MP For use on control circuit blocks 100 C381SR For use on power circuit blocks 100 C381SP 8 8 8 8 8 Marking strip retainer (one required/grouping) Fanning strip—for type TP and/or TS 50 C381TF Fanning strip—for type ST 50 C381SF Terminal jumper (two-pole) 4 100 C381TJ Ganging rod—1/8 in x 6 in (3.2 mm x 152.4 mm) 5 10 C381GR 8 8 8 8 8 Modifications 8 Pull Apart Terminal Blocks 1 Description AWG Wire Size Standard Pack 2 Catalog Number One-pole stationary section (tubular pressure plt) 22–10 100 C381PS Three-pole movable section (tubular pressure plt) 22–10 12 C381PM End section — 25 C381ES Polarizing plug (promotes alignment of poles) 6 — 100 C381PP 8 8 8 8 Pull Apart Terminal Blocks 8 8 8 8 8 8 Illustrates: One–Three-Pole Movable Section, Three–One-Pole Stationary Sections and One–End Piece 8 Notes 1 Available only in minimum quantity standard packages. 2 Must be ordered in standard package quantity or in multiples of these quantities. 3 C381CC is a snap-in, one time use disposable type. C381VC can be readjusted or reused as desired. 4 For use on adjacent Type TP and/or TS control circuit sections. 5 May be used on section covers or to gang fuse and/or switch blocks. 6 L shaped plug installs in end of stationary section, Catalog Number C381PS, and prevents incorrect installation of movable section, Catalog Number C381PM. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-109 8.2 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Technical Data and Specifications 8 Formulas for Calculating Blocks and Channel Lengths N = Number of Blocks 8 C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted 8 Description Blocks Length Control blocks and pull apart blocks 0.762 + (0.375 x N) 8 Power circuit blocks 0.812 + (0.750 x N) Fuse and switch blocks 0.812 + (0.755 x N) 8 Mounting channel (minimum channel length) 0.75 + blocks length 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted Terminal Block Mounting Without Channel 8 Channel Mounting 8 8 1.19 (30.2) A 8 Mounting Channel in 6' (1.8m) Lengths, Can Be Cut to Desired Length 8 8 8 8 8 B Block A Control circuit blocks 1.25 (31.8) B 1.55 (39.4) Power circuit blocks 1.75 (44.5) 2.00 (50.8) Fuse blocks 2.75 (69.9) 2.00 (50.8) Switch blocks 2.75 (69.9) 2.00 (50.8) Pull apart blocks 1.88 (47.8) 2.75 (69.9) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-110 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Contents TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Description Page C381 Series Terminal Blocks, Rail Mounted . . . . . TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-107 V7-T8-112 V7-T8-113 V7-T8-114 V7-T8-115 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Product Description Features TBA and TBD modular terminal blocks are designed to conserve space, while allowing maximum flexibility and ease of installation. Available as one-, two- and three-pole circuits, simple and uniform installation is possible because their design is based on 5/8 in (15.9 mm) modules. Standard blocks are white nylon. Blocks—Design Features ● Compact design permits mounting 48–600V or 90–300V terminals per foot ● Fully shielded construction, 600V spacings ● Nylon construction provides anti-tracking and impact resistance ● TBA types are available in rail mounted, base mounted and power distribution types ● Terminal blocks easily snap on or off mounting rails; not necessary to disturb adjacent units ● No end pieces or backing plates are needed when rail mounting ● A 12 circuit subminiature blocks, rated 20A at 300V, is available for “high density” applications ● Popular blocks are also available in dual mount for use with standard TBA or 35 mm DIN rails Breathing Action Clamping Collar The unique design of the clamping collar permits the collar to breathe as the wire expands and contracts, maintaining a constant and permanent clamping pressure. This eliminates loose connections resulting from the gradual flattening of conductors and joint deterioration caused by heating and cooling cycles. Terminals—Design Features ● Insulated walls of lug guide wire into lug ● Blocks are shipped with clamping screw backed out ● Constant locking torque keeps terminal screws in position ● Terminal screws are captive; cannot be lost in shipment or handling ● Hardened stainless steel clamping collar eliminates stripped threads ● Large opening in clamping collar accommodates oversized conductors; smallest collar will accept three 14 AWG stranded conductors Standards and Certifications 8 UL recognized: File No. E56797 CE approved 8 ● ● 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-111 8.2 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8 Product Selection 8 TBA Modular Terminal Blocks 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Rail and Base Mounted Terminal Blocks Description 8 8 Subminiature blocks 8 Ampacity (per Circuit) 1 Carton Quantity 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number (2) 14–12 12 5A 100 TBDSM12 4 TBDSM12 4 TBDV4 Miniature blocks 22–10 4 30A 100 TBDV4 Standard blocks—screw terminals with tang clamping collars 18–2 1 90A 100 — TBDT1 22–8 2 40A 100 TBAT2 — 22–8 3 40A 20 TBAT3-20 TBDT3-20 18–4 3 90A 100 TBDT70 TBDT70 High current blocks 14–2/0 3 175A 12 TBA100 5 — Standard blocks—plug-in terminals 22–8 3 40A 20 TBAP — 18–4 3 70A 20 TBAP70 — 14–8 3 40A 20 TBAPL70 — Panel mount blocks 22–10 3 30A 100 TBAL30 — 8–4 3 115A 12 TBAL90 — Disconnect blocks—for 1/4 in (6.4 mm) dia. by 1–1-7/16 in (25.4–36.5 mm) fuse 22–8 1 30A 50 TBAD — Fuse blocks—for 13/32 in (10.3 mm) dia. by 1-1/2 in (38.1 mm) fuse 22–8 1 30A 50 TBDTF TBDTF 22–10 4 30A (600V) 90 TBBT4 — 8 8 DIN Rail 3 Number of Poles Rail Mounted—600V 8 8 TBA Rail AWG Wire Size Base Mounted—600V 8 Miniature blocks—screw terminals with tang clamping collars 8 Standard blocks—standard screw terminals 22–8 3 40A 80 TBABT3 — Universal mounting blocks 8 maximum 4 50A 6 25 TBU4 — 8 maximum 6 50A 6 60 TBU6 — 8 maximum 8 50A 6 45 TBU8 — 8 maximum 12 50A 6 35 TBU12 — 8 8 8 8 8 Notes 1 Based on 50°C rise, test at 25°C ambient while using maximum wire size. 2 Must be ordered in standard package quantity or in multiples of these quantities. 3 Dual mounting blocks—mount on either TMR/TBA rail or 35 mm DIN rail. 4 May also be mounted on mini-DIN rail (15 mm). Catalog Number C383TS15. 5 May also be base mounted. 6 TBU Series = 60A with crimped wire. 8 8 8 V7-T8-112 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA 8.2 Accessories 8 TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular 8 Number of Poles Carton Quantity 2 Catalog Number 12.5 (317.5) — 25 TMR12 37.5 (952.5) — 25 TMR37 72.0 (1828.8) — 25 TBATR72 1m — 20 MC382MA1-20 Miniature blocks—TBDV4 and TBBT4 6.0 (152.4) — 50 TMS6 TBU Series—matte finish 7.5 (190.5) — 25 TMSU All other blocks 12.5 (317.5) — 50 TMS 8 TBAT1 and TBAP70 — 2-pole 100 TJ1 8 TBAT2 — 2-pole 100 TJ2 TBAT3, TBABT3, TBAP and TBBP — 2-pole 100 TJ3 Description Length 1 8 Mounting Rail Aluminum 35 mm DIN—steel 8 8 8 Marking Strips 8 Jumpers TBDV4 and TBBT4 — 4-pole 100 TJ4 TBAD and TBATF — 2-pole 100 TJ5 8 8 8 TBAL30 — 2-pole 100 TJ6 TBU — 12-pole 10 TJ7 TBDT3 — 2-pole 100 TJ8 8 — — 50 TAD 8 Miscellaneous End piece for TBABT3 and TBBP Lug shield for TBA100 and TBAL90 — — 50 TAS Fuse puller — — 50 TBP Lighted fuse puller—blown fuse indication — — 25 TBLP 8 8 Notes 1 Length in inches (mm) except as noted. 2 Must be ordered in standard package quantity or in multiples of these quantities. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-113 8.2 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Technical Data and Specifications TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular Description Specification 8 Continuous temperature 212°F (100°C) Tensile strength 10,000–12,000 psi 8 Impact resistance 2.0 ft-lb/in (arc) Arc resistance 140 seconds 8 ● 8 8 8 8 8 Chemical resistance to: ● Acetone ● Ammonia gas ● Benzene ● Gasoline ● Mineral oil ● Sodium bisulfate ● Sodium chloride ● Sodium nitrate ● Water up to 50°C Flashover Voltages Catalog Number Vac rms, 60 Hz Recommended Terminal Tightening Torque Opposite Polarity To Ground Wire Size Torque 20 lb-in TBAT1 9100 6600 Up to 8 AWG TBAT2 9600 7300 Up to 4 AWG 35 lb-in TBAT3 8600 7300 Up to 2/0 AWG 50 lb-in 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 To find a current rating, place a straight edge horizontally at the value of anticipated maximum internal panel ambient (scale on the left), and read the current rating for the device on the bottom scale. Example: at 60°C, TBAT3 is rated 54 amperes. 8 8 8 Ambient Temp. in C° 8 80 10 70 20 30 60 TBAT2 TBAL100 TBAT3 50 40 TBAT1 TBAL30 40 TBAL90 50 TBAP TBAM4 30 20 40 Temp. Rise in C° 8 Ratings based on 90°C total temperature of a three-pole block with each pole carrying current and wired with largest size conductors. Temperature Rating 8 8 Ampere rating is based on maximum allowable temperature—ambient temperature plus temperature rise due to current. TBAB70 60 80 100 120 140 160 Current in Amps 180 200 220 240 60 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-114 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.2 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders NEMA Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 TB Series Terminal Blocks, Modular 8 1.09 (27.7) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8) 0.63 (16) 1.23 (31.2) 8 0.63 (16) 0.17 – 0.28 (4.3 – 7.1) Clearance for #8 Screw TBDSM12 3 Holes 0.09 (2.3) Dia. 0.33 (8.4) Deep 0.67 0.59 (17) (15) 1.23 (31.2) 0.59 (15) 1.48 (37.6) 1.71 (43.4) 1 (25.4) 1.25 (31.8) 1.25 (31.8) 8 TBBT4 8 1.88 (47.8) 1/4-28 Screw 8 1.19 (30.2) 1.75 (44.5) TBDV4 8 TBDT1 1.53 (38.9) 0.63 (16) 1.25 (31.8) 1.23 (31.2) #6-32 Screw 1.25 (31.8) 0.17 – 0.27 (4.3 – 6.9) Clearance for #8 Screw Footlock Cat. #TAD 1.25 (31.8) 3.13 (79.5) TBAL90 1.69 (42.9) 2.47 (62.7) TBABT3 0.31 (7.9) TBAL30 0.66 (16.8) 0.25 (6.4) TBAT3 & TBDT3 3.13 (79.5) 12.5 – 37.5 (317.5 – 952.5) 8 8 0.25 (6.4) TMR12 & TMR37 1.25 (31.8) 0.63 (16) 8 8 1.25 (31.8) #10 Screw Clearance 0.59 (15) 1.31 (33.3) 1.53 (38.9) 1.86 (47.2) 1.75 (44.5) 8 1.77 (45) 1.94 (49.3) 0.47 (11.9) 0.63 (16) 1.34 (34) TBDT70 8 1.25 (31.8) TBAP 1.88 (47.8) 8 8 0.13 (3.3) 0.63 (16) 72 (1828.8) TBATR72 0.56 (14.2) B 0.63 (16) 1.25 (31.8) TBA100 8 8 0.19 (4.8) 1.3 (33) TBAT2 8 8 1.33 (33.8) 1.25 (31.8) 1.3 (33) 8 8 1.86 (47.2) 1.78 (45.2) 0.63 (16) 1.3 (33) 8 8 1.25 (31.8) TBAP70 & TBAPL70 1.25 (31.8) 8 1.38 (35.1) 1 (25.4) 2 (50.8) 2.4 (61) 2 (50.8) 1.5 (38.1) 0.63 (16) 0.44 (11.2) 2 (50.8) 1.25 (31.8) 0.63 (16) TBAD & TBDTF A TBU4, TBU6, TBU8 & TBU12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8 8 #10 Screw A B Clearance 3.75 2.87 TBU4 (95.3) (72.9) 0.5 5 4.12 (12.7) TBU6 (127) 6.25 TBU8 (158.8) 8.75 TBU12 (222.3) 8 8 (104.6) 5.37 (136.4) 7.87 (199.9) 8 8 V7-T8-115 8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Contents Power Distribution Products Description 8 Page Power Distribution CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Power Distribution Overview 8 Product Selection Guide Series Current Range UL Certification High Short UL 508A Approved for Industrial Control Panels Circuit Current 1 Rating Branch Circuits Feeder Circuits CH162 115–175A UL 1059 Recognized No Yes No 2 Yes 8 CH163 175–420A UL 1059 Recognized No Yes No 2 Yes CH165 620–840A UL 1059 Recognized No Yes No 2 Yes 8 CHDB 175–570A UL 1953 Listed Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 8 8 8 HVAC UL 1995 Notes 1 Refer to Page V7-T8-118 to determine short circuit current ratings with fuses and Pages V7-T8-119 and V7-T8-120 to determine short circuit current ratings in conjunction with specific Eaton circuit breakers. 2 Single-pole units, when installed with proper spacings, may meet requirements for UL 508A feeder circuits. 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-116 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-117 V7-T8-123 V7-T8-126 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open 8.3 Contents Description Page CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-118 V7-T8-118 V7-T8-121 V7-T8-123 V7-T8-126 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks Product Description Eaton’s CHDB Series of Power Distribution Blocks was designed for high short circuit current rating (SCCR) applications up to 200,000 amperes. They are assembled with the minimum spacing to meet UL 1953 requirements for feeder circuits in UL 508A industrial control panels, and provide significant wiring flexibility. Available in three-pole open style and single-pole enclosed style with a variety of terminal arrangements and current-carrying capability up to 570 amperes. Features and Benefits Enclosed Style ● IP20 finger-safe enclosure ● 600 Vac or Vdc (UL 1953), 690 Vac or Vdc ● DIN rail or panel mount ● Captive termination screws prevent lost screws ● Single-pole, gang mountable for multi-pole applications ● Tin plated Al connections suitable for Cu conductors ● Flammability, UL 94V-0 Standards and Certifications Open Style ● 600 Vac or Vdc (UL 1953) ● Panel mount ● Three-pole open design for easy wiring ● Tin-plated Al connections suitable for Cu conductors ● Flammability, UL 94V-0 ● Available covers for additional protection (does not meet IP20) ● ● ● ● UL Listed 1953, Guide QPQS, File E256146 CSA Certified, Class 6228-01, File 15364 (enclosed style) CE Component IEC 60947-7-1 (enclosed style) IEC 60529, IP20 (fingersafe) under specific wiring conditions (enclosed style) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-117 8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Product Selection 8 CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks 8 Line Connection Load Connection 2/0–#8 AWG Amperes Style Poles Catalog Number (4) #4–#14 AWG 175 Open 3 CHDB2203 2/0–#8 AWG (6) #4–#14 AWG 175 Open 3 CHDB3213 8 300 kcmil–#4 AWG (6) #4–#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3233 8 300 kcmil–#4 AWG (12) #4–#14 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3703 8 300 kcmil–#4 AWG CHDB2203 (Open) Configuration 8 8 8 CHDB204F (Enclosed) (6) #2–#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3713 (3) 1/0–#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3713 1 CHDB204F 2/0–#8 AWG 2/0–#8 AWG 175 Enclosed 1 500 kcmil–#6 AWG (6) #2–#14 AWG 380 Enclosed 1 1 CHDB330F 300 kcmil–#4 AWG (12) #4–#14 AWG 570 Enclosed 1 1 CHDB377F 8 8 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Power Terminal Block Short-Circuit Current Ratings (SCCR) with Fuses 8 8 Catalog Number Terminal Copper Conductors Line Load CHDB2203 2/0–#8 AWG 8 8 8 CHDB3213 CHDB3233 2/0–#8 AWG 300 kcmil–#4 AWG CHDB3703 300 kcmil–#4 AWG 8 8 8 8 CHDB3713 300 kcmil–#4 AWG 200 200 200 60 200 175 175 100 60 100 200 200 100 60 50 400 400 200 100 200 400 400 400 100 100 #4–#14 AWG 175 175 100 60 100 #4–#8 AWG 400 400 200 100 200 400 400 400 100 100 #4–#12 AWG 175 175 100 60 100 #4–#8 AWG 400 400 200 100 200 #4–#14 AWG 400 400 400 100 100 100 #4–#12 AWG 175 175 100 60 1/0–#6 AWG 400 400 200 100 200 #4–#12 AWG 400 400 400 100 100 175 175 100 60 100 CHDB204F 2/0–#8 AWG 2/0–#8 AWG 200 200 100 60 200 CHDB330F 500 kcmil–#6 AWG #2–#6 AWG 400 400 200 100 200 #2–#14 AWG 200 200 100 30 50 175 175 100 30 100 300 kcmil #4–#8 AWG 600 600 400 200 200 300 kcmil–#4 AWG #4 AWG 600 600 400 200 50 #4–#14 AWG 200 200 100 30 50 CHDB377F 8 8 SCCR (kA) #4–#12 AWG 8 8 RK-5 FRS-R/FRN-R #4–#14 AWG 8 8 Maximum Fuse Class and Amperes J T RK-1 LPJ JJS/JJN LPS-RK/LPN-RK Note 1 Finger-safe. V7-T8-118 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution 8.3 Power Terminal Block Short-Circuit Ratings (SCCR) for UL 508A Applications with Circuit Breakers Opening per Pole 8 Line Conductors Cu Load Conductors Cu SCCR @ 480V (Load Side) Eaton Breaker Available Breaker Current Ratings 8 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 18 kA 18 kA 14 kA EGB125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 8 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 25 kA 22 kA 14 kA EGE125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 Feeder Listed Open PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 50 kA 22 kA 14 kA EGS125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB2203 Feeder Listed Open PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 65 kA 22 kA 14 kA EGH125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB2203 Feeder Listed Open PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 65 kA 22 kA 14 kA EGC125 1 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB3213 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 18 kA 18 kA 18 kA EGB125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB3213 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 25 kA 22 kA 18 kA EGE125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB3213 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 50 kA 22 kA 18 kA EGS125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB3213 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 65 kA 22 kA 18 kA EGH125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB3213 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 #4–#10 #12 #14 65 kA 22 kA 18 kA EGC125 1 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB204F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 2/0–#8 18 kA EGB125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB204F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 2/0–#8 25 kA EGE125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB204F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 2/0–#8 35 kA EGS125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB204F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 2/0–#8 65 kA EGH125 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB204F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) 175 2/0–#8 2/0–#8 65 kA EGC125 1 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 125 CHDB3233 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 25 kA 25 kA 14 kA JGE250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3233 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 35 kA 35 kA 14 kA JGS250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3233 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 65 kA 42 kA 14 kA JGH250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3233 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 65 kA 42 kA 25 kA JGC250 1 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 Catalog Number Description Enclosure Size in Inches (mm) Current Rating CHDB2203 Feeder Listed Open PDB 16.00 x 16.00 x 6.75 (406.4 x 406.4 x 171.5) CHDB2203 Feeder Listed Open PDB CHDB2203 Line Load 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Note 1 This breaker frame is marked current limiting and suitable for use as current limiting per UL 508A SB.4.3.2. 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-119 8.3 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Line Conductors Cu Load Conductors Cu SCCR at 480V (Load Side) Eaton Breaker Available Breaker Current Ratings 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 25 kA 25 kA 14 kA JGE250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 35 kA 35 kA 14 kA JGS250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 65 kA 42 kA 14 kA JGH250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3703 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 65 kA 42 kA 25 kA JGC250 1 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3713 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 25 kA 25 kA 14 kA JGE250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3713 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 35 kA 35 kA 14 kA JGS250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3713 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 50 kA 42 kA 14 kA JGH250 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB3713 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 310 350 kmil–#4 #4–#6 #8 #10 65 kA 50 kA 25 kA JGC250 1 70, 90, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 CHDB330F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 380 500 kmil–#3 #2–#8 14 kA LGE400 250, 300, 350, 400 CHDB330F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 380 500 kmil–#3 #2–#8 14 kA LGS400 250, 300, 350, 400 CHDB330F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 380 500 kmil–#3 #2–#8 14 kA LGH400 250, 300, 350, 400 CHDB330F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 380 500 kmil–#3 #2–#8 25 kA LGC400 1 250, 300, 350, 400 CHDB377F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 570 (2) 300 kmil–#2 #4 #6 #8 30 kA 18 kA 14 kA LGE600 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 CHDB377F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 570 (2) 300 kmil–#2 #4 #6 #8 30 kA 18 kA 14 kA LGS600 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 CHDB377F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 570 (2) 300 kmil–#2 #4 #6 #8 30 kA 18 kA 14 kA LGH600 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 CHDB377F Feeder Listed Enclosed PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) 570 (2) 300 kmil–#2 #4 #6 #8 42 kA 35 kA 14 kA LGC600 1 250, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600 Opening per Pole Catalog Number Description Enclosure Size in Inches (mm) Current Rating CHDB3703 Feeder Listed Open PDB 24.00 x 20.00 x 6.75 (609.6 x 508.0 x 171.5) CHDB3703 Feeder Listed Open PDB CHDB3703 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Power Distribution Power Terminal Block Short-Circuit Ratings (SCCR) for UL 508A Applications with Circuit Breakers, continued 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Line Load 8 8 Note 1 This breaker frame is marked current limiting and suitable for use as current limiting per UL 508A SB.4.3.2. 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-120 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.3 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CHDB2203 8 CHDB3713 4.25 (108.0) 2.13 (54.1) 11 12 11 6.30 (160.0) 3.70 (94.0) 12 11 8 8 12 8 2.88 (73.2) 5.50 (139.7) 21 22 21 22 21 8 8 22 8 8 CHDB204F CHDB3213 5.19 (131.8) 3.32 (84.3) 8 Load Side 1.03 (26.2) Line Side 8 2.92 (74.2) 4.00 (101.6) 8 8 3.73 (94.7) 8 8 8 CHDB3233 3.70 (94.0) 6.30 (160.0) 8 2.15 (54.6) 8 8 1.40 (35.6) 5.50 (139.7) 8 3.55 (90.2) 8 8 8 CHDB3703 8 6.30 (160.0) 3.70 (94.0) 8 8 8 5.50 (139.7) 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-121 8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CHDB330F CHDB377F 8 8 Load Side 1.54 Line (39.1) Side 8 8 3.82 (97.0) 8 4.66 (118.4) Load Side 1.86 (47.2) 3.82 (97.0) 4.66 (118.4) 8 8 8 8 2.87 (72.9) 2.93 (74.4) 8 8 8 1.40 (35.6) 4.49 (114.0) 8 1.40 (35.6) 4.49 (114.0) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-122 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Line Side Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution 8.3 Contents CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks Description CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T8-117 V7-T8-124 V7-T8-125 V7-T8-125 V7-T8-126 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks Product Description Features and Benefits The CH160 Series of Power Terminal Blocks are UL 1059 recognized power terminal blocks for branch circuit applications. All short circuit current ratings (SCCR) are 10 kA per UL 508A Table SB4.1. The blocks are available in a wide variety of wiring configurations, providing excellent flexibility. ● ● ● ● Ratings: To 840A, 600V Materials ● Molded material; black, UL rated 94V-0 thermoplastic Operating temperature: 302°F (150°C) Optional cover: See Page V7-T8-125 8 Standards and Certifications ● ● UL Recognized CSA Certified 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-123 8.3 8 8 8 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Product Selection When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number ● Number of poles (up to three-pole available) CH160 Power Terminal Blocks—CH162 Series Line Connection Load Connection Connector Material and Ampacity Catalog Number 1 #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 115A CH16200_ 8 1/0–#14 Cu 1/0–#14 Cu Cu 150A CH16201_ 2/0–#8 Cu/Al 2/0–#8 Cu/Al Al 175A CH16204_ 8 2/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al (4) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 175A CH16220_ 8 8 CH160 Power Terminal Blocks—CH163 Series Line Connection Load Connection Connector Material and Ampacity Catalog Number 1 250 kcmil-#6 Cu 250 kcmil-#6 Cu Cu 255A CH16301_ 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al Al 310A CH16303_ 500 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al 500 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al Al 380A CH16306_ 8 2/0–#14 Cu/Al (6) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 175A CH16321_ 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (6) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16323_ 8 (2) 2/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al (6) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 350A CH16325_ 500 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (6) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 380A CH16330_ 8 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (3) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16332_ 8 (2) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16332_ 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (12) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16370_ 8 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (6) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16371_ (3) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16371_ 8 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (21) #10–#14 Cu/#10 Al Al 310A CH16372_ 350 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (3) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16373_ (14) #10–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16373_ (12) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16375_ (6) #2–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16376_ (3) 1/0–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16376_ 8 8 8 8 600 kcmil-#2 Cu/Al 600 kcmil-#2 Cu/Al 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 CH160 Power Terminal Blocks—CH165 Series Line Connection Load Connection Connector Material and Ampacity Catalog Number 1 (2) 350 kcmil-4 Cu/Al (2) 350 kcmil-4 Cu/Al Al 620A CH16500_ (2) 500 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (2) 500 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al Al 760A CH16504_ (2) 600 kcmil-#2 Cu/Al (2) 500 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (4) 3/0–#8 Cu/Al Al 840A CH16528_ (4) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 840A CH16528_ (12) #4–#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 760A CH16530_ Note 1 Incomplete catalog number—add code suffix -1, -2, -3 for number of poles. Example: For a 150A 1/0-#14 Cu to 1/0-#14 Cu three-pole PDB, order CH16201-3. 8 8 8 V7-T8-124 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.3 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Technical Data and Specifications 8 CH160 Power Terminal Blocks Description 8 Specification Ratings To 840A, 600V Materials Molded material; black, UL rated 94V-0 thermoplastic Operating temperature 302°F (150°C) 8 8 Note: For optional cover, see Power Terminal Block Accessories, Page V7-T8-126. 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Series CH163 (Single-, Two- and Three-Pole Available) Series CH162 and CH165 (Single-, Two- and Three-Pole Available) A 8 A D G B B G F F E E C 8 D H 8 8 8 C E E 8 8 0.20 (5.1) Dia. Hole with 0.40 (10.2) C’Bore J Mtg. Holes 0.21 x 0.41 (5.3 x 10.4) C'Bore 0.42 x 0.62 x 0.12 Deep (10.7 x 15.7 x 3.0 Deep) J 8 8 CH160 Power Terminal Block Dimensions C C 8 C Series A B Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole D E4 F G H J CH162 2.87 (72.9) 2.25 (57.2) 1.06 (26.9) 1.87 (47.5) 2.68 (68.1) 1.75 (44.5) 0.81 (20.6) 0.53 (13.5) 0.31 (7.9) 0.84 (21.3) 0.31 (7.9) CH163 4.00 (101.6) 3.37 (85.6) 1.96 (49.8) 3.58 (90.9) 5.20 (132.1) 3.32 (84.3) 1.62 (41.1) 0.97 (24.6) 0.31 (7.9) 0.87 (22.1) 0.35 (8.9) CH165 5.50 (139.7) 4.75 (120.7) 3.12 (79.2) 5.81 (147.6) 8.50 (215.9) 3.12 (79.2) 2.68 (68.1) 1.56 (39.6) 0.37 (9.4) 1.37 (34.8) 0.62 (15.7) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-125 8.3 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution Contents Power Terminal Block Accessories Description 8 CHDB Series—Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . CH160 Series—Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . Power Terminal Block Accessories Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Power Terminal Block Accessories 8 Product Description Standards and Certifications 8 Protective Cover ● Guards against accidental contact ● Clear with write-on surface for field termination identification ● Available in single-, twoand three-pole TB Series Power Blocks ● Contact Eaton for the latest UL 508A short circuit ratings on terminal blocks ● UL Recognized: File No. E62622 ● CSA Certified: File No. LR15364 8 8 8 8 8 8 Product Selection 8 When Ordering, Specify ● Catalog number 8 CH163 Series Cover 8 Description Catalog Number Single-pole cover CHCPDB-1 1 Two-pole cover CHCPDB-2 1 Three-pole cover CHCPDB-3 1 8 8 8 8 8 TB Series Power Blocks Line Connection Load Connection Catalog Number #300 kcmil-#6 Cu/Al (6) #6–#14 Cu/#8Al TBAN63 Note 1 Standard pack, five pieces. 8 8 8 V7-T8-126 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T8-117 V7-T8-123 V7-T8-127 V7-T8-127 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Power Distribution 8.3 Technical Data and Specifications 8 TB Series Power Blocks Description 8 Specification Ratings 285A, 600V; UL/CSA Materials Molded material; black, UL rated 94V-2 thermoplastic Operating temperature 257°F (125°C) 8 8 8 Dimensions 8 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CH163 Series Cover 8 Supplied with (4) #4 Thread-Cutting Screws Assembled as Shown 8 8 8 8 4.14 (105.2) 8 8 CHCPDB-1 = 2.1 (53.3) CHCPDB-2 = 3.72 (94.5) CHCPDB-3 = 5.34 (135.6) 8 8 Textured Surfaces 8 TB Series Power Blocks 4.93 (125.2) 8 1.68 (42.7) 8 0.5 (12.7) 8 8 2.12 (53.8) 0.2 x 0.37 (5.1 x 9.4) Mtg. Slot 8 8 5.37 (136.4) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-127 8.4 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Contents Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Description 8 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Overview 8 Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications Available in compact finger safe (C383) and an open (C350) design. Eaton’s fuse blocks and holders provide a simple DIN mounting device for protection in control circuits. Fuse holders and blocks available for Class CC, midget, H, M and R. ● 8 8 8 ● UL listed CSA certified (may not apply to all styles) 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 V7-T8-128 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T8-129 V7-T8-131 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 8.4 Contents C383 Series Fuse Holders Description Page C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 8 V7-T8-130 V7-T8-130 V7-T8-130 V7-T8-130 V7-T8-131 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders Product Description Features Eaton’s C383 Series disconnect fuse holders offer 600V fused circuit protection and subsequently “no load” switching. ● These compact disconnects are designed as components in switchboards, panels and control consoles where positive and safe circuit protection is required and where space is at a premium. ● ● The C383 fuse holders mount directly on standard TS35 DIN rails. “Finger-Safe” design— Recessed termination screws and a fuse extraction door afford you IP20 grade protection and qualify as “finger-safe” per IEC standards Easy to adjust position on rail—Simply unlatch the DIN rail adapter, slide the holder to desired position and relock Quick change of fuse— A permanently attached pivoting fuse door simplifies and speeds fuse extraction. No tools or accessories needed Standards and Certifications ● ● ● Class CC model is UL listed and CSA certified for branch circuit protection. Midget models are UL Recognized and CSA certified for supplementary and high-speed protection Runs cool—The vented design provides adequate air flow around the holders at all times Self-extinguishing UL 94-VO rated polyester material Rated voltage: ● CSA/UL: 600 Vac/Vdc, 30A ● IEC (midget only): 690 Vac, 32A 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-129 8.4 8 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Product Selection Disconnect Fuse Holders C383FH_ Description Standard Pack Catalog Number 12 C383FHCC 12 C383FHMD Standard Pack Catalog Number For Class CC Fuse 8 Single-pole fuse holder For Midget Fuse (1-1/2 in x 13/32 in) 8 Single-pole fuse holder 8 8 8 Accessories Disconnect Fuse Holders Description 8 Midget or Class CC Fuse Holder Multi-pole connection links 100 C383MPCL 8 Multi-pole handle pins 100 C383MPHP 8 Accessory Details 8 8 8 C383MPCL Multi-pole connection links can be used to connect fuse holders together for multipole applications. Use two per connection. C383MPHP Handle pins can be used to connect handles in multi-pole applications. 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Disconnect Fuse Holders 1 8 8 8 Description Specification Housing Polyester UL 94-VO rated Color White Wire size 8–18 AWG 2 Torque 22 lb-in (2.5 Nm) Fuse size 0.41 x 1.5 in 8 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) CH163 Series Cover 3.13 (79.5) 8 0.70 (17.8) 1.40 (35.6) 2.80 (71.2) 2.10 (53.4) 2.40 (61.0) 8 8 8 1.77 (45.0) 3.07 (78.0) 8 0.13 (3.2) 8 1.69 (43.0) 8 8 Notes 1 For additional technical information, consult the Eaton web site or Customer Support Center. 2 UL recognizes both solid and stranded wire. Ferrules are not required. CSA requires ferrules on stranded wire to achieve approval. 8 V7-T8-130 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders 8.4 Contents Description Page C383 Series Disconnect Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-129 8 8 8 V7-T8-132 V7-T8-133 V7-T8-133 V7-T8-133 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 C350 Series Fuse Blocks and W Series Fuse Holders Product Description Features Fuse Blocks These space-saving Type C350 Fuse Blocks are UL approved for motor loads and are rated 600V, 30A. Fuse Blocks ● Mount to 35 mm flat and 32 mm asymmetrical DIN rails ● 600V, 30A rated captive pressure plate terminals with copper alloy fuse clips ● Interlocking fuse blocks permit single, double or three-pole application— reduce inventory ● Class CC fuses have an interrupting rating of 200,000A ● Rejection feature prevents insertion of fuses with lower interrupting or voltage ratings Fuse Holders ● Class H, M and R Fuse Holders ● Break-resistant: molded of heat-stabilized nylon ● Fuse clips: springreinforced for cool operation ● Fuse clip terminations: one-piece construction ● Universal mounting dimensions, for easy assembly and retrofit ● Breathing action collar: maintenance-free ● Pressure wire connectors: vibration resistant Standards and Certifications 8 Contact Eaton for the latest UL 508A short circuit ratings on terminal blocks. 8 8 Fuse Blocks ● UL listed ● CSA certified 8 8 8 Fuse Holders ● UL tested for OEM subfeed applications 8 8 8 8 Fuse Blocks and Adapters 8 8 Cat. No. C350KD DIN Rail Adapter 8 8 8 Cat. No. C350BD3C61 Three-Pole with Adapter (Mounted on DIN Rail) 8 8 Cat. No. C350B1C61 One-Pole Fuse Blocks 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-131 8.4 8 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Product Selection Class CC Fuse Blocks 8 8 8 Type Catalog Number Three-pole 1 C350BD3C61 Single-pole C350B1C61 DIN adapter C350KD 8 8 Class R, Three-Pole Fuse Holder 8 Fuse Holders—250V 30A Wire Termination 60A Number of Poles Carton Qty. Catalog Number Carton Qty. Catalog Number 1 10 W231HA 10 W261HA 2 5 W232HA 5 W262HA 3 5 W233HA 5 W263HA 1 10 WR231HA — — 2 — — — — 3 5 WR233HA 1 WR263HA Number of Poles Carton Qty. Catalog Number Carton Qty. Catalog Number 1 10 W631HA 1 W661HA 2 5 W632HA 1 W662HA 3 1 W633HA 2 W663HA 1 10 WM631F — — 2 8 WM632F — — 3 6 WM633F — — 1 10 WM631G — — 2 8 WM632G — — 3 6 WM633G — — 1 10 WR631HA — — 2 5 WR632HA — — 3 5 WR633HA 5 WR663HA 1 — — — — 2 1 WMR632F — — 3 6 WMR633F — — 1 10 WMR631G — — 3 6 WMR633G — — WRR633G — — Class H Fuse Holders 8 Single collar (box lug)— sized to ampere rating 8 8 Class R Fuse Holders Single collar (box lug)— sized to ampere rating 8 8 8 Fuse Holders—600V 30A 8 Wire Termination 8 60A Class H Fuse Holders Single collar (box lug)— sized to ampere rating 8 8 Class M Fuse Holders 8 Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and binding head screw, #10 max., Cu/Al 8 Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and pressure plate screw, #10 max., Cu only 8 8 Class R Fuse Holders 8 Single collar (box lug)— sized to ampere rating 8 Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and binding head screw, #10 max., Cu/Al 8 8 Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and pressure plate screw, #10 max., Cu only 8 8 Class R Fuse Holder, Type WRR Control Transformer Fuse Blocks 8 Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and pressure plate screw, #14–#10 Cu only 8 3 6 Note 1 Three-pole device is supplied with DIN rail adapter. 8 V7-T8-132 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com 8.4 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Accessories 8 Fuse Holder Accessories Description Catalog Number Fuse puller TBP Lighted fuse puller (120 Vac) TBLP 8 8 8 Technical Data and Specifications 8 Fuse Blocks Description Specification Voltage rating 600V Ampere rating Pressure plate terminals rated for 30A Dielectric strength 1200V maximum Ambient temperature 221°F (105°C) maximum Clip/terminals Tin-plated copper alloy Screw and captive pressure plate Zinc-plated steel 8 8 8 8 Base Thermoplastic UL 94VO flammability rating DIN rail adapter Thermoplastic UL 94VO flammability rating 8 8 Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8 Fuse Blocks 8 8 8 3.00 (76.2) 0.60 (15.2) 1.25 (31.8) 8 2.24 (56.9) 0.78 (19.8) Catalog No. C350 Fuse Block 8 2.35 (59.7) Three-Pole Width Three-Pole Width Catalog No. C350 Fuse Block with DIN Rail Adapter 8 8 Fuse Holders Class H & R 250V, 30A Class M & R 600V, 30A SinglePole F Dia. A TwoPole A ThreePole A SinglePole C B D D1 D1 Width A A E ThreePole Class TwoPole ThreePole Height B Depth C H, R 250V, 30A 1.00 (25.4) 2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 3.13 (79.5) 1.56 (39.6) 250V, 60A 1.44 (36.6) 2.88 (73.2) 4.31 (109.5) 4.75 (120.7) 600V, 30/60A 1.69 (42.9) 3.38 (85.9) 5.06 (128.5) 600V, 30A 1.63 (41.4) 2.41 (61.2) A D D1 8 C E B E 8 8 D D1 Number of Mounting Holes 8 Single- TwoPole Pole ThreePole 8 Mounting Holes SinglePole 0.84 (21.3) F Dia. TwoPole A D Volts/ Amperes M, R Class H & R 250V, 60A 600V, 30/60A D Two-Pole D1 Three-Pole D1 E Diameter F 0.38 (9.7) 1.25 (31.8) 2.50 (63.5) — 0.22 (5.6) 2 2 2 2.06 (52.3) 0.50 (12.7) 1.81 (46.0) 3.13 (79.5) 1.25 (31.8) 0.22 (5.6) 2 4 4 6.94 (176.3) 2.63 (66.8) 0.63 (16.0) 2.19 (55.6) 3.75 (95.3) 3.13 (79.5) 0.28 (7.1) 2 4 4 3.00 (76.2) 1.28 (32.5) 0.38 (9.7) 0.75 (19.1) 1.50 (38.1) — 0.17 (4.3) 2 2 2 8 8 8 8 8 8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—July 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T8-133 Connectivity Solutions 9.1 SmartWire-DT XV Series HMI-PLC with SmartWire-DT SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution System Overview Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Overview Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Components Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactor Modules Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Device Modules Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 V7-T9-2 V7-T9-2 V7-T9-3 V7-T9-6 V7-T9-7 V7-T9-8 V7-T9-11 V7-T9-11 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-11 9 V7-T9-12 9 V7-T9-12 V7-T9-13 9 V7-T9-14 9 V7-T9-15 9 V7-T9-15 V7-T9-16 V7-T9-18 V7-T9-20 V7-T9-34 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-1 9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Contents SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Description 9 Page SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Device Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 9 V7-T9-6 V7-T9-11 V7-T9-12 V7-T9-15 V7-T9-20 V7-T9-34 9 9 9 9 9 9 System Overview 9 Product Description 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 The SmartWire-DT system uses a continuous green flat cable located in the control cabinet to connect motor starters, pushbutton actuators, and indicator lights. It eliminates the need for most of the conventional point-to-point control wiring— and even integrates 24 Vdc control power for contactor coils on the eight conductor flat cable. The start of the SmartWire-DT system is a gateway—it establishes the connection to standard programmable logic controller (PLC) fieldbuses, such as EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS-DP and CANopen. Because SmartWire-DT directly integrates the input/output (I/O) level in the switching devices, no conventional PLC I/O modules are needed— instead communication enabled modules are attached to standard Eaton motor control components. Thus, the PLC in the control cabinet simply consists of a central processing unit (CPU) module. Features Typical faults such as loose connections and miswired terminations are eliminated using the flat cable and the specialized connectors. Furthermore, each SmartWire-DT enabled device has individual diagnostic LEDs built in, which reduce commissioning time and troubleshooting in the field. Nodes on the SmartWire-DT network are automatically assigned addresses on the gateway with the push of a button—assigning addresses in the order that the nodes are connected. The system employs time monitoring and a watchdog timeout using the established target configuration as a reference—safely monitoring the integrity of the control scheme. SmartWire-DT has a maximum network length of 2000 ft, can be extended to pushbutton control stations outside of the control cabinet, and can connect up to 99 nodes per gateway. A software program called SWD-Assist enables the layout, planning, and system configuration of a SmartWire-DT network. ● ● ● ● ● ● Connects directly to standard XTCE contactors, XTRE control relays, and M22 pilot devices Supports EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS-DP and CANopen fieldbuses Supports up to 99 nodes on Ethernet and CANopen, and 58 nodes on PROFIBUS-DP Automatically assigns addresses to SmartWire-DT nodes Integrates and supplies 24 Vdc power to contactor and relay coils over the network Includes diagnostic bi-color LEDs on each node connection 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 System Overview Diagram 9 SmartWire-DT Connection System 9 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 9 9 9 10 9 11 14 9 9 7 9 7 9 9 12 9 9 8 9 15 13 4 5 5 3 9 6 9 Item Number Description Item Number 9 Description 1 Gateway to PLC fieldbus network 9 Round cable 2 Flat cable 10 Pilot device control station 3 Modules for XT contactors with XTPR manual motor protectors 11 Emergency stop control station 4 Powerfeed module 1 (optional 24 Vdc power feeder) 12 Cabinet cable adapter plug 5 Modules for XT contactors with XTPE electronic manual motor protectors 13 Powerfeed module 2 (optional 15 Vdc and 24 Vdc power feeder) 6 Digital I/O module 14 Digital I/O module (for connection of sensors and actuators) 7 Modules for M22 pilot devices 15 Terminating resistor 8 Cabinet cable adapter socket 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-3 9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution System Components Overview 1 9 4 2 9 5 5 6 9 9 9 4 9 3 9 Future Product 10 9 12 13 10 9 8 9 7 9 9 9 11 9 9 5 5 9 15 19 18 19 17 9 9 5 16 4 32 17 5 5 14 9 5 19 17 4 5 5 18 5 20 9 22 21 21 4 9 31 23 9 24 24 9 24 9 22 25 9 Future Products 9 28 28 9 30 27 9 27 9 27 26 4 9 29 5 5 9 V7-T9-4 5 4 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 9 Item Number Description Item Number Description 1 Programmable logic controller (PLC) 17 M22 mounting adapter 2 Gateway 18 SmartWire-DT M22 modules 3 XV HMI-PLC 19 M22 pilot devices 4 Flat plugs 20 Cabinet cable adapter 5 Device plug 21 Plug connector 6 I/O modules 22 M22 surface mounting enclosure 7 Contactor module 23 PCB module for M22 pushbutton stations 8 XT Contactors 24 M22 modules, base mount 9 Contactor module with HOA switch 25 Universal module, base mount 10 XTPR manual motor controller 26 Adapter for flat/round cable for DIN rail mounting 11 PKE contactor module 27 XTPE module (manual motor protection) 12 XTPE manual motor controller 28 XTPE manual motor protector 13 Soft starter DS7 with electronic motor protection from XTPE 29 Terminating resistor 14 Powerfeed module 30 DS7 soft starters 15 Universal module, front mount 31 Round cable, 8-pole 16 M22 LED elements, front mount 32 SmartWire-DT configuration software, SWD-Assist 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-5 9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Contents System Components Description 9 Page System Components Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Device Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-7 V7-T9-8 V7-T9-11 V7-T9-12 V7-T9-15 V7-T9-20 V7-T9-34 9 9 9 9 9 System Components 9 Product Description 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 The start of the SmartWire-DT system is a gateway module. The gateway connects as a node to a programmable logic controller (PLC) fieldbus. The PLC used must have a fieldbus polling master module or input/output (I/O) scanner card so that the gateway can connect as a node on the fieldbus network. SmartWire-DT can connect to EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS-DP and CANopen fieldbuses. To plan and lay out a SmartWire-DT network, a MS Windows compatible software program called SWD-Assist is available as a free download from the Eaton website. The SWD-Assist configuration software will calculate the control power requirements needed and generate a bill of materials of all the required components. Gateway Modules Gateway modules connect the SmartWire-DT system to the PLC. They are connected as nodes to the existing PLC fieldbus and are the start of the SmartWire-DT connection system. Gateways are available with Ethernet, PROFIBUS-DP and CANopen protocols. Powerfeed Modules Powerfeed modules feed auxiliary 24 Vdc power and/or 15 Vdc network power into the SmartWire-DT flat cable. The auxiliary 24 Vdc power is needed for the power supply of contactors and the 15 Vdc network power is used for supplying power to additional SmartWire-DT nodes. Powerfeed modules are also used to create zone control or groups of devices controlled by a single Emergency Stop. Digital and Analog I/O Modules Digital and analog I/O modules are connected as nodes on the SmartWire-DT network and allow standard or generic devices to be connected to the SmartWire-DT system. They can be connected anywhere along the flat cable network and can therefore be positioned in the control panel to help reduce the I/O wiring. Contactor Modules Contactor modules fit into standard XT contactors and control relays directly on top, in place of a top mounted auxiliary contact block. The modules fit all XTCE size B and C frame contactors and XTRE control relays. Pilot Device Modules Pilot device modules fit into standard M22 pilot devices in both front mount and base mount configurations. Single and double contact modules with and without LEDs are available to meet a wide variety of control circuit requirements. Flat and Round Cables The flat cable is an 8 AWG 24 conductor cable that is flexible, durable, and rated for 600V so that it can be placed in the panel wiring duct along with 480V or 600V power conductors. It has two prominent features: (a) arrows indicating the front of the cable and the direction away from the gateway and (b) black edging indicating the polarity of the flat cable, the 15 Vdc wire and the reference mark for installing the device plugs and flat plugs. The round cable has 4 AWG 20 and 4 AWG 24 wires and is 300V rated. It is used outside the control panel to connect peripherals such as pushbutton control stations to the SmartWire-DT network. Cable adapters are available to transition a flat cable to a round cable connection and IP67 type connectors are available to provide quick-disconnect cable connections on the round cable. Other System Accessories Other accessories for the SmartWire-DT system include connectors, jumpers, bushings, plugs, and sockets, flat to round cable adapters and crimping tools. 9 V7-T9-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Product Selection Gateway Module 9 Gateway Modules Gateway modules connect the SmartWire-DT system to the programmable logic controller (PLC). They are connected as nodes to the existing PLC fieldbus and are the start of the SmartWire-DT connection system. 9 9 Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Ethernet Gateway Connection to EtherNet/IP or Modbus TCP Automatic baud rate detection 10/100 Mbps Address set with DIP switch or DHCP Two RJ45 sockets Connection of up to 99 SmartWire-DT nodes 1 EU5C-SWD-EIP-MODTCP PROFIBUS-DP Gateway Automatic baud rate detection from 9.6 Kbps to 12 Mbps Address range 1–126 9-pole SUB-D socket Connection of up to 58 SmartWire-DT modes 1 CANopen Gateway Automatic baud rate detection from 10 Kbps to 1 Mbps Address range 1–32 9-pole SUB-D socket Connection of up to 99 SmartWire-DT modes 1 9 9 9 EU5C-SWD-DP 9 9 EU5C-SWD-CAN 9 9 9 Powerfeed Module Powerfeed Modules Powerfeed modules feed auxiliary 24 Vdc power and/or 15 Vdc network power into the SmartWire-DT flat cable. The auxiliary 24 Vdc power is needed for the power supply of contactors and the 15 Vdc network power is used for supplying power to additional SmartWire-DT nodes. Powerfeed modules are also used to create zone control or groups of devices controlled by a single Emergency Stop. Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Powerfeed module 1 (for 24 Vdc auxiliary power) 1 EU5C-SWD-PF1-1 Powerfeed module 2 (for 24 Vdc auxiliary power and 15 Vdc network power) 1 EU5C-SWD-PF2-1 9 9 9 9 9 Digital I/O Module Analog I/O Module Digital I/O Modules Digital input/output (I/O) modules are connected as nodes on the SmartWire-DT network and allow standard or generic devices to be connected to the SmartWire-DT system. They can be connected anywhere along the flat cable network and can therefore be positioned in the control panel to help reduce the I/O wiring. 9 Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 9 Digital module with 8 digital inputs 24 Vdc 1 EU5E-SWD-8DX Digital module with 4 digital inputs 24 Vdc three-wire connections 1 EU5E-SWD-4DX Digital module with 8 digital outputs 24 Vdc 10.5A 1 EU5E-SWD-X8D Digital module with 4 digital inputs 24 Vdc and 4 transistor outputs 24 Vdc/0.5A 1 EU5E-SWD-4D4D Digital module with 4 digital inputs 24 Vdc and 2 relay outputs 250 Vac 1 EU5E-SWD-4D2R 9 9 9 Analog I/O Modules Analog input/output (I/O) modules are connected as nodes on the SmartWire-DT network and allow standard or generic devices to be connected to the SmartWire-DT system. They can be connected anywhere along the flat cable network and can therefore be positioned in the control panel to help reduce the I/O wiring. Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Analog module with 4 analog inputs 0–10V or 0–20 mA 1 EU5E-SWD-4AX Analog module with 2 analog inputs 0–10V or 0–20 mA and 2 analog outputs 0–10V or 0–20 mA 1 EU5E-SWD-2A2A RTD module with 4 temperature inputs PT100, PT1000 or Ni1000 1 EU5E-SWD-4PT 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-7 9.1 9 SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Accessories System Accessories Accessories for the SmartWire-DT system includes cables, connectors, jumpers, bushings, plugs, sockets, flat to round cable adapters, and crimping tools. 9 9 Description 9 9 Connectivity Solutions Length Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number For SmartWire-DT network inside the control panel 328.1 ft (100m) 1 SWD4-100LF8-24 Complete with flat plugs SWD4-8MF2 installed at both ends 9.8 ft (3m) 1 SWD4-3LF8-24-2S 16.4 ft (5m) 1 SWD4-5LF8-24-2S 32.8 ft (10m) 1 SWD4-10LF8-24-2S 164.0 ft (50m) 1 SWD4-50LR8-24 Flat Cable, 8 AWG 24, 600V Flat Cable 9 SWD4-8SF2 SWD4-8SF2SWD4-8S 9 Round Cable, 4 AWG 20 and 4 AWG 24, 300V 9 Round Cable For SmartWire-DT network outside of the control panel 9 9 9 Universal (Placeholder) Modules Universal—Front Front mount 20 M22-SWD-NOP Universal—Base Base mount 20 M22-SWD-NOPC — 10 SWD4-8SF2-5 — 10 SWD4-8MF2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Device Plugs Device Plug For connection to SmartWire-DT modules or nodes 9 9 9 Flat Plugs 9 Flat Plug For connection to SmartWire-DT system components: gateways, powerfeed modules, coupling and terminating resistor 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-8 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 System Accessories, continued Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 5 SWD4-SEL8-10 9 9 Device Plug Jumpers Device Plug Jumper For bridging open, spare or inverted device plugs 9 9 Control Station PCB Jumpers PCB Jumper For bridging open mounting locations on the control station printed circuit board 5 9 M22-SWD-SEL8-10 9 9 9 Coupling Coupling For connecting or joining flat cables with flat plugs 1 9 SWD4-8SFF2-5 9 SWD4-8SF F2-5 + 15V 9 9 Terminating Resistor Terminating Resistor For terminating the end of the network on a flat cable 1 SWD4-RC8-10 9 SWD4-RC8 -10 9 + 15V Panel Cable Adapter Adapter For flat cable (plug) to round cable terminals 1 9 SWD4-8FRF-10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 + 15 V 9 Cabinet Cable Adapter Socket Adapter Socket For flat cable (plug) to round cable (plug) 1 9 SWD4-SFL8-20 9 9 Cabinet Cable Adapter Plug Adapter Plug For flat cable (plug) to round cable (socket) 1 9 SWD4-SML8-20 9 9 ON OFF OUT IN PCB PCBs 9 For surface mounting M22 enclosures and for base-mount pilot device modules Includes a built-in switchable terminating resistor 9 Element enclosure PCB 1 1 M22-SWD-I1-LP01 Element enclosure PCB 2 1 M22-SWD-I2-LP01 Element enclosure PCB 3 1 M22-SWD-I3-LP01 Element enclosure PCB 4 1 M22-SWD-I4-LP01 Element enclosure PCB 6 1 M22-SWD-I6-LP01 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-9 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution System Accessories, continued 9 Description 9 Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Connectors for Round Cables Connector Socket Round cable 8-pole socket 1 SWD4-SF8-67 Connector Plug Round cable 8-pole plug 1 SWD4-SM8-67 Connector (Right Angle) Right angle round cable 8-pole socket 1 SWD4-SF8-67W Right angle round cable 8-pole plug 1 SWD4-SM8-67W 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Enclosure Bushings Bushing Socket Enclosure bushing, 8-pole socket, M20 1 SWD4-SF8-20 Bushing Plug Enclosure bushing, 8-pole plug, M20 1 SWD4-SM8-20 1 V-M20 9 9 9 9 9 Cord Grip Cord Grip Round cable cord grip, M20 9 9 Crimping Tool Device Plug Tool Device plug crimping tool 1 SWD4-CRP-1 Flat Plug Tool Flat plug crimping tool 1 SWD4-CRP-2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-10 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents System Controllers Description Page System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers Contactor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Device Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-6 V7-T9-12 V7-T9-15 V7-T9-20 V7-T9-34 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 System Controllers 9 XV Series HMI-PLC with SmartWire-DT 9 Product Description Features The XV HMI-PLC controller with SmartWire-DT™ master is a powerful combination of logic, visualization and connectivity to motor control devices. It is ideal for small to mid-range PLC applications where integrated logic and visualization is advantageous and/or where remote administration is critical. The SmartWire-DT master can accept 99 nodes on a 2000 foot-long network. ● ● ● ● ● Built-in SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes Brilliant image display with 65,536 colors High resolution resistive touch TFT displays 3.5 in, 5.7 in or 7 in widescreen displays in robust plastic housings and bezels, or 5.7 in, 8.4 in or 10.4 in displays in high-end aluminum front bezels and metal housings Standards and Certifications ● ● ● ● Ethernet and RS485 serial ports on all models PROFIBUS-DP or CANopen master on all models larger than 3.5 in Programmable with IEC 61131-3 compliant XSoft-CoDeSys software Easy connection direct to motor control components or I/O modules on SmartWire-DT flat cable ● ● ● ● CE UL cUL RoHS 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Note: For product selection of XV Series HMI-PLCs with SmartWire-DT, see Tab 4 in this volume. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-11 9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Contents Contactor Modules Description 9 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactor Modules Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Device Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Contactor Modules 9 Product Description Features Contactor modules fit onto standard XT contactors and control relays directly on top, in place of a top mounted auxiliary contact block. The modules fit all XTCE size B and C frame contactors and XTRE control relays. ● 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 These modules facilitate direct connection to the SmartWire-DT flat cable and eliminate the traditional pointto-point wiring to the PLC input and output modules as well as wiring to the contactor coils. ● ● ● ● ● Integrated 24 Vdc coil power on network and plug-in modules Integrated switch position polling Integrated mechanical switch position display Integrated feedback circuit to PLC Built-in diagnostic bi-color LEDs on each module Connection to SmartWire-DT flat cable via quick disconnect device plugs 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-12 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Page V7-T9-6 V7-T9-11 V7-T9-13 V7-T9-14 V7-T9-15 V7-T9-20 V7-T9-34 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Product Identification 9 SmartWire-DT Contactor Modules 9 9 9 9 9 9 1 2 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 4 1 5 6 9 3 Item Number Description 1 Flat cable 2 Terminating resistor (SWD4-RC8-10) 3 Device plug (SWD4-85F2-5) 4 Modules for XT contactors with XTPR manual motor protectors, with 1-0-A switch (DIL-SWD-32-002) 5 Modules for XT contactors with XTPR manual motor protectors (DIL-SWD-32-001) 6 Device plug jumper (SWD4-SEL8-10) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-13 9.1 9 9 SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Product Selection Contactor Modules 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions PKE Contactor Module 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Contactor Modules 123 SmartWire-DT module for attachment to XTCE007–XTCE032 contactors and XTRE control relays. One module is required per contactor. Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Two digital inputs for voltage-free contacts. One electrical interlock for the surface mounting of reversing combinations. Messages: Switch status contactor, status of the digital inputs 1 and 2. Commands: Contactor actuation. 5 DIL-SWD-32-001 Two digital inputs for voltage-free contacts. One electrical interlock for the surface mounting of reversing combinations. 1-0-A switch for manual or automatic operation. Messages: Contactor switching position, status of the digital inputs 1 and 2, 1-0-A switch position. Commands: Contactor actuation. 5 DIL-SWD-32-002 Description Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Connecting cable between module and XTPE trip block included as standard. One electrical interlock for the surface mounting of reversing starters. 1-0-A switch for manual or automatic operation. Selectable overload relay function for connecting the contactor on overload. Messages: Switch position contactor/PKE/1-0-A switch Motor current in % Thermal motor image in % Trip-indicating auxiliary contact (Overload, Short-circuit,...) Set value of overload releases Set value Verification time (CLASS), Part no. Trip block. Commands: Contactor actuation, activation of overload relay function (ZMR) 4 PKE-SWD-32 PKE Contactor Module SmartWire-DT module for connection of XTPE manual motor controllers. One module is required per contactor and XTPE manual motor protector. Design Note The number of motor starters or XTCE contactors that can be connected is dependent upon the power consumption of the contactor coils. To increase the number of SmartWire-DT modules that can be connected. Powerfeed modules can be used. 9 9 24 Vdc 9 9 XTCE007 XTCE009 XTCE012 XTCE015 XTCE018 XTCE025 XTCE032 Pick-up power W 3 3 4.5 4.5 12 12 12 Sealing power W 3 3 4.5 4.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 9 Notes 1 Take account of the maximum current consumption of the contactor coils per SmartWire-DT line. 2 A2 connections must not be linked. 3 Connection terminals for electrical interlocking are not suitable for safety technology. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-14 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Contents Pilot Device Modules Description System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contactor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pilot Device Modules Product Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page V7-T9-6 V7-T9-11 V7-T9-12 V7-T9-16 V7-T9-18 V7-T9-20 V7-T9-34 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Pilot Device Modules Product Description Features Pilot device modules fit onto standard M22 pilot devices in both front mount and base mount configurations. Single and double contact modules with and without LEDs are available to meet a wide variety of control circuit requirements. ● ● ● 9 Front or base mount modules Built-in diagnostic bi-color LEDs on each module Connection to SmartWire-DT flat cable via quick disconnect device plugs 9 9 9 9 These modules facilitate direct connection to the SmartWire-DT flat cable and eliminate the traditional pointto-point wiring to the PLC input and output modules. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-15 9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Product Identification Pilot Device Modules Connections 1 9 9 1 9 9 2 7 9 8 9 3 9 4 9 9 9 1 9 9 5 9 6 9 9 9 9 10 15 9 9 11 9 9 12 14 9 9 13 9 22 9 17 21 9 16 9 17 20 19 9 18 9 V7-T9-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Pilot Device Modules Connections Item Number Description 1 M22 contact module, front mount (M22-SWD-KC22) 2 M22 LED module, front mount (M22-SWD-LED_) 3 Module, front mount (M22-SWD-K11) 4 M22 contact module with LED, front mount (M22-SWD-K11LED_) 5 M22 contact module with LED, front mount (M22-SWD-K22LED_) 6 Device plug jumper (SWD4-SEL8-10) 7 Device plug (SWD4-85F2-5) 8 Flat cable 9 M22 LED module, base mount (M22-SWD-LEDC_) 10 M22 contact module, base mount (M22-SWD-KC11) 11 M22 contact module with LED, base mount (M22-SWD-K11LEDC_) 12 M22 contact module, base mount (M22-SWD-KC22) 13 M22 contact module with LED, base mount (M22-SWD-K22LEDC_) 14 1 element enclosure PCB (M22-SWD-I1-1P01) 15 M22 control station enclosure with M20 knockouts 16 Control station PCB jumper (M22-SWD-SEL8-10) 17 Round cable 18 Round cable plug (SWD4-SM8-67) 19 Enclosure bushing socket (SWD4-SF8-20) 20 Round cable socket (SWD4-SF8-67) 21 Enclosure bushing plug (SWD4-SM8-20) 22 M20 cord grip (V-M20) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-17 9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Product Selection M22 Pilot Device Modules Connections M22 Contact Modules, without LEDs 9 Number of Changeover Contacts 9 Contact Sequence Contact Travel Diagram Stroke in Connection with Front Element Configuration Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 20 M22-SWD-K11 10 M22-SWD-K22 20 M22-SWD-KC11 10 M22-SWD-KC22 Front Mount 9 M22-SWD-K11 1 9 1 0 1.2 2.8 4 3 6 2 5 5.5 9 9 M22-SWD-K22 2 9 1 0 1.2 2.8 4 3 6 2 5 5.5 9 9 9 Base Mount M22-SWD-KC11 1 0 1.2 9 2.8 2 3 1 2 3 1 5.5 9 9 M22-SWD-KC22 2 0 1.2 9 2.8 5.5 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-18 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution M22 Contact Modules, with LEDs Number of Changeover Contacts Contact Sequence Contact Travel Diagram Stroke in Connection with Front Element 9 Configuration Color LED Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 9 20 M22-SWD-K11LED-W 9 M22-SWD-K11LED-B 9 M22-SWD-K11LED-G 9 M22-SWD-K11LED-R 9 Front Mount M22-SWD-K11LED_ 1 1 0 1.2 M22-SWD-K22LED_ 2.8 1 2.8 3 6 2 5 5.5 2 0 1.2 4 4 3 6 2 10 M22-SWD-K22LED-W 5 M22-SWD-K22LED-G M22-SWD-K22LED-R 9 9 9 Base Mount M22-SWD-K11LEDC_ 9 M22-SWD-K22LED-B 5.5 1 2 0 1.2 2.8 3 1 20 M22-SWD-K11LEDC-W M22-SWD-K11LEDC-B 5.5 9 9 M22-SWD-K11LEDC-G M22-SWD-K11LEDC-R M22-SWD-K22LEDC_ 2 2 0 1.2 2.8 3 1 5.5 10 9 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-W 9 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-B 9 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-G 9 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-R 9 9 M22 LED Modules Configuration Color LED Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 20 M22-SWD-LED-W 9 Front Mount M22-SWD-LED_ 1 4 3 6 2 9 5 M22-SWD-LED-B 9 M22-SWD-LED-G 9 M22-SWD-LED-R 9 Base Mount M22-SWD-LEDC_ 2 3 1 20 9 M22-SWD-LEDC-W M22-SWD-LEDC-B 9 M22-SWD-LEDC-G 9 M22-SWD-LEDC-R 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-19 9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Technical Data and Specifications XV Series HMI-PLCs Model XV-102 Screen Size 3.5 in 5.7 in 7.0 in 5.7 in XV-152 8.4 in Operating system WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional WinCE 5.0 Professional Touchscreen technology Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive Resistive Display, colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Color TFT, 64k colors Pixel resolution (landscape) portrait mode also available QVGA 320 x 240 VGA 640 x 480 WVGA 800 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 VGA 640 x 480 Brightness (cd/m2) 250 250 250 350 350 350 Backlight LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming 10.4 in LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming LED, selectable dimming Lifespan of backlight (half-life) 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 40,000 hrs 9 Processor 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz 32 bit RISC, 400 MHz Volatile memory 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 64 MB DRAM 9 Non-volatile memory 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND, 1 SD card slot 9 Real time clock Yes Communication ports Ethernet 10/100, RS-485 or RS-232 USB Device Slots for COMM modules None 9 9 9 9 9 9 Power supply rated voltage Yes 9 9 9 Yes Ethernet 10/100, RS-485, RS-232 USB Host, USB Device None None Yes Yes Ethernet 10/100, RS-485, RS-232 USB Host, USB Device None None None 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) with polarity protection Continuous current consumption 0.2 (max. amps) 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.6 0.6 Starting current inrush (A2s) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Operation—relative humidity, non-condensing 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% 0 to 50°C, 10 to 95% Storage/transport—relative humidity, non-condensing –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% –20 to 60°C, 10 to 95% Ambient conditions IEC 60068-2-27 15g for 11 ms duration IEC 60068-2-27 15g for 11 ms duration Vibration IEC 60068-2-6 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement 9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement 60–150 Hz: 2g acceleration IEC 60068-2-6 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm displacement 9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm displacement 60–150 Hz: 2g acceleration Agency certifications and standards CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS CE, UL/cUL, CSA (pending), RoHS 9 9 Yes 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND/ 2 MB NOR, 1 SD card slot 24 Vdc nominal (–20%/+25%) with polarity protection Shock 9 125 KB NVRAM/64 MB NAND/ 2 MB NOR, 1 SD card slot Protection type Front IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) IP65, NEMA 4X (indoor) Rear IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 IP20, NEMA 1 Housing material Plastic Plastic Plastic Metal Metal Metal Dimensions WxHxD (mm) 136 x 100 x 30 170 x 130 x 39 210 x 135 x 38 212 x 156 x 53 275 x 208 x 53 345 x 260 x 54 Mounting cutout WxH (mm) 123 x 87 157 x 117 197 x 122 198 x 142 261 x 194 329 x 238 9 Approximate weight lbs (kg) 0.7 (0.3) 1.3 (0.6) 1.3 (0.6) 2.9 (1.3) 4.3 (2.1) 6.1 (3.0) 9 Ability to run third party software No No No No No No 9 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 development software SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S (seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M (multi-seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S (seat) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M (multi-seat) 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-20 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Gateways and Powerfeed Modules Description Unit EU5C-SWD-DP Gateway EU5C-SWD-CAN Gateway EU5C-SWD-PF1-1 Powerfeed EU5C-SWD-PF2-1 Powerfeed IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 9 9 General Standards 9 EU5C-SWD-EIP-MODTCP Gateway Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.38 x 3.54 x 4.88 (35 x 90 x 124) 1.38 x 3.54 x 5.0 (35 x 90 x 127) 1.38 x 3.54 x 5.0 (35 x 90 x 127) 1.38 x 3.54 x 4.88 (35 x 90 x 124) 1.38 x 3.54 x 4.88 (35 x 90 x 124) Weight lbs (kg) 0.37 (0.17) 0.35 (0.16) 0.35 (0.16) 0.24 (0.11) 0.37 (0.17) 9 9 Mounting Top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Mounting position Vertical Vertical Vertical DIN rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Vertical Vertical 9 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 9 Hz 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 9 Impacts 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Constant acceleration 1g Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) Overvoltage category II II II II II Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 9 9 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) Contact discharge (Level 2) Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz kV 8 8 8 8 8 kV 4 4 4 4 4 V/m 10 10 10 10 10 9 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 3 3 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) Supply cables 9 9 EN 55011 Class A kV 2 2 2 9 CAN/DP bus cable kV 1 1 1 — — SmartWire-DT cables kV 1 1 1 1 1 9 kV 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 9 kV 1 1 1 1 1 V 10 10 10 10 10 Surge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 1) Supply cables CAN/DP bus cable Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) 9 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) °F (°C) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) Condensation 9 Prevent with suitable measures Storage °F (°C) Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) 5–95 5–95 5–95 5–95 9 5–95 Supply Voltage UAux SM Puffer Bremer V Residual ripple on the input voltage % Protection against polarity reversal Max. current (Imax) A 9 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) <5 5 5 5 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 1 1 1 3 3 9 9 3 3 Short-circuit rating 3 9 No, external fuse FAZ Z3 Power loss W Potential isolation Rated operating voltage of 24 Vdc modes V Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 Normally 1 No No No No No Typ. UAux –0.2 Typ. UAux –0.2 Typ. UAux –0.2 Typ. UAux –0.2 Typ. UAux –0.2 Note 1 If contactors with a total current consumption >3A are connected, a powerfeed module EU5C-SWD-PF1/2 has to be used. 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-21 9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Gateways and Powerfeed Modules, continued EU5C-SWD-EIP-MODTCP Gateway EU5C-SWD-DP Gateway EU5C-SWD-CAN Gateway <5 <5 Yes A Inrush current and duration A Heat dissipation at 24 Vdc W Description Unit 9 V Input voltage ripple % 9 Siemens MPI, (optional) 9 9 9 9 9 Rated current (I) Overload proof Potential isolation between UPow and 15V SmartWire-DT supply voltage <5 <5 <5 Yes Yes — Yes 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 12.5 A/6 ms 12.5 A/6 ms 12.5 A/6 ms 12.5 A/6 ms 12.5 A/6 ms 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 No No No — Yes 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) Bridging voltage dips ms 10 10 10 — 10 Repetition rate s 1 1 1 — 1 Yes Yes Yes No Yes Status indication (LED) SmartWire-DT Supply Voltage Rated operating voltage (Ue) V 14.5 ±3% 14.5 ±3% 14.5 ±3% 14.5 ±3% 14.5 ±3% Max. current (Imax) A 0.7 1 0.7 1 0.7 1 0.7 0.7 Yes Yes Yes No Yes 9 Short-circuit proof 9 Connection type 9 EU5C-SWD-PF2-1 Powerfeed Supply Voltage UPow Supply voltage 9 EU5C-SWD-PF1-1 Powerfeed Connection Supply Voltages Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Solid mm2 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) Flexible with ferrule mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 SmartWire-DT Network 9 9 9 9 Station type SmartWire-DT master SmartWire-DT master SmartWire-DT master — — Number of SmartWire-DT modes 99 58 99 — — Baud rates 125 250 125 125 — — Address allocation Automatic Automatic Automatic None None Status indication (LED) SmartWire-DT master Green Green Green Green Green Configurations Red Red Red Red Red Connections Plug, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole 2 x plug, 8-pole 2 x plug, 8-pole 9 Plug connectors Blade terminal SWD4-8MF2 Flat plug SWD4-8MF2 Flat plug SWD4-8MF2 Two flat plugs SWD4-8MF2 Two flat plugs SWD4-8MF2 9 Bus protocol Ethernet IP/Modbus TCP slave PROFIBUS-DP CANopen — — Baud rates 10/100 mB Up to 12 mB To 1 mB — — Automatic Automatic Automatic — — — 2–125 2–32 — — DIP switch/DHCP/BOOTP selection via DIP switch DIP switch DIP switch — — 9 9 Fieldbus Interface Address allocation Station address 9 Address allocation 9 Status display fieldbus interface (LED) Link status: yellow (10 mB), green (100 mB) flashing Two-colored red/green Two-colored red/green — — 9 Terminating resistor — Switchable via plug DIP switches — — Connection design for field bus 2 x RJ45 (2-channel switch) 1 x SUB-D socket, 9-pole 1 x SUB-D plug, 9-pole — — 9 Potential isolation Yes Yes — — 9 Note 1 If contactors with a total current consumption >0.7 A are connected, a Power Feeder module EU5C-SWD-PF2 has to be used. Yes 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-22 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Input/Output Modules Description Unit EU5E-SWD-8DX EU5E-SWD-4DX EU5E-SWD-4D4D EU5E-SWD-4D2R EU5E-SWD-X8D 9 General Standards IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) Weight lbs (kg) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 9 9 0.22 (0.10) 0.22 (0.10) 0.22 (0.10) 0.22 (0.10) 0.22 (0.10) Mounting DIN rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Top-hat rail IEC/ EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm DIN rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Top-hat rail IEC/ EN 60715, 35 mm Mounting position Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Constant acceleration 1g Hz 9 9 Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) 9 9 9 Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Impacts 9 9 9 9 9 Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 9 9 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Overvoltage category II II II II II Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 kV 8 8 8 8 8 kV 4 4 4 4 4 9 V/m 10 10 10 10 10 9 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 3 3 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 1 1 1 1 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A 9 9 Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) Contact discharge (Level 2) Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) Supply cables 9 9 kV 2 2 2 2 2 Signal lines kV 1 1 1 1 1 SmartWire-DT cables kV 1 1 1 1 1 9 kV 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 9 V 10 10 10 10 10 Surge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 1) Supply cables Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) °F (°C) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) Condensation 9 Prevent with suitable measures Storage °F (°C) Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/ EN 60068-2-30) % –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) 9 5–95 5–95 5–95 5–95 5–95 Station type SmartWire-DT (node) SmartWire-DT (slave) SmartWire-DT (node) SmartWire-DT (node) SmartWire-DT (slave) Address allocation Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic SmartWire-DT status (LED) Green Green Green Green Green Connection Plug 9 8-pole Plug, 8-pole 8-pole 8-pole Plug, 8-pole 9 See Page V7-T9-33 9 9 SmartWire-DT Network Connection plug External device plug SWD4-8SF2-5 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 Note 1 Minimum length 8 mm. 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-23 9.1 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Input/Output Modules, continued Description Unit EU5E-SWD-8DX EU5E-SWD-4DX EU5E-SWD-4D4D EU5E-SWD-4D2R EU5E-SWD-X8D 9 Connection Supply and I/O Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals 9 Solid mm2 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) Flexible with ferrule 1 mm2 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 9 24 Vdc Supply for Output Supply Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) 24 Vdc (–15%/+20%) Residual ripple on the input voltage % — <5 5 — <5 — Yes Yes — Yes 8 41 4 4 — Typ. 4 at 24 Vdc Typ. 4 at 24 Vdc Typ. 4 at 24 Vdc Typ. 4 at 24 Vdc Typ. 4 at 24 Vdc 9 Connection type 9 Protection against polarity reversal 9 Quantity Digital Inputs Input current mA 9 Voltage level to IEC/EN 61131-2 9 Input delay 9 9 Limit value type 1 Low <5 Vdc; High >15 Vdc High <0.2 ms <0.2 ms <0.2 ms <0.2 ms <0.2 ms Low <0.2 ms <0.2 ms <0.2 ms <0.2 ms <0.2 ms Yellow Yellow Yellow Yellow — SmartWire-DT status (LED) Power Supply l+, l- 9 Overload proof — Yes, with diagnostics — — — Output current per input supply A — <0.5 — — — 9 Supply voltage V — Ue 0.16V — — — — — 4 — 8 Output current A — — Normally 0.5 at 24 Vdc — Normally 0.5 at 24 Vdc Short-circuit tripping current A — — Max. 1.2 over 3 ms — Max. 1.2 over 3 ms Lamp load (RLL) W — — 3 — <3 — Yes, with diagnostics 9 9 9 9 Transistor Outputs Number Overload proof — — Yes, with diagnostics Switching capacity — — EN 60947-5-1 utilization — category DC-13 EN 60947-5-1 utilization category DC-13 — — — — Yellow Status display LED 9 Relay Outputs 9 Number — — — 2 — Contact type art — — — N/O contact — Utilization category AC-1, 250V, 6A — — >6 x 104 — Utilization category AC-15, 250V, 3A — — — >5 x 104 — Utilization category DC-13, 24V, 1A — — — >2 x 105 — — — — 230 — 9 9 Operations 9 Safe isolation Minimum load current mA — — — 100 mA, 12 Vdc — 9 Pick-up/drop-out time ms — — — 5/2.5 — Bounce duration ms — — — Normally 1.5 — 9 Short-circuit protection — — — External 4A gL/gG — Status display outputs (LED) — — Yellow Yellow — Yes 9 Vac Potential Isolation 9 Inputs for SmartWire-DT Yes Yes Yes Yes Transistor outputs for SmartWire-DT — Yes Yes — — 9 Transistor outputs for inputs — — No — — Relays for SmartWire-DT — — — Yes — 9 Relays for inputs — — — Yes — Relays for relays — — — Yes — 9 9 Note 1 Three-wire connection with power supply l+, l-. V7-T9-24 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Analog I/O Modules Description Unit EU5E-SWD-4AX EU5E-SWD-2A2A EU5E-SWD-4PT IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2/EN 50178 9 General Standards 9 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) 1.38 x 3.54 x 3.97 (35 x 90 x 101) Weight lbs (kg) 0.22 (0.10) 0.22 (0.10) 0.22 (0.10) 9 9 Mounting Top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Top-hat rail IEC/EN 60715, 35 mm Mounting position Vertical Vertical Vertical IP20 IP20 IP20 Hz 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Impacts 9 9 9 Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 9 Overvoltage category II II II 9 Pollution degree 2 2 2 9 kV 8 8 8 kV 4 4 4 9 V/m 10 10 10 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 1 1 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A 9 9 9 Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Protection type (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Constant acceleration 1g 9 9 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) Contact discharge (Level 2) Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) Supply cables 9 9 kV 2 2 2 Signal lines kV 2 2 2 SmartWire-DT cables kV 2 2 2 Supply cables 1.0 kV Supply cables 1.0 kV Supply cables 1.0 kV V 10 10 10 9 °F (°C) 13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) 13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) 13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) 9 Prevent with suitable measures Prevent with suitable measures Prevent with suitable measures Storage °F (°C) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 5–95 5–95 5–95 9 Station type SmartWire-DT slave SmartWire-DT slave SmartWire-DT slave Baud rate setting Automatic Automatic Automatic 9 Green Green Surge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 1) Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) Condensation SmartWire-DT Network SmartWire-DT status LED LED Green Connection 9 9 Plug: 8-pole/Connection plug: External device plug SWD4-8SF2-5 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 9 9 Connection Supply and I/O Connection type Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals Solid mm2 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) Flexible with ferrule 1 mm2 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.25–1.5 (AWG 24–16) Rated operational voltage (Ue) V 24 Vdc –15%/+20% 24 Vdc –15%/+20% 24 Vdc –15%/+20% Residual ripple on the input voltage % <5 <5 <5 Current consumption mA 10 50 — Yes Yes Yes 9 24 Vdc Supply for Output Supply Protection against polarity reversal 9 9 9 Note 1 Minimum length 8 mm. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9 V7-T9-25 9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Analog I/O Modules, continued Description Unit EU5E-SWD-4AX EU5E-SWD-2A2A EU5E-SWD-4PT Four (two-wire connection, screened, length <10m) Two (two-wire connection, screened, length <10m) — Voltage, current Voltage, current — Adjustable Adjustable — Analog Inputs Quantity Parameterization Part no. Averaging Voltage Input voltage Input impedance Maximum current Input current Input impedance V 0–10 0–10 — k ohms 13.3 13.3 — — mA 0–20 0–20 ohms < 250 < 250 — Bit 12 12 — 9 Resolution Conversion time ms 20 20 — 9 Total error % ±1 ±1 — Repetition accuracy % ±0.5 ±0.5 — 9 Dielectric strength V ±30 ±30 — Number — Two (two-wire connection, screened) — Parameterization Part no. — Voltage, current — — — — V — 0–10 — mA — 10 — 9 9 9 9 9 Analog Outputs Averaging Voltage Output voltage Maximum output current Maximum current Output current mA — 0–20 — ohms — <500 — — Yes — 9 Resolution Bit — 12 — Conversion time ms — 20 — 9 Total error % — ±1 — Repetition accuracy % — ±0.5 — 9 Temperature Inputs Number — — Four (two-, three-wire connection, screened, length <10m) Parameterization Averaging — — Adjustable — — PT100, PT1000, Ni1000 — — PT100, PT1000: –58° to 392° (–50° to 200°) Ni1000: –58° to 302° (–50° to 150°) 9 9 9 9 Load resistance Overload and short-circuit proof Temperature sensor Temperature range °F (°C) 9 9 9 9 Resolution °F (°C) — — 32° (0.1°) Conversion time ms — — 250 °C, °F, raw value Display — — Total error % — — ±1 Repetition accuracy % — — ±0.5 Yes Potential Isolation Inputs for SmartWire-DT Yes Yes Outputs to SmartWire-DT — Yes — 9 Input to input No No No Output to input — No — 9 Output to output — No — 9 9 V7-T9-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Accessories Description Unit SWD4-RC8-10 Resistor SWD4-8SF2-5 Plug SWD4-8SFF2-5 Coupling 9 SWD4-SF8-20 Bushing 9 General Standards 9 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.91 x 1.36 x 0.34 (48.5 x 34.5 x 10) 0.59 x 1.44 x 0.69 (15 x 36.5 x 17.5) 1.91 x 1.36 x 0.34 (48.5 x 34.5 x 10) 0.94 x 1.02 x 6.34 (24 x 26 x 162) Weight lbs (g) 0.022 (10) 0.012.1 (5.5) 0.010 (4.5) 0.044 (20) As required As required As required As required 9 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP67 9 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 — 9 Mounting position 9 Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Constant acceleration 1g Hz 9 Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 — Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Impacts 9 9 9 — Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) — — — Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) — — — 9 Overvoltage category II — — — 9 Pollution degree 2 — — — 9 9 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) kV 8 — — — Contact discharge (Level 2) kV 4 — — — V/m 10 — — — 9 Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 — — — 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 — — — EN 55011 Class A — — — Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) 9 9 9 Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) SmartWire-DT cables kV 1 — — — Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) V 10 — — — 9 °F (°C) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) 9 °F (°C) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) 5 –95 5 –95 5 –95 5 –95 9 SWD-In Plug, 8-pole Plug connector Plug, 8-pole — 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) Condensation Prevent with suitable measures Storage Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 9 Connection Options Number of insertion cycles >200 1 >200 — SWD-Out — Socket, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole Socket, 8-pole Number of insertion cycles — >200 >200 >500 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-27 9.1 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Accessories, continued Description Unit SWD4-SM8-20 Bushing SWD4-8FRF-10 Adapter SWD4-SFL8-20 Adapter SWD4-SML8-20 Adapter IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2; EN 50178 0.94 x 1.02 x 6.69 (24 x 26 x 170) 1.38 x 3.54 x 1.38 (35 x 90 x 35) 1.38 x 3.27 x 1.57 (35 x 83 x 40) 1.38 x 3.27 x 1.82 (35 x 83 x 46) General Standards Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) Weight lbs (g) Mounting position 0.050 (22.5) 0.093 (42) 0.110 (50) 0.110 (50) As required As required As required As required IP67 IP20 IP67 IP67 Ambient Conditions, Mechanical 9 9 9 9 9 Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Hz — 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Constant acceleration 1g Hz — 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 Impacts — 9 9 9 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) — — — — Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) — — — — Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Overvoltage category — — — — Pollution degree — — — — Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) kV — 8 8 8 Contact discharge (Level 2) kV — 4 4 4 Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz V/m — — 10 10 1.4–2 GHz V/m — — 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m — — 1 1 — — — — Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) — — — — SmartWire-DT cables Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) kV — — — — Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) V — — 10 10 °F (°C) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) –13° to 131° (–25° to 55°) Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) 9 Condensation Prevent with suitable measures 9 Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % Storage °F (°C) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) –40° to 158° (–40° to 70°) 5–95 5–95 5–95 5–95 SWD-In Plug, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole 9 Number of insertion cycles >500 >200 >200 >500 SWD-Out — Push in terminals Socket, 8-pole Plug, 8-pole 9 Number of insertion cycles — — >500 >200 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 Connection Options 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-28 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Contactor Modules Description Unit 9 DIL-SWD-32-001 DIL-SWD-32-002 PKE-SWD-32 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 60947 9 9 General Standards Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 1.77 x 1.50 x 3.0 (45 x 38 x 76) 1.77 x 1.50 x 3.0 (45 x 38 x 76) 1.77 x 1.50 x 3.0 (45 x 38 x 76) 9 Weight lbs (kg) 9 0.9 (0.04) 0.9 (0.04) 0.9 (0.04) Mounting on XTCE007–XTCE032 on XTCE007–XTCE032 — Mounting position as XTCE007–XTCE032 as XTCE007–XTCE032 — 9 IP20 IP20 — 9 9 Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Hz 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Constant acceleration 1g Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Impacts 9 9 9 Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 9 Overvoltage category II II II 9 Pollution degree 2 2 2 9 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) 9 Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) kV 8 8 8 Contact discharge (Level 2) kV 4 4 4 V/m 10 10 10 9 9 Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz 9 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 1 1 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A 9 kV 1 1 1 9 kV 1 1 1 V 10 10 10 °F (°C) –13° to 140° (–25° to 60°) –13° to 140° (–25° to 60°) –13° to 140° (–25° to 60°) Prevent with suitable measures Prevent with suitable measures Prevent with suitable measures Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) CAN/DP bus cable SmartWire-DT cables Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) 9 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) Condensation Storage °F (°C) –22° to 158° (–30° to 70°) –22° to 158° (–30° to 70°) –22° to 158° (–30° to 70°) Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 5–95 5–95 5–95 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-29 9.1 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Contactor Modules, continued Description Unit DIL-SWD-32-001 DIL-SWD-32-002 PKE-SWD-32 SmartWire-DT Network Station type SmartWire-DT station (mode) SmartWire-DT station (mode) SmartWire-DT (slave) Address allocation Automatic Automatic Automatic SmartWire-DT status LED Green/orange Green/orange Green/orange 8-pole Connections Plug 8-pole 8-pole Plug connectors External device plug SWD4-8SF2-5 External device plug SWD4-8SF2-5 External device plug SWD4-8SF2-5 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 Manual/automatic mode No Yes Yes 9 Setting — Rotary switch Rotary switch 9 Number 9 9 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) Mode Parameter 9 9 9 Connection Auxiliary Contact Rated voltage (Ue) 1 Vdc Input current at 1 signal, typical mA Potential isolation Cable length ft (m) 2 2 — 15 15 — 3 3 — No No — <9.2 (2.8) <9.2 (2.8) <9.2 (2.8) Push in terminals Push in terminals Push in terminals 9 Connection type 9 Solid mm2 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) 0.2–1.5 (AWG 24–16) Flexible with ferrule 2 mm2 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 0.25–1.5 9 9 Terminal Capacities Notes 1 Own supply. 2 Minimum length: 8 mm. 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-30 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Pilot Device Modules Description Unit M22-SWD-K11 M22-SWD-KC11 M22-SWD-LED-_ M22-SWD-LEDC-_ M22-SWD-K11-LED_ IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 General Standards 9 9 9 Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) 0.47 x 1.65 x 1.54 (12 x 42 x 39) 0.47 x 1.77x 1.46 (12 x 45 x 37) 0.39 x 1.65 x 1.77 (10 x 42 x 45) 0.39 x 1.77 x 1.65 (10 x 45 x 42) 0.47 x 1.65 x 1.77 (12 x 42 x 45) Weight lbs (g) 0.022 (10) 0.022 (10) 0.022 (10) 0.022 (10) 0.022 (10) As required As required As required As required As required 9 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 9 Hz 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 9 Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Impacts 9 9 9 9 9 Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 9 9 Mounting position Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Constant acceleration 1g 9 9 9 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Overvoltage category Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 kV 8 8 8 8 8 kV 4 4 4 4 4 9 9 Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) Contact discharge (Level 2) Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz 9 V/m 10 10 10 10 10 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 3 3 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 1 1 1 1 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A kV 2 2 2 2 2 kV 1 1 1 1 1 V 10 10 10 10 10 9 °F (°C) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) 9 9 Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) Supply cables SmartWire-DT cables Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) 9 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) Condensation 9 Prevent with suitable measures Storage °F (°C) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 9–95 9–95 9–95 9–95 9–95 9 SmartWire-DT Network Station type 9 SmartWire-DT station (node) Address allocation Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic SmartWire-DT status LED Green Green Green Green Green 9 9 Connections Plug 8-pole 8-pole 8-pole 8-pole 8-pole SWD4-8SF2-5 M22-SWD-I_LP SWD4-8SF2-5 M22-SWD-I_LP SWD4-8SF2-5 Number of insertion cycles >50 >50 >50 >50 >50 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 Plug connectors 9 Function Element Contacts 1 changeover contact 1 changeover contact — — 1 changeover contact Lifespan mechanical/electrical (operations) 1 x 106 1 x 106 — — 1 x 106 LED display No No Yes Yes Yes Diagnostics Yes Yes No No Yes Mounting Front mount Base mount Front mount Base mount Front mount 9 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-31 9.1 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Pilot Device Modules, continued Description Unit M22-SWD-K11LEDC-_ M22-SWD-K22 M22-SWD-KC22 M22-SWD-K22-LED_ M22-SWD-K22LEDC-_ IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 IEC/EN 61131-2 EN 50178 0.47 x 1.77 x 1.65 (12 x 45 x 42) 0.67 x 1.65 x 1.54 (17 x 42 x 39) 0.67 x 1.77 x 1.46 (17 x 45 x 37) 0.67 x 1.65 x 1.77 (17 x 42 x 45) 0.67 x 1.77 x 1.65 (17 x 45 x 42) General Standards Dimensions (W x H x D) in (mm) Weight lbs (g) 0.022 (10) 0.030 (14) 0.030 (14) 0.030 (14) 0.030 (14) As required As required As required As required As required IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 Hz 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 5–8.4 Hz 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 8.4–150 Impacts 9 9 9 9 9 Mounting position Ambient Conditions, Mechanical Degree of protection (IEC/EN 60529) Vibrations (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Constant amplitude 3.5 mm Constant acceleration 1g Mechanical shock resistance (IEC/EN 60068-2-27) semi-sinusoidal 15g/11 ms Drop to IEC/EN 60068-2-31 (drop height) in (mm) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) 1.97 (50) Free fall, packaged (IEC/EN 60068-2-32) ft (m) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) 1.0 (0.3) Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Overvoltage category Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Pollution degree 2 2 2 2 2 Electrostatic discharge (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) Air discharge (Level 3) Contact discharge (Level 2) Electromagnetic fields (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008) 80–1000 MHz kV 8 8 8 8 8 kV 4 4 4 4 4 V/m 10 10 10 10 10 1.4–2 GHz V/m 3 3 3 3 3 2–2.7 GHz V/m 1 1 1 1 1 EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A EN 55011 Class A Radio interference suppression (SmartWire-DT) Burst (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) Supply cables SmartWire-DT cables kV 2 2 2 2 2 kV 1 1 1 1 1 V 10 10 10 10 10 °F (°C) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) –22° to 131° (–30° to 55°) 9 Radiated RFI (IEC/EN 61131-2:2008, Level 3) 9 Operating ambient temperature (IEC 60068-2) 9 Storage °F (°C) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) –40° to 176° (–40° to 80°) Relative humidity, non-condensing (IEC/EN 60068-2-30) % 9–95 5–95 5–95 5–95 5–95 Address allocation Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic Automatic 9 SmartWire-DT status LED Green Green Green Green Green 9 Connections Plug 8-pole 9 9 Climatic Environmental Conditions Condensation Prevent with suitable measures SmartWire-DT Network Station type SmartWire-DT station (node) Plug connectors 8-pole 8-pole 8-pole 8-pole M22-SWD-I_LP SWD4-8SF2-5 M22-SWD-I_LP SWD4-8SF2-5 M22-SWD-I_LP 9 Number of insertion cycles >50 >50 >50 >50 >50 9 Current consumption (15V SWD supply) See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 See Page V7-T9-33 Function Element 9 Contacts 1 contact 2 contacts 2 contacts 2 contacts 2 contacts Lifespan mechanical/electrical (operations) 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 1 x 106 9 LED display Yes No No Yes Yes Diagnostics Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Mounting Base mount Front mount Base mount Front mount Base mount 9 V7-T9-32 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Current Consumption Ratings 9 Power Consumption/Current Consumption 24 Vdc Control Voltage UAUX Description 9 Unit DIL-SWD-32-_ For XTCE007–XTCE009 W 3 For XTCE012–XTCE015 W 4,5 For XTCE018–XTCE032 W 12 9 For XTCE007–XTCE009 mA 125 9 For XTCE012–XTCE015 mA 188 For XTCE018–XTCE032 mA 500 For XTCE007–XTCE009 W 3 For XTCE012–XTCE015 W 4,5 For XTCE018–XTCE032 W 0,5 For XTCE007–XTCE009 mA 125 For XTCE012–XTCE015 mA 188 For XTCE018–XTCE032 mA 21 9 Pick-Up Power 9 Pick-Up Current 9 9 Holding Power 9 9 Holding Current 9 9 9 Current Consumption 15 Vdc Supply Voltage Catalog Number Current Consumption (mA) Catalog Number Current Consumption (mA) DIL-SWD-32-001 40 M22-SWD-K22 7 DIL-SWD-32-002 40 M22-SWD-K22LED-B 19 EU5E-SWD-4D2R 45 M22-SWD-K22LED-G 19 EU5E-SWD-4D4D 45 M22-SWD-K22LED-R 19 EU5E-SWD-8DX 12 M22-SWD-K22LED-W 19 M22-SWD-I1-LP01 1 17 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-B 19 M22-SWD-I2-LP01 1 17 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-G 19 M22-SWD-I3-LP01 1 17 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-R 19 M22-SWD-I4-LP01 1 17 M22-SWD-K22LEDC-W 19 M22-SWD-I6-LP01 1 17 M22-SWD-KC11 7 M22-SWD-K11 7 M22-SWD-KC22 7 M22-SWD-K11LED-B 19 M22-SWD-LED-B 19 M22-SWD-K11LED-G 19 M22-SWD-LED-G 19 M22-SWD-K11LED-R 19 M22-SWD-LED-R 19 M22-SWD-K11LED-W 19 M22-SWD-LED-W 19 M22-SWD-K11LEDC-B 19 M22-SWD-LEDC-B 19 M22-SWD-K11LEDC-G 19 M22-SWD-LEDC-G 19 M22-SWD-K11LEDC-R 19 M22-SWD-LEDC-R 19 M22-SWD-K11LEDC-W 19 M22-SWD-LEDC-W 19 SWD4-RC8-10 17 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 Note 1 With terminating resistor switched on. 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-33 9.1 9 Dimensions 9 Gateways 9 EU5C-SWD_ Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 4.80 (122.0) 9 9 Powerfeed Modules EU5C-SWD-PF_ 9 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 9 I/O Modules 9 EU5E-SWD_ 4.72 (120.0) 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 0.18 (4.5) 1.38 (35.0) 3.82 (97.0) 9 V7-T9-34 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com 9.1 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Terminating Resistor Coupling SWD4-RC8-10 SWD4-8SFF2-5 9 9 9 0.16 (4.0) 9 0.16 (4.0) 9 1.91 (48.4) 1.91 (48.4) 9 9 9 1.02 (25.9) 9 1.02 (25.9) 1.35 (34.3) 0.40 (10.2) 1.35 (34.3) 0.40 (10.2) 9 Enclosure Bushing Plug Enclosure Bushing Socket 9 SWD4-SM8-20 SWD4-SF8-20 9 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 Ø 0.94 (24.0) Ø 0.94 (24.0) 9 9 0.12 (3.0) 0.95 (24.0) 0.12 (3.0) 0.95 (24.0) 5.67 (144.0) 9 5.95 (151.0) 0.50 (12.5) 0.47 (12.0) Cabinet Cable Adapter Plug Cabinet Cable Adapter Socket SWD4-SML8-20 SWD4-SFL8-20 M18 x 0.75 9 9 9 9 M18 x 0.75 0.55 (14.0) 0.55 (14.0) 9 9 3.24 (82.4) 3.24 (82.4) 0.16 (4.0) 9 0.16 (4.0) 9 9 9 1.38 (35.0) 0.83 (21.0) 1.38 (35.0) 9 0.83 (21.0) 9 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-35 9.1 9 9 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Panel Cable Adapter SWD4-8FRF-10 9 9 9 3.54 (90.0) 9 9 9 9 1.38 (35.0) 0.91 (23.2) 9 1.42 (36.0) 9 9 Round Cable Socket Round Cable Plug SWD4-SF8-67 SWD4-SM8-67 9 M16 x 0.75 9 Ø 0.73 (18.5) 9 9 Ø 0.73 (18.5) 1.77 (45.0) 1.75 (44.5) 9 9 Right Angle Round Cable Socket Right Angle Round Cable Plug SWD4-SF8-67W SWD4-SM8-67W 9 9 9 Ø 0.71 (18.0) 1.47 (37.4) Ø 0.71 (18.0) 1.46 (37.1) 9 9 9 M16 x 0.75 M16 x 0.75 9 0.79 (20.0) 0.79 (20.0) 1.21 (30.8) 9 2.13 (54.0) 1.21 (30.8) 2.17 (55.0) 9 9 9 9 V7-T9-36 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring Solution 9.1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 9 Contactor Modules 9 DIL-SWD-32-001 and DIL-SWD-32-002 9 9 1.50 (38.0) 9 9 1.77 (45.0) 9 2.10 (53.1) 2.85 (72.3) 9 9 SmartWire-DT PKE Modules PKE-SWD-32 9 9 1.54 (39.0) 9 9 9 2.41 (61.1) 1.77 (45.0) 9 3.17 (80.6) Pilot Device Modules 9 M22-SWD-K_, M22-SWD-LED_ 9 9 9 1.73 (44.0) 9 9 1.18 (30.0) 2.52 (64.0) 9 Device Plug 9 SWD4-8SF2-5 9 1.18 (30.0) 9 0.68 (17.2) 0.50 (12.8) 9 9 0.59 (14.9) 1.43 (36.4) 9 9 9 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-T9-37 Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Contents Eaton Terms & Conditions Description Page Terms and Conditions of Sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A1-1 V7-A1-2 V7-A1-3 V7-A1-3 Selling Policy (Supersedes Selling Policy 25-000, dated February 20, 2006) Terms and Conditions of Sale The Terms and Conditions of Sale set forth herein, and any supplements which may be attached hereto, constitute the full and final expression of the contract for the sale of products or services (hereinafter referred to as Product(s) or Services by Eaton Corporation (hereinafter referred to as Seller) to the Buyer, and supersedes all prior quotations, purchase orders, correspondence or communications whether written or oral between the Seller and the Buyer. Notwithstanding any contrary language in the Buyer’s purchase order, correspondence or other form of acknowledgment, Buyer shall be bound by these Terms and Conditions of Sale when it sends a purchase order or otherwise indicates acceptance of this contract, or when it accepts delivery from Seller of the Products or Services. THE CONTRACT FOR SALE OF THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE STATED HEREIN. ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT TERMS PROPOSED BY BUYER ARE REJECTED UNLESS EXPRESSLY AGREED TO IN WRITING BY SELLER. No contract shall exist except as herein provided. Complete Agreement No amendment or modification hereto nor any statement, representation or warranty not contained herein shall be binding on the Seller unless made in writing by an authorized representative of the Seller. Prior dealings, usage of the trade or a course of performance shall not be relevant to determine the meaning of this contract even though the accepting or acquiescing party had knowledge of the nature of the performance and opportunity for objection. Quotations Written quotations are valid for 30 days from its date unless otherwise stated in the quotation or terminated sooner by notice. Verbal quotations, unless accepted, expire the same day they are made. A complete signed order must be received by Seller within 20 calendar days of notification of award, otherwise the price and shipment will be subject to re-negotiation. Termination and Cancellation Any order may be terminated by the Buyer only by written notice and upon payment of reasonable termination charges, including all costs plus profit. Seller shall have the right to cancel any order at any time by written notice if Buyer breaches any of the terms hereof, becomes the subject of any proceeding under state or federal law for the relief of debtors, or otherwise becomes insolvent or bankrupt, generally does not pay its debts as they become due or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A1-1 Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Prices All prices are subject to change without notice. In the event of a price change, the effective date of the change will be the date of the new price or discount sheet, letter or telegram. All quotations made or orders accepted after the effective date will be on the new basis. For existing orders, the price of the unshipped portion of an order will be the price in effect at time of shipment. Price Policy—Products and Services When prices are quoted as firm for quoted shipment, they are firm provided the following conditions are met: 1. The order is released with complete engineering details. 2. Shipment of Products are made, and Services purchased are provided within the quoted lead time. 3. When drawings for approval are required for any Products, the drawings applicable to those Products must be returned within 30* calendar days from the date of the original mailing of the drawings by Seller. The return drawings must be released for manufacture and shipment and must be marked “APPROVED” or “APPROVED AS NOTED.” Drawing re-submittals which are required for any other reason than to correct Seller errors will not extend the 30-day period. If the Buyer initiates or in any way causes delays in shipment, provision of Services or return of approval drawings beyond the periods stated above, the price of the Products or Services will be increased 1% per month or fraction thereof up to a maximum of 18 months from the date of the Buyer’s order. For delays resulting in shipment or provision of Services beyond 18 months from the date of the Buyer’s order, the price must be renegotiated. Price Policy—BLS Refer to Price Policy 25-050. Minimum Billing Orders less than $1,000 will be assessed a shipping and handling charge of 5% of the price of the order, with a minimum charge of $25.00 unless noted differently on Product discount sheets. Taxes The price does not include any taxes. Buyer shall be responsible for the payment of all taxes applicable to, or arising from the transaction, the Products, its sale, value, or use, or any Services performed in connection therewith regardless of the person or entity actually taxed. Terms of Payment Products Acceptance of all orders is subject to the Buyer meeting Seller’s credit requirements. Terms of payment are subject to change for failure to meet such requirements. Seller reserves the right at any time to demand full or partial payment before proceeding with a contract of sale as a result of changes in the financial condition of the Buyer. Terms of Payment are either Net 30 days from the date of invoice of each shipment or carry a cash discount based on Product type. Specific payment terms for Products are outlined in the applicable Product discount schedules. Services Terms of payment are net within 30 days from date of invoice for orders amounting to less than $50,000.00. Terms of payment for orders exceeding $50,000.00 shall be made according to the following: 1. Twenty percent (20%) of order value with the purchase order payable 30 days from date of invoice. 2. Eighty percent (80%) of order value in equal monthly payments over the performance period payable 30 days from date of invoice. Except for work performed (i) under a firm fixed price basis or (ii) pursuant to terms of a previously priced existing contract between Seller and Buyer, invoices for work performed by Seller shall have added and noted on each invoice a charge of 3% (over and above the price of the work) which is related to Seller compliance with present and proposed environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with prescribed requirements covering hazardous materials management and employee training, communications, personal protective equipment, documentation and record keeping associated therewith. Adequate Assurances If, in the judgment of Seller, the financial condition of the Buyer, at any time during the period of the contract, does not justify the terms of payment specified, Seller may require full or partial payment in advance. Delayed Payment If payments are not made in accordance with these terms, a service charge will, without prejudice to the right of Seller to immediate payment, be added in an amount equal to the lower of 1.5% per month or fraction thereof or the highest legal rate on the unpaid balance. * 60 days for orders through contractors to allow time for their review and approval before and after transmitting them to their customers. V7-A1-2 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Freight Warranty Freight policy will be listed on the Product discount sheets, or at option of Seller one of the following freight terms will be quoted. Risk of Loss Risk of loss or damage to the Products shall pass to Buyer at the F.O.B. point. F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and Invoiced Products are sold F.O.B. point of shipment freight prepaid and invoiced to the Buyer. Concealed Damage Except in the event of F.O.B. destination shipments, Seller will not participate in any settlement of claims for concealed damage. F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and Allowed Products sold are delivered F.O.B. point of shipment, freight prepaid and included in the price. F.O.B. Destination—Frt./Ppd. and Allowed At Buyer’s option, Seller will deliver the Products F.O.B. destination freight prepaid and 2% will be added to the net price. The term “freight prepaid” means that freight charges will be prepaid to the accessible common carrier delivery point nearest the destination for shipments within the United States and Puerto Rico unless noted differently on the Product discount sheets. For any other destination contact Seller’s representative. Shipment and Routing Seller shall select the point of origin of shipment, the method of transportation, the type of carrier equipment and the routing of the shipment. If the Buyer specifies a special method of transportation, type of carrier equipment, routing, or delivery requirement, Buyer shall pay all special freight and handling charges. When freight is included in the price, no allowance will be made in lieu of transportation if the Buyer accepts shipment at factory, warehouse, or freight station or otherwise supplies its own transportation. When shipment has been made on an F.O.B. destination basis, the Buyer must unpack immediately and, if damage is discovered must: 1. Not move the Products from the point of examination. 2. Retain shipping container and packing material. 3. Notify the carrier in writing of any apparent damage. 4. Notify Seller representative within 72 hours of delivery. 5. Send Seller a copy of the carrier’s inspection report. Witness Tests/Customer Inspection Standard factory tests may be witnessed by the Buyer at Seller’s factory for an additional charge calculated at the rate of $2,500 per day (not to exceed eight (8) hours) per Product type. Buyer may final inspect Products at the Seller’s factory for $500 per day per Product type. Witness tests will add one (1) week to the scheduled shipping date. Seller will notify Buyer fourteen (14) calendar days prior to scheduled witness testing or inspection. In the event Buyer is unable to attend, the Parties shall mutually agree on a rescheduled date. However, Seller reserves the right to deem the witness tests waived with the right to ship and invoice Products. Held Orders For any order held, delayed or rescheduled at the request of the Buyer, Seller may, at its sole option (1) require payment to be based on any reasonable basis, including but not limited to the contract price, and any additional expenses, or cost resulting from such a delay; (2) store Products at the sole cost and risk of loss of the Buyer; and/ or (3) charge to the Buyer those prices under the applicable price policy. Payment for such price, expenses and costs, in any such event, shall be due by Buyer within thirty (30) days from date of Seller’s invoice. Any order so held delayed or rescheduled beyond six (6) months will be treated as a Buyer termination. Warranty for Products Seller warrants that the Products manufactured by it will conform to Seller’s applicable specifications and be free from failure due to defects in workmanship and material for one (1) year from the date of installation of the Product or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment of the Product, whichever occurs first. Drawing Approval Seller will design the Products in line with, in Seller’s judgment, good commercial practice. If at drawing approval Buyer makes changes outside of the design as covered in their specifications, Seller will then be paid reasonable charges and allowed a commensurate delay in shipping date based on the changes made. Seller requires all nonconforming Products be returned at Seller’s expense for evaluation unless specifically stated otherwise in writing by Seller. Drawing Re-Submittal When Seller agrees to do so in its quotation, Seller shall provide Buyer with the first set of factory customer approval drawing(s) at Seller’s expense. The customer approval drawing(s) will be delivered at the quoted delivery date. If Buyer requests drawing changes or additions after the initial factory customer approval drawing(s) have been submitted by Seller, the Seller, at its option, may assess Buyer drawing charges. Factory customer approval drawing changes required due to misinterpretation by Seller will be at Seller’s expense. Approval drawings generated by Bid Manager are excluded from this provision. In the event any Product fails to comply with the foregoing warranty Seller will, at its option, either (a) repair or replace the defective Product, or defective part or component thereof, F.O.B. Seller’s facility freight prepaid, or (b) credit Buyer for the purchase price of the Product. All warranty claims shall be made in writing. This warranty does not cover failure or damage due to storage, installation, operation or maintenance not in conformance with Seller’s recommendations and industry standard practice or due to accident, misuse, abuse or negligence. This warranty does not cover reimbursement for labor, gaining access, removal, installation, temporary power or any other expenses, which may be incurred in connection with repair or replacement. This warranty does not apply to equipment not manufactured by Seller. Seller limits itself to extending the same warranty it receives from the supplier. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A1-3 Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Extended Warranty for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, the foregoing standard warranty for Products will be extended from the date of shipment for the period and price indicated below: ● ● ● 24 months—2% of Contract Price 30 months—3% of Contract Price 36 months—4% of Contract Price Special Warranty (In and Out) for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, Seller will, during the warranty period for Products, at an additional cost of 2% of the contract price, be responsible for the direct cost of: 1. Removing the Product from the installed location. 2. Transportation to the repair facility and return to the site. 3. Reinstallation on site. The total liability of Seller for this Special Warranty for Products is limited to 50% of the contract price of the particular Product being repaired and excludes expenses for removing adjacent apparatus, walls, piping, structures, temporary service, etc. V7-A1-4 Warranty for Services Seller warrants that the Services performed by it hereunder will be performed in accordance with generally accepted professional standards. The Services, which do not so conform, shall be corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the Buyer within one (1) year after completion of the Services. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, Seller assumes no responsibility with respect to the suitability of the Buyer’s, or its customer’s, equipment or with respect to any latent defects in equipment not supplied by Seller. This warranty does not cover damage to Buyer’s, or its customer’s, equipment, components or parts resulting in whole or in part from improper maintenance or operation or from their deteriorated condition. Buyer will, at its cost, provide Seller with unobstructed access to the defective Services, as well as adequate free working space in the immediate vicinity of the defective Services and such facilities and systems, including, without limitation, docks, cranes and utility disconnects and connects, as may be necessary in order that Seller may perform its warranty obligations. The conducting of any tests shall be mutually agreed upon and Seller shall be notified of, and may be present at, all tests that may be made. Warranty for Power Systems Studies Seller warrants that any power systems studies performed by it will conform to generally accepted professional standards. Any portion of the study, which does not so conform, shall be corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the Buyer within six (6) months after completion of the study. All warranty work shall be performed in a single shift straight time basis Monday through Friday. In the event that the study requires correction of warranty items on an overtime schedule, the premium portion of such overtime shall be for the Buyer’s account. Limitation on Warranties for Products, Services and Power Systems Studies THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE EXCEPT FOR WARRANTY OF TITLE. SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMITIES IN THE MANNER AND FOR THE PERIOD OF TIME PROVIDED ABOVE SHALL CONSTITUTE SELLER’S SOLE LIABILITY AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR FAILURE OF SELLER TO MEET ITS WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS, WHETHER CLAIMS OF THE BUYER ARE BASED IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), OR OTHERWISE. Asbestos Federal Law requires that building or facility owners identify the presence, location and quantity of asbestos containing material (hereinafter “ACM”) at work sites. Seller is not licensed to abate ACM. Accordingly, for any contract which includes the provision of Services, prior to (i) commencement of work at any site under a specific Purchase Order, (ii) a change in the work scope of any Purchase Order, the Buyer will certify that the work area associated with the Seller’s scope of work includes the handling of Class II ACM, including but not limited to generator wedges and high temperature gaskets which include asbestos materials. The Buyer shall, at its expense, conduct abatement should the removal, handling, modification or reinstallation, or some or all of them, of said Class II ACM be likely to generate airborne asbestos fibers; and should such abatement affect the cost of or time of performance of the work then Seller shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the schedule, price and other pertinent affected provisions of the contract. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation Seller’s Products are sold as commercial grade Products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes. Further certification will be required for use of the Products in any safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Returning Products Authorization and shipping instructions for the return of any Products must be obtained from Seller before returning the Products. When return is occasioned due to Seller error, full credit including all transportation charges will be allowed. Product Notices Buyer shall provide the user (including its employees) of the Products with all Seller supplied Product notices, warnings, instructions, recommendations, and similar materials. Force Majeure Seller shall not be liable for failure to perform or delay in performance due to fire, flood, strike or other labor difficulty, act of God, act of any governmental authority or of the Buyer, riot, embargo, fuel or energy shortage, car shortage, wrecks or delays in transportation, or due to any other cause beyond Seller’s reasonable control. In the event of delay in performance due to any such cause, the date of delivery or time for completion will be extended by a period of time reasonably necessary to overcome the effect of such delay. Liquidated Damages Contracts which include liquidated damage clauses for failure to meet shipping or job completion promises are not acceptable or binding on Seller, unless such clauses are specifically accepted in writing by an authorized representative of the Seller at its headquarters office. Patent Infringement Seller will defend or, at its option, settle any suit or proceeding brought against Buyer, or Buyer’s customers, to the extent it is based upon a claim that any Product or part thereof, manufactured by Seller or its subsidiaries and furnished hereunder, infringes any United States patent, other than a claim of infringement based upon use of a Product or part thereof in a process, provided Seller is notified in reasonable time and given authority, information and assistance (at Seller’s expense) for the defense of same. Seller shall pay all legal and court costs and expenses and courtassessed damages awarded therein against Buyer resulting from or incident to such suit or proceeding. In addition to the foregoing, if at any time Seller determines there is a substantial question of infringement of any United States patent, and the use of such Product is or may be enjoined, Seller may, at its option and expense: either (a) procure for Buyer the right to continue using and selling the Product; (b) replace the Product with non-infringing apparatus; (c) modify the Product so it becomes noninfringing; or (d) as a last resort, remove the Product and refund the purchase price, equitably adjusted for use and obsolescence. In no case does Seller agree to pay any recovery based upon its Buyer’s savings or profit through use of Seller’s Products whether the use be special or ordinary. The foregoing states the entire liability of Seller for patent infringement. The preceding paragraph does not apply to any claim of infringement based upon: (a) any modification made to a Product other than by Seller; (b) any design and/or specifications of Buyer to which a Product was manufactured; or (c) the use or combination of Product with other products where the Product does not itself infringe. As to the aboveidentified claim situations where the preceding paragraph does not apply, Buyer shall defend and hold Seller harmless in the same manner and to the extent as Seller’s obligations described in the preceding paragraph. Buyer shall be responsible for obtaining (at Buyer’s expense) all license rights required for Seller to be able to use software products in the possession of Buyer where such use is required in order to perform any Service for Buyer. With respect to a Product or part thereof not manufactured by Seller or its subsidiaries, Seller will attempt to obtain for Buyer, from the supplier(s), the patent indemnification protection normally provided by the supplier(s) to customers. Compliance with OSHA Seller offers no warranty and makes no representation that its Products comply with the provisions or standards of the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, or any regulation issued thereunder. In no event shall Seller be liable for any loss, damage, fines, penalty or expenses arising under said Act. Limitation of Liability THE REMEDIES OF THE BUYER SET FORTH IN THIS CONTRACT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE ITS SOLE REMEDIES FOR ANY FAILURE OF SELLER TO COMPLY WITH ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY PROVISION IN THIS CONTRACT TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER, LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF USE OF PRODUCTS, COST OF CAPITAL, CLAIMS OF CUSTOMERS OF THE BUYER OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH POTENTIAL DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE OR IF SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS CONTRACT WHETHER THE CLAIMS ARE BASED IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR SERVICES ON WHICH SUCH LIABILITY IS BASED. Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A1-5 Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index A D APP . . . . . . . . . . . AR . . . . . . . . . . . . ARA . . . . . . . . . . . ARC . . . . . . . . . . . ARD. . . . . . . . . . . ARM . . . . . . . . . . ARO. . . . . . . . . . . ARS . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-17 V7-T3-158 V7-T3-159 V7-T3-158 V7-T3-158, V7-T3-159 V7-T3-159 V7-T3-158 V7-T3-159 B BF . . . . . . . . . . . . BFD . . . . . . . . . . . BFM . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-152, V7-T3-153 V7-T3-152, V7-T3-153 V7-T3-154 C CE0 . . . . . . . . . . . CE1 . . . . . . . . . . . CE2 . . . . . . . . . . . CE3 . . . . . . . . . . . CE5 . . . . . . . . . . . CHCP. . . . . . . . . . CHD. . . . . . . . . . . CH16 . . . . . . . . . . C0 . . . . . . . . . . . . C00 . . . . . . . . . . . C01 . . . . . . . . . . . C02 . . . . . . . . . . . C03 . . . . . . . . . . . C05 . . . . . . . . . . . C07 . . . . . . . . . . . C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . C10 . . . . . . . . . . . C15 . . . . . . . . . . . C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . C22 . . . . . . . . . . . C22-L. . . . . . . . . . C22-P. . . . . . . . . . C22S . . . . . . . . . . C22S-W . . . . . . . . C22-W . . . . . . . . . C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . C320 . . . . . . . . . . C321 . . . . . . . . . . C350 . . . . . . . . . . C381 . . . . . . . . . . C383 . . . . . . . . . . C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-19, V7-T7-20 V7-T7-20 V7-T7-20 V7-T7-20 V7-T7-20 V7-T8-126 V7-T8-118 V7-T8-124 V7-T7-14 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-9, V7-T7-26 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-9 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-9 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-9 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-9 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-8 V7-T7-14 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-7 V7-T7-5–V7-T7-7 V7-T7-14 V7-T1-141–V7-T1-148 V7-T1-150 V7-T1-152, V7-T1-153 V7-T1-141–V7-T1-148 V7-T1-155–V7-T1-158 V7-T1-155–V7-T1-158 V7-T7-14 V7-T3-147, V7-T3-148 V7-T3-148 V7-T8-132 V7-T8-108, V7-T8-109 V7-T8-130 V7-T7-14 DIL-SWD . . . . . . D1PA . . . . . . . . . D1PF . . . . . . . . . D1PR . . . . . . . . . D15C . . . . . . . . . D2PA . . . . . . . . . D2PF . . . . . . . . . D2PJ . . . . . . . . . D2PR . . . . . . . . . D26 . . . . . . . . . . D26M. . . . . . . . . D3PA . . . . . . . . . D3PF . . . . . . . . . D3PJ . . . . . . . . . D3PR . . . . . . . . . D4PA . . . . . . . . . D4PR . . . . . . . . . D5PA . . . . . . . . . D5PF . . . . . . . . . D5PR . . . . . . . . . D65C . . . . . . . . . D7PA . . . . . . . . . D7PF . . . . . . . . . D7PR . . . . . . . . . D8PA . . . . . . . . . D8PR . . . . . . . . . D851 . . . . . . . . . D852 . . . . . . . . . D9PR . . . . . . . . . D93 . . . . . . . . . . D96 . . . . . . . . . . D99 . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-14 V7-T3-55 V7-T3-54 V7-T3-54 V7-T3-147 V7-T3-61 V7-T3-60 V7-T3-61, V7-T3-120 V7-T3-60 V7-T3-168, V7-T3-169 V7-T3-163–V7-T3-165 V7-T3-71, V7-T3-181, V7-T3-184, V7-T3-188, V7-T3-193 V7-T3-70 V7-T3-71, V7-T3-85, V7-T3-120 V7-T3-70 V7-T3-79 V7-T3-79 V7-T3-85, V7-T3-181 V7-T3-84 V7-T3-84, V7-T3-85 V7-T3-184, V7-T3-188, V7-T3-193 V7-T3-95 V7-T3-93 V7-T3-94 V7-T3-107 V7-T3-107 V7-T3-193 V7-T3-193 V7-T3-113 V7-T3-128 V7-T3-135 V7-T3-140 E EASY . . . . . . . . . EASY-LINK . . . . . EASY-NT . . . . . . EASYSOFT. . . . . ELC . . . . . . . . . . ELC-AC . . . . . . . ELC-ACC . . . . . . ELCB . . . . . . . . . ELC-BAT . . . . . . ELC-CB . . . . . . . ELC-HHP . . . . . . ELC-IO . . . . . . . . ELCM. . . . . . . . . ELC-PS. . . . . . . . ELCSOFT . . . . . . ELC-SP. . . . . . . . V7-T3-23, V7-T3-31, V7-T3-40, V7-T3-43, V7-T3-45 V7-T3-45 V7-T4-32 V7-T3-44 V7-T4-9–V7-T4-13, V7-T5-7–V7-T5-9, V7-T5-17, V7-T6-13 V7-T4-14 V7-T4-15 V7-T4-5 V7-T4-15 V7-T4-14 V7-T4-14 V7-T4-15 V7-T4-6, V7-T4-7 V7-T4-14 V7-T4-15 V7-T4-15 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A2-1 Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index ESR5 . . . . . . . . . . ES16 . . . . . . . . . . ES4P . . . . . . . . . . EU4A-RJ45 . . . . . EU5 . . . . . . . . . . . EZ . . . . . . . . . . . . E01 . . . . . . . . . . . E10 . . . . . . . . . . . E10E . . . . . . . . . . E10P . . . . . . . . . . E10T . . . . . . . . . . E22B . . . . . . . . . . E22C . . . . . . . . . . E22L . . . . . . . . . . E26B . . . . . . . . . . E26S . . . . . . . . . . E26X . . . . . . . . . . E29K . . . . . . . . . . E30A . . . . . . . . . . E30B . . . . . . . . . . E30C . . . . . . . . . . E30D . . . . . . . . . . E30E . . . . . . . . . . E30J . . . . . . . . . . E30K . . . . . . . . . . E34A . . . . . . . . . . E34C . . . . . . . . . . E34E . . . . . . . . . . E34EX . . . . . . . . . E34F . . . . . . . . . . E34G . . . . . . . . . . E34H . . . . . . . . . . E34J . . . . . . . . . . E34K . . . . . . . . . . E34L . . . . . . . . . . E34M. . . . . . . . . . E34N . . . . . . . . . . E34P . . . . . . . . . . E34R . . . . . . . . . . E34S . . . . . . . . . . E34T . . . . . . . . . . E34V . . . . . . . . . . E34X . . . . . . . . . . E8 . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A2-2 V7-T3-198 V7-T1-41 V7-T3-204 V7-T4-32 V7-T9-7 V7-T6-16 V7-T1-40 V7-T1-40 V7-T1-4, V7-T1-5, V7-T1-9 V7-T1-5 V7-T1-4, V7-T1-5, V7-T1-9 V7-T2-40 V7-T1-175, V7-T1-229, V7-T1-280 V7-T1-239, V7-T1-271, V7-T1-343 V7-T2-36, V7-T2-38, V7-T2-39 V7-T2-37, V7-T2-38, V7-T2-40 V7-T2-35 V7-T1-229 V7-T1-166, V7-T1-167 V7-T1-167 V7-T1-167 V7-T1-168 V7-T1-168 V7-T1-168 V7-T1-169–V7-T1-175, V7-T1-178, V7-T1-229 V7-T1-277, V7-T1-351 V7-T1-262, V7-T1-264, V7-T1-270, V7-T1-333, V7-T1-336, V7-T1-342 V7-T1-260, V7-T1-261, V7-T1-328 V7-T1-23, V7-T1-324, V7-T1-325, V7-T1-327, V7-T1-330, V7-T1-331, V7-T1-335–V7-T1-339, V7-T1-344, V7-T1-345 V7-T1-260, V7-T1-262, V7-T1-284, V7-T1-332, V7-T1-333 V7-T1-263–V7-T1-268, V7-T1-332, V7-T1-334, V7-T1-340 V7-T1-263, V7-T1-334 V7-T1-260, V7-T1-261, V7-T1-264, V7-T1-270, V7-T1-329, V7-T1-336, V7-T1-342 V7-T1-276, V7-T1-277, V7-T1-350, V7-T1-351 V7-T1-202, V7-T1-260, V7-T1-261, V7-T1-267, V7-T1-277, V7-T1-281, V7-T1-282, V7-T1-329, V7-T1-351 V7-T1-265, V7-T1-270, V7-T1-337, V7-T1-342 V7-T1-233, V7-T1-262, V7-T1-283, V7-T1-333, V7-T1-356 V7-T1-260, V7-T1-261, V7-T1-263, V7-T1-267, V7-T1-282, V7-T1-328 V7-T1-260, V7-T1-262, V7-T1-282, V7-T1-332, V7-T1-333 V7-T1-262, V7-T1-278, V7-T1-281, V7-T1-282, V7-T1-333, V7-T1-353 V7-T1-260, V7-T1-262, V7-T1-279, V7-T1-280, V7-T1-332, V7-T1-333 V7-T1-263, V7-T1-272, V7-T1-276, V7-T1-278, V7-T1-330, V7-T1-331, V7-T1-334, V7-T1-350, V7-T1-353 V7-T1-262, V7-T1-333 V7-T1-40 F FAK . . . . . . . . . . FSK . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-109, V7-T1-110 V7-T7-10, V7-T7-21 H HMI . . . . . . . . . . HMIVU . . . . . . . . HT8A . . . . . . . . . HT8B . . . . . . . . . HT8C . . . . . . . . . HT8D . . . . . . . . . HT8E . . . . . . . . . HT8F . . . . . . . . . HT8G . . . . . . . . . HT8H . . . . . . . . . HT8J . . . . . . . . . HT8L . . . . . . . . . HT8P . . . . . . . . . HT8R . . . . . . . . . HT8S . . . . . . . . . HT8W. . . . . . . . . HT8X . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-15–V7-T5-17 V7-T5-15 V7-T1-298, V7-T1-299, V7-T1-311, V7-T1-314 V7-T1-314, V7-T1-315 V7-T1-298, V7-T1-306, V7-T1-314 V7-T1-306, V7-T1-314 V7-T1-314 V7-T1-298, V7-T1-307, V7-T1-311 V7-T1-298, V7-T1-300–V7-T1-305, V7-T1-311 V7-T1-304, V7-T1-305 V7-T1-298, V7-T1-308, V7-T1-309 V7-T1-309, V7-T1-311–V7-T1-313, V7-T1-315 V7-T1-312 V7-T1-312 V7-T1-312, V7-T1-313 V7-T1-311 V7-T1-311 I ISH . . . . . . . . . . . I8 . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 V7-T1-40 L LEDWB . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 M MC . . . . . . . . . . . MFD. . . . . . . . . . MOD . . . . . . . . . M22-A . . . . . . . . M22-B . . . . . . . . M22-C . . . . . . . . M22-D . . . . . . . . M22-E . . . . . . . . M22-G . . . . . . . . M22G-X . . . . . . . M22-H . . . . . . . . M22-I . . . . . . . . . M22-K . . . . . . . . M22-L . . . . . . . . Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions V7-T8-113 V7-T3-35, V7-T3-44 V7-T3-55, V7-T3-61, V7-T3-71, V7-T3-85, V7-T3-95, V7-T3-117 V7-T1-106, V7-T1-108, V7-T1-112, V7-T1-117 V7-T1-117 V7-T1-16, V7-T1-55, V7-T1-57, V7-T1-59, V7-T1-61, V7-T1-65, V7-T1-67, V7-T1-69, V7-T1-71, V7-T1-77, V7-T1-83, V7-T1-87, V7-T1-91, V7-T1-95, V7-T1-97, V7-T1-101, V7-T1-103, V7-T1-105, V7-T1-110, V7-T1-112, V7-T1-113 V7-T1-51, V7-T1-53–V7-T1-71, V7-T1-94–V7-T1-97, V7-T1-99, V7-T1-100, V7-T1-103, V7-T1-107 V7-T1-77, V7-T1-91, V7-T1-116 V7-T1-117 V7-T1-77, V7-T1-117 V7-T1-116 V7-T1-116, V7-T1-117 V7-T1-55, V7-T1-57, V7-T1-59, V7-T1-61, V7-T1-65, V7-T1-67, V7-T1-69, V7-T1-71, V7-T1-77, V7-T1-83, V7-T1-87, V7-T1-91, V7-T1-95, V7-T1-97, V7-T1-101, V7-T1-103, V7-T1-105, V7-T1-110, V7-T1-112, V7-T1-117 V7-T1-51, V7-T1-65, V7-T1-67, V7-T1-69, V7-T1-71–V7-T1-73, V7-T1-77, V7-T1-87, V7-T1-101, V7-T1-112, V7-T1-113 CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index M22-M . . . . . . . . V7-T1-117 M22M-D . . . . . . . V7-T1-53–V7-T1-71, V7-T1-94–V7-T1-97 M22M-W. . . . . . . V7-T1-80–V7-T1-91 M22-P . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-51, V7-T1-75–V7-T1-77 M22-R . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106, V7-T1-107 M22S-B . . . . . . . . V7-T1-117 M22S-D . . . . . . . . V7-T1-53–V7-T1-71, V7-T1-94–V7-T1-97, V7-T1-99, V7-T1-100, V7-T1-103 M22S-R . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106, V7-T1-117 M22S-S . . . . . . . . V7-T1-114, V7-T1-115 M22S-T . . . . . . . . V7-T1-68 M22S-W . . . . . . . V7-T1-80–V7-T1-91, V7-T1-104 M22-SWD . . . . . . V7-T9-9, V7-T9-18, V7-T9-19 M22-T . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-68, V7-T1-117 M22-U . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-116 Q25A . . . . . . . . . Q25B . . . . . . . . . Q25D . . . . . . . . . Q25DR . . . . . . . . Q25LF . . . . . . . . Q25LH . . . . . . . . Q25LPV . . . . . . . Q25LT . . . . . . . . Q25LTR . . . . . . . Q25PV . . . . . . . . Q25S1 . . . . . . . . Q25S3 . . . . . . . . Q25S3R . . . . . . . Q25TS . . . . . . . . Q25WK . . . . . . . M22-W . . . . . . . . V7-T1-51, V7-T1-80–V7-T1-91, V7-T1-104 S M22-X . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-55, V7-T1-57, V7-T1-59, V7-T1-61, V7-T1-65, V7-T1-67, V7-T1-69, V7-T1-71, V7-T1-73, V7-T1-77, V7-T1-83, V7-T1-87, V7-T1-91, V7-T1-95, V7-T1-97, V7-T1-106, V7-T1-107, V7-T1-111–V7-T1-117 M22(S). . . . . . . . . V7-T1-118 SFC . . . . . . . . . . SKF . . . . . . . . . . SL4-AP . . . . . . . . SL4-BL . . . . . . . . SL4-FL . . . . . . . . SL4-FMS . . . . . . SL4-L . . . . . . . . . SL4-PIB . . . . . . . SL4-SWD . . . . . . SL4-100 . . . . . . . SL7-AP . . . . . . . . SL7-BL . . . . . . . . SL7-CB. . . . . . . . SL7-FL . . . . . . . . SL7-FMS . . . . . . SL7-L . . . . . . . . . SL7-SWD . . . . . . SL7-100 . . . . . . . SL7/4 . . . . . . . . . SQT . . . . . . . . . . SRA . . . . . . . . . . SRT . . . . . . . . . . SWD4 . . . . . . . . SW-GALILEO . . . SW-XSOFT. . . . . P PFC . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-55, V7-T3-61, V7-T3-95, V7-T3-121 PFK . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-10 PFP . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-55, V7-T3-61, V7-T3-71, V7-T3-85, V7-T3-95, V7-T3-107 PKE-SWD . . . . . . V7-T9-14 PMC . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-55, V7-T3-95, V7-T3-118, V7-T3-119 PQC. . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-61, V7-T3-71, V7-T3-85, V7-T3-95, V7-T3-118, V7-T3-119 PSG . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-4 PSS . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-9 PS2 . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-19 PWC . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-61, V7-T3-119 PWF . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-71, V7-T3-85, V7-T3-120 PYC . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-61, V7-T3-95, V7-T3-118 Q Q18B . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 V7-T1-40 V7-T1-32 V7-T1-32 V7-T1-34 V7-T1-34 V7-T1-35 V7-T1-33 V7-T1-33 V7-T1-35 V7-T1-38, V7-T1-39 V7-T1-38, V7-T1-39 V7-T1-39 V7-T1-41 V7-T1-36 V7-T7-10, V7-T7-21 V7-T3-45 V7-T2-16 V7-T2-15 V7-T2-15, V7-T2-16 V7-T2-18 V7-T2-14, V7-T2-16, V7-T2-19 V7-T2-17, V7-T2-18 V7-T2-18 V7-T2-14 V7-T2-9 V7-T2-7 V7-T2-10, V7-T2-11 V7-T2-7, V7-T2-8 V7-T2-11 V7-T2-6, V7-T2-8, V7-T2-19 V7-T2-11 V7-T2-6 V7-T2-19 V7-T1-41 V7-T1-40 V7-T1-41 V7-T9-8–V7-T9-10 V7-T5-35 V7-T4-33, V7-T4-53, V7-T4-57, V7-T5-36 V7-T1-40 Q18D. . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-32 T Q18DR . . . . . . . . V7-T1-32 Q18LF . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-34 Q18LH. . . . . . . . . V7-T1-34 TA . . . . . . . . . . . TB . . . . . . . . . . . TBAN . . . . . . . . . TBLP . . . . . . . . . TBP . . . . . . . . . . TJ . . . . . . . . . . . . TM . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP. . . . . . . . . TMR5 . . . . . . . . . TMR6 . . . . . . . . . TRF . . . . . . . . . . TRL . . . . . . . . . . TRN . . . . . . . . . . TRW. . . . . . . . . . Q18LT . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-33 Q18LTR . . . . . . . . V7-T1-33 Q18S1 . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-38, V7-T1-39 Q18S3 . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-38, V7-T1-39 Q18S3R. . . . . . . . V7-T1-38 Q18WK . . . . . . . . V7-T1-36 V7-T8-113 V7-T8-112, V7-T8-113, V7-T8-126, V7-T8-133 V7-T8-126 V7-T8-133 V7-T8-133 V7-T8-113 V7-T8-113 V7-T3-190 V7-T3-184 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-181 V7-T3-177 V7-T3-181 V7-T3-177 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A2-3 Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index V XBMP. . . . . . . . . V7-T8-56, V7-T8-101, V7-T8-104 VISUAL . . . . . . . . V7-T5-33 XBMR . . . . . . . . V7-T8-104 V-M20 . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-116, V7-T9-10 XBMU . . . . . . . . V7-T8-29, V7-T8-102 VS . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 XBMX. . . . . . . . . V7-T8-102 XBMZ. . . . . . . . . V7-T8-7, V7-T8-11, V7-T8-13, V7-T8-15, V7-T8-17, V7-T8-19, V7-T8-23, V7-T8-26, V7-T8-28, V7-T8-30, V7-T8-34, V7-T8-38, V7-T8-40, V7-T8-43, V7-T8-45, V7-T8-47, V7-T8-49, V7-T8-52, V7-T8-55, V7-T8-57, V7-T8-60, V7-T8-63, V7-T8-65, V7-T8-69, V7-T8-71, V7-T8-74, V7-T8-76, V7-T8-78, V7-T8-80, V7-T8-84, V7-T8-86, V7-T8-88, V7-T8-98, V7-T8-99, V7-T8-101 W WBG . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 WBLED . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 WMR. . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 WM63 . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 WRR . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 WR23 . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 WR26 . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 WR63 . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 WR66 . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 W23. . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 W26. . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 W63. . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-132 XBPU . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-54 V7-T8-132 XBQT . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-68, V7-T8-70, V7-T8-71, V7-T8-73, V7-T8-75, V7-T8-77 XBQU . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-79 XBTC . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-97 XBTD . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-97 XBTK . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-25 XBUK . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-22, V7-T8-25, V7-T8-27, V7-T8-84, V7-T8-86 XBUT . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-6, V7-T8-10, V7-T8-12, V7-T8-14, V7-T8-16, V7-T8-21, V7-T8-22, V7-T8-25 W66. . . . . . . . . . . X XBAC. . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-7, V7-T8-11, V7-T8-13, V7-T8-15, V7-T8-17, V7-T8-26, V7-T8-30, V7-T8-34, V7-T8-38, V7-T8-40, V7-T8-43, V7-T8-45, V7-T8-47, V7-T8-52, V7-T8-55, V7-T8-57, V7-T8-60, V7-T8-69, V7-T8-71, V7-T8-74, V7-T8-76, V7-T8-78, V7-T8-80 XBPC . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-25, V7-T8-51, V7-T8-77 XBPF . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-25, V7-T8-51, V7-T8-77 XBPT . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-33, V7-T8-37, V7-T8-39, V7-T8-40, V7-T8-42, V7-T8-44, V7-T8-46, V7-T8-48, V7-T8-49, V7-T8-51, V7-T8-59, V7-T8-84, V7-T8-88 XBAD. . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-26 XBAE . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-19, V7-T8-28, V7-T8-91 XB3U . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-18, V7-T8-19 XBAF . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-7, V7-T8-11, V7-T8-13, V7-T8-15, V7-T8-17, V7-T8-23, V7-T8-26, V7-T8-28, V7-T8-30, V7-T8-34, V7-T8-38, V7-T8-40, V7-T8-45, V7-T8-47, V7-T8-49, V7-T8-52, V7-T8-55, V7-T8-57, V7-T8-60, V7-T8-63, V7-T8-69, V7-T8-71, V7-T8-74, V7-T8-76, V7-T8-78, V7-T8-80, V7-T8-94 XC-CPU . . . . . . . V7-T4-28, V7-T4-29 XIO . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-28 XIOC . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-29–V7-T4-32 XN . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-68–V7-T4-74 XN-ANBZ . . . . . . V7-T4-75 XNE . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-66, V7-T4-67 XBAN. . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-148, V7-T8-92, V7-T8-93 XN-KO . . . . . . . . V7-T4-75 XBAP . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-62–V7-T8-66, V7-T8-104 XN-LABEL . . . . . V7-T4-75 XBAR. . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-8, V7-T8-35 XN-PS. . . . . . . . . V7-T4-75 XBAS . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-13, V7-T8-15, V7-T8-40, V7-T8-43, V7-T8-60, V7-T8-71, V7-T8-78, V7-T8-80 XN-QV . . . . . . . . V7-T4-75 XN-WEW . . . . . . V7-T4-75 V7-T8-7, V7-T8-11, V7-T8-13, V7-T8-15, V7-T8-17, V7-T8-26, V7-T8-30, V7-T8-34, V7-T8-40, V7-T8-45, V7-T8-47, V7-T8-49, V7-T8-52, V7-T8-55, V7-T8-57, V7-T8-60, V7-T8-65, V7-T8-69, V7-T8-71, V7-T8-74, V7-T8-76, V7-T8-78, V7-T8-80, V7-T8-83, V7-T8-88, V7-T8-105 XP-702 . . . . . . . . V7-T5-29 XRA . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-18 XT-CAT. . . . . . . . V7-T4-32 V7-T8-17 XT-CPU . . . . . . . V7-T4-32 XBGB. . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-102 XT-FIL. . . . . . . . . V7-T4-32 XBMB . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-102 XT-MEM. . . . . . . V7-T4-31 XBMD . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-104 XT-RJ45 . . . . . . . V7-T4-32 XBMG . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-102 XT-SUB . . . . . . . V7-T4-32 XBMI . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-102, V7-T8-104 XV-10 . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-25 XBMK . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-101, V7-T8-102 XV-102 . . . . . . . . V7-T4-57, V7-T5-26 XBML . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-101 XV-152 . . . . . . . . V7-T4-57, V7-T5-25 XBAT . . . . . . . . . . XBDP . . . . . . . . . . V7-A2-4 XRP . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-5 XRR . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-5, V7-T3-13, V7-T3-16 XRU . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-5, V7-T3-13, V7-T3-16 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index Z 10250T5. . . . . . . ZB4 . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-45 Numerics 10250T6. . . . . . . 10250ED . . . . . . . V7-T1-18, V7-T1-19, V7-T1-188, V7-T1-190, V7-T1-191, V7-T1-197, V7-T1-199, V7-T1-204, V7-T1-207, V7-T1-212, V7-T1-226, V7-T1-228, V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-349 10250T7. . . . . . . 10250H . . . . . . . . V7-T1-18–V7-T1-20, V7-T1-23, V7-T1-27 10250T . . . . . . . . V7-T1-269 10250T8. . . . . . . 10250TA . . . . . . . V7-T1-189, V7-T1-190, V7-T1-217, V7-T1-225–V7-T1-229, V7-T1-240, V7-T1-279, V7-T1-280, V7-T1-288 10250T9. . . . . . . 10250TB . . . . . . . V7-T1-21, V7-T1-197, V7-T1-198, V7-T1-206, V7-T1-336, V7-T1-342 10250TC . . . . . . . V7-T1-195, V7-T1-200, V7-T1-206, V7-T1-213, V7-T1-330–V7-T1-332, V7-T1-334, V7-T1-337, V7-T1-342 10250TD . . . . . . . V7-T1-354 10250TE . . . . . . . V7-T1-215, V7-T1-230, V7-T1-278, V7-T1-281, V7-T1-352, V7-T1-353 10250TF . . . . . . . V7-T1-215, V7-T1-228, V7-T1-234, V7-T1-278, V7-T1-280, V7-T1-352, V7-T1-353 10250TG . . . . . . . V7-T1-21 10250TJ . . . . . . . V7-T1-197, V7-T1-198, V7-T1-206, V7-T1-218, V7-T1-232, V7-T1-336, V7-T1-342 10250TK . . . . . . . V7-T1-213, V7-T1-227 10250TL . . . . . . . V7-T1-213, V7-T1-230, V7-T1-232, V7-T1-281 10250TM. . . . . . . V7-T1-228, V7-T1-230–V7-T1-232, V7-T1-280 10250TN . . . . . . . V7-T1-232, V7-T1-233, V7-T1-283, V7-T1-356 10250TP . . . . . . . V7-T1-231, V7-T1-232 10250TR . . . . . . . V7-T1-231, V7-T1-232, V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 10250TS . . . . . . . V7-T1-213, V7-T1-230–V7-T1-232, V7-T1-234, V7-T1-281, V7-T1-284 10250T1 . . . . . . . V7-T1-17, V7-T1-187, V7-T1-188, V7-T1-193, V7-T1-194, V7-T1-198, V7-T1-201, V7-T1-204, V7-T1-211, V7-T1-212, V7-T1-218, V7-T1-236–V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-328, V7-T1-329, V7-T1-332, V7-T1-333, V7-T1-340, V7-T1-349, V7-T1-354 10250T2 . . . . . . . V7-T1-17, V7-T1-186, V7-T1-187, V7-T1-193, V7-T1-194, V7-T1-207, V7-T1-218–V7-T1-220, V7-T1-236–V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-332, V7-T1-333 10250T3 . . . . . . . V7-T1-17, V7-T1-21, V7-T1-186, V7-T1-187, V7-T1-192–V7-T1-194, V7-T1-202, V7-T1-212, V7-T1-216, V7-T1-220, V7-T1-236–V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-333, V7-T1-349 10250T4 . . . . . . . V7-T1-186, V7-T1-191, V7-T1-192, V7-T1-194, V7-T1-198, V7-T1-201, V7-T1-204, V7-T1-207, V7-T1-213, V7-T1-215–V7-T1-218, V7-T1-236–V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-333, V7-T1-340 11-11 . . . . . . . . . 11-16 . . . . . . . . . 11-20 . . . . . . . . . 11-21 . . . . . . . . . 11-45 . . . . . . . . . 11-46 . . . . . . . . . 11-54 . . . . . . . . . 11-57 . . . . . . . . . 11-95 . . . . . . . . . 15-15 . . . . . . . . . 15-18 . . . . . . . . . 15-19 . . . . . . . . . 16-MS . . . . . . . . 16-15 . . . . . . . . . 16-19 . . . . . . . . . 16-20 . . . . . . . . . 16-34 . . . . . . . . . 17-16 . . . . . . . . . 17-19 . . . . . . . . . 24-50 . . . . . . . . . 24-65 . . . . . . . . . 25-18 . . . . . . . . . 28-10 . . . . . . . . . 28-15 . . . . . . . . . 28-22 . . . . . . . . . 28-30 . . . . . . . . . 28-37 . . . . . . . . . 28-49 . . . . . . . . . 28-51 . . . . . . . . . 28-88 . . . . . . . . . 28-90 . . . . . . . . . 28-94 . . . . . . . . . 29-37 . . . . . . . . . 30-44 . . . . . . . . . 32-25 . . . . . . . . . 32-80 . . . . . . . . . 35-15 . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-17, V7-T1-186, V7-T1-188, V7-T1-196, V7-T1-197, V7-T1-199, V7-T1-204, V7-T1-214, V7-T1-216, V7-T1-236–V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-328, V7-T1-340, V7-T1-352 V7-T1-205, V7-T1-214, V7-T1-236, V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-341, V7-T1-352 V7-T1-22, V7-T1-192, V7-T1-193, V7-T1-205, V7-T1-219, V7-T1-236–V7-T1-238, V7-T1-286, V7-T1-287, V7-T1-324–V7-T1-326, V7-T1-335, V7-T1-336, V7-T1-341, V7-T1-344, V7-T1-345 V7-T1-205, V7-T1-330, V7-T1-331, V7-T1-337–V7-T1-339, V7-T1-341 V7-T1-198, V7-T1-201, V7-T1-204, V7-T1-205, V7-T1-340, V7-T1-341 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-26, V7-T1-27, V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-40 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-179, V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287 V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287 V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287 V7-T1-27, V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287 V7-T1-239, V7-T1-287 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-179 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A2-5 Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index 41-78 . . . . . . . . . . 42-26 . . . . . . . . . . 49-34 . . . . . . . . . . 49-35 . . . . . . . . . . 4977 . . . . . . . . . . 52-11 . . . . . . . . . . 52-12 . . . . . . . . . . 52-91 . . . . . . . . . . 53-11 . . . . . . . . . . 53-12 . . . . . . . . . . 53-13 . . . . . . . . . . 53-31 . . . . . . . . . . 54-12 . . . . . . . . . . V7-A2-6 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-26 V7-T3-154 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-240 54-71 . . . . . . . . . 54-72 . . . . . . . . . 56-10 . . . . . . . . . 56-93 . . . . . . . . . 57-25 . . . . . . . . . 69-25 . . . . . . . . . 73-13 . . . . . . . . . 79-66 . . . . . . . . . 80-55 . . . . . . . . . 86-25 . . . . . . . . . 86-35 . . . . . . . . . 911-3 . . . . . . . . . 9575. . . . . . . . . . Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions V7-T1-240 V7-T1-240 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-227 V7-T1-179 V7-T1-26 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-26, V7-T1-27 V7-T1-240, V7-T1-288 V7-T1-26, V7-T1-27 V7-T1-27 V7-T1-27 V7-T3-123 CA08100008E—March 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index A Accessories ELC Series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-14 M22 and Commercial Control Stations . . V7-T1-111–V7-T1-117 Power Distribution Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-126 Pushbutton Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-111–V7-T1-117 M22 and Commercial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-23 Pushbuttons 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-225–V7-T1-229 E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-175 E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-279 HT800 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight. . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-311 RMQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 SmartWire-DT Panel Wiring System . . . . . . . V7-T9-8–V7-T9-10 Stacklights SL7 and SL4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-19 Toggle Switches E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5 XB Series Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-90–V7-T8-105 DIN Rails. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-92 End Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-91 Ferrules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-94 Hand Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-97 Marking Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-98–V7-T8-104 Mounting Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-93 Plates, Covers and Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-105 Software, EMARK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-104 Testing Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-105 XC Series PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-31 XI/ON Series I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-75 XV Series HMI-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-53, V7-T4-57 Acoustic Devices Buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106 Complete Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106 ASi Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-108 B Bulkhead Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-107 Button Plates RMQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-42 C CE Marked Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-18 Commercial Control Stations 10250H Series Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-20, V7-T1-21 Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . V7-T1-22 Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant . . . V7-T1-23 Custom Assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-24 General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-18 Key Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-17 Special Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-19 Connectivity Solutions SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-1 Control Relays and Timers Alternating Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-192 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-3 EZ Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-19–V7-T3-48 General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . V7-T3-49–V7-T3-121 Machine Tool Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-145–V7-T3-170 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-2 Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-126–V7-T3-144 Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-171–V7-T3-191 XR Series Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-3–V7-T3-18 Control Station Components, M22 Acoustic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106 ASi Adapter Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-108 Bulkhead Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-107 Double Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-99 Emergency Stops, Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-76 Four-Way Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-103 Indicating Lights, Flush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-73 Joysticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-104 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Non-Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-95, V7-T1-97 Palm Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-109 Potentiometers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106 Pushbuttons Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-65, V7-T1-67, V7-T1-69, V7-T1-71 Non-Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-55, V7-T1-57, V7-T1-59, V7-T1-61 Selector Switches, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-85, V7-T1-86 Selector Switches, Key-Operated . . . . . . . . V7-T1-88–V7-T1-91 Selector Switches, Non-Illuminated . . . . . . V7-T1-81–V7-T1-83 Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-129 Through-the-Door Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-107 Control Stations—Assembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-14–V7-T1-131 D Double Pushbutton Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-99 Double Pushbuttons Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-98 Extended and Flush, Center Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-100 E E10 Hesitation Switches, Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5 Pushbuttons, Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5 Toggle Switches, General Purpose Toggles . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-4 E10E Econoswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9 Molded-In Screw Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9 Switch Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-9 EASY Programmable Relays EASY MFD (Multi-Function Displays) . . . . . . . . . . . . . EASY/MFD Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EASY/MFD Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . EASY/MFD Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EASY/MFD Power Supplies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EASY/MFD Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-33 V7-T3-43 V7-T3-40 V7-T3-30 V7-T3-43 V7-T3-43 easySafety Relays and Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-191–V7-T3-196 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A3-1 Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Eaton Terms & Conditions Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limitation of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms and Conditions of Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms of Payment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-A1-3 V7-A1-5 V7-A1-1 V7-A1-2 V7-A1-3 ELC Graphics Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-5 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-9 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-7 Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-5 Software and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-8 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-10 ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) . . . . . . . . V7-T4-12 ELC Distributed I/O Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-11 ELC Master Communication Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-10 ELC Modular PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-8 ELCB Brick Style PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-5 ELCM Modular Brick PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-6 Emergency Stop Components Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-76 Emergency Stops Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-74 Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-75, V7-T1-76 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-75, V7-T1-76 RMQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-35 F Four-Way Pushbutton Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-103 Four-Way Pushbuttons Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-102 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-128–V7-T8-134 C350 Series Fuse Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-131 C383 Series Fuse Holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-129 W Series Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-131 G Galileo Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-35 General Purpose Plug-In Relays Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-116–V7-T3-121 D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-55 D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-61 D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-71 D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-85 D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-95 D1PR/D1PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-53 D2PR/D2PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-58 D3PR/D3PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-68 D4 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-78 D5PR/D5PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-82 D7PR/D7PF Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-91 D8 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-106 D9 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-112 V7-A3-2 General Purpose Relays 9575H Series 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories Type AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type AA, AC and DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-122 V7-T3-123 V7-T3-122 V7-T3-122 Graphics Panels Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-9 H HMi Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-13 V7-T5-15 V7-T5-14 V7-T5-16 V7-T5-18 I IEC—XB Series Terminal Blocks IDC (Insulation Displacement Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-67–V7-T8-81 Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-82–V7-T8-89 Pluggable Spring Cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-58–V7-T8-66 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-2 Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-4–V7-T8-30 Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-31–V7-T8-57 Indicating Lights 10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations . . . . . . V7-T1-321–V7-T1-359 E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-332 HT800 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight . . . . V7-T1-296–V7-T1-317 M22, Flush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-72 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-72 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-73 Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-360 RMQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-34 Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-129 Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-2–V7-T7-26 CE Marked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-18 Type AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-25 Type MTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-4 Type MTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-13 J Joystick Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-104 Joysticks 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-216 M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-104, V7-T1-105 K Key-Operated Selector Switch Components . . . . V7-T1-88–V7-T1-91 Key-Operated Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-88–V7-T1-91 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-88 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index M M22 Assembled Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-16 Machine Tool Relays Accessories AR/ARD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D15 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AR/ARD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D15 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, 600 Vac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D26 Series—Type M, DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options AR/ARD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BF/BFD Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-159 V7-T3-148 V7-T3-157 V7-T3-151 V7-T3-146 V7-T3-162 V7-T3-167 V7-T3-159 V7-T3-154 Options 10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-354 Pushbuttons 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-230 E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-176–V7-T1-178 E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-281 HT800 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-312 Toggle Switches E10E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-8 P Mushroom Head Pushbutton Components Non-Illuminated Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-97 Momentary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-95 Palm Switches Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-109 Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-109 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-110 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-93 Non-Illuminated Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-96, V7-T1-97 Momentary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-94, V7-T1-95 Panel Wiring SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-1 Contactor Modules Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-13 Pilot Device Modules Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-16 System Components Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-4 System Overview Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-3 N NEMA Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-106–V7-T8-115 O Operator Components E30, Square Multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-169–V7-T1-173 Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-1 ELC Graphics Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-5–V7-T5-12 HMi Operator Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-13–V7-T5-20 Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-32 XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-28–V7-T5-31 XV and XP Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21–V7-T5-36 XV and XP Operator Interface with Visual Designer and XSoftCoDeSys-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-36 Operators 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-182–V7-T1-247 10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations . . . . . . V7-T1-321–V7-T1-359 E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-164–V7-T1-181 E30 Square Multifunction Components . V7-T1-169–V7-T1-173 E30, Square Multifunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-166 E30, Square Multifunction and Indicating Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-169–V7-T1-173 E30, Square Multifunction Components . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-174 E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-254–V7-T1-293 Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-129 PanelMate Operator Interface Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-2 PLC, I/O and Communication Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-1 ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-2–V7-T4-23 XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-24–V7-T4-51 XI/ON Series Remote I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-58–V7-T4-104 XV Series HMI-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-56, V7-T4-57 Potentiometers Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-106 Power Distribution Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-116–V7-T8-127 CH160 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-123 CHDB Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-117 Terminal Block Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-126 Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-1–V7-T6-20 ELC Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-12 EZ Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-15 PSG Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-3 PSS Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-8 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-18 Programmable Relays easy500/700/800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-20 easy802/806 with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-26 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A3-3 Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index Pushbutton Components, M22 Illuminated Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Illuminated Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-71 V7-T1-69 V7-T1-67 V7-T1-65 V7-T1-61 V7-T1-59 V7-T1-57 V7-T1-55 Pushbutton Control Stations Coding Adapter Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-118 Commercial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-17 10250H Series Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-20 10250T Series Heavy-Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-21 Class I Division 2 10250T Series Heavy-Duty. . . . . . V7-T1-22 Class I Division 2 E34 Series Corrosion Resistant . . V7-T1-23 General Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-18 Special Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-19 Custom Assembled. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-24 Pushbutton Control Stations—Assembled . . . . V7-T1-14–V7-T1-131 Pushbuttons 10250T Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-184, V7-T1-185 Point-of-Purchase Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-186 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-196–V7-T1-201 Indicating Light Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-193, V7-T1-194 Joystick Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-215–V7-T1-217 Key Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-211 Operators and Pushbutton Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-190 Potentiometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-202 Push-Pull Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-203 Roto-Push . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-219–V7-T1-224 Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-207 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-182–V7-T1-247 10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations . . . . . . V7-T1-321–V7-T1-359 E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-164–V7-T1-181 E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-254–V7-T1-293 HT800 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight . . . . V7-T1-296–V7-T1-317 Illuminated E34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-262 E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-330 HT800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-300 Key Operators, E34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-276 V7-A3-4 Pushbuttons, continued M22 Button Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-111 Double. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-98 Emergency Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-74 Four-Way. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-102 Illuminated Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-62 Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-70, V7-T1-71 Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-68, V7-T1-69 Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-66, V7-T1-67 Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-63–V7-T1-65 Key-Operated Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-88 Mushroom Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-92 Non-Illuminated Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-53 Extended, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-60, V7-T1-61 Extended, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-58, V7-T1-59 Flush, Maintained . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-56, V7-T1-57 Flush, Momentary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-53–V7-T1-55 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-48–V7-T1-51 Selector Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-78 Momentary Units E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-324 Non-Illuminated E34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-260 E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-328 HT800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-298 Push-Pull Units E34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-264 E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-335 HT800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-306 Ratings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-360 RMQ Button Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-42 Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-33 Non-Illuminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-32 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-31 Selector Switches E34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-272 E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-344 HT800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-308 Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-129 Pushbuttons and Indicating Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-1 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index R Relays and Timers easySafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-191–V7-T3-196 Renewal Parts M22 and Commercial Control Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-26 Replacement Parts Pushbuttons 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-239 E30 30.5 mm Square Multifunction Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-179 E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-287 HT800 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight. . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-315 Stacklights, E26 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-40 RMQ 16.22 mm Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-30–V7-T1-46 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-40 Stacklights E26 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-32 Assembled Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-35 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-38 LEDs—Cylindrical or Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-37 Light and Xenon Strobe Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-36 SL4 Series Acoustic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-16 Base Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-17, V7-T2-18 Complete Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-14 Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-12, V7-T2-13 Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-14–V7-T2-16 SL7 Series Acoustic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-9 Base Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-10, V7-T2-11 Complete Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-6 Component Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-4, V7-T2-5 Light Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T2-6–V7-T2-8 T S Selector Switch Components Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-85, V7-T1-86 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-81–V7-T1-83 Selector Switches 10250T 30.5 mm Heavy-Duty Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-182–V7-T1-247 10250T/E34 30.5 mm Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations . . . . . . V7-T1-321–V7-T1-359 E34 30.5 mm Corrosion Resistant Watertight/Oiltight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-254–V7-T1-293 HT800 30.5 mm Watertight/Oiltight . . . . V7-T1-296–V7-T1-317 M22 Catalog Number Selection Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-84 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-79 Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-85 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-80–V7-T1-83 Selector Switches, continued RMQ Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-37 Keyed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-38, V7-T1-39 Non-Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-36 Sensor Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T6-18 SmartWire-DT Contactor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-12 Pilot Device Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-15 System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-6 System Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-11 System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T9-2 Solid-State Relays Accessories D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D93 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D93, D96 and D99 Series Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D96 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D99 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-128 V7-T3-127 V7-T3-126 V7-T3-126 V7-T3-134 V7-T3-139 Terminal Blocks IDC (Insulation Displacement Connection) . V7-T8-67–V7-T8-81 Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-82–V7-T8-89 NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-106–V7-T8-115 C381 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-107 TB Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-111 Pluggable Spring Cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-58–V7-T8-66 Screw Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-4–V7-T8-30 Spring Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-31–V7-T8-57 Terminal Blocks, Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . V7-T8-1 Through-the-Door Operators Complete Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-107 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-107 Timing Relays Accessories TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR5 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMR6 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TMRP Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal TR Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-184 V7-T3-188 V7-T3-181 V7-T3-171 V7-T3-183 V7-T3-187 V7-T3-189 V7-T3-180 V7-T3-176 Toggle Switches E10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-2–V7-T1-7 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-5 E10E Environmentally Sealed . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-8–V7-T1-11 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T1-8 Transformers Industrial Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-1–V7-T7-26 Type AP Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-25 Type MTE Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-4 Type MTK Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T7-13 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com V7-A3-5 Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index V Visual Designer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-32 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-33 X XC Series Programmable Logic Controllers XC101 Modular PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC121 Compact PLC CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC121 I/O Expansion Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC201 Modular PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XC202 Modular PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-28 V7-T4-28 V7-T4-28 V7-T4-29 V7-T4-29 XI/ON Series Remote I/O Base Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-72 XN Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-68 XNE Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-66 XP Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-29 XP with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-28 Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-30 XR Series Terminal Block Relays Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-18 High Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-15 OptoCoupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-12 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T3-4 XSoft-CoDeSys-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21, V7-T5-36 Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-36 XV and XP Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21 XV and XP Operator Interface with Visual Designer Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-23 XV Operator Interface Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-25, V7-T5-26 XV Series HMI-PLCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T4-56 XV with Visual Designer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21 XV with Visual Designer or XSoft-CoDeSys Technical Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-27 XV with XSoft-CoDeSyS-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V7-T5-21 V7-A3-6 Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E—February 2014 www.eaton.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Author : Zoltun Design Create Date : 2014:02:24 12:11:06-06:00 Modify Date : 2014:07:31 10:06:38-05:00 Subject : Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions Has XFA : No XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:56:37 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.5.5 (Macintosh) Format : application/pdf Creator : Zoltun Design Title : Volume 7 ibook Description : Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions Creator Tool : PScript5.dll Version 5.2.2 Metadata Date : 2014:07:31 10:06:38-05:00 Document ID : uuid:9c23206c-a965-f445-88f6-36bff4e8b12e Instance ID : uuid:ee10a5db-bbae-cf4c-8278-f2322bb7f79e Page Count : 1004EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools